JP2018088985A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characteristic with display means with respect to game machines represented by a pinball game machine (a Pachinko machine), a sealing type game machine, and a rotary drum game machine (a slot machine).SOLUTION: A game machine is configured to have: a case in which a first display showing numbers in a display area HZ among display areas in display means 208L may be performed; upon operation of first operation means 136 in the state that the first display is performed, a case in which the first display shows a small number in accordance with the operation, or a case in which switching to a second display ("a big treat") in the first display mode occurs; and upon operation of the first operation means 136 in the state that the first display is performed, a case in which a first performance (jackpot determination notice performance where a logo accessory 224F changes to a seventh mode) associated with the second display in the first display mode is performed in accordance with operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 272

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed type game machine, and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

  In pachinko and other game machines, the game area of the game board is provided with an obstacle that changes in the direction of the falling of the game balls, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. It is common. When the game ball wins a prize, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 etc.).

  In addition, there are some game consoles provided with display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by display means.

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
The first operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is one of the effects of the advance effect (hereinafter referred to as "first effect"),
The first display may be displayed in a display area of the display areas of the display means.
The second display may be displayed in the certain display area, and
The first display is a display representing a number,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the number represented by the first display may be small according to the operation. Yes,
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second display in response to the operation. Yes,
The display mode of the second display is configured not to change according to the operation even if the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the second display is displayed.
The second display is a display provided with a plurality of display modes,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be executed in response to the operation,
The second display of the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area.
The first preliminary display is a display associated with the first effect,
In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in a final display,
It is characterized by

  According to the present invention, a game console characterized by display means can be realized.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning a 1st embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for 1st drawing and 2nd drawing. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part image control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st structural example of the rendering apparatus 206, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd structural example of the rendering apparatus 206. FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 in stages. It is a figure which shows sequentially the example of an effect shown in FIG. 17 in steps. It is a figure shown gradually about another example of an effect shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example of timer announcement production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which used the chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure showing gradually another example of the production which used a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the aspect of a change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure showing the other example of button production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is a figure showing gradually about other production examples of timer notice production. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine 100 concerning a 2nd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the same pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure showing an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the presentation which tangled the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which tangled the operation means A, and the effect which tangled the operation means B. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which tangled the operation means. It is a figure showing an example of meter production in steps. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 62 in stages. It is a figure showing an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is carried out in stages. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 64 in stages. It is a figure showing the modification of the production by change ball icon cI explained using Drawing 64 in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure showing gradually an example of rank up production which tells whether meter display changes. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank up effect shown in FIG. 68 step by step. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank up effect shown in FIG. 69 step by step. FIG. 70 (c) shows in stages the example of the re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 70 (41). It is a figure showing gradually an example of a mini game which tells whether a meter display appears. It is a figure showing an example in which a big hit is decided by the change concerned when a meter display is full, between the steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which a meter display is displayed in a reservation frame. It is a figure showing gradually an example of acquiring and stocking a mini item when a meter of meter indication is full. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which a plurality of items are stocked by one full tank of meter indication. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which a meter display of a full state may carry over to the next symbol variation display. It is a figure showing gradually an example where it is digested without being stocked even if a meter display becomes full and an item appears. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both disappear. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one disappears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 80 in steps. FIG. 8 is a view showing in stages the example in which the display is started with the incremental type meter display being accumulated halfway; It is a figure showing gradually an example of meter production by a meter display which shows a numerical value. FIG. 83 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 83 changes according to the operation of the operation means. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect different from meter effect explained so far. It is a figure showing gradually an example when an error occurs during display of meter display. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 86 in a step-by-step manner. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 3rd embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. (A) is a flowchart of processing at power-on of the main control unit, (b) is a flowchart of return activation processing, and (c) is a flowchart of initial activation processing. It is a flowchart of main control part main loop processing. It is a flowchart of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of a special drawing related lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart of a special drawing per lottery process. It is a flowchart of a process during symbol variation. It is a flowchart of special figure display decision weight processing. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric power officer release process. It is a flow chart of a special electric wire operating process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power person control process. (A) is a figure explaining the content of a special electric power combination operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of a special electric power combination operation data table. It is a flow chart of a special-effects player residual ball detection process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power combination operation end process. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for 1st drawing and 2nd drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is the 2nd sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part image control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st structural example of the rendering apparatus 206, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd structural example of the rendering apparatus 206. FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 117 in stages. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 step by step. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 119 step by step. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state which is not using member service. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume control window, and a brightness control window from a demonstration screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 124. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of a model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation which used the fluctuation | variation icon. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 133. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing another modified example of the example shown in FIG. 133. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change production | presentation of the pending | holding icon by the navigation character YM, and the change production | generation of a fluctuation icon. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 136 and modified examples. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which a pending | holding frame becomes invisible temporarily. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation which several navi characters YM appear in the presentation icon display area DIS. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a modification etc. shown in FIG. 139. An example of an effect in which an effect of a button hold icon is associated with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which has a period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which has another period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight pending icons are displayed. The example of an effect which entangled the decorative symbol of a common figure on the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example in which a change advance notice display is on standby display. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation using the holding frame different from the holding frame demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example in which icon I1 of the treasure box used as an icon of a change alerting | reporting alert | reporting until now appears as a pending | holding icon. An example of an effect in which a meter effect is involved in the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. An example of an effect in which a telop effect is involved in the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the presentation apparatus 206 shown to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a view showing an example of another effect obtained by entwining the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a view showing an example of still another effect obtained by entanglement of the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the presentation apparatus 206 by which the 2nd display apparatus was provided under the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 (1st display apparatus). It is a figure which shows an example in case other presentation is performed during execution of the presentation selected by the player. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 157. It is the table | surface which put together about the music which can be output from the speaker 120. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection demonstrated using FIG. 159 is performed. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 160. It is a figure which shows an example of the presentation by the presentation apparatus 206 shown to FIG. 115 (b). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the holding frame which the player selected is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in the pachinko machine set to setting in auto button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the overlap relation of the display of the bulb | ball removal notification alert | reported by generation | occurrence | production of a counter-full tank error, and the other display of each of the brightness adjustment window BW. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of ball removal alerting | reporting. It is a figure which shows the example by which several types of error displays are displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the delivery control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure showing various notice icons and various notice displays. It is a figure which shows the icon for mini games. It is a figure which shows a pending | holding icon and a fluctuation icon. FIG. 17 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which a notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using the stock notice icon and the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 in stages and a diagram showing a modification of the effect example. FIG. 180 is a view showing third to sixth modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 180 (A1) to FIG. 181 (A40). FIG. 180 shows seventh to tenth modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 180 (A 1) to 181 (A 40). FIG. 180 is a view showing another modified example of the effect example of FIG. 180 (A1) to FIG. 181 (A40). A plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using a plurality of stock notice icons, and the display mode of the change icon changes in stages. FIG. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 185 and an effect example of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition advance notice. It is a figure showing in a stepwise manner the continuation of the example of a production of the mini game A of the advance notice of Yoshimune treasure acquisition. FIG. 186 is a view showing the middle of the first to third modified examples of the effect example of FIGS. 186 (1) to 187 (38). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 3rd modification of the presentation example of FIG. 186 (c1)-FIG. 187 (c) 38, and the middle of 4th modification-a 5th modification. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing the continuation of the fifth modification example of the effect example of FIGS. 186 (187) to (187) and the example of the effect promoted by the stocked advance notice icon YI. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a production | presentation which the notice icon YI stocked promotes, and the modification of the example of a production | presentation. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which notice display YH of a button appears from notice icon YI in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the frequency | count of execution of a button effect is stocked in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of an effect in which the frequency | count of execution of a button effect is stocked, and the other example of an effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation in which the notice display YH discharge | released from the notice icon YI is known before discharge. It is a figure showing gradually an example of a production which uses one notice icon making stock in multiple times. It is a figure which shows the continuation and the example of other production | presentation of the example in which the same kind of notice display YH is discharge | released multiple times from the same notice icon YI stocked. It is a figure showing gradually an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI have been posted. It is a figure which shows the example in which the notice icon YI is used in multiple times in the state which the notice display YH discharge | released from the notice icon YI is known before discharge | release. FIG. 199 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects and the like continued from FIG. 199. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are placed. It is a figure showing the example of the roulette effect for notice icon stock in steps. It is a figure which shows the other production | presentation using roulette RLT for preliminary | backup icon stock, and the example of a production | presentation with button operation. It is a figure which shows the example which the display mode of prior | preceding icon YI of a "button" changes according to button operation, and the other example. FIG. 204 is a diagram showing an example of an effect continued from FIG. 204 and an example of displaying the same notice icon in a plurality of modes. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect by the structure by which the display means is arrange | positioned under the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 51 and the like. It is a figure showing the example of an effect using the display of the notice of change of an icon shown in Drawing 179 (b) in steps. FIG. 208 is a view showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 208. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of presentation etc. which were shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of presentation etc. which were shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of a reservation icon is performed, and the example of other production. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the icon change advance display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted halfway along a plurality of changes. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example in which the display itself of an icon change prior | preceding is promoted via meter presentation, and the other presentation example. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice which is not shown in Drawing 179 (b), and the example of other production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which combined the display of a certain kind of pending icon and the icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the other example of presentation using the icon of a bomber type | system | group as a display of an icon change prior | preceding. It is a figure which shows the example etc. of the various advance regarding the display of an icon change advance. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L and another display means. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 51 and the like. It is a figure roughly showing seven examples of production in which various icons and displays are used. It is the figure which showed one example of the presentation which used the chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed one example of the presentation which used the chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed gradually an example of the display start aspect of the display MTY during a chance up meter preparation. It is the figure which showed gradually an example of the display start aspect of the display MTY during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display MTY during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows a mode that chance up meter production is performed during super reach production. It is a figure which shows a mode that another pattern of chance up meter production performed during super reach production is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of the change production of the display mode of the display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure explaining another pattern of change production of a display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure explaining another pattern of change production of a display mode of a display during a chance up meter preparation. It is a figure which shows a mode that a chance up meter ranks up during production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the chance up meter which ranked up. It is a figure explaining another pattern of rank up of a chance up meter. It is a figure which shows a mode that the chance up-meter preparation display MTY in which the rank up was carried out is displayed in the display aspect continued to rank up, even if it switches to the chance up meter CMT. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | presentation which warns that a chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other example of presentation which announces that a chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation in which a chance up notice is performed in the checkpoint which is not shown in a chance up meter. It is the figure shown gradually about another example of presentation using a chance up meter. It is a figure shown about another pattern of the presentation which used the chance up meter. FIG. 243 is a view showing a modified example of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 243. FIG. 243 is a view showing another effect pattern of effects using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 243. It is the figure which showed gradually an example of the pre-reading advance notice which used the opportunity up meter preparation indication. It is a figure explaining another display pattern of a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the presentation example of the chance up meter performed in another super reach. It is a figure explaining the modification of the presentation by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another presentation pattern of presentation by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining an example of production by a chance up meter performed in a definite change state. It is a figure explaining the example which gives notice of the production | presentation by a chance up meter by display apparatuses other than a decorative symbol display apparatus. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 51 and the like. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 52 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 21 is a view showing a game console according to a modification of the present invention, in which (a) shows a supporting machine 2000, and (b) shows a portable telephone 3000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) comprises a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention A home video game console 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the same pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the same pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure showing an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257. It is a figure for demonstrating the presentation which tangled the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which tangled the operation means A, and the effect which tangled the operation means B. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which tangled the operation means. It is a figure showing the movable role thing etc. which are arranged on the front side rather than the 1st decoration symbol display device 208L. It is the figure which put together the preconditions etc. in the production | presentation which used alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is the figure which showed roughly the representative example of the production which used alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows the some example in which the chance button 136 is operated or not in the state in which the number is displayed on alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows the example in which the search reach which is a normal reach is performed. FIG. 274 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example developed to super reach 1 (you reach). It is a figure which shows the example in which the chance button | peony 136 was operated before a reach production | presentation is started. It is a figure which shows the example in which the chance button 136 was operated during reach production. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button 136 is operated before the reach effect is started, and the chance button 136 is operated also during the reach effect. It is a figure which develops to super reach 1 and shows the example which carries out a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example which continues from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example developed to super reach 2. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of development to Super Reach 2 after operating the chance button 136 at an early stage when the symbol variation display is started. FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example continued from FIG. 283. It is a figure which shows the example in which the chance button 136 was operated during search reach production before advancing to Super Reach 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the cut-in image of the strong pattern in a normal button effect is displayed, and also the big hit through the final judgment effect accompanied by operation. It is a figure which shows the example by which "large board behavior" is displayed on alerting | reporting area | region HZ. FIG. 287 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG. 287. It is a figure which shows the example in which a pseudo continuation effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example which continues from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which continues from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the chance button operation was performed by button production. It is a figure which shows the example in which the chance button operation was performed before the start of pseudo | simulation group production. It is a figure which shows the example in which another production was performed prior to the production notified with notice area | region HZ. When a chance button operation is performed in the re-variation in the state of "pseudo 3", it is a figure which shows the example by which "large board behavior" is displayed on alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure which shows the example which continues from FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the wipe production | presentation which may be started after the combination of the decorative design of a loss is shake-displayed after the final judge production | presentation with operation. It is a figure which shows the example in which both alerting | reporting area | region evolution presentation and a normal button presentation are performed according to one chance button operation. It is a figure showing an example in case information area development production and other productions overlap. It is a figure showing an example when there is a chance button operation during wipe production. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of pressing the chance button 136 long. It is a figure which shows the example in which the production | generation with a button continuous hit and long press is started in the state in which the number is displayed on alerting | reporting area | region HZ. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example in which it is predicted that the effect using the chance button 136 will be started again after it seems as if the effect using the chance button 136 is finished. It is a figure which shows the example etc. which adjust the light quantity and volume. It is a figure which shows the example by which alerting | reporting content other than the alerting | reporting content shown to Fig.27 (a) is displayed on alerting | reporting area | region HZ. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example in which the operation period of the chance button 136 is limited even when numbers are displayed in the notification area HZ. It is a figure which shows another aspect of the method of a display of alerting | reporting area | region HZ. It is a figure showing an example of various cut in notices. It is a figure showing about other various examples of production. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the notice effect during preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows gradually the example of a display in tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the preliminary announcement production | presentation in preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of timer notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button continuous hitting production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production by the explanation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 328 is a diagram stepwise showing another rendering example of the rendering shown in FIG. 328. It is a figure showing gradually another example of preliminary announcement production under preparation which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. FIG. 331 is a diagram for describing another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 331. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of step-up notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the false continuation production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of button notice production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of an effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown gradually about an example of expansion production of a reservation display frame. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball extraction error display. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console which allows the player to earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk in a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, the one in which the light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board Embedded in the game play area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for emitting a button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and an instruction for returning a player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower bowl full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (refer to FIG. 4) which performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 The second sub substrate case 166 for housing the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls 4) and a release board case 172 for storing a release board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch substrate case 176 for housing a launch substrate 174 constituting a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric gaming devices A power supply substrate case 184 housing a power supply substrate 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. And, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, although the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 2) is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as the winning balls onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start opening 232 is disposed below the first special drawing start opening 230. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls due to passage or entry of game balls, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with the strength according to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the shooting rod 146 and the shooting rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the rendering means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control section 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit assumes that two counters are built in) Is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 a is received. Although the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and lower dish full tank sensors. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special display device 212 or the first 2) A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special view display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, various status display units 328 (for example, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the general drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, the high probability middle lamp 222, etc., and Moving members, for example, drive means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special view starting port 232 as a normal electric part, drive means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric part, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including the above. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value corresponds to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in value storage register. Also, even when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special view start opening 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special view start opening 232 The latched and latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal plate (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 with which etc. is provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured such that the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Further, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc., and a button sensor 426 for detecting depression of various buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and the CPU 504. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 is read based on the signal from the VDP 518, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350 through the external terminal board which does not illustrate the rental ball information etc. which show that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 which drives the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 which feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special view 1. In FIG. 5 (a), nine types of special drawings, "special drawing A" to "special drawing I", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds," "Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of the balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, 15 In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. "Special figure H" shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit design. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, of which five types of special figures are big hit symbols ("special figure a" to "special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electricity support determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter which generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special drawings, special drawing winning random number values, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area for storing the number of reservations of the special view in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a storage area for the number of special drawings suspension. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special drawing divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas for which the start of the success / failure determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for common use is also prepared. In the start information storage unit for special drawing, as described later, a plurality of types of start information are made into one set, and the start information is stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in the present embodiment). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals representing that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area, respectively. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information of the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects entry of the ball into the first special view start port 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special view It is determined that there has been a prize in starting opening 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium which passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in first special drawing starting slot 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 thereafter. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control symbol random number value and the random number The random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the common pattern display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 Special figure display symbol update timer for clocking the time to display the fluctuation / stop, various timers including timer for clocking predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined closing time, predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 234 and 226 and starting openings 230 and 232 have a winning, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening in RAM 308 is calculated. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning reception process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, plural types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an open area according to the winning order (order of suspension) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the lost symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 3211, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, as will be described later, the common drawing mistake flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a common drawing timer random number value, and the common drawing display device 210 is generally selected from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value. One time for fluctuating display of a figure is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in a common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing fluctuation display time. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special drawing prefetch process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later. Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 5R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, off flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and common drawing probability fluctuation flag . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), for example, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on and the spread map probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure a, the special figure b, the special figure c, or the special figure d shown in FIG. 5 (a), the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the special probability e flag is turned off and the special probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special flag f is turned off when the lost flag is turned on. The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), lost symbol ( The finalized display of any one symbol of the special figure f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is driven to open and close (a part of various solenoids 332) until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls. Is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set the information indicating the closing period to. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and ends at a predetermined timing Storage area for a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set a standby period for displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended. The information which shows the presentation waiting period to is set to. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 start port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the general drawing low probability state (electric Chu open spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 opens more easily than in the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) having a high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) having a low degree of advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a departure (decision determination) is performed using the qualification table stored in the table. Next, main control unit 300 uses the special drawing determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special drawing 2 random number value in the acquired special drawing 2 start information, the determined success or failure determination result, etc. Determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area Subtract 1 the number of reserved areas. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of special figure 2 variation game with high degree of advantage and special figure 1 variation game with low degree of preference, special figure change game pertaining to the suspension of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 start starting prize winning It may be starting opening winning combination order fluctuation which starts in order. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the pending limit.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure which has stopped the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special figure which stops the variation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data contains various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special pattern probability change flags, timers selected in the special drawing related lottery process In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the number etc., and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, values of special view probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a prize effect start command and end In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 Including presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figures stored in the command data in the RAM 308 [2] Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. being held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. And then go into the HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support state), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is previously determined prior to the success or failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always performed for the start information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always performed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 9 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A illustrates an example of a state in which the special view 1 pre-reading result information is stored in the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (a), "special figure I" (disappeared) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure I" as stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special view 2 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (b), "special figure f" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4" Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG.9 (b), the state which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none."

  FIG. 9C shows an example of a special-purpose look-ahead result storage unit for special view 1 during power support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group to be described later are determined in advance, and such information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result It can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as information.

  Next, FIG. 10 is referred to for the table for determination of acceptance used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for acceptance determination, and FIG. 10 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for acceptance determination. In the case of performing the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, referring to the high probability table for success or failure judgment shown in FIG. Referring to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 change game, the big hit, the small hit or the release is selected as the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Similarly, in the case of the special view high probability state, the special view low probability state shown in FIG. 10A is referred to when the special view high probability state of special view 2 is determined. In the case, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 10B is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a jackpot or an omission is selected as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. When the jackpot judgment result of the big hit is lost, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and the referred small hit judgment table indicates the numerical range and the acquired random number value. , Select the success or failure judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result, and the loss is lost with the probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected.

  Next, a stop is performed based on the result of determination of success or failure determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A special drawing determination table used to determine a symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a view showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a view showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When deciding the stop design of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 design determination table which is shown in figure 11 (a), special figure on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  In addition, when deciding the stop design of the special figure 2, referring to the table for special figure 2 design decision which is shown in figure 11 (b), on the basis of the result of the success and failure of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of random number, We draw the stop symbol of the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special view display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 according to the detection result is effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 Perform processing to change to.

  In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 following step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450. Do.

  In step S417 following step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S441 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S 443 following step S 441, transmission of control commands to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S 419), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S501, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 516 in the effect data read out in step S509, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, other processing for updating the effect random number is performed.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), the process waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table, the attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S 551, the CPU 504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 516 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes). The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the front side of the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and is configured such that a part can not be viewed. . In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right of the lower part of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left thereof. In the first UI unit 280, it is possible to display the variation icon h0 on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a state in which the variation icon h0 is placed. ing. When the symbol is stopped, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and for example, performs advance notice display or pre-reading notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. The second UI unit 281 has a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM may not always be displayed, and a specific notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, advance notice, advance notice in the symbol change display, N suspension of the symbol change display are stored) It may be displayed at the time of the effect etc. displayed at the time, or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), the display mode according to the progress of the game May change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. In addition, the change icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". . Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second holding number display of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 is displayed. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, positive change state, hidden positive change state, short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be vertically moved or rotated according to the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (a), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-scale behavior character 224Ga on which the characters of "large" are applied, and a second on which the characters of "panel" are applied A large-scale behavior character item 224 Gb, a third large-scale behavior character item 224 Gc to which the characters “振” are given, and a fourth large-scale behavior character object 224 G d to which the characters “to dance” are given are arranged. Each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character article 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, light emitting means such as a full color LED is internally incorporated in the first large screen behavior character object 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior character article 224 Gd, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Also, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a one-handed box character 224H which is one of the effect movable bodies is disposed, and is configured to be able to move up and down according to the contents of the effect . The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the one-man box product 224H, light emitting means such as a full color LED is built in, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest 224E, the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, and the one-sided box character 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern that simulates a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special drawing symbol is stopped, but is blinked or turned off while the special drawing symbol is changing. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height of the display area is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the rendering operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not have to be configured to be able to be all performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, they may be fixed). In addition, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or, the rendering operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform rendering operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs rendering operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate the decorative symbols in the display devices in a variable manner, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered by the decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a portion thereof can not be viewed. In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 has a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. In FIG. 14B, since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), they are displayed according to the progress of the game. Aspects may change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" ing. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed in different decorative symbol display devices in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It may be done. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability changing state, a hiding probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be a frameless form. Also, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate vertically according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 14 (b), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 14 (b) is the upper end of the family crest 224E. Although the portion is at a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set at an appropriate position.

  Also, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned one-handed box character 224H is disposed, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices It is made possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest 224E and the one-piece box character 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The action of each effect movable body is made visible.

  Moreover, in FIG.14 (b), the 4th symbol display apparatus 284 is provided under the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N.

  Next, an example of effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects that can be applied in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 15 (A1) to (A2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 15 (A1), when the first to fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H are operated, the embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large-screen behavior character set 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior graphic object 224 Gd are such that the characters of "large", "panel", "shou", and "mai" are first turned to the front Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the one-man box character item 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the one thousand box box character object 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement character article 224Gd, and the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement box object 224Gd is a one thousand box box product It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. The one thousand box character article 224H may be configured not to overlap with the front side of the first large board behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224Gd. In addition, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may be disposed on the front side of the one thousand box character article 224H and configured to overlap the one thousand box character article 224H.

  In FIG. 15 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 or various lamps may be lowered to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .

  In (C1) to (C4) of FIG. 15, the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in (a) of FIG. 14 is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (C1) to FIG. 15 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set at an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 has a lift arm and an LED array rotatably mounted on the tip of the lift arm. The raising and lowering arm can perform raising and lowering operations by, for example, a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row, and the horizontally extending attitude is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the lift arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extension direction. The first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500) controls lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array one by one based on Versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing this, the light emission aspect of the plurality of LEDs changes while the LED array is rotating, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a picture is displayed. Moreover, although POV display 224I is arrange | positioned more front side than the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd and the one-man box goods thing 224H, the anteroposterior relation of these production movable bodies is suitably It can be set.

  FIG. 15C1 shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  FIG. 15C2 shows that the POV display 224I lifts the LED array by the lift arm, and the LED array is overlapped on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 15C3 shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating its rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts to rotate, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. In addition, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and it is considered that they are difficult to visually recognize while the LED array is rotating.

  In FIG. 15 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the character of "Heat" is displayed, and a state where a notice display or a prefetch notice display is performed is shown. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. It is also good. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed in dark.

  In FIG. 15 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlights and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

  FIGS. 15 (E1) to (E2) show that the family crest 224E is operating in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The visual recognition is made more difficult than in the case where at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14 and the navigation character YM do not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. In addition, it is applicable also to the presentation apparatus 206 shown by Fig.14 (a).

  In FIG. 15 (F1), in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), it is shown that the one-hundred-box character 224H is operating. Specifically, it is shown that the one-handed box character 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state by the overlapping of the two-car box character 224H. In this rendering example, when the one-and-two box character 224H operates, the family crest 224E is not operated so that the two-and-one box character 224H and the family crest 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the one thousand box character article 224H and the family crest article 224E are in operation. In addition, when the one-man box character item 224H operates, a retraction operation may be performed to move the household crest item 224E further downward.

  In FIG. 15 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slide-moved so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The scroll display is done together. That is, in the background image, an area which is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereby, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the no. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward, The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third decorative symbol display A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  In FIG. 15 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest 224E. In the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1), a state is shown in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I is moved from the initial position to the position where the LED arrays overlap to the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED arrays rotate, and a fixed rotation occurs. It is shown that the speed is reached and the constant speed rotation is performed, and the word "heat" is displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown to be displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 15 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at initial positions.

  FIG. 15 (K2) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide to a position where they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are scrolled along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are matched to the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, it is possible to perform display with a sense of unity by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest 224E is moved downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. In addition, the family crest 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are being operated. You may vibrate while rotating.

  In (K3) to (K4) of FIG. 15, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in proximity to each other, along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that it is integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 15 (K4) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged such that the images respectively displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the displayed image is not rotating although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating.

  FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modification of the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the right side below the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right to the left, but a part is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the sub It is considered to be more difficult to view than in the case where the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 15 (L1 '), a display image (a background image or a character SBH of a safari) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 15 (M1), operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd are shown. That is, the sub display device 208S is moved from the initial position to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to overlap at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 large behavior character objects 224 Ga ~ 4 nd large behavior character objects 224 Gd, after rotating each of the characters of "large", "panel", "振", "mai" to the front, decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows that a predetermined advance notice effect or a prefetch advance notice effect is performed. ing.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a view showing in stages an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 shows a stage following the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 in a step-by-step manner, and FIG. 19 is a drawing showing the steps of another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 16, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, the special view 2 hold lamp 220, the general view hold A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display 284 are shown. In addition, although it demonstrates by applying the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 14 (a) below, it is also possible to apply the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG.14 (b). Moreover, below, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the family crest item 224E, the 1st large board behavior character article 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character article 224Gd, the one-man box character article 224H, and the light-guide plate IL.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (background image of the coast) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Also, a second number-on-hold display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 4-decorative 1-decorative 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the second UI unit 281 displays the reserve icon of the special view 1. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  The second UI unit 281 displays a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon whose winning is older.

  In FIG. 16A, two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are displayed in the second UI unit 281, and both of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 have default display modes. It is displayed in (Round-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the reserved icons which are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16A, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 16 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 16A, the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is the start of variation on the special view display device → the start of blinking of the fourth symbol or the extinguishment → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the holding icon → decoration Although it is carried out in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbols, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the turn off of the fourth symbol is further performed. There has been no change in the design yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 starts, the variation display of the fourth symbol The symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol starts.

  In FIG. 16 (3), it is shown that the second number-of-retentions display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. In addition, the update display of the second number-of-holds display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be simultaneously performed, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second number-of-holds display is performed The display may be started, or the update display of the second number-of-holds display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16 (4), the moving animation of the hold icon h11, h12 of the special view 1 is started. In the movement (reduction) animation here, the holding icon (the target holding icon for the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the variation icon in the first UI unit 280 At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1. At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In FIG. 16 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of change, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then the variable display of the first decorative symbol Is started. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is ended, or The moving animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16 (7), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice starts, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while navigation character announcement is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Further, in the navigation character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "good opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation to the big hit is further increased. In addition, the timing when the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing when the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed May be updated to "No", or the display of the balloon may be updated to "No", and the conversation image CI1 of the lady may be displayed. In addition, the effect (for example, "no") to be promoted to the notice (for example, "super heat") displayed after the notice (for example, "good opportunity") displayed first may be performed in some cases. . In addition, navigation character notices are not only notices in the symbol variation display, but also pre-reading notices, notices that give notice that a given notice is to be made, and explanation displays (characters that appear in various notices, game states, and pachinko machine 100 effects An explanation of the stage of the effect or the like, also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period It is composed of In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the wolf, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. Further, in the advance notice of the navigation character, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "no" to the character display of "superheat", and reports that the expectation to the big hit is considerably high. In addition, the display of the balloon overlaps a part of the conversation image CI2 of the user. Note that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "superheating", or after the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed, The display may be updated to "superheat", or the dialog image CI2 of a whistle may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "superheat". As described above, in this example of the effect, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Also, the conversational image CI1 of the Tonosama may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 16 (9) is displayed). It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13), It is shown that the person presses the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the advance notice of the navigation character is ended, and the display of the balloon is deleted. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 16 (14), in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows, instead of the operation promotion notification image, the characters "I am in a high heat" are displayed May be Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. In addition, the letter display of the notice such as "It is intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 is operated, and the operation effective period is not operated without the production button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even if it has elapsed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the state of the first decorative symbol being made easy to recognize is that the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the spear have been erased and the conversation announcement has ended. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 16 (17), “right The 7 "stop display is made and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an indication that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (17) to FIG. 19 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs an animation at the time of reach start. In the reach start animation in this presentation example, when the reach state is formed, animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged or reduced. In addition, an appropriate thing can be adopted as a display mode of the animation at the time of reach start. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by viewing this reach start animation.

  When reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 16 (20) to FIG. (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved and displayed upward and downward, and the first UI unit 280 changes. The frame is out under the display area leaving the icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (in the example shown in FIG. 16 (20), the hold icon h11) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. . In addition, the start of the movement display of the left pattern and the right pattern of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281, or the first The frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 After frame-out display of each image in is started, movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be a case where the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd do not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In addition, light emission of light-guide plate IL may not be performed. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior Only the operation of the character 224Gd may be performed, and light emission of the light guide plate IL may not be performed, or only light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. The movement of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed either. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be ended after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to fourth The movement start to the initial position of the four large-screen behavior part 224Gd and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneously performed. Here, in FIG. 16 (22) to FIG. (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light guide plate IL is a series of It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 17 (26), it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26), the image of the sword sword master of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (27), the battle between the hero of the main character and the sword sword of the enemy character The animation of is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the Tonosama is displayed, and a notice effect notifying that the big hit reliability is high is performed . The Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image C13 of the lady may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the production button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), it is shown that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord has been erased and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect is started after developing into the super reach. ing. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button rendering after the development into the super reach, and in this case, the development into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and The behavior role object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior role object 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated, or the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed as well. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, when the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, the effect display that causes a loss without performing the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be performed, and further, the effect display that causes a loss After being performed, a resurrection effect may be displayed to be displayed as a big hit effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be displayed continuously.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (39), the one-handed box character 224H operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 17 (40) shows that light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  FIG. 17 (41) shows that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image is faded out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224 Gd move toward the initial position. Have started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the protagonist's lord wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and in FIG. 17 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene is faded out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. . Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, at a timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is determined to be determined stop, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" decoration The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game It is informed to the person that it is 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini-right-handed display instructing a right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 18 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed, and the display of "decorative 7" showing the combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen is It has been done. In the upper left corner of the display screen, mini-right-handed display is performed, and in the upper right corner, display of “1R”, which is the current round, is performed. The number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game or the total number of prize balls acquired during the series may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed and in the upper right corner of the display area, Display of "15R" which is the current round is performed.

  FIG. 18 (56) shows that the big hit game is over and the big hit end effect display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Since this big hit game is a big hit game that has been started as a 15R certainty big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability regular drawing high probability state (with power support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is performed, and it is informed that the power supply support is shifted to the definite change state.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (alert display) is displayed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4). In addition, this alerting display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the gaming state which is not in power support is finished, regardless of the situation where the big hit has become a big hit It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the first variation display of symbols is started after the big hit game is over and the power support is changed to the definite change state. In the support variable probability state, the background image is a background image for the power support probability state, and the decoration pattern is also a display mode different from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general view low probability state) . Further, a reserved icon display area 282 of Special Figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of reserved special views 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the reserve mode (shape in this case) is different from the reserve icon of the special view 1. It is possible to make a decision at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same. In order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 in FIGS. 18 (58) to (63), the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown in dashed lines. Further, in FIG. 18 (58) to FIG. (63), the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is divided and shown by a broken line for easy explanation, but in actuality this broken line is displayed I will not. Also, in the case of the power supply-added definite variation state, although the reserve icon of the special view 1 is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini-right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of “bonus x ○” indicating the number of consecutive units is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first-time big hit game is over, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the player is instructed to hit the right. A right-hand notice is displayed. The right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "Please hit right" are displayed on the semi-transparent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the power support state where the first big hit game ended and shifted, but may also be displayed in the power support state where big hit games other than the first big hit game ended and shifted For example, it may be displayed each time the jackpot game is over and it shifts to the power support state. Moreover, after shifting to the power support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed also when it is detected that the player is hitting the left, for example, it is detected that the first special view starting port 230 has won a prize. In this case, it may be determined that a left hit has been made and a right hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61), it is shown that variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, as shown in FIG. 18 (62), the right-handed notification is not displayed. In addition, the mini-right-handed display is performed continuously.

  In FIG. 18 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has been suspended by four. That is, in the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, all the four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 has four reserves, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icon h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 Four are displayed. Moreover, also in the second number-of-holds display, a display of “4” is performed, which indicates that the number of holdings in the special view 2 is four.

  FIG. 19 (49a) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (48). 16 to 17 show the case where the "decorative 7" is in the reach state and the "decorative 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, but here, the "decorative 6" is in the reach state and the middle The case in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is fluctuating with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  After that, the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view B at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a). In the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop. The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuation is still displayed on the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that it has become a big hit of either a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, or a 2R normal big hit.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start production Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", "bonus" is displayed in the decoration symbol display device 208, and the player In fact, it is reported that it is either 5R certainty big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), mini-right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 19 (38b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, but the result of losing is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character of the hero loses to the enemy character swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (40b), the fluctuation icon h0, the second reserved number display and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It will be left hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19 (41 b) to FIG. 42 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 scroll in from the lower side of the display area, and the hold icon and the navigation character YM. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view I. In the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), since the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop, so The first decorative symbol is continuously subjected to the swing fluctuation, and the second decorative symbol or the fourth symbol display device 284 is still in a variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b), the display of the variation icon erasing animation is performed. In the fluctuation icon erasing animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 becomes gradually smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 19 (46b), the animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed. Note that the variation icon deletion animation may be started before the special drawing is stopped.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  In FIG. 20, a first special view display 212, a second special view display 214, a common view display 210, a first special view hold lamp 218, a second special view hold lamp 220, a common view hold lamp 216 and a fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but after frame in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. After that, the countdown may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20 (3) to FIG. 20 (7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM 1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 20 (11), after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, it is shown in FIG. Thus, a cut-in display is performed, which consists of the character of the lord and the "continuation" character display. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. Here, the pseudo-link is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo run is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit. In addition, there may be a frame out in the lower part without displaying the pseudo run symbol, and the pseudo run will not be started when the pseudo run symbol is in the lower frame, the decoration symbol of the loss is just as it is The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach effect may be started in the reach state. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is notified that the pseudo link will be started after the countdown is completed by the timer advance notice.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is largely displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (14), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 20 (3 a) shows another example of effect following FIG. 20 (2). Note that, in this effect example, “20:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 20 seconds have elapsed since the countdown is started.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 20 (10 a) to FIG. 20 (11 a), the first pseudo run is performed in the above-described manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. FIG. 20 (10a), FIG. (11a) and FIG. (14a) are effects corresponding to FIG. 20 (10), FIG. (11) and FIG. (14) respectively.

  Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively, as shown in FIG. When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 20 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the word "attention" for urging attention to the notice is displayed. Is displayed. Also, at this time, the right pattern changes from "deco 6" to "deco 7". Note that the right pattern may be left unchanged as "decoration 6". Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (16 a) to FIG. 20 (17 a), the second pseudo run is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo run. As described above, the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 20 (3 a) to FIG. 20 (17 a) gives notice that the second pseudo run is started. In addition, it can be said that the start of the second pseudo-run is also foreshadowed that the start of the first pseudo-run, that is, in this example of the effect, by the timer notice effect, It can be said that the first and second pseudo-announcements have been announced. In the timer advance notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo run is notified, but the occurrence of notices and other kinds of advance notices may be made.

  FIG. 20 (7 b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 20 (6). Note that FIG. 20 (7 b) to FIG. (11 b) correspond to FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (7b), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (8 b-1), a face image of a character of the toemen character with a balloon serif “Rake” in place of the character display of “attention” in the timer notice display TM 1 YMF is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (8b-2), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, attention may be drawn to the notice by the display other than the timer notice display TM1. In addition, as a means to which the countdown in timer advance production is completed and to draw attention to a notice, it may carry out not only by a display but by a sound or a lamp, and performs combining two or more of a display, a sound, and a lamp You may do so.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (9b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started in which the pseudo-connected symbol in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10 b), while the movement display of the pseudo run symbol is continuously performed, the face image YMF of the character is removed, and as shown in FIG. 20 (11 b). After the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 20 (12), cut-in display is performed, which includes the character of "tendon" and the "continuation" character display.

  In this example of rendering, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding rendering (pseudo chain) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00" However, there may be a case where the effect corresponding to this is not performed.

  In addition, while the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer advance display TM1, another advance notice may be performed. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice not related to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  FIG. 21 (a1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 20 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 21 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a2), display is performed in which the navigation character YM faces the variation icon h0 and turns the sword. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, and thereafter shown in FIG. 21 (a5) Thus, the notice display in which the character of "Heat" is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. The preview notice may be displayed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, as shown in FIG. 21 (a7), a reach state by “decoration 7” occurs. Thus, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect for giving notice that advance notice will be made.

  FIG. 21 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this production example, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started to be "30:00", that is, an advance notice effect that occurs 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It is suggested to be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (b1), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "29:69". As described above, a plurality of types of countdown time may be prepared for the timer announcement effect. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be, or the countdown time may be configured. The shorter the time, the higher the jackpot reliability may be, or the higher the jackpot reliability may be, regardless of the countdown time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b2), about 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts, and in the first decorative symbol, the appearance of reach effect by “decoration 7” is started. It is shown.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and leftward, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 displays leaving the fluctuation icon h0. While the frame is out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

  After that, FIG. 21 (b4) shows a state of being developed into a super reach (a sword reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4), the image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed large, and then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. Also during this time, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6), on the timer notice display TM1, the notice is changed to the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character of “heat” is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the change display of the decorative symbol, and the timer advance effect is continuously performed even after the transition to the reach state.

  FIG. 21 (b4′-2) shows another example of effect following FIG. 21 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), after the animation display of the duel scene is started, it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02: 37". There is. In other words, it shows that about 27 seconds have elapsed since the countdown by the timer advance presentation is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect different from the effect notified by the timer advance effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5 '), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 21 (b6'), the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the advance notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character of “heat” is added to the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. Thus, in this example of presentation, it is shown that a notice display (or presentation) made as a result of counting down in the timer announcement production is being performed during execution of the button presentation.

  Although the above-mentioned example of presentation explained the example in which change display of the display mode of fluctuation icon h0 is performed as the effect which is done as a result which is counted down in timer announcement production, but it is not limited to this, other production may be done For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ′ ′), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give notice.

  FIG. 21 (b 6 ′ ′ ′) shows another example of effect following FIG. 21 (b 5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ′ ′ ′), instead of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the attention display on the notice to promote attention to the notice is made. The character display of "is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ′ ′ ′-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to perform advance notice, and the animation display of the duel scene is trusted by the big hit It is shown that the display is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the character of the princess is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and a character of "jump" is displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high. Note that this cut-in display may be a notice display that a big hit is determined. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that two or more notice displays are being performed as a result of counting down in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variation icon h0 may not be changed, and only cut-in display may be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 21 (c1) to FIG. 21 (c2) show that the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and it is changed to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example of production, in addition to the production button 136 as the operation means for production, production lever 136V is provided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (c2), a lever image 136Va imitating the effect lever 136V and a remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the lever effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (c3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in the example of the effect, as a result of counting down in the timer advance effect, the state in which the lever effect starts is shown, but instead of the lever effect, the above-described button effect may be performed.

  In addition, there may be a plurality of types of button effects according to the degree of expectation to the big hit (for example, a button image 136a of a default mode, a button image 136a different in color from the default mode (for example, red, gold, etc.) , A default mode, such as a letter display (for example, "super heat" or "expected size") or a button image 136a to which a character is added, or a button image 136a different in size from the default mode (for example, deca button effect or mini button Effect), when there are more button images 136a displayed (for example, three button images 136a are displayed than the default mode), the same number of operations (for example, three times) as the number of button images 136a are performed You may make it do the operation (for example, 1 time, 2 times, 4 times ...) different from the number of button images 136a. Further, as the response display according to the operation of the effect button 136, the number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, or the number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed. etc).

  The effect example shown in FIG. 21 (d1) to FIG. 21 (d4) shows that the effect movable body operates as a result of counting down in the timer announcement effect. As shown in FIG. 21 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is reached with "decoration 7", and it is shown that a reach effect is being performed. The first UI unit 280 leaves the variation icon h0 and is framed out downward, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. In addition, a timer announcement effect is also performed, and it is shown that the timer display on the timer announcement display TM1 is "00:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (d1). After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d2), in the timer advance notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, characters of “attention” are displayed to urge attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (d 3), the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (d4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this example of rendering, as a result of counting down in the timer advance rendering, the situation is shown that the first large-screen behavior character Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character Gd as the effect movable body operate. The object 224E or the one thousand box character 224H may operate, and at least two of the first large movement character Ga to the fourth large movement behavior Gd, the family crest 224E, and the one thousand box character 224H may be operated. May be

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Moreover, in FIG. 22 (1), the timer announcement effect mentioned above is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2), it is shown that the time-based effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the character of "overlay" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time addition is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance presentation effect is extended. Note that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-series effect, an advance notice of a chance increase, an advance notice such as a advance notice, etc. may be performed between the start of the timer advance effect and the start of the timer addition effect. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is performed, and the time to be added is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), an effect is produced in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. In addition, it is not necessary to perform count-up animation display. Further, instead of the display of the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance display TM is difficult to visually recognize. After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the display of the count-up animation shown in FIG. 22 (4) may be performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. . That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the completion of the timer addition effect is elapsed), the first pseudo link effect is performed. Is started, and the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (7), and it is informed that the pseudo run is to be performed.

  In this production example, when the timer display effect is performed and the time display is performed on the timer display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the time addition is not performed. There may not be a change, and it may be hard to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 22 (1 b) to FIG. 6 (6 b) show a situation where a timer addition effect by conversation announcement is performed instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1 b), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1 b), the above-described timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM 1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), the conversational announcement has been started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed along with the character of the token. Note that the timing at which the timer announcement effect is started may be the same as the timing at which the conversation announcement is started, or the conversation announcement may be started after the timer announcement effect is started, or the conversation announcement is After being started, the timer announcement effect may be started. In addition, a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is considered that the display of the conversation image CI1 of the husband is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the speaker's conversation image CI1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2b), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 is displayed with a text display of "10 seconds added" indicating the time to be added. Thus, it is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer advance display TM. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in timer advance production is performed continuously. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle is considered to be more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapping state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the insulting conversation image CI2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4b), an effect is produced in which time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

  Thereafter, after the conversation announcement is finished by deleting the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2, the count-up animation display is ended as shown in FIG. 22 (6b), and the timer display in the timer announcement display TM It is updated to "15:00" and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. In this effect example, the count-up animation display is ended after the conversation advance notice is ended, but for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (4b'-1) to FIG. (4b'-2), The conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display ends. Also, the timing at which the conversation advance notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 22 (1 c) to FIG. 22 (6 c) show another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation advance notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1c), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Moreover, in FIG. 22 (1c), the above-mentioned timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the conversational announcement is started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed along with the character of the token. A part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is considered that the display of the conversation image CI1 of the husband is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the speaker's conversation image CI1.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lady is reduced and displayed, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the eyelid on which the operation promotion notification image described above is displayed is displayed together with the character of. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation announcement, the countdown by the timer announcement effect is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2). FIG. 22 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation effective period, and the length according to the time when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT has elapsed It is decreasing. After that, when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is notified of that. Ru. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (3c), the display of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is changed to the character display of "10 seconds added" which shows the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is notified that the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. When the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation effective period, the time addition in the timer display may not be performed. Also, if the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT may disappear once, and then it may be changed to the character display of "10 seconds on top". The display of the remaining time display meter MT may be changed to the character display of “10 seconds on top” without displaying the disappearance of the gauge. In addition, on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, after the operation effective period has elapsed, the character display of “I will add 10 seconds” may be performed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the operation valid period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 is pressed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4c), an effect that time is added is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the end of the conversation notice, or the conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice The end timing of the may be the same as the end timing of the count-up animation display.

  Thereafter, after the conversation announcement is finished by deleting the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2, the count-up animation display is ended as shown in FIG. 22 (6c), and the timer display in the timer announcement display TM It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. The timing shown in FIG. 22 (6c) shows that the timer display counts down to "09: 85" after 10 seconds have been added to the time in the timer display.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 22 (2 c-2) to FIG. (2 c-4), the display of the countdown in the timer advance presentation effect is continuously performed even in the operation valid period, for example After the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 '), the update display of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is not performed in the operation effective period. (The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is kept "06:00"), and internally clocked, and at the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 '), The counting result is reflected on the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the remaining 2.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ′)), and the countdown update table The may be resumed.

  Also, for example, after the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 ′ ′), the countdown update in the timer announcement effect is performed in the operation effective period. Without performing the display (with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 being "06:00"), the clock is internally measured, and as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ′ ′), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, as shown in FIG. 22 (3c ′ ′), “10 seconds is added” which indicates the time for which the display of the conversation image CI2 of the bag is added from the operation promotion notification image without reflecting the internal clocking result. At the timing changed to the character display, reflect the internal clocking result (for example, the remaining 1.23 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (3c ′ ′)) on the timer display of the timer advance display TM1. The countdown update display may be resumed.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect in stages.

  FIG. 23 (1 d) to FIG. (2 d) show another effect example of FIG. 22 (1 b) to FIG. (2 b). In FIG. 23 (1 d), the character display displayed in the speaker's conversation image CI 1 is “focus on timer notice”. As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becoming "00:00". That is, it can be said that the notice of the notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lady in FIG. 23 (1d).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2 d), the conversation notice is updated, the miniature image of the conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size, and moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the above-mentioned conversational image CI2 is displayed. As described above, it may be notified that the timer display changes after attention is paid to the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIG. 23 (1e) shows another example of effect in FIG. 23 (1d). In FIG. 23 (1 e), the timer display is “00” by performing scroll display SC 1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above timer announcement display TM 1 It may be made to pay attention to the effect performed as a result of becoming “00:00”. That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 23 (1e), the characters “focus on timer advance notice” are scrolled in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 23 (1 f) to the same figure (6 f) is another example of the timer addition effect, and the appearance that the countdown of the added time is performed by the display different from the timer notice display TM 1 It shows. FIG. 23 (1f) is an example of effect following FIG. 22 (3), and after notification of the additional time by the balloon of the navigation character YM is performed, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed on the display screen below the timer notice display TM1. The frame in from the right is shown. In the additional timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed while the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The superimposition timer display TM2 overlaps the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlap state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  FIG. 23 (2f) shows that the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Here, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted after the animation of the frame-in of the addition timer display TM2 is completed, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the addition timer display TM2 The animation of may be completed, or the timing at which the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. In FIG. 23 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is disposed below the timer advance notice display TM1. However, the timer advance notice display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped and disposed, for example, As shown in FIG. 23 (2f '), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and as shown in FIG. 23 (2f ′ ′), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (2 f) to FIG. 23 (4 f), the countdown on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM 1 is continuously performed until “00:00” is reached. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and a state in which the timer notice display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen is shown. . Here, after the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, the animation of the frame out of the timer notice display TM1 may start, or the timing when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 starts. The timing at which the animation of the frame-out of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (5f '), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the word "attention" to urge attention to the notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6f), in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, a pseudo-connected symbol may appear in the middle symbol and a pseudo-connected may be performed. This suggests that the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo run symbol may not appear when the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo run symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed by displaying on the additional timer display TM2 different from the timer notice display TM1. ing. Note that the notification of the added time may be notification of a total value of a plurality of timer notices, for example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining time You may display the value which added 7 seconds. Here, the additional timer display TM2 may be a timer notice that is newly displayed along with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice that is originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

  FIGS. 23 (3fa) to (8 fa) show still another example of the timer addition effect, wherein the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown of the timer display in the addition timer display TM2 are performed simultaneously. It shows the situation. FIG. 23 (3fa) is an example of effect following FIG. 23 (2f), and after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is shown how to start the That is, in this presentation example, the time to be added is notified as 10 seconds, but the addition of 5 seconds is substantially performed. Note that the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds, in which the additional timer display TM2 is performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 23 (3fa), “15:00” may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

  After that, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIG. 23 (3 f) to FIG. 6 (6 f), and in FIG. 23 (7 fa), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, notifying that pseudo run is performed. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again and the first pseudo run is being performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8 fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and the word "focus" is displayed in place of the timer display to prompt attention to the notice. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the second pseudo run is started. . Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa '), the symbol CC of the pine as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a notice may be made. In addition, the pseudo connected effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. As described above, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance effect, it may be suggested to be an advance effect or a big hit other than the pseudo ream. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, this effect example indicates that the timer display is increased as one mode of the change of the display mode of the timer display. Note that the timer display may be split.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the first icon h11 and the second icon h12 are displayed, and in the second number of displays , “2” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 2. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (2), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice symbol MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a pre-reading notice, and gives a notice that the addition of time is performed in the timer notice effect. In addition, it may be notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be displayed after the left pattern is stopped, The left symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 on the clock is displayed. In addition, the display timing of the notice icon stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed accompanying the decorative pattern, and temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, various kinds of navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be carried out at any timing such as advance notice or hold on the symbol variation display by the effect or advance notice of the effect by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows that the table on which the navigation character YM stands up rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icon is displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the advance notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (4), it is shown that the notice icon MI1 of the clock moves to the notice icon display area 285 and is stocked. In addition, in the first decorative symbol, a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol is shown. Here, the timing when the right symbol stops and the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol is stopped. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in a reduced size and stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, showing that the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that the display is finalized by. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is determined and displayed, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (6), a state is shown in which the symbol change display is performed by digesting one reserve of the special view 1. Further, the timer announcement effect is also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer announcement display TM1 is “09:69”, and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (eg, navigation character YM, etc.) overlapping with the timer advance notice only only during execution of a certain effect (eg, stock effect of the advance notice icon, etc.). Also, conversely, there may be an effect display that causes the timer notice to overlap only while a certain effect is being performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285, and it is notified that the notice icon MI1 of the clock is used. . Note that "07: 31" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the display screen. Although the effect remains displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted at the timing when it pops out from the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display of the count-up animation is started, or the display of the count-up animation may be performed after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased. It may be started or, after the display of the count-up animation is started, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (10), the advance notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (A1) to FIG. 25 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first suspension icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. In addition, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is “00:00”.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A3), a balloon in which the characters “superimposed” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed, and time display is performed for timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. In addition, even if the character display of "superimposition" is performed, the addition of the time of the timer display may not be performed in some cases, and another effect may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-1), after changing to the timer display and displaying the letter “attention” to urge attention to the notice, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-2) Alternatively, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and “+10 seconds” may be displayed on the balloon to indicate the time to be added, and the time to be added may be notified. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed for the "attention" is not the advance notice but for 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after displaying the characters "still" indicating that the timer advance presentation is continued instead of the timer display, the display of the timer advance display TM1 is added. The display may be switched to a display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to notify the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after displaying the character "still" in the timer notice display TM1, the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10 indicating the time to be superimposed on the balloon is displayed. "Seconds" may be displayed. Further, after the display shown in FIG. 25 (A3) is performed, the display as shown in FIG. 25 (A3 b-2) may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on timer notice display TM1 is resumed. . On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A4), in response to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 being performed and becoming "00:00", the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol Is shown. In addition, the timing when the timer display is updated may be the same as the timing when the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the timer display is updated, the pseudo run symbol may be stopped and displayed, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (B1) to FIG. 25 (B5) show an example of effect in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a balloon in which the character of “subtract” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and time subtraction is performed on the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 Is notified. That is, it is informed that the time for which the timer advance presentation effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B2), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continued, and the timer display indicates “05: 89”. Moreover, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction", and is "-3 seconds" which indicates the time to be shortened. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed becomes shorter than the time originally displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), an effect (timer shortening effect) is performed in which the time is shortened by the display of the shortening animation in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the shortened animation display may not be performed. In addition, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and the time in the timer display is reduced by 3 seconds (subtracted) ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed due to the effect of shortening the timer. The display of the countdown may be stopped while the timer shortening effect is being performed, or the display of the countdown may be in progress.

  After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5), in place of the timer display, the word "notice" to call attention to the notice is displayed. The notice display is performed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5 ′), the replay symbol RP as a pseudo run symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it may be notified that the pseudo run is started. Note that the timing at which the character of "attention" in the timer advance notice display TM1 starts being displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character of "attention" After the display starts, the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped, the word "notice" May start displaying. It should be noted that the appearance rate of the contents of the effect to be performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or when the timer display effect changes, for example, while the timer notification effect is being executed If there is no change in the display, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and it is easy to be notified of the pseudo run, but if the timer display changes during execution of the timer advance notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-series notification may be performed earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (C1) to FIG. 25 (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed and the countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a balloon in which the characters “Timer notice level UP” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes, for example, from white to red, and it is informed that the big hit reliability of the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the timer display being counted down, it is informed that a notice with a very high reliability may be given as a notice to be performed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (D1) to FIG. 25 (D5) show an example of effects in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted and resumed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and "06: 99" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a balloon in which the character of "stop" is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. Note that the timing at which the display of the balloon with the text “stop” starts may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, or the display of the balloon with the text “stop” started. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the balloon may be started to be displayed with the word “stop”.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D2), a state is shown in which the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo run is to be performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is suspended, and the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 remains "06: 99".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again, and it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is performed. It is done. In addition, "x 2" which shows that the fluctuation display of the 2nd decoration symbol by pseudo | simulation run is performed is displayed under the 2nd decoration symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), a balloon in which the characters “resume” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D4), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is resumed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. As described above, in this example of the effect, it is indicated that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while the predetermined effect such as pseudo ream is being performed, and the countdown can be resumed after the effect is completed. It is done.

  Note that, as an example of the change of the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1, the number of the timer notices TM1 may be changed (increased or decreased) more than before the change. For example, when one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased to two or more when it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, and conversely, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased. If three advance notice displays TM1 are displayed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less when it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by timer notice display TM1 may be divided and displayed by timer notice display TM1 originally displayed, or originally The timer notice display TM1 displayed may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer notice notice TM1 notifying 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10) The timer notice display TM1 for notifying the second becomes two). In addition, when the number of timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer announcements TM1 notifying 10 seconds, if it is reduced to one, the timer announcements TM1 notifying 10 seconds become one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 changed due to increase, decrease, etc., the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or may be started at different timings.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually. In the effect example shown in FIG. 26, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the illustration of the first large-screen behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character objects 224Gd and the one-hundred box character article 224H is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 26 (A1) to FIG. 26 (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), a state is shown in which variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “05: 89” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), a balloon in which the character of “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S. The time to be added is reported.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner thereof overlaps the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A4), the sub display device 208S is lowered and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A5), in the timer advance notice display TM1, the count up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub display device 208S. In the example of the effect, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 26 (B1) to FIG. 26 (B7) shows another example of the timer-added effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 54” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icon is switched to the display of the character of "+10 seconds", and the timer is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be done is informed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count up animation display is started in the timer notice display TM1. The effect is that the time is added. At least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts. The sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol display After being positioned on the substantially central front side of the device 208, the count-up animation display may be started, or it may be counted up before the sub display device 208S is positioned on the substantially central front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B4) to FIG. 26 (B5), the sub display device 208S performs countdown display of the additional time. More specifically, the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by one second, while the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is increased by one second. . In this example of presentation, while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without interruption.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is "0 seconds", the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 It is updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to specify, but is displayed in a distinguishable manner It is also good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B6), in the sub display device 208S, the display of the additional time is switched to the display of “Restart” indicating that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is resumed. The sub display 208S starts to descend toward the initial position.

  FIG. 26 (B7) shows a state in which the sub display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is resumed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B7), the timer display is "14:23". After that, the display of “Restart” displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, display of the fluctuation icon h0 and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 26 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown restarts may be the same as the timing at which the sub display device 208S starts to descend, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub display device 208S starts to descend. Alternatively, after the sub display device 208S starts to descend, the countdown of the timer display may resume. Also, the timing at which “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display restarts, or after “Restart” is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be resumed, or after the countdown of the timer display is resumed, the display of “Restart” may be started on the sub display device 208S. Also, the timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position may be the same as the timing at which the timer display countdown restarts, or after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub display 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown resumes.

  The effect examples shown in (C1) to (C6) of FIG. 26 show another example of the timer-added effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), it is shown that variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the timer announcement effect is started, and in the timer announcement display TM1, “05: 89” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C1), a balloon in which the character of “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is reported. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the display of the suction animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S by the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the suction is displayed from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how you are doing is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, causing a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S to overlap with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the character of "+10 seconds" displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM is extended toward the timer advance notice display TM1 and displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a look that is surprised by the appearance.

  FIG. 26 (C3) shows that the display of the suction animation is continued. Specifically, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 by the suction animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of “+10 seconds” continues to be the sub-display 208S. And the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the count-up animation described above is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that it is going to the timer notice display TM1 while shrinking. While the navigation character YM sees the suction animation and performs an astonishing animation (animation accompanying the suction animation) when the suction animation is being displayed, it is not necessary to particularly perform the animation. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely absorbed by timer notice display TM1, the absorption animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C6), the timer In the advance notice display TM1, it is shown that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice may be performed only by one of the decorative symbol display devices.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram gradually showing another example of the timer advance presentation effect.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 27 (A1) to FIG. 27 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the example of effects shown in FIG. 27 (A1) to FIG. 27 (A4), although it is described using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), in order to facilitate the explanation A part of the 1-large-scale behavior character 224GA to the 4th-large-size behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H will be described by omitting illustration.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (A2), the second large-screen behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-pattern behavior object 224 Gd operate to overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time display is performed on the timer display in the timer advance display TM1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (A3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this example, the second large-area behavior part 224Gb and the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd out of the first large-area behavior part 224Gd to the fourth large-area behavior part 224Gd operate on the timer display 10. It is reported that the second addition is performed, but the time to be added may be different depending on the number of acting items among the first large behavior character objects 224 Ga to the fourth large behavior character objects 224 Gd, for example, When all of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd are activated, an additional 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this example, the second large-screen behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate only once to notify that the timer display is performed for 10 seconds, but the operation is The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times, for example, when the second large-scale behavior character 224 Gb and the fourth large-size behavior character 224 Gd are operated three times, the timer display may be performed for 30 seconds. May be

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 27 (B1) to FIG. 27 (B4) show examples of timer-added effects using the family crest item 224E. In addition, although it is demonstrated using the presentation apparatus 206 shown by FIG. 14 (a) by the example of a production | presentation shown to FIG. 27 (B1)-the figure (B4), in order to demonstrate easily Description will be made with the illustration of 224 Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224 Gd and the one thousand box character article 224 H omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 99” is displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (B2), the family crest 224E operates and ascends to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper and lower portions at that position Operate in the direction. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of pieces and displayed around the overlapped family crest item 224E. Specifically, one “+5 seconds” display, two “+2 seconds” displays, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround household crest 224E, whereby timer notice display TM1 is performed. It is informed that an additional 10 seconds will be performed on the timer display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (B3), in the timer advance notice display TM1, an effect of performing count-up animation display and adding time is started.

  Thereafter, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. In this example of rendering, the family crest item 224E is operated only once to notify that the timer display is to be performed for 10 seconds, but even if the time to be added differs depending on the number of operations. For example, if the family crest 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 27 (C1) to FIG. 27 (C6) show another example of the timer-added effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 27C1 to FIG. 27C, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first held icon h11 is held in the held display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and “1” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the second number-of-retentions display disposed in the upper right corner of the display area. A first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first UI unit 280 displays a variation icon h0 and a navigation character YM.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, timer advance notice effect is performed, and countdown of timer display is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display, and in this example, when the timer display is "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. Note that the countdown may be performed continuously without interrupting the countdown.

  In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters of "10 seconds on top" are displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, As shown in FIG. 27 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is less visible than in the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped. It has become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (C4), the display of “15:00” indicating the time in which 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second It is displayed straddling the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (C5), the display of “15:00” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The two decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, After the display of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" in the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial position, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Ru. In addition, the countdown of a timer display in the state (For example, the state shown, for example, FIG. 27 (C4)) in which the display of "15:00" was displayed straddling the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decorative symbol display apparatus 208N. May be resumed. It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when the timer display is displayed across multiple decorative symbol display devices than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The likelihood of a jackpot may be the same, and may be configured to be less likely to be a jackpot.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance presentation gradually.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 28 (A1) to FIG. 28 (A4) show another example of timer-added effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 28 (A1) to FIG. (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, timer advance notice effects are respectively started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this example of effect, two timer announcement effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is regarded as a first timer notice effect, and the timer notification effect performed by the third decoration symbol display device 208N is regarded as a second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), "05: 89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15: 89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is done.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the direction in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this effect example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 28 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each of 208N is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Ru. At this time, the timer display countdown is interrupted but may not be interrupted. In addition, a timer display of "20:00" at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N However, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other, making it difficult to view. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 28 (A3) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device According to the movement of 208N, the scroll display is performed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in accordance with the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N corresponds to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display "20:00" to the left. In the process of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a first decorative symbol display device 208L and a third decoration When “20:00” displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, it is shown in FIG. 28 (A3). As shown, the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (A4), the timer display of “20:00” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is resumed. Note that the countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 28 (A3)). Here, the probability of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this example, the first display of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first 2) It is more likely to be a big hit than being divided and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the likelihood of becoming a big hit may be the same or it may be difficult to be a big hit).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 28 (B1) to FIG. 28 (B3) show an example of a timer-added effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, although the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) is applied in the rendering example shown in FIG. 28 (B1) to FIG. 28 (B3), in this rendering example, it is changed to the family crest 224E, and FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 28 (B1) to FIG. 28 (B3), in order to facilitate the explanation, for the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd and a part of one thousand box character article 224H Description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer notice display TM1, “05:71” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character “+10” in the simple display is displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer advance display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 28 (B1), all of the first decorative symbol and the variation icon h0 and part of the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11 and the timer notice display TM1 are turned by the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I. It overlaps with the rotation area and is considered to be difficult to view.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" displayed only on the POV display 224I so far Is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the characters "+10" are displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the character "+10" is performed so as to match the display of the character "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to perform display in which a sense of unity is given by the display of “+10” on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters “+10” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example of effect, the font of the number displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the font of the number displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

  Thereafter, after the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is decreased, as shown in FIG. 28 (B3), it stops in the initial posture. At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to view than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this effect example, 10 seconds are subsequently added to the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 28 (C1) to FIG. 28 (C5) show other examples of timer-added effects using a plurality of display devices (the decorative symbol display device 208 and the POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (C1) to FIG. 28 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 28 (B1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “06: 87” is displayed, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to a position on the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. Note that the whole of the variation icon h0 and a part of the first decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped on the POV display 224I, and it is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotation speed and is made constant rotation, as shown in FIG. 28 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer advance display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown continues. Also, at this time, it is shown that the time displayed on the timer display is divided into a plurality of pieces and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one “+5 seconds” display, two “+2 seconds” displays, and one “+1 second” display are displayed so as to surround household crest 224E, which causes the timer display to be displayed for 10 seconds. It is informed that the addition of

  Thereafter, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28 (C3) displays an effect that the timer display bursts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (C4), the timer display after being added is “15:00”. Is displayed. In the example of the effect, when “15:00” is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but may be performed continuously.

  Thereafter, the rotational speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and thereafter, the countdown is resumed. The countdown may be resumed while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, if the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easier to be a big hit May be the same or may not be a big hit.

  In addition, in the timer advance presentation described so far, when the timer display is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, internally from the start of the countdown before the change to the end of the countdown after the change. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time before change may change, and after change, the time of change may be counted down (for example, if it changes 10 seconds after the countdown starts, If you count down 10 seconds and display "attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). In addition, the indication of the countdown may coincide with the time for internally counting down.

  FIG. 29 is a view showing in stages an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 29, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in the example of the effect, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

  FIG. 29 (1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 17 (25). FIG. 29 (1) shows a state of development into super reach (swords reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), animation of a duel scene between the hero of the protagonist and the sword character of the enemy character. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach production, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the progress of the current reach production is summarized according to its position. Informing Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. In this production example, when the animation display of the duel scene is started, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started, but the display of the state of development to the super reach shown in FIG. 29 (1) is started. The display may be started at the specified timing, may be started when the reach state is reached, may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may change The display may be started when the display is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (3), it is shown that the character SAH of the sabo hani starts moving from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (4), the character BOY of the bowie appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side at the timing when the sabohani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. It can be said that this boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice by chance up character display is given. It is reported that Note that the timing at which the display of the BOY character BOY starts may be the same as the timing at which the display of the balloon of the SABOHANI character SBH is started, or after the display of the BOY character BOY starts, the balloon of the SBOH character SBH is displayed. The character BOY may be displayed, or the character BOY of the boui may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani is started. It should be noted that while the advance notice based on the display of the character BOY of the Boy is given, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed. Further, in this presentation example, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed when the SABOHANI character SBH approaches a check point. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be enlarged, or only the portion of the relevant check point may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (8), when the character SBH of SaboHani reaches the second check point CP2, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT It is displayed, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (10), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the second check point CP2 until the button operation by the player is performed or the operation valid period has elapsed, but may not be stopped.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (11), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. After that, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (12) It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 29 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the Tonosama is displayed, and a notice effect notifying that the big hit reliability is high is performed . In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the tombstone is a cut-in image of a special display mode in which it is shown surrounded by a golden frame and wearing a sunglasses and running a large bike while turning a cigar. It reports that the credibility of the big hit is dramatically high. Note that instead of the cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29 (13), a cut-in image CI3 (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a reliability lower than that of the cut-in image CI3 is displayed. May be The cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period, and the effect button 136 is effective for operation. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within a period. In addition, the cut-in image CI1 of this crown-like as shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button It may be displayed whenever the operation effective period elapses without the operation 136 and may not be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (14), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. It is informed that a notice has been made by the display of an image. In addition, the timing when the display start of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord will be the same as the timing of the display start of the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani, or the character of the sabothani after the display of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord A balloon of SBH may be displayed, or a cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that while the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second check point CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, it may not be stopped. Further, in this presentation example, the timing at which the sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 may be the same as the timing at which the button presentation is started, and the sabohani character SBH may be used as the second check point CP2. After reaching the button effect may be started, or after the button effect is started, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2. In the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the statue is not displayed when the effect button 136 is not operated and the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect button is also operated when the effect button 136 is not operated. In the same manner as when the 136 is operated, it may be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, or it may not be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, or the advance notice of the chance up Only a part of the occurrence may be informed (for example, the balloon may not be displayed, and only the letters "UP" may be displayed).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (16), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  Thereafter, when the sabo-hani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (17), the lever image 136 Va is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In the vicinity of the character SBH, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed, and it is informed that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. It should be noted that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started during display of the balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, but may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT, and vice versa. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all of the m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and while the chance up meter CMT is displaying, a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped. It is also good.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (20), when the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation by the player is performed or the operation effective period has elapsed.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (21), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani character SBH is positioned in front of the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. The large-scale behavior character object 224Gd and the one-handed box character object 224H are activated to emit light from the light guide plate IL, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, the effect (the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd and the one thousand boxed thing 224H are activated when the production lever 126V shown in FIG. 29 (23) is operated, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL) The effect produced when the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 17 (40) are the same, but may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the first and second box character 224H are returned to their initial positions, respectively, The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. Although the chance up meter CMT is also faded in with the fade in of the animation display of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the fade in of the animation display of the due battle scene is completed. . The operations of FIG. 29 (23) to FIG. 24 (24) are performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 17 (38) to FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (25) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SAH of the sabothani reaches the final point GP, and the placard indicates the letter “V” indicating that the jackpot will be made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (26), the main character of the main character wins over the sword player of the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 28 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. In addition, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, Sabohani characters SBH and placards) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the production | presentation using the chance up meter CMT mentioned above, there may be a case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed, and a case where it is not displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may not be different between when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when it is not displayed.

  In addition, there may be a notice of the chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  In addition, there may be a notice of the chance increase appearing regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

  In addition, the position of the check point may move or the check point may be erased while the presentation in the chance up meter CMT is being performed.

  In addition, during execution of the rendering in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani indicating the current position returns to a position before the current position (position indicating the past) or indicates the position ahead (pointing to the future) Position).

  In addition, the effect itself in the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game, and for example, when an effect is performed at a position indicated by a check point, an effect such as increasing the chance may be performed. Also, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at a check point, and an effect may be performed such that the chance is raised when fighting against the ally character and winning.

  Further, as an effect of chance increase (for example, rank increase bonus, probability change promotion, promotion to a big hit game with more balls, etc.) during the execution of the big hit game, an effect using the chance up meter CMT may be performed.

  Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by power interruption. Further, although the chance up meter CMT itself may return the display, the history of the timing of the check point and the occurrence of the effect of the chance up before the power failure may be hidden.

  In addition, the effect displayed after the count display of the count display in the timer advance effect becomes 0 may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT, or may be performed.

  FIG. 30: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter.

  FIG. 30 (3a) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (2), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (3) is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (4a), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, but no advance notice is given. That is, it is shown that the advance of the chance increase is not performed even if the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (5a), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (5a) to FIG. 30 (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani is the first check point It passes CP1 as it is, and the marking at the first checkpoint CP1 and the display of the letters "UP" are not performed. As a result, in the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the advance notice has ended without failure. In addition, when the advance notice of the chance up is not performed at the first check point CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a ′), the display of the first check point CP1 may be erased. Also, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a ′ ′), in place of the letter “UP” displayed at the first check point CP1, the display of “x” indicating that the advance of the chance up was not performed. May be performed. In addition, even if the advance notice of the chance up is not actually performed, it is assumed that the advance notice of the chance up is performed after the SABOHANI character SBH passes the check point, marking at the check point or “UP”. The character of may be displayed. For example, once marking at the check point or non-display of the character of "UP", the character of marking or "UP" may be displayed, Sabohan's character SBH may return to the check point to give a notice of chance improvement, and may display the marking and the character of "UP". Further, for example, an effect of rewinding the reach effect to the beginning or to the middle is performed, and then, when the SABOHANI character SBH passes the check point, an effect of chance increase is performed, and the character of marking or "UP" May be displayed.

  FIG. 30 (17b) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (16), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (17) is performed. In addition, at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a display of a question mark, and when the SBOH character SBH reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the appearance of the lever effect as the advance notice of chance up is not started It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (19b), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (17b) to FIG. 30 (20b), the character SBH of Sabohani is the third check point. It passes CP3 as it is, and the marking at the third checkpoint CP3 and the display of the letters "UP" are not performed. In FIG. 30 (19b), it is shown that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and the player can now accept the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 30 (20b), it is shown that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, Sabohani character SBH is positioned in front of the final point GP.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (21b) within the operation effective period, the ornamental symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (22b) Along with the line, "Is it removed ...", it is displayed that the game won't be won. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the placard at the final point GP is displayed with the word "progress", and it is informed that the reach effect is developed.

  Thereafter, after the display of the cut-in image CI4 by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 30 (23 b) is performed, as shown in FIG. 30 (24 b), an effect that the panda character appears as a helper in swordsman reach. Is started. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and travels toward the start point SP.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (25 b) to FIG. 30 (29 b), a display for changing the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the sabo hani character SBH on the way to the start point SP of the sabo hani character SBH Do. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (26b) to FIG. 30 (27b), for example, a part of the chance up meter CMT after the change appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears due to the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. As shown in FIG. 30 (28b) to FIG. 30 (29b), the fourth check point CP4 appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (29b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is again located at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are in the display state before the change (the state in which the red marking is not attached and the letter "UP" is not displayed) It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b) shows a state where it has developed into an SP Ken-Age reach. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Figure 30 (30b), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-Awa reach in that the hero of the main character and the enemy Kana of the enemy are facing each other, but following the panda as a helper of the hero. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30 b), the copanda cheering party KPD composed of three copanda characters is cheering at the timing when the sabothan character SBH reaches the fourth check point CP4. An announcement is made to show that the situation is being reported, and it reports that the credibility of the SP Ken-Atsu reach for the big hit has been dramatically increased. It can be said that this copanda cheering party KPD functions as a chance-up character. The copanda cheering party KPD may always appear in the SP swordsman reach, or may not appear.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (31b), a balloon with the word "chance up copanda cheering party" appended is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and the notice by chance up character display is a line It is reported that it was. In addition, the timing when the display start of the copanda cheering party KPD may be the same as the timing of the display start of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, or after the display of the copanda cheering party KPD is started, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is It may be displayed, or the copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that, while the advance notice by the display of the copanda cheering party KPD is being performed, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (32b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has reached the fifth check point CP5. Then, the display of "Collaboration Killing" to the effect that chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lever image 136Va is displayed together with the display of "One shot" as shown in FIG. Be done. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is notified that the advance notice by the lever effect is started. Here, the lever effect which is a chance up effect may not be performed, and a button effect which is an effect of operating the effect button 136 may be performed. Also, the lever effect may be performed without fail.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth check point CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, effects are performed as described above and shown in FIG. 29 (24) to FIG. 28 (28), and it is notified that a big hit will be made.

  FIG. 30 (23c) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (22), and in the lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18) to FIG. (22), the effect lever 136V is operated by the player. It is shown that he failed in the production. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of the "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing.

  FIG. 30 (5d) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 29 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (5d), it is shown that a large number of booy characters BOY (booui group) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. . That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the Bowie group. If the character of the boy appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boy's character BOY appears alone. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters of “chance up BOY group” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and it is informed that the advance notice based on the chance up character display has been performed. As described above, different chance-up effects may be performed even with the same chance-up point, or the same effect may be performed with the same chance-up point.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter in stages.

  FIG. 31 (7e) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (6), and the same effect as FIG. 29 (7) is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 31 (8e) to (9e), in the chance-up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches a position before the third check point CP3. It waits at that place until the notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint CP3 is made. In addition, while the effect that the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the third check point CP3 is performed, an effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 29 (9) to The above-described button effect or the like shown in (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the character display of “UP” may be performed as being performed.

  FIG. 31 (2 f) is another example of effect following FIG. 29 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in a green rod shape, and instead of the character SBH of Sabohani, the status of the current reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the advancing speed of the marker MRK is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. Further, the display mode of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is represented by a question mark, and it is made to have an expectation for the advance of the chance up being performed. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the beginning and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

  31 (3f) following FIG. 31 (2f) shows that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (4f), the character BOY of the boy appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (5f), a balloon with the word "CHANCH UP BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice of chance up by the character display is performed. Is notified. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, as shown in FIG. 31 (5f) to FIG. 31 (6f).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (7 f-1) to FIG. 31 (7 f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move. At this time, in place of the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1, the letters “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been increased due to the appearance of the advance notice are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. In addition, the character BOY of the boy is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (7f-2).

  FIG. 31 (4g ') shows an example of an effect when the character MOY of Boy does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 31 (3f) is performed. It is done. Specifically, when the character BOY of Boye does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (4f), as shown in FIG. 31 (4g ′), the chance up meter CMT causes the first check point CP1 to be displayed. In place of the display of the question mark, the display of “x” indicating that the notice has not appeared is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g ′ ′), the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1 may be erased, and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g ′ ′ ′), the display mode may not be changed with the display of the question mark at the first check point CP1.

  FIG. 31 (2h) shows still another example of effect following FIG. 29 (1). The effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2 h) is the same as the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31 (2 f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are not displayed. It differs in the point. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the advance notice of the chance up, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the advance notice of the chance up is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (5h), a balloon with the word “CHANNEL UP BOY PASS” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice based on the character display of chance up has been performed. At this time, a part of the letters “UP” has appeared, which indicates that the reliability of the big hit has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31 (6 h) to FIG. 7 (7 h), as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” hidden becomes Appear.

  FIG. 32: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 32 (A1) to (A11) show that the chance up meter CMT reports the timing at which the pseudo run is generated and the number of occurrences of the pseudo run while the pseudo run is being executed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A1), a state is shown in which variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the characters “Secure Echigoya” are displayed, and it is shown that chase effect as an example of the pseudo continuous effect is started.

  Thereafter, FIG. 32 (A3) shows that the chase effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display in which the main character of the main character chases the evil merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (A3), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo link may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached while the marker MRK is moving, a pseudo link may occur. In addition, it is suggested that reaching the final point makes it possible for a devil merchant to be captured and to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this example of effect, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit as the pseudo ream occurs. In addition, if a pseudo ream occurs four times (that is, when a pseudo ream occurs when the final point is reached), a big hit is determined. It should be noted that the number of times of pseudo run may be determined to be a big hit by a number other than 4 times, for example, it may be determined to be a big hit when the number of times of pseudo run is 1 time and 4 times. The number of pseudo runs that will be determined as a big hit is less likely to occur than the other pseudo runs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (A6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “continuation” are displayed along with the display that the heroes of the main character are chasing the vice merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode. In addition, even if the timing when the character of “continuation” is displayed and the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character of “continuation” are the same as the display of driving the vice merchant by the main character The display of the first check point CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character of "continuation" after the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant. After the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character of "continuation", the character of "continuation" may be displayed together with the display in which the main character of the main character chases the evil merchant.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the main character of the main character and the evil merchant is shortened.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A8), the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the display of the main character of the lord chasing the evil merchant, and it is reported that the second pseudo-link will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second check point CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant has been changed, and the expression of the evil merchant who had been spared up to now has become an impatient expression.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A10), the characters “continuation” are displayed together with the indication that the main character of the hero is chasing the evil merchant, and it is reported that the third pseudo-link is performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third check point CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (A11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the main character of the main character has captured the vice merchant is displayed together with the display of the characters "secure". At this time, the chance up meter CMT indicates that the marker MRK has reached the final point, and in the symbol variation display of this time, the pseudo run has been performed three times in total. In addition, at this time, in the first decorative symbol, the "decorative 7" is in the reach state, and the reach effect is started.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 32 (B1) to FIG. 32 (B14), the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol, and a state of notifying the timing when the advance of the chance up occurs is shown. There is.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a notice of chance increase may occur, and the player is made to have a sense of expectation.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B3) shows that the marker MRK starts moving from the start point. In addition, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. In this example of presentation, the announcement by the balloon of the character of "Nov. character" of the navigation character YM is the announcement not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance directly related to the chance up meter CMT It may be a notice of up.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "appropriate" to "not". In response to this, a balloon with the word "chance up no" added is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that the advance of the chance up by the navigation character YM has been performed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may advance without waiting. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that a conversation notice is also started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. This conversational image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Further, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and it is considered that the Tonosama conversation image CI1 is more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped. Note that this conversational image CI1 is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” is hidden The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. In addition, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "No" to "Heating fever". In this example of presentation, the announcement by the balloon character of "super heat" of the navigation character YM is the announcement not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up related directly to the chance up meter CMT It may be a notice of In addition, the conversational image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the second decorative symbol. In this case, too, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, a conversation image CI2 of a whistle on which the above-described operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed together with the whistle character as a continuation of the conversational announcement. In addition, although this talk image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rattan. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, the balloon conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped by the balloon character YM balloon and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to recognize than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7). The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 32 (B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B8), the advance announcement of the navigation character is ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B9), as shown in FIG. The word "" may be displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. Furthermore, in this presentation example, the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is a display mode in which it is highlighted with a bold gold line, and is more likely to be a big hit than in the normal outer frame display mode. Is notified. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up gold frame” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK in response to the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle changing to gold. , It has been notified that the advance notice of the chance up in the conversation advance notice has been performed. The marker MRK stands by at the first check point CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but may advance without waiting. Note that if there is no operation of the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle may or may not be displayed. When the conversation image CI2 of a spear is not displayed, it may not be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or may be notified or only a part may be notified. (For example, only the characters "UP" are displayed).

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B11), it is shown that the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the speech balloon overlaps the speech image CI2 of the eyebrow, and the speech image CI2 of the eyebrow is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Note that the position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 32 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 32 (B11) from the beginning.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B12), with the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK advances and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the character of “UP” is hidden The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed in the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. Note that the display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation announcement ends, or may be deleted after the conversation announcement ends. In addition, the conversation announcement may end after the display of the balloon is deleted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state with "decoration 7". At this time, it is indicated that the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point, and the rendering by the chance up meter CMT is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect is started, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. In addition, the timing when the reach effect is started may be the same as the timing when the chance up meter CMT is erased, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance Reach production may be started after the up meter CMT is erased.

  In addition, production with the chance up meter CMT in this production example is ended when it reaches the reach state, but production may be continued even if it reaches the reach state, and it will continue even if it shifts to super reach You may do so. Moreover, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is ended. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT may be started, which is different from the presentation by the currently running chance up meter CMT. Moreover, the presentation by the chance up meter CMT may always start during normal symbol variation display, or may not start. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variation display, there is a case where the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started and a case where it is not started, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be always started. In addition, when it is possible to produce effects by the chance up meter CMT, when the effect button 136 is operated, the effects by the chance up meter CMT may be started. In this case, for example, a message to that effect may be displayed to make the player recognize.

  FIG. 33: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 33, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. 33 (A5), the effect is started by the chance up meter CMT, but it is shown that it is erased halfway.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current is The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the character SBH of Sabohani is Although 1 check point CP1 and 2nd check point CP2 were reached, respectively, since notice of the chance up corresponding to these did not occur, the display of 1st check point CP1 and 2nd check point CP2 is erased. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), it is shown that the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving from the second check point CP2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2), the display of cut-in is performed, which shows that the character of the beard having the nutritional drink is saying "Fight". The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be determined. Also, when this cut-in indication is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this example of presentation, it is indicated that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is finished by the advance notice which is likely to be a big hit than the advance of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT is performed. There is. Note that the display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is shown that rendering by the chance up meter CMT ends before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be shown that the appearance of the chance up meter CMT is finished before the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point. In this presentation example, the chance up meter CMT may always be ended halfway, or the chance up meter CMT may or may not be ended halfway. At this time, for example, the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends halfway or not, or the effect of the same content may be performed. . In addition, when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway. In addition, the reliability of the big hit when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway is the same as the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway when the notice of the chance up occurs at all the check points. It may be Alternatively, if the chance up meter CMT is not ended halfway, it may be more likely to be a big hit than if the chance up meter CMT is ended halfway.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "one blow", and it is shown that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation effective period elapses, “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. It is notified that it becomes a big hit combination of decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ". In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4 ′), “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is informed that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” will be lost. Be done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene is faded in, and a state is shown in which the main character of the main character has defeated the enemy player, and it is reported that .

  FIG. 33 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), a cut-in display is performed showing that the princess character is saying "Rewrite reach". The display of the cut-in is, for example, a notice that the reliability of the big hit is improved by assuming that effects of other contents are performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. When this cut-in indication is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, also in this example of presentation, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be shown that the situation is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased, but may not be erased.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a), a state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33 (A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but in this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and red respectively And marked with “UP”. That is, in fact, the notice of the chance up corresponding to the first check point CP1 and the notice of the chance up corresponding to the second check point CP2 were not performed, but both are represented as being performed and the big hit It is shown that the reliability of is improved.

  FIG. 33 (A3a′-1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 33 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), a state is shown in which the display is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 30 (30b), not the swordsman reach. The SP Kenshou reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than the Kensou reach. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), there is a chance for showing up the situation in which the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. An advance notice is displayed, and it reports that the credibility against the big hit of the SP Ken-Atsu reach is dramatically high. The child panda cheering party KPD may always appear or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

  FIG. 33 (A3a′-2) is an example of effect following FIG. 33 (A2a), and shows an example of effect different from FIG. 33 (A3a′-1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that of FIG. 33 (A3a′-1). That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed, specifically, As described above with reference to 30 (30b), it is the chance up meter CMT that is displayed when shifting from the sword strike to the SP sword strike. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the copanda cheering party KPD has appeared at the fourth check point CP4 which has passed and shifted to SP Kengo reach. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, and it is shown that a notice of chance improvement is made. In addition, when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the SABOHANI character SBH may be located at the start point SP, and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, and the SABOHANI character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located at the end of the SP Kenshou reach.

  FIG. 33 (A3a ′ ′) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a ′ ′) shows that the full rotation reach starts. The full turn reach is a reach where the big hit is decided, and it is not necessary to give the player more sense of expectation, so the display of the chance up meter CMT is not performed again, but FIG. 33 (A3a ′ ′ ′ ′ As shown in), the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the big hit will be decided when all the rotation reach starts, so the position of the SABOHANI character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing the fifth check point CP5. , The placard may be displayed with "V" indicating that it is a big hit. Note that the timing at which the full rotation reach starts may be the same as the timing at which the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, or after the full rotation reach starts, the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the sabothan character SBH reaches the final point GP. Also, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts may be the same as the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, or the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full turn reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

  FIG. 33 (A2 b) to FIG. 33 (A3 b) show another example of effect following FIG. 33 (A1).

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large-screen behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the effects of overlapping the first on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd are operated. And the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 33 (B1) to (B4), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but since the result of losing is displayed on the way, the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is ended It is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the character SBH of Sabohani is Although 1 check point CP1 has been reached, no notice of chance up corresponding to this has occurred, so the red mark and “UP” are not displayed on the first check point CP1. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), it is shown that the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving from the first check point CP1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B2), it is shown that the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed to notify that the possibility of losing is high. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B3), the main character of the main character loses to the host of the swordsman, and the "symbol 6" is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it will be lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, it is displayed that the character SBH of Sabohani is a lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (B3 '), although "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol and it is informed that there will be a loss, in the chance up meter CMT, the sabotary character SBH is the final It may be displayed that it progresses toward the point GP as it is. After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (B4), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after swing fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”.

  FIG. 34: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter.

  In FIG. 34, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 34 (A1) to FIG. 34 (A5), it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is once erased in the middle of the effect by the chance up meter CMT and then displayed again.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. It is shown that Sabohani's character SBH is starting to move from the start point SP.

  Thereafter, FIG. 34 (A2) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of the chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is darkened to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL more visible. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted by darkening display is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also resumed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the word “chance up illumi irradiance” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH to notify that the advance of the chance up has been performed. The light emission of the light guide plate IL continues to be performed.

  FIG. 34 (A4) shows that light emission of the light guide plate IL is ended and fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it, indicating that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown.

  FIG. 34 (A5) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move.

  In this production example, the presentation by the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed as a notice of the chance up in the reach production, but it is not limited to the one described above, for example, the character SBH of Sabohani at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in an effect that reaches and tells whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, in addition to the presentation on whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is applied to the production about whether it will be a big hit, or something else (for example, the development develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) You may Also in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the effect by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 34 (B1) to FIG. 34 (B6) show that the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, and the character BOY of Boi appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that the advance notice of the chance up is performed. Furthermore, in this effect example, guidance display is performed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, the icons indicating the upper key and the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the characters “not displayed by the arrow key operation” are displayed. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the sword strike is started, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the sword strike is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B2), a balloon with the word “chance up BOY pass” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a notice of chance up by the character display is given. Is notified.

  Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 34 (B4) . Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B5), when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, as shown in FIG. 34 (B6), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again. At this time, the SABOHANI character SBH is at the position where it should be positioned when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 34 (B2) may not be displayed, and the rendition in the chance up meter CMT may be resumed from a place where the touch is good. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (B6 '), when the display between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the character SBH of Sabohani The second check point CP2 may be located before the second check point CP2, and may stand by at that position until the advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 is reached. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B6) and FIG. 34 (B6 '), the first check point CP1 is marked in red and the “UP” is marked due to the appearance of the Boy's character BOY. The letter is displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B6), the characters "UP" are overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani and are considered to be difficult to view.

  In the example of effect shown in FIG. 34 (B1) to (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched any number of times in accordance with the operation of the player, but the chance up meter CMT After being displayed, after being made non-displayed by the operation of the player, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until presentation by the next chance up meter CMT is performed.

  In addition, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially not displayed. It may be configured to be in the closed state.

  FIG. 35: is a figure which shows in steps the other example of the presentation which used the chance up meter. In FIG. 35, an effect example in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed is shown.

  In FIG. 35, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 35 (A1) to FIG. 35 (A2) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb respectively display the same content.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0 interposed therebetween. In this rendering example, the chance up meter disposed on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter disposed on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. In addition, these chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1), first check points CP1a and CP1b, second check points CP2a and CP2b, and third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. The first check point CP1a (CP1b) to the third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks, and are designed to give a sense of expectation that the advance of the chance up will be made. Here, the check point indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check point indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are for the same advance notice of the chance up. In this example, although two chance up meters are displayed, only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters are displayed rather than when only one chance up meter is displayed. The display may be more likely to be a big hit, or the likelihood (reliability) of the big hit may be the same. Further, when the effect is displayed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed. Also, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Moreover, in this example of presentation, although the advancing speed of 1st chance up meter CMTa and 2nd chance up meter CMTb is made the same, you may differ, for example, the advancing speed of 2nd chance up meter CMTb However, it may be faster than the advancing speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first check points CP1a and CP1b, and the character BOY of Boi appears, so that “near the markers MRKa and MRKb A balloon with the word “BOY passing BOY passing” is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is informed that the advance of the chance up by the character display has been performed.

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2 '), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the word "CHANNEL UP BOY passing" is displayed on the balloon, and the reliability of the second chance up meter CMTb is displayed. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the Boy's character BOY.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2 ′ ′), when the display of a state in which the character BOY of the Boy is singing a nasal song as a rare advance notice is performed with the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. Display the word “chance up BOY passing” on the balloon of the up-meter CMTa, and display the word “chance-up nasal song” on the balloon of the second chance-up meter CMTb to the effect that rare notice has occurred. It is also good.

  In this example of presentation, the advancing speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same between the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may advance at different speeds. Moreover, although the balloon is displayed on both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb in this example of presentation, it may be displayed on only one of them.

  FIG. 35 (A2a-1) to FIG. 35 (A2a-2) show another example of effect following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-1) subsequent to FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the character BOY of Boye appears. A balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” attached to the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by the character display is displayed. It has been informed that it has been done.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter Only CMTb is displayed. Thus, after displaying two chance up meters, either one may be erased, for example, when one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be easier to be a big hit than it is, or it may be a big hit if it is not erased. Also, the reliability may be different depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

  FIG. 35 (A2 b-1) to FIG. 35 (A2 b-2) show still another example of effect following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2 b-1) subsequent to FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMT b and the appearance of the boy character BOY appears. A balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing” attached to the vicinity of the markers MRKa and MRKb is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of chance up by the character display is displayed. It has been informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the big hit. It can be called an aspect. Note that only one of the two chance up meters may be changed, or both may be changed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed out of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. The second chance-up meter CMTb is displayed and only the second confidence-up balloon is displayed. As described above, after displaying the two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. In addition, after displaying two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which a balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 35 (B1) to FIG. 35 (B2) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display notices of different chance ups.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), an animation of a duel scene of a hero's lord and a hostess swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (B1), three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, third check point CP3a) are present in the first chance up meter CMTa. It is arranged. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two check points (the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b are the first check points. The timings of the notice and the start of the corresponding chance increase are different from any of CP1a to third check point CP3a. In this example of rendering, when the timings at which the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b arrive are arranged in chronological order , The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1 a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b, and the character of the Boy BOY is starting to sing. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the word "chance up" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, and it is informed that a notice of chance up has been made.

  In this example of presentation, although both the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb were displayed, only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, the notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter not displayed is not displayed. It may not be performed, or may be notified of a chance improvement corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter not displayed. In addition, there may be a check point not to be notified when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even the check point being notified Good.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 35 (C1) to FIG. 35 (C4) show that the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different advance chance notices.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), an animation of a duel scene of the main character of the main character and the enemy player of the sword is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the fluctuation icon h0. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter indicating the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (evolution point CPA) is arranged It is done. This development point CPA indicates points at which reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the check point, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb, When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this rendering example, a period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and a period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this demonstration example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb is a display mode, and is the same as the display mode shown in FIG. 29 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is set as a display mode corresponding to the first period, and three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, A third check point CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance increase may occur when the marker MRK reaches each check point. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the character SBH of the Sabohani in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C2) shows that button effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. In addition, in the first chance up meter CMTa, the letters “UP” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred is displayed at the first check point CP1, and the appearance that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2 is It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up appearing as a result of the button effect. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SAH of SABOHANI is advancing toward the development point CPA.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1, and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that a cut-in display is performed showing that the princess character says "Rewrite reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. In addition, when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be extinguished.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C4), a state is shown in which a cut-in image of a panda is displayed and transition is made to SP swords reach. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two check points (fourth check point CP4 and fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check is It has been shown that when the marker MRK reaches the point, a notice of chance increase may occur. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani advances from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 36A1 to FIG. 36A7 show that the chance up meter CMT reports the timing at which the pseudo run is generated and the number of occurrences of the pseudo run while the pseudo run is being executed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), a state is shown in which variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), characters such as "Please secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that a chase effect as an example of the pseudo continuous effect is started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol swings and fluctuates in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, below the second decorative symbol, a chance up meter CMT is displayed, and in this chance up meter CMT, a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2 and a third check point CP3 are arranged. It is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo link will occur at each checkpoint. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of "continuation" is displayed together with the display that the main character of the hero is chasing the vice merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo run will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character “continuation”. Further, at this time, although the first decorative symbol is not displayed, for example, the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A4), it is shown that the first variable symbol display of the first decorative symbol (that is, the second variable symbol display of the decorative symbol) is performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A5), although the vice merchant has been missed, it is shown that it has developed into a reach by having revived one thousand boxes. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the indication of the second check point CP2 has moved from the question mark to the reach state to the letter “R”. It has been switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo-series effect ends on the way, and as shown in FIG. 36 (A6), the display of the pseudo-series effect fades out with the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and downward respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the fluctuation icon h0. While being framed out below the display area, the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased with the completion of the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-series effect. As described above, the chance up meter CMT may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when it reaches the end than when it ends at a checkpoint on the way. Also, the likelihood of a big hit may be made different depending on the check point reached.

  Moreover, you may be performed in the point shown to FIG. 36 (A6 a-1)-the figure (A6 a-2) as an presentation example which makes the chance up meter CMT non-display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (A6) and FIG. 36 (A6 a-2), when the pseudo connected effect is ended halfway in FIG. 36 (A5), the chance up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out to the outside of the display screen.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 36 (B1) to FIG. 36 (B7) shows that the chance up meter CMT performs during the period from the start of the reach effect to the development of the super reach. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B1), a state is shown in which the reach effect shifted to reach by "decoration 7" is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. And in this example of presentation, when reach production starts, chance up meter CMT is displayed under the 2nd decoration design, production which uses chance up meter CMT is done. The presentation using the chance up meter CMT is performed until transition to the super reach or until a loss is displayed without transition to the super reach. Further, in this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B1), in reach presentation, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, the notice of the chance up corresponding to each check point is made Is performed and the character "UP" to that effect is displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative pattern.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward and downward, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 leaves the fluctuation icon h0 below the display area. A state is also shown in which the pending icon h11 displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out as well as being framed out. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B3), the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Furthermore, in this example, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. ing. In this example, while the marker MRK continues to move while the first large-screen behavior character 224G to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are operating, the first large-pattern behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large screen The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavior object 224Gd is in operation. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be made non-displayed while the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd are in operation. Further, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 36 (B3), a balloon with the word “chance up large board behavior” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the first large board behavioral character 224 Ga to the fourth large board behavioral character It is notified that the notice of the chance up by object 224Gd was performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 36 (B6), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position. Although the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT at the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated after the marker MRK has reached the final point Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished. Further, in this example, the first decorative symbol is disposed on the front side of the chance-up meter CMT after the first large-area behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd are operated, and the left of the first decorative pattern The first overlapping design is placed on the front side of the chance increase meter CMT before the first large movement character 224GA to the fourth large movement character 224Gd are operated although the design overlaps with the chance increase meter CMT. After the 1 large movement character item 224Ga to the 4th large movement character object 224Gd is operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped to the chance up meter CMT. You may In addition, it is not necessary to change the anteroposterior relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT before and after the operation of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd return to the initial position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (B7), it develops into super reach.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing another example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (A1) to FIG. 37 (A5), other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT overlap with the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. It is shown how it is done. Here, other effects may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, and other effects may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance up meter CMT is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT. The treasure box BX is an advance notice effect that is not related to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even during display of the treasure box BX, and continues to progress.

  In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, an advance notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and in the second check point CP2, the notification is made The display of the character "is performed. The treasure box BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A4), it is shown that the treasure box BX is opened, and the letters of “superheat” appear from inside. This "superheat" character display is also a notice effect unrelated to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (A5), the treasure box BX displayed overlapping the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is in an easily visible state.

  FIG. 37 (B1) shows that, during the execution of the presentation using the chance up meter CMT, another presentation unrelated to the chance up meter CMT is performed overlapping the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (B1), wipe is performed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT during execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that simultaneous effects are being performed on the wipe screen WP. Here, simultaneous rendering means, for example, a pachinko machine 100 of the same model attached to the same gaming island using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a clocking means or a built-in timer, and the same rendering content is the same. It is an effect performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when simultaneous rendering starts, and is erased when ending. In addition, the wipe screen WP may be displayed also when effects other than the simultaneous effect are performed.

  FIGS. 37 (C1) to (C2) show that an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

  In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 37 (C1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed into a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) is, for example, a meter that indicates the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position. The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

  After that, for example, the radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that the radio wave such as transceiver or the like is outputting a strong radio wave causing fluctuation in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by means, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2), an error display is performed by the character display of "radio wave detected" indicating that. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 37 (C2), this error display is not overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. It is applicable also to a door opening error etc. which occur when it is detected that a door member such as 1) is opened. Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, and the error notification may be performed by voice or lamp.

  FIG. 37 (C2a), FIG. 37 (C2b) and FIG. 37C (C2c) show other display examples of the error display, for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2b), a plurality of error displays can be simultaneously performed, and when an error occurs, the ones displayed in the vertical direction from the upper left side of the display screen are shown. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display is displayed to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), it is shown that an error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, for example, it is detected by the magnetic force detection means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100 In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), an error display by the character display of “Magnet detected” indicating that is performed over the entire display screen. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, for example, the game may not be progressed by not performing a part of processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is shut off, such as not performing a big hit determination. . In addition, when the power is shut off while the error display is being performed, and the supply of power is restored after that, the symbol fluctuation stop command that is being executed when the power is shut off has elapsed and the symbol fluctuation stop command is displayed. For example, “in preparation” may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub control unit 400.

  FIGS. 37D1 and D2 show that the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (D1) to FIG. 37 (D2), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. Is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (D1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that effects are being performed by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses according to the position The situation is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific advance notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the marker MRK is set to the first check point CP1. When it reaches, the notice of the corresponding chance up occurs, and the first check point CP1 displays the character of "UP" notifying that. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), it is shown that the marker MRK progresses from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2. In addition, in the sub display device 208S, the characters “vs Kengo” indicating that it has developed into a Ken-Age reach is displayed, and a fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 37 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is done. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is considered that the chance up meter CMT is less visible than in the case where it is not overlapped. In addition, on the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the main character of the main character with a speech balloon in which the characters "Match game" are displayed is displayed.

  In this example, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S as an example of the display means, but it may be overlapped with the chance up meter CMT by other display means. For example, a display unit configured of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp or the like is applicable.

  Further, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. You may Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In this example of presentation, although the example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped to another display has been described, it is also applied to the case where the timer advance indication TM1 is overlapped to another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

  In FIG. 38, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect example shown in FIGS. 38A1 to 38A9 is the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation announcement. Is shown to be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1 and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38A1, a button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including a button image 136a1 and a remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A2), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player. In addition, the operation effective period in the button effect by this navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136a and a remaining time display meter MT2 representing the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the operation valid period in the speech advance notice is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation effective period is started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the other's conversation image CI2, and the Tonosama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the bag is partially overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5), the operation valid period in the speech advance notice is started. The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). In addition, the operation effective period of the button effect by the conversation advance notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A5) to (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the notice of conversation is more than the decrease speed of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the notice of conversation is reduced earlier than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), as shown in FIG. There are times when the character "is displayed. Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. Also, on the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed changes to the character display of "superheat", notifying that the big hit reliability is considerably high. ing. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the rendering according to the button operation result is performed for both the button rendering in the conversation announcement and the button rendering by the navigation character YM by one operation of the rendering button. ing. In addition, the character display of "It is super fever" displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the wolf and the character display of "Extreme heat" displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM are also displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed. But may not be displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), an operation corresponding to the button effect started earlier. An effect corresponding to the result may be performed. That is, in this example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started earlier than the button effect in the preannouncement of conversation, as shown in FIG. Only the effect corresponding to the operation of (the letter display of “superheat” in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the advance notice of the conversation "The heat is intense" is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-2), when the player performs the second operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 28 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. An effect corresponding to the operation result is performed. That is, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation advance notice (character display of "It is intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the whistle) is performed.

  In this production example, when the production button 136 is operated when the operation effective period is started in each of the two button productions, the production with high priority is given to the button production with a large reduction rate of the gauge in the remaining time display meter. The effect corresponding to the operation of the button 136 may be performed, or the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed by giving priority to the button effect with a small speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter. It is also good.

  In addition, in this demonstration example, the change speed of the display mode of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 is different, but, for example, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the notice image CI2 of the eyelid until a certain time The speed may be the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may change when a certain time is reached. .

  Moreover, although the operation effective period which concerns on notice image CI2 of eyebrows was made into 5 seconds in this example of production, for example, it prepares in the case of 5 seconds and the case of 10 seconds, and the remaining time display meter at the speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation effective period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM becomes the same. In this case, when the operation effective period relating to the preliminary preview image CI2 of the eyebrows is selected to be 5 seconds, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is selected to be 10 seconds.

  Further, in this example of the effect, "It is intense heat in the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit whose extension has been started later than when" Extreme heat "is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect has been displayed earlier. If the "" is displayed, the jackpot is more reliable, which makes it easier to be displayed when the notice displayed later is a big hit, and the notice displayed later is displayed more easily. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying while the attention level is lowered relatively. In addition, "It is intense heat" is displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit whose extension has been started later than when "Extreme heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect has been displayed earlier In the case, the jackpot reliability may be lower or the jackpot reliability may be the same.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 38 (B1) to FIG. 38 (B11) show that both the timer advance notice effect and the effect using the chance up meter are being performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, below the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is performing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1) is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current position The progress status of the reach effect is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani goes from the start point SP to the final point GP. It is shown that when the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the way, a specific advance notice may occur, and the player has a sense of expectation. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B2), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the start point SP.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the sabothan character SBH reaches the first check point CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this example of presentation, it can be said that the start of the timer advance presentation is functioning as a notice of the chance up. In addition, “10:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM 1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B4), a balloon with the word "chance up timer advance notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, indicating that a chance up advance notice has been made. It is informing. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is performed, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B4).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (B5), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B5), "08: 81" is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B6), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B6).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B7), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the second check point CP2. In this example of presentation, the advance of the chance increase (for example, the occurrence of a cut-in) is performed when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. The letter "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been raised due to the appearance of the preliminary announcement is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the preliminary announcement is shown. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "04:14" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B7).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B8), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third check point CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, which shows that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (B9), in the timer advance notice display TM1, instead of the timer indication, the characters “attention” are displayed to urge attention to the notice. According to this presentation example, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is faster than the rate (speed) of the change to the whole display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP of character SBH of Sabohani to the final point GP by chance up meter CMT started earlier Can be said earlier.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the character SAH of Sabohani. It notifies that the advance notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is not only a notice of the chance up displayed corresponding to reaching the third check point CP3, but also a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. . That is, it can be said that the target of the notice of the chance up indicated in the effect by the chance up meter CMT and the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance effect are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of the chance up performed when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 is the same as the notice indicated by the word "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the target of the notice of the chance up indicated in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer advance effect, for example, the third check in the effect by the chance up meter CMT The notice of the chance up performed when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the point CP3 is the lever image 136Va, and the notice performed as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display mode of the appeared lever image 136Va with a higher reliability. (For example, it changes from red to gold).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that the reliability of the big hit has risen by the appearance of the notice, and the notice is displayed. A history of what has occurred is shown. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  FIG. 39 is a view showing step by step another example of the button effect.

  In FIG. 39, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (2), the appearance of the button effect is shown. In this effect example, six sets of operation promotion informing images, each of which is a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter, are displayed. Specifically, a first operation promotion notification image including a first button image 136a1 and a first remaining time display meter MT1 is disposed at the upper left of the display screen, and a second button image 136a2 and a second remaining time are arranged. The second operation promotion notification image including the display meter MT2 is disposed at the upper center of the display screen, and the third operation promotion notification image including the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. A fourth operation prompting notification image, which is disposed on the upper right and which includes the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is disposed on the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth residual image are displayed. The fifth operation prompting notification image consisting of the time display meter MT5 is disposed at the lower center of the display screen, and the sixth operation prompting consists of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 Notification image is arranged in the lower right corner of the display screen. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (3), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (4), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced for all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6. It is done. In this effect example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation effective period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation effective period for the other operation promotion notification image. The operation validity period is set to pass earlier than earlier. In addition, in this example of production, the length of the operation effective period is the same in all of the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (5), as shown in FIG. 39 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is a character of copanda It has been changed to KP, and it is shown that a notice is being made. In addition, the second operation promotion informing image to the sixth operation promotion informing image are not changed. That is, in this example of effect, only one operation promotion informing image among the plurality of operation promotion informing images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, the fifth operation promotion The display mode is changed one by one preferentially in the order of the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. In addition, the order of the operation promotion notification image which changes a display mode is not limited to what was mentioned above, It can set suitably. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136.

  In this production example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (the remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority when the production button 136 is operated). Although the gauge reduction is faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (when the effect button 136 is operated) In the remaining time display meter MT1, the reduction of the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation prompting notification image in which the display mode changes with priority given to the third is the other remaining time display meter MT1 , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4b), the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (sixth operation promotion notification in which the priority to change the display mode when the effect button 136 is operated is the lowest) The reduction of the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the image may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Moreover, as a remaining time display meter which accelerates | decreases a gauge reduction, it is not limited to what was mentioned above, It can set to an appropriate thing.

  Further, in this example of rendering, although any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image has the button images 136a1 to 136a6 as its configuration, the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), the sixth button image 136a6 is used as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, and the sixth operation is to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of may be displayed. In this case, any remaining time display meter of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same reduction rate of the gauge, as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), the sixth The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 is reduced faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images You may make it slow or you may make it slow. With such a configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 39 (4c) is performed, it is promoted to operate the effect lever 136V once after operating the effect button 136 five times. There are times when you can do it.

  Further, in this effect example, the rate of decrease of the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image is displayed for the remaining time display in another operation promotion notification image. Although different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4 d), there may be two or more cases in which the rate of decrease of the gauge of the remaining time display meter is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (4 d), the speed at which the gauges of the display meters MT 3 and MT 5 reduce the remaining time of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image is the other operation promotion notification. The remaining time meter MT1, MT2, MT4 and MT6 of the image is different from the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image, and the fifth corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image The rate of decrease of the gauge may be larger in the remaining time display meter MT5.

  FIG. 40 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 40, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 40 (A1) to FIG. 40 (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are being performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (A1) shows that two timer announcement effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started. “10:00” is displayed in each of the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this demonstration example, as described later, since the speed of the countdown of the timer display in one timer notice display is faster than the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display, the time until the countdown is completed is completed. It is different. In this example of the effect, among the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed at the upper side is called the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed at the lower side is called the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 then starts to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A3), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the two timer announcements TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM2 has a faster countdown speed than the first timer notice display TM1. Although the first timer notice display TM1 counts down as the actual time elapses, the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is “09:73”, and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is “06:73”. It has become. The countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notification display TM2 is set to the speed according to the passage of the actual time, The countdown speed of the timer notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, a state where 4 seconds have elapsed since the timer notice display countdown starts is shown. Can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A5), in the second timer advance notice display TM2, in place of the timer display, characters of “attention” are displayed to urge attention to the notice. On the other hand, the first timer notice display TM1 continues the countdown, and the timer display is "05: 87" at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A5). After that, there may be a case where a notice corresponding to the completion of the timer countdown of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed. The second timer advance notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, a frame out after the countdown is completed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A6), it is shown that the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. After that, there may be a case where a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is performed. After that, after the countdown is completed, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, a frame out.

  In this example of presentation, although the case where two timer announcement effects were started simultaneously was explained, two timer announcement effects may be started at different timings, in this case, for example, the timer announcement effect started earlier. The speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 40 (B1) to 40 (B4), a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for any one timer notice effect is added It shows.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is displayed in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (B1) shows that two timer announcement effects are simultaneously started. Specifically, the timer announcement effect is started when the timer announcement display (first timer announcement display TM1, second timer announcement display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area. “10:00” is displayed in each of the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this example of effect, the speed of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is the same.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B2), it is shown that the frame-in of two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 then starts to count down the timer display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the timer display is being counted down in each of the two timer announcements TM1 and TM2. The first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 both count down as the actual time has elapsed. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer announcement display TM1 and the second timer announcement display TM2 are “09: 73”. The countdown speed is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be slower or faster than the actual time lapse. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the time-based effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (B4), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since addition is not performed on the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2, a difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 Is occurring. Therefore, although two timer announcement effects are started, since time is added to one timer display on the way, the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

  In this example, although time addition is performed on one of the two timer notice displays, the time may be shortened (subtracted), or the timer notice effect may be performed. The countdown of any one timer display may be paused to make the time until the countdown is completed different.

  Also, in this example of rendering, the case has been described where two timer preview effects are started at the same time, but two timer preview effects may be started at different timings, in this case, for example, the timer preview started earlier. After adding the time to the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display relating to the timer notice effect started later being completed, the timer notice effect started earlier The countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display may be completed. In addition, the time is reduced for the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. Alternatively, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

  Further, in this example, when two timer notice effects are being performed, and the timer overdraft effect is performed, time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display according to any one of the timer notice effects. However, the time display (or shortening of time, temporary stop of countdown, etc.) is performed for the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, and any display mode of the timer notice display is also used. It may be changed.

  Also, after the two timer announcement effects are started, two timer addition effects etc. (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to the respective timer announcement effects are performed, whereby timer announcements pertaining to the timer announcement effects The time addition to the timer display in the display may be performed for each.

  In addition, after the two timer announcement effects are started, three timer addition effects etc. (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one timer announcement effect of the two timer announcement effects A change in timer display may be performed by the two timer addition effects or the like, and a change in timer display by the remaining one timer addition effect may be performed with respect to the other timer announcement effect. In addition, three timer addition effects and the like may be performed, for example, a change in timer display may be performed by only two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only one of the three timer addition effects and the like. A change of the timer display may be performed, or a change of the timer display may not be performed by any of three timer-based effects or the like.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 40 (C1) to 40 (C4), there is a remaining time display timer indicating an operation effective period for each of the plurality of operation means in the effect to urge operation of any of the plurality of operation means. It is shown that it is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” is displayed, which indicates that “1” is. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. In correspondence to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL , Remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Further, a right key image 137aR imitating a right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed corresponding to the right door image DRR, overlapping the right door image DRR, and also below the right key image 137aR. , The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed. Thereafter, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be received.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C2), the operation effective period of each of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 respectively corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR is started and the gauge is reduced. The situation is shown. In this rendering example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

  FIG. 40 (C3) shows that the left key is operated by the player and the left door image DRL is selected. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen to be enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. The right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. Thereby, notification that the left door image DRL has been selected is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and the appearance of the replay symbol RP is shown. Thereby, for example, it is predicted that a pseudo link will be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 40 (C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the right door image The door of DRR opens, and a pine pattern CC may appear. The character "Gekitsu" is added to this pine figure CC, which suggests that the jackpot's reliability has been dramatically increased.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when one of the two remaining time display meters is selected to have a faster decrease in gauge, a notice display with higher reliability is performed, but in any case Or the same display may be displayed. Further, when one of the two remaining time display meters is selected to have a slower decrease in gauge, a warning display with higher reliability may be performed.

  Further, in this example of rendering, the operation effective period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation effective period of the right door image DRR, but the lengths of the operation effective periods may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, the operation of the right key is performed while waiting until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0. It may be enabled, or while waiting, the operation of the right key may be disabled.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 41, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 41 (A1) to FIG. 41 (A12) shows that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and is displayed in a small size when the timer notice display is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. . Here, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of timer notice display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, timer notice display TM1 is large before the display of the countdown is started. The size may be displayed, the size may be displayed, or the display mode itself may be different.

  In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A2), “03:01” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A3), when "03:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds is reached, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated It is changed to the approximate center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. Note that the timer notice display TM1 in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged may be overlapped. Further, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the enlarged display is performed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "03:00", but there may be cases where the enlargement is not made, for example, timer notice When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Moreover, in this example of an effect, when timer advance notice display TM1 is expanded and displayed, a display position was changed, but a display position may not change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (A4) to FIG. 41 (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer notification display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is considered to be difficult to view by the enlarged timer notification display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. The word "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notification display TM1. In addition, after timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" does not need to be performed, and it is not necessary to perform any presentation.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately right center of the display screen). The timer advance notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is started in which the pseudo run symbol, in which the character of Tonosama is represented in the middle symbol, moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A11), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 41 (A12), the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo link will be executed.

  In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged when the timer display shows "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining in the timer notice effect, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. The color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numeric part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be displayed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from horizontal orientation to vertical orientation), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer Another element such as a character or a symbol may be added to the advance notice display TM 1, addition of time to the timer display may be performed, or time reduction to the timer display may be performed. The countdown of the timer may stop, or the speed of the countdown of the timer display may increase, or the timer display may count up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 is split and a new one is displayed. If the plurality of timer notices are displayed, the timer notices may be integrated into one timer notice.

  Also, in this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes of small size and large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, timer display or When displaying the "attention" character display in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when the timer display or the "attention" character display is displayed in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. The size may be displayed. By this, for example, the display mode may be able to be changed according to the reliability of the big hit.

  Further, in the example of the effect, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size, but for example, the size may be changed from the small size to the large size through the middle size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from small size to medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", medium size to large size It may be changed in size. Moreover, although it changes from small size to medium size, there may be a case where it does not change to large size.

  Further, in this example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). When the remaining time in the timer display becomes "00:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when displaying the text of "attention", the timer notice display TM1 The size may be changed to a large size.

  Further, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the color of the frame or the background of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc.). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made to differ depending on the size of the timer advance notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

  Also, for example, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the color of the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc. ). Also, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the size of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention" (for example, high reliability in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc. ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the shape of the character display of "attention".

  In addition, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, a certain effect may easily appear. For example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the pseudo run symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

  Further, in this example of the effect, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed. However, even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. May be Here, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily made.

  Further, in this example, at the time when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 starts to count down, the timer notice display TM1 is in the small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or at the start of the display of the timer notice display TM1. The display mode may be large.

  Further, in this example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display The size of may not be changed. Also, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer advance display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. In addition, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

  Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  Also, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer advance display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. In addition, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  The form of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed in form by animation, the timer display may also be changed in form by animation. In addition, although the form of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the animation, the timer display may not be changed. Further, although the timer display changes in form due to animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 41 (B1) to FIG. 41 (B4) show another example in which the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “00:31” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Moreover, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being changed and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (B2) to FIG. 41 (B3), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B2), although “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The word "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notification display TM1. In addition, after timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" does not need to be performed, and it is not necessary to perform any presentation. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. As described above, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character display of "attention" is performed. In addition, when the timer display becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 42A1 to 42A3, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, an example in which the timer advance notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode is displayed on another display means It shows. In the effect example shown in FIG. 42 (A1) to FIG. 42 (A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. Is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 42 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is disposed at the upper center of the sub display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed as the timer indication, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S in a small size. When the effect of the countdown by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A2), variation display of decorative symbols is still performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues in the timer advance notice display TM1, and "03: 01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A2).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S is moved to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement and enlargement display by animation may be performed. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged, or the timer notice display TM1 is a decoration symbol from the sub display device 208S. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208, or may be displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the movement and the enlarged display is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 42B1 to 42B, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, another display means is used to display the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode. An example is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is shown that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is one. "1" is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, “09: 69” is displayed as a timer display, and a countdown is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B2), variation display of the decorative symbol is still performed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is in operation, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is positioned on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The displayed decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped, and it is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, while the sub display device 208S is moving up, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The variation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, and the sub display device 208S completes the movement. May be erased after the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased when the sub display device 208S completes moving. Also, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. In addition, the display position of the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B3), when the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved to the sub display device 208S, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, movement and enlargement display by animation may be performed. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decoration symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged, or the timer notice display TM1 is displayed from the decoration symbol display device 208 as a sub The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208S, or may be displayed before the timer advance notice display TM1 straddles the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Although the countdown is continuously performed while the animation of the enlarged display is performed, the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the movement and the enlarged display is performed. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decoration symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 is displayed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously displayed. In this case, for example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. Furthermore, when displaying the timer notice display TM1 on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer displays on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. .

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 42 (C1) to FIG. 42 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09: 69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 42 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C2), “03:01” is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (C3), when the timer display shows "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is disposed inside the circular meter. As shown in (C3) to (C6) of FIG. 42, the display state of the circular meter section changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases in the clockwise direction from the 12 o'clock position as time passes. Although the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Also, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but for example, the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter part is enlarged when the remaining one second is reached It may be displayed. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be configured only by a circular meter unit, and the timer display may not be performed. In addition, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode, and it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to be recognized than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a in which the display mode has changed. In addition, when the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown continues while the animation of the change display is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the animation of the change display is being performed. When the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed without changing the timer display portion.

  Thereafter, as shown in (C4) to (C6) of FIG. 42, the countdown and the decrease display of the gauge in the timer advance notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". In this effect example, the effect of the countdown is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter section. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C5), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is considered to be difficult to view by the timer notice display TM1a. When stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 42 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a is changed to the timer display and the pseudo continuous effect is performed. The character "is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo connected effect is to be performed. In addition, character display other than "continuation" may be performed, for example, when it shifts to SP reach as a result of the countdown of a timer display completing, it displays as "SP reach" etc. It may be informed that it will shift. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “notice” may be displayed in order to focus attention on the occurrence of a notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character in the middle pattern is displayed on the middle symbol. A display is started in which the pseudo linked symbol moves at low speed from the top to the bottom. After that, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo run is executed.

  In this effect example, the character "continuation" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, but for example, a question mark is added to the character "continuation", etc. A display may be performed in which the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when the pseudo-series effect is performed, the big hit may be determined.

  Further, in the example of the effect, when the timer indications for the same effect are respectively displayed by a plurality of timer advance notice displays, one timer advance notice may be displayed in a large size, or both may be displayed. The timer advance notice may be displayed in a large size. Also, one of the timer notices is displayed as "03:00", and the other timer notice is displayed in a different manner, for example, roughly displayed as "3 seconds later". Display of countdown may be performed.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 43, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 43 (A1) to FIG. 43 (A8), a state is shown in which the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first icon for holding h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A2), it is shown that the timer-adding effect by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the character of "above" is displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the time display is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is informed that it will be performed. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance presentation effect is extended.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is performed, and the time to be added is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display is 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display It is changed to the approximate center of the device 208. In the example of the effect, the countdown is interrupted once at “05:00”, but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer announcement display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the timer announcement display TM1 is performed by adding the time to the timer display. Is an enlarged display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged. It may be made to overlap with TM1. In addition, the conditions under which the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed are not limited to the addition of the time in the timer display, for example, when the timer display changes such as shortening of the time in the timer display or stopping the countdown. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (A5), in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, the display of count-up animation is performed, and the effect that the time in the timer display is added is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. . The display of the countdown may be stopped or the display of the countdown may be in progress while the timer-set effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the countdown of the timer display is resumed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 43 (B1) to FIG. 43 (B7) show how the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the time of the timer display is added in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped at the left symbol and "decoration 7" is stopped at the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and changes to the timer display to promote attention to the notice. Is displayed. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (B3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the pseudo-connected symbol represented by the middle symbol in the middle pattern is moved at low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo run effect by this pseudo run symbol is continuously performed from FIG. 43 (B3) to FIG. (B7).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (B4), in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed in an enlarged manner, the display of count-up animation is performed, and the effect that the time in the timer display is added is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and a state in which 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display is shown. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately right center of the display screen). Thereafter, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer indication is resumed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in the same size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the pseudo symbol is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B7), cut-in display is performed, which includes the character of the character of “Toll-like” and the “continuation” character display, and thereafter, the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is performed, and the timer display is "14: 92" at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B7).

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 44, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 44 (A1) to (A8), when the display mode of the timer advance notice is changed and the rank of the notice is increased, the timer advance notice is enlarged and displayed. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A2).

  FIG. 44 (A3) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The color of the frame is changed from white to red, and "LvUP" is added to indicate that the jackpot reliability has increased. Then, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is also changed to the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 has been ranked up. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be suspended while the enlarged display is performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer announcement display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, and the display mode of the timer announcement display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the big hit. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by being changed to the mode.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is shrunk and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in the same size without being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (A6), when the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 44 (A7). The word "attention" is displayed to prompt attention to the advance notice.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, a character of "jump" is displayed along with the princess character, which suggests that the jackpot is highly reliable. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), in response to the rank increase of the timer advance notice display TM1, the letter display of “expected large” is additionally noted. This makes it more likely to be a big hit than the case where a cut-in display in which the character display of "expected large" is not added is displayed. Note that the character display of “expected large” may or may not be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up. In addition, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on condition that the timer advance notice display TM1 is ramped up, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed without being ranked up. May be In this effect example, the character display of "expected large" is easier to be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also changed to perform advance notice display. The change of the display of the fluctuation icon h0 may be performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer advance effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice performed by the timer notice effect may be performed.

  As described above, in this effect example, rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be a notification for indicating that the notice performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice is promoted, or the timer notice The rank increase of the display TM 1 may function as a notice of the chance increase. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the expectation for displaying a high notice of a big hit in advance is high in advance.

  Also, in this effect example, the rank up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice performed as a result of completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted, for example, the first decorative symbol It may be suggested that the reach design in may be promoted. Specifically, for example, when reach effect is performed with "decoration 2" in which the probability variation big hit is not determined and reach production is being performed, if the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, the probability variation big hit if it becomes a big hit May be determined, and may change to the reach of "decorative 7" which is likely to be a big hit.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 44 (B1) to FIG. 44 (B7) show that the effect using the chance up meter is started when the timer advance effect is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “20: 35” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene between the main character of the main character and the enemy player, the swordsman, has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan has started to move from the start point SP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B3).

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B4), the character BOY of the bowie appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the safari character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice of chance improvement is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (B4), when the boy character BOY appears, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to make the boy character BOY stand out. That is, by displaying the timer notice display TM1 in a reduced size, it may be possible not to disturb the display of the character BOY of the boy, and it is also possible that the notice of the chance improvement is performed by the character BOY of the boy. It may be easily recognizable. The timer advance display TM1 continues the countdown of the timer display even if it is displayed in a reduced size, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B4). Note that, while the reduction display is performed, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (B4) to FIG. 44 (B6), the reduction display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is maintained until the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (B7), when the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi ends, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

  In this example of presentation, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size while the advance notice of the chance up is performed, thereby notifying that the advance notice of the chance up is performed. By changing the display mode, it may be possible to achieve the purpose. For example, in addition to the reduction display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the color change of the timer display itself, the change of the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by the change of the shape of the display TM1 or the like.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner about another effect example of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 45, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 45 (A1) to FIG. 45 (A3) show how to change the display position of the timer advance notice displayed when shifting to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed to indicate that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 45 (A1), a mode transitioning to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and “21: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A2), a super reach title in which an enemy character sword player is displayed in a large size is displayed, and a state of being developed into a super reach (word player reach) is shown. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "20: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A3), an animation of a duel scene of the main character of the main character and the enemy player of the sword is displayed. When the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer preview display TM1 changes its display position. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Also, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A3 '), the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size to make the effect of super reach noticeable.

  In this production example, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the transition to super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A1) is performed The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the display of the Super Reach title shown in FIG. 45 (A2) is performed. It is also good. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be configured to move again to the original position at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, timing increase of the timer notice advance TM1, etc.), It may be displayed as it is. In addition, even when the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, the enlarged view (for example, first displayed at a specific timing (for example, the timing when 3 seconds or 0), the chance advance of the timer notice display TM1, etc.) Display (or display larger than the size initially displayed).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 45 (B1) to FIG. 45 (B7) show how to change the display position of the timer advance notice displayed when the effect movable body operates. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 45 (B1), a mode transitioning to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, “27: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In FIG. 45 (B2), it is shown that the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "25: 34" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 is at least partially overlapped by the second large-screen behavior character item 224Gb and the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd, and the timer notification display is more than in the non-overlapped state. TM1 is considered to be difficult to view.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position so as not to be overlapped with the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end of the center of the display screen. When the display position is changed, an animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size. In addition, when the 1st large board behavior role thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior role thing 224Gd do not operate, it is not necessary to change a display position, but a display position may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easy-to-see manner. At this time, although the effect image appearing due to the light emission of the light guide plate IL is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed by this. When the light guide plate IL emits light, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 45 (B6), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are in the initial state, respectively. Return to position.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the right end center portion of the display screen). In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "21: 37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B7). The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd starts to return to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd has started to return to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be performed. After the start of the movement to the original position, the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may start an operation to return to the initial position.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 45 (C1) to FIG. 45 (C5) show that the positional relationship between the timer advance notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and the number of reservations in the special view 1 is 1 in the second number of reservations display. “1” is displayed to indicate that Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “29: 69” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C2), it is shown that “decoration 7” is stopped at the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is in the reach state. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “22:04” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C2). Also at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C3), reach effect is started, and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved to the upper left and right, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. , The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "21: 37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right symbol of the first decoration symbol. The timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4) shows a state of being developed into a super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4), the title of Super Reach is displayed, in which the image of the hostess swordsman is displayed in a large size. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the host of the sword is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol. In the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and effects are performed using the chance up meter.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the timer advance presentation.

  In FIG. 46, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 46 (A1) to FIG. 46 (A10) show that the display position of the timer advance notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, “1” is displayed, which indicates that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. There is. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Moreover, in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown to FIG. 46 (A1), a mode transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “21: 37” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A2), a super reach title in which the enemy player sword player is displayed in a large size is displayed, and a state of being developed into a super reach (venger reach) is shown. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "20: 35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A2).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A3), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A3). In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the word "Reduce timer" is displayed. It is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be displayed in a reduced size by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer advance presentation is started, or when the reach state is reached May be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the lower key of operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A4), timer preview display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size as shown in FIG. 46 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size. When the display position is changed, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being contracted, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may be changed after displayed in a reduced size. In addition, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be made non-display. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A5), the characters “enlarge timer” are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the upper key to enlarge the timer notice display TM1. Then, the display is displayed in the original size, and the display position is also notified to return to the original position.

  Thereafter, when the upper key of operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A6), timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size as shown in FIG. 46 (A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "17: 81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A7), the guide display in which the characters “Shrink timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is performed, and the player operates the lower key. Thus, it is notified that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be displayed in a reduced size. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A3), when the upper key of operation key unit 137 is operated when timer advance notice display TM1 is at the default display size and at the default display position, The timer advance notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A8) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A8).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (A9), when "03:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining for 3 seconds is reached, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is erased. It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer advance notice display TM1 can not be changed. The display position and the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. Also, when the timer display changes to "03:00", the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, and if it is displayed in a reduced size, at this timing, the default display size is returned to the default display position. It may be displayed as it is or may be reduced and displayed at the changed display position.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A10), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00”, and it is shown that the countdown is completed.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 46 (B1) to FIG. 46 (B9) show that the timer advance notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the title of Super Reach is displayed, in which the sword player of the enemy character is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20: 35” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B2), the display of the animation of the duel scene with the sword lord of the enemy character of the hero of the hero is started. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "18: 19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B2).

  FIG. 46 (B3) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B3).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display is remaining 15 seconds, and thereafter, FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer advance notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B5), “13:56” is shown. In this example of presentation, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit has become high by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number divided by the timer advance notice may be three or more instead of two, and the larger the number divided, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. In these timer notices TM1L and TM1R, although the color of the frame changes to red, the color of the frame does not have to change, and the direction of the frame changes to red when the color of the frame changes to red. It may be more likely to be a big hit than when the color does not change. Also, the color of one of these timer notices TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (B6), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 46 (B7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R The word "Attention" will be displayed in order to call attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a cut-in display showing that the princess character is saying "Rewrite reach" is being performed. There is. This cut-in display is an effect that is performed when the timer display countdown on one timer notification display (for example, the left timer notification display TM1L) of the two timer notification displays TM1L and TM1R is completed, and the big hit is trusted. It is reported that promotion to a higher reach effect of sex. Note that the effect may be an effect performed by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in both of the timer notices of the two timer notices TM1L and TM1R.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), a state in which it has been developed into the SP Ken-Age reach is shown. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Fig. 46 (B9), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-A-Ok reach in that the hero of the main character and the enemy of the sword is facing the same position. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), a notice display showing that a copanda cheering party KPD composed of three copanda characters is cheering is performed, and the SP Kengo Reach's It reports that the reliability for the big hit is dramatically high. The copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

  In this production example, the advance notice of the chance up and the development of the reach production are performed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (the development of reach production) corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that, among the developed reach productions, chances-up are being performed.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 47, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the general view display 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 47 (A1) to FIG. 47 (A5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 47 (A1) to FIG. (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The household crests 224E and the one-hundred-box crates 224H are not shown for ease of explanation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsman is being developed into a super reach (Kenai reach). . Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 "1" shown is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer announcement effect is performed, “15: 47” is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (A2), animation of a duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A2).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area near the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area near the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A3).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer advance display is divided into two. The timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A4), “13: 56 ”. The timer display continues to count down while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation, but the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. In this case, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted. In this example of presentation, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit has become high by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number divided by the timer advance notice may be three or more instead of two, and the larger the number divided, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. For example, timer display may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A5).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 47 (B1) to FIG. 47 (B5) show timer notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the example of effects shown in FIG. 47 (B1) to FIG. (B5), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini display device 208P is provided. The mini display device 208P is provided, for example, at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this effect example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as LCD, EL, 7 segments, a lamp, a drum and the like may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and can drive the mini display device 208P into the easy-to-see state and the hard-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), it is shown that a state of animation of a duel scene between the hero of the main character and the enemy of swordsmen is developed as a super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 and in the second number of reservations display, it is shown that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1. "1" is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “18:19” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. The timer display effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6: 19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this production example, it is shown that two timer notice effects are being performed in parallel, and the timer display becomes "0" in the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. In such a case, a presentation such as a notice of chance up may be performed, and a presentation such as a notice of chance up is also performed when the timer display becomes “0” in the timer advance presentation on the mini display device 208P. There is a case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (B2), the timer notice is displayed at "15:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is 15 seconds remaining. The effect image is displayed around TM1, and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display is remaining 3 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time shown on the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The word "UP" is displayed to indicate that the timer display of TM1 is to be added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B4), the time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and updated to "18:00".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (B5), with the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is resumed. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the shutter member makes it difficult to visually recognize the display screen. In this effect example, when time addition is performed on the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even when time addition is performed to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P may not end, and thereafter, the timer display may be counted down.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example of another effect of the timer advance notice effect.

  In FIG. 48, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 48A1 to 48A10, a state in which the notification that the timer preview effect is being prepared is displayed by being displayed before the timer preview effect starts is notified. It shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A1), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 3, and the first icon h11 to the third icon h13 are displayed, and the second number of reservations is displayed. , “3” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A2) shows that the timer advance notice preparation effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice preparation effect is started by the frame of the timer notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen. The timer announcement preparation effect is to display an indication that the preparation is in progress until the timer announcement effect starts, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Note that, for example, display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A3), it is shown that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, “STANDBY” indicating that the preparation for the timer advance notice effect is in progress is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and this is notified. That is, this effect example is an effect to be performed as one aspect of the advance notice for announcing that the timer advance effect will be performed in the hold state. In addition, it may be the said fluctuation notice which announces that timer notice effect is performed in the symbol display under fluctuation.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 on which the character "STANDBY" is displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and becomes a mini-size display size. When the display position is changed, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being contracted, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may be changed after displayed in a reduced size. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, or the display position may not be changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A5), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3—decoration 9—decoration 1”. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. The timer preview display TM1 still maintains the display below the second hold display unit. Thus, it can be said that the timer advance preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A7), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. The timer preview display TM1 still maintains the display below the second hold display unit. In addition, the symbol variation display of this time is a thing corresponding to the pending which was the target of the pre-reading.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position is also returned to the original position, and the timer display is started from the "STANDBY" display. It is shown that it switches to the display of "10:00" as. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect has been started. When the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, an animation moving while expanding the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. In addition, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged, or the display position may be changed after the enlarged display. Also, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

  After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, "03:00") or the display mode changes, the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 You may change from small size to large size.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (B1) to (B8), a plurality of notice icons MI1 of the clock functioning as the advance notice are stocked, and the timer notice effect is performed for the number of the notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B1), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of reservations in Special Drawing 1 is 3, and the first icon h11 to the third icon h13 are displayed, and the second number of reservations is displayed. , “3” indicating that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is three is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B2), a state in which “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. The notice icon MI1 of the clock is added to the “decoration 3”, which indicates that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked. Note that two or more watch notice icons MI1 may be stocked at one time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B3), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 3—decoration 9—decoration 1”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the stocked number of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, display of “timer notice stock × 1” indicating that a notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer advance presentation effect by the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. Further, the remaining time displayed on the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is started may be determined according to the stock number of the notice icon MI1 on the clock. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B4), a state is shown in which variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, it is shown that a navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is also performed. The navigation character preview is performed by displaying a balloon in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this effect example functions as a prefetch notice that the timer notice effect is performed within the hold state. As described above, the number of notice icons MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol change display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Also, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. In addition, in the effect performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked, the number of notice icons MI1 of the clock to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B5), a state is shown in which the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, display of “timer notice stock × 3” is performed, which indicates that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B6), a state is shown where variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B7), it is shown that one of the notice icons MI1 of the three stocked clocks is digested and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer advance notice display TM1, “10:00” is displayed as the timer indication, and it is suggested that a notice of chance up may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Also, in this example, one notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and one timer notice effect is started, but two watch notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. May be performed. Further, in this example of rendering, one preview icon MI1 of the clock is digested and one timer preview effect is started, but for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B7 ′), the preview icon MI1 of the clock is The timer announcement effect may be started without being digested.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B8), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position substantially at the center of the right end of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by moving animation. In addition, when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed at the approximate right end center of the display screen from the beginning. .

In the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a timer notification effect in the timer notification display TM1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. 20 (12) or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h 0 shown in FIG. 21 (c2), the symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208S, the first decorative symbol display device, etc., with a lever effect shown in FIG. 21 (c2), a notice by stopping display of the symbol CC of pine as a chance symbol 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a display for notifying the timing when the effect display using the mini display device 208P is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a timer overlay effect shown in FIG. 22 (2) to FIG. (5)],
The second display is a display for previewing that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [e.g., navigation in the timer-over effect shown in FIG. 22 (2) to FIG. 5 (5) "Overlay" or "+10 seconds" displayed on the balloon of character YM, etc.]
The second display may be displayed while the first display is being displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (2) to FIG. When the game is being played, timers are added, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, even if the time until the start of a certain effect is notified by the first display, it is notified that the time notified by the second display changes. In addition to waiting for the time until a certain effect to start, it has the expectation that the time may change, and the first display also enjoys There are times when you can.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the first display and the second display. . Moreover, the display means may display the first display and the second display without fail, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  In addition, the first display may notify only the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing when a certain effect is performed. In addition, the first display may always notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

  In addition, the second display may give notice that only the timing at which a certain effect is started to change, or may give notice that other than the timing at which a certain effect is started to change. It may be one. In addition, the second display may always give notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started to change, and may not give notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started to change. It may be one.

  In addition, only the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Also, the second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed, or the second display may not be displayed while the first display is displayed.

  Note that the start of the timer advance notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed) It may be that the countdown display of the countdown display has been started. In addition, the end of the timer advance notice display may be that the first display has become non-display, or that the countdown display has become non-display (for example, the numbers are erased, and "the attention" is Displayed state may also be included), countdown by countdown display may have ended (for example, 0 is displayed), display displayed on the first display after countdown has ended It may be that (for example, the character display of "attention") is hidden.

Also, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 22 (2) to FIG. (5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time display on the timer display is performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to notice a change in the display mode of the first display.

  Here, only the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of displays other than the above may also be changed. In addition, the display mode of the first display may be changed without fail after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display is displayed after the second display is displayed. It may be configured such that it may not change.

  In addition, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display is only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

"The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the sub display device 208S, etc.],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the line of sight of the player may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but the second display means is also displayed on the second display means. In some cases, it is possible to focus on both of the two display means without concentrating the line of sight on only the first display means.

  Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be composed of display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . In addition, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It is also good.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means or may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be displayed on the second display means or may not be displayed on the second display means.

[The second display means is disposed on the front side of the first display means [e.g., as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Placed on the side etc],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display [eg, as shown in FIG. 26 (A2) to FIG. (A3) , And the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S in which the timer addition effect is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second display may cause the second display to be focused and a certain effect may be started by the fact that the second display may overlap the first display while the second display is being displayed. In some cases, it may be easier to recognize that the time to change may change.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first display means is overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display means displays the second display Display means other than the first display means may be overlapped depending on the display means. In addition, the first display means may always be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display, and the second display means displays the second display. One display means may not be overlapped.

  In addition, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means in which the second display is displayed, or the second display in which the second display is displayed The first display means may be overlapped also by display means other than the means.

Also, “first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B1), etc.]” and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. The second display means is configured to be movable between a position at which the front side substantially at the center of 208 overlaps, and the like.
The second display means is a display means overlapping the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device In the overlapping position on the substantially central front side of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of may also be configured to be movable. Also, the second display means may be configured to move necessarily between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may be arranged between the first position and the second position. It may be configured such that it may not move.

  Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, or may be configured other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

  Also, the second display means may be capable of overlapping with the first display means only at the second position, or may be capable of overlapping with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be Also, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. It is also good.

In addition, “the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. 20 (7), etc.]”
The countdown display is a display for performing the timing until the certain effect is performed by counting down [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) to FIG. (7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 The countdown in the display notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may include only the countdown display or may include displays other than the countdown display. In addition, the first display may include the countdown display without fail or may not include the countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be performed by counting down only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect may be performed by a countdown. . In addition, the countdown display may always be performed by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or even if the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by counting down. Good.

Also, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even in the state in which the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even in the state in which the second display is displayed, it is continued other than the countdown by countdown display There may be one. In addition, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. It is also good.

  Moreover, the countdown by countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, and the countdown by countdown display is continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. It is also good.

Also, while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or during the display of the second display, other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. In addition, while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted at all times, or while the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only during the display of the second display, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even during the display of the second display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, display of a character of“ focus ”” in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG.
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (7) to FIG. When the display becomes 0, the "notice" character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the third display can be further enhanced by the countdown by the first display.

  Here, when the first display is a display showing 0, only the third display may be displayed, and when the first display becomes a display showing 0, a third display Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be necessarily displayed, and when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display indicating 0, and the first display may be a display other than a case where the display indicates 0. Three displays may be displayed.

Also, in the case where the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the second display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation by the display of the second display.

  In addition, when the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed finally in the case where the second display is displayed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo connected effect shown in FIG.
The certain effect is a effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is effect display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include displays other than the fourth display. In addition, a certain effect may include the fourth display or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, “a movable effect device capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-piece box character 224H, a first large-area behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation [e.g., the operation of the first large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth-large-surface behavior character article 224Gd shown in FIG. 21 (d3), etc.]
The certain effect is a effect including the first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, dynamic effects using the effect moving means become possible, and there are cases where it is possible to further improve the effect.

  Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be executable other than the plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  Further, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing operations other than the first operation. In addition, the effect movable means may always execute the first operation or may not execute the first operation.

  In addition, a certain effect may include only the first action, or may include actions other than the first action. Also, a certain effect may include the first action or may not include the first action.

Also, in the case where the certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol is finally more likely to be determined and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [eg, FIG. 20 (11) to FIG. 12) When the pseudo run shown in is started, it is easier to be a big hit than when the pseudo run is not started, etc.)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed.

  In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed in the end, or even if a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It is also good.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays may be a fifth display [for example, a conversation notice shown in FIG. 16 (9) to FIG. (14), and FIG. 20 (9) to FIG. The pseudo-sequence effect shown in Figure 29 and the notice display etc. of the chance up shown in Figure 29 (4) and Figure 13 (13),
In the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, the fifth display may be started to be displayed.
The fifth display is a notice display,
In the case where the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the fifth display is not displayed [eg, FIG. 16 (9) to FIG. 16 (14) It is more likely to be a big hit if the conversation notice shown in is given than if the conversation notice is not given, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the fifth display to be displayed in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display. is there.

  Here, in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, only the fifth display may start to be displayed, or the first display In the period from the display start to the display start of the second display, the display other than the fifth display may be started. In addition, during the period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, the fifth display may be always started, or after the first display is started The display of the fifth display may not be started in the period until the display of the second display is started.

  In addition, the fifth display may start to be displayed only during a period from when the first display is started to when the second display is started, or the first display may be displayed. The display of the fifth display may be started also in a period other than the period from the start to the display start of the second display.

  In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or even when the fifth display is displayed, the big hit symbol is not finally displayed. There may be.

Also, “The game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. May be displayed during the period
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a notice by a lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.]
The period display is a display for notifying of a first timing [for example, timing shown by check point CP3 where advance notice by lever effect is started shown in FIG. 29 (18)],
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start.
The display of the period may be erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2), If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 33 (A2) is performed before the timing indicated by the point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the first timing of the period display is known while the period display is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing approaches. Here, the display means can be made to look at the display means in order to see the period display even before the first timing when the period display may be hidden before the first timing comes. There is a case.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to be drawn into the game from the display of the period display to the first timing.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Also, a plurality of types of display may be displayed without fail, or there may be cases where a plurality of types of display are not displayed.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed also in a period other than the specified period. Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, there may be a case where only the period display is erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started, or it becomes the first timing after the display of the period display is started Before the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased before the first timing after the period display starts being displayed, or the period before the first timing starts after the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only before the first timing comes after the period display start being started, or it becomes the first timing after the period display start is started. The period display may be erased other than before.

  The displayed period may be displayed during the symbol variation display, during the big hit game, during the demonstration display, during the symbol stop display, or the like, regardless of reach.

  Also, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed in the case of long reach but may be displayed in the case of SP reach. Also, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach but may be displayed in the second half of the SP reach. Also, it may be displayed in the first half of SP reach and not displayed in the second half of SP reach.

  Furthermore, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter starts to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. Moreover, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the effect such as the reach effect where the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing when the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed. Also, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or marker in the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or marker in the chance up meter is ended. It may be. In addition, when display / non-display of the chance up meter is configured to be possible by the operation means, the start of the period display means the timing at which the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operation means.

  In addition, from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed is displayed) to the start of the period display until the period display effect is ended (for example, the chance up meter May be displayed until the display that suggests that it can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden).

  Further, the term period display includes not only those displayed until the first timing is reached, but also those erased before the first timing is reached.

  Moreover, there may be two or more in a period in which the reach effect display is performed for a certain period. At this time, the period display may start and end at each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as display may start and end.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display may be a second effect display [for example, a cut-in display of eyebrows shown in FIG. 33 (A2), a display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), etc.] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display.
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. 33 (A2 b), a chance up meter In the effect by CMT, there is a case where the display of the eyebrow cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b) are performed before Sabohani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. Etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing when the display of the second effect display starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b) In the effect by the up meter CMT, the display timing of the eyelid cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), etc. are not notified],
During the display of the second effect display, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b), it is shown in FIG. When the display of the eyelid cut-in or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b) is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing by displaying the display not notified by the period display, so before the first timing comes There are also cases where you can have hope.

  Here, there may be a case where only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing comes, or before the first timing comes, effect displays other than the second effect display are also displayed There may be cases. In addition, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

  In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing comes, or the second effect display is displayed other than before the first timing comes There may be.

  In addition, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or there may be cases where the notification of the second effect display is not notified other than the start of the display May be In addition, the period display may not necessarily notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

  Moreover, only the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display, and the display other than the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be erased during the second effect display.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only while the second effect display is displayed, or the period display may be erased other than during the second effect display.

  In addition, instead of the effect display, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, or a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of the prepaid card may be used. Further, as an aspect of the effect display, a display that appears by light emission by an LED, an operation by an effect movable means, or light emission by a light guide plate may be used.

  Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, “the second effect display is a second advance display [for example, a display of a cut-in of eyebrows shown in FIG. 33 (A2) or an advance display by the display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), etc.] is there,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the fact that the second effect display is displayed before the first timing can indicate that there may be a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, it is possible to give the player expectations even in the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, in the case where the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally likely to be finalized and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, finally the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed, or even if the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, “a movable effect device capable of performing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest 224E, a one-piece box character 224H, a first large-area behavior character 224Ga to a fourth large-area behavior character 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of operations is a second operation [for example, the operation of the first large-screen behavior player 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd shown in FIG. 33 (A3 b),
The second operation is a rendering operation,
While the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) and the like] is displayed, the second operation may be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, dynamic effects using the effect moving means become possible, and there are cases where it is possible to further improve the effect.

  Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of operations, or may be capable of being executed other than the plurality of types of operations. Further, the effect movable means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

  In addition, while the second effect display is being displayed, there may be a case where only the second operation is performed, and while the second effect display is being displayed, an operation other than the second operation is also performed. May be In addition, the second operation may be performed while the second effect display is displayed, or the second operation may not be performed while the second effect display is displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of operations may be performed as the first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 15 (E1) to FIG. 15 (E2), or FIG. The movement of one thousand box box work item 224 H, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, after the period display is erased, the period display is displayed again [eg, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2a) to FIG. (A3a), the princess character After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in indication, when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance-up meter CMT is again displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have expectation for redisplay of the period display.

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, the displays other than the period display may be displayed again. It may be configured. Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be

  Also, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display has been erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again even after the period display has been erased. It is also good.

Also, after the period display is erased, the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses [eg, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2) to FIG. (A5) After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in character of the wolf character, the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may not be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, until a certain period elapses. The display other than the period display may be configured not to be displayed. In addition, after the period display is erased, the period display may not necessarily be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, the period until the certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

  Also, only after the period display is erased, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or other than after the period display is erased, a certain period elapses. Until the period display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, the period display is performed in the first certain period after the period display is erased in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when the second certain period after the first certain period starts. In addition, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

Also, “the certain period is a period during which Super Reach is in operation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display may be a third effect display [for example, a notice of a Champ-up by the display of the character BOY of Boi shown in FIG. It is a notice of the chance improvement by the display of the cut-in image CI3 of
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The period display indicates a second timing [for example, the timing indicated by the check point CP1 at which the advance notice of the Champ-up by the display of the character BOY of Boyy shown in FIG. 29 (4) is started; It is a display which may also notify [the timing etc. which are shown by check point CP2 by which the advance notice of the chance up by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started],
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may start.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may notify other timings than the second timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

  In addition, the second timing may have a possibility that only the display of the third effect display may be started, and the other than the display of the third effect display may also be started. It may be one. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started in some cases.

  The timing displayed by the period display may be three or more.

  In addition, if a certain reach occurs, effect display is always performed three times, and if another reach occurs, effect display is always performed twice, so it is possible to fix places where effect display is performed according to reach. When there is the same reach, the effect display may be performed three times, and when there is the same reach, the effect display may be performed such that the effect display is performed only once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be more likely to deviate. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Also, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit.

  Also, the second timing may be timing after the first timing, and the second timing may be timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the first timing. The two timings may be the same timing.

In addition, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by a lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one type of display among the multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least part of the first display is difficult to see" is "when at least part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

"Display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is a first display means.
The first display means is a means which may display the period display,
The second display unit is a unit that may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the display means may be configured by only a plurality of display means, or may be configured by other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

  Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display other display than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display or may not display the period display.

  Further, the second display means may perform only the rendering operation, or may perform an operation other than the rendering operation. In addition, the second display means may always perform the rendering operation, or may not perform the rendering operation.

  In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means, or in the case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means There may be. In addition, at least a part of the period display may always be overlapped by the second display means, or at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. It is also good.

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, effects by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A1) to FIG. (A9), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a whistle in a conversation notice shown in FIG. 38 (A4) to FIG. 38 (A9),
The first display and the second display are different displays,
The display mode of at least a portion of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A1)] has a first speed [eg 10 It may change by the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.
The display mode of at least a part of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 38 (A4)] has a second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds It may change by the speed etc.
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In recent years, many displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who starts the game with his / her model does not know where to look. In this gaming table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, the player is naturally induced to gaze at the display with a fast (slow) display at which the display mode changes, and the player who has the above problem There are also cases where you can be entertained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed also in a period other than the specified period. Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, there may be a case where only the period display is erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started, or it becomes the first timing after the display of the period display is started Before the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be necessarily erased before the first timing after the period display starts being displayed, or the first timing after the period display starts. Before the period display may not be erased.

  In addition, the period display may be erased only before the first timing comes after the period display start being started, or it becomes the first timing after the period display start is started. The period display may be erased other than before.

Further, “the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A1), etc.],
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), etc.]
The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period etc.] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. As for the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4), the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation effective period, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the speed of change of the display mode may be easily recognized.

  Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. Moreover, the first display may include time display or may not include the time display.

  Further, the second display may include only the time display, or may include other than the time display. In addition, the second display may include time display or may not include the time display.

  In addition, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes in accordance with other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be Also, the time display may be such that the display mode necessarily changes with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time in a certain period. It may be.

Also, there may be a case where both the first display and the second display are displayed [eg, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4) to FIG. (A7), a button for the balloon of the navigation character YM Both the effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed, and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the whistle in the conversation announcement, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the presentation may be made lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

  Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or the display may be displayed other than both the first display and the second display. It is also good. In addition, both the first display and the second display may be necessarily displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the character display of“ superheat ”in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A9), etc.]”
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display of "It is intense heat, etc. in the conversation image CI2 of an eyebrow shown in FIG. 38 (A9),"
The third display and the fourth display are different displays,
The first display is a display capable of changing at least a part of display modes until a first time [for example, 10 seconds etc.] elapses,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of display modes can be changed until a second time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses,
The third display may be displayed when the first time elapses after the display of the first display starts.
The fourth display may be displayed when the second time has elapsed since the start of the display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may change only at least a part of the display mode until the first time passes, or at least a part of the display modes until the first time passes Other display modes may be changeable. In addition, the first display may change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least the display mode changes until the first time passes. It may not be possible.

  In addition, the second display may be such that at least a portion of the display mode can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a portion of the display mode other than the second time elapses The display mode of may be changeable. In addition, the second display may change at least a part of the display mode until the second time passes, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time passes. It may not be possible.

  In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the display start of the first display, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the display start. As time passes, displays other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started to display, the third display may be displayed without fail, or when the first time has elapsed after the first display has started. The third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may start after the second display is started. As time passes, displays other than the fourth display may be displayed. In addition, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to display, the fourth display may be displayed without fail, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display has started. , The fourth display may not be displayed.

  Note that the third display and the fourth display may be the same display mode or may be different display modes.

  In the third display and the fourth display, the fourth display may have a higher or lower reliability of the jackpot. Also, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

Further, “the first display is a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), etc.]”
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the display of the countdown in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), etc.]
The countdown display is a display for notifying of a timing until a certain effect [for example, a display of pseudo connected effect and the like] is performed [for example, a first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1). And, the second timer notice display TM2 reports the time until the occurrence of the pseudo run by a countdown display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. In addition, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always notified, or the timing before a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
The first display is an operation effective period display,
The second display is the operation effective period display,
The said operation effective period display is a display which shows the period which makes operation of the said operation means effective,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be operated by the player without fail, or may have a habit of not being operated by the player.

  In addition, the operation effective period display may indicate only the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or may indicate other than the period in which the operation of the operation means is effective. The operation effective period display may always indicate a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective, or may not indicate a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective.

Also, “the first display is a period display [for example, a first chance up meter CMTa etc. shown in FIG. 35 (A1)],
The second display is the period display [for example, a second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1) and the like],
The period display is a display for notifying of a first timing [for example, a timing when advance notice of a chance increase by a character BOY of Boi shown in FIG. 35 (A2) is started],
The first timing refers to an effect [eg, FIG. 35, for example, a period during which an animation of a duel scene in the sword reach shown in FIG. 35A1 to FIG. 35A2 is performed]. This is the timing when there is a possibility that the display of the advance notice of the chance up by the character BOY of Boi shown in (A2) may be performed,
The first timing is reported from the start to the end of the first period,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing or may not notify the first timing.

  Also, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may start to be displayed in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may also start to be displayed in the first period. It may be possible. In addition, the first timing may be one in which the sixth display is always started in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started in the first period. May be

  In addition, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. A thing other than timing may also be alert | reported. In addition, the first timing may be notified before the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified after the start of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

  Also, the first timing may be notified only between the start and the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified before and after the start of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, according to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, according to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change only at the first speed, and according to the passage of time, the second display At least a part of the display modes may change at a speed other than the first speed. In addition, the display mode of at least a part of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, or according to the passage of time, at least a part of the second display The display mode may not change at the first speed.

  In addition, depending on the passage of time, only the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed, or according to the passage of time, at least the second display may be changed. Things other than some display modes may change at the first speed.

"When at least a part of display aspects of the second display changes at the second speed than when the display aspect of at least parts of the second display changes at the first speed In the end, the big hit symbol is easier to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when the display mode of at least one part of the second display changes at the second speed, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or at least a part of the display of the second display Even when the aspect changes at the second speed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally displayed.

In addition, “the first display is effect display [for example, effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second display is effect display [for example, display of a conversation image CI2 of a whistle in a conversation notice shown in FIG. 38 (A4) to FIG. 38 (A9)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini A game console provided with a display device 208P, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)],
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a display of a countdown of a timer display in the timer advance display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), etc.]
The countdown display is a display for giving a notification by performing a countdown on the timing until a certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A1) to FIG. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
While the countdown display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is a second display from the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the small size of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), etc.] It may change to an aspect [for example, a display mode of the large size of timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A3), etc.],
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be possible to draw attention to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Also, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include displays other than the countdown display. Also, the first display may include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, or the first display may not be a countdown display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be In addition, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down, or when the timing until a certain effect is performed is not notified by performing a countdown. There may be

  In addition, while the countdown display is displayed, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only, and the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to the display modes other than the second display mode. In addition, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, and the display of the first display may be performed while the countdown display is displayed. The aspect may not change from the first display aspect to the second display aspect.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is displayed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  The countdown display may be a timer display.

  The start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

In addition, the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is ended before the symbol variation display is completed [eg, as shown in FIG. 20 (1) to FIG. (7) The display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and is ended during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the countdown display for informing the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, the effect may not be redundant.

  Here, the countdown display may be started during execution of the symbol change display, and only the countdown display may be ended before the symbol change display is ended, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol change display, The display other than the countdown display may be ended before the symbol variation display is ended. In addition, the countdown display may be started while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the countdown display may always be ended before the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the symbol The countdown display may not end before the end of the variable display.

  In addition, the countdown display may be started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended only by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol The countdown display may end other than the end of the variable display.

Also, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, small size etc.],
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [eg, large size etc.],
The second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display size of the countdown display becomes large, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (make the user pay attention to the countdown display whose display size becomes large).

  Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be a display mode being displayed. In addition, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size There may be a display mode.

  In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The display mode may be selected. In addition, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size There may be a display mode.

  In addition, the size of the display size may be the same, for example, the display size may be the same, but the color or the shape of the frame or the character may be different.

  Also, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

[When the display of the countdown display is started [eg when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (3), etc.]] The display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. Display modes other than the one display mode may be displayed. Also, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first There may be cases where the display mode is not displayed.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, when the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), when the frame-in of the timer advance display TM1 is started, etc.], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. May be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. In addition, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the first display is started. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

Also, while the countdown display is displayed, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [eg, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. (A3) Thus, while displaying the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from small size to large size etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation that the display mode changes during countdown display.

  Here, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode, or during the display of the countdown display, the first display is the first The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. In addition, while the countdown display is displayed, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is displayed, and the first display may be changed to the second display mode other than the display of the countdown display. You may change from one display mode to a second display mode.

Also, “the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, it is easy to finally display the big hit design,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have an expectation for the first display to change to the second display mode.

  In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed in the final display, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, the first display is a display in which the display position may change [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device The display position changes from the approximate right center to the approximate center of the display screen of 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the display position of the first display changes, a visual change may be given to improve the rendering effect.

  Here, the first display may change only the display position, or may change other than the display position. In addition, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position does not change.

Also, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. As shown in), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the approximate right center to the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to make the first display pay attention.

  Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display from the first display mode If it changes to a 2nd display mode, things other than the display position of a 1st display may also change. In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, or the first display may change from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

  In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may change also in the case other than the case of changing from the second display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, “the first display is a display in which movement display [for example, display of animation of enlarged display of timer notice display TM1 etc.] may be performed,
By the movement display being performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is an animation of the enlarged display. Zoom in and change the display position etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since visual change can be given by the movement display of the first display, the rendering effect may be improved.

  Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display may be performed, or may be one in which display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, in the first display, movement display may always be performed, or movement display may not be performed.

  Further, only the display position of the first display may be changed by performing the movement display, and the display positions of other than the display position of the first display may also be changed by performing the movement display. It is also good. Further, the display position of the first display may be changed by moving display, or the display position of the first display may not be changed by moving display. .

  Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only by performing the movement display, or even if the display position of the first display is changed due to other than the movement display being performed. Good.

Also, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, even during the display of the movement display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even during the display of the movement display, other than the countdown display by the countdown display may be continued. In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is displayed.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than the display of the movement display.

Also, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the countdown due to the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the movement display, or something other than the countdown due to the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the movement display. In addition, while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted at all times, or while the movement display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted.

  In addition, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted except when the movement display is displayed.

“The countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 The countdown in the display notifies the timing when the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the countdown display may perform only the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform other than the countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed. In addition, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

Also, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [eg, shown in FIG. 41 (A7) to FIG. (A8) As such, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and it is informed that the pseudo-link will be performed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that only a timing for performing a certain effect has come, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. The thing other than the timing to which a certain effect is performed may also be notified. In addition, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be always notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has come, or by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, In some cases, it may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

  Moreover, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect has come only by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, or other than displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Also, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is configured to be erased [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (A7) to FIG. (A11), After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the effect may not be redundant by erasing the countdown display after the countdown is completed.

  Here, after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the display other than the countdown display may be performed. May also be configured to be erased. In addition, after the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication may be necessarily erased, or after the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is erased. It may be configured such that it may not.

  In addition, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and the countdown display may be performed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of a character of“ focus ”in timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A8), etc.]
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, after the second display is displayed, the countdown display is configured to be erased [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. (A11), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the word "attention" is displayed and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, there are cases where it is possible to improve the effect on the erasure of the countdown display.

  Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Also, the second display may be included in an effect.

  In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be erased when the second display is displayed. In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be necessarily erased after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. May be configured such that the countdown display may not be erased after the second display is displayed.

  In addition, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed only when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to be erased after the second display is displayed. In addition, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be erased only after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. When the second display is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to be erased when the second display is displayed.

"The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the sub display device 208S, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [e.g., a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [eg, as shown in FIG. 42 (A1), Timer preview display TM1 of the size is displayed on the sub display unit 208S, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode. When is displayed, the first display may also be displayed on display means other than the first display means. In addition, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means without fail, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

  Also, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means also in cases other than the above case.

Also, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display It may be displayed on the means [For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A2) to FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol Displayed on display device 208, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display means displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be possible to visually improve the rendering effect in an entertaining manner.

  Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means The first display may be the second display when the first display of the first display displayed on the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on other display means. Moreover, when the first display is always displayed on the second display means when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode If the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display may be displayed on the second display means. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode If the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display may be It may be displayed on the display means of.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, the countdown display demonstrated so far may be a display performed only during execution of the said symbol fluctuation display, and may be performed as a prefetch notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a pre-reading advance notice.

  In addition, when the countdown display is performed as a preview advance notice, the countdown display may be displayed in a period between the symbol change display and the symbol change display to be performed next. In that case, while the symbol stop is displayed, the notification of the time by the countdown display may be stopped / suspended / canceled (for example, the time of the timing of the decision stop of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop displayed (however, the countdown If the symbol stop is displayed, the notification of the time by countdown may be continued, or the symbol countdown may be internally performed. You may stop the countdown internally during symbol stop display.

  In addition, when the countdown display is displayed as the pre-reading notice, the countdown display is not performed when there is a hold (for example, a hold with a fluctuation time indefinite) in which the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds. It is also good. This is because there is a possibility that it will not be clear at which timing the countdown will be 0 if the symbol variation display time is indeterminate, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (simulation, reach, In the case of development etc.), it is preferable to carry out only in the symbol variation display.

  On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed also when there is a pending with the fluctuation time being indefinite. In this case, for example, a presentation that causes no problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the reserved icon, a presentation such as round promotion during a big hit, etc. The present invention can be applied to the case where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed before the end of the object's detention. In addition, when there is an effect that needs to be synchronized (such as the start of the symbol variation display on hold that has been pre-read target) n, such as effect to force the time to match the time is performed It is also good.

  Also, the countdown display may be displayed during a big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the inter-round interval. Here, since the period of one round is indeterminate during the big hit game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately, for example, whether or not the countdown display is not generated in the final round, or during the big hit end interval (final If the big hit end display period ends after the round ends, and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or if it becomes a certain round, the book edge is forced The combined time (for example, "00:00" is forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display, etc. may be displayed).

  Further, the time until the simultaneous effect or the effect by the RTC starts may be notified by a countdown display.

  In addition, the display device may be configured of transmissive liquid crystal, and further, rendering means such as effect moving means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal. These may be configured to be visible through the. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable between a state in which the rear side can be viewed and a state in which the transmissive liquid crystal can not be viewed by the liquid crystal shutter.

  In addition, the operation mode of the effect movable means such as a bonus may be changed or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by countdown display.

  In addition, it is a display that announces that it may give an effect that affects the countdown display itself (for example, addition / subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of countdown display, change of color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect such as saying that something may occur due to a mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may occur in the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character comes out, an effect such as always performed something May be performed, and effects may be performed such that something is always performed when another character comes out. At this time, for example, the larger the number of appearances of the character, the easier it will be for the jackpot.

  In addition, when there are a large number of display of the countdown display, it may be easy to become a big hit in the end, or it may be easy to become a big hit if a notice of chance increase is given.

  In addition, with regard to the chance up meter, even if a part or all of the meter is enlarged / reduced or a promotion effect (for example, a color or shape changes or a character or marker indicating the current position is changed) is performed. Good.

Also, in the above description,
A game console provided with “image display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.”,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a notice etc. due to the appearance of the character BOY in Boi shown in FIG. 29 (4)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.]
The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. May be displayed during the period
The period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, a character SBH of Sabohan shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.]
The cursor display is from the start position [for example, the position indicated by the start point SP shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.] to the first position [eg with the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (2) By moving to the end position [for example, the position shown by the final point GP shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.] via the shown position etc., from the start to the end of the certain period is notified Is configured to
When the cursor display reaches the first position, a first timing [for example, indicated by a first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (4) is notified that the advance notice by the appearance of the Boy's character BOY is started. It is informed that it is timing etc],
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started in the reach effect display,
The period display is a display in which a first chance-up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (6), etc. ”may be displayed,
When the first effect display is started to be displayed at the first timing, a display position corresponding to the first position (hereinafter referred to as “first display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (6), The first chance-up display is displayed on the display position of “UP” and the like above the first check point CP1].
When the first chance-up display is displayed, the first chance-up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [e.g., As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of “UP” above the first check point CP1 is continuously displayed, etc., until the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, etc.,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [for example, a display of a cut-in of an eyebrow shown in FIG. 33 (A2), a display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), etc.]
The third effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display,
The display of the third effect display may be started before the first timing after the display of the period display is started [eg, FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and As shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b), in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the display of the eyelid cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) or FIG. 33 (A2 b) before the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. The effect image shown in A2b) may be displayed, etc.],
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A1) to FIG. (A2) and FIG. (A2 b), to FIG. When the display of the eyelid cut-in shown or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2 b) is performed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a first check point display [for example, a display of the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29 (4), etc.],
The first check point display is a display indicating the first position,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the first check point display is a display that is displayed until the cursor display reaches the end position [eg, as shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (25), Check point CP1 is displayed until Sabohani character SBH reaches final point GP, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, in the case where the third effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the third effect display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29 (18)],
The cursor display is configured to move to the end position through both the first position and the second position [eg, the position indicated by the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (2)]. Has been
When the cursor display reaches the second position, a second timing [for example, the timing indicated by a third check point CP3 at which the display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29 (18) is started] Being informed that
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may be started in the reach effect display,
The period display is a display in which a second chance-up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (19), etc. ”may be displayed,
When the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing, a display position corresponding to the second position (hereinafter referred to as “second display position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (19), The second chance-up display is displayed on the display position of “UP” and the like above the third check point CP3].
When the second chance-up display is displayed, the second chance-up display is continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [e.g. As shown in FIG. 29 (25), the display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 is continuously displayed, etc., until the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the first chance-up display is displayed only when the display of the first effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (4) to FIG. When the advance notice due to the appearance of the BOY is started, "UP" is displayed above the first check point CP1, but as shown in FIG. 30 (4a) to FIG. 30 (7a), the first check point Even if the SABOHANI character SBH reaches CP1 and the advance notice of the chance up is not started, "UP" is not displayed above the first check point CP1, etc.],
The second chance-up display is displayed only when the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (18) to FIG. (19), the display of the lever image 136Va When "" is started, "UP" is displayed above the third checkpoint CP3, but as shown in FIG. 30 (17b) to the same figure (20b), the character of Sabohani at the third checkpoint CP3 If the display of the lever image 136Va is not started even though the SBH has arrived, the display of "UP" is not performed above the third check point CP3, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the “period display is a display in which a first non-chance up display [for example, a display of“ x ”indicating that no advance of a chance up is not given”, etc.] may be displayed,
The period display is a display in which a second non-chance up display [for example, a display of “x” indicating that no advance of a chance up has not been made, etc.] may be displayed,
When the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first non-chance up display is displayed at the first display position [eg, in FIG. 30 (7a ′ ′) As shown, when the advance notice of the chance up is not performed at the first check point CP1, the display of the “UP” is replaced with the display of “x” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up is not performed. [Etc]
When the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second non-chance up display is displayed at the second display position [e.g., at the third check point CP3, the chance In the case where the advance notice is not made, the display is changed to the “UP”, and the display of “x” is performed to indicate that the advance of the chance up is not made, etc.] . "
I also explained about

Further, “the period display is a display including a second check point display [for example, a display of the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (4), etc.],
The second check point display is a display indicating the second position,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the period display is a display including a display that suggests that the result of determination of acceptance is derived when the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIG. 3 Check point CP3 display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, after the third effect display is displayed and the period display is not displayed, when the display of the third effect display is ended in the certain period, the period display is displayed again. For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2a) to FIG. 33 (A3a), after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the princess character, the cut-in of the princess character is performed. When the display ends and the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, after the period display is not displayed, the period display is not displayed in the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A2) to FIG. (A5), After the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of a certain character, the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, “the certain period is a period during which Super Reach is in operation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

<< Second Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other gaming machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 49 to 89 are basically used only for the description using FIG. 49 to FIG. 89, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 89, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 49 to 89 have priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the second embodiment pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 has an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 51) as an external structure . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Moreover, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, the light source as an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like is a lamp if it emits light. , And one that emits light corresponds to an example of the light emitting means.

  The game area 124 (see FIG. 51) is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the door opening sensor 609 (refer FIG. 52) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmitting unit 190. The transmitting unit 190 includes a transmitting portion 191 different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmitting portion 191 can be pivoted in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the lower part. In addition, the transmitting unit 190 incorporates a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 49 is in the initial position. The transmitting portion 191 functions as an operating means (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 51) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136. It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to light. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of the operation means. The chance button 136 is also an example of the movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 49 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, this chance button 136 is capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launcher 110 is attached below the main body 104, and is not shown in the figure, where the ball launch handle 134 is operated by the player to pivot the launcher (not shown) and the gaming ball is struck at the tip of the launcher. And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 50 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 49 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 can play a game by this configuration. Pay out the ball to the disabled person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 51 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 51 is a so-called game board of a right-handed machine. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. In a game board of a generally known right-handed game machine, changing the strength to launch the game ball by the operation of the player allows the general drawing start port 228 and the second special view start port 232, which will be described later, and It can be divided into 1 special figure starting port 230. Specifically, with respect to the game area 124, the game ball rolling on the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special view start port 230 by the arrangement of the game nail 238 or the like is the second The game ball rolling on the second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special view start opening 232 is configured such that entering the special view start opening 232 is difficult or impossible, and vice versa 1) It is difficult or impossible to enter the ball into the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 equipped with a right-handed game board, and can be widely applied to pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height thereof is also short. However, the display screen of each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51 has the right end side portion overlapping the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and similarly the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end side of the portion 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 51 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (the first decorative symbol display device 208L Position away from the left side). In addition, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (rightward toward the first decorative symbol display device 208L (A position away from). Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions of coming close to or separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. Furthermore, the number of decorative symbol display devices is not limited, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine provided with only one, or may be a pachinko machine provided with only two, 4 It may be a pachinko machine provided with one or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like For example, a lens cut of a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol The hold lamp 218, the second special symbol hold lamp 220, and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". Details of the rendering device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and are configured by liquid crystal display devices here. The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) type display devices, leaf type display devices, plasma displays, and projectors may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in this case, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs here. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are symbol display means. In addition, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). Here, holding a common drawing fluctuation game up to a predetermined number (for example, two) Is possible. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) which are being held, and here, the predetermined number of special view fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning openings 226 are disposed on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry into the general winning openings 226 (when winning in the general winning openings 226) The payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls into the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be referred to as being distinguished as the "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be distinguished from the "rental ball". It may be called a ball (game ball).

  The general drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Here, one on the right side of the game board 200 It is arranged. For this reason, the common view starting opening 228 is expected to enter the game ball by hitting the right. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  Only one first special view start port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  Only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view starting opening 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting the right. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning opening) provided at the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special view start opening 230. In addition, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special view starting opening 232, and entering the ball by hitting the right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 also has a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 which can be opened and closed by the solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game is started when the big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between the open state and the closed state repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 maintains a closed state until a big hit game is started when a big hit occurs in the power support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state repeat. That is, in any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the second open / close state (here, open) in which the game ball is easier to win than in the predetermined first open / close state (here, closed state) and the first open / close state. The variable winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one of the states) to the other, winning the special figure fluctuation game in the non-power support state, and the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the big hit symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the power support state, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of times. Open and close. The closed state does not necessarily have to be completely closed in any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and it may be a state in which the game ball can not enter or is difficult even if it is slightly open. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the center variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball for the upper dish Discharge to 126. The ball entering the central variable winning hole 234 and the ball entering the right variable winning hole 235 are also guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the gaming island side.

  According to the arrangement of the common drawing start opening 228, the first special view start opening 230, the second special view start opening 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the power support state, the right A hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player, and in the non-power support state, a left hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable) Whether to win in the winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) or without winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or Only by passing through, it reaches the out port 240.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the gaming ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N described above are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely opened (fully open), the player can view a part or all of the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at any positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L To the extent that the player can identify, it is possible to shield only a part of the decoration pattern. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Shield all of the Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are effect display means, are also a shielding means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and also an effect movable means.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, the above-mentioned chance button 136 which can perform advancing / retracting operation, and the permeation | transmission part 191 which can be rotated in the front-back direction are also 1 type of effect movable means.

  Further, as the effect moving means, a not-shown family crest 224E (see FIG. 62 etc.) is prepared here. The family crest 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest 224E starts its operation, it rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (the player side). In the initial position, the family crest 224E is less visible to the player than in the state where it is overlapped with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  Here, although the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be one common circuit board other than the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub-control means (400), second sub-control means (500). ), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as the control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. One combination of the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can also be regarded as a second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the sensor and the bottom plate full-tank sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a common view display device 21 Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the various status display unit 328 (for example, general drawing hold lamp 216, first special view holding lamp 218, second special view holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222, etc.) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member such as blade member 2321 of second special view starting port 232, door member 2341 of central variable winning hole 234, door member 2351 of right variable winning hole 235, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 which are driven to open and close is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, which indicates that the voltage has dropped if the voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, and the main control unit 300 constantly transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information, Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400 The first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative symbol Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N, and position detection sensor 430 detecting the current position of each of second decorative symbol display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N Detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, the detection unit 710 for the position detection sensor 430, the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 181 From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 which outputs the The image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 is read based on the signal, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436, and the image is displayed on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L・ The processor) is connected.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation, a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in forward and backward directions, Yatsushiro character 224Fa, general character 224Fb, and family crest character 224E) Based on drive circuits 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E, detection signals from various movable means sensors 424 And a sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502. The basic circuit 502 further includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542; A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, the first auxiliary control unit 400 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the second auxiliary control unit 500 controls various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb and 224E are controlled, but the second sub-control unit 500 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls various movable means 136 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, and 224 E may be controlled, or any one sub-control unit may perform both controls.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 52, display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 49 is also performed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door opening command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. In addition, even when there is a payout error or the like, the payout control unit 600 transmits an error command to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door open command, the detection signal of the door open sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without passing through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Alternatively, the door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first auxiliary control unit 400. The emission control unit 630 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via the other control units (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, etc.) and respective devices. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via each of the other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage substantially simultaneously from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300 or at least one of them.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660.

  In the island facility provided in the game machine installation sales office, the 100 V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24 V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with 24 V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300 into a 12V DC voltage. Although not shown in FIG. 52, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC voltage of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5 V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit. Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12 V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9 V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, through which a 12 V DC current flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. It corresponds to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the inputted 24 V AC current as it is or converts it into a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, a current of an operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 reaches the voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, the CPU 304 outputs a reset signal from the WDT 314. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a runaway state due to a program error, or a case where the CPU 304 can not perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraud, or the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power failure and immediate recovery, ie, automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is performed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. Subsequently, security check processing is performed. The security check process recalculates whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct or not. If the authentication code is correct, extension processing is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained at the state before reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c). The types of the special view and the common view to be stopped and displayed will be described. FIG. 53 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the symbol variation display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2. After that, a confirmation display for maintaining the display is performed for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms).

  Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the finalization of the final display, or after the "variation display of special figure 2" is started The period from the stop display of the stop symbol form of 2 to the end of the confirmation display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 53 (a) shows ten types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 53 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be extinguished, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, as described later, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination as to whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different between the two, and even in the same state By providing the special drawing G "," special drawing H "and" special drawing F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 53 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decorative 1" to "decorative 10" as the decorative designs here. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are detected on the condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball enters the second special view start aperture 232. In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, the order of "decorative 1" → "decorative 2" → "decorative 3" → ... "decorative 9" → "decorative 10" → "decorative 1" → ... in order Switch the display with and perform "Modified Display of Decorative Pattern". At the beginning of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol changes at high speed (scrolling display) for each symbol display area. And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 51 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  In addition, the fifth design may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The fifth pattern is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 53 (b) may be reduced, or the display pattern of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also a kind of symbol display means. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fifth symbol may be displayed in a region out of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c.

  Furthermore, the fourth design may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M. The fourth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol representing that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or being displayed in the stop state.

FIG. 53 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 53 (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54 (a), main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52, a counter for generating a big hit special decision random number counter initial value, a big hit special shot decision random number counter, and a small hit special win for each special view 1 and 2 Counter for generating random number counter initial value for special drawing determination, counter for small drawing special drawing determination, counter for generation of random number counter initial value for special drawing determination, random number counter for special drawing determination for lost time special drawing timer, and special drawing timer Each counter of the random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, in the RAM 308, the number of reservations, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for big hit special figure determination, the random number value for small hit special figure determination, the special time special figure decision for each special figure 1 and special figure 2 A random number value, a success / failure predetermination result, a special figure predetermination result, a success / failure decision result, a special figure determination result, and a special figure timer determination result are stored. Furthermore, in the RAM 308, the reserve storage unit of the special figure divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas that can reserve the start of the determination of acceptance (lottery) separately is made separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is prepared. In the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value, the big hit special figure 1 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 1 decision random number value, and the lost time special figure 1 random number value for decision The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored one set at a time in the winning order (holding order) for each area. In addition, in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2, for the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value, the big hit special figure 2 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random number value, and the lost time special figure 2 decision The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initialization of the I / O 310, and various kinds of storage in the RAM 308 as initialization 1. It initializes variables, permits operations to the WDT 314, and sets initial values. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 causes the power management unit 660 to operate via the second sub control unit 500 as the main control unit. It is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to the WDT processing, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), Perform setting 2. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  Next, in step S103, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process here, three initial values for generating initial values of the random number counter for big hit special figure determination, the random number counter for small hit special figure decision, and the random number counter for lost special order decision Update the value generation counter. After the basic random number initial value updating process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer number determination for each of the special and common figures, and any of these counters is capable of determining a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate random numbers for In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After completion of the effect random number update processing, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in about 4 ms). The main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of this timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, or WDT 314 is periodically (for example, once in about 2 ms which is the cycle of main controller timer interrupt). ) Or restart.

  First, in step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 52 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information of the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 52, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, presence of a previous detection signal, and presence of a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special view start opening 230, and the second special view start opening 232 entering the ball, or It is determined that the drawing start port 228 has been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. In addition, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal) is stored. Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value updating process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number updating process (step S205), the values of various random number counters are updated. The value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. For example, every time the random number counter for big hit special figure 1 determination makes one rotation, the value of the generation counter is set to the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same applies to other random number counters.

  In step S207, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the first special view display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the prize determination process (step S209), first, when there are prizes in the prize openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 provides an award for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value of the ball number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and it is set as the original ball number storage area.

  Subsequently, in the prize determination processing, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has a prize, and the number of the special figure fluctuation games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) And stores predetermined start information. That is, if the number of reservations is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random number value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 52 (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 52, the special drawing determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 which performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the start information deriving means. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as one set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (order of holding) in the holding storage unit of the special view provided in the RAM 308. The reserve storage unit of this special view has a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this case) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232. It corresponds to an example of the start information storage means which can be stored up to. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the reserve storage unit of the special view. In this case, the temporary area is started It may be used as information storage means, or it may be used as a start information storage means for the suspension storage unit and the temporary area of the special view. Also, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations of the special view stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reservations of the special view increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, and the number of common drawing fluctuation games being held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the common drawing wins at that timing. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area different from that for special drawing provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing win random number value which is start information.

  Also, in this winning determination process, to a first special view start opening 230, a second special view start opening 232, a common view start opening 228, a central variable winning opening 234, or a right variable winning opening 235 by a predetermined ball detection sensor The first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232, the common view starting port 228, and the center variable in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400 when a winning (entering) is detected. The winning a prize reception information indicating the presence or absence of a winning (entering) of the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  If the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

  When the winning determination process (step S209) is completed, the pre-reading process is called. In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased since the pre-reading process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of pending calls (the number of pending calls at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which will be referred to as the old pending number). The number of holdings at the time of executing the pre-reading processing of this time after the winning a prize judgment processing (step S209) is compared with the number of old holdings, and it is determined whether the number of holdings increases. If the number of reservations has not increased, this prefetch process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations is increased, the amount of increase in the random number value for the special view 1 jackpot determination in the special storage 1 of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read ahead, or The amount of increase in the random number value for the big hit judgment in Figure 2 is read ahead. In the look-ahead reading here, only the amount of increase may be read ahead, but all may be read ahead. In addition, although pre-reading here means reading start information prior to the pass / fail determination (this lottery), but in the subsequent pre-reading processing, the word “pre-reading” is the result of ahead (the result of pass / fail determination (this lottery) Sometimes used in the sense of reading).

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, the control state is either one of the special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low and the relatively high special figure high probability state. Being in the special figure high probability state is called probability fluctuation. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a positive change flag is prepared. When this probability fluctuation graph is set to ON, it is a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and when the probability fluctuation graph is set to OFF, it is a special figure low probability state.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-qualification decision table used in the pre-reading process. In this success / failure predetermination table, a random number range is defined by being divided into the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is finished, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value It is determined as to which random number range in the table for belonging. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the random number value for special figure 1 big hit determination or special figure 2 big hit determination random number read ahead is a predetermined numerical range. At times, the success / failure predetermination result is pre-determined as "big hit", and when other than that, the success / failure pre-determination result is pre-determined as "loss". In the special chart related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 54B) described later, the special chart variation game is again subjected to the regularity decision of the special chart fluctuation game using the table of the same chart as the content of the preliminary decision table The determination result here is the result of the prior determination.

  If the judgment result of the success or failure is "big hit", the big hit time special figure 1 determination random value in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2 A big hit special look 2 random number value for decision is preread. If the success / failure predetermination result is "small hit", the small hit time special figure 1 determination random value in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserve storage of the special figure 2 Look for a small-hit special figure 2 determination random number value in the department. If the result of the pass / fail judgment is “loss”, the random number value for special figure 1 determination at the time of loss in the reserve storage unit of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserve storage unit of special figure 2 When reading out, the random number value for determination of the special figure 2 is read ahead. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special-image prior determination table used in the prefetching process. A random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol forms (“Special figure A” to “Special figure J”) shown in FIG. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 53 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. In addition, the determination result of the special view here is also a result of prior determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special view is also performed again in the special figure related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. .

  The pre-reading of the start information described above and the prior determination using the pre-read start information are performed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special-pattern related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 jackpot determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information prefetching means, and the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value and various The main control unit 300 for prefetching the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of the second start information prefetching means. In addition, the main control unit 300 performing predetermination based on the special figure 1 jackpot determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first prior determination means, and is for the special figure 2 jackpot determination The main control unit 300 which performs the prior determination based on the random number value and the random numbers for determination of various special views 2 corresponds to an example of the second prior determination means.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage unit for the special view 1 divided into areas for each hold, and a prefetch information temporary storage unit for the special view 2 similarly divided into areas for each hold. It is done. Information representing the special-figure preliminary determination result (also information representing the special-figure and hereinafter referred to as pre-reading information) is stored in the corresponding hold area of the pre-reading information temporary storage unit.

  It should be noted that if the number of reservations has not increased, the prefetch information “no suspension” is stored in the corresponding suspension area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Also, in the pre-reading process, when a big hit is in progress, and when the current control state is the power support state (the short time flag is on), pre-reading and pre-judging of start information of the special figure 1 is performed. No, in these cases, "undetermined" information indicating that the predetermination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the special view 1 that has been read is not performed, the corresponding hold area of the read-ahead information temporary storage unit Remember to That is, based on having entered the starting opening where the pair of wing members 2321 is not provided (the first special view starting opening 230 whose state is a fixed starting area), it is acquired during the big hit game and during the power support Pre-judgment based on the start information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading advance notice) of the pre-judgment result is not performed. By doing this, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, pre-reading of starting information itself is not done, but pre-reading does not do pre-judgment and the result (the pre-reading notice) it does not do pre-judgment and pre-judging. The notification (pre-reading advance notice) of may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 54 (b), a general drawing related process is performed subsequent to the winning determination process of step S209 (step S211). In this common drawing related processing, first, as common drawing state update processing, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state is performed. For example, in the process during the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the lighting / lighting drive control which repeats turning on and off of the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeated. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (general drawing A shown in FIG. 53 (c) and lost symbol) The on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is performed so as to display any one display mode of the common view B shown in FIG. 53 (c). Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas are prepared in which various settings are performed in various processes, not limited to the general drawing related process here. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either symbol pattern of the hit symbol or the lost symbol. After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the hit symbol displayed in a definite manner is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, the common drawing loss flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set.

  Subsequently, in this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuating game and the second special drawing starting opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the common drawing being held. When the number of fluctuation games is one or more, the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is won or not by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number value stored in the above random number storage area In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 54 (b), the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the ordinary figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special drawing related processing, first, special drawing status update processing (special drawing 2 status update processing) for special drawing 2 is performed, and then, the special drawing status update processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 status update) Process). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step S233), and then the process is ended.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory time elapses (the time when value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), in special figure related lottery process which it mentions later The 7 segment LED constituting the second special view display device 214 is turned on / off drive control based on the special view determination result (the special design stop symbol form), and special view 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308 Make settings to represent things. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special figure C), and a short time symbol (special Figure D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first lost symbol (special A finalized display of any one of the figure I) and the first lost symbol (special figure J) is performed. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. In addition, when the value is set in the number-of-charges storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shorts, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state) or during the small hit game, the time saving flag is turned off. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the non-power support state (first approach rate control state) when in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special game state).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that general command rotation stop setting transmission processing is to be executed in command setting transmission processing (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping variable display is The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that it is special view 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

  A big hit flag is also prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, the first decoration symbol display device 208L displays an image notifying the player of a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, starting the big hit game. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect presentation start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the central variable winning hole 234 or the right variable winning hole 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning hole 234 or the door member of the right variable winning hole 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 308 (for 1.5 seconds, for example) to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 and provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) The effect is stored in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to stand by for a period during which the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like displays an image notifying the player of the end of the game. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / close state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the big hit gaming state (special gaming state) It corresponds to an example of the variable winning combination control means which controls. The open / close patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the ROM 306 to select the open / close pattern according to the success or failure determination of the special view fluctuation game. get.

  In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol aspect represented by the special drawing determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on when the special drawing determination result is “special drawing A” or “special drawing C” in the special drawing lottery process described later. . Further, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing E", only the definite change flag is set to ON among the definite change flag and the time saving flag. Furthermore, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing B" or "special drawing D", only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON and the number of times of electricity support stored in RAM 308 is stored. Set the number of charge support times 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special view start opening 232 (variable start area) is controlled, It corresponds to an example of the approach rate changing means for changing between the non-power support state which is the approach rate control state and the power support state which is the second approach rate control state.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, a lost flag is prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, it is made to shift to the next process without doing anything.

  When the special view 2 state update process is completed, the special view 1 state update process is performed. In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed this time. In the special figure related lottery process, a process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first, and thereafter, a process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this manner, the main control unit 300 performs the special view 2 related lottery process prior to the special view 1 related lottery process, thereby achieving the same timing (the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at a predetermined timing) In the case where the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special view start opening 230 in S209) and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special view start opening 232 Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variation game are satisfied at the same time, or the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variation game are satisfied Even when there is a special figure 2 variation game is moving first, the special figure 1 variation game does not start to change. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special view fluctuation game by the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 is performed by the main control unit 300, and the winning of the second special view start opening 232 Based on the result of lottery based notification, it is carried out prior to the result notification of the lottery based on the winning to the first special figure starting port 230, as starting information and special drawing 1 of the special figure 1 as starting information where the lottery is not performed When only the start information of the special view 1 among the start information of 2 remains, if the start information of the special view 2 is newly stored, it is based on the start information of the special view 2 which is newly stored. Notification of the result of the lottery is performed prior to notification of the result of the lottery based on the start information of the special view 1 already stored. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the lottery means (the pass / fail judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, execution of a lottery (judgment determination), determination of a special view to be stopped and determination, and determination of a timer number are performed. First, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not established. Here, it is determined whether the second special view display device 214 is in the special view variation display or in the stop display, and when any of the display is in the main control unit timer interrupt processing If the display is not in any display, it is judged whether it is set during special drawing operation or not during special drawing operation, and if it is set during special drawing operation, main control unit timer interrupt processing If it is set in the special view non-operation state, it means that the yes / no decision prohibit condition is not established, and it is then decided whether or not the predetermined yes / no decision condition is met. The determination here refers to the holding storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether the number of holdings of the special view 2 variation game is greater than zero. If the number of reservations is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and if it is 1 or more, the predetermined yes / no determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, a random number value for one set, which is start information stored most in the past, from the holding storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308 The random number value for big hit special figure 2 decision, the random number value for small hit special figure 2 decision, and the random number value for lost time special figure 2 decision) are extracted and the start information (randomness) still stored in the reserve storage unit Move the set of numbers) from the area currently stored to the next area. In other words, if the start information stored in the past is taken out from the hold storage unit of Special Figure 2 and if the start information is stored in the hold storage unit of Special Figure 2, then the Nth oldest start information is held It is set as the (N-1) th oldest start information in the storage unit. Further, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. One set of random numbers from the reserve storage section of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value, big hit special figure 2 decision random number value, small hit special figure 2 decision random number value, and lost time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of the second start information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a table for deciding on a pass / fail is also stored. The contents of the success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the success / failure predetermination table described above. In this success / failure determination process, the random number value for the special figure 2 big hit determination is in the table for determining success or failure according to the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 Based on which of the random number ranges of the above, "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is derived as the result of the pass / fail determination. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving "big hit", "small hit", or "lost" is equivalent to a success or failure judgment (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the success or failure judgment processing here is a lottery means (a probability judgment means). Corresponds to one example. Also, "big hit" corresponds to an example of a specific result of the pass / fail judgment.

  When execution of the propriety determination processing is completed, it proceeds to the symbol determination processing of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing determination table. The contents of this special drawing determination table are the same as the contents of the special drawing prior determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the success or failure determination result is "big hit", the random number value for big figure special figure 2 determination belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table, when the big hit. The special drawing determination result is determined to be "special drawing A" to "special drawing F". In addition, when the success or failure determination result is "small hit", the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table belongs to the small figure special figure 2 determination random number value. It is determined to be “special figure G” or “special figure H”. Furthermore, if the result of the success or failure determination is “loss”, the special drawing determination result is “specially determined based on which random number range in the special drawing determination table belongs to the special drawing 2 determination table. Decide on figure I or "special figure J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determination process of the special drawing corresponds to an example of the symbol determination means.

  Subsequent to the symbol determination processing of the special drawing, in the fluctuation time determination processing, the fluctuation display period in the fluctuation stop display of the special drawing is determined. In this fluctuation time determination process, the timer number determination random number is acquired from the timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation start, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. A timer number determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each of the special figure determination results. The timer number is the time from when the second special view display device 214 or the first special view display device 212 starts changing the symbols until it displays the stop symbol representing the result of the pass / fail determination, that is, the special view changes display Represents a fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), but may be a fluctuation table time period of a decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, timers of timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, and the super-shortened special figure fluctuation time is reached. It means to become. In addition, what is determined by timer 1 or timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 has a special drawing fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 represents that the special drawing fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the reach pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as normal reach. With normal reach, in general, decorative symbols whose two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 51) are equal are displayed in a stopped state (strictly, temporarily stopped) (a first stop and a second stop are performed ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area being variably displayed is a specific symbol (symbol display area being stopped) It is a state where it will be stopped and displayed the combination of a predetermined big hit symbol if the stop indication (the third stop or the final stop) is the same as the symbol. The timer 5 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as Super Reach. The Super Reach is a product that improves presentation effects by adding a special variable display etc. to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the ornamental symbol in the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. When it is determined to be timer 8, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as full rotation reach Ru. The probability that the timer 8 is selected is extremely lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the Premier Reach.

  In addition, when it only says reach, it means the change pattern of the decoration design including normal reach, super reach, and special change.

  The reach is determined after the success or failure determination that the result of the success / failure determination (main lottery) in the special drawing related process is a specific success / failure determination result (a predetermined result with high player's degree of advantage) It is a notice effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the success or failure judgment, and whether or not the reach is to be performed is determined after the judgment on the success or failure.

  In the fluctuation time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired random number for timer number determination belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number in accordance with the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the current special figure 2 as well as the timer number determination random number is also available. The timer number may be determined based on the above.

  The timer number representing the special drawing fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  In addition, before special figure lottery related processing is executed (for example, the above-mentioned winning a prize decision processing S209), from the plural types timer selection table which includes the timer number which is 1 or plural period information, to the special figure advance decision result Alternatively, one type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. Also in the determination of the timer number here, a lottery may be performed by a dedicated random number (for example, a timer number determination random number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined already without performing the lottery. . Further, the timer selection table may be selected in the special view lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

  When the fluctuation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process is ended.

  Subsequently, in the special drawing related processing, the special drawing 1 related lottery processing is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds per minute specification command, big winning opening open command, big winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type), such as a clear command, a special figure hold increase command, and a general view hold increase command, which can specify the type of command).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information representing a special figure stop symbol, information representing a control state (information representing a setting state of a time saving flag and a probability variation flag), and information representing a timer number in the command data In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, it includes information representing a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc., and in the case of a prize effect start command and an end effect start command In the case of the hit round number designation command, the control state information is included, and the hit round number is included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning to the central variable winning opening 234 And the presence or absence of a winning on the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 as command data (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, information representing a timer number, hold The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are done is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc. is set as command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information representing a special drawing determination result, information representing a control state, the number of pending first special drawing fluctuation games or second special drawing fluctuation games, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to a big hit game start command. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418 and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, and information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game that are held are set. The first sub control unit 400 having received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 having received the termination effect control command displays an image on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like to notify the player that the predetermined termination effect period (for example, 3 seconds) is to end, ie, the big hit game is terminated. Let the jackpot game end. The end effect start command said here corresponds to a big hit game end command. In the above-mentioned general command large winning a prize opening opening setting transmission processing, the information which shows the information which shows the number of rounds which are stored in RAM308 the present round number and control state etc as a command data of big winning opening opening command . In the above-mentioned general command large winning a prize opening closing setting transmission processing, the current round number which is remembered in RAM308 as the command data of big winning a prize opening closing command, the information which shows control state, the 1st special figure fluctuation game which is suspended Alternatively, information is set that indicates the number of second special figure change games and the like.

  At step S215, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, the special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 as command data of the special view reserve increase command, control state And information representing the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance (the special figure prior determination result).

  Further, in step S215, general command hold drawing increase processing is also performed. In this general command draw increasing process, information representing a control state or the like is set in the command data of the draw increasing command. In addition, a common drawing fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing has been started (is performed) is also transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as the common drawing related command. It should be noted that from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a common drawing fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing is stopped, and the pair of blade members 2321 has started opening (done) It is also possible to transmit an electric chew open start command indicating that, or an electric chew close command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 is closed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until the end of all the rounds based on the number of rounds included in the command and the number of current rounds.

  Also, in this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be outputted to the payout control unit 600 are constituted by 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, the power on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), Bits 4 to 5 of this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 after encryption processing It indicates the number of requested payouts.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 54 (b), an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step S201 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the underfill error, etc. When an error or a bottom plate error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 52 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 is completed, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 54A. However, before returning, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are stored in the original registers. Make settings, set interrupt permission, etc. Also, before returning, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not, and when the low voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the state at the time of power failure is restored Save a specific variable or stack pointer to the specified area of the RAM 308 as return data, perform power-off processing such as initialization of the I / O port, and then return to the main control main processing It is also good.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect involving the operation means described below is also controlled first in this effect control process. That is, when the symbol variation start command including the information on the variation time of the symbol is received, whether or not the effect involving the operation means is to be executed according to the length of the variation time in this effect control process If determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read out from the ROM 406. According to the effect data read out here, the image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and the movable unit control is read out to the second sub control unit 500 here A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination here, when pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into effect data according to pressing operation of the chance button 136, pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is effective, processing such as preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed.

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is an operation instruction (move instruction or rotation instruction) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309. The setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. When the door open command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, in step S321, the door open command is set to be output to the second sub control unit.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle.

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, movable unit control processing is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation, a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the back and forth direction, and an eighth generation character capable of moving up and down) When a control command related to 224Fa and a general officer 224Fb and a vertically moveable family crest 224E) is received, various processing corresponding to the control command is performed, and various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process in a predetermined cycle. Run with

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  Subsequently, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect in stages. In FIG. 57, the time passes in the order of the alphabets etc. written in parentheses (the same applies in the subsequent figures unless otherwise specified). In addition, the time interval between the alphabet etc. written in parentheses and the alphabet etc. written next in parentheses may be equal intervals or may be different intervals in one figure. The intervals different from the equal intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the subsequent drawings).

  In FIG. 57, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208208L to N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57, the variation icon display region 208e is provided in the central portion of the effect display region 208d, and the hold icon display region 208f is on the right side of the variation icon display region 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the variation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area, or when it is displayed in the opposite direction), further reach effect is performed. May be displayed only when the Note that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or more pending icons can be displayed in the pending icon display area 208 f. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four suspension icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles by dotted lines indicates that the suspension icon is not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special drawing or the start of the judgment of the special view is held, and the number of the hold icon displayed is basically that of the special view fluctuation game It is the same number as the number of reservations. However, before and after the hold processing, there may be timing when the number of display of the hold icon does not represent the hold number. The hold icon includes the hold icon of the special view 1 and the hold icon of the special view 2. The hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to be display areas for both icons. In addition, the hold icon can be previewed and notified of the hold status according to the display mode. The animation associated with the hold icon is, for example, an increase animation executed when the hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed, or the order of the hold fluctuates due to the previous hold being digested, and the hold is performed. Movement animation performed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position next to the left), change animation performed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-reading result, etc. hold is digested Erase animation that is executed when the reserve icon is erased, and save animation that is executed when the reserve icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is evacuated when reserve of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variable machine Etc. In addition to the animation described above, a stand-by animation that can be executed alone during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase or decrease in hold and no change in the hold icon). There is. An example of this standby animation is an animation (for example, a repetitive animation of a fixed scale animation) performed on the spot without changing the display position. In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of animations of increase, movement, change, deletion, evacuation, and standby of the hold icon are executed in a plurality of overlapping manners.

  One fluctuation icon can be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b) displays a star-shaped fluctuation icon c. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or expressed as a change icon moves. May be Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the change icon display area 208 e is completed may be referred to as a change icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the change icon display area 208e when the hold is digested, the hold icon with the oldest start winning timing being displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. There are a moving animation for moving as a fluctuation icon, and a changing animation for changing from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. These animations may be combined and performed simultaneously. If the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation that is executed during the execution of the special drawing fluctuation game, an erasing animation that is executed when the special drawing fluctuation game is ended and the fluctuation icon is erased, and the fluctuation icon There is a change animation etc. which are performed when changing a display mode of in the middle. These animations may be performed simultaneously in combination with one another. Also, the waiting animation of the variation icon may be performed simultaneously with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special view 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special view 2 are displayed at the upper right. The fourth pattern 2081 of the special view 1 is a round display, and the fourth pattern 2082 of the special view 2 is a square display. In any of the fourth patterns 2081 and 2082, gray represents fluctuation, black represents stop display (final display) of big hit symbols, and white represents stop display of final symbol (final display). It represents that it is. These 4th designs 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative designs.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 57, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special view hold lamp 220 It is shown.

  In addition, in FIG. 57, a chance button 136 is also shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 57, the white display indicates the white light on or off state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display is the screen of the chance button lamp 138. Indicates a red lighting condition. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Moreover, although it was set as "lighting" here, it may be "flashing" (following, the same).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 is a background image of a castle town. When the background image is a background image of the castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is the castle town mode among the prepared effect modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 57 (a), both the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 display the stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a loose eye. Some "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are also displayed in white during stoppage. While the four first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 57 (a) are lit, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle holding icons, which are the pending display of the special view 1 The variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 57 (b), symbol variation display of the special figure is started in the first special view display device 212, and variation display of the decoration symbol is also started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, updating (variation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 57 (b) are lit, and three holding icons are held in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (pending icons h1 to h3 Is displayed, and a star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. In this example, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 6A, the hold icon h1 having the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. It is the result of having moved to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th design 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changing to the display (gray) while it is fluctuating.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (c), reach effect is started. Up to this point, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is reduced in size at the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3 .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button effect here is the effect that tells the development of Super Reach. Also, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach to be developed. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 49 and the operation of the chance button 136 in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Arrow display 136 b and character display “press” as a prompting prompting (pressing), and remaining period meter display 136 c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as a valid one. The three are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136 c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 57 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 57 (d) starts to light in red and urges pressing.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, and the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) after a while (see FIG. 57F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 which has been lit in red is switched to being lit in white or is turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (g), the display of “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then it is developed into the super reach A as shown in FIG. 57 (h). doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (h), the characters Super Reach A are displayed, indicating that the effect of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the super reach A presentation is also performed on the background of the castle town. In addition, when the effect display of the super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, the frame-like image which shows the position of 4th design 2081, 2082, the fluctuation icon c, and the fluctuation icon display area 208e is continuing being displayed. The fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may also be erased so as not to be visible. The Super Reach A is not a jackpot-confirmed Super Reach, and just because it has developed into a Super Reach A does not always mean a big hit. In addition, even when the display is made to expect that "CHANCE" is likely to develop into a super reach, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lost design is stopped and displayed without the super reach being started. In some cases. Furthermore, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 57 (g) may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be

  On the other hand, in FIG. 57 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 57 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “Sorry” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then As shown in the same figure (h '), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol of the loss of "decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" The combination is displayed stopped. In addition, even if the display of "sorry" is made, it may be a big hit by the reversal production.

  Although the operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, the operation outside the effective period of operation is ultimately treated as an invalid one, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state in the operation valid period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation valid state) in which execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram for describing the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 in detail.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation and a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows that both the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are at their initial positions, as with the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmitting portion 191 is also in a substantially parallel state with the transparent plate member 118. Even when the chance button 136 is in the initial position, it can be operated (pressed), and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked. Also, the chance button 136 may vibrate and can vibrate even in the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the depressed position.

  FIG. 58 (b) shows that the transmitting portion 191 is provided at the lower part from the initial position and is pivoted about a drive shaft (not shown) and inclined forward. The drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. In the transmitting unit 191, the LED contained in the transmitting unit 190 turns forward while turning on or flashing, and a speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. The transmitting portion 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 58 (b), it is possible to vibrate in the front-rear direction or in the lateral direction. In addition, the transmission part 191 may turn in small increments in the front-rear direction as strong vibration with a large swing width of vibration. Even when the transmitting part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmitting part unit 190 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The state (second state) of the transmitting portion 191 shown in FIG. 58 (b) is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. 58 (a), The player is operable to manually push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of the operation means. Even when the transmitting unit 191 is operated and pressed, the LED built in the transmitting unit 190 is lit or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. The transmitting portion 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 58C shows that the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, (d) in the figure shows that the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can also stop at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum exit position. Therefore, it is possible to advance into multiple stages. In addition, the chance button 136 which has advanced (projected) from the initial position is also capable of vibrating, and vibrates in the lateral direction or in the vertical direction in the state of having advanced (projected). Also in this case, the chance button lamp 138 can be lighted or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output an effect sound or an effect sound. Furthermore, the chance button 136 advanced (projected) from the initial position is operable to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pressed, the chance button lamp 138 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. In addition, the chance button 136 may be configured to automatically retreat to the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  The vibration of the chance button 136 or the vibration of the transmitting portion 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is exhibited by setting by the effect customization function by the player or setting of a switch on the side of the game shop clerk. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be no vibration at all or only a partial vibration.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram for describing an effect in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is entangled.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 58 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. Here, when the operation means A and the operation means B are compared, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. There is a difference that the means B can not be operated at the initial position, but the operation means B and the operation means A may be reversed, or both may be operation means of the same size, or the initial position The operation means may be operated together or may not be operated together. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. It is also good.

  In addition, the operation means described as the transmission unit 191 in the following description can be replaced with another operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operating means B (the transmitting portion 191) is more striking than the effect involving the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). The degree of expectation of is high. Further, both of the functions A are provided, but the functions B are provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of lighting. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 59A, the operation means B is inferior to the operation means A in the number of functions.

  However, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), both may have the same number of functions. That is, although the function B is provided only in the operation means A, the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function that can perform strong vibration.

  In the operation means A and the operation means B, the number of functions may be the same.

  FIG. 59 (c) is a view showing a part of effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is "liquid crystal", the operation data in Yatsushiro character 224Fa and general character 224Fb and family crest character 224E is "moving means", and the sound output data from the speaker 120 is " The light emission data of the "sound", the frame lamp 122, the LED, and various built-in lamps are displayed as "LED", and the vibration data of the operation means A is displayed as "vibrate". "..." in a figure represents abbreviation | omission of data. Production No. The data of “Vibrate” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” represents that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of "Vibrate" in 2 is "E1", and "E1" represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in 2 becomes effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated According to each of these effect data, the effect after the operation is started. Production No. The data of "Vibrate" in 3 is "E2", and this "E2" represents that the operating means A is vibrated after the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound” and “LED” in 3 become effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. No. 2 data and effect No. The data of 3 may also be called up when the operation means B (the transmission unit 191) is operated. This is because there may be cases where each effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound” and “LED” can be used as effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. No. 2 data or effect No. The effects according to the "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound" and "LED" in the data of 3 are started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, for the effect No. Data 2 includes data (E1) for vibrating the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal" become data after the operation of the operating means A, but the operating means B The operation No. When the data of 2 is read out, the data of “Vibrate” is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as “Liquid Crystal”. In addition, production No. No. 2 data and effect No. In the case of the data of 3, the data of at least "liquid crystal" is different as "A1" and "A2", and the data of "liquid crystal" of "A1" is used after the operation means B is operated. Is the effect No. It is not the data of 3, but the effect No. It is necessary to read out the 2 data.

  The effect data on the operation means B may also be called up when the operation means A is operated, and after the operation means A is operated, “liquid crystal”, “movable means” in the effect data on the operation means B, The presentation according to each presentation data of "Sound" and "LED" is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of "Vibrate". However, the effect data regarding the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an execution timing regarding an effect involving the operation means A and an effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 60, time passes from left to right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c), "operation means B related effect" started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission part 191) from the top, the operation means B is operated "Operation means B operation effective state" in which the operation means B related effect is started, "operation means B operation" indicating that the operation means B is operated, and operation means A (chance button 136) "Operating means A related rendering" started according to the operation, "Operating means A operation enabled state" in which the operating means A related rendering is started when the operating means A is operated, the operating means A is operated “Operating means A operation” is shown to indicate the event. The "operation means B related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. The "operation means A-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the “operation means A-related effect” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. In the "operation means B operation valid state", there are cases where a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means B is performed and cases where it is not performed. Even in the "operation means A operation valid state", the operation is performed. There are cases where notification (operation promotion notification) for prompting operation of the means A is performed and cases where it is not performed. If these notifications are performed, the player can know that the operation is enabled, but if it is not performed, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60 (a), the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation enabled state, but the operation means B related effect is started at the same time as the end of the operation means B operation enabled state. Thus, the "operation means B related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effect” may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the contents of the “operation means B related effect” may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means B. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A related effect is started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the "operation means A-related effect" may also be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A-related effect” may also be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the contents of the “operation means A related presentation” may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means A. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start simultaneously and end simultaneously.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state, from the operation means B operation valid state to the execution of the operation means B related effect Switch. On the other hand, with regard to the operation means A, here too, without passing through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A, the operation means A related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect It is done. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start simultaneously and end simultaneously.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state, the operation means B operation valid state is executed to the execution of the operation means B related effect. Switch. On the other hand, with regard to the operation means A, here too, without passing through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A, the operation means A related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect It is done. In the example shown in FIG. 60 (c), the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is simultaneously started, but after the vibration of the operation means A ends first and the vibration of the operation means A ends, the vibration of the operation means B ends.

  The start time may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start time is different, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, and then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. May be Also, conversely, the operation means A-related effect starts first, and then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. Further, the end time may be the same, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, and then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together Alternatively, the operation means A-related effect starts first, and then the operation means B-related effect starts, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may end together .

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 60 (a), when the operation related to the operation means B is executed without operating the operation means B, for example, the operation related to the operation means B corresponds to the operation effective of the operation means B If the mode is to be executed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state, the operation time of the operation means B related effect may be longer as the operation means B is operated earlier. become able to.

  FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing an execution timing regarding an effect involving operation means. Arrows in FIG. 61A to FIG. 61C indicate the vibration period of the operation means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 61 (a) is an example during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and when the operation promoting means B is operated in a state where the operation promoting notification of the operating means B (transmissive portion 191) is performed, the operation is performed The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L etc., the judge effect is started. The judgment effect here is the judgment effect for the big hit, and corresponds to an example of the first effect. The first effect is the advance effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Further, the first effect is not the advance notice effect on the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judgment effect is displayed, the judgment effect is ended, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fluctuation display of three decorative symbols is started as the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operation means A is continued to the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation display. Soon, the fluctuation display is finished, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 61 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol is already determined, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Period of time is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A will be continued until just before the end of the period of time of the reduced fluctuation indication.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), before the notification of the result on the player's profit such as the finalized display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A can be ended and the player can concentrate on the notification of the result on the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 61 (b) is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the judgment effect is started. The judge in the judgment presentation here is a judge that leads to whether or not to shift to a definite change state. When the result of the judgment effect is displayed, the judgment effect is ended, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is informed that aiming at a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operation means A is continued halfway through the execution period of the notification. Soon, the next round is started, and it is notified again that aiming at a specific winning combination (for example, V winning combination).

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 61 (b), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the specific winning opening is aimed at the next round because the maximum allowable time for one round has already been determined. The execution period for notifying that is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued until slightly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. Moreover, the round which should aim at a specific winning a prize mouth is limited, and if it can be made to win a specific winning a prize mouth in the round, it shifts to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game. For this reason, the round which should aim at the specific winning a prize opening is an important round leading to the player's profit, and before the start of the round leading to the player's profit, the effect such as the vibration of the operating means A is ended and the player We are focusing on aiming for a specific winning combination.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61 (a) or the example shown in FIG. 61 (b), even if the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A does not change but becomes constant.

  The example shown in FIG. 61 (c) is an example of the pseudo-series effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in the state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed, the operation means B operates Then, the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) is started, and the stop display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is finished, and the vibration of the operation means A is also finished at the same time when the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is finished. Then, the next pseudo variation display is started, and the number of times of pseudo run is the nth time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is performed also in the nth pseudo variation display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 61 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of stop display of the pseudo-connected symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A is ended simultaneously with the end of the stop display of the shortened pseudo run symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61C, when the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A also changes.

  In summary including what has been described above, the operation means A can vibrate in a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is at least performed. In addition, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating in at least a part of a period in which a judgment effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being performed. For example, the vibration may be ended simultaneously with the end of the judgment effect, the vibration may be continued even if the judgment effect is ended, or the vibration may be ended before the end of the judgment effect. Moreover, the vibration period in which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, and may differ according to the presence or absence of operation of the operation means B, and operation timing.

  The upper example shown in FIG. 61D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge regarding whether or not to be a big hit in the variable display during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, or a judge showing the end of the reach production (the reach production of the final stage such as strong SP reach) It is In this upper example, the period in which the operation means A is vibrating is a period in which the operation of the operation means A is handled as effective, and the vibration is ended when the operation means A is operated, and the final judgment effect is started. Ru. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect becomes long, and the period in which the operation means A vibrates becomes long. In addition, even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a fixed period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 61D, the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect become simultaneous, and the period length between them becomes zero. However, while the operation means A is vibrating, it can be ensured for a fixed period. The final judgment effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, and is an advance notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not an advance notice effect regarding the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started according to the operation of the operation means B, the vibration of the operation means A is upward when it is started by operating the operation means A after the operation of the operation means B. If the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes long, and the period in which the operation means A vibrates becomes long.

  Next, the meter effect will be described.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the meter effect in stages.

  In FIG. 62 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is at the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is on the right side.

  Also, a family crest 224E (not shown in FIG. 51) is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 62 (1) corresponds to the initial position. The family crest 224E is at the foremost position of the family crest 224E and the three decorative symbol displays 208L to N (the positional relationship in the depth direction). A second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are disposed between the family crest 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the rear side.

  In FIG. 62, it is executed in the symbol (special figure) of the variable display executed in the first special view display device 212 (see FIG. 49 etc.) and the second special view display device 214 (see FIG. 49 etc.). The symbol (special figure) of the variable display is the first symbol. Further, a symbol (common drawing) of the variable display executed in the common drawing display device 210 (see FIG. 49 and the like) (not shown) also corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of the variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 53 (b), which is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is a rendering symbol that represents the first symbol (not shown) with enhanced decoration. The first symbol is display-controlled by the main control unit 300, and the third symbol pd3 is display-controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 side. As described above, the sub control units 400 and 500 execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined intervals. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag occurs for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt processing on the side of the sub control unit 400, 500, but when the first symbol starts fluctuating display, the third symbol The symbol pd3 also starts variable display, and when the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. Hereinafter, although it demonstrates using 3rd design pd3, and demonstrates on the basis of 3rd design pd3, it is the same thing even if it replaces 3rd design pd3 with a 1st design.

  Further, in FIG. 62, Yatsushiro character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, a fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the general military item 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display. The square display corresponds to the special figure 1 and the circle display corresponds to the special figure 2. Whether the display is a square or a circle, the gray display indicates that the stop symbol of loss is being displayed on the special view display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates the special view display device In (212, 214), it indicates that the stop symbol of the big hit is being displayed, and the white display indicates that symbol variation is being displayed in the special view display device (212, 214). The fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. In addition, it may distinguish and display during fluctuation display and during stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of the board. Furthermore, in the upper part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, a mini decorative symbol in which the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a reduced size is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The fifth symbol pd5 may have a display mode different from that of the third symbol pd3, and if the size is smaller than the size of the third pattern pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The fifth symbol pd5 also performs variable display and stop display, and similarly to the fourth symbol pd4, plays a role in representing in a variable display and stop display of the third symbol pd3 in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. Each of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed in plurality. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 each correspond to a decorative symbol in a broad sense.

  In the state shown in FIG. 62 (1), both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stop display of the combination of the lost decorative symbol designs. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a gray square display and a gray circle display, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 both indicate that the display is stopped.

  Further, a holding frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 62 (1). The holding frame UI can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface providing various information to the player. Further, in the holding frame UI, the variation icon display area is disposed at the center, the holding icon display area is disposed on the left side, and the effect display area is disposed on the right side. In the reserved icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 are prepared, and one reserved icon is displayed for each stage. In addition, the stage corresponding to the number (for example, eight) which united the number of holding balls of the special figure 1 and the number of holding balls of the special figure 2 may be prepared. In the variation icon display area, a stage cs which is higher than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variation icon is displayed on the stage cs. In addition, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 62 (1) is provided with a base icon UIb extending in the left and right direction with vertical stripe patterns, and four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the holding icon display area, Each of the stages cs prepared in the variation icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed superimposed on the base icon UIb from the front side. Further, a tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. 62 (1). This tutorial display ts can also be viewed as a tutorial icon superimposed on the base icon UIb from the front side.

  One hold icon h1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 62 (1), and it is notified that the number of currently held special views is one. That is, the holding icon is displayed for the number of holding balls in the special drawing, and the one with the earlier winning timing is displayed closer to the center (right side). The first hold pending icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 62 (1) is a pending icon for the special view 1 and is displayed in a red display mode, which is a display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon, and for each display mode, the degree of expectation (reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold) Represents. However, even if it is a display mode with a high degree of expectation of the big hit, it is not always a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension, and it may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the more likely the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in the first symbol. In addition, after the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-read notice mode or starts to be displayed in the default display mode, the timing of changing to the pre-read notice mode is: change start, change, stop, pre-read target hold The time of winning will be raised.

  Further, on the stage cs of the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 62 (1), the variation icon c of the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 62 (1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are in the stop display, and the fourth symbol pd4 is in the stop display, but in FIG. 62 (1), the stop display is in It is a state immediately after becoming, and the fluctuation icon c remains without disappearing. In FIG. 62 (2), the fixed display of the stop symbol is performed, and the fluctuation icon c is disappearing.

  Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 62 (1), a numerical value display hn of the number of reservations is displayed. The numerical value display hn of the number of reservations here indicates that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is “1” and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is “0”. Furthermore, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as "mini character") is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display (so-called always display) which is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable display or in a stopped display, and is displayed across a plurality of times of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. Ru. In the example shown in FIG. 62, the display of the character cd of the hero who is the main character is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the character cd of the lord shown in FIG. 62 (1) is the initial posture.

  Further, an information display section ST1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 62 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 62, the information display unit ST1 displays the name of the background stage. Here, it is a castle town stage, and "information castle town" is displayed in the information display section ST1, and the townscape of the castle town is displayed in common on the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. In addition, the effect mode may be displayed on the information display unit ST1, the current control state (for example, in the middle of a definite change) may be displayed, or the advance notice may be displayed, and the symbol currently being performed A notice (usually a notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 62 (1), the speaker 120 is shown at the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operation means) is also shown at the lower left. Further, a second chance button 137 (corresponding to a second operation means) is also shown to the right of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be an OK button 181 b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 49, or may be an operation means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

  The display position, size, and number of displayed various displays described with reference to FIG. 62 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when movable means such as a family crest 224E, a Yatsuyo character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb overlap the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 or the fourth symbol pd4 or the fourth symbol pd5 A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (2), after the final display of the stop symbol is performed and the fluctuation icon c disappears, in FIG. 62 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 62 (2). The symbol variation display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display of the fifth symbol pd5 is also started. The third symbol pd3 is a low speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just been started. White thick and short arrows indicate slow fluctuations (the same applies hereinafter). During low speed movement, it may be possible to recognize a changing symbol. Further, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 62 (2) moves to the stage cs of the variation icon display area, and the variation icon c of the red display mode is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it was the hold icon until then and the display mode (red) of the icon after it became the fluctuating icon match. The display mode of the variation icon represents the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed. That is, the normal notice is executed according to the display mode of the variation icon. In addition, even if it is a display mode with a high expectation of big hit, it does not necessarily big hit in the symbol variation display under display, and it may become a loss. In FIG. 62 (3), the reserved icon disappears, and the numerical value display hn of the number of reservations displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side becomes “0” in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, in the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 62 (3), the display of the square corresponding to the special view 1 is changing from gray to white, and the variation display of the special view 1 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 62 (3) where symbol variation display is started, there is no change in the display content of the tutorial display ts.

  The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 62 (4) fluctuates at high speed. White thin and long arrows indicate high-speed fluctuations (the same applies hereinafter). When the speed changes, it becomes difficult to recognize the changing pattern. In FIG. 62 (4), the meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, the display position is not limited to this position. In addition, although the display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the fluctuation icon c, the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is not only when the third symbol pd3 changes at high speed, but also when symbol movement starts, when movement of the fluctuation icon c is completed, and when winning a prize to the special figure starting port (at hold increase), At the start of advance notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the advance notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in pseudo sequential effect Alternatively, it is possible to enumerate at the time of continuation (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, as the appearance timing of the meter display, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. When the meter display appears, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed to be the display content regarding the meter display. The meter display shown in FIG. 62 (4) has a white meter frame mf and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. The white meter display MW corresponds to an example of the first meter display. Moreover, there are a meter display of an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 62 is of the increase type, and is provided with five scales, and becomes full at the sixth stage. In the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 62 (4), the display is started in the empty state (the state of the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

  In FIG. 62 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 62 (6), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ 7)) becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 62 (6), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 62 (7) following FIG. 62 (6), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. The meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (the same applies hereinafter), and the display position of the meter rising item UpI is a decorative symbol that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped) Although it becomes a position which overlaps from the front side, a display position is not limited to this position. Moreover, although the display size of meter raising item UpI is smaller than the decoration pattern which is shaking (temporary stop), the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of meter rising item UpI is to the special figure starting opening at the time of symbol fluctuation start, the movement completion of fluctuation icon c, when the third symbol pd3 becomes high speed fluctuation other than the timing of the first stop. At the time of winning (at the time of hold increase), at the start of advance notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the advance notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at temporary suspension or continuation of the third symbol pd3 Time (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, the appearance timing of the meter ascending item UpI may be all the above listed items. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. The meter ascending item UpI is an item for raising the meter of the meter display. Although meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 62 (7) is white, as described later, a plurality of types of meter rising item UpI are prepared, and the rate of increase of the meter differs depending on the type.

  In FIG. 62 (8), the moving animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI displayed at a position overlapping from the front side on the decorative pattern having swing fluctuation (temporary stop) is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move to the overlapping position from the front side. In FIG. 62 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and the right symbol (here, “decor 6”) can be recognized. In addition, the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one division. In addition, although the color of the meter itself which increases / decreases is a color (here blue) different from meter frame mf, it may be the same color as meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter ascending item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the timing of the second stop, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol fluctuation, at the completion of movement of the fluctuation icon c, At the time of winning to the starting opening (at the time of pending increase), at the start of advance notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the advance notice at the time of winning), at the time of success of a certain effect, provisional of the third symbol pd3 At the time of stop or continuation (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, as the timing of meter increase, all of the above listed items may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  In FIG. 62 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped, swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and a second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter ascending item UpI is a position overlapping from the front side with the right symbol which has started the swing fluctuation (temporary stop). In FIG. 62 (11), the moving animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 62 (12), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is again raised (increased) by one division. The white meter display MW meter has now risen to two divisions.

  In FIG. 62 (13), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and in Fig. 62 (14), the pseudo continuous symbol shakes (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation "-" "Decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo connected effect is started. In FIG. 62 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the character of the main character has appeared, and the line "still" is displayed, saying that re-variation is likely to be started. In FIG. 62 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped is displayed again and temporarily stopped. The character display of "x 2" which is a display of the number of continuations is displayed so that a part may overlap with the left symbol. In FIG. 62 (17), the re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-series effect is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol each start high-speed variation. In FIG. 62 (18), the character display of “× 2” which is the display of the number of continuations is reduced and displayed at the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 62 step by step.

  In FIG. 63 (19) continued from FIG. 62 (18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left, a notice that mini items will appear is started . That is, the icon of the treasure box appears gradually from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 63 (20), the icon I1 of the treasure box in a closed state is displayed on the information display section ST1. The icon I1 of this treasure box becomes a notice icon about the appearance of the mini item. In FIG. 63 (21), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and the meter ascending item UpI appears from the inside of the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI appears.

  In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box shown in FIG. 63 (20) is closed without being opened and disappears, or nothing appears even when opened, an item different from the meter rising item UpI (for example, an item of a question mark Items marked with an x or items marked with a disappointing character may appear. That is, even if the icon I1 of the treasure box is displayed, there may be a false notice as a notice that the mini item appears.

  Subsequently, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 66 (22), the moving meter ascending item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it appears that the left half of the meter ascending item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, a frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M interferes, and a part of the meter ascending item UpI is not visible.

  In FIG. 63 (23), the meter ascending item UpI reaches the white meter display MW and is displayed on the white meter display MW so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 63 (24), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW is further raised by one division, and the white meter display MW is increased by three divisions.

  When the meter ascending item UpI is displayed, the meter may always rise, but the meter may not rise. For example, the meter ascending item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise when reached.

  In FIG. 63 (25), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 fluctuate at a low speed, and in the same figure (26), they reach a reach state. That is, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and swing fluctuation is started. The speaker 120 shown in FIG. 63 (26) outputs a sound of "reach". In FIG. 63 (27), the variation of the middle symbol that has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in the same figure (28) that follows, the left symbol that is swinging fluctuates the first decorative symbol display device It moves to the upper left corner of 208L, and the right symbol which is also swinging and moving moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (29), it has developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it has changed from the background screen of the castle town to the screen of Ken Goshi. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N remain as the background screen of the castle town, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the character cd on the display stage ss is still displayed The information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the icon I1 of the treasure box has disappeared.

  In addition, when progressing to super reach production, the holding frame UI disappears, and the tutorial display ts also disappears. In addition, although there is no hold icon here but the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, the display of only the variation icon c corresponding to the symbol variation currently performed is continued. However, the fluctuation icon c may also disappear together. Alternatively, if the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may also be continued. In addition, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and the display of the holding frame UI may also be continued.

  In FIG. 63 (30), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N switch to the background of the wilderness, and the display of the information display section ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display From the device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord has disappeared. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical value display hn of the number of reservations is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (30), the character of the lord and the character of swordsman are displayed, and a duel scene of the two persons is started. However, the white meter indication MW is still displayed at the top here.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (31), the white meter display MW is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the Tonosama character and the sword character are hidden by the displayed white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 63 (31) is a state in which the meter has accumulated up to three graduations (corresponding to an example of the second state). Also, the word "power-up" is also displayed, which predicts that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated. The meter is used from FIG. 63 (32) to FIG. (33), and the white meter display MW decreases, and in the state (0) in FIG. (33) (corresponding to an example of the first state) I'm back. In FIG. 63 (34), the white meter display MW which has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the character of the main character. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation for jackpotting in the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, the green aura icon has a higher expectation for a big hit than the blue aura icon, the red aura icon has a higher expectation for a big hit than the green aura icon, and the gold aura icon has a high hit. The rainbow color aura icons that change to seven colors have the highest expectations for a big hit, corresponding to a higher level of big hit (eg, big hit confirmed).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (35), the scene after the Tonosama character and the Kana character have been smashed is displayed, and in FIG. Is displayed, and "Decoration 3" different from "Decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is displayed as a large middle design. After this, the symbol variation display ends, and the third symbol pd3 of "decor 4"-"decor 3"-"decor 4" is finalized and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device The fifth pattern pd3 of "decoration 4"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on 208M. Super reach production here is that it was hadle pare reach production.

  The example shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from the empty state (the meter is 0) to the full state and finally the big hit symbol is not displayed Become.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made in stages.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 62 to 63 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  Both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 in the state shown in FIG. 64 (1) and in the same manner as the state shown in FIG. 62 (1) are stop displays of the combination of the lost decorative symbols. However, it is a combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" here. In addition, the first hold pending icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 64 (1) is a pending icon for the special view 1 and is displayed in a green display mode that is a display mode of the prefetch notice. There is. The green display mode has lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

  In FIG. 64 (2), after the finalized display of the stop symbol is performed and the fluctuation icon c disappears, in FIG. 64 (3), the first reservation icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. The symbol variation display based on is started. On the stage cs of the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 64 (3), the variation icon c of the green display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 64 (4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 64 (4) is also of the increase type, and the display is started in the empty state (the state of the meter is 0).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 64 (5), a line of "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the crown. The display of the line "Ikuzo" also corresponds to a notice that a mini item appears. In FIG. 64 (6), the change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of the lord is carrying the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 64 (7), the character of the crown character tosses the change ball icon cI and the moving animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 64 (7), the change ball icon cI is moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 64 (8), the change ball icon cI is a white meter display MW And the white meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 64 (8) is changed, and the effect display ed1 is added. In FIG. 64 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 has been added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while it is empty (the meter is at 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with the red meter display MR. The effect shown in FIGS. 64 (6) to (8) and in which the character cd of the lord continues to appear corresponds to an example of the meter change effect. Further, the red meter display MR corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. This red meter display MR is higher in rank (for example, the appearance rate is lower) than the white meter display MW, and the meter change effect shown in FIG. 64 (6) to FIG. It corresponds to The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 (9) is also empty (the meter is at 0). Further, the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 64 (9) outputs a sound effect to notify of a change in meter display.

  In FIG. 64 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 64 (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ 7)) becomes recognizable. In addition, the character cd of the lord is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 64 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 64 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, as in FIG. 62 (7), a white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as or before or after the temporary stop of the left symbol. In FIG. 64 (13), as in FIG. 62 (8), the moving animation of the meter ascending item UpI is started, and the meter ascending item UpI moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 64 (14), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR is rapidly raised (increased) by three divisions. This means that the meter can be stored more easily in the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 than in the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state changes to the full state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state changes to the full state. It is configured to be This corresponds to a state change amount in red meter display MR (an increase amount by one meter increase item UpI) than a single state change amount in white meter display MW (an increase amount by one meter increase item UpI). There will be more. The color of the meter itself which is increased or decreased is a color different from the red color of the meter frame mf (here also blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter ascending item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the same as the timing described variously in FIG. Also, in FIG. 64 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 starts to be slow, and in FIG. 64 (15), the variation of the right symbol is even slower, 7)) becomes recognizable, and eventually reaches a reach state. In FIG. 64 (16), in the reach state, the second meter rising item UpI appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. In FIG. 64 (17), the moving animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 64 (18), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter indication MR rises (increases) by three divisions again, and the red meter indication MR is full. In addition, the audio | voice of "reach" is output from the speaker 120 shown to FIG. 64 (18) which meter raise item UpI went off and the rise production of red meter display MR was complete | finished.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 64 step by step.

  In Fig. 65 (19) continued from Fig. 64 (18), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued high-speed fluctuation with the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in the following Fig. (20) , And moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that is also swinging and moving moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (21), it develops into super reach effect (swords force reach effect), and as in FIG. 62 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding frame UI disappears, and the castle town Is changing from the background screen of the screen to the screen of the sword gossan. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In the super reach effect here, as shown in FIG. 65 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N switches to the background of the wilderness, and the second decorative symbol The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display portion ST1 remains. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord remains. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here. The super reach effect shown in FIG. 63 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 65, and conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 65 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. It may be

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (23), the full red meter display MR is displayed in an enlarged scale, and the Tonosama character and the sword character are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. There is. Also, the word "power-up" is also displayed, which predicts that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, it is expected that you will greatly power up and win, that is, the expectation of the big hit. The meter is used from FIG. 65 (24) to FIG. (25), and the red meter indication MR decreases and passes through the fifth state, and the state of 0 in FIG. Equivalent to an example of the state). In FIG. 65 (26), the red meter display MR which has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the main character. The color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to a color that suggests a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display as described above. Note that the color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a further higher level of the jackpot (for example, jackpot confirmation).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (27), a scene after the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman cut is displayed, and in the figure (28), the scene where the character of the lord is victorious Is displayed, and the same "decoration 7" as the "decoration 7" displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is displayed as a large middle symbol. And in FIG. 65 (29), three third designs pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are aligned and swayed, and in the same figure (30), those three third designs The pd3 is displayed in a definite manner, and it is notified that the jackpot has been won with a definite change.

  The example shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 explained above is an example in the case where the red meter display MR changes from empty (the meter is 0) to full, and finally the big hit symbol is displayed. become. The big hit symbol is finally when the red meter display MR changes from empty to full rather than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to full. It is easy to be displayed finalized. Furthermore, in the red meter display MR, when the empty state changes to the full state, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the empty state does not change to the full state. The super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 65 corresponds to an example of a notice display that is started when the red meter display MR changes to the full state.

  FIG. 66 shows in a step-by-step manner a modification of the effect by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

  66 (1) to FIG. 66 (6) are the same as FIG. 64 (1) to FIG. 66 (6), and in FIG. 66 (7), the character cd of the lords casts the change ball icon cI and changes it. A moving animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 66 (7), the change ball icon cI is moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the change icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 66 (8), the change ball icon cI is changed. The icon cI hits the fluctuation icon c, and a part of the fluctuation icon c is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 66 (8) changes, and an effect display ed2 is added. Although the effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display is hit as shown in FIG. 64 (8), it may be a different effect display. In FIG. 66 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c which has been green until now changes to red. The red fluctuation icon has a higher probability of hitting a big on the symbol fluctuation display being displayed than the green fluctuation icon, and is ranked up here. The rank may be downed by the change ball icon cI. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 66, the change ball icon cI changes the display mode of the change icon c, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram for describing in detail various types of meter displays. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 67 is of the increase type.

  The meter displays shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to (f) are equivalent to an example of the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 62, 63 and 64 (4) to (8) (first meter display ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter indication MW is a default meter indication. Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67 (a) is an empty state (a state where the meter is 0), and corresponds to an example of a first state. Further, FIG. 67 (a) also shows a white meter ascending item UpI. The meter ascending item UpI is an item whose meter rising rate changes according to the type of meter indication, and the white meter ascending item UpI is an item for raising the meter of the meter indication by the first amount.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty is raised by one scale by the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 67 (a). The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by one scale with respect to the white meter display MW. The state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to an example of a second state which is a state between the full state and the empty state.

  FIG. 67 (c) shows a blue meter ascending item UpIb of the same color as the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased. The blue meter ascending item UpIb is an item for raising the meter of the meter display by a second amount.

  FIG. 67 (d) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW in the empty state is raised by two divisions by the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 67 (c). It is done. The blue meter ascending item UpIb is an item to be raised by 2 divisions with respect to the white meter indication MW.

  In FIG. 67 (e), a red meter ascending item UpIr is shown. The red meter ascending item UpIr is an item that raises the meter of the meter display by a third amount.

  FIG. 67 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty is raised by the red meter rising item UpIr shown in FIG. 67 (e). It is done. The red meter ascending item UpIr is an item to be raised by 4 divisions with respect to the white meter indication MW.

  In addition, a gold meter rising item may be displayed. The meter of the white meter indication MW which has been empty will be in a state of being raised by 5 divisions (second state) by a gold meter rising item or in a full state (state of being raised 6 divisions) . As described above, the rate of increase of the meter may not be constant but may change depending on the lottery result or the like.

  The meter displays shown in FIGS. 67 (g) through (l) are red meter displays MR (corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 64 (9) through (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has more meters accumulated than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to full the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit. Therefore, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the expectation of the big hit, the more likely the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in the first symbol. In addition, in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed, the expectation for winning in the advantageous big hit may be higher than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. Here, the advantageous big hit is, for example, a big hit with a big hit with a certain variation and a large number of rounds with appearing balls.

  FIG. 67 (g) shows the default white meter ascending item UpI, and FIG. 67 (h) shows the meter of the red meter indication MR that was empty, the white meter ascending item A state (fifth state) in which an increase by 3 ticks at once is shown by UpI. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by three divisions with respect to the red meter display MR.

  In FIG. 67 (i), the blue meter ascending item UpIb is shown, and in FIG. 67 (j), the meter of the red meter display MR which has been empty is displayed by the blue meter ascending item UpIb. It is shown that it has been rising at once by six divisions, that is, it has been filled up (sixth state). The blue meter ascending item UpIb is an item to be increased by 6 divisions (full divisions) with respect to the red meter display MR.

  As described above, in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter rising item UpI is tripled as compared to the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed.

  In FIG. 67 (k), a green meter ascending item UpIm is shown. The green meter ascending item UpIm is an item to be raised by 9 divisions with respect to the red meter indication MR. In the meter display, when the tank is full, the remaining scale (the overflowed scale) may be invalidated, but here, since the remaining scale is effectively handled, the empty meter display is additionally displayed Be done. The type of meter display to be additionally displayed may be the same type as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 67 (l), the red meter display MR of the same type as the type of meter display that is full is additionally displayed below the full meter display. On the other hand, unlike in FIG. 67 (l), a meter display with a meter frame mf in gold may be displayed below the full red meter display MR. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 (l) is raised to three divisions corresponding to the remaining divisions.

  In the meter display shown in FIG. 67 (m) and FIG. 67 (n), the meter frame mf is a rainbow meter display MN of rainbow color. The rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of the fourth meter display. In the state where the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full regardless of what color meter rising item is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 67 (m), even if the rainbow meter display MN is in the empty state and the white meter rising item UpI is shown, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, it always becomes full, and furthermore, a big hit is confirmed.

  However, in the rainbow meter display MN, since it is a big hit determined even if there are remaining scale divisions (overflowing divisions) when the tank is full, a new meter as shown in FIG. 67 (l). The display is not displayed additionally, and the remaining scale is invalidated.

  When one meter rising item is displayed regardless of the color, it may be set to increase only by the same scale (for example, one scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  In addition, although the appearance timing of the meter rising item was mentioned above, if it supplements here, the meter rising item is temporary during super fluctuation during the symbol fluctuation which becomes the big hit, before super reach, during super reach, temporary of the decorative symbol It may be easy to appear when stopping.

  The meter display described above may be a big hit advance notice (so-called regular advance notice) in the symbol variation display (the corresponding variation) being displayed when the meter display starts to be displayed, and is started after the variation It may be a big hit notice (pre-reading notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, in the case of the expectation of the jackpot mentioned above, it may be the expectation of the jackpot in the change, or may be the expectation of the jackpot in the symbol variation display started thereafter.

  67 (a)-(f), red meter MR shown in FIGS. 67 (g)-(l), FIG. 67 (m) and FIG. The rainbow meter display MN shown in) may have different display sizes from one another, as well as different display positions, as well as different colors of the meter frame mf. Furthermore, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the color of the meter itself may be different to make all colors different.

  Furthermore, when viewed in one meter display, the meter frame shown in FIG. 67 (a) etc. is white and the empty state is the first state, and FIG. 67 (b) or FIG. 67 (d) or FIG. The second state shown in (f) is that the meter frame is not white nor empty or full, and the second state is not illustrated in FIG. 67. The meter frame is white and full (third state). The meter frame is red and the empty state is the fourth state shown in FIG. 67 (g) etc., and the meter frame is red and not empty or not full shown in FIG. 67 (h) Is the fifth state, and the meter frame shown in FIG. 67 (j) is red and the full state is the sixth state.

  Hereinafter, although description is continued about meter production | presentation, description may be abbreviate | omitted about the matter which overlaps with the matter demonstrated so far.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram gradually showing an example of a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes.

  In the state shown in FIG. 68 (1), both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are stop display of the combination of the lost decorative symbol designs. However, it is a combination of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" here. In this state, there is no suspension of the special drawing, and the first symbol pd1 continues the stop display until the special drawing start port 230, 232 wins. Further, a white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (1). The white meter display MW here is empty. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed from the stage prior to FIG. 68 (1), and may already be displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 68 (2), there is one ball ball in the first special figure starting opening 230, and in the same figure (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 according to the start of the symbol change display of the special drawing 1 is started On the stage cs of the variation icon display area, the display of the variation icon c of the white display manner, which is the default display manner, is started. Moreover, even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the white meter display MW in the empty state is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of the white meter display MW in the empty state is displayed. Continue to FIG. 68 (18).

  Also in FIG. 68 (4) where the symbol of Special Figure 1 is changing, there is a single ball in the first special view starting opening 230, and the first stage hs1 of the reserved icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the hold icon (first hold icon h1 of the special view 1) of the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is started. Further, even in FIG. 68 (6), there is one ball ball in the first special view starting opening 230, and the display mode of the prefetch notice in the second stage hs2 of the reserved icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the green display mode holding icon (second holding icon h2 of the special figure 1) which is the above is started.

  In the third design pd3 shown in FIG. 68 (8), the "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" which is the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost design are stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the symbols is confirmed and displayed, and from the stage cs of the variation icon display area, the variation icon c of the white display mode disappears. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 in FIG. 68 (1) and FIGS. 68 (8) to (9) (including during the fixed display). The meter display may also be displayed constantly. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 68 (10), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 by the suspension of the special view 1 represented by the first suspension icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first suspension icon h1 changes to the variation icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 68 (10) is the default display manner as in the case of the hold icon. In FIG. 68 (9), the hold icon which was the second hold icon h2 of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice shifts the display mode as it is, and in FIG. 68 (10) it becomes the first hold icon h1. There is.

  In FIG. 68 (11), the rank-up effect to tell whether the meter display changes is started, and the change icon I2 gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and in FIG. The change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. In the change icon I2, characters of "fake" are written.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 68 (13), the character cd of the crown draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. If it hits, it is changed.

  In FIG. 68 (14), the character of the crown cd shoots an arrow, and an icon of an arrow representing an arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side is displayed. Flying towards the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 68 (15), the icon of the flying arrow is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it looks as if the left half of the arrow icon is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M interferes, and a part of the arrow icon disappears.

  In FIG. 68 (16), the arrow icon hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 68 (17), the hit arrow icon disappears, and the change icon The display mode of I2 is changed, and an effect display ed3 is added. The effect display ed3 here is also an effect display similar to the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 64 (8), but may be a different effect display such as different colors. It is to be noted that the character cd of the lord as displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N changes the pose but has a posture different from the initial posture. In FIG. 68 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and white The meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 68 step by step.

  In Fig. 69 (19) continued from Fig. 68 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 has been added disappears, and the white meter display MW is displayed on the red meter display MR while it is empty (the meter is 0). It is changing. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with the red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 69 (19) is also empty (the meter is at 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display succeeds in ranking up from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the character of the lord cd has the icon disappear without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the bowed one. If the icon disappears without hitting the icon, or even if the arrow icon hits, the icon disappears without adding the effect display, or even if the effect display is added up to the white meter display MW The icon may disappear without moving and the meter display may remain unchanged as the white meter display MW. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the character of the lord cd does not draw a bow, does not hit an arrow icon, does not add an effect display, or does not move to a white meter display MW As a result, the change icon I2 may disappear and the meter display may remain unchanged as the white meter display MW. In addition, even if the effect display ed3 has the added change icon I2 or the non-added change icon I2 overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself does not rank up, but the meter may rise. Or, conversely, the meter never needs to rise. Furthermore, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, changed from red meter display MR to white meter display MW).

  In FIG. 69 (20), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss of "decor 5"-"decor 6"-"decor 3" is stopped and displayed. The character cd has returned to its initial attitude. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 69 (21), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period when the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed. Here, the red meter display MR is empty.

  In FIG. 69 (22), symbol variation display based on suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 69 (21) is started, and low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. Moreover, according to the start of the fluctuation display of 3rd design pd3, the display content of tutorial display ts is changed, and it is the display content regarding meter display. In FIG. 69 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 69 (24), a notice that a mini item appears is started. That is, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 63, the icon of the treasure box gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 69 (25), the icon of the treasure box in the closed state on the information display section ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 69 (26), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the inside of the treasure box.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter ascending item UpI is started, and the meter ascending item UpI appearing on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 69 (27), the moving meter ascending item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 69 (28), the meter ascending item UpI is red. It is displayed on the meter display MR so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 69 (29), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR in which the meter is more easily accumulated than the white meter display MW, the meter rises by 3 divisions at a stretch.

  In FIG. 69 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. 69 (31), they reach a reach state. That is, "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and swing fluctuation is started. In the following Fig. 69 (32), the left symbol moving sway moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol swaying also changes the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. Then, in FIG. 69 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 63, it develops into super reach production (Kenou reach production), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, from the background screen of the castle town It is changing. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three graduations have been stored.

  In FIG. 69 (34), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are switched to the background of the wilderness, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the character of the martial arts and the character of the swordsman, The duel scene of has been started. Note that the red meter indication MR is still displayed in a state where three graduations have been accumulated.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed as it is in a state where it is stored for three divisions (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). Also, the word "power-up" is also displayed, which predicts that the main character will power up as much as the meter has accumulated.

  In addition, the meter of white meter display MW may rise between FIG. 68 (3)-the same figure (10) before a meter display changes.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 69 step by step.

  The meter is used from FIG. 69 (36) to FIG. 70 (37), and the red meter indication MR decreases, and in FIG. 70 (37), the state of 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state) I'm back. In FIG. 70 (38), the red meter display MR which has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 indicating a big hit is added behind the main character of the main character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (39), the scene after the character of the lord and the character of swordsman cut is displayed, and in FIG. 70 (40), the scene in which the character of the lord is victorious Is displayed, and the same "decoration 4" as the "decoration 4" displayed in the upper left corner or the upper right corner is displayed as a large middle figure. And in FIG. 70 (41), three third designs pd3 of "decor 4"-"decor 4"-"decor 4" are aligned and swayed, and in FIG. 70 (42) these three third designs The pd3 is displayed in a definite manner, and it is notified that the jackpot with the time saving (power support) is won.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63 and in the examples shown in FIGS. 69 to 70, the meter display is in the state of being stored for the same three divisions, but in the example shown in FIG. In this example which was red meter indication MR to being it being, it is jackpot super reach production. As described above, the expectation of the big hit changes also in the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf), separately from the storage condition of the meter. That is, if the meter storage condition (including the empty state) is the same, the red meter display MR has a higher expectation of a big hit than the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 71 shows, in stages, an example of the re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 70 (41).

  In the example shown in FIG. 70, the red meter display MR having a higher expectation of the big hit than the white meter display MW is displayed, and the red meter display MR is not empty but is stored for three divisions. . Therefore, the degree of expectation for winning an advantageous jackpot is also high, and as shown in FIG. 71, a re-lottery may be performed. In other words, winning in a big hit (for example, a big hit with a big hit with a definite change or a big hit with a large number of rounds with appearing balls) is more advantageous when the red meter display MR stores 3 divisions more than the white meter display 3 stores Expectations are high.

  Here, FIG. 71 (42 ′) shows a state in which three third symbols pd3 of “decor 4”-“decor 4”-“decor 4” shown in FIG. As shown, a button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button effects here are a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b as a prompting prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, a character indication of “press”, and the chance button 136 Three remaining period meter displays 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting an operation as a valid one are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136 c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red, prompting a press.

  In FIG. 71 (43 ') to FIG. (44'), there is no depression of the chance button 136, the operation effective period decreases and the chance button 136 is depressed at the timing of FIG. 71 (45 '). In response to the pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 71 (46 '), the shaking display of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" The display changes to the display of "decoration 7", and in the same figure (47 '), the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is finalized, and notification of winning of the jackpot with definite variation is notified There is. That is, it is promoted to a big hit with probability change from a big hit with short time (electric support).

  In addition, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation valid period, the shaking display of "decor 4"-"decor 4"-"decor 4" after the operation valid period is over, "decor 7"-"decoration" 7 "-changes to the display of" decoration 7 ", is displayed in a definite manner, and is promoted to a jackpot with a definite change.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram gradually showing an example of a mini game which tells whether or not a meter display appears.

  In FIG. 72 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 72 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 72 (3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 72 (2) is started, and the low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. In addition, in response to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed, and the display content regarding the mini game such as "When the drink is compared" is displayed. In FIG. 72 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (5), the third pattern pd3 disappears, and the background image which has been the town of the castle town until now changes to the background image of the mini game of drinking comparison between the lord and the wolf doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed. In FIG. 72 (6), the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the background image of the mini game displays an explanatory display that the sword dance meter (meter display) will be displayed when the lord wins the mini game in a row. In Figure (7), a mini-game for drinking and drinking has been started. In FIG. 72 (8), the victory of the lord in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 72 (9), it is displayed that the sword dance meter has been acquired.

  In FIG. 72 (10), on the display of the third symbol pd3 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize the color of the meter display by the effect display ed4 as to what kind of color meter display the sword dance meter is. In addition, in this specification, when it says "it is hard to visually recognize", it means becoming relatively hard to visually recognize compared with the state before and behind that. In FIG. 72 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears, and the white meter display MW which is a kana dance meter is clearly displayed.

  If you lose in the mini game, the sword dance meter will not be displayed. The effect by the mini game described using FIG. 72 also corresponds to the effect of obtaining a meter display.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example in which a big hit is determined due to the variation when the meter display is full.

  Figures 73 (1) to (9) are the same as Figures 62 (1) to (9), and in Figure 73 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped, A rocking fluctuation starts (second stop), and a gold meter rising item UpIg appears. As described above, the gold meter rising item UpIg raises the white meter display MW meter by 5 or 6 divisions. FIG. 73 (10) displays the white meter display MW stored for one scale, and the appearance of the golden meter ascending item UpIg means the jackpot confirmation in the variation. That is, when a meter rising item (gold in this case or red shown in FIG. 67 (e)) where a meter can easily be stored appears more heavily than when a meter rising item (eg, white) in which the meter is difficult to be stored appears Expectations are high. In FIG. 73 (11), the gold meter ascending item UpIg moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 73 (12), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of a rise by six divisions, it is a state of leaving one division, but a big hit has been decided by the fluctuation, and the next fluctuation will be after the big hit game end, so the remaining one division is up to the next fluctuation It is not possible to carry over and is invalidated. Further, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 73 (12), a voice of "Congratulations" is output. The voice output here corresponds to a big hit notification sound notifying that the meter is full and a big hit is determined.

  In FIG. 73 (13), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol (here, “decor 7”) can be recognized. And in FIG. 73 (14), three third designs pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are aligned and swayed, and in FIG. 73 (15), those three third designs The pd3 is displayed in a definite manner, and it is notified that the jackpot has been won with a definite change.

  The example shown in FIG. 73 described above is an example in the case where the white meter display MW changes from an empty state (a meter is 0) to a full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. Big hit symbol in the case where the white meter display MW changes from empty to full rather than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to full. Is easy to be displayed. Furthermore, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the empty state is changed to the full state is more than the case where the empty state is not changed to the full state as in the example shown in FIGS. 62 and 63. Also, the big hit symbol is likely to be displayed finally finally.

  FIG. 74 is a view gradually showing an example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

  The holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 74 is also provided with a base icon UIb ′ extending in the left and right with vertical stripe patterns, but the base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 74 is the base icon UIb shown in FIG. It is taller than it is. Further, in the effect display area provided on the right side in the holding frame UI 'shown in FIG. 74, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts. Since this white meter display MW is completely embedded in the holding frame UI 'and is integrated with the holding frame UI' because the base icon UIb 'shown in FIG. 74 is high, the meter display is a holding frame It only needs to have a part in UI '. In other words, the meter display only needs to partially or entirely overlap the holding frame UI ′, and the holding frame UI ′ corresponds to an example of the holding display area in a broad sense, and is also an example of the icon display area. Equivalent to. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 74, the meter display is always displayed in the holding frame UI '. That is, the meter display is also displayed while the holding frame UI 'is displayed, and the meter display also disappears when the holding frame UI' disappears. However, the tutorial display ts may always be displayed, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only at the time of meter presentation.

  In FIG. 74 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost of "decor 2"-"decor 5"-"decor 6" is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 74 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 74 (3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 74 (2) is started, and in the third symbol pd3, the low speed variation is started, FIG. Then, the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 74 (5), a line of "Ikuzo" is displayed on the display of the character cd of the royal crown, and a mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 74 (6), the white meter rising item UpI appears, and the character cd of the yours bears the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 74 (7), the character cd of the lord casts the meter ascending item UpI, and the meter ascending item UpI is displayed on the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. Although the meter ascending item UpI shown in FIG. 74 (7) does not overlap with the white meter display MW, and only partially overlaps with the base icon UIb ′, a part of the white meter display MW or All may be displayed so as to overlap.

  In FIG. 74 (8), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to a state of being stored for one division. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 74 (9), a tutorial display such as “Continuous with full meter” is displayed.

  In FIG. 74 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 74 (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ 7)) becomes recognizable. Further, in FIG. 74 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 74 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. In FIG. 74 (13), the moving animation of the gold meter rising item UpIg is started, and the gold meter rising item UpIg moves above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. In FIG. 74 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is slower, and the right symbol (here, “decor 6”) can be recognized. In addition, the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW meter rises (increases) to full at a stretch.

  In FIG. 74 (15), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and in Fig. 74 (16), the pseudo continuous symbol shakes (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation "-" "Decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo connected effect is started. In FIG. 74 (17), similar to FIG. 62 (15), the cut-in display of pseudo continuous effect is performed so as to entirely overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 74 (18), the cut-in display disappears and re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-series effect is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start low-speed variation and the left symbol The character display of "x 2" which is the display of the number of continuations is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps with. Although the white meter indication MW which has been full continues to be displayed until the re-variation is started, the white meter indication MW returns to the empty state according to the start of the re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-series effect continues, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  In the pseudo-series effect described with reference to FIG. 74, the meter display (here, the white meter display is MW but other meter displays (for example, red meter display MR) may be full). It corresponds to an example of a notice display of which display is started when it changes.

  The white meter indication MW may continue to be displayed in the full state until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the full white meter display MW may be displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo run symbol (the start of the pseudo run effect) in FIG. 74 (16), and may return to the empty state.

  In addition, as for the timing when the meter display returns to the empty state, it is the symbol fluctuation display where the meter display display is started (including the symbol fluctuation display of the notice object when the meter display is normal notice) or the meter display If it is the advance notice, it is the symbol change display one before the symbol change display of the advance notice, or it is empty at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed on the advance notice target symbol change display. You may return to the state of For example, in each of the above-mentioned symbol variation display, it may return to the empty state when the symbol is stopped without being full. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. In the second or fifth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. Also, the meter display may return to the empty state, and the display of the empty state may be limited after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and there is no subsequent hold and the next symbol fluctuation display starts immediately If not, the meter display may disappear but may continue to be displayed in an empty state. Also, when there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display starts immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

  In addition, the white meter display MW may change to the red meter display MR within the holding frame UI ', or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram gradually showing an example of acquiring and stocking mini items when the meter of the meter display is full.

  FIGS. 75 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 62 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 75 (7), the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. , Has started shaking (first stop). In addition, a red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as, or before or after the temporary stop of the left symbol. The red meter ascending item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front.

  In FIG. 75 (8), the moving animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves to a position overlapping the empty white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 75 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and the right symbol (here, “decor 7”) can be recognized. In addition, the red meter ascending item UpIr disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by 4 divisions.

  In FIG. 75 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swing fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, a gold meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as or before or after the formation of the reach state. In FIG. 75 (11), the gold meter rising item UpIg is moved to the position where it overlaps with the white meter display MW accumulated for 4 divisions from the front side. In FIG. 75 (12), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW becomes full. Here, the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item for raising the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 divisions, and in the case of the white meter display MW where 4 divisions are stored, 3 divisions are left (overflow) (overflow (12) does not show any remaining scale, and (13) does not show the mini item at the right end of the full white meter display MW. While the pseudo continuous notice item NI which is a kind appears, the character display of "GET" is displayed on the right symbol etc. temporarily stopped among the 3rd symbol pd3 so as to overlap from the front side. The pseudo linked notice item NI is an icon for notifying that the simulated linked effect is to be started thereafter, and the character display of "GET" is a text display indicating that the pseudo linked notice item NI has been acquired.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (14), the "decorative 7" is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW which was full until then changes to the empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears, and the pseudo linked notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M Are displayed on the information display section ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, and the pseudo linked notice item NI is stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (15), three blanks for the previously surplus scale are added to the white meter display MW in the empty state. That is, the display of the portion which is full and overflows is started at this timing. There is still a chance to increase the white meter indicated MW.

  The white meter display MW in FIGS. 75 (12) to (15) described above is not ranked down, but the portion that is full is replaced with the pseudo continuous notice item NI, and the remaining portion is left Is displayed again.

  In FIG. 75 (16), the pseudo run announcement item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle design which continues the high speed fluctuation, and the pseudo run announcement item NI is digested. In addition, the character display of "Activated" is displayed under the pseudo-connected notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of “Activated” is a character display indicating that the simulated consecutive notice item NI is activated, and the simulated connected effect is started immediately thereafter.

  In FIG. 75 (17), the middle symbol which has continued high-speed variation with the third symbol pd3 is swinging (temporarily stopped). The middle symbol here is the pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo continuous rendering starts Be done.

  In the example described above, when the meter display is full, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item that is related to a big hit (for example, a pseudo linked notice item NI), filling the meter display is equivalent to the high expectation of the big hit, and by subtracting Eventually the jackpot symbol is likely to be finalized and displayed.

  FIG. 76 is a view gradually showing an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in one full tank of the meter display.

  FIGS. 76 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 62 (1) to (6), and in FIG. 76 (7), the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. , Has started shaking (first stop). Also, at the same time as or before or after the temporary stop of the left symbol, two meter rising items of a red meter rising item UpIr and a blue meter rising item UpIb appear. That is, a plurality of meter rising items appear simultaneously.

  In FIG. 76 (8), the animation of moving the two meter ascending items is started, and the red meter ascending item UpIr and the blue meter ascending item UpIb both move from the front to the empty white meter display MW. Do. As described above with reference to FIG. 67, the white meter indication MW is an item for raising the red meter rising item UpIr by 4 divisions, and the blue meter rising item UpIb is an item for raising 2 divisions. is there. In FIG. 76 (9), the meter ascending items of both the red meter ascending item UpIr and the blue meter ascending item UpIb disappear and the meter of the white meter display MW which has been empty until now is the red meter ascending item It rises by four divisions as UpIr, and rises by two divisions as blue meter rising items UpIb, and the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 76 (9) is full.

  In FIG. 76 (10), two pseudo linked notice items NI, which are a type of mini item, appear at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, and “decoration 7” of the right symbol temporarily stopped One letter display of "GET" is displayed so that it may overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 75 above, the white meter display MW becomes full with one red meter rising item UpIr, but in this example, there are two red meter rising items UpIr and blue meter rising items UpIb. White meter indication MW became full with meter rise item. Whether it is red meter rising item UpIr or blue meter rising item UpIb, meter rising rate is higher than default white meter rising item UpI, red meter rising item UpIr or blue meter rising item UpIb , It can be said that it is an item which is easy to store a meter. From this, it can be said that it is highly possible that a plurality of items can be stocked if a meter rising item that easily stores the meter appears. The red meter indication MR may have a higher possibility of being able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter indication MW.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 76 (11), the white meter display MW which has been full until then changes to the empty state, and the character display of “GET” disappears, 2 The two pseudo linked notice items NI are moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in the second decorative symbol display block 208M, two pseudo linked warning items NI are stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (12), the white meter display MW in the empty state is still displayed, and there remains a chance to increase the white meter display MW, but after this, If there is no chance or a big hit is confirmed on the contrary, the white meter display MW may be turned off when emptying, or may be turned off after returning to emptying. In addition, one of the two pseudo linked notice items NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol which continues the high speed fluctuation, and under the pseudo linked notice item NI The character display of "Activated" is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (12), first, one pseudo continuous notice item NI is digested, and one temporary suspension of the entire third symbol pd3 and start of re-variation are performed. Then, the second temporary stop notice item NI being stocked performs the second temporary stop and start of re-variation.

  Of the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there is also an item that can be carried over until the next symbol variation display (for example, an item of prefetching notice system), but it can not be carried over and is currently performed. There is also an item (for example, pseudo run notice item NI) which is digested during the symbol variation display.

  Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 76, a plurality of items may be stocked in one full meter tank, but on the other hand, there may be cases in which items are not stocked even if the meter is full. May be For example, in the case where the white meter indication MW is filled with the white meter rising item UpI, it may be mentioned that the pseudo continuous notice item NI itself does not appear or is not stocked even if it appears.

  FIG. 77 is a view gradually showing an example in which a full meter display may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

  Figures 77 (1) to (8) are the same as Figures 76 (1) to (8), and in Figure 76 (9) the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is slow And the right pattern (here, "decoration 1") becomes recognizable. In addition, the meter ascending items of both the red meter ascending item UpIr and the blue meter ascending item UpIb disappear, and the white meter indication MW meter which has been empty until now is full in the example shown in FIG. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 77 (10), in this example, items such as the pseudo continuous notice item NI do not appear, and the full state of the white meter display MW is maintained. Furthermore, in the third symbol pd3, "decoration 1" different from the left symbol of "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol, and swing fluctuation is started. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 76, the reach state is not entered. Further, in FIG. 77 (10), in response to the white meter display MW being full, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are changed, and the display contents related to the advance notice such as “next chance” are displayed. .

  In FIG. 77 (11), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol (here, “decor 1”) can be recognized. And in FIG. 77 (12), three third designs pd3 of "decoration 7"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 1" are aligned and displayed with shaking. The combination of "decorative 7"-"decorative 1"-"decorative 1" is a chance eye, and in FIG. 77 (13), the first ornamental symbol display device 208L is displayed according to the swing display (temporary stop) of the chance eye. The flash pattern fd is emitted by the transparent light guide plate disposed on the front side of the. A flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the light guide plate.

  In FIG. 77 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 77 (15), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is fixedly displayed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. In addition, in response to the final display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance of “such as 711 arrangement”. Even when the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, the full white meter display MW is still displayed. In FIG. 77 (16), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 77 (15), ie, the next symbol variation display is started, and the low speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. It is done. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the full white meter display MW continues to be displayed as it is full, and is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. The full white meter display MW in FIGS. 77 (9) to (15) corresponds to the advance notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 77 (16) corresponds to the normal notice.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which the meter indication is full and the item appears but is not stocked but is digested.

  Figs. 78 (1) to (6) are the same as Figs. 62 (1) to (6), and in Fig. 78 (7), the left symbol (here, "decoration 7") is temporarily stopped. , Has started shaking (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. The gold meter ascending item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front.

  In FIG. 78 (8), the moving animation of the gold meter rising item UpIg is started, and the gold meter rising item UpIg is moved from the front to a position where the empty white meter display MW is overlapped. In FIG. 78 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes slower, and the right symbol (here, “decor 7”) can be recognized. In addition, the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW is full.

  In FIG. 78 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swing fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. At the same time as, or before or after the formation of the reach state, the operation means notice icon 136I, which is a type of mini item, appears at the right end of the full white meter display MW and the third symbol pd3 The character display of "GET" is displayed so that the right symbol etc. which are temporarily stopped may be overlapped from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon for notifying that the effect of the operation means notice (for example, button advance notice) is started thereafter, and the character display of "GET" has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display that indicates that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 78 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs when the operating means is operated. That is, the effect (for example, advance notice effect etc.) according to operation of the operation means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operation means has not been accepted, or that the operation has been invalidated. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation means is invalidated by combining the fact that the operation of the operation means is not accepted and that the operation is invalidated as accepted, and the white here is the operation means Is a color indicating that the operation of is invalid.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 78 (11), the white meter display MW which has been full until then changes to the empty state, and the character display of "GET" disappears, and continues In (12) of the figure, the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high speed fluctuation, and changes the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 78 (13), the button effect is started in the middle symbol. Also in the button effect here, as with the button effect shown in FIG. 71, there are one button image 136a, an arrow display 136b and a letter display “press” as the prompt display, and three remaining period meter displays 136c. It is displayed. Further, red is a color for prompting the operation of the operation means, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red, prompting pressing.

  In FIG. 78 (14), there is no pressing of the chance button 136, and the operation effective period decreases, but the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing of the next figure (15). In response to the pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 78 (16), a character display of "Genkiatsu" is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This letter display usually corresponds to a notice.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78 described above, the item acquired by the full meter is immediately used. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device different from the decorative symbol display device whose display has been started. Moreover, it is used during the symbol variation display currently performed at the time of a display being started. However, it may be possible to stock until the operation effective period of the operation means comes, with the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed in white, and in some cases, it may be stocked up to the next and subsequent symbol variation display It is also good.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation valid period, after the operation valid period has elapsed, the character display of “Gekiatsu” is displayed, and a normal advance notice is executed.

  FIG. 79 is a view gradually showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both disappear.

  In FIG. 79 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. The four symbols pd4 are also displayed as gray squares and gray circles, and the special figure 1 loss is shown. In FIG. 79 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 79 (3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 79 (2) is started, and the low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 79 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, in the upper left of the third symbol pd3 (for example, , Corresponding to an example of the first meter display) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the two white meter displays MW are separately started to be displayed, but two displays may be started together.

  In Fig. 79 (7), the red meter ascending item UpIr appears on the left symbol of the temporarily stopped "decoration 7", and in Fig. 79 (8), the red meter ascending item UpIr is displayed as the white meter MW on the left. Move to the position where it overlaps with the front side. In FIG. 79 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and only the white meter display MW meter on the left side is raised by 4 divisions.

  In FIG. 79 (10), the golden meter ascending item UpIg appears in the right symbol of the temporarily stopped “decoration 7”, and in FIG. 79 (11), the golden meter ascending item UpIg is displayed as the white meter MW on the right. Move to the position where it overlaps with the front side. In FIG. 79 (12), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the white meter display MW meter on the right side is raised by 5 divisions.

  In FIG. 79 (13), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and in FIG. 79 (14), the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continuation"), and in Fig. 79 (15), the pseudo continuous symbol swings (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo continuous symbol from the front side, Three white meter rising items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 79 (16), these three white meter ascending items UpI move to the white meter display MW on the left side, and the remaining one moves to the meter on the white meter display MW on the right side.

  In each of the two white meter displays MW shown in FIG. 79 (17), the meter is raised by the meter rising item UpI that has moved. That is, the white meter indication MW on the left side is increased by two divisions and becomes full, and the white meter indication MW on the right side is increased one division and also becomes full. Furthermore, by becoming full, with the white meter display MW on the left side, the chance up item CUI appears and the character display of “GET” is displayed, and in the white meter display MW on the right side As it appears, the character display of "GET" is displayed. The chance improvement item CUI that appears in the white meter display MW on the left side is an icon representing that the expectation of hitting a big hit in the symbol variation display currently being performed is increased, and a sword reach item that appears in the white meter display MW on the right side The RI is an icon for giving notice that it will be developed to reach a swordsman reach, which is a type of super reach production, with the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 79 (18), each of the two white meter displays MW which were full disappears, and the character display of each “GET” also disappears, and both the chance up item CUI and the swordsman reach item RI also have the second decorative pattern It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, although it may be changed to an empty state without erasing each of two white meter displays MW which were full, in the case where it is decided that it will be a big hit in the symbol variation display currently performed. As shown in FIG. 79 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

  FIG. 80 is a view gradually showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one disappears.

  In the third design pd3 shown in FIG. 80 (1), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of decorative symbols of lost design, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols of the symbols is confirmed and displayed, and from the stage cs of the variation icon display area, the variation icon c of the white display mode disappears.

  In FIG. 80 (3), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 by the suspension of the special view 1 represented by the first suspension icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first suspension icon h1 changes to the variation icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 80 (3) is the default display manner as in the case of the hold icon. In FIG. 80 (2), the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h2 of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, shifts the display mode as it is, and becomes the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 80 (3). There is.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (4), after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, the first symbol in the upper left of the third symbol pd3) (Equivalent to an example of the meter display of). Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 80 (6), a dialogue of “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of the royal crown and a mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 80 (7), the change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of the lord is carrying the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 80 (8), the character of the tombstone casts the change ball icon cI, and in FIG. 80 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the white meter display MW on the right and the white meter display MW on the right. It is displayed on the right end so as to overlap from the front side. The display mode of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 80 (9) changes, and an effect display ed1 is added. The change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added at the right end of the white meter display MW on the right side is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is. In FIG. 80 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 has been added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right changes to the red meter display MR with the empty state (meter 0 state) There is. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display changes from the first state to the fourth state. A plurality of meter displays MW may change simultaneously. That is, according to this example, the white meter indication MW on the left side may also change to the red meter indication MR with the empty state (the state of the meter being 0) together with the white meter indication MW on the right side.

  In FIG. 80 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 80 (12), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and fluctuation fluctuation is started (first Stop). In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that. That is, one blue meter ascending item UpIb is displayed so as to be superimposed on the left pattern of "decoration 7" from the front side.

  In FIG. 80 (13), the split animation of the blue meter ascending item UpIb is started, and one blue meter ascending item UpIb is split into two, and the white meter display MW in the empty state on the left and the right A blue meter ascending item UpIb is displayed on each of the red meter displays MR in the empty state. As described above, the blue meter ascending item UpIb is an item which is raised by 2 divisions for the white meter display MW and is increased by 6 divisions for the red meter display MR. In Fig. 80 (14), the blue meter up item UpIb on the left and right disappears, and the meter on the left white meter display MW rises by only 2 divisions, while the meter on the right red meter display MR It has risen to full at once. Then, on the right side of the full red meter display MR, a kana great reach item RI appears and a character display of "GET" is displayed. In addition, the item has not appeared on the white meter display MW on the left side which has not reached the full state.

  In FIG. 80 (17), of the two meter displays, only the right side red meter display MR which has been full disappears, and the character display of "GET" also disappears, and the Ken Osamu reach item RI is the second decorative symbol It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in FIG. 80 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost. In FIG. 80 (18), the third symbol pd3 is finalized and the fluctuation icon c disappears. After all, the stock sword reach item RI was not used in the symbol variation display at the time of appearance. Therefore, the sword great reach item RI here corresponds to a look-ahead system icon for predicting that it will develop into a sword great reach, which is a type of super reach production, in the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 80 step by step.

  In FIG. 81 (19) continued from FIG. 80 (18), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the red first suspension icon h1 which is the prefetching notice mode of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 3 In the pattern pd3, low-speed fluctuation is started. The fluctuation icon c is also displayed in a red display mode and functions as a normal advance notice. In addition, the white meter display MW on the left side accumulated up to two divisions shown in FIG. 80 (18) is still displayed even when a new symbol variation display is started, and the next symbol variation display is carried over become. That is, in the state in which the meter is stored, it straddles continuous symbol fluctuation display.

  In FIG. 81 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 81 (21), the left symbol in the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 81 (22), the variation of the left symbol becomes slower, and the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable, and furthermore, the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 also changes from high-speed to low-speed Has changed.

  In FIG. 81 (23), the left symbol is temporarily stopped and swing fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or before or after that.

  In FIG. 81 (24), the moving animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 81 (25), the white meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is raised by one scale. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (25), a reach state is entered, and the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 81 (25) outputs a voice of "reach".

  In FIG. 81 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the sword achive reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a character display of "activated". Is displayed. In FIG. 81 (27), the left symbol moving sway moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the right symbol swaying also changes the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Move to The white meter display MW displayed at the upper left is also moved to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (28), it has developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it has changed from the background screen of the castle town to the screen of Ken Goshi. From the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 81 (28), the sword strike item RI disappears. In this way, the swordsman reach production started is the same as the swords fish reach production shown in Figure 65 (22) onwards, and detailed explanation is omitted, but here the white meter display MW was stored only up to 3 divisions Nevertheless, in FIG. 81 (33), the golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the character of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 63, at the power-up from the white meter display MW which stored up to only three divisions, it was the green aura icon OI1 as shown in FIG. 63 (34). In the example, when multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol fluctuation display, it is easier to hit a jackpot than when only one meter display is displayed, and the color of the aura icon is also a color with high expectation of the jackpot. It becomes easy to become. Moreover, even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, red meter display MR, etc.) than only the default white meter display MW is displayed When is displayed, it is easier to make a big hit, and the color of the aura icon also tends to be a color with a higher expectation of the big hit.

All previous meter displays were of the increase type, and the display was started in the empty state (the meter is in the state of 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full state. The display may be started in the state of (second state or fifth state).

  FIG. 82 is a diagram gradually showing an example in which the display is started in a state where the incremental type meter display is accumulated halfway.

  In FIG. 82 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost of "decor 2"-"decor 5"-"decor 6" is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 82 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost.

  In FIG. 82 (3), symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h 1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 82 (2) is started, and low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd 3. In addition, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are changed according to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. Here, a character string such as “When the meter appears slightly accumulated” is scrolled in the tutorial display ts Is displayed.

  In FIG. 82 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and the display is started in a state where the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle on the third symbol pd3. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4) is in a state of being stored for one division, and corresponds to an example of a second state. Further, in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in the state where the meter has been stored halfway, the sound of “chance” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 82 (4).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 82 (5), a dialogue of “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of the royal crown, and a mini item appearance notice is given. In FIG. 82 (6), the gold meter rising item UpIg appears, and the character cd of the maroon is carrying the gold meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 82 (7), the character cd of tombstone throws up the gold meter rising item UpIg, and the gold meter rising item UpIg is positioned between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 82 (8), the gold meter ascending item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 82 (9), the gold meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from a state where one scale is stored to a full state. Since the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item that raises the meter for at least 5 divisions, when the display starts while the meter display is partially accumulated, when the gold meter rising item UpIg appears, Meter full will be confirmed.

  In the white meter indication MW, the big hit symbol is finally determined when changing from full storage to partial full storage than from when full storage from partial storage to full filling does not change. It is easy to be displayed. Furthermore, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the white meter display MW is started while the display is partially stored, as compared to when the display is started in the empty state. Moreover, these things are the same also in red meter display MR.

  In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter rising item is increased. For example, the rate of increase of the meter due to the meter rising item may be doubled as compared to the state where the meter is 0 (first state).

  So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display showing numerical values.

  FIG. 83: is a figure which shows gradually an example of the meter presentation by the meter display which shows a numerical value.

  In FIG. 83 (1), the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating in high-speed variation, and the tutorial display ts has display contents such as “Meter is red”. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 83 (2), a white numeric meter display DW appears, and from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 83 (2), an effect sound (appears according to the appearance) Sound is being output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 83 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and the state is a state where the numerical value is 00%, and this state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. Further, in FIG. 83 (2), the tutorial display ts changes, and the display contents such as “At the meter MAX reach” are displayed.

  In FIG. 83 (3), Yatsushiro character 224Fa which is one of the movable means falls from the top of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. According to the operation of the movable means, as shown in FIG. 83 (4), a white meter rising item UpI appears. However, on the front side of the white meter ascending item UpI, the dropped Yatsushiro character 224Fa is located, and a part of the white meter ascending item UpI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 83 (5), the white meter rising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the dropped Yatsu character 224Fa is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter rising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 83 (6), the eighth generation character 224Fa is raised and returned to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started. The white meter ascending item UpI moves to a position overlapping the white numeric meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the front side. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 83 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter rising item shown in FIG. 83 (7). UpI is displayed at a position overlapping with the white numeric meter display DW. The white color meter display DW shown in FIG. 83 (7) is temporarily difficult to view due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 83 (8), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW recovers, and the numerical display rises from 00% to 10%. There is. The state of the white numerical meter display DW performing the numerical display of 10% shown in FIG. 83 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

  In FIG. 83 (9), a general military item 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In accordance with the movement of the general officer 224Fb which is a movable means, as shown in FIG. 83 (10), a change ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general officer 224Fb. A part of the change ball icon cI is relatively difficult to view. In FIG. 83 (11), the change ball icon cI moves downward, and the overlap with the dropped general military item 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the change ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 83 (12), the general character item 224Fb moves upward and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front to a position overlapping the white numeric meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. doing. In FIG. 83 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical meter display DW up to that point is changed to a red numerical meter display DR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display). That is, they are replaced by different types of meter displays. The change of the meter display here is not performed by the accumulated numerical value, but is performed by the change effect (here, the effect using the change ball icon cI). Also, depending on the relationship between the color of the numerical meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of the numerical meter display and the item, the rate of increase in numerical value changes as in the description using FIG. Do.

  In FIG. 83 (14), there is one ball entry ball in the first special figure starting opening 230, and the first reserved icon h1 of the special figure 1 is in the first stage hs1 of the reserved icon display area shown in FIG. The display of should be started. However, in FIG. 83 (15), a green meter up item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, and it is difficult to confirm the presence of the first hold icon h1. . In FIG. 83 (16), the green meter ascending item UpIm moves to a position overlapping the red numerical meter display DR from the front side, and the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 83 (16) is a white first The presence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. The hold icon may be displayed on the front side of the meter rising item.

  The appearance of the meter rising item here is triggered by the winning of the first special figure starting port 230, but it may be triggered by the winning of the common drawing starting port with a winning ball, or with the winning ball Regardless of whether or not it may be triggered by the game ball passing of the common view starting gate, it may be triggered by the winning a prize in the second special view starting opening 232 (electric chew), there is only a winning ball It may be triggered by a prize in the general winning opening 226, or may be triggered by entering a ball into an out port for effect.

  Also, when the meter display is displayed, it is a prize or entry to the special view starting port 230, 232, etc. than when it is not displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance improvement item It is easy for CUI and Ken-O-Kai reach item RI etc. to appear.

  In FIG. 83 (17), the green meter ascending item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR is increased from 10% to the previous MAX. This MAX is a display that represents, for example, 100%. The state of the red numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 83 (17) corresponds to an example of the sixth state.

  In the meter effect shown in FIG. 83, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 83 (18), the character display of “Gekiatsu” is displayed on the numerical meter display so as to overlap from the front side . The character display of "Gekiatsu" may be a display that indicates that the jackpot in the variation is rich or that the jackpot is finalized.

  FIG. 84 is a view gradually showing an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 83 changes in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  In FIG. 84 (1), the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating at high speed, and in FIG. 84 (2), there is one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the suspension shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special view 1 is started. A first reserve icon h1 shown in FIG. 84 (3) is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 displayed in red on the screen to prompt an operation on the white round icon. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold display mode. Further, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136 also lights in red to prompt the operation, and in FIG. 84 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

  In FIG. 84 (5), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the white numerical meter display DW is changed to the red numerical meter display DR. On the other hand, in the display mode of the first hold icon h1, the button image 136a disappears, and only the white round icon is in the default display mode. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, although the first hold icon h1 is the display mode of the button hold, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice. , The meter display has been replaced by a different type of meter display. This is an effect of giving a notice of a big hit in the variation, and in the case of a pre-reading notice giving a big hit in the subsequent change, the first hold icon h1 may be changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Note that it is also possible to use a numerical meter display as a pre-reading advance notice (for example, carry over to the next fluctuation after becoming a MAX display).

  As described above, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon of the button hold is more likely to be displayed when winning or entering the special view starting port 230, 232 or the like than when the meter display is not displayed.

  FIG. 85 is a view showing in stages an example of an effect different from the meter effect described so far.

  Although FIG. 85 shows that a display showing a certain amount or number is displayed as in the meter display described above, here, instead of the meter, the appearance number of characters is used. The display using the appearance number of the character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

  In FIG. 85 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 85 (2), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost.

  In FIG. 85 (3), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first suspension icon h1 of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 85 (2) is started, and the low-speed variation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, in response to the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed, and the display content is "When a character appears". In FIG. 85 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 85 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image which has been the town of the castle town disappears so far, below the character display such as "all in group gathering chance". A silhouette of four characters is displayed in a horizontal row. In the state shown in FIG. 85 (5), no character display is displayed, and corresponds to an empty state (a state where the meter is 0) in the meter display, that is, a first state or a fourth state. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 continues to be displayed.

  In FIG. 85 (6), the character display cd1 of Princess Little appears at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “3 more people”. In FIG. 85 (7), a rose character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “two more people”. In FIG. 85 (8), the princess character display cd3 appears on the left side of the character display cd1 of Princess Chibi, and the character display changes to "one more person". The state shown in FIG. 85 (6), the state shown in FIG. 85 (7), and the state shown in FIG. 85 (8) respectively correspond to a second state or a fifth state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 85, the character display of “failure” is displayed as shown in FIG. 85 (9) when all three are gathered, and all members can not be gathered, and the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is also resumed. And in FIG. 85 (11), the variation display of the 3rd design pd3 and the 5th design pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decoration design of the loss of "decoration 5"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 85 (12), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the special figure 1 is lost.

  Although the color of the silhouette of the character is usually gray, the silhouette of the remaining character may be displayed in red when the remaining one is left. In this case, it is a decision of a set of all four people, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four persons are gathered corresponds to the full state in the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example in which the characters are gathered, the expectation of the big hit is very high, and the big hit may be rich, or it may be a further high level of big hit (for example, big hit determination) when all four people are together. Moreover, even if all four people do not gather, it does not consider it as "failure", but may give the expectation of the big hit to some extent, even if only three people gather, even if there is a big hit in the said fluctuation. It may be good, and there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display started after the variation.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram gradually showing an example when an error occurs during display of a meter display.

  FIGS. 86 (1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 80 (1) to (4), and in FIG. 86 (5), a full error has occurred, and the same figure (6) is shown. At the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (immediately above the third symbol pd3), an error display ER1 such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed. The error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed at the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. Note that at least a part (for example, all of them) of the error display ER1 may be displayed from the front side so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all of them) of the white meter display MW. Furthermore, the error display ER1 may be a display having transparency, and even if it overlaps the meter display or the like from the front side, the overlapping portion may be seen through.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 86 (6), the left symbol in the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in the same drawing (7), the left symbol is temporarily stopped A part of the error display ER1 is displayed from the front side on a part of the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) during temporary stop while the swing fluctuation has been started (first stop). Note that at least a part (for example, all of them) of the error display ER1 may be displayed from the front side so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all of them) of the decorative symbol. As described above, the error display ER1 is displayed preferentially over the meter display, and is displayed preferentially over the third symbol pd3.

  Also, in FIG. 86 (7), the red meter ascending item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side, and in FIG. 86 (8), the red meter ascending item UpIr Is moved to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps the part of the red meter ascending item UpIr from the front side. In Fig. 86 (9), the red meter up item UpIr disappears, and the white meter display MW should be up by 4 divisions, but the error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the white meter display MW. It is impossible to check how far the meter has risen. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 86 (9), the sound of four notes is output here, with one note rising by one division. The storage condition of the meter (the rising condition) can be notified not only by the output sound from the speaker 120 but also by the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as a lamp or a frame lamp around the decorative symbol display device.

  86 (10), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is slowed down, and in FIG. 86 (11), the right symbol temporarily stops and starts the swing variation (second stop), 2 A white meter rising item UpI, which is the second meter rising item, appears on the right pattern so as to overlap from the front side. As shown in FIG. 86 (12), the white meter rising item UpI also moves to a position overlapping the white meter display MW from the front side. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps from a front side of a part of the white meter rising item UpI. In Fig. 86 (13), although the white meter rising item UpI has disappeared, the white meter display MW meter should have risen by one division, but the error display ER1 still overlaps, so the meter rises to where Although it can not be confirmed, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 86 (13).

  In FIG. 86 (14), the white meter rising item UpI appears without notice of the mini item appearance shown in FIG. 74 (5) etc., and the character cd of the maroon is carrying the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 86 (15), the character Adonis casts the white meter rising item UpI, and the white meter rising item UpI hits the white meter display MW and should be displayed above the white meter display MW. However, since the error displays ER1 overlap, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In Fig. 86 (16), the white meter display MW should have been increased by one division by the white meter rising item UpI, but the error display ER1 still overlaps, so how far the meter has risen Can not be confirmed, but the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 86 (16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partially shown in FIG. 86 (16) is full, and a full notification sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. (17). It has been output.

  In FIG. 86 (18), at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, the pseudo continuous notice item NI which is a type of mini item appears and at the middle symbol position continuing high speed fluctuation among the third symbol pd3. Although the character display of "GET" is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps the character display of "GET" also with the pseudo continuous notice item NI, and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo continuous notice item NI has been acquired .

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 86 step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (19) continued from FIG. 86 (18), the character display of “GET” disappears, and the simulated consecutive notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The second decorative symbol display device 208M is stocked. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (20), the white meter display MW which has been full until then changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed as it is empty. In FIG. 87 (21), the simulated reannounced notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues high-speed fluctuation, and the simulated contingent notice item NI is digested, but The error display ER1 is overlapped from the front side on the pseudo run notice item NI moved to the position of the symbol, and it is difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 87 (22), the variation of the middle symbol which has been changing at high speed with the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo continuous symbol ("continue"), and in Fig. 87 (23), the pseudo continuous symbol swings (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continue “-” “Decorative 1”) is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-series effect is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps the pseudo run symbol ("continue") from the front side, and the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the pseudo run symbol.

  In FIG. 87 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, the ball pulling operation has not been performed until the end. That is, when the ball removing operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as "Please remove the ball" is automatically hidden. In other words, if the error is eliminated, the error display ER1 disappears automatically.

  In the example shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the player can not visually check the state of the meter display (for example, the storage condition etc.), so for the player who is concerned about the state of the meter display In some cases, the ball removal operation can be performed early by displaying the error display ER1 superimposed on the meter display. In addition, the meter display is likely to be good for the player when accumulated, so it is easy for the player's gaze to be always gathered, and the error display ER1 is made to be easy to notice by overlapping the error display ER1 on the meter display. It also plays an effect.

  Also, in this example, a prize-abnormality error that is more serious than a full-flood error occurs, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (24) has a display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1. Then, an error display ER2 is displayed to notify the occurrence of a winning prize error. The error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 from the front side as well as the third symbol pd3 and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. By superimposing another error display ER2 on the error display ER1, it may be possible to convey that a serious error has occurred. The error displays do not have to overlap with each other, and in some cases, at least the display size may be larger for a serious error. In addition, as an example of a serious error said here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error which can not be resolved without calling a store clerk, an error display is automatically even if the error is resolved. You can list errors that do not disappear (do not disappear). That is, the serious errors may be all the above listed ones. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. Alternatively, as described above in the list described in FIG. 172 described later, a serious error occurs. That is, the most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the contrary, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500, an error that can be resolved by the player alone, an error display when the error is resolved It is possible to enumerate errors that are automatically hidden (disappeared), etc. That is, minor errors may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. Further, among minor errors, there may be errors in which the meter display is displayed preferentially, or the third symbol pd3 is displayed preferentially.

  Moreover, the error display in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 is the same as the display of various errors described in FIG. 172 to FIG. 174 described later. In particular, the notification content described as "liquid crystal display" in the "embodiment" in FIG. 174 describing the notification mode of error notification of various errors can be replaced with the error display in FIG. 86 and FIG.

  Note that in the present specification, the statement that "a certain display overlaps with another display from the front" is read as a statement that "at least a part of one display overlaps with at least a part of another display". All of one display may overlap from the front to all of the other display, or all of one display may overlap from the front to part of the other display. The part may overlap from the front to all of the other displays, or part of one display may overlap from the front to part of the other display. Further, in the present specification, the statement that "a certain display overlaps with another display from the front side" can be read as the reverse, that is, "the other display overlaps with a certain display from the front side".

  In the above description, the meter display is of the increase type in which the display representing a certain amount or number only increases, but the meter display may be of the increase or decrease type in which the display representing a certain amount or number increases or decreases Well, it may be of the reduced type where the indication representing a certain amount or number is only reduced.

  In addition, the meter display includes white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67 etc., red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, and red numerical meter display DR, Although the display using the appearance number of the character shown in 85 has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the display may be a display in which the needle indicates a certain amount or number, or a display using the display number of graphics or symbols. It is also good.

  Furthermore, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started alone, not the change from the white meter display MW. Or, conversely, the red meter indication MR may be a meter indication which is not displayed unless it changes from the white meter indication MW.

  In addition, the red meter display MR may change in a state where the white meter display MW is stored halfway, and may take over the meter of the white meter display MW and display may be started in a state where it is stored halfway. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself in a partially accumulated state may be started alone. In these cases, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the display is started in the state of being stored halfway, than in the case where the display is started in the empty state.

  Furthermore, the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the red meter display MR is partially stored than when the white meter display MW is partially stored.

  In the above description, "~ it is easy for the jackpot symbol to be finalized and displayed." The statement of the effect is "It is easy to win a big hit that is more advantageous than a bad one." It can be replaced by the statement of the effect.

  As mentioned above, although the example which made the present invention apply to a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine) was explained in detail, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention is also applicable to a used gaming machine (slot machine). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 88 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 88, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown at 49 are not provided.

  FIG. 89 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 89) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, an appropriate number of symbols are printed at equal intervals on strip members, and the strip members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown in FIG. 89) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being played. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three sheets are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is performed to perform a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of roles has been won or not. It is determined whether to make the player relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  Also, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. The operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Furthermore, next to the operation key unit 1090, there is provided the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. At the upper part of the front door 1002, a rendering device 1080 is disposed. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 disposed on the back side of the door member 1063 (shown in FIG. When the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is the front of the slot machine 1000 It has a structure that appears on the It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, consisting of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen can be viewed by the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as the operation means, the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means or the third operation means And effect buttons 1091 (an example of the second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89, a display panel 1070 displaying a title or the like of a device can be protruded toward the front side. In addition, a light emitting diode (LED) is incorporated in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 89 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operating means (button) like the transmitting portion 191, and an example of the operating means (for example, It corresponds to one example of the operation means, and also corresponds to one example of the movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091 and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“The game console has display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N)],
The display means may display a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67 etc., red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. Means for displaying a numerical meter display DR, a display using the appearance number of characters shown in FIG.
The meter display of one of the plurality of types of meter displays is the first meter display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 67 etc., left meter display shown in FIG. 79 (4) to FIG. 80 (4) to (18), or a white numeric meter display DW shown in FIGS. 83 and 84].
One meter display among the plural types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, red meter display MR shown in FIG. 67 etc., right meter display shown in FIG. 79 (5) to FIG. 80 (5) to (15), the red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, or the display using the number of appearances of the characters shown in FIG. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from a first state [e.g., empty state (meter is 0)] to a third state [e.g., full state],
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from a fourth state [eg, empty state (meter is 0)] to a sixth state [eg, full state],
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state than when the first meter display does not change to the third state while the first state remains [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 73 or the example shown in FIG. 79], the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed,
When the fourth meter indication changes from the fourth state to the sixth state than when the fourth meter indication does not change to the sixth state with the fourth state [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 or the example shown in FIG. 80], the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the first meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Furthermore, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may have a period displayed simultaneously. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displays that are always displayed simultaneously, or may be displays that may be displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displays displayed separately without the period.

  The display means may be means for displaying plural types of meter display without fail. The first meter display may be a display which always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display which necessarily changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

Also,
“The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is the sixth display, rather than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state Configured to have a higher probability of changing to the state of
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the one state change amount in the fourth meter display may be larger than the one state change amount in the first meter display.

  Further, when the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the first meter display changes more than when the first state changes to the third state. Finally, the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that is displayed when the display is started in the first state [for example, in the case of FIG. 64 (4)],
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in the first state is changed [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 (9)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the fourth meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the fourth state, and the first meter display in the first state to the fourth in the fourth state The meter display may change, or the first meter display in the first state may change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

  Moreover, although there is no case where the first meter display of the third state changes to the fourth meter display, the change from the first meter display of the second state to the fourth meter display does not occur. If you do, you may.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display in which the display is necessarily started in the fourth state. When the first meter display changes to the fourth meter display, the first meter display in the first state always changes to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the display may be changed from the first meter display of the first state to the fourth meter display of the fifth state.

Also,
"A fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using a change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 64 (6) to FIG. Change production],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, the operation means effect (button effect) may be used, and the first meter display may change to the fourth meter display in response to the operation of the operation means.

  Note that the fourth effect may always be started in a state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed.

  Here, the first meter display is a display whose display is ended by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display whose display is started by the fourth effect, It is also good. That is, the first meter display disappears and the display of the fourth meter display is started. For example, when the first effect is started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed, and the first effect ends, the first meter display disappears, and The display of four meter displays may be configured to be started.

Also,
"The fourth effect is an effect using a fourth character,
In the case where the fourth character is displayed across the plurality of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol in succession by the display means [for example, FIG. 64 (1) and FIG. (2) and FIG. ] Is a certain character [e.g.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the "variation display of the decorative symbol" refers to the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display in between. In addition, it is possible to view 1 change from the start of the change display to the final display. Furthermore, "to straddle" is to put the period of stop display of the decorative symbol (the change stop period) in between. Further, the fourth character may be a character continuously displayed during display of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be a character temporarily disappearing in the middle. The character may be a character that is continuously displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, or may be a character that disappears halfway along the way, or continues to disappear while the display of the stop display is displayed. Characters may be present.

  The fourth character may be a character that is necessarily displayed across the continuous variable display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol by the display means is being displayed [eg, FIG. 68 (1), FIG. 68 (8) to FIG. White meter indication MW in) is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first meter display may be a display that may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display is started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may be continued until the stop display is displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed while the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

  Here, the first meter display is a display which may change in state during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbol by the display means It may be a display that may change in state during display of the variable display. The first meter display may be a display which always changes in state during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is necessarily during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The display may change state.

  Further, the fourth meter display is a display that may be started during display of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the display unit, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbol by the display unit. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is ended, the big hit symbol may be more easily stopped and displayed than the lost symbol. That is, the display of the fourth meter display is started during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed rather than during display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Cheap. In addition, when a display is started, the said 4th meter display may be a display by which a display is always started during the display of the fluctuation display of the said decorative symbol.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern a plurality of times, and
The variation display of one of the plural variations of the decoration symbol is the variation display of the first decoration symbol [for example, the variation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 68 (1)],
The variation display of one of the plural variations of the decoration symbol is the variation display of the second decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIG. 68 (3) to FIG. (9),
The variation display of one of the plural variations of the decoration symbol is the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIG. 68 (10) to FIG. 69 (21),
The variation display of one of the plural variations of the decoration symbol is the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIG. 69 (22) to FIG. 70 (42),
The variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol are variable display of continuous decorative symbols,
In the case where the first meter display is in a state different between the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the variable display of the second decorative symbol [e.g., it is an empty state at the timing of FIG. 68 (1) When the meter rises at the timing shown in Fig. 68 (7).
The variation display of the fourth decoration pattern and the variation display of the fifth decoration pattern are variation displays of the continuous decoration pattern,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol [e.g., empty at the timing of FIG. 69 (19) The meter is rising at the timing shown in Fig. 69 (29) while it is
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is ended, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is ended, the fourth decorative symbol is displayed. After the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol is ended, the sixth The variable display of the decorative symbol of may be started. In this case, when the variation display of the fifth decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, or when the variation display of the sixth decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol is stopped It may be displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display in which the state is always different between the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol and the fluctuation display of the second decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display may be The display may be always different in the state between the variable display of the fourth decorative symbol and the variable display of the fifth decorative symbol.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display whose display is started in the fourth state [for example, red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 (9) or the like],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  As mentioned above, the fourth state may be empty.

  By doing this, it is possible to have an expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, meter full) from the time of meter appearance or change.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that may start to be displayed in the fourth state, or may be a display that always starts to be displayed in the fourth state. .

Also,
“The fourth meter display is the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 64 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state where it is stored up to three divisions shown in FIG. 64 (14)] Is a display that may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 64 (18)].
The fourth meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the fourth state [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 64 (9) or the like],
The fourth meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the fifth state,
If the display is started in the fifth state, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed when the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the fourth meter display is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. It may be an aspect.

  Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that is not displayed when the display is started in the fifth state, or a display that may be displayed in the fifth state. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the fifth state may be a state representing a fifth quantity or number, and the fifth quantity or number may be a combination of the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number There may be an amount or a number between them.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that always starts to be displayed in the fourth state, or may be a display that changes from the fourth state to the fifth state. Furthermore, it may be a display that necessarily changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display which always starts to be displayed in the fifth state, or may be a display which always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. .

Also,
“The first meter display is from the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 73 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state stored up to one division shown in FIG. 73 (9)] Is a display that may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 73 (12)].
The first meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the first state [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 73 (4) and the like],
The first meter display is a display that may start to be displayed in the second state [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4)].
In the case where the display is started in the second state, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the display of the first meter display is started in the first state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first meter display is more likely to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. It may be an aspect.

  The first meter display may be a display that is not displayed when the display is started in the third state, or a display that may be displayed in the third state. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the second state may be a state representing a second amount or number, the second amount or number being the first amount or number and the third amount or number There may be an amount or a number between them.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts to be displayed in the first state, or may be a display that always changes from the first state to a second state, Furthermore, it may be a display that necessarily changes from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display which always starts to be displayed in the second state, or may be a display which necessarily changes from the second state to the third state. .

Also,
“The first meter display is from the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 73 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state stored up to one division shown in FIG. 73 (9)] Is a display that may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 73 (12)].
The fourth meter display is from the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 64 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state stored up to three divisions shown in FIG. 64 (14)] It is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full state shown in FIG. 64 (18)].
In the case where the fourth meter display is in the fifth state, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the first meter display is in the second state,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first meter display may be a display that may start to be displayed in the first state, or the first meter display may start to be displayed in the second state. The fourth meter display may be a display that may be started in the fourth state, or the fourth meter display may be a display that may be displayed. The display may be started in the fifth state.

  In addition, when the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than in the case where the display of the first meter display is started in the second state, a big hit is finally obtained. The symbol may be easily displayed.

  Here, the display start patterns of the first meter display are summarized. The first meter display is a display that is started in the first state and may change to the second state, and the display is started in the first state, and the second state is displayed. Is a display that may change to the third state through the display, and a display is started in the first state, and a display that may change to the third state, and displayed in the second state Is the display that may be changed to the third state, the display is started in the first state, and the sixth state is further transmitted through the fourth state and the fifth state. The display may change to the fourth state, and the display may start to change to the fifth state. The display may start to change in the fourth state. In the fourth state, display is started, and the fifth state is followed by the fifth state. A display case is to change the state, the display state of said fifth is started, a display that may change the state of said six. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

  The display may be started in the fourth state and may not be changed to the first state. Moreover, the display may be started in the second state and may not be changed to the first state.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a first icon,
The first meter display is performed by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 67 (c)] a first number of times [for example, three times]. It is a display that changes from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is performed by displaying the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 67 (i)] a fourth number of times [for example, once]. It is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The fourth number is a number smaller than the first number.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, if the state changes with a small number of times, it means that one change amount is large.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that may start to be displayed by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG. 72].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first effect may be an acquisition effect of the first meter display.

  The first meter display may be a display in which the display is necessarily started by the first effect.

Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2, etc.] according to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 74] It is a means,
The first meter display is a display in which a part or all of the first meter display overlaps the hold display area,
The fourth meter display is a display in which a part or all of the fourth meter display overlaps the hold display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Also, for example, the first meter display is a display displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is also a display displayed integrally with the hold display area. It may be.

  The display means may be means for displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of hold balls in the hold display area. Further, the display means may be means for certainly displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when the hold icon is displayed.

Also,
“One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is the seventh meter display [eg, rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 67 (m) and (n)],
If the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, it may be jackpot rich. When the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, empty state] to the ninth state [for example, full tank state], even if the big hit symbol is finally definitely displayed Good. Furthermore, the seventh meter display may be a display that necessarily changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

  When the first meter display changes to the third state, the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the first meter display changes to the third state If the big hit symbol is definitely displayed on the screen and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, the display means is displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state Finally, the jackpot symbol may be definitely displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, when the said 7th meter display is displayed, a big hit symbol may be finally determined and displayed finally.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The preliminary display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state [for example, a pseudo-series effect shown in FIG. 74].
The preliminary announcement display may be a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state [eg, super reach effect shown in FIG. 65].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, as the notice display, enumerate a pseudo-sequence effect display, an operation means related display, a notice display about a big hit (normal notice display or advance notice display), a notice display about an effect (for example, super reach effect), etc. Can. That is, all of the above listed items may be used as the advance notice. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  Further, the display means may be means capable of displaying a pseudo continuous effect display, and the pseudo continuous effect display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state. It may be a display, and the pseudo sequential effect display may be a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo connection effect display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo connection effect display may be the fourth meter The display may be started whenever the display changes to the sixth state.

  The notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the notice display may include the sixth meter display of the sixth state. The display may be started whenever it changes to the state of.

  Here also, the display device comprises an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, the display means being a means capable of displaying an operation means related display, wherein the operation means related display is a display concerning the operation means The operation means related display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display May be a display that may start when the state changes to the sixth state. The operation means related display may be a display imitating the operation means, or may be a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display), or the operation of the operation means The indication regarding the effective period (more specifically, the indication of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display)) may be displayed, or the indication reminding of the operation means may be displayed, or these indications Or a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means related display may be a display which is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display May be a display that is always started when the state changes to the sixth state.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. And the normal advance notice is a display that may be started when the first meter indication changes to the third state, and the normal advance notice is the first notice The display may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal advance notice may be, for example, a super reach effect display. Further, the normal advance notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter indication changes to the third state, and the normal advance notice display may be the fourth meter indication The display may be started whenever it changes to the sixth state.

Also,
“The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first amount or number [eg empty state or vice versa full state],
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [e.g., full or vice versa, empty]
The fourth state in the fourth meter indication is a state representing a fourth quantity or number [e.g. empty state or conversely full state],
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number [e.g., full or empty)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first amount or number and the third amount or number are different amounts, and the fourth amount or number and the sixth amount or number are different amounts or numbers. May be

  Also, the third amount or number is an amount or number less than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is less than the fourth amount or number, or It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is the case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is the case where the fourth meter display decreases.

  Also, the third amount or number is an amount or number greater than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount or number greater than the fourth amount or number It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is the case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display The case where the fourth state is changed to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display is increased.

  The first state is full, the third state is empty, the fourth state is full, and the sixth state is empty. Or the opposite, the first state is empty, the third state is full, the fourth state is empty, and the sixth state is The state may be full.

  Furthermore, also when the first meter display changes from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full]. There is also a case where the fourth meter display changes from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full]. is there.

Also,
“The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partially [for example, only meter frame mf] or all colors are different [for example, white and red, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by the different colors. In addition, the color may be different continuously. Alternatively, the colors may be different only for a certain period of time. That is, the color may be changed, it may be different in the first state and the fourth state, or may be different in the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it may be different in the second state and the fifth state described later. Also, the colors may be different from each other when the display is started. Alternatively, the colors when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  The first meter display includes a frame display and an increase / decrease display to increase or decrease in the frame display, and the fourth meter display increases or decreases in the frame display and the frame display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may differ only in the color of the frame display, or may differ only in the color of the increase / decrease display. The color of both the frame display and the increase / decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

  The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different in color only in part.

Also,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, when the size (display size) is different, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished. Note that the sizes may be continuously different. Alternatively, the sizes may be different only for a certain period. That is, the size may be changed, it may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, it may be different in the second state and the fifth state described later. Moreover, the sizes when the display is started may be different from each other. Alternatively, the sizes when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

Also,
"The first meter display and the fourth meter display have different display positions,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by the difference in display position. Note that the display position may be continuously different. Alternatively, the display position may be different only for a certain period. That is, the display position may be changed, as long as the first state and the fourth state are different, or the third state and the sixth state may be different. Furthermore, it may be different in the second state and the fifth state described later. Moreover, the display positions when the display is started may be different from each other. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  The “meter display” in the above description may be replaced with “display representing a certain amount or number”, “first meter display” is “first display” and “fourth meter display” is “ It may be replaced by the fourth display.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other gaming machines applicable to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) which can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 90 to 176 are basically used only for the description using FIGS. 90 to 176, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 176, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 90 to 176 have priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console which allows the player to earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker from which a low frequency sound is output) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is electrically connected (the main frame 104 and the outer frame 102). A pair of floating connectors are provided, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are in a connected state); Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk in a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high sound speaker outputting high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. It is done. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, a light source that is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, etc. may be referred to as a lamp if it emits light. It corresponds to

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board Ball launch handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of the game player, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 92) by the operation of the player, and the chance button 136 , A chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, a sphere lending operation button 140 for instructing sphere lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a player's balance for the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90 is provided with a lower bowl full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In this operation key unit 137, the up and down keys of the up and down keys and the left and right keys of the left and right keys are arranged as the cross key, and the decision key is arranged at the center of the cross key. There is. In addition, a cancel key is also disposed below and to the right of the cross key. The pachinko machine 100 does not have the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the upper plate 126, the lower plate 128, the ball extraction button 130, the ball ejection lever 132, the ball emission handle 134, the chance button 136, the chance button on the front frame door 106. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the bottom plate full detection sensor and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

  The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the door 108 with a ball storage plate) is in an open state with respect to the main body 104 If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, rendering means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122 and the chance) provided on the front frame door 106 Button lamp 138. Including the effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is provided with the effect movable body), display of the ball rental display unit, chance button 136, ball rental operation button 140, return operation button 142 and The operation of the operation key unit 137 and the detection of the bottom plate full detection sensor can be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply substrate case 184 containing the power supply substrate 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102 and the front frame door 106 (with ball storage plate The door 108 may be included, and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. The ball release handle 134 is a release stop switch (not shown) for disabling the release (injection) of the game ball by the operation of the ball release handle 134 and the player touching the ball release handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball shooting handle 134 has been operated from the unoperated state while the demonstration screen is displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, effect display by display means, effect sound by sound output means, and light emission effects by various decoration LEDs and light guide plates, effect movable bodies (provided on a game board or a frame) may be mentioned. An effect may be performed by four types of effect means, and may be performed by one or more effect means. Moreover, even if it is a production | presentation means of the same kind, there may be a production | presentation means which performs exclusive production | presentation, and a production | presentation means which is not performed. (For example, the effect movable body of the frame performs exclusive effect, but the effect movable body of the game board does not perform dedicated effect, the effect movable body A of the game board performs dedicated effect, but the effect movable body B of the game board There is no dedicated presentation, etc. This example is also applicable to other presentation means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. In FIG. 90, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 91 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 90 as viewed from the rear side.

  A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and having an opening opened upward at the upper rear of the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100, and located below the ball tank 150, the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole formed at the bottom of the container to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is provided on the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 which constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 93) for performing control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (refer to FIG. 93) that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 Second sub substrate case 166 which houses the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 93) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls 93) and a payout substrate case 172 for housing a payout substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; And a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 93) for supplying power to various electric game machines. And a power supply substrate case 184 housing a power supply substrate 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The main board case 158 containing the main board 156, the first sub board case 162 containing the first sub board 160, and the second sub board case 166 containing the second sub board 164 are the game board 200. A discharge substrate case 172 containing a discharge substrate 170 provided with an error release switch 168, a launch substrate case 176 containing a launch substrate 174, a power supply switch 178, and a RAM clear switch 180 are provided. A power supply substrate case 184 for housing the substrate 182 and a CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 92 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, although the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 When the player wins a prize, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 91 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 91 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper dish. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start opening 232 is disposed below the first special drawing start opening 230. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In addition, in this embodiment, although two 1st special figure starting ports 230 and 2nd special figure starting ports 232 are provided, three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting openings, two first special drawing starting openings may be provided and one second special drawing starting opening may be provided. Conversely, one first special drawing starting opening is provided. It is provided, and two 2nd special figure starting ports may be provided. In addition, when there is only one special view display device, the three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special view display device. Moreover, four or more starting openings may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls as game balls pass or enter, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, the other variable winning opening is always closed while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Also, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with the strength according to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the shooting rod 146 and the shooting rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach. The game board may be provided with an out sensor. Out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a game ball that has entered the ball and the out port. The sensor may be configured to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 90, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 92 correspond to rendering means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control section 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit assumes that two counters are built in) Is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 a is received. Although the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and lower dish full tank sensors. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special display device 212 or the first 2) A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special view display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, various status display units 328 (for example, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the general drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, the high probability middle lamp 222, etc., and Moving members, for example, drive means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special view starting port 232 as a normal electric part, drive means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric part, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including the above. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value corresponds to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in value storage register. Also, even when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special view start opening 232, similarly, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special view start opening 232 The latched and latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal plate (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 with which etc. is provided.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured such that the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Further, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, etc., and a button sensor 426 for detecting depression of various buttons constituting the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and the CPU 504. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 is read based on the signal from the VDP 518, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350 through the external terminal board which does not illustrate the rental ball information etc. which show that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 which drives the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 which feeds the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 (a) to (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 94 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1. FIG. In FIG. 94 (a), nine types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 94 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be extinguished, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds," "Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of the balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, 15 In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not the special big hit is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 94 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 94 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. In FIG. 94 (b), six types of special drawings of "special drawing a" to "special drawing f" are shown, of which five kinds of special drawings are big hit symbols ("special drawing a" to "special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG. 94 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 94 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 94 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the main control unit power-on process performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 95 (a) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on process, FIG. 95 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 95 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S102, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9 V or more. If the voltage value of the power supply is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), wait until the voltage value of the power supply is equal to or more than the predetermined value, and if it is equal to or more than the predetermined value (step S102: Yes) The process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initialization, processing of setting values for starting of WDT 314, access permission of RAM 308, and a numerical value for determining an execution cycle of main control unit timer interrupt processing described later to each register of timer circuit 312, main control unit 300 After performing processing such as initial setting of serial communication between the and the payout control unit 600 and setting of the maximum value of hardware random numbers, the processing proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is on (indicating that an operation has been made). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process proceeds to step S108 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. Proceed to execute an initial startup process described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power supply status information stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether the power supply status information is information indicating suspension. Then, if the information on the power supply status is not the information indicating the suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to initialize the basic circuit 302, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the information of the power supply status is the information indicating the suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, the checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated check sum It is determined whether the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before power interruption and return Execute startup processing. On the other hand, if the result of the checksum is other than the specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal) (step S106: No), the process proceeds to step S108 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Proceed to execute an initial startup process described later.

  Here, the return activation processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initialization at return activation is performed. Specifically, a process of setting information indicating "restoration start" to the information of the power supply status, a process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (flag of an error due to magnetic detection or prize abnormality) It performs a process of clearing, a process of clearing the previous device error status, and a process of clearing the device error status for security signal.

  Subsequently, in step S202, after setting the addresses after the storage area for which the initial setting has been performed in step S201 as an address to start the RAM clear, the return activation process is ended.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95 (c), the initial start-up process will be described. When the initial activation process is started, in step S301, initialization of soft random numbers is performed. Specifically, initial setting of soft random numbers used in a drawing of a special drawing or a drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the address after the storage area for which initialization has been performed in step S301 is set as an address to start RAM clearing, and then the initial activation process is ended.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initial startup process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , And sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, the RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, the sub control related activation setting is performed. In this sub control related activation setting, the setting for the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 is performed, and in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 transmits a sub command to the first sub control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting the initial value of the sub control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, symbol data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, winning ball signal, blowout signal, common motorized part (second special view starting port 232, electric chow) in operation signal, blowout operation Medium signal, easy-to-win status signal, special signal per signal, special figure small hit signal (but limited to small hit models only), special figure fluctuating signal, special figure fluctuation time shortening status signal, special electric character (variable prize) Port 234, attacker) operating signal, condition device operating signal, character continuous operating device operating signal, big winning port solenoid signal, ordinary electric character solenoid signal, symbol LED data, external terminal board signal etc. are set Set the output port etc. Further, after the process of step S111 is finished, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop process. Here, the easy-to-win state may indicate a power support state.

  Next, main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. It is a flowchart of main control part main loop processing.

  When the main control unit 300 completes the execution of the main control power-on process described above, next, in step S401 of the main control unit main loop processing that starts the execution of the main control unit main loop processing, After setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value update processing, processing is performed to update the initial value of the special drawing determination random number counter and the initial value generation random number counter for generating the initial value of the common drawing determination random number counter. For updating the initial value generation random number counter, for example, assuming that a numerical value range that can be taken as a basic random number value is 0 to 20, acquire a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and add 1 to the acquired value. Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting of the interruption permission is performed, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, processing such as transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, the other determination random number update process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the random number for special map fluctuation time determination and the random number for common drawing fluctuation time determination is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9 V). Yes: return to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and if less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), proceed to step S408. In step S408, power-off processing is performed. In this power-off process, the power supply status information is set to "suspend" after being set to interrupt prohibition. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the predetermined storage of the RAM 308 Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting for prohibiting access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is established.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of a main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In steps S502 and S503, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special control number random number counter used by the main control unit 300 , And the random number counter for determining the special drawing fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the common fluctuation period. For example, assuming that a numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. In the random number counter storage area of At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a previously obtained initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a result of acquiring a value from a random number counter which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the acquired value If the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter, and the random number counter next turns In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 may be separately provided.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation is in progress (whether or not the first sub control unit 400 is activated), and in the interrupt function limitation (first sub control unit 400 is not activated). (Step S504: YES), the process proceeds to step S519, and if the interrupt function is not limited (if the first sub control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, interrupt function limitation means that the start waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bi-directional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether it is activated or not, and the first sub-control unit 400 If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in the present embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the first special drawing display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined open period And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port status update process, the special view start port (first special view start port 230, second special view start port 232), the common view start port 228, the out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence or absence of signal input related to switches such as the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 and the winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning to the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is erased as the winning is invalid.

  In step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning a prize winning process, the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous second detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-mentioned step S507, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a winning when detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. In the case where the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, it may be determined that there is a winning.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In this step S507, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228.

  For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  Further, in the winning opening winning processing of step S508, the winning opening counter updating processing is also performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning on the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the special view 2 starting opening 232, the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening The value of the award ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original award ball number storage area.

  Further, in the winning opening winning process of step S508, a winning reception process is also performed. In this winning reception process, whether or not there is a winning to the first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232, the common drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234 matches the winning determination pattern information It makes a decision using the decision result of When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  Also, when there is a winning on the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 2 winning value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. While obtaining as a random number value, a value is obtained as a special figure 2 random number value from a random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in a corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening. In addition, when the random number of the special drawing is acquired, the special drawing pre-reading process (the pass / fail judgment, the symbol, the pre-reading lottery of the fluctuation time) is also performed. The details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  In step S509, a prize related error check process is performed. In this prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process of setting an anomaly according to the processing result is performed. Note that some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, out switch input update processing is performed. In this out switch input updating process, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for presentation.

  In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In this serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. Note that, as a command that the main control unit 300 transmits to the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600) transmitted after the start waiting time of the first sub-control unit 400 after power on has elapsed. , And a winning ball number command instructing payout of gaming balls for a designated winning ball.

  In addition, as a command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test shot test signal Commands (including award ball signal output request) and commands including information on the occurrence status of a payout error (including no error), and prize ball payout operation status commands (prize ball payout operation in progress / non-operation There is a command to indicate, or an indication (indicating lighting or non-lighting such as an LED) to the first sub control unit 400 to indicate that dispensing is in progress.

  Next, in step S512, a special figure status update process is performed on the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special view state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S513, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either one of the hit symbol and the off symbol. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update process in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

  Also, in step S513, a common drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, and when a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In this external output signal management process, a process of preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this subcommand management process, preparation for transmitting various commands to the first secondary control unit 400 is performed. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, big hit start command, big hit round number specification command, power recovery command, Information which can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special drawing related lottery process, etc. In the case of the change stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special view probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special view probability change flag etc. In the case of the jackpot round number specification command, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning on the variable winning opening 234, a special winning opening winning command is set.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process stored in the command data in the RAM 308 are selected. The information which shows the number of the made timer number, the 1st special figure fluctuation game or 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are kept is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described prize effect setting transmission process, the symbol data stored in the RAM 308 as command data is outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game stand frame lamp 452, the speaker 120 during the prize effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set.

  Further, in the above-mentioned termination effect setting transmission processing, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game stand frame lamp 452 and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period Information indicating the effect control information to be played, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. At step S516, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S517, display display setting processing is performed. In this indicator display setting process, for displays such as “number of holding balls, symbol combination”, status (during power support or non power support), right-handed status, etc. (lighting pattern of LED) Perform processing such as setting data to be output. In step S518, an output management process is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or an LED, and a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600 are performed.

  In step S519, a sub control start wait process is performed. In this sub control start wait wait process, the start wait counter of the sub control is decremented by 1 and this start wait counter becomes 0 in order to wait for the first sub control unit 400 to be started and to be in the communicable state. If it does, prepare to send a predetermined command. Note that as the predetermined command, any one or more commands of a power on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been cleared, a bottom error has occurred) There is a command that indicates that there is an error that indicates that the payout ball number error is in an occurrence state, a main control communication error command (a command that indicates that the communication with the payout control unit 600 is abnormal), a CR unit disconnection error Is a generation state, and a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state).

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S501 are set to the original registers, and the interrupt permission setting is performed, and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

  In step S601, acquisition and storage of the special view processing state address are performed, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special view processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value that the special view processing state indicates, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 99 (a) described later, the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 100, the special figure shown in FIG. The display confirmation weight processing, the hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 102 (a), the special electric power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 103, the special electric power combination residual ball detection processing shown in FIG. 106, the special electric power combination operation end processing shown in FIG. One of the processes shown is executed.

  In step S603, the winning a prize status is set to ON. In step S604, the state change of the special drawing processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, the presence or absence of the state change of the special drawing processing state (change of the value indicated by the special drawing processing state) is determined. If there is no state change of the state (if the value indicated by the special view processing state does not change) (step S605: No), the special view state update processing is ended, and there is a state change of the special view processing state. If it is determined that the value indicated by the special view processing state is changing (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the special processing state is set to "variation waiting state". If it is applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if it is not applicable (step S606) : No), it progresses to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether the special view processing state is set to "hit start display wait state", and if applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and does not correspond (No Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is ended.

  In step S608, the transmission request for the sub-command is set (in the present embodiment, after setting the transmission request for the gaming state command including the gaming state for the special drawing and the drawing), the firing position including information on whether or not the right hitting state After setting the transmission request of the command), the special figure state update processing is ended. Note that the order of transmission requests for sub-commands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests for a plurality of commands may be performed at once in one process.

  Subsequently, the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 99 (a). FIG. 99 (a) is a flowchart of a special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

  The special figure related lottery process is a process which is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update processing.

  In step S701 of the special drawing related lottery process, the special figure 2 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether the acquired special figure 2 holding ball number is 0 or not (If there is no suspension of the special figure 2 change game) (step S702: Yes), proceed to step S703, and if other than 0 (if there is a suspension of the special figure 2 change game) (step S702: No) In order to execute the process relating to the special figure 2, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S703, the special figure 1 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether the acquired special figure 1 holding ball number is 0 or not, and in the case of 0 (special figure 1 When there is no suspension of the change game (step S704: Yes), the special drawing related lottery process is ended, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a suspension of the special view 1 change game) (step S704: No) In order to execute the process relating to Special Figure 1, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S 705, when the process relating to the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1 and when the process relating to the special figure 1 is executed, The value of the special figure 1 reservation ball number memorized is subtracted one. In step S706, special figure random number migration processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process relating to the special figure 2 is executed, the random numbers stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the holds 2 to 4 of the special figure 2 When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 of the special figure 2 and executing the processing related to the special figure 1, it corresponds to the hold 2 to 4 of the special figure 1 The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the retentions 1 to 3 of the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the retention 4 of the special figure 1 is cleared. Thus, the game console (pachinko machine) in the present embodiment is a special view 2 priority variable machine. In addition, each of Toku 2 and Toku 1 can store up to four reservations.

  In step S 707, a lottery process is performed per special image. Although the details will be described later, in the lottery process per special drawing, the success or failure judgment of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game (or special drawing 1 fluctuation game) is performed. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table (or the special figure 1 symbol determination table), based on the result of the special figure lottery process in step S 707 and the random number value, the second special figure The lottery of the special view display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special view display device 212) is performed.

  Fig. 110 (a) is a view showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and Fig. 110 (b) is a view showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is determined in the display symbol lottery process of step S 708, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. The display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected based on the result of success or failure of FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  When the display symbol data of the special figure 2 is determined in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (b) is referred to, and the lottery process per special figure of step S707 is performed. The display symbol data of the special figure 2 is drawn based on the result of the special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, symbol data to be displayed on the special view display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in display display setting processing (step S517) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and control to display on the special image display device is performed. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined, and if there is a loss, the present process ends.

  When the determined symbol (pattern type information) is a symbol of a big hit or a small hit, a process of setting data to be set to the hit end (data setting process after the hit end) is performed. The post-hit data setting process is a process of setting a gaming state to be set after the hit according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 99 (a), in step S709, a special figure fluctuation time lottery process is performed. In this special figure fluctuation time lottery process, referring to a fluctuation time table (not shown), based on the success or failure result of the special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the lottery process per special figure in step S707, and the numerical value range of random numbers. After the timer for the special figure fluctuation time is selected, the special figure related lottery process is ended.

<Lottery processing per special feature>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99 (b), the drawing per lot drawing process (step S707) will be described. FIG. 99 (b) is a flow chart of a drawing per lottery special process (step S707) in the special drawing related lottery process.

  In step S801 of the lottery process per special drawing, a lottery per special drawing is performed with reference to the success / failure determination table. In the present embodiment, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 both perform lottery per special drawing using the same judgment table, but different special judgment tables for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are used. It may be prepared.

  FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for pass / fail determination, and FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for pass / fail determination. In the case where the special drawing high probability state of special drawing 1 is determined in the drawing process per special drawing per step S801, the special drawing high probability state shown in FIG. 109 (a) is referred to in the special drawing high probability state. In the case of the low probability state, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 109 (b) is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the big hit, the small hit or the loss is selected as the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  In addition, also when making a pass / fail determination of the special view 2 in the lottery process per special view per step S801, similarly, when it is in the special view high probability state, refer to the high probability table for the pass / fail judgment shown in FIG. In the case of the special figure low probability state, the probability determination low probability table shown in FIG. 109 (b) is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a big hit or a loss is selected as a result of the pass / fail determination.

  Referring back to FIG. 99 (b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery on the special drawing in step S801 (lottery result) is other than "big hit", and in the case other than "big hit" (step S802 : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of a "big hit" (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, the small hit determination process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 109C is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery process of step S803, referring to the small hitting determination table shown in FIG. 109 (c), the special drawing is performed based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hitting determination table and the acquired random number value. Select the success or failure judgment result of the small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result, and the loss is lost with the probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected.

  Referring back to FIG. 99 (b), in step S804, the RAM 308 is selected based on the special result per unit drawing determination result (lottery result) of step S801 and the special result per unit drawing determination result (lottery result) of step S803. The information on any one of "big hit", "small hit" and "lost" is set in the success / failure determination type stored in. In the next step S805, information indicating "during special figure variation" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 100 is called and executed.

  In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in RAM 308 is cleared, and in the next step S807, a transmission request for a sub command (special figure variation start command) is set, and in the next step S808, the special figure After setting basic signal information (for test) indicating that 2 (or special figure 1) is moving, the lottery process per special figure is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the symbol variation in-progress process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of symbol fluctuation processing which is executed in the special figure state update processing. The symbol changing process is a process which is called and executed when the information set in the special view processing state indicates “special figure changing” in step 602 of the special view state update process.

  In step S901 of the symbol change processing, the special view operation type (special view 1 or special view 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the RAM to be updated is calculated according to the special view operation type. .

  In step S902, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901, the timer for the special drawing fluctuation time set in step S709 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired, and is it 0? It is determined whether or not. As a result of the determination, when the timer for the special figure fluctuation time is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is not 0 (the special figure fluctuation time set If (1) has not passed (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether it is not the update timing of the special figure display symbol, and if it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the processing during symbol variation is ended, and the case of the update timing (step S903: No) ), Go to step S904. In step S904, the special figure display symbol data is updated, and then the symbol change processing is ended.

  By this special view display symbol data update processing, in the case of the special view 1, using the first special view display device 212, all the seven segments and all the lighting of one central segment are repeated. The variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, and in the case of the special figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. The variable display of the special figure 2 is performed.

  In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. Do. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure display finalization wait process shown in FIG. 101 is called and executed.

  In step S 907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S 908, basic signal information (for test) indicating that the variation stop of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is set is set, and the next step In S909, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and the symbol determination frequency information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

  In step S910, a transmission request for a sub-command (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (symbol of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 94 (a) or Figure 94 (b) after acquiring the special figure 2 symbol), after setting the special figure display decision timer which shows the time which maintains the stop indication of the special figure on the basis of this pattern classification information, the figure Finish the process during fluctuation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the special view display determination weight process executed in the special view status update process will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the special chart display determination weight process executed in the special chart state update process. This special view display determination wait process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special view process state indicates “the special view display wait state” in step S602 of the special view state update process. It is.

  In step S1001 of the special view display determination weight process, it is determined whether or not the special view display determination timer set in step S911 of the symbol variation processing is larger than 0, and is larger than 0 (special view display determination time If it has not elapsed (step S1001: Yes), the special view display determination weight process is ended, otherwise (when the special view display determination time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 Go to

  In step S1002, the symbol determination number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol variation processing is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special figure variation time shortening status (special figure variation game at symbol stop) The status (in the present embodiment, a status indicating a normal gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, or a short game state gaming state) is stored in the RAM 308 as a storage special view fluctuation time shortening status described later.

  In step S1004, the yes or no determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing-related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1005, it is determined whether the acquired yes or no determination type is "big hit". As a result of this determination, if the success or failure determination type is "big hit" (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the success or failure determination type is other than "big hit" (step S1005: No), the procedure proceeds to step S1006. The process advances, and the time saving number of the special figure stored in the RAM 308 is updated (one time saving number is subtracted).

  In step S1007, the win determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1008, it is determined whether the obtained win determination type is "small hit". As a result of this determination, if the success or failure determination type is "small hit" (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the success or failure determination type is other than "small hit" (step S1008: No), step The process advances to step S1009 to set information indicating the "variation waiting state" in the special view processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 99 (a) is called and executed.

  In step S1010, basic signal information (for a test) indicating a special drawing compliance type or a symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, the RAM clear of the designated range is executed. Here, the type of success, the number of times of operation of special electric combination, the number of winnings of the special winning opening (variable winning opening 234), the operation pattern of special electric combination, the operating status of special electric combination, the total number of winnings, the flag regarding winning abnormality of the special opening, In addition to clearing the information such as the hit end display timer type, and at the time of a big hit, it further clears the status of easy-to-win prizes and the status of special-purpose chart.

  In step S1012, information indicating "hit start display wait state" is set in the special view processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start wait process shown in FIG. 102 (a) is called and executed. In step S1013, the hit total winning number is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request for a sub command (hit start command) is set.

  In step S1015, symbol type information is set, in step S1016 a hit start display timer is set according to the symbol type information set in step S1015, and in step S1017 according to the symbol type information set in step S1015, After setting the other information signal setting type, the special view display finalizing weight process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (a), the hit start weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart of a hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process. The hit start wait process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special view process state indicates "hit start display wait state" in step S602 of the special view state update process. .

  In step S1101 of hit start wait processing, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1016 of the special view display confirmed wait process is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0 (the special view display fixed time has elapsed If not (step S1101: YES), the hit start weight processing is ended, and if not (if the special view display determination time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, a hit start wait process is ended after executing a special electric power set release process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the special electric power release processing (step S1102) in the hit start weight processing will be described. FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart of a special electric power role release process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process.

  In step S1201 of the special electric power officer release process, information indicating the "special electric power special role operating state" is set in the special view processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric wire combination actuation process shown in FIG. 103 is called and executed.

  In step S1202, the value of the winning number of the special winning opening in the RAM 308 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control portion winning counter") and the operation status of the special electric combination are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the sub command ( Set the transmission request of the role release command). Thereby, the first secondary control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special view display finalizing weight process is acquired, and in the next step S1205, the electric power combination operation pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. For example, as shown in FIG. 105 (a-1) to FIG. 105 (a-3), the special electric power combination operation pattern data tables are prepared for the number of types of special characters that are big hit and small hit. FIG. 105 exemplarily shows only a part of them. In the special command operation pattern data table, special command operation data indicating an open / close pattern of the variable winning opening 234 for each round is stored. As shown in FIG. 105 (b-1) to FIG. (B-3), the special power role operating data includes information (open timer pattern, closed timer pattern) indicating the open / close state of the variable winning opening 234, open state or One or more pieces of timer pattern data consisting of information on the time to maintain the closed state (SEP / CR open / close timer) is stored. As a result, various variations can be given to the opening and closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 in one round.

  For example, in the big hit game at the time of big hit in the special figure A, as shown in FIG. 105 (a-1), in the 1Rth to 15Rth, the special electric charge operating data 1 shown in FIG. 105 (b-1) is referred After the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 29500 ms by the release timer pattern 2, the variable winning opening 234 is controlled to be closed by the closing timer pattern 3 so that the operation is ended.

  Moreover, in the big hit game at the time of big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. 105 (a-2), in the 1Rth to 4Rth eyes, the 6Rth to 8Rth eyes, and the 10Rth to 15Rth, the above-mentioned special power role operation is performed. While the data 1 is referred to and the operation as described above is performed, in the 5th and 9th eyes, the special service combination operation data 4 shown in FIG. 105 (b-3) is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is It is controlled. That is, at the 5th and 9th eyes, the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the variable winning opening 234 is maintained closed for only 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1 four times After that, the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 17500 ms by the opening timer pattern 3, and thereafter, the variable winning opening 234 is controlled by the closing timer pattern 3 so as to end the operation.

  Moreover, in the big hit game at the time of big hit in the special image E, as shown in FIG. 105 (a-3), in the 1R to 4R eyes, the above-mentioned operation is performed with reference to the above-mentioned special power combination operation data 1 On the other hand, at the 5th to 15th eyes, the open / close operation of the variable winning opening 234 is controlled with reference to the special electric power comb operation data 2 shown in FIG. 105 (b-2). That is, in the fifth to fifteenth eyes, the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the variable winning opening 234 is maintained closed for 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1, and then the closing timer pattern 3 controls the variable winning opening 234 to be maintained in the closed state as it is and to end the operation. Note that another closure pattern timer (for example, the closure pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closure pattern timer 3 is set.

  In step S1206, the number of times of operation (number of rounds) of the special electric combination is acquired, and in the next step S1207, the number of times of operation (number of rounds) of the acquired special electric combination is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special power combination operation data corresponding to the number of times of operation (round number) of the special power combination after updating is read out to set the operation pattern of the special power combination. Then, in step S1209, a special electric power control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1210, the special electric power combination release process is ended after clearing the winning detection timer of the special electric power combination.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a special electric power set operation process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of a special electric power role activation process executed in the special view state update process. This special electric power comb operation processing is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special drawing processing state indicates the “special electric power comb operational state” in step S602 of the special view state update processing.

  In step S1301 of the special electric power winning process, the maximum winning number stored in the RAM 308 is obtained, and in step S1302, the winning number stored in the RAM 308 is obtained. In step S1303, the acquired maximum winning number is compared with the winning number, and it is determined whether the winning number is smaller than the maximum winning number, and if smaller (if the number of winnings <maximum winning number) (step S1303) The processing proceeds to step S1304, and otherwise (if the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (No at step S1303), the processing proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special on / off timer corresponding to the on / off timer pattern being executed or the on / off timer pattern set in step S1208 of the on board special processing is larger than 0 (if it is greater If the open / close timer has not elapsed (step S1304: YES), the special electric power combination operation processing is ended, otherwise (if the special electric power combination open / close timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 Go to In step S1305, a special power control control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1306, a special power combination open / close timer pattern is acquired, and in the next step S1307, a closed timer pattern of the acquired special power combination open / close timer patterns. It is determined whether the special electric power combination is in operation (whether the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) or not.

  As a result of the determination, if the special electric power combination is in operation (when the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special electric power combination activation process is ended, When the special power combination is not in operation (when the closing timer pattern is set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the "remaining sphere detection state" is set in the special view processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special battery remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 106 is called and executed.

  In step S1309, the special charge operating interval timer stored in RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, the other information signal transmission determination timer is cleared, and in step S1311, the transmission request for the sub command (big winning opening closing command) Set

  In step S1312, the special service winning combination detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric power winning combination detection timer is a timer for effectively detecting the game ball remaining inside the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) after closing the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234). It is. In step S1313, the drive signal (big winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the big winning opening (variable winning opening 234) is set to OFF, and the special electric power charging process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 changes into the entry difficulty state when there is a passage of the game balls of the maximum winning number to the passing area after entering the entry easy state. It functions as an example of the variable winning means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a special electric power person control process (steps S1209 and S1305) executed in the special electric power hand-off process and the special electric power hand-off process will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of a special electric power control process executed in the special electric power hand-off process and the special electric power hand-off process.

  In step S1401, the special power control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired among the operation patterns of the special electric combination to be executed, which is set and the special electric wire operating data is read out and set in step S1208 of the special electric wire release processing. Do. For example, the operation pattern of the special electric combination shown in the special electric combination operation data 1 is set, and if it is the start of the round, “open timer pattern 2 shown in“ (1) ”in FIG. "" Control data will be acquired. After the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 105 (b-1) is completed, “the closing timer indicated by“ (2) ”in FIG. 105 (b-1) is completed. The control data of “pattern 3” will be acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S1402, open / close information indicating whether to open or close the variable winning opening 234 is acquired based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination. For example, if the "opening timer pattern", data (opening information) for opening the variable winning opening 234 is obtained, and if the "closing timer pattern", data (closing the variable winning opening 234 (closing) Get information).

  Then, in step S1403, based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination obtained in step S1401 and the open / close information acquired in step S1402, the open / close timer of the special electric combination is acquired. For example, when the "open timer pattern 2" is acquired and the open / close information is "open information", a 29500 ms open timer is acquired. Also, when “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “closing information”, a closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

  In step S 1404, information indicating acceptance of the special service winning or not allowed state stored in the RAM 308 is set. It is possible to accept that the game ball has passed the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 of the variable winning opening 234) provided in the variable winning opening when the information indicating that the special electric power winning combination state is acceptable is set. If the information indicating that the game is not accepted is set, the game ball is invalidated even if it passes through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1) provided in the variable winning opening. In step S1405, special electric power combination signal information (signal for test) is set, and in step S1406, update preparation of the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, after setting the special power combination open timer or special power combination closing timer of the special power combination open / close timer, the special power combination control process is ended. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the special electric power remaining ball detection process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart of the special electric power remaining ball detection process executed in the special view state update process. This special electric wire remaining ball detection process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special view processing state indicates the “remaining ball detection state” in step S602 of the special view state update processing. is there.

  In step S1501 of the special battery residual ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special battery operation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special battery operation process is in operation. If it is not (step S1501: Yes), the processing for detecting the special electric power remaining ball is ended, otherwise (when the special electric power operating interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), to step S1502 move on.

  In step S1502, a special electric power combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating the special electric power combination operation end state is set in the special view processing state. As a result, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric power combination operation end process shown in FIG. 107 is called and executed. That is, it becomes the state of the interval between rounds.

  In step S1504, after the special electric power combination signal information (signal for test) is cleared, the special electric power combination residual ball detection process is ended. Note that a sub-command transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after clearing the special electric power combination signal information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the special electric power combination operation end process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of a special electric power role operation end process executed in the special view state update process. This special electric power role operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special electric power processing state indicates the “special electric power role operation end state” in step S602 of the special figure state update processing. is there.

  In step S1601 of the special service operator operation end process, it is determined whether the special battery operator operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special electric battery remaining ball detection process is operating or not (step S1601: Yes) , And ends the special service operation termination process, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol hit / not type is a small hit, and if it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), corresponds to the small hit in step S1603. After obtaining the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, when the special design compliance type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number of times is set to the number of large winning opening opening maximum stored in the RAM 308. In step S1605, the special winning opening maximum opening frequency is compared with the special electric power officer opening frequency, and it is determined whether the special electric power opening number is less than the special winning opening maximum opening number, that is, whether the hit is not ended. . If the hit has not ended (step S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special power release processing, and the special power termination control process is finished. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, if the hit has ended (step S1605: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, a hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired, and in step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating "hit end display wait state" is set in the special view processing state. Thus, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display wait process shown in FIG. 108 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting the transmission request of the sub command (hit end command), the special electric power comb operation end processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process. The hit end display wait process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special view process state indicates "hit end display wait state" in step S602 of the special view state update process. is there.

  In step S1701 of the hit end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1608 of the special power role operation end process is operating, and if it is operating (step S1701: Yes), The hit end display weight process is ended, and if not (step S1701: NO), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in the predetermined area of RAM 308 is saved in the stack area, and in step S1703 the basic signal information (for test) is cleared, and in step S1704 the "special variation processing state" Set information indicating "waiting status". Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 99 (a) is called and executed.

  In step S1705 to step S1707, the display symbol data, the symbol type information, and the hit total winning number are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the small hit has ended. If the small hit has ended (step S1709: Yes), the hit end display wait process If it ends and ends other than a small hit (if it ends in a big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

  In step S1710, setting data (certain variation, short time, hiding probability variation) is acquired after hitting, and in step S1711, data according to setting data after hitting (probable change status (special map probability status status, general drawing probability status status) Time reduction number (special figure fluctuation time shortening fluctuation number, fluctuation time correction fluctuation number, easy winning state fluctuation number), time saving status (special figure fluctuation time shortening status, general drawing fluctuation time shortening status, open extension status), fluctuation time lottery The state (information for determining the fluctuation time lottery table, etc.) is set, and after the hit and finish setting data is cleared, the hit end display weight process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of game control means capable of executing a big hit game.

  Next, the special view prefetching process in the winning opening winning process of step S508 shown in FIG. 97 will be described.

  FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of special drawing prefetching processing. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 112 (a) to (c)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information in the special view 2 is increasing (step S508a). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508b, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508b, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value set) is added to the special figure 2 random number value storage area prior to the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Read ahead from. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 109, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the display symbol lottery process S 708 in the special drawing related lottery process indicated by 99. Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S508c following step S508b, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetching result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508 d, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508 e. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S508 e, based on various flags in the RAM 308, it is determined whether or not non-power-up. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power-supply mode, the process proceeds to step S508f, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power-supply mode (that is, it is in the power-supply mode), Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S508f, the special figure 1 start information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value set) is added to the special figure 1 random value storage area prior to the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Read ahead from. Then, using the prefetched special view 1 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 109, and the special symbol symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110, the stop symbol of the special view 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the display symbol lottery process S 708 in the special drawing related lottery process indicated by 99. Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S508g following step S508f, stop symbol information as the special view 1 prefetching result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S508h, without pre-reading the special view 1 start information that has been increased, “not determined” information indicating that the start information is not read ahead is replaced with the stop symbol information and the special view 1 read-ahead result storage in the RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S405), only the pre-reading result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-reading result storage All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 111, prefetching is always executed for the start information of the special figure 2 that has increased, and prefetching is always performed for the start information of the special figure 1 that has increased, except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 112 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 112A shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (a), "special figure I" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure I" as stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 112 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 2 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (b), "special figure f" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG. 112 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 112 (c) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit during power support. As shown in FIG. 112 (c), "not determined" information is stored in the storage area "pending 1" instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result and the special map fluctuation time are determined in advance, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and as the prefetch result information in the first sub control unit 400 Can be sent.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 113A is a flowchart of the main process performed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S4001 of FIG. 113 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S4001, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S4003 following step S4001, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4005. . In step S4005, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S4007 following step S4005, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S4009 following step S4007, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S4007, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S4011 following step S4009, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S4009 according to the detection result is the effect data according to the operation of the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 Perform processing to change to.

  In step S4013 following step S4011, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S4009, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S4015 following step S4013, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 442 or the game stand frame lamp 452 among the effect data read out in the step S4009, the command is applied to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game board It outputs to the lamp drive circuit 450 for the frame.

  In step S4017 following step S4015, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in the step S4009, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S4019 following step S4017, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S4009, the setting to output this control command is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S4003.

  FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S4031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 113C is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S4041 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4003 of the first secondary control unit main process and the original timer variable storage area is stored Do. Therefore, in step S4003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S4043 following step S4041, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S4019) of the first sub-control unit main process, and update processing of random values for other effects Etc.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 114A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S5001 of FIG. 114 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S5001, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S5003 following step S5001, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5005. . In step S5005, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S5007 following step S5005, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S5009 following step S5007, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S5007, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S5011 following step S5009, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 516 in the effect data read out in the step S5009, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S5003.

  FIG. 114B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S5031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 114 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second secondary control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S5041 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S5003 of the second sub control unit main process and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S5003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S5043 following step S5041, other processing for updating the effect random number is performed.

  FIG. 114 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S5011 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S5051, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S5053 following step S5051, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S5053: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5055. If not (step S5053: NO), the process waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5055, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table, the attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S5051, the CPU 504 information of image data forming the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.). The VDP 516 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5057 following step S5055, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S5059 following step S5057, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S5059: Yes), The process proceeds to step S5061. If not (step S5059: NO), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5061, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 115 (a) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 115 (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a), the front side of the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part is not visible. . In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right of the lower part of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. In the first UI unit 280, a variation icon display area is provided on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is disposed in the variation icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 can be displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal h0s. When the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, it is informed that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. When the symbol determination display is in progress, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and for example, performs advance notice display or pre-reading notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In addition, the navigation character YM may not always be displayed, and a specific advance notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, advance notice, advance notice in the symbol change display, N suspension of the symbol change display are stored) It may be displayed at the time of the effect etc. displayed at the time, or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 115 (a), since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), the display mode according to the progress of the game May change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area to the change icon display area, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or it is expressed that the change icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified. The variation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  At the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (FIG. 5) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is displayed stopped. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (here, "4" and "0") of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, positive change state, hidden positive change state, short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly.

  In addition, a household crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be vertically moved or rotated according to the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 115 (a), the family crest 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-scale behavior character 224Ga on which the characters of "large" are applied, and a second on which the characters of "panel" are applied A large-scale behavior character item 224 Gb, a third large-scale behavior character item 224 Gc to which the characters “振” are given, and a fourth large-scale behavior character object 224 G d to which the characters “to dance” are given are arranged. Each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavior character item 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character article 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, light emitting means such as a full color LED is internally incorporated in the first large screen behavior character object 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior character article 224 Gd, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  Also, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a one-handed box character 224H which is one of the effect movable bodies is disposed, and is configured to be able to move up and down according to the contents of the effect . The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the one-man box product 224H, light emitting means such as a full color LED is built in, and light can be emitted in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest 224E, the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, and the one-sided box character 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion to emit light in a predetermined pattern in the transmission region. It is configured to be able to look like In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115 (a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special drawing symbol is stopped, but is blinked or turned off while the special drawing symbol is changing. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L, and the height of the display area is slightly short. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right end side portion overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left end side portion 1) It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the rendering operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not have to be configured to be able to be all performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, they may be fixed). In addition, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or, the rendering operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform rendering operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs rendering operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate the decorative symbols in the display devices in a variable manner, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered by the decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a portion thereof can not be viewed. In addition, a decoration member may be comprised by transparency and the outer peripheral part of 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L may also be comprised so that visual recognition is possible. Also, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, and the general view hold lamp 216 are illustrated. It is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal hs0, and notifies that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a navigation character YM consisting of a character of the lord is displayed. In the second UI unit 281, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 115 (b), since four variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13 and h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In FIG. 115 (b), the variation icon h0 and the four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), but the game progressed Depending on the display mode may change. By this, it is possible to perform advance notice display and advance notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". And in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" It is displayed stopped by the combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol Some or all of the symbol combinations (one or two decorative symbols match) may be unmatched. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed in different decorative symbol display devices in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7 segments, an LED, a dot matrix display device, etc.) It may be done. In addition, the second number-of-holds display may display the number of holdings of only one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 and displays the number of holdings of both the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 It is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability changing state, a hiding probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates the background display corresponding to the mode that can be set by the user, the background display performed as the advance notice or the advance notice in the symbol variation display, and the background display not related to the result of the determination. In addition, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a positive change state, a hidden positive change state, and a short time state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, it changes in order like background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A → ... etc. Here, the rule is In the case of collapse, it may be made a notice (premiere notice) of a big hit decision.) The order may be changed randomly. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be a frameless form. Also, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate vertically according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 115 (b), although the family crest 224E is located at the initial position, the initial position of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. Although the portion is at a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set at an appropriate position.

  Also, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned one-handed box character 224H is disposed, and can be moved up and down according to the contents of the effect. The one thousand box character article 224H is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices It is made possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest 224E and the one-piece box character 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The action of each effect movable body is made visible.

  Further, in FIG. 115 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an example of effects using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a) or FIG. 115 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect that can be applied in the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 116 (A1) to 116 (A2) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 116 (A1), when the first to fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H operate, the embodiment shown in FIG. 116 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large-screen behavior character set 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior graphic object 224 Gd are such that the characters of "large", "panel", "shou", and "mai" are first turned to the front Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the one-man box character item 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, the one thousand box box character object 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement character article 224Gd, and the first large box movement character article 224Ga to the fourth large box movement box object 224Gd is a one thousand box box product It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. The one thousand box character article 224H may be configured not to overlap with the front side of the first large board behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character article 224Gd. In addition, the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd may be disposed on the front side of the one thousand box character article 224H and configured to overlap the one thousand box character article 224H.

  In FIG. 116 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 or various lamps may be lowered to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .

  FIGS. 116 (C1) to 116 (C4) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 116 (C1) to (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set at an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 has a lift arm and an LED array rotatably mounted on the tip of the lift arm. The raising and lowering arm can perform raising and lowering operations by, for example, a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row, and the horizontally extending attitude is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the lift arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extension direction. The first sub control unit 400 (or the second sub control unit 500) controls lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array one by one based on Versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing this, the light emission aspect of the plurality of LEDs changes while the LED array is rotating, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a picture is displayed. Moreover, although POV display 224I is arrange | positioned more front side than the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd and the one-man box goods thing 224H, the anteroposterior relation of these production movable bodies is suitably It can be set.

  FIG. 116 (C1) shows that the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude.

  FIG. 116 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I lifts the LED array by the lift arm, and the LED array overlaps on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 116 (C3) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating its rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts to rotate, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. In addition, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and it is considered that they are difficult to visually recognize while the LED array is rotating.

  FIG. 116 (C4) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the word "heat" is displayed, and a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is being performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. It is also good. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed in dark.

  In FIG. 116 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlights and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

  FIGS. 116 (E1) to 116 (E2) show that the family crest 224E is operating in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (E1), the family crest 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14 and the navi character YM, The visual recognition is made more difficult than in the case where at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14 and the navigation character YM do not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (E2), the family crest 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. The present invention is also applicable to the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a).

  In FIG. 116 (F1), in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), a state is shown in which one thousand box character 224H is operating. Specifically, it is shown that the one-handed box character 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 116 (F1), it is considered that the first decorative symbol is less visible than in the non-overlapped state because the one-handed box character 224H is overlapped. In this rendering example, when the one-and-two box character 224H operates, the family crest 224E is not operated so that the two-and-one box character 224H and the family crest 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the one thousand box character article 224H and the family crest article 224E are in operation. In addition, when the one-man box character item 224H operates, a retraction operation may be performed to move the household crest item 224E further downward.

  In FIG. 116 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slide-moved so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The scroll display is done together. That is, in the background image, an area which is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereby, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the no. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward, The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 116 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  FIGS. 116 (I1) to 116 (I2) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 116 (I1) to FIG. (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest 224E. In the timing shown in FIG. 116 (I1), the state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial attitude is shown.

  In FIG. 116 (I2), after the POV display 224I is moved from the initial position to a position where the LED array overlaps the front side substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array is rotated and a fixed rotation is performed. It is shown that the speed is reached and the constant speed rotation is performed, and the word "heat" is displayed.

  In FIG. 116 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol is displayed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown to be displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIGS. 116 (K1) to 116 (K4) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 116 (K1) to (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 116 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at initial positions.

  FIG. 116 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide to a position where they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are scrolled along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are matched to the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, it is possible to perform display with a sense of unity by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As shown in FIG. 116 (K2), the family crest 224E is moved downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 116 (K2 '), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. In addition, the family crest 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are being operated. You may vibrate while rotating.

  In FIG. 116 (K3) to FIG. (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other, along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that it is integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 116 (K4) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged such that the images respectively displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N rotate in the direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the displayed image is not rotating although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating.

  FIG. 116 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 116 (L1), the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (pending frame) described above are displayed. That is, in the sub display device 208S, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the right side below the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right to the left, but a part is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the sub It is considered to be more difficult to view than in the case where the display device 208S is not overlapped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 116 (L1 '), a display image (a background image, a character SBH of Sabohani, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  FIG. 116 (M1) shows operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd. That is, the sub display device 208S is moved from the initial position to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to overlap at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 large behavior character objects 224 Ga ~ 4 nd large behavior character objects 224 Gd, after rotating each of the characters of "large", "panel", "振", "mai" to the front, decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side substantially at the center of the. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, which shows that a predetermined advance notice effect or a prefetch advance notice effect is performed. ing.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. Here, FIG. 117 is a view showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 118 shows a stage following the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 in a step-by-step manner, and FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the steps of another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 117, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, the special view 2 hold lamp 220, the general view hold A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display 284 are shown. Although the following description is made by applying the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (a), it is also possible to apply the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b). Moreover, below, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the family crest item 224E, the 1st large board behavior character article 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character article 224Gd, the one-man box character article 224H, and the light-guide plate IL.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Note that although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (background image of the coast) as shown in FIG. 115 (a) is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed. Also, a second number-on-hold display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 4-decorative 1-decorative 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 117 is a special figure low probability common figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the second UI unit 281 displays the reserve icon of the special view 1. In addition, the pending | holding icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in the predetermined area (for example, right end of a display screen) of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 in a non-electric support state.

  The second UI unit 281 displays a holding icon indicating holding of the special view 1. The number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is also indicated by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 1 and the second number of reservations display, in addition to the number of lights in Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the holding lamp 220, the number of holding icons in the special view 2 and the display of the second number of holdings are also shown. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon whose winning is older.

  In FIG. 117 (1), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the second UI unit 281, and the reserved icons h11 and h12 of these two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (Round-shaped non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 117 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the reserved icons which are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 117 (1), the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines for easy explanation, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no reservation icon of Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 117 is the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult to open the power chute and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon for the special figure that is easy to win is displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the control state (playing state), and the reserve icon for the other special figure is displayed. It is made not to be displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power-supply state, as shown in FIG. 117 (1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of the special view 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon of the special view 2 is displayed and the hold icon of the special view 1 is not displayed. In the non-power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 2 may be displayed, or in the power-supply state, the hold icon of the special view 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is the start of variation on the special view display device → the start of blinking of the fourth symbol or the extinguishment → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the holding icon → decoration Although it is carried out in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbols, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 117 (2), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration is performed. There has been no change in the design yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 starts, the variation display of the fourth symbol The symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol starts.

  In FIG. 117 (3), the second number-of-retentions display is updated from 2 to 1, and it is shown that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. In addition, the update display of the second number-of-holds display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be simultaneously performed, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second number-of-holds display is performed The display may be started, or the update display of the second number-of-holds display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 117 (4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 is started. In the movement (reduction) animation here, the holding icon (the target holding icon for the symbol fluctuation this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is moved toward the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon in the first UI unit 280 At the same time as the start, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 115) of the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 . At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In FIG. 117 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 117 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. And the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first Display starts. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is ended, or The moving animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 117 (7) shows that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (8), it is shown that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice starts, a balloon in which the character of “good opportunity” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (9), it is shown that conversation announcement is started while navigation character announcement is being performed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. Further, in the navigation character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "good opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation to the big hit is further increased. In addition, the timing when the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing when the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed May be updated to "No", or the display of the balloon may be updated to "No", and the conversation image CI1 of the lady may be displayed. In addition, the effect (for example, "no") to be promoted to the notice (for example, "super heat") displayed after the notice (for example, "good opportunity") displayed first may be performed in some cases. . In addition, navigation character notices are not only notices in the symbol variation display, but also pre-reading notices, notices that give notice that a given notice is to be made, and explanation displays (characters that appear in various notices, game states, and pachinko machine 100 effects An explanation of the stage of the effect or the like, also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period It is composed of At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (10), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (10), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the other's conversation image CI2, and the Tonosama's conversation is more than in the non-overlapping state The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. Further, in the advance notice of the navigation character, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "no" to the character display of "superheat", and reports that the expectation to the big hit is considerably high. In addition, the display of the balloon overlaps a part of the conversation image CI2 of the user. Note that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "superheating", or after the conversation image CI2 of a whistle is displayed, The display may be updated to "superheat", or the dialog image CI2 of a whistle may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "superheat". As described above, in this example of the effect, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the Tonosama may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 117 (9) is displayed). It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (11). The player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 117 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 117 (12) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (13) It is shown that the person presses the chance button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (12), the advance notice of the navigation character is ended, and the display of the balloon is deleted. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 117 (14), in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows, the character of "It is intense heat" is displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May be Thereby, it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is quite high. In addition, the letter display of the notice such as “It is extremely heat” may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even if it has elapsed.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (15), the state of the first decorative symbol being made easy to recognize is that the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the spear have been erased and the conversation announcement has ended. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 117 (17), “decorative” is displayed on the right symbol. The 7 "stop display is made and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an indication that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 117 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs an animation at the start of reach. In the reach start animation in this presentation example, when the reach state is formed, animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged or reduced. In addition, an appropriate thing can be adopted as a display mode of the animation at the time of reach start. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by viewing this reach start animation.

  When reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 117 (20) to FIG. (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively moved to the upper left and right, and the first UI unit 280 changes. The frame is out under the display area leaving the icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (in the example shown in FIG. 117 (20), the hold icon h11) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. . In addition, the start of the movement display of the left pattern and the right pattern of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281, or the first The frame out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 After frame-out display of each image in is started, movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may start.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (22), the first large-screen behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224 Ga and the second large-size behavior character 224 Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be a case where the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character objects 224Gd do not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117 (23), light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In addition, light emission of light-guide plate IL may not be performed. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large screen behavior Only the operation of the character 224Gd may be performed, and light emission of the light guide plate IL may not be performed, or only light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. The movement of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed either. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 118 (25), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd are initial states, respectively. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be ended after the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to fourth The movement start to the initial position of the four large-screen behavior part 224Gd and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneously performed. Here, in FIGS. 117 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224 Gd and the light guide plate IL is a series of It may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the effect is not performed.

  FIG. 118 (26) shows a state of development into super reach (swords reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (26), the image of the sword sword player of the enemy character is displayed large, and in the subsequent decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (27) The animation of is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (29), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 118 (30), the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and then, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (31) It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 118 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the Tonosama is displayed, and a notice effect of notifying that the big hit reliability is high is performed . The Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the Tonosama's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (33), it is shown that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord has been erased and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect is started after developing into super reach. ing. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (35), when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 118 (36), it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (37), the player It is shown that the chance button 136 is pressed. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button rendering after the development into the super reach, and in this case, the development into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 118 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and The behavior role object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior role object 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 118 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 has been operated, or the operation effective period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed as well. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display for losing may be performed without performing the effect shown in FIG. After being performed, a resurrection effect may be displayed to be displayed as a big hit effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 118 (38) is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be displayed continuously.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 118 (39), the one-handed box character 224H operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 118 (40) shows that light is emitted from the light guide plate IL. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  FIG. 118 (41) shows that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (42), the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. Thereafter, in FIG. 118 (43), the effect image is faded out, and then, as shown in FIG. 118 (44), the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224 Gd move toward the initial position. Have started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues to FIG. 118 (46). In FIG. 118 (46), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and in FIG. 118 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 119 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shake fluctuation is started by the combination of the decoration pattern of. In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, at a timing shown in FIG. 119 (50), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view A. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (50), the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is determined to be determined stop, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 119 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" decoration The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game It is informed to the person that it is 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (52), a mini-right-handed display instructing a right-handed is displayed at the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 119 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a round effect display is performed, and the display of "decorative 7" showing the combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen is It has been done. In the upper left corner of the display screen, mini-right-handed display is performed, and in the upper right corner, display of “1R”, which is the current round, is performed. The number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game or the total number of prize balls acquired during the series may be displayed.

  After that, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (55), in the decorative symbol display device 208, round effect display is performed and in the upper right corner of the display area, Display of "15R" which is the current round is performed.

  FIG. 119 (56) shows that the big hit game is over, and the big hit end effect display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Since this big hit game is a big hit game that has been started as a 15R certainty big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability regular drawing high probability state (with power support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is performed, and it is informed that the power supply support is shifted to the definite change state.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (57), a display (alert display) is displayed to call attention to the forgetting of the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 93). In addition, this alerting display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the gaming state which is not in power support is finished, regardless of the situation where the big hit has become a big hit It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 119 (58) shows a state before the first variation display of symbols is started after the big hit game is over and the power support is changed to the definite change state. In the support variable probability state, the background image is a background image for the power support probability state, and the decoration pattern is also a display mode different from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general view low probability state) . Further, a reserved icon display area 282 of Special Figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of reserved special views 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the reserve mode (shape in this case) is different from the reserve icon of the special view 1. It is possible to make a decision at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same. In FIG. 119 (58) to FIG. (63), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special view 2, the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown in dashed lines. Also, in FIG. 119 (58) to FIG. (63), the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided and shown by a broken line for ease of explanation, but this broken line is actually displayed I will not. Also, in the case of the power supply-added definite variation state, although the reserve icon of the special view 1 is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (58), a mini-right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of "bonus x ○" indicating the number of consecutive units is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (58), since the first-time big hit game has ended, the display of "bonus x 1" indicating that is performed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (60) instructs the player to hit the right. A right-hand notice is displayed. The right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "Please hit right" are displayed on the semi-transparent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the power support state where the first big hit game ended and shifted, but may also be displayed in the power support state where big hit games other than the first big hit game ended and shifted For example, it may be displayed each time the jackpot game is over and it shifts to the power support state. Moreover, after shifting to the power support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed also when it is detected that the player is hitting the left, for example, it is detected that the first special view starting port 230 has won a prize. In this case, it may be determined that a left hit has been made and a right hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (61), it is shown that variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is not displayed as shown in FIG. 119 (62). In addition, the mini-right-handed display is performed continuously.

  In FIG. 119 (63), it is shown that there are four suspension of symbol variation display of the special figure 2. That is, in the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, all the four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 has four reserves, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserve icon h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 Four are displayed. Moreover, also in the second number-of-holds display, a display of “4” is performed, which indicates that the number of holdings in the special view 2 is four.

  FIG. 120 (49a) shows another example of effect following FIG. 118 (48). In FIGS. 117 to 118, the case has been described where the "decorative 7" is in the reach state and the "decorative 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, but here, the "decorative 6" is in the reach state The case in which "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is fluctuating with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special view B at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (50a). In the timing shown in FIG. 120 (50a), since the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop, so The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuation is still displayed on the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 120 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that it has become a big hit of either a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, or a 2R normal big hit.

  After that, when the big hit game starts and the prize production start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. Display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", "bonus" is displayed in the decoration symbol display device 208, and the player In fact, it is reported that it is either 5R certainty big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (52a), the mini-right-handed display is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 120 (38b) shows another example of effect following FIG. 118 (37). FIG. 120 (38b) shows that the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, but the result of losing is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character of the hero loses to the hostile swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 119 (40b), the fluctuation icon h0, the second reserved number display and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It will be left hidden.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (41b) to FIG. (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (hold frame) scroll in from below the display area, and the hold icon And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (43b), the first special view display device 212 is displayed in the special view I display mode. In the timing shown in FIG. 120 (43b), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not determined to be the symbol determination stop. The first decorative symbol is continuously subjected to the swing fluctuation, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in a variable display.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 120 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" The stop display is performed in combination of the symbols, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, display is performed in a mode that the symbols have stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (45b), the display of the variation icon erasing animation is performed. In the fluctuation icon erasing animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 becomes gradually smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 120 (46b), the animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed. Note that the variation icon deletion animation may be started before the special drawing is stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various customizations can be performed.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display is stopped, the decorative symbol display device 208 transitions to the demonstration mode. It becomes a demonstration screen. Note that the combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the transition to the demonstration mode after the symbol variation display of the special drawing is stopped and the operation means such as the chance button 136 etc. When operated, a dedicated animation may be displayed. In the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or in the case of the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (if the decorative symbol is composed of an image such as a character and a character image (including numbers), the image such as a character Only the character image may be displayed, or the character image may be hidden, or both an image such as a character and a character image may be displayed, or a movie including a model title In addition to displaying a presentation introduction movie in which a high-level notice or a high expected reach is introduced, a menu icon, a volume adjustment icon, and a brightness adjustment icon may be displayed. . In addition, the state in which the combination of the stop display of a decorative symbol was displayed may be included in demonstration mode.

  When the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 49 is operated with the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon being displayed, an option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 49, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is possible to increase or decrease the volume of the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Furthermore, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, the brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. The light amount of the LED can be increased or decreased. Here, the game board lamp 442 does not have to be included although the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 115 and the like is included. When the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated in the state where the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed, and conversely, while the brightness adjustment window is displayed, the operation key unit 137 By operating the left and right keys, the volume control window is displayed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the option menu, an icon for “return to demo screen” is prepared, and when the cursor is placed on this icon, the chance button 136 is operated to return to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the symbol variation display of the special view is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if the operation is not performed for a certain period (for example, one minute) with the option menu displayed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, and the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is operated after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the light amount is determined, and the brightness adjustment window returns to the demonstration screen. Furthermore, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after operation of the left and right keys or the up and down keys. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window disappear automatically, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 here.

  FIG. 121 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the option menu.

  In the option menu, it is possible to roughly divide and perform "effect customization", "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection".

  In the “auto button mode” of “representation customization”, even if the operation means such as the chance button 136 is not operated, the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated may be performed. It is a mode. In addition, ON / OFF described in the "option" of FIG. 121 (b) has a meaning of setting / non-setting and valid / invalid. "Long press auto repeat" means that the press of the operation button such as the chance button 136 etc. is repeated at high speed only while long press is being performed (the press is repeated). ) A function that performs the same response effects as at time, and can select the speed of continuous hitting. The "group notice" is a type of normal notice (prediction of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit of the group notice. For example, there is a possibility that the fluctuation in which the group notice is displayed becomes a big hit is 100% reliability! ? If you want to increase the frequency with which group notices appear as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%, and if the frequency with which group notices appear as a notice of the change is set to a confidence of 50% Even if it is low, you want 100% confidence if you want it to be displayed as a warning of a big hit (big hit confirmed)! ? Set to "Push sound notice" is a type of pre-reading notice when a prize is increased at the special drawing start opening and the hold increases. Note that the winning sound advance notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the like is started and / or that it is not during the operation valid period of the operation means but “the back button When "Navi" is turned ON (setting), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period of the operation means, or a character display such as "you may operate the operation means" is displayed. Will be "No advance notice" is not performed for all advance notices other than the advance notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, advance notice by the moving means (production movable body or read advance notice other than the hold icon by the display means) Setting corresponding to “ON”. "Premier up" is a setting to increase the appearance frequency of the jackpot rich or jackpot finalization effect (corresponding to "ON"). “No hold change” is a setting for not giving advance notice (by “ON”) according to the display mode of the hold icon. "One-shot notification" is a specific notice about big hit richness or big hit determination (for example, production operation by the production movable body, big hit thick (big hit confirmation) sound by sound output means, frame or game board The announcement by the lighting production by some or all decoration LED is mentioned.).

  In the present specification, “big hit confirmation” refers to a symbol change in which a notice of big hit confirmation is displayed or a symbol change of a prefetch target hold when the notice of the big hit confirmation and / or the advance notice is displayed. It is indicated that when the advance notice of the big hit decision is displayed, the change or the pending for pre-reading object is always a big hit (the same applies to the following description).

  Moreover, "big hit rich" in this specification refers to a state in which the expectation to the big hit is high, and the notice of the big hit is displayed even if the notice of the big hit and / or the advance notice is displayed. It indicates that even if a big pre-read advance notice of big hit is displayed for the symbol change of the selected symbol or the symbol change of the pre-reading object hold, it may become a loss (the same also in the following explanation). Also, the jackpot rich may indicate that the jackpot is finalized (the same applies to the following description).

  Furthermore, the description "hot" in the present specification also refers to a state of high expectation to the big hit, but even if such a notice of hot and / or a prefetch notice is displayed, a pattern on which a hot notice is displayed It indicates that even if a hot pre-reading notice is displayed for a change or a symbol change of pre-reading target suspension, it may be a loss (the same applies in the following description). In addition, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the big hit is lower than that of the big hit, and "superheat" may indicate that the big hit or the big hit is determined (the explanation below) The same is true for

  Also, “Daitomo” described in FIG. 121 (b) is a member service that performs member registration and accesses the Web server through the Internet line, and the level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience values. Is a service where you can gain various benefits according to your level. When executing the member service of “Daitomo”, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some of the pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not correspond to the member service of "Daitomo". For models of specifications that support the member service of "Daitomo", if the user mode is set and the level of the Daitomo reaches 15 levels, the back button navigation setting is released as a type of effect customization. Further, in FIG. 121 (b), the item described as "Deat Tomo setting" is released only by performing member registration and setting to the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 when joining Daitomo, it is possible to use the holding frame B, for example, in the case of holding frame selection only by setting the user mode. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. Note that "initial setting" means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, “Daitomo” can experience joining as a member before formal membership registration, and for the joining experiencer, a decoy character can be used in the character selection as a trial play.

  Moreover, there is an item which can not be selected unless the level of the Daitomo is raised as one of the above-mentioned privileges of the Daitomo. That is, among the items "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection", the item for which the level of the Dytomo is displayed in the "opening condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

  FIG. 122 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used.

  By operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the items "customize effect", "character selection", "hold frame selection", "hold display selection", "background display selection", "initialization" and "return to demo screen" The cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of “production customization” and the chance button 136 is pressed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the option menu screen is switched to the presentation customization screen. In addition, when the cursor is placed on the item of “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "effect customization screen", "character selection screen", "pending frame selection screen", "pending display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and if the user places the cursor on the "Return" icon and presses the chance button 136, the user can return to the option menu screen. In addition, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed, the screen may return to the option menu screen.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special drawing starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of special drawing is started, even if it is an option menu screen, “effect customization screen” Even in the case of the "character selection screen", the "pending frame selection screen", the "pending display selection screen", the "background display selection screen", and the "initialization confirmation screen", the display shifts to the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Subsequently, the items described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122 will be specifically described using a display example in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of calling an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from the demonstration screen. The example described here is an example for the pachinko machine 100 of a specification that does not correspond to the member service of “Daitomo”, the open condition in FIG. 121 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (for up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button. In this case, the colorless and non-patterned icon indicates the operation means which can not be operated, and the icon displayed in the other mode (colored or / and with the pattern) indicates the operable operation means.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and symbol variation display is not started after the finalized display of the stop symbol of the special drawing is performed. In this state, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 123 (1) is started. In addition, even before a certain time has passed, the finalized display period of the stop symbol of the special figure ends, and the next symbol fluctuation display is not started (for example, the decision of the special symbol stop figure in the state without suspension) If it is immediately after the display period has elapsed, these icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit). In addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the finalized display period of the stop figure of the special drawing is over, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen or the volume adjustment is made even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a fixed period (for example, 3 seconds) The window or the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

  Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (text display or image display) of the content being customized. For example, if it is the menu icon MI, character display or icon display for effect customization, if it is the volume control icon VI, display of a gauge showing the level of volume, if it is the brightness adjustment icon BI, display of the gauge showing the level of light amount It may be included. Furthermore, the menu icon MI may include the display of major items shown in FIG. 121 (b) (for example, “character selection” etc.), but it is not included as shown in FIG. 123 (1). It is also good.

  In FIG. 123 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. The same applies to the operation of the upper key 137u. Although the cross key lights in white when no operation is performed, the pressed key changes to red light, but the cross lamp may not have the decoration lamp.

  Since the lower key 137d is operated, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI, and the menu icon MI disappears, and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (3). Thus, a brightness adjustment window BW about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, it is possible to adjust the light quantity of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 45 in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest 5 levels.

  In FIG. 123 (4), the lower key 137d is operated again, and the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 123 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 123 (7), the level is raised by one step and returned to 5 levels. Even if the upper key 137u is operated in the state of five levels, the light amount does not increase any more. Further, even if the down key 137d is operated in the state of one level, the light amount does not decrease any further. Also, if no operation is performed for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demonstration screen on which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, The count start can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this zero level, the LED will remain off.

  In FIG. 123 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same is true even if the left key 137l is operated.

  As the right key is operated, the volume adjustment window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (9). The volume adjustment window VW is displayed larger than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the side of the menu icon MI and about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI is removed and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five steps, and the initial value is three levels of middle volume.

  In FIG. 123 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. Note that even if the right key is operated in the state of the five loudest sounds, the volume does not rise any further. Also, in the state of one level, even if the left key is operated, the volume does not decrease further. Also, if you do not operate for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), you will return to the demo screen with the three icons MI, VI, and BI displayed, but if you operate the left key or the right key, The period can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this zero level, the speaker 120 will remain muted.

  Since a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (13) displays three icons MI, VI, and BI on the demonstration screen. I'm back.

  In FIG. 123 (14), when the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, an option menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (15). Although the chance button 136 emits light in red when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, the chance button 136 may be lighted in red before being pressed. In this option menu screen, the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu" In order from top to bottom in a row, there are seven types of icons such as presentation customization icon, character selection icon, holding frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization icon, and return icon for returning to the demo screen It is displayed. A cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 123 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icon is displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is red. Further, in the option menu screen, a picture of operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, among the chance button 136 and the cross key, the cursor icon cs and the patterns of the up and down keys 137 u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. Note that for the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  Here, although the option menu screen is not displayed, it may be displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated during brightness adjustment or volume adjustment in FIGS. 123 (2) to 123 (12). . In addition, the initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the top effect customization icon, may be a back icon, or may be another icon. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

  In FIG. 123 (16), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the effect customization icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 123 (17), the decoration design display device 208 displays the effect customization screen. Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the effect customization screen, and in the list, five items from the top of the display of the small items in the effect customization shown in FIG. 121 (b) ("01 auto button mode" to "05 back "Button navigation" and each option (for example, "OFF ON" etc.) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. Furthermore, below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting change, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for collectively returning the settings to the initial value are arranged in a row from the left side sequentially ing. Also, in the effect customization screen, cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the effect customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The back icon in which the cursor display is displayed is highlighted in a frame and further displayed in red. Further, among the displayed options, options currently set are also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Furthermore, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the effect customization screen, the patterns of all the keys 137u, d, l, r of the cross key are displayed in red.

  In FIG. 123 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 123 (20), the right key 137r is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (21), the currently set option in the auto button mode changes to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. When the left key 1371 is operated in a state where the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalidated, but the same result may be obtained as when the right key 137r is operated.

  In FIG. 123 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to an item (long press auto continuous hit) one item below the auto button mode. That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (23), the frame of the item of the long press auto consecutive hit is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation about this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the back icon when the setting is not changed. However, even if there is no setting change, it may move to the confirmation icon, or may move to the back icon.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the item of the bottom back button navigation. That is, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation regarding this item is displayed.

  In FIG. 123 (26), the lower key 137d is operated one more time, and as shown in FIG. 123 (27), the 5-line list is updated, and in FIG. 121 (b), the auto is 01. The item of the button mode disappears, and instead, the cursor display moves to the newly added item without the pre-reading notice which was 06 in FIG. 121 (b).

  In FIG. 123 (28), the lower key 137d continues to be operated.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  The list is updated according to the operation of the down key 137d, and on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 124 (29) following FIG. 123 (28), the last small item of the effect customization in FIG. 121 (b) 09 The cursor is moved to the item of one-shot notification.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (30), when the lower key 137d is operated once more, as shown in FIG. 124 (31), the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon, and the confirmation icon is highlighted in the frame. Furthermore, it is displayed in red.

  In FIG. 124 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as the determination operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (33a), the notification screen notifying that setting of effect customization is overlapped with the effect customization screen from the front side Is displayed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting for effect customization is updated may be displayed. In the notification screen shown in FIG. 124 (33a), a return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

  In FIG. 124 (34), the chance button 136 is operated, and as shown in FIG. 124 (35), the screen returns to the option menu screen.

  In addition, the return icon in the notification screen shown in FIG. 124 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen is displayed. It may be possible to return.

  After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again with the option menu screen displayed as shown in FIG. 124 (36) (see (37) in FIG. 124), FIG. As shown in), the cursor icon cs displayed so far in the effect customization icon moves down by one, and this time the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

  In FIG. 124 (39), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the character selection icon, the chance button 136 is depressed, and as shown in FIG. 124 (40), the character selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the character selection screen, and the list shows five items (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) from the top of the display of options in the character selection shown in FIG. 121 (b). It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 124 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and on the left side of the character selection screen, the pattern of the character of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is previewed. It is done. As shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of character selection is Yoshimune, this initial setting itself may be eliminated. In the lower right corner of the character selection screen, there is a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red for up and down keys 137u and d only) used for the selection operation, and a red chance for the determination operation. The pattern of the button 136 is also displayed.

  The character set by the character selection here is to be displayed at all times, to always appear at the time of presentation, or to appear more frequently than other characters.

  When the lower key 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 124 (41), the cursor display moves to the side of the item below the one of Yoshimune as shown in FIG. 124 (42), The picture is previewed.

  In FIG. 124 (43), the lower key 137d is operated five more times, the list is updated according to the operation of the lower key 137d, and in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 124 (44), FIG. The cursor is moved to the 07 copanda item of the final choice of the character selection.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (45), when the down key 137d is operated one more time, as shown in FIG. 124 (46), the cursor display moves to the back icon, and the back icon is highlighted Furthermore, it is displayed in red.

  Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 124 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 124 (48), the Yoshimune of 01 is Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display is moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 124 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 124 (50), animation display showing determination of a character is performed in an area where preview display has been performed. Although a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the character is updated may be displayed, in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 124 (51), the screen returns to the option menu screen.

  Even if the animation display showing that the character is determined is ended, the character selection screen remains as it is, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again (see FIG. 124 (52)) in the state where the option menu screen is displayed, characters are displayed as shown in FIG. 124 (53). The cursor icon cs displayed in the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the holding frame selection icon, and the holding frame selection icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 124 (54), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the holding frame selection icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 124 (55), the decoration symbol display device 208 holds the holding frame. The selection screen is displayed. A five-line list is also displayed on the holding frame selection screen, and the list displays five options from the top of the options displayed in the holding frame selection shown in FIG. 121 (b) (“01 holding frame A” to “05 The holding space E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 124 (55), the cursor display is displayed on the item of the holding frame A, and the holding frame of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is the holding icon and the fluctuation icon in the window on the left side of the holding frame selection screen. It is displayed with a preview. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), the initial setting of the holding frame selection is the holding frame A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated holding that can not be selected here You may prepare a frame. In the lower right of the holding frame selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key used for selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red used for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as a first UI unit 280 and a second UI unit 281 in the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 124 (56), the lower key 137d is operated once.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 124.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (57) in response to one operation of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 124 (55) continued from FIG. 124 (55), the cursor display is one of the holding frame A The item is moved to the holding frame B of the next lower item, and the holding frame B is previewed in the left window.

  In FIG. 125 (58), the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed. In the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (59), when the effect display Ed1 surrounding the window on the left side where preview display is performed occurs and the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected holding frame is updated Is automatically performed, and returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 125 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the holding frame is to be updated may be displayed. In addition, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the holding frame selection screen remains, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the holding frame selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again (see FIG. 125 (61)) while the option menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 125 (62), it is held until then. The cursor icon cs displayed in the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 125 (63), a hold display selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A five-line list is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and in the list, five items from the top of the display of options in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 121 (b) (“01 icon A” to “05 icon E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 125 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the icon A, and in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen, the icon of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is previewed with the holding frame There is. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of the hold display selection is the icon A, this initial setting itself may be eliminated or a dedicated icon which can not be selected here may be used. You may prepare. In the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key used for selection operation (only up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red used for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The icons set in the hold display selection here are displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the fluctuation icon h0 in the hold frame UI.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window where the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 125 (66), the screen returns to the option menu screen. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the icon is updated may be displayed. In addition, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the on-hold display selection screen remains, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the on-hold display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 125 (67)), as shown in FIG. 125 (68), it is held until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 125 (69), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the background display selection icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 125 (70), the background display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The selection screen is displayed. A list of five lines is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 121 (b) are displayed in the list. It is done. That is, one item is displayed for one line of the five-line list. In FIG. 125 (70), the cursor display is displayed on the item of background A, and the background of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is previewed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. In addition, as shown in 73 (b), although the initial setting of background display selection is background A, this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background which can not be selected here may be selected. You may prepare. In the lower right of the background display selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red for up and down keys 137u and d only) used for selection operation, and a red for determination operation The design of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The background set in the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative symbol display device 208. The background display in the normal state referred to here does not include the background display in the prefetch mode, the background display as a notice of the big hit of the variation, and the background display in the power support state. However, only the background display in the power support state may be included.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (sky background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (72), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and as shown in FIG. 125 (73), the screen returns to the option menu screen. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the background is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains, and the operation may return to the option menu screen by operating the back icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated twice (see FIG. 125 (74a)) while the option menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 125 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the back icon for returning to the demo screen, and the back icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 125 (76), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the back icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 125 (77), a demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 Be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized result. That is, the background is changed to an empty background, the holding frame UI is different from the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 123 (1), and in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen, it is set to ON in effect customization. The mode name (in this case, the auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, they are alternately displayed in ascending order of the customization number. For example, if the auto button mode of 01 and back button navigation of 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and back button navigation are alternately displayed in a frame RW at the upper right of the screen. When the setting is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be displayed even if it is the same. In addition, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, group prediction of setting of reliability and long press auto continuous hitting of setting of speed of continuous hitting may be set so as not to be displayed in the frame RW. Furthermore, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, for example, it may be displayed only as "during effect customization".

  In FIG. 125 (79), the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and 4th symbol display 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 shown in FIG. 125 (79) are in the stop display mode. In addition, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (79) are also under stop display, and the fourth symbol shown in FIG. 125 (79) The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Furthermore, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special view holding lamp 218, and the second special view holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 125 (79) are all turned off, and in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even in the displayed second number-of-holds display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 are both zero. Therefore, there is no suspension, and it is in the state where symbol fluctuation display is not started after finalized display of a stop symbol is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (80), there is a single ball in the first special view starting opening 230, and the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 125 (80) starts the symbol variation display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 shown in FIG. 125 (80) are also decorative symbols. The variation display is not started, and the fourth symbol display device 284 similarly controlled by the sub control unit 400, 500 also shows the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 125 (80), black squares represent the stop indication of the first decorative symbol (the third symbol), and gray circles represent the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). A white square indicates that the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) is in the variation display, and a white circle indicates that the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) is in the variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display, and the second number of reservations displayed in the upper right corner In the display, the number of reservations of the special view 1 is displayed as “1” for a moment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (82), the number of reservations of the special view 1 first displayed as "1" momentarily in the second number of reservations display is "0". It should be noted that since the first special figure starting port 230 wins after being won, the second holding number display may not be displayed as "1" even if it is for a moment, and may remain "0".

  In FIG. 125 (83), the increase animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 126 (84) continued from FIG. 125 (83), the increase animation is finished, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 126 (84) is an icon newly set in the hold display selection of effect customization, and is displayed in a default display mode (a diamond non-pattern and white display mode) There is.

  In FIG. 126 (85), the variation display of the first decorative symbol is not yet started, but the menu icon MI, the volume control icon VI, and the delay of the start of the symbol variation display on the first special view display device 212 Erasing of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and it is displayed in transparent form. Although the deletion here may be animation-styled, it does not have to be always the deletion animation, and in FIG. 126 (86), the deletion of these three icons MI, VI, and BI is completed.

  In FIG. 126 (87), the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area, and in FIG. 126 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 is completed. On the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area, a variation icon h0 of a default display mode (a diamond non-pattern and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 126 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is in low speed fluctuation. In addition, in the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable display first, then the middle symbol starts the variable display, and the right symbol starts the variable display. However, the order of the variable display start of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and these three left symbols, the middle symbol and the right symbol may simultaneously start the variable display. In addition, before the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by the decorative symbol (for example, an animation that the decorative symbol is once displayed large and then return to the original size, an image and characters of the character etc) is displayed. When it is configured from an image (including numbers), an image such as a character may be animated before the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 126 (91), the first decorative symbol is in high speed fluctuation. Even after symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, if left key 137l or right key 137r of operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 126 (92)), FIG. 126 (93) As shown in, the bar display VB for volume control is displayed above the holding frame UI. The bar display VB for volume control is displayed so as to overlap with at least a portion of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a portion of the variation icon h0, and at least a portion of the navigation character YM from the front side. . When the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, operating the left key 137l reduces the bar display by one level to make the sound smaller, and operating the right key 137r increases the bar display by one level to make the sound larger. , Volume adjustable.

  In the present embodiment, even after symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, only volume adjustment can always be performed. In addition, even if the volume adjustment can always be performed, the bar display VB for volume adjustment may not be displayed. Also, even during a big hit game, only volume adjustment is always possible. However, it may be regulated only for a certain period. For example, during the start effect of the big hit game, during the interval between rounds, during the end effect of the big hit game, during the execution of the super reach effect, during the final display of the symbols on the special view display devices 212 and 214, of the decorative symbol During the final display, during the final display of the lost symbol, during the final display of the big hit symbol, or at the end of the power support (short time) state (for example, at the end of ST) (for example, the number of balls or / and During display of a screen displaying the number of consecutive houses, etc., and a period of time in which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for effect may be restricted. In addition, when super reach production is a game production, it is controlled until a result of victory or defeat is informed, and after that it is good also as adjustment possible, and adjustment is performed after three decoration symbols gather and start shaking display. It may be possible, or all the period from the super reach presentation to the stop display may be regulated.

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special view low probability diagram low probability state. In addition, although the light amount adjustment can not be performed even if the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, the bar for light amount adjustment The display may be performed similarly to the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the light amount may be adjustable, or the light amount may be adjustable without performing the bar display. Furthermore, even after symbol variation display on special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, effect customization, character selection, etc. may be set.

  Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated while the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the bar display VB for volume adjustment is not displayed as in the present embodiment. Volume adjustment may be possible. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses May be configured to be able to update the count start of that fixed period (ie, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If there is an operation on the left key 137l or the right key 137r during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by the start of the variation of the symbol, the erasure animation is canceled halfway and immediately The volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be displayed again without canceling the deletion animation, or the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed after the deletion animation has been performed to the end.

  Furthermore, even after the symbol variation display on the special view display devices 212 and 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, and BI is until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless of the light amount, the light amount may be adjusted, and the effect customization, the character selection and the like may be set.

  In addition, even when the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed while the symbol is changing, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a modification of the example described using FIG.

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 127 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 124 (32a), the cursor display returns as shown in FIG. 127 (33b1) The back icon is highlighted with a frame and is displayed in red. In this state, when the chance button 136 is operated (Fig. 127 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side (Fig. 127 (33b3) ). On the confirmation screen, a return icon for accepting return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for canceling return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 127 (33b2), the cursor display is a cancel icon. It is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the icon to return (FIG. 127 (33b5-1), or the cursor display is displayed on the cancel icon) Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 127 (33b5-2)).

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 127 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 124 (32a), the cursor display returns as shown in FIG. 127 (33c1) When the right key 137r is operated one more time (FIG. 127 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 127 (33c3). In this state, when the chance button 136 is operated (Fig. 127 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to customize the effect customization is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front (Fig. 127 (33c5) )). On this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” for accepting initialization and a “No icon” for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 127 (33c5), the cursor display is “No icon”. It is displayed in ". Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 127 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to the “Yes icon” (FIG. 127 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 127 (33c8-1) As shown in, when the chance button 136 is operated, the initialization of the effect customization is executed.The initialization here is returned to the initial value for everything the player has set in the effect customization. Even if it is not set, it is possible to perform initialization, but it may not be possible.When initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 127 (33c9-1)) Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 127 (33c6-2)), the effect customization image in which the initialization is reflected There appears. In this example, did not specifically set anything, all the items are turned OFF of the initial value.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing another modification.

  When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 128 (74b1) instead of twice operation of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 125 (74a), as shown in FIG. 128 (74b2), The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights in red.

  In FIG. 128 (74b3), with the cursor icon cs displayed on the initialization icon, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 128 (74b4), all settings are made in the decorative symbol display device 208. The confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side. On this confirmation screen, a "Yes icon" for accepting initialization and a "No icon" for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 128 (74b4), the cursor display is "No icon". It is displayed in ".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (74b5-1), the cursor display is moved to the “Yes icon” by operating the right key 137r (FIG. 128 (74b6-1), or the cursor display is displayed on the “No icon”) In this state, as shown in FIG. 128 (74b5-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 128 (74b6-2)).

  When the chance button 136 is operated (Fig. 128 (74b7-1)) while the cursor display is displayed on the "Yes icon" as shown in FIG. 128 (74b6-1), initialization of all settings is executed. Ru. In this initialization, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. Although initialization is possible even when nothing is set in particular, it may be possible to disable initialization. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 128 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 128 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 128 (74b10-1).

  When the player performs various customizations and then does not return to the option menu screen, and does not operate the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball emission handle 134 for a certain period of time (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Also, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 128 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 127 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the “Yes icon” may be removed from the confirmation screen, and may be initialized after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. In addition, even if there is a “Yes icon”, in the case of no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period has passed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when “initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed as “Yes icon”) .

  In addition, with regard to volume adjustment and luminance adjustment, initialization may be the same, and furthermore, initialization of various settings and initialization of volume and / or luminance may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized earlier than the other. In addition, when initializing the volume and initializing the brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of various settings, the initialization confirmation screen is not displayed for initializing the volume and initializing the luminance. Alternatively, a confirmation screen may be displayed to initialize all settings, volume, and brightness settings.

  Furthermore, a display for confirming whether the settings for effect customization are to be initialized may be automatically displayed during symbol variation. For example, it is always displayed when 100 variations are displayed once, or a fixed number of variations have been made since the last display, or when a fixed number of variations have been made since the first started variation. It may be displayed randomly (for example, when winning by display lottery).

  FIGS. 128 (I) to (V ') show an example in which customization can be performed during a big hit round.

  In this example, for example, the player can make a music selection in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and can perform customization from the next round. A certain round here is a round which can be won by a V-attacker, specifically, five rounds. In FIG. 128 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 for the fifth round is shown, and the letter V for winning a prize for the V-attacker is displayed. Also, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

  FIG. 128 (II) shows a period corresponding to the interval between rounds, with the V-attacker closed. Even in the interval between rounds of 5 rounds and 6 rounds, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Also, although the attacker is closed, right-handed notification is continued.

  In FIG. 128 (III), the attacker starts opening, and the sixth round is started. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (III), a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be performed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. That is, in this example, the effect customization can be performed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the five rounds that can be won by the V attacker. In addition, it may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable over a plurality of rounds after the sixth round.

  In FIG. 128 (IV), the chance button 136 is depressed and the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 etc. is reduced and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. There is.

  Further, in the same figure (V ') shown as a modified example of FIG. 128 (V), the display (here, the display concerning the auto button mode) concerning only one line (only one item) of the five lines is displayed There is. In this modification, it is possible to change all effect customizations by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF of the items displayed by the left and right keys 137l and 137r. .

  Note that, either of the example of FIG. 128 (V) and the example of FIG. 128 (V '), only part of the effect customization may be changeable.

  In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning game is performed with a so-called V machine). In addition, you may customize not only from a V machine but from a certain round.

  Further, the period during which the music selection can be made during the big hit game can not be customized, and the customization may be performed from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected in the middle of the round may be output. In this case, even if it is the round for which the music selection is performed, the selected music is output , Can be customized within the round.

  Also, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the specific round is ended. In detail, customization may be performed from the same time as the end of a specific round, or may be performed from the start of the next round to a specific round, and may be performed between a specific round and its next round Customization may be possible from the inter-round interval.

  Furthermore, customization may be feasible anytime during the big hit round. Also, customization may be performed anytime during the jackpot game. The term "during a big hit" as used herein refers to a period between the start of the big hit and the end of the big hit including the middle of the round.

  In addition, the period from when the big hit symbol is displayed and started until the first round is started is, from the viewpoint of the main control unit 300, the special electric character (from the turn-on of the character continuous actuation device to the turn-on) It is a period of time from the off state to the on state of the attacker, but includes a period in which a big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, although the display (for example, display of a special bonus) displayed by the big hit game start effect may continue to be displayed even if one round is started, it is one round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is a period until the eyes are started. Further, the determination display of the jackpot symbol is not based on the determination display of the decoration symbol but on the basis of the determination display of the symbol on the special view display device 212, 214. In addition, right-handed notification is given before the attacker is opened (for example, in the case of the first hit of special figure 1 and every big hit) If it is a game console, the timing when this right-handed notification is started is a big hit symbol Is included in the period from the final display to the start of the first round.

  During the period from the final display of the jackpot symbol to the start of the first round, customization may not be performed, or vice versa.

  In addition, customization may not be performed in a period from the end of the last round to the start of symbol variation at the shortest. For example, during the jackpot end effect, customization may not be performed.

  Furthermore, during the prepaid card removal warning display, customization may not be performed, or vice versa.

  In addition, during a specific effect (for example, V winning effect, music selection, probability change suggestive effect, and the like), customization may not be performed. Furthermore, customization may not be performed in a period in which effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Furthermore, during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used for customization, customization may not be performed, or the customization may be restricted before the effect is started. In this way, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the effect.

  Furthermore, contrary to the example shown in FIGS. 128 (I) to (V '), customization may not be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, although 1 R to 14 R can be customized, it may not be possible when it becomes 15 R. Alternatively, although customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, 13R or later may not be possible.

  In addition, while the two-dimensional code is displayed, customization may not be performed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period in a big hit game, or when a two-dimensional code is displayed by a player's operation (for example, "press a button to display a two-dimensional code" is displayed In the case where a two-dimensional code is output by a button operation when the button is pressed, customization may not be performed. Alternatively, customization may be performed even while displaying a two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional code and the display related to customization may be displayed at overlapping positions or may be displayed at overlapping positions. That is, part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap from the front side to part or all of the display related to customization, and conversely, part or all of the display related to customization corresponds to two-dimensional It may be displayed on part or all of the code so as to overlap from the front side.

  In FIGS. 128 (I) to (V '), the jackpot effect of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having a definite variation area has been described, but the big hit of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having no definite variation area It is applicable also to the big hit of so-called 1 type and 2 types of models in which a big hit starts by winning V.

  FIGS. 128 (VI) to (VIII) show examples where customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are in high speed variation. is there. Further, in the frame RW on the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (VI), it is displayed that the eater button mode is currently set to customize, and the effect customization is performed below that. A character display notifying that it is possible and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 128 (VII), the chance button 136 is depressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. The display related to only (one item only) (here, the display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. Also in this example, all the effect customization can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON / OFF the items displayed by the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

  FIGS. 128 (IX) to (XI) are diagrams showing other examples in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  Even in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are in high speed variation. is there. Further, in FIG. 128 (IX), the second display device 208P is disposed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display device 208P is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 128 (IX) is at an initial position and can be moved up and down. Even in the initial position, a part of the second display device 208P overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and when the second display device 208P descends from the initial position, the degree of overlapping with the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes large.

  A model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW 'indicating that the eater button mode is currently set to customize is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. . Further, below the display RW ', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be performed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 128 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. (XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. In addition, the content (for example, customization display in process of execution) of a part of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 etc. may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 and the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Furthermore, the display using the second display device 208P is also applicable to the display related to customization during the big hit game.

  Note that customization may be performed anytime during symbol variation display. For example, even during display of the super reach effect, customization may be performed. Or, conversely, during display of the super reach effect, customization may not be performed. The super reach production referred to here includes the production and the prognostic production of the insulting part until the judgment production such as the duel production starts after reaching the reach state. For example, an effect of changing the display position of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol assumed to be reached by entering the reach state, and an effect before the character display indicating the development to the super reach is performed are included. In addition, when switching from the judgment effect such as duel effect to the display screen of the decorative symbol, it is included in the super reach effect until it is switched to the display screen of the decorative symbol.

  It should be noted that customization may be performed even for the rendering of the roving part or the prognostic rendering, or may not be performed. Further, after switching from the judgment effect display screen or the judgment effect to the display screen of the decorative symbol, customization may be performed or may not be performed.

  In addition, customization may be performed even during simultaneous rendering performed on a plurality of game machines, or may not be performed during simultaneous rendering. Furthermore, customization may be performed during temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or may not be performed in the opposite direction. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, it may be possible to customize only when it is a big hit in the end, or it may not be possible to do the opposite, and it is finally lost Customization may or may not be possible only in certain cases. Furthermore, customization may be performed or may not be performed between the end of the symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display in a state where there is a hold. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during symbol variation display (for example, in the pre-reading mode), customization may be performed or may not be performed.

  Furthermore, when customization is performed during symbol fluctuation display, setting change may be applied from the symbol fluctuation display, or setting change may be applied from the next symbol fluctuation display. Good.

  In addition, while setting the user mode (Daitomo) player list (for example, display with the chance button, switching with the arrow key, etc.), the list of missions achieved and game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of mission clears) , It is configured to be able to display the number of big wins of the current play, the maximum number of consecutive runs of the current play, etc.), or to be able to change the character or background set by the user, the holding frame, the holding display, etc. It may be done. Furthermore, while setting the user mode (Daitomo), while setting the user mode (Daitomo), a list of missions and game histories achieved by the player operation (for example, display with a chance button, switching with an arrow key, etc.) It is configured to be able to display (number of rotations, number of balls, number of mission clears, number of big wins for current play, maximum number of consecutive runs for current play, etc.), or a character or background set by the user, holding frame , And may be configured to be able to change the pending display and the like.

  In addition, during the setting of the user mode, when the mission is achieved, an icon may be displayed to notify that the mission is achieved.

  Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 of the specification corresponding to the member service of "Daitomo" will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the open condition of FIG. 121 (b) is adopted. Moreover, the top menu is prepared for the pachinko machine 100 of this specification. This top menu can be called up by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be able to be called by merely operating the chance button 136 without passing through the demo screen. Alternatively, even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the screen may be automatically switched and displayed from the demonstration screen. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

  On the top menu, there is a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a back icon.

  FIG. 129 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

  Even on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Customize model", "Initialize", and "Return to demo screen", the arrows connected with the arrows are operated by operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137. The cursor moves, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of "DAITOMO" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the DAITOMO screen. In addition, when the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, the "Return" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", "Model customize screen", and "Initialization confirmation screen", and the cursor is placed on the "Return" icon and the chance button 136 is pressed. If you do, you can return to the top menu screen. In addition, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, the screen may return to the top menu screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special figure starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of special figure is started, even if it is the top menu screen, “Daitomo screen”, “ Even in the case of "model customization screen" and "initialization confirmation screen", the screen is shifted to the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 129 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

  The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 129 (2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 122 except that “Return to top menu” at the bottom and “top menu screen” on the right side Therefore, duplicate explanations are omitted. When the cursor is placed on the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 130 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

  Even on the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137 u or the lower key 137 d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of "trial play", "enter password", "save data", "clear data", "quick start" and "return to top menu screen", the operation key unit is connected to each other by arrows The cursor moves by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item of “trial play” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the test screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, move to the new registration screen by moving the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the decision operation of the chance button 136, or the top menu screen to start trial play You can go back to Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to shift to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining operation of the chance button 136. .

  If the cursor is placed on the item of “password input” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the password screen to the password input screen. In the password entry screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the screen switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of "data storage" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the display screen to the data storage confirmation screen. On the data storage confirmation screen, when “Yes” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137 u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136, the screen shifts to a two-dimensional code issuance screen. However, if "Yes" is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to a demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, in both the data storage confirmation screen and the two-dimensional code issuance screen, "No" is determined by the movement of the cursor by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136 If so, each display is repeated.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of "data clear" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

  If the cursor is placed on the item of “quick start” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. In the quick start start screen, after a certain period of time elapses, the display switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode.

  On the other hand, an icon of "Return" is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen", If the cursor is placed on the “return” icon and the chance button 136 is pressed, the screen can be returned to the screen. Also, even if the cursor is not placed on the "RETURN" icon, the screen may be returned to the display screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed.

  In addition, although it is not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize in special drawing starting port 212, 214 and symbol variation display of the special drawing is started, even if it is the Daitomo screen, "trial trial screen" Even if it is, it shifts to the screen of the fluctuation display of the decoration design.

  Further, reference numerals in parentheses shown in FIG. 130 correspond to reference numerals in parentheses in FIG.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a display screen.

  A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (a). In this top menu screen, background display, holding frame UI, navigation character YM, first decorative symbol (third symbol) and second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons are displayed in order from top to bottom in a row, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen. Further, in FIG. 130A, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the bottom back icon, and the back icon is red while the other icons are displayed in white. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is a back icon. Further, also in the top menu screen, a pattern of a cross key (red only for the up and down keys 137u, d) used for the selection operation and a pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right.

  The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (b1) is the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) with the chance button 136 displayed in a state where the cursor icon cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon. It is a Daitomo screen displayed by being pressed. In order to return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data storage icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen, in the vertical row below the character display of "Daitomo" on the screen of this Daitomo. Six kinds of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 130 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the trial play icon at the top, and the frame of the trial play icon is highlighted and is displayed in red. In addition, a character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation about trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the description, a pattern of a cross key (red only for the up and down keys 137u and d) used for the selection operation and a pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the trial play screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1-1), options which can be selected in various customizations are displayed as benefits of the Daitomo membership experience. Below the display, there is a confirmation icon for saving the setting change, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, a "starting icon" to start trial play, and a new registration for newly registering a member. The icons are arranged in a horizontal row sequentially from the left side. The cursor display is displayed on the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, when the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the "newly registered icon", and when the decision button 136 is pressed to perform the decision operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 A new registration screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1-2) is displayed.

  On the new registration screen shown in FIG. 131 (b1-2), the two-dimensional code QR1 is largely displayed on the left, and the two-dimensional code is read by the communication terminal with the photographing function on the right. A sentence is displayed that recommends accessing the website of the embedded URL (Daitomo site) and obtaining a password from it. Further, below the display of the text, a password input icon and a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without passing through the trial play screen. For example, when a newly registered icon is provided on the screen of FIG. 131 (b1) separately from the trial play icon etc. and this newly registered icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the screen shown in FIG. The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

  In the screen of FIG. 131 (b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation on the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen shown in FIG. 131 (b2-1).

  On the password input screen shown in FIG. 131 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and a dial kw of alphabets, symbols and numbers are displayed below the password input area pw. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray, while T is being specified in FIG. 131 (b2-1-1)) using the cross key 137u, d, l, r, and the character specified by the cursor An operation of inputting in the password input area pw by the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed one character by one character in accordance with the password acquired from the Daitomo site (see FIG. 131 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a back icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters of the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password input are arranged in a line from the left side sequentially It is done.

  When the input operation of the password is completed, the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed on the completion icon. If the input of the password is incorrect, the window of the input error shown in FIG. 131 (b2-1-2) is displayed, and if this window disappears, the input operation of the password becomes possible again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. If the input of the password is correct, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an input completed window shown in FIG. 131 (b2-1-3) for a certain period, and then switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode. .

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 131 (b3), the cursor display is displayed on the data storage icon, and on the right side, an explanation of data storage is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 131 (b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when trial play or quick start is being performed, or when password input is not performed, the data storage icon can not be selected, or the data storage confirmation screen is not displayed. However, conversely, it may be selectable or displayable.

  On the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 131 (b3-1), a "Yes" icon for accepting saving of data and a "No" icon for not storing data are displayed. When the "Yes" icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, a two-dimensional code QR2 is generated by the pachinko machine 100 and issued (Fig. 131 (b3-2)). In this two-dimensional code QR2, in addition to the URL of the Daitomo site, the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive homes, the Daitomo mode level, experience Value, including mission achievement information etc.), etc. is read, this two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the website of the URL embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 (Daitomo site Data is stored on the server of Daitomo site when accessing. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen, and when reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, the end confirmation screen is selected when the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated. Is displayed.

  The end confirmation screen is displayed in FIG. 131 (b 3-2-1), and “Yes” icon for accepting end and “No” icon for not ending are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

  The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be deleted from the pachinko machine when the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, such as data of the current game history information etc., as shown in FIG. 131 (b3-2-1) The “Yes” icon may be selected and the chance button 136 may be operated to erase the pachinko machine 100 from the pachinko machine 100 or may not be erased until data clear described later is performed.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 131 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and on the right side, the explanation about data clear is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 131 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If the trial play or quick start is being performed, or if the password is not input, the data clear icon can not be selected, or the data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. However, conversely, it may be selectable or displayable.

  On the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 131 (b4-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting deletion of data such as game history information of this time and a “No” icon for not deleting data are displayed. There is. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine, and an erasure complete screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 131 (b4-1-1), the deletion completion screen is displayed, and the deletion completion screen disappears when it is displayed for a predetermined period, and the screen is returned to the Dytomo screen.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 131 (b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation on the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a quick start start screen shown in FIG. 131 (b5-1). This quick start start screen disappears when it is displayed for a certain period, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the demonstration screen set to the Daitomo mode.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 131 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, the return to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

  When the second model customization icon is selected from the top of the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) and the chance button 136 is operated, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c). Is displayed. On this model customization screen, under the character display of "model customization", in order from top to bottom in a row, the effect customization icon, the character selection icon, the holding frame selection icon, the holding display selection icon, the background display selection icon, and initialization Seven types of icons are displayed, such as an icon and a back icon for returning to the top menu screen. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 132 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the topmost effect customization icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is red. Further, in the model customization screen, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Furthermore, among the chance button 136 and the cross key, the cursor icon cs and the patterns of the up and down keys 137 u and d used for moving the cursor display are displayed in red. Note that for the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  Although the effect customization screen is displayed in FIG. 132 (c1), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 123 (17) is that the options for the input sound advance notice and the option for the back button navigation are not released yet. It is different. If the password of Daitomo is not input or the level satisfying the release condition is not reached, a screen as shown in FIG. 132 (c1) is displayed.

  Although a character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 132 (c2), with the character selection screen shown in FIG. 124 (40), all other options are not released except for the option of Yoshimune, and other The difference is that the option does not even indicate what character it is. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of a character image may be displayed, or a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which selectable characters can be recognized ( For example, a display may be displayed that includes “Dai tomo Lv. 20 with princess open” and the like. Here, with regard to the display regarding the unreleased option, the present invention is also applicable to other customized displays (in this example, a holding frame, a hold display, and a background display). If the password of Daitomo is not input, a screen as shown in FIG. 132 (c2) is displayed. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 132 (c2 '), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the 可能 character can also be selected. However, after 03, it can not be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although the holding frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 132 (c3), with the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 124 (55), all the other options have not been released except for the holding frame A option. There is a difference that the other options are not even displayed what sort of holding box is. If the password of Daitomo is not input, the screen shown in FIG. 132 (c3) is displayed. In this screen, only the holding frame A can be selected.

  On the other hand, in the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 132 (c3 '), since the password input is performed, the holding frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it can not be selected because it has not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although the hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 132 (c4), all other options are unreleased except for the option of the icon A in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (63). The other option is different in that it is not displayed even what is the name of the pending display. If the password of Daitomo is not input, a screen as shown in FIG. 132 (c4) is displayed. Only the icon A can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 132 (c4 '), since the password is being input, the icon B can also be selected. However, here as well, 03 and later can not be selected because they have not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although a background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 132 (c5), all the other options are not released except for the background A option with the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 125 (70). The other option is different in that it is not displayed even what background name it is. If the password of Daitomo is not input, a screen as shown in FIG. 132 (c5) is displayed. Only background A can be selected on this screen.

  On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 132 (c5 '), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, here as well, 03 and later can not be selected because they have not reached a level that satisfies the open condition.

  Although a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed in FIG. 132 (d1), since it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 128 (74b6-1), the description will be omitted. Also, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 132 (d2), the description is omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 128 (74b8-1).

  FIG. 132 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (e1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and symbol variation display is not started after the finalized display of the stop symbol of the special drawing is performed. Furthermore, below the second number-of-retentions display, the current level of the tone mode (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demonstration screen set in the daemon mode shown in FIG. 132 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registering and transitioning to the demonstration screen.

  Further, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 132 (e1), the corresponding sound effect is output. For example, when the Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice of “Start of Daitomo” is output, and when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, “Trial When the voice of "play start" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice of "DAITOMO start. Let's keep trying today" is output. It should be noted that different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effects are started by Daitomo by trial play, when Daitomo is started by quick start, and when Daitomo is started by password input. The same effect sound may be output, or the same effect sound may be output in two cases. Further, the sound effects may be changed depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. In addition, when returning to the demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 132 (e1) after model customization, the sound effects may not be output, and dedicated sound effects may be output. Also, an animation may be displayed together with or instead of the corresponding sound effect. When the start of symbol variation is started while a sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) on the way, but may be output as it is until the end.

  Also, when the Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c) may not be able to be called for a certain period. A top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) or a model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c) may be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c) may not be called up for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 132 (e1-1) shows that the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed when a certain period has elapsed since the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 132 (e1) is displayed. FIG.

  Note that after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) is displayed, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted so as not to be additionally displayed for a predetermined period (for example, one minute). It is also good. When the operation of the chance button 136 or the operation of the cross keys 137u, d, l, r is performed during this fixed period, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be effective.

  In addition, even while the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed (for example, immediately after or immediately after the symbol variation display stops with no hold), The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown at 123 can be called. When the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and there is no operation for a certain period, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 132 (e1-1).

  Further, when the stop symbol is displayed in a state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period, and a certain period is shown in FIG. The model customization screen shown in) may not be called.

  Also, even during the period when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 131 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 132 (c) can not be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. May be possible.

  Further, at the time of switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 123 and the screen shown in FIG. 132 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also shown in FIG. 132 (e1-1) There is a state in which neither is displayed, and even in this state, the adjustment operation of the volume and the brightness may be executable or may be restricted so as not to be executable.

  FIG. 132 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed via FIG. 131 (b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 131 (b3-2). As an output sound from the speaker 120 here, a voice saying "Thank you for your patience" is output. Also, depending on the state before the demonstration screen is displayed, the outputted sound effects may change.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of the effect using the fluctuation icon.

  Here, the fluctuation icon h0 is summarized again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon related to a symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon changes to the change icon h0 simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon h11 with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the change icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or expressed as the change icon moves. You may Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variation icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variation icon. The variation icon h0 is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon h11 (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). Although this may facilitate identification of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11, it may have the same size. In addition, the variation icon h0 may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon h11. The fluctuation icon h0 can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation (the fluctuation notification) according to the display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that the notification of the success or failure result of the special drawing fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified. In addition to the default display mode (for example, a round non-pattern and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variation icon h0 are prepared as a display mode of normal notice, depending on the display mode. The big hit reliability (expected degree) is different. The higher the jackpot reliability, the more likely the jackpot symbol will be displayed finally. In the following description, the color represents the level of expectation of the big hit. The default white is a case where “no change” is selected in the effect drawing for the display mode of the variation icon h0. The default white fluctuation icon does not predict the jackpot expectation, but may predict the jackpot expectation (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest jackpot expectation). The white blink is the lowest in the jackpot expectation (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the display mode of the normal notice is so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in descending order of the expectation of the big hit. Gold is rich in big hit, and rainbow color has higher expectation of big hit than that, for example, it may be possible to say up to big hit determination. In addition, the relationship of this color is the same also in the color of the display mode of the advance notice by the hold icon. Below, when it is said that it is red or more, it becomes red, gold, and rainbow colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) performs variable display. In addition, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (A1). The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and on the right base icon bIr, in FIG. 133 (A1), the navigation character YM of the character of the lord is displayed. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 133 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started simultaneously with the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the symbol variation display, may disappear temporarily, or disappear from view. Further, the symbol variation display may be ended, and the symbol display may be continuously displayed while the stop display is displayed, or may be temporarily erased or invisible. And during the display of the next symbol variation display started continuously, it may be displayed continuously, may disappear temporarily, or may become invisible. Alternatively, the display may end while the next symbol variation display is displayed. Moreover, it may be displayed only in a part or all of the whole period during display of one symbol variation display, and may not be displayed while the next symbol variation display is displayed. This navigation character YM may be a so-called always-displayed character, but may not be continuously displayed in any case. Furthermore, the display mode may change while the navigation character YM continues to be displayed. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of this variation icon h0 is also the default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode).

  In FIG. 133 (A2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that when the display is made, another icon or the like may change. As another icon etc., it is a navigation character YM, it is a reserved icon h11, it is a fluctuation icon h0, it is a decoration pattern, etc. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the start of the display of the change preview display is the target to be changed. However, it may be an object to be changed even if the display is started at the same time as the start of the display of the change advance display or the display is started later. The player may or may not know what is to be changed when the display of the change preview display is started. Also, there may be suggestions on what to change. Furthermore, even if the change advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where it is a false notice that nothing changes depending on the change advance notice display. In addition, the target change display may be determined to be one, or it may be determined to be changed.

  The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 133 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only at the time of appearance, and when the icon I1 of the treasure box reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. As the appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, when the winning to the special figure starting opening (when the hold increases) At the start of advance notice of winning prize, at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-sequence effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, super reach At the start, you can list the super reach and so on. That is, as the appearance timing of the icon of the change preview display, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. In addition, there may be a plurality of display modes of the icon I1 of the treasure box, for example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode (difference in size, color, animation) of the treasure box or carpet. It is also good. In addition, with regard to the effect display that is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, such as the carpet icon I2, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or a state advantageous to the player The probability of changing to the display mode may be high. For example, the probability of changing the display mode to a high expectation of the big hit may be high. In addition, the change notice may be a display for changing only the navigation character, but there may be a case where the effect display (the hold icon, the change icon, the notice of the change, the advance notice, etc.) other than the navigation character is changed. It may be. In addition, among effects other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, talk notice, chance up meter, etc.), prefetch notice display (timer notice, background display for look-ahead mode etc.), etc. The navigation character may be configured not to be changed by the advance notice display in which one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or all the effect displays) is changed, but the navigation character may be changed. Good. In addition, the change advance notice display may be configured to change the navigation character more frequently than to change the effect display other than the navigation character, but conversely, the frequency to change the navigation character is the effect other than the navigation character It may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and two frequencies may be performed with the same frequency. Here, the effect display (navigation character, effect display other than navigation character) is displayed by "notice to change the effect display (change notice display, notice display to change the effect display other than the navigation character; hereinafter referred to as notice A)." In the case of being changed, when the less frequent effect display changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A, than when the effect display changed frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A Also, it may or may not be configured to be easily hit.

  In FIG. 133 (A 3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. The icon I1 of this treasure box is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 133 (A4-1), the display mode of the icon I1 of the treasure box changes. That is, a change animation is displayed, a treasure box is opened, a smoke image of an effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM and is more obvious than before the smoke image appears. It becomes difficult to see In the case where icons other than the navigation character YM are displayed, the smoke image may cover part or all of the display of the icons other than the navigation character YM from the front side. Also, the treasure box may not be opened. Furthermore, even if the treasure box is opened, another advance notice may be given. In FIG. 133 (A 5-1), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed. That is, the indigo (default color) kimono which the character of the navy character YM has been wearing is changed to a red kimono. The state in which it is suggested that the fluctuation icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change is that the change of the character of the character of the navy character YM has changed to a red kimono. It should be noted that when the icon I1 of the treasure box is displayed, it may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow kimono. In addition, it may be blinking white, blue or green. Also, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed corresponding to the color of the holding icon and / or the variation icon (for example, when green holding is displayed on the holding 2, the navigation character YM is green) Change into kimono, etc.). Here, if the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variation icon and / or the hold icon, and if the display mode of the hold icon and / or the variation icon changes more than one, it is digested first. The color of the holding icon or the variation icon may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character, or the color of the holding icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character. The color with high expectation for big hit may be displayed preferentially, and conversely, the color with low expectation for big hit may be displayed preferentially, and the degree of expectation for big hit regardless of the color of the reserved icon or the variation icon itself The high hold icon or the color of the change icon may be displayed, regardless of the color of the hold icon or the change icon itself, the hold icon or the low expectation of the big hit is low The color of the moving icon may be displayed, the color of the changing holding icon and / or the changing icon may all be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is changing the holding icon It may be displayed at random among the colors of the variation icons and / or. In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box whose lid is still open is still displayed next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has been changed. The icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear simultaneously with the appearance of the smoke image, or may disappear together with the smoke image. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (A6-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and in the effect icon display area DIS, only the navi character YM of the lady wearing a red kimono is displayed. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol continues to display at high speed.

  In FIG. 133 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, in the 2nd decoration symbol, temporary stop is not performed but three decoration symbols continue the change display. In FIG. 133 (A8), it is developed into super reach production (Kenou reach production), the background screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 changes to the background screen of the wilderness, and the left symbol temporarily stopped is the decoration symbol display device It moves to the upper left of 208, and the right symbol which is also temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene in which the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing is displayed. Further, in the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear and the first holding icon h11 also disappears. Further, although the height of the pedestal of the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navi character YM of the lord like wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire holding frame UI may be hidden. That is, the base hs0 'of the variation icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Furthermore, during the super reach effect, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be hidden. In addition, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navi character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Furthermore, during super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and all the variation icons h0 are hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, pedestal hs0 (hs0 ')) The right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, all of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be displayed to hide the hold frame UI.

  In FIG. 133 (A9), the navy character YM of the lord who had been standing facing the front turns to the variation icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is held and being held. In FIG. 133 (A10), the wave oscillates from the sword of the domino-like navigation character YM, and in FIG. 133 (A11), the fluctuation icon h0, which has been white, changes to red. As described above, the fluctuation icon of the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of the jackpot in the symbol fluctuation display which is currently performed. In FIG. 133 (A12), the main character of the navigation character YM has returned to the standing posture facing the front. The Tomonado navigation character YM shown in FIG. 133 (A12) is the display mode of the red kimono, but may be returned to the default display mode (display mode of the amber kimono).

  Although not shown in FIG. 133 (A13), the button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, it becomes possible to receive the operation of the chance button 136 by the player. In the remaining time display meter, the operation effective period starts and the gauge decreases. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, a cut-in image of Tonosama is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the big hit reliability is high. The cut-in image of Tonosama overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the cut-in image of Tonosama is not displayed. In addition, the cut-in image of the lady may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is deleted, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button effect is produced for the second time after developing into super reach. Is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can receive the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter, the operation effective period starts and the gauge decreases. In addition, the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after developing into the super reach, and in this case, it develops into the super reach The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button production after developing into the super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button rendering after the development into the super reach, or after developing into the super reach The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to the super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the first large-screen behavior character shown in FIG. 224 Ga to a fourth large-scale behavior character 224 Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left graphic and the right graphic of the effect image and the first decorative design are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article It is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. In addition, only a part of the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd may operate, or all of the first large-scale behavior character 224Gd may be operated, for example The reliability may be made to differ depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Gd operating. The effects of the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed also when the operation effective period has passed without any error. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is performed. Also, in the case where both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-size behavior character article 224Ga to fourth is performed. The operation of the large-screen behavior character item 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd are started, or the effect image And the operation of the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd may be simultaneously started. In addition, even when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, the effect display where the first large-scale behavior character object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224Gd is not performed is performed but the loss display is performed. It is also possible to display a resurrection effect after a rendition effect display is performed, and to perform a big hit effect display. In addition, when the effect that the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral goods thing GDd are started, although the fluctuation icon h0 currently displayed becomes non-display, you may continue to display.

  Thereafter, the one-handed box character 224H shown in FIG. 115 (a) operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. . Further, thereafter, light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. The display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224 Ga to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224 Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224 H, and the order of starting light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. It can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd, the operation of the one-man box character 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where no parting takes place.

  After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the one-hundred box character article 224H starts rising toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first to fourth large-screen behavior characters 224 Ga to 24 Gd start moving toward the initial position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 133 (A 14-1). In FIG. 133 (A 14-1), a scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other is displayed.

  The animation of the navigation character YM in FIG. 133 (A9) to FIG. 133 (A12) corresponds to an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 (hereinafter referred to as "change effect"). Although this change presentation can be viewed as part of the super reach presentation, it can also be viewed as another presentation different from the super reach presentation started with the start of the super reach presentation. As for the start timing of the change effect, other than during super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when symbol fluctuation starts, when movement of the fluctuation icon h0 is completed, when winning to the special figure starting opening (hold At the start of advance notice of winning at winning), success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-series effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state , Can be listed at the start of the super reach. That is, as the start timing of the change effect, all of the above listed items may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  In addition, also when the variation icon h0 changes, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed other than during the super reach effect, when the symbol variation starts, when the movement of the variation icon h0 is completed, the winnings to the special figure starting opening At the time (hold increase), at the start of advance notice at the time of winning, at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo sequence effect (at the start of revariation), reach At the start of the state, the start of the super reach etc. can be listed. That is, as the timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 changes, all of the above listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes may overlap with the button valid period in the button effect described above. Note that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may not be changed after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach effect described here is also a game effect, and includes a button effect, and is a type of so-called final judge effect in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the final judgment effect result is displayed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may not change. In addition, when an animation for changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed by the navigation character YM, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be always changed or a failure may be made. May be That is, the change effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 must be changed or when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed (if it succeeds) and when it is not changed (if it fails) There may be.

  In addition, the change animation of the change icon by the navigation character YM may not be performed. In that case, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbol is displayed are switched by the wipe at the end of the super reach effect. In addition, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be switched back to the default display mode (display mode of an amber kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM is used as a preview notice of the next symbol variation display The display mode as it is (display mode of red kimono) may be maintained.

  In FIG. 133 (A 15-1), a scene in which the host of the enemy character falls down and the hero of the lord has won is displayed, and the lord of the world navigation character YM is also posing for victory. However, although the middle design is not displayed yet, the middle design of "decoration 7" is displayed in the same drawing (A 16-1), but the red variation icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration is displayed. The symbol is also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of FIG. 16A, each symbol (left middle right symbol) of the first decorative symbol is in temporary stop (swing fluctuation). In FIG. 133 (A 15-1), a big hit animation by the main character may be executed.

  Here, it can also be seen that up to FIG. 133 (A 15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed is a super reach effect, but the middle symbol is displayed and it seems as if the victory is decided once (A 16-1 ) Can be viewed as super reach effect, or can be further advanced and viewed as super reach effect until just before stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and it is assumed that the super reach effect is being performed until the result of the final judge effect is determined (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed). It is also good. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the first decorative symbol starts fluctuation fluctuation with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the variation display is still performed on any of the second symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be non-display, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, although the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 are not displayed, the change icon h0 and the reserve icon of the special view 1 may be displayed. In addition, although display of the navigation character YM is not performed, display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, the first special view display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of the special view A. In addition, although the first special view display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined to be the symbol determination stop Since it is not present, the fluctuation fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the fluctuation display is still in progress in the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and In the 4 symbol display device, display is performed in a mode that the symbol has stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the big hit start effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  During the super reach, both the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect that is the final judge effect is started, a part or all of the holding frame UI may be configured to be hidden or disappear. For example, although the right base icon bIr has been displayed until then, the right base icon bIr may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judgment effect is started. In addition, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be configured to be hidden or disappear, or the navigation character YM may be configured to be hidden or not displayed. Both of the characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. In addition, when the hold icon is displayed so far, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Furthermore, the other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, when the icons are displayed until then.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (A 2-2) instead of FIG. 133 (A 2-1), there may be a case where a balloon display such as “Change !?” As shown in (2-3), a balloon display such as "in preparation for change" may be added. Thereafter, the processing returns to FIG. 133 (A3-1), and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to the notice effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notice display. That is, it is a notice that suggests that the navigation character itself may change, such as "Change !?" Within the fluctuation or “following the next fluctuation of the fluctuation indicated by“ in preparation for change ”).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 133 (A-3-1) instead of FIG. 133 (A-3-1), while the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is temporarily displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, In some cases, a carpet icon I2 appears and a treasure chest icon I1 flies away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 133 (A4-2) instead of FIG. 133 (A4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change advance notice display, it may give notice of the changing mode or change ease of the navigation character YM. In the case of FIG. 133 (2-4), it is predicted that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a kimono of the same color as smoke is worn. In addition, depending on the type of change animation in the change advance notice display, the expectation of the jackpot in the change or the hold may be announced.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 133 (A. 5-2) instead of FIG. 133 (A. 5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM does not change, and the navigation character Y. M. itself may become large. . As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be, in addition to the change in color, a change in size or a change in shape (e.g., pose). In addition, the color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 133 (5-2) may be indigo blue (default color) or may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 133 (A5-2) overlaps a part of the icon I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Note that a part of the navigation character YM may overlap with the entire icon I1 of the treasure box from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the icon I1 of the treasure chest may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

  In addition, as the probability of changing the variation icon h0, that is, the degree of expectation of the big hit, the default display mode is larger than the default display mode, the larger display mode with the default color is higher than the small display mode with red. The red and large display mode may be higher. In addition, as far as the size and the color are concerned, the color may be prioritized. For example, the display mode in red and small may be higher than the display mode in large by the default color. Or, conversely, the size may be prioritized, for example, the large display mode with the default color may be higher than the small display mode with red. Furthermore, as for the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, in addition to the large size and the small size, there may be a plurality of sizes such as intermediate sizes.

  When the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variation icon h0 changes to red, and when it is a display mode wearing a golden kimono, the variation icon h0 changes to gold, and a rainbow When the display mode is a color kimono, the variation icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the fluctuation icon h0 may be easily changed to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose expectation of the jackpot is red or more. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or more, or the color may be determined to be red or more. However, even if the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the expectation of the big hit may change to a color lower than red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Furthermore, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a rainbow-colored kimono, which is a premier color, is displayed, the color of the variation icon h0 may also be changed to the rainbow. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the display mode of the navigation character YM directly notifies that a big hit is made, and the navigation character YM is in another color. In the case of the display mode wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variation icon changes, it will be easy to make a big hit as a result, and the ease of big hit will be It can be notified indirectly.

  In addition, even when the display mode is not changed, the navigation character YM may change the fluctuation icon h0. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode changes. Furthermore, although the character of the protagonist is a so-called always-displayed character, the navigation character YM for changing the fluctuation icon h0 may be a character displayed only when changing the fluctuation icon h0. Also, the character may be displayed only when giving a notice. Furthermore, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as a character for changing the fluctuation icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in customization is the fluctuation icon It may be possible to use it as a character to change h0.

  FIG. 134 is a view showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Following FIG. 133 (A 6-1), a change notice display is made so as to return to FIG. 133 (A 7) via FIG. 134 (A 6-2-1) to FIG. (A 6-2-3). The navigation character YM may change a plurality of times until the icon I1 of the treasure box is hidden. The navi character YM shown in FIG. 134 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, but the navi character YM shown in FIG. 134 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and be displayed anew. Further, the change advance notice may be displayed over a plurality of changes. In this case, the icon I1 of the treasure chest repeats opening and closing.

  Also, following to FIG. 133 (A 6-1), change animations as shown in FIG. 134 (A 6-3-1) to the same figure (A 6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice (here, a UFO icon UFI) different from the change notice display. In the same figure (A 6-3-3a) continued from FIG. 134 (A 6-3-2), a gold beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI to the navigation character YM in a red kimono As shown in FIG. 134 (A6-3-4a), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a golden kimono is worn. Alternatively, in the same figure (A 6-3-3b) continuing from FIG. 134 (A 6-3-2), the gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed to the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono Irradiated, as shown in FIG. 134 (A 6-3-4b), the navigation character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono.

  Although the promotion has been described here, the navigation character YM may have no change even when the beam is irradiated (a so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode or There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn or a case where it becomes smaller (when it is demoted).

In addition, FIG. 134 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 133 (A 14-1), which is a scene after the majesty and the swordsman have cut each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle design, the "decoration 6" different from the left and right design ("decoration 7") is displayed (shaved) largely, and in the same figure (A 14-2-2), the left design, the middle design, the right All decorative symbols of the symbol are once displayed thinner than usual. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 134 (A 14-2-3), all of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed again in normal density, and in the same diagram (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed, and switching between a super reach presentation scene (display presentation) and a normal background (a background before the start of the super reach presentation shown in FIG. 133 (A1) or the like) is performed. In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 134 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily becomes a wipe display of non-pattern same color. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. Also, the model title is displayed at the left corner. The variation icon h0 or the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 134 (A 14-2-6), the screen is wiped out, and the background returns to the background normally, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. Note that the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (the timing of FIG. 134 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 134 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect ends, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing. There is. Further, the holding frame UI is also displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11 are also displayed. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 134 (14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or even if the variation icon h0 itself is erased. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In this example, although the display to return to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed is not visible because the navigation character is not displayed, the display to return to the default state from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed May be visible. (For example, the display may switch from a state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to a default state, or an animation display in which the state of the display mode of the navigation character may change to a default state.
In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM are displayed at the time of wipe out (FIG. 134 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. (A 14-2-7)), they are not displayed. There may be a case, and when it is displayed, the resurrection effect may be more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when displayed, the arrangement may be such that the resurrection effect is always performed, and when it is not displayed, the resurrection effect may or may not be performed.

  Further, in FIG. 134 (A 14-2-1) to FIG. (A 14-2-3), a part of the holding frame UI (the pedestal hs0 'and the right base icon bIr) is displayed The entire UI may be hidden, or only part of it may be hidden. The variation icon h0 may be hidden or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Also, if the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may also be hidden. Furthermore, the other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden if they have been displayed so far.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Following FIG. 133 (A 16-1), displays as shown in FIG. 135 (A 16-2-1) to the same figure (A 16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (A16-2-2), the entire screen starts to be thinned. After this, the re-lottery effect may disappear once, and the screen shown in FIG. 135 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again (the screen of the medal of victory), or FIG. 133 (A 14-2-3). The screen shown in) may be displayed (the screen of a martial arts defeat), or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a combination of big hit or lost) with a normal background as shown in the same figure (A 16-2-3) A screen may be displayed in which a combination is displayed).

  In addition, even on the redisplayed screen, the navigation character YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM and / or the fluctuation icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous big hit confirmation (for example, a definite variation) A big hit or a large number of rounds may be determined. Alternatively, if the display mode is not changed, an advantageous jackpot is not determined, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be determined, and the display mode is a gold or rainbow premium If so, an advantageous jackpot may be finalized.

  FIGS. 135 (1) to (12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of changes and also functions as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 135 (i), the navigation character YM in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 135 (2), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 135 (3), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed.

  In FIG. 135 (4-1), change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, the navy character YM of the lord who had been in a posture (initial posture) standing up to that time turns to the variation icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is held. In FIG. 135 (15), the wave oscillates from the sword of the domino navigation character YM, but in FIG. 135 (i), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 135 (i), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono is again displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 135 (i), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM of the display mode wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 135 (i), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 135 (i), the fluctuation icon h0 which has been white until now has changed to red, and a normal advance notice is started. In FIG. 12 (i), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture in the display mode in which the red kimono is worn. After that, although not shown, the jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed in the symbol variation display currently performed.

  Also, in FIG. 135 (FIG. 4-2-1) instead of FIG. 135 (FIG. 4-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS while symbol variation display is performed. In the same figure (4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be animation, or the display position may be switched instantaneously. Also, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, a business trip to the signboard at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS The icon display described as "inside" may be displayed.

  Note that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it is always successful (the display mode of the hold icon changes) Good. In addition, the change effect may be performed only on the pre-read target hold icon. For example, the first holding icon h11 may be performed only when the number of holdings is one, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include a variation icon) may be performed. Furthermore, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes for the pre-read target hold (until it succeeds), and may not be performed again if it fails once. .

  Further, the change presentation may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has once changed by the change presentation. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the change icon h0.

  Furthermore, the navigation character YM may move from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect with respect to the change icon h0. Further, the navigation character YM may not move out of the effect icon display area DIS, or may move within the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable out of the holding frame UI.

  In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every change from the next change of the change of the navigation character YM to red to the change of suspension of the prefetch target, There may be a change that does not perform change animation between the next change of the change in which the color of the navigation character YM turns red and the change of the prefetch target. Moreover, the change animation may be performed also for the change in which the navigation character YM turns red.

  FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the change effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM and the change effect of the change icon.

  In FIG. 136 (1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 136 (2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the holding frame UI. As shown in FIG. 136 (3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI to the second reserve icon h12, and as shown in FIG. 136 (4), the display mode of the second reserve icon h12 is The display mode changes from the default display mode to the white display mode. In other words, he has succeeded in promoting. Note that there are multiple types of effect icons, and the success probability of the promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be always succeeded, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more. If the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 136 (4), the UFO icon UFI has disappeared. In FIG. 136 (5), the three decorative symbols are in the temporary stop state. In FIG. 136 (6), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 136 (G7), the holding of the first held icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started, and in the figure (G8), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture.

  In (u 9) of FIG. 136, the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-draw pose, and a promotion effect of the holding icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 136 (Fig. 10), the arrow is fired, the arrow flies over the fluctuation icon h0, and in the same figure ((11)), the first holding icon h11 which is a display mode of white flickering is hit. In FIG. 12 (U), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from white blinking to blue display mode, and the promotion effect succeeds. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change) or, conversely, may succeed (the display mode of the hold icon changes). In addition, the first hold icon h11 may be performed only when the number of holds is 1, or a plurality of hold icons (which may include a variation icon) may be performed. Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes with respect to the prefetch target hold (until success), and may not be performed again if it fails once. Further, the promotion effect may be performed again on the hold icon whose display mode has been changed once by the promotion effect. In addition, even if a plurality of suspension icons are displayed, the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect performed only for one of the suspension icons (that is, the position of suspension icon A moves with reduction of suspension) Even in this case, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the holding icon A.), and the effects may be performed on a plurality of holding icons and / or variation icons displayed in the holding icon display area. . In FIG. 136 (B13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, and in FIG. It is done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 136 (15), the hold of the first reserve icon h11 is digested, and symbol variation display is started, and in FIG. 136 (16), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The fluctuation icon h0 is an icon changed from the first holding icon h11 that has been changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is similarly displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

  In FIG. 136 (U17), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (U18), the icon I2 of the carpet disappears, and the treasure box Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 136 ((19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM Is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. In FIG. 136 ((20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing shown in FIG. 136 (消 え 21), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and in the effect icon display area DIS, only the navi character YM of the lady wearing a red kimono is displayed. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit of the symbol variation display currently performed. Alternatively, it may represent the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the variation icon. Furthermore, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may indicate the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon.

  In FIG. 136 (う 23), the state is reached in the reach state, and in FIG. 136 (う 24), it is developed into the super reach effect. In the super reach presentation, of the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear, and when the holding icon remains, the holding icon also disappears. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 136 (24 24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navy character YM wearing the red kimono disappears. Also, although the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is sunk, the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 136 (FIG. 25) during super reach, the navigation character YM completely disappears, and the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0 '. Here, although the navigation character YM has disappeared, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. Also, both the pedestal hs0 'and the variation icon h0 may disappear, or only one may disappear.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (U 27-1), as a continuation of the super reach effect, a duel scene in which the main character of the hero and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness. . Here too, both the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed.

  FIG. 137 is a view showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 136, a modification and the like.

  In FIG. 137 (No. 29), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed thinner than usual, and a scene in which the crown is fallen is displayed. Here too, both the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (U30), the super reach effect is finished, and the background is returned to normal, and the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display, the pedestal hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 137 (う 31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol is restored, and the pedestal which has been sunk so far is starting to rise while carrying the fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (32), the combination of decorative symbols is displayed swaying, and the holding frame UI is also displayed again. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

  Also, in FIG. 137 (FIG. 20-2), instead of FIG. 136 (FIG. 20-1), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a premier rainbow kimono is worn. In this case, regardless of the display mode (color) of the variation icon h0, since the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow color, it is a big hit decision. Note that the display mode of the variation icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM functions as a pre-reading advance notice, the display mode of the pre-reading target reserved icon may also be changed to a red or higher display mode, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

  Also, instead of FIG. 136 (27 27-1), in FIG. 137 (う 27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and further, a navigation of the display mode in which a red kimono is worn Character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here does not have to do anything, just being displayed. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

  Here, the notice by the presentation icon (here UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice (here the treasure box icon I1) is a row before one decorative symbol (for example, left symbol) becomes a temporary stop indication Although it is configured such that no advance notice is given by the effect icon and / or change notice display after one decorative symbol has become temporary stop display, one decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped. The presentation icon and / or the change notice may be displayed afterward. In addition, although it described as one decorative symbol, it may be a plurality of decorative symbols, and may be all the decorative symbols. Further, in the state where the symbol (the variation display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the notice by the effect icon and / or the change notice display is not performed, but may be performed.

  FIG. 137 (E1) to FIG. (E 4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes the display mode of itself.

  In FIG. 137 (E1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial attitude. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 137 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM changes, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 137 (E-3-1), the navigation character YM itself is encased in a gray smoke image and becomes difficult to visually recognize, and in the example (E-4-1), the display mode changes to a red kimono. ing.

  Also, in FIG. 137 (E 3-2) instead of FIG. 137 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character Y M is a red kimono It changes to the display mode which wore. Thus, the change animation itself may give notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for giving notice that the display mode is changed to red or more if the change of the navigation character is successful, and it is determined that the display mode is changed to red or more It may be a notice display.

  Also, in FIG. 137 (E 3-3) instead of FIG. 137 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow smoke image, and the symbol variation display currently performed, or It becomes big hit decision (may be big hit rich) with the symbol fluctuation indication which is started after this. As described above, the change animation itself may be used to give a normal notice or a prefetch notice. The rainbow smoke image may be a display for giving notice that the display mode is changed to the rainbow color if the change of the navigation character is successful. In this case, the rainbow smoke image may be displayed even if the rainbow smoke image is displayed. It is not necessary for the color variation image and / or the inside of the displayed symbol variation and / or retention to be a big hit (which may be big hit).

  Also, in FIG. 137 (E 4-2) instead of FIG. 137 (E 4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has been changed to the princess's navigation character. The type of the changing character may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

  Further, in FIG. 137 (E4-3) instead of FIG. 137 (E 4-2), the navi character is changed to a navy character (for example, a game leader character) incapable of being selected by the player. In addition, the navigation character of the Bancho may be configured so that the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the variation icon may be more easily performed than the navigation character YM, or the symbol variation and / or the holding in which the navigation character is changed It may be configured to have a high expectation of the inner jackpot.

  In addition, the navigation character of the princess (bancho) may be configured to be more likely to perform the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon than the navigation character YM, or the symbol fluctuation and the navigation character changed. And / or may be configured to have a high expectation of a jackpot in the hold, or is configured to be prone (or necessarily generated) to be a notice and / or a super reach effect in which a princess (bancho) appears It may be

  In addition, when the navigation character YM changes to another navigation character, it may be configured to change only to the navigation character selectable by the player, so that the player is changed to the navigation character which can not be selected. It may be configured, and there may be both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and cases where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. When the player is changed to a selectable navy character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navy character, the player can select more than the selectable navy character. The impossible navigation character may be configured to be more easily effective in promoting the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon, or the symbol fluctuation in which the navigation character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot within the holding is high. It may be configured as follows. Conversely, when the player is changed to a selectable navy character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navi character, there are cases in which the player can play a game rather than the non-selectable navy character. The navigation character selectable by the person may be configured to facilitate promotion of the holding icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation in which the navigation character is changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot within the holding It may be configured to have a high degree.

  Further, in FIG. 137 (E4-4) instead of FIG. 137 (E4-1), the character does not change, and its own change presentation has failed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM itself is an example of changing the display mode of itself alone, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is not involved, but the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is displayed. The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be notified in advance. For example, when the icon I1 of the red treasure box appears, the navigation character YM may be determined to change to a red, or a display mode of red or more.

  Furthermore, the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box may give notice of the expectation of the jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display or the symbol variation display to be started thereafter. That is, depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure chest, a normal notice or a advance notice may be given.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily not visible.

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (O). Also, the navigation character YM in the initial attitude shown in FIG. 138 (1) is a default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  In FIG. 138 (2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 138 (O), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. In addition, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (O).

  In FIG. 138 (5), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the sea background is still displayed.

  In FIG. 138 (6), a background change notice, which is a type of pre-reading notice, is started. The target of background change notification here (prefetch target hold) is the hold (second hold at this timing) increased at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (2). In the background change notice, the image of the eyebrow appears from the left and right, and the eyelid is closed, so the entire display screen becomes an eyebrow image (see FIG. 138 (7)). Therefore, both the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navi character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelid and become invisible. It should be noted that, instead of the image of the eyebrow, an image overlapping from the front may appear on a part of the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the image may not be overlapped with the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM.

  It should be noted that the background change advance notice may be started at the time of pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 138 (2) timing). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In addition, in the background change notice, the big hit expectation of the pre-reading target hold may be expressed by the appearance image (here, the image of 襖), or if the navigation character YM of the same color as the 襖 color is appearing The navigation character YM functions as a notice of change and corresponds to a change notice display. In addition, it may also function as a notice of the background itself that the color of a rose changes to the background of a mountain if it is green. Furthermore, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 138 (O), the eyelids are open, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to be visible, and in FIG. It is gone. By the background change notice, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the night background. Further, the navigation character YM after the background change is changed to a character dependent on the changed background. Here, the character of the robot is changed from the character of the lord. In this example, one kind of character corresponds to one kind of background, but plural kinds of characters may correspond to one kind of background.

  In FIG. 138 (11), the reach state is entered. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode from FIG. 138 (9-1) to FIG. 138 (11). The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode in response to the reach state rush. Although the holding frame UI is displayed, all the holding icons h11 and h12 have disappeared. Then, it develops into super reach production and changes to the background of super reach production (here the background of the wilderness). On the background of the wilderness, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (13) displays a scene where the lord has been defeated. The fallen character of the robot, the navigation character YM of the robot, overlaps and is difficult to view.

  In FIG. 138 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the wipe-in causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to be a wipe display. As shown in FIG. 138 (15), in the wipe display here, the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM also disappear, and also the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display disappear, and the model title is displayed at the left corner Is only displayed. In FIG. 138 (16), the user wipes out, and the background returns to the background of the night, and the navigation character YM also begins to be visible.

  In FIG. 138 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing. In addition, the holding frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the variation icon h0 in the red display mode and the holding icons h11 and h12 are resumed.

  In FIG. 138 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” which is a combination of losing.

  Thereafter, the first suspension is digested and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 138 (20-1), the next symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the symbol change of the pre-reading target hold is ended, but the background remains the background of the night.

  In FIG. 138 (21), the background change notice is started again, the image of the eyebrow appears from the left and right, and the eyelid is closed, so that the entire display screen becomes an eyebrow image here (FIG. 138 (22)) reference). In FIG. 138 (23), the eyelids open, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the fluctuation icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to be visible, and in FIG. It is gone. As shown in FIG. 138 (24), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is returned to the background of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also returned to the character of the lord.

  Further, in FIG. 138 (9-2) instead of FIG. 138 (9-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the background dependent character may also change according to the reliability of the big hit. Or, it may be originally changed.

  The navigation character YM may change depending on the presentation background regardless of the background of the advance notice. For example, when a beach background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character may be changed to the navigation character YM depending on each background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. When the player changes the effect mode, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed on the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed on the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed on the effect background A. Here, when a navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, it is configured that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the fluctuation icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. It may be configured such that the expectation of jackpot in symbol variation and / or retention with which the navigation character has changed is high (or jackpot confirmation (may be jackpot rich)), The notification and / or the super reach presentation may be configured to occur frequently (or occur necessarily) when a navigation character that does not match the background appears.

  Alternatively, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background change is performed, or may not change absolutely.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of effects in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 139 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 139 (or 2-1), a balloon of a line calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to the notification that the other character (爺 or princess) is displayed, which is performed by the currently-displayed Tonosama's navigation character YM. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-1), the display of the navi character YM1 of the princess in addition to the domino character YM is added, and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be animation display, or may be an appearance appearing instantaneously. In the case of the animation display, it may be an animation in which the character is not visible initially by the smoke image, or may be an animation appearing by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess's navigation character YM1 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 139 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. Both of the default display modes, the Tonosama's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1 are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 139 (or 5), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even if the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 remain displayed. Thus, the display of a plurality of navigation characters may span multiple variations. However, in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears, the appearing navigation character YM1 may disappear. Even in this case, the navi character (here, the navi character YM here) previously displayed is displayed across a plurality of changes.

  In FIG. 139 (or 5), a balloon of a line calling a whistle is added to the two navigation characters YM and YM1 this time, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 139 (or 6-1) is displayed. In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, a display of a navy navigation character YM2 is added, and it succeeds in calling a whistle. In other words, this means that all three people are all ready. In this effect, the more the navi characters gather, the higher the probability that the fluctuation icon h0 changes, the higher the probability of changing to a premiere or a color close to the premiere, and the higher the expectation for a big hit with the fluctuation. Or, the expectation to hit the jackpot may increase after the next change. In addition, if all three of them are gathered, the rainbow color of the premiere may be determined or the big hit may be determined. In FIG. 139 (or 7-1), in a state in which all three persons are aligned, the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Further, in FIG. 139 (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given in place of FIG. 139 (or 2-1). That is, in FIG. 139 (or 2-1), the line of the navigation character YM is a notice, but in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. . The roulette advance notice here may be dedicated to the advance notice of the appearance of another navi character, or may be another advance notice (such as a hold change advance notice). In FIG. 139 (or 2-2), the character of a princess is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess's navigation character YM1 may appear, but there may be cases where no navigation character appears (in the case of a so-called failure), or different navigation characters (for example, the navy navigation character YM2) May appear. Although the roulette display icon RI is configured not to display the characters of the characters that have already appeared, the characters of the characters that have already appeared may appear. In that case, the same character may be displayed more than once depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, when the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the princess's Three characters may be displayed, etc., or a promotion effect may be performed on a character that has already appeared according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 characters of a princess on the roulette display icon RI) If the display is stopped once, the princess appears at the first time, the kimono of the princess turns red at the second time, the kimono of the princess turns gold at the third time, etc.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-2), as shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-2), no navigation character may appear and fail.

  Further, instead of FIG. 139 (or 3-1), in the figure (or 3-3), not the princess's navigation character YM1 but the navy navigation character YM2 has appeared. As described above, the order of appearance is not determined, and different animation may be performed depending on the navi character displayed next. For example, in FIG. 139 (or 3-1), even though it was thought that the princess navigation character YM would come with the princess navigation character YM1, the animation where the navy navigation character YM2 came and was surprised is displayed The princess may come in the premiere stage before the princess. In addition, depending on the appearance order of the character, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon h0 changes, the probability of changing to the premiere or color close to the color changes, the expectation of hitting the big with the change changes, or the big hit occurs after the next change. The degree of expectation may change or not affect them at all.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be determined in advance by the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-4-1), the domino-like navi character YM is displayed at the left end, and the princess navi character YM1 is displayed with a gap of one. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-4-3), the navy navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position which is open for one person. As described above, even when the order of display positions (don't, mochi, princess) is fixed, there may be cases (might, princess, mochi) when the order is broken. It may be (big hit finalization effect) or big hit.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 139 (or 3-5-1) instead of FIG. 139 (or 3-1), when the navi characters increase, a notification of the increase is displayed by a character display (here, “Hime Stock” Or may be notified by sound from a speaker, or may be notified by blinking of a lamp or the like. Further, in FIG. 139 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all the members have been gathered is notified by character display. In addition, when all members set successfully, the character display of "all members set" is always displayed, but different character display (for example, "super hot" or "all members set reach", etc.) is displayed. In the case, it may be a premiere effect (big hit finalized effect) or a big hit, or a specific reach mode may always be started. Also here, in addition to the notification of the character display, or in place of the notification of the character display, the notification may be made by voice from the speaker, or may be performed by blinking the lamp or the like.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 139 (or 6-2) instead of FIG. 139 (or 6-1), characters other than the lord, princess, and nephew (here, the character YM3 of the mince flower imitating a cactus) increase. When it is, it may be premier production (big hit finalized production) or big hit.

  In addition, even though "hime" is specified and called, if "爺" is displayed, it may be the premier effect (big hit finalized presentation) or it may be a big hit, and "hime" is called If “爺” is displayed more often, if the character (“Hime”) as it is called appears, it may be jackpot rich (or jackpot determined). In addition, depending on the display mode of the navigation character (in this example, the lord) calling another navigation character, the other navigation character may be easy to appear (stock) or hard to appear (stock). Also, depending on the type of navigation character calling another navigation character, it may be easy for another navigation character to appear (stock) or hard to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for another navigation character to appear (stock) if the princess's navigation character calls than the lord's navigation character. Also, the appearing (stock) characters are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation characters. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of the Toho-sama's navigation character YM may be displayed, or there may be a case where it is expressed as Tonosama × 3. Moreover, even if it is the same kind of navigation character, the display modes (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Furthermore, depending on the character, the effect to be performed after being displayed may be different. For example, when an effect is performed in which the character is released from the effect icon display area DIS, the pseudo-series effect start may be released when releasing the lord, the suspension may be promoted when the princess is released, and the timer advance may be started when the bag is released. . Also, a plurality of characters may be released. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are discharged at the same time, effects different from single discharge may be performed. For example, simultaneous release of the princess and the princess may start a pseudo-series effect that is hotter than the single princess.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a modification etc. shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 140 (1), the default display form of the lord-like navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of it, the default display form of the princess navigation character YM1 is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess's navigation character YM1, a treasure chest icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 140 (2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the navigation character YM1 of the princess among the navigation character YM of the lord and the navigation character YM1 of the princess It is wrapped in an image. In other words, the smoke image does not reach the navi character YM of the lord. In FIG. 140 (4), the smoke image disappears, and the princess's navigation character YM1 is changed to the display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In FIG. 140 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box has disappeared.

  In FIG. 140, instead of FIG. 140, the pose of the navigation character YM of the lord changes and raises the hand with a fan. In FIG. 140 (2 2-2-2), the Tomonado navigation character YM causes a smoke image to appear, and only the princess navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 140 (2-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the princess's navigation character YM1 changes to the display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In addition, you, the navigation character YM of the lord has returned to the initial posture.

  In Fig. 140 (3-1) instead of Fig. 140 (3-1), the smoke image appearing from the icon I1 of the treasure box is both the domino character YM and the princess character YM1. It wraps the navi character. Then, in FIG. 140 (3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and the domino-like navigation character YM and the princess navigation character YM1 both change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. That is, the display mode is changing for both of them. Here, both of them change to the same color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both may be enveloped in the smoke image, but only one may change, the other may remain default.

  When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted, and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, changing one of the characters (for example, princess) may be hotter than when changing the other character (for example, Yoshimune), and the jackpot expectation may be the same. Also, the change of both characters may be hotter than the change of one character. Also, it may be hotter to change one character depending on the change mode than to change both characters. For example, a combination of the default display form of the lord-like navi character YM and the combination of the princess navi-character YM1 of the display aspect in the iridescent kimono and the display modi The combination of the former and the combination of the princess's navigation character YM1 of the display mode in which the kimono is worn may be more likely to make a big hit than the combination of the latter. Also, both characters may be required to change. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or may be configured to change to a different color. Also, depending on the changing character, the meaning of the changed character may change. For example, in the case of the display manner of the display manner in the red kimono, the variation is hot, and in the case of the princess of the display manner of the red kimono of the display manner, the navigation character of YM1 is likely to develop into super reach. It is also good. In addition, if it is a big hit determined if it is a display character like a kimono with rainbow color, it is a big hit, and if it is a princess navigation character YM with a rainbow colored clothes, it will be a big hit with definite variation ( May be an advantageous jackpot).

  In this example, the navigation character YM is displayed when one navigation character is always displayed and another navigation character is newly called by the navigation character or when a plurality of navigation characters are always displayed. The present embodiment is also applicable to the case where one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing because there is a period of time that is not set.

  FIGS. 140 (1-1) to 10 ((7)) show examples of effects in which the button effect is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 140 (G1-1), the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 140 ((2-1). The button display icon 136D is a display mode of a balloon and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 140 (3), the operation effective period is started, and in FIG. 140 (4), the remaining period meter is slightly reduced. In FIG. 140 (c), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 140 (c), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the character of the lord is visually recognized by the effect image. It is difficult. In (140) of FIG. 140, the character changes to a lord-like navi character in a display manner in which a red kimono is worn.

  In FIG. 140 (1-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, when the back button effect is performed and the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 140 (1-2-2), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in FIG. 140 (1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM is started. Thus, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed by the back button effect.

  Note that when both the back button effect and another button effect (with a button display) overlap, both may change, the back button effect may be prioritized, and another button effect may be prioritized. The same may be applied to back button duplication.

  In addition, when the prefetch button advance notice and the button advance notice of the change (normal advance notice) overlap, the prefetch button advance notice may be prioritized, or the button advance notice of the change may be prioritized.

  Further, in place of the navigation character YM, the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM in FIG. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and also outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed also by this different notice. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be always displayed, or may be displayed before the effective period is started.

  FIG. 141 shows an example of effect in which the effect of the button hold icon is associated with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 141 (G-3-1), the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. A first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 141 (G-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the change. When the chance button 136 is operated in Fig. 141 (1-3-2a), a smoke image of the effect appears as shown in (Fig. 1-3-3a), and the smoke image causes navigation Part or all of the character YM is hidden, and is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is deleted, and no change (for example, change in display mode) occurs in the first hold icon h11. That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation effective period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself are configured not to change. However, it may be possible to shift to the same diagram (1-3-4) described later via the state shown in FIG. 141 (1-3-3a).

  When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 141 (1-3-3a), the button image 136a disappears with respect to the button holding icon, as shown in FIG. An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 141 (1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the white circle display to the blue circle display mode. In addition, there may be a case where the display form of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 141 (1-3-3a), the processing shown in FIG. 141 (31-3-3b2) is not performed via (FIG. 1-3-3b1). As shown, the icon that was the button hold icon may change to a display mode of blue circle display without changing animation.

  Alternatively, as shown in Fig. 141 (く 1-3-3b1) and as shown in Fig. (く 1-3-4), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change as it is displayed as a white circle, but the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. Here, the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is not the change animation when it passes through FIG. 141 (く 1-3-3b1), but the display mode is instantaneously changed, and the same figure ((1-3 In the case of passing 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, when passing through FIG. 141 (1-3-3b1), change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. The change may occur immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or may change with a slight delay. Also, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 141 (1-3-3a), it is shown in FIG. 141 (31-3-4) without passing through the diagram (3-3-3b1). Thus, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

  In addition, even if the button hold icon is displayed, when the next change is started without operating the chance button (Fig. 141 (く 1-3-2b1)) (the change of the first decorative symbol still starts) In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol is started (but not shown), the variation icon h0 may be a button holding icon, as shown in FIG. In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next change, and when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 141 ((1-3-2b3 '). The white circle display in which the button image 136a is displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). At the time of change, change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. In addition, although the display mode of the navigation character YM is not changed, it may be changed. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the fluctuation icon h0, and any change (for example, change in display mode) also occurs in the white circle display where the button image 136a was displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change presentation from the button holding icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, the button hold icon may not be changed if the next change is started without operating the chance button, the button hold icon may be a chance. It may be configured to be automatically changed after the next change is started without operating the button.

  Also, even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next change is started without operating the chance button (Fig. 141 ((1-3-2b1)), the same figure ((1-3 As shown in −2 b 2 ′), the change icon h 0 may be affected by the effect image, and the change animation may be started. In this case, there may be a case where the process proceeds to FIG. 141 (1-3-2 b 3 ′) or a case may be a transition to FIG.

  The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 141 (c-3-1) is the default display mode, but the same is true for the navigation character YM in the promoted display mode. That is, the second promotion is performed in FIG. 141 (1-3). If there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Also, the hold icon, which has already changed, may be changed by the operation of the button due to the button hold icon being displayed.

  In addition, when eight pending icons are displayed, for example, when N are saved, the pending icon changes to a partial or all button pending icon, and the pending icon, the variation icon, and the navigation character YM are changed according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four pending icons are displayed.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (one), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In (142) of FIG. 142, the hold of the special view 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 142 (step 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In (142) of FIG. 142, the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 is changed to the blue display mode according to the start of the symbol variation display. In addition, even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 142 (step 5-1), and the smoke image disappears in FIG. 142 (step 6-1), and a domino character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The character of the navigation character YM of the lord shown in FIG. 142 (6-1) is a default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the prefetch target hold (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change).

  It should be noted that the appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of pre-reading target hold winning (FIG. 142 (timing 2) timing). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be always displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when an effect lottery is won.

  In FIG. 142 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode whose display is started during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here is still displayed in the initial posture.

  Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 142 (9-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM of the default display mode. It is displayed. In the navi character YM, the display mode is changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono according to the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 133 (4-1) (FIG. 142 (step 11)). In addition, even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be the default display mode. In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box may not appear, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. That is, there may be a case where no change advance display is performed.

  In FIG. 142 (13), the change of the prefetch target hold is started, and the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, although the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, after being displayed, it is always displayed across multiple variations.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may disappear when the currently held change of the pre-reading target hold is finished. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (swing display) and the symbol stop in the variation of the decoration symbols of the pre-read target hold, and one or two decoration symbols May disappear after temporary stop (first stop or second stop).

  Further, the navigation character YM may disappear at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 142 (7), and may not be displayed across the variation.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 142 (No. 5-1), as shown in FIG. 142 (No. 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to only the effect icon display area DIS, but a pending icon It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, there may be a plurality of places where the navigation character YM is displayed, and the navigation character YM may be displayed also in the variable icon display area CIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may perform different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, the hold icon may be changed, and when displayed in the change icon display area CIS, the change icon may be changed. Further, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon may be different depending on the display position, and the reliability of the big hit may be different. The navigation character YM may be displayed only in one display area (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 142 (No. 5-1), as shown in FIG. 142 (No. 5-1), the navigation character YM can be moved within the reserved icon display area HIS (within the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed on the hold icon so as to overlap from the front side.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (No. 5-1), as shown in FIG. 142 (No. 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

  The navigation character may perform an animation of moving a plurality of display areas (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (6-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is in high speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes.

  After that, the reserve digesting continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (6-2-3a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost version is displayed in a swinging state without a reserve. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (6-2-4), the combination of the decorative symbols in the lost state is stopped and displayed in the state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

  In Fig. 143 (6-2-6), there is a prize in the first special view starting port 230 without any suspension, and symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet begun variation. , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this time, the default display mode navigation character YM is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (け 6-2-7), an increase animation of a hold icon indicating a hold that has already been digested (hold of the started symbol variation display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 143 (6-2-7) is lightly displayed, and the deletion animation of the navigation character YM is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (6-2-8), the first decorative symbol does not yet start to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. In fact, although FIG. 143 (6-2-6) to the same figure ((6-2-8)) are events during a moment, the deletion animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of the symbol variation display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearing timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be simultaneous with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol It may be after the start of the In addition, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, simultaneously with the start of the hold increase animation, or even after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 143 (6-2 3 b 1) instead of FIG. 143 (6-2 3 a 1), the reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state Some may be configured to not change, or conversely, they may change during reach conditions. Also, the display mode of the variation icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

  In FIG. 143 (D6-2-3b2), the game is developed to produce super reach, and in the same drawing (D6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 143 (6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed with the default display mode.

  In addition, when the navigation character YM develops into super reach, the display mode may be promoted, and conversely, the display mode is configured not to promote into the super reach and in the case of normal reach, the display mode is not promoted. May be Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be promoted in the display mode even in the normal reach. For example, it may be promoted as a prefetch notice after the next change. In addition, when the "Navi-character promotion" symbol stops in the middle symbol at the time of normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Furthermore, the display mode may be promoted as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

  After that, in FIG. 143 (D6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described using FIG. 134 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Fig. 6-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of losing, is displayed shaking. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (6-2-3b6), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also default. It is displayed as it is.

  When Fig. 143 (6 6-2-1) to (け 6-2-8) and (け 6-2-3b1) to (け 6-2-3b6) are put together, symbol variation of pre-reading target suspension is finished. Even when the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as a notice corresponding to the pre-read target hold (pre-read notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden and the next change is started It is erased when. In addition, the navigation character is before the symbol variation of the pre-reading target suspension ends (for example, before the decoration symbol becomes one or a plurality of temporary stop display, at the same time as temporary stop or temporary stop, or the decorative symbol All of them (three in this example, left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol) become temporary stop display and at the same time as temporary stop becomes temporary stop, symbol (special figure) becomes stop display The symbol may be erased before (e.g.) or may be erased after the symbol variation of the pre-reading target suspension is finished (simultaneously with the symbol (special figure) becoming the stop display or after the stop display).

  FIG. 144 shows an example in which a maximum of eight pending icons are displayed.

  In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144, the variation icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed. Further, at the right end, a presentation icon display area DIS is provided. The reserved icon display area HIS is located between the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (a1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, it is displayed that the number of reservations for Special Figure 1 is "3" and the number of reservations for Special Figure 2 is "2" in the second number of reservations display, and a total of five suspension icons are displayed. There is. These five hold icons are all default display modes.

  In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 144, when the number of holdings is five, the stage corresponding to the sixth holding is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). In addition, until the 3rd reserve is stored, it is white until the 4th stage, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when the 4th reserve is stored, it is white until the 5th stage and the 6th and later Stage turns gray. Thus, although the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of reservations, the stage may always be the same display mode regardless of the number of reservations.

  Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (this section a1).

  In Fig. 144 (this a2), the suspension of the special figure 2 is increased by one, and in the same diagram (this a3), the suspension increase animation is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same diagram (this a4), the suspension icon Six are displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Also, the seventh stage hs7 turns white, and the gray stage is the eighth stage hs8 only.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (a5), the navi character YM of the default display mode appears, and a balloon of "full with 2 more" is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of reservations is N or more (6 or more in this example).

  In Fig. 144 (this a6), the suspension of the special figure 1 is increased by one, and seven decoration icons are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in this diagram (this a7), and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. There is a balloon that says "One more to fill". The seventh hold icon h7 added is also the default display mode. In addition, the final eighth stage hs8 also turns white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

  In FIG. 144 (this a8), the suspension of the special view 2 is increased by one, and eight decoration icons are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in this diagram (this a9), and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. The balloon "full tank" is added to. Note that the added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. Note that, in this example, the navigation character YM uses a balloon to notify the number of reservations, but this may not be performed.

  In this example, when eight reservations are stored (when full), the navigation character YM may change. In FIG. 144 (here a10), the navi character YM is encased in a smoke image. The smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image, it does not necessarily change, and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may always change. In addition, the navigation character YM may be configured to be changed whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 144 (here a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, and a balloon such as “Hold inside the reservation is hot” is added to the navigation character YM, and the advance notice is executed. . The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. In addition, by the notice displayed on the balloon, the degree of expectation to the big hit in the hold may be announced. Further, in this example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the suspension is full, but the navigation character may change in the next variation of the symbol variation in which the suspension is full. Also, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the symbol variation may be notified by changing the navigation character.

  The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, but may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. Also, there may be multiple types of appearing characters, and the heat may be different depending on the character. For example, even if the princess navigation character in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigation character in the red kimono mannering in the display mode, or even if the navy character in the head length is hotter than the lord animation character Good.

  FIG. 145 shows an example of effect in which a decorative symbol of common drawing is entangled with a navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 145 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, a special figure 1 first reserve icon h11 of a circle representing the reserve of the special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 1st hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, in FIG. 145 (this b1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here is for displaying the variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and as the outcome, "○", "×", and "super" as a big hit notice of the special figure of the variation. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 145 (this b2), “o” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is informed that the popular drawing lottery has been won.

  In FIG. 145 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM is a default display mode, and appears at the moment of winning the common drawing lottery. In the following FIG. 145 (this b4), since the winning drawing lottery was won, the electric chew is released, and the navigation character YM is announcing that the electric chow is being released. In FIG. 145 (this b5-1), there is a winning after the special figure 2 start opening 232 because the electric chew is open, and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 increases to four full. In FIG. 145 (this b6-1), it is displayed that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is “1” and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is “4” in the second number of reservations display. Four rhombic suspension icons are displayed, each of which represents 2 suspension (special figure 2 first suspension icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth suspension icon h24). Note that the four special figure 2 suspension icons h21 to h24 are all default display modes. The pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, and the reserve icon of the reserve icon is displayed with priority over the reserve icon of the special figure 1 with the reserve icon, and the reserve icon of the special figure 2 is the special figure 1 It is displayed so that it may overlap from a front on a part of pending icon of.

  In FIG. 145 (this b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is ended, and in the subsequent figure (this b8), the opening time of the electric chew has ended, so the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. It is being In addition, the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until the symbol variation display of suspension of special drawing 2 is all finished. In FIG. 145 (here b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 145 (this b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial attitude. In FIG. 145 (this b12), the suspension of the special figure 2 first suspension icon h21 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (this b13), the variation icon of the special figure 2 As rhombus fluctuation icon is displayed on pedestal hs0.

  In FIG. 145 (here b14), the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image. The smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is encased in a smoke image, it does not necessarily change, and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may always change. Also, the navigation character YM may be configured to be changed whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may be wrapped in a smoke image or may not change.

  In FIG. 145 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, and a balloon "This variation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal advance notice is executed. There is. Further, the advance notice is also executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

  Also, in FIG. 145 (here b15-2-1), instead of FIG. 145 (here b15-1), the navigation character YM is still in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. In addition, a balloon "this variation is" is added to the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the reserve digestion of the special view 2 proceeds, and the symbol variation display of the final special view 2 is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (here b15-2-3). Here too, the balloon character “this variation is” is added to the navigation character YM, and effects by the navigation character YM are performed continuously from the previous FIG. 145 (this b15-2-1). In FIG. 145 (here b15-2-4), the balloon character “farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is ended. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (here b15-2-5). When the navigation character YM is hot, the navigation character YM may not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may further continue, but the navigation character YM may always disappear. In addition, even when the super reach effect is started between FIG. 145 (this b15-2-1) and the same figure (this b15-2-4), the effect by the navigation character YM continues and the navigation character YM is displayed. Alternatively, the effect by the navigation character YM may end, and the navigation character YM may disappear.

  The navigation character YM described in FIG. 145 (b1) to FIG. (B15-1) and in FIG. 145 (b15-2-1) to FIG. The pre-reading advance notice is not made, but the pre-reading advance notice may be made.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example in which a change advance notice display is displayed on standby.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of the special view 1 are stored, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (1), the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In FIG. 146 (2), the hold of the special view 1 is increased, and the third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in the present example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is a prefetch target hold.

  In FIG. 146 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 146 (S4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, even if the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 146 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2. Although the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is a preview display for changing the display mode of the navigation character YM, in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, by the appearance of the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display, it is notified (predicted) that the navigation character YM may also appear in the future. The icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed as it is on the carpet icon I2.

  In FIG. 146 (Sa), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The navigation character YM has not appeared yet, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 146 (S8), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 146 (Sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost design. The navigation character YM has not appeared yet, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is kept on standby.

  In FIG. 146 (10-1), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is kept on standby. In this manner, the icon I1 of the treasure box may be displayed in a standby manner across a plurality of changes.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 146 (11-1), a smoke image is displayed, and in FIG. 146 (12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the maroon is in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The navigation character YM of Tonosama shown in FIG. 146 (12) is a default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to the advance notice that the navigation character YM appears. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not necessarily appear, and may not appear. In addition, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may be displayed without fail. In addition, when the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM may be configured to appear without fail.

  It should be noted that the appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of pre-reading target suspension winning (FIG. 146 (the timing of 2)). In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed as long as it is reserved for the pre-reading object, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won. In this example, the icon of the treasure box of the change advance notice display and the navigation character YM are pre-read advance notices performed on the same pre-reading target hold (in the present example, hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 146 (2)). Although the icon of the treasure box of the change notice display may differ from the pre-read target hold of the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 146 (12), when the domino-like navigation character YM appears, thereafter only the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the icon I1 of the treasure chest icon of the change notice display is ended in the standby display.

  In FIG. 146 (S14), the change of the prefetch target hold is started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the prefetch target hold. In FIG. 146 (15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside, and it wraps around the domino character YM. In FIG. 146 (Sa 16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the nama character navi character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  In addition, the change effect of the navigation character YM using the icon I1 of the treasure box may be started at the time of winning of the prefetch target hold (the timing of FIG. 146 (2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed as long as it is reserved for the pre-reading object, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  Also, instead of FIG. 146 (10-1), in the same figure (10-2-1), the Toho-sama navigation character YM does not appear, but the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box of the change notice is displayed. The icon I1 has not been displayed on standby. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 146 (10-2-2), and the smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the fluctuation icon h0, and the navigation character The display position of YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 146 (10-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may also appear and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may also change. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may not appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change.

  Also, in place of FIG. 146 (11-1), although the smoke image is displayed in FIG. (11-2), the icon I2 of the carpet disappears without the navigation character YM being visible again. The icon I1 of the treasure chest of the change notice display is on standby display. Thus, the timing at which the standby display ends may be before the navigation character YM appears. Further, the timing at which the standby display ends may be simultaneous with the appearance of the navigation character YM. Furthermore, it may be timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, timing of stop display of the decorative symbol, or timing of start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. Although the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold after the standby display of the change preview display is finished, the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change preview display is finished. (For example, the fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation at which the standby display is ended, and the fluctuation at the end of the standby display may be mentioned). In addition, although the change preview display is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change preview display ends, the change preview display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display The change after the next change of the change of which the was finished, and the change in which the standby display is finished are included).

  Furthermore, instead of FIG. 146 (13), the icon I2 of the carpet disappears and the icon I1 of the treasure box and the navigation character YM are displayed in FIG. 13-2-2), neither the treasure box is opened nor the navigation character YM is changed nor the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, and both the icon I1 of the treasure box and the navigation character YM Is gone. As such, although the navigation character YM appears, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Among the icon I1 of the treasure box and the icon of the navigation character YM, only the icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. Also, when both icons disappear, both may disappear simultaneously, the icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear first, and the navigation character YM may disappear first.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of effect using a holding frame different from the holding frame described above.

  The holding frame UI shown in FIG. 147 (1) is a closed type which is expanded over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, although the holding frame UI described so far is the same as the component (the pedestal hs0 etc.), in the state of FIG. 147 (1), in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, The other area is firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2 and the right frame UIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other area, and the sea background is displayed in the holding frame UI. Is not shown. In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 147 (1), the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the holding frame UI is displayed. Is promoted by changing these colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 (1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed on the front side of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end of the decorative symbol changing at high speed is overlapped from the front by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative symbol may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Furthermore, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 147 (2-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display appears on the icon I2 of the carpet, and in the figure (3), only the icon I2 of the carpet disappears and the icon I1 of the treasure box , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 147 (4), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, an icon in which the character display is displayed appears from the inside, and the promotion of the holding frame UI is notified (notice). In FIG. 147 (5), the holding frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. In addition, even if the icon of "frame promotion" appears, the holding frame UI may not be promoted. In addition, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the holding frame UI may always be promoted.

  Also, instead of FIG. 147 (2-1), the lower body of the giant panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed in FIG. The lower body of this huge panda causes the variable display of the first decorative pattern to be overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number indication are displayed in front of the lower body of the panda. This huge panda is passing from top to bottom, and eventually enters the area of the holding frame UI, and a part or all of the holding frame UI is overlapped from the front by the large panda, as shown in FIG. 147. In the state shown in (S-2-2), a small part of each of the upper left and upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the image of the panda, but the state shown in the same figure (S B-2-3) Now, the entire pending pool UI is overlapped with the image of the panda. The appearance of a giant panda covering almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. Although the holding frame UI is entirely overlapped by a huge panda, the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding box UI.

  FIG. 147 (and 2-2-4) shows one mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda passes through, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( The navigation character YM is also changed (promoted) to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and the holding frame UI is also promoted to red display. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon may be changed (promoted). Further, all of the left frame UIf1 etc., the hold icon, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may change, or only a part may change. For example, only the left frame UIf1 or the like may change to red and only the holding frame UI may be promoted. Alternatively, as described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

  FIG. 147 (see 2-2-4 ′) shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the giant panda passes through, and in addition to the change in the holding frame UI, A change has occurred even outside the reserve window UI. That is, the level of the level indication Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is rising. When this level rises, reach effect is likely to be started, pseudo-sequence effect is likely to be started, or the symbol aspect is switched to a symbol of an aspect appearing at the time of big change with a definite change. In addition, when reach production is started with this level high, the expectation of the big hit becomes high. Note that the background may change.

  In the case of a big hit notice, the appearance of a giant panda may be displayed in front of the image of the panda, and the first decorative symbol may overlap the image of the passing panda from the front, or the big hit Even if it is a notice, the first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the passing panda image.

  Also, instead of FIG. 147 (2-1), in FIG. 2 (2-3-1), an overhead image for wipe effect is added to the holding frame UI, and FIG. The state shown in 1) is a state in which the bird's-eye image is completely closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 6 (2-3-2) is a state where the overhead image is fully open (wipe-out state).

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon I1 of the treasure box, which has been used as the icon of the change notice, has appeared as a hold icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (S1-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the icon of the treasure box is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 148 (S2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decoration symbols stopped. In FIG. 148 (S3), the icon of the treasure box is displayed. The suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The first reserve icon h11 of the icon of the treasure chest is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the fluctuation icon h0, but the icon of the treasure chest is also displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 here.

  In FIG. 148 (S4), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the variation icon h0 is opened, a smoke image appears from inside, and the smoke image is displayed from the front side of the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Cover and change animation is being performed. In (5) of FIG. 148, the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to the change notice, the smoke image may not overlap with the change icon h0 which is the change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

  Also, instead of FIG. 148 (S1-1), in FIG. S (S1-2-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the icon of the treasure box. That is, at least a portion of the hold icon having a relatively high jackpot expectation degree overlaps at least a portion of the relatively low hold icon. Note that at least a part of the pending icon in the prefetching notice mode may overlap at least a part of the default icon in the display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the jackpot expectation, at least a portion of the previously stored retention icon may overlap from at least a portion of the later stored retention icon. In (148-2 in FIG. 148), the treasure chest of the icon of the treasure chest, which is the first hold icon h11, is opened, and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears, and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In (148 in Fig. 148), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

  Also, in FIG. 148 (S2-1) instead of FIG. 148 (S2-1), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the first storage icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and the smoke image disappears in the figure (S 2-2-2), and both the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Aspects are changing. Here, both change to the same red, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both may be enveloped in the smoke image, but only one may change, the other may remain default.

  Also, instead of FIG. 148 (S2-1), in FIG. (S2-3-1), the treasure box of the icon of the treasure box which is the first reserved icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 among the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In (148) of Fig. 148, the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

  Furthermore, icons that are not overlapped by the smoke image (hold icon, change icon) and / or navi characters are also icons that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears (hold icon, change icon) and / or The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (which may be simultaneous with the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).

  FIG. 149 shows an example of rendering in which meter rendering is involved in the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (set 1-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. Furthermore, the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW in which the meter frame mf is white is displayed next to the navigation character YM. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 149 (see 1-1) is empty. This meter display promotes the navigation character YM when it is full. In addition, when the display mode (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, and the like) of the meter frame mf changes, the ease of storage of the meter may be notified, or the advance notice and / or the change may be notified.

  In FIG. 149 (set 2), temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and "decoration 4" is displayed with shaking. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the pattern of “deco 4”, and in FIG. 149 (3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 149 (set 4), the meter ascending item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by one level. In addition, the meter rising item changes the degree of rising of the meter depending on the color. The white meter rising item UpI is raised by one level with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In FIG. 149 (set 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decoration symbol display unit 208, the combination of the decoration symbols of lost is stopped and displayed, and in the set (set 5-1), the first hold icon h11 Is suspended and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 149 (set 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears above the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. The roulette effect here is either when something happens (if there is no loss) or when something does not occur (if it is lost). As an example of this, there may be a pending icon change, a regular notice (a notice of the change), and the like. Also, for example, when there is a character-based super reach including a super low reach, a princess super reach, and a super low reach as one type of super reach, as an example of the above, the type of the super reach to be developed (for example, For example, a notice of a character-based super reach), a notice of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach), etc. may be mentioned.

  In FIG. 149 (step 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 149 (step 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb moves to the white meter display MW and white. It is displayed overlapping with the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 149 (set 10), the blue meter ascending item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by two levels. The blue meter ascending item UpIb is raised by two levels with respect to the white meter display MW. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 149 (step 10) is at three levels.

  In FIG. 149 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, the combination of the decoration symbols of the lose is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 149 (set 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 149 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the decoration symbol display device 208, the combination of the decoration symbols of the lose is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 149 (set 12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 149 (case 13). The button display icon 136D is a display mode of a balloon and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap with the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position not overlapping with the meter display.

  In FIG. 149 (set 14), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and in the same set (set 15), the remaining period meter is decreased. In FIG. 149 (set 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in the figure (set 17), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the meter rising icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM. The meter rising icon MUI is a display mode of a balloon, and a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 149 (case 17). The meter rising icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf) as in the case of the button display icon 136D. Note that the meter rising icon MUI may overlap with the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position not overlapping with the meter display.

  Note that, even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes displays other than the meter rising icon MUI, and when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter rising icon MUI) ) May be displayed as a response display. In addition, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, or the meter may increase only when the response display is displayed, and the meter may not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured in the same manner.

  In FIG. 149 (No. 18), the green meter rising item UpIm in the meter rising icon MUI moves to the white meter display MW, and is displayed overlapping with the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 149 (set 19), the green meter up item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is taken into the white meter display MW (stocked), and the white meter display MW rises by three levels, FIG. 149 The white meter indication MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In Fig. 149 (set 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to the character display of "promotion", and a change animation not shown is started, and in the set (set 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has been changed (promoted) to the appearance of wearing a kimono. The color of the kimono of the navi character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display "promotion" shown in FIG. 149 (set 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 149 (set 20-1). The display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is notified. Note that the change animation may be omitted. Further, the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 ((21)) is returned to the empty state, but may be full. In addition, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may always change (promotion) or may not change (promotion) (in the case of failure).

  The meter display may not always be displayed as shown in (1-2-1) of FIG. 149 instead of (149-1) of FIG. 149. As shown in FIG. 149 (see 1-2-2), the meter ascending item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter ascending item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 149 (step 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (step 1-2-4), after the movement of the meter ascending item UpI is completed, the meter display (here, white meter display MW) appears. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Also, the meter display may be displayed in response to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be simultaneous with the appearance of the meter ascending item UpI, or may be displayed at the timing between FIG. 149 (Tse 1-2-2) and FIG. 149 (Tse 1-2-3).

  In FIG. 149 (step 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level by the meter ascending item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 149, if the meter display is displayed, then the meter always rises, but even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (even if false). It may be good or the meter rising item may not appear. Furthermore, even if the meter rising item appears, the meter may not rise.

  Also, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears, and in this case, the meter display is a prefetch notice that the meter may be accumulated. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display when the meter rising item appears, or during the symbol variation, in which case the meter display may accumulate the meter within the variation. It is a notice that there is.

  FIG. 150 is a view showing a modified example of the example described using FIG.

  In FIG. 150 (step 1-3-1) instead of FIG. 149 (step 1-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation with no hold, and the white meter display MW in the empty state is empty. It is displayed. While the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 149 (Set 1-1) was full at six levels, the white meter display shown in FIG. 150 (Set 1-3-1) MW is full at 5 levels.

  In FIG. 150 (No. 1-3-3a), the meter raising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. A gold meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 150 (No. 1-3-3a). The white meter indication MW shown in FIG. 150 (S1-3-4a) is filled at once due to the gold meter rising item UpIg. After this, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At this time, the meter may be empty or may be stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is in the stored state, even if it is full with the blue gauge It is good, and it may be full with a golden gauge by having been filled up at once by the gold meter rising item UpIg.

  On the other hand, also in FIG. 150 (No. 1-3-3b), the meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 150 (see 1-3-4b) is also filled at once due to the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn. After this, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At this time, the meter may be empty or may be stored. In addition, when it is in the accumulated state, it may be full with a blue gauge, or it may be full with a rainbow gauge because it was full with a rainbow meter rising item UpIn at once. It may be tongue-shaped.

  As meter rising items, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow items are prepared. Among these items, only the rainbow meter rising item UpIn and the gold meter rising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rising item UpI is increased by one level, the blue meter rising item UpIb is increased by 2 levels, the green meter rising item UpIm is increased by 3 levels, and the red meter rising item UpIr is increased by 4 levels.

  In addition, the iridescent meter up item UpIn also functions as a big hit finalization notice. On the other hand, the gold meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is filled with one rainbow meter rising item UpIn, when the meter is filled with one gold meter rising item UpIn, or in other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning is different when the meter is filled with a combination of meter rising items.

  In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is a white, blue, green, red meter rising item, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

  The color of the meter rising item may have a function as a normal notice or a advance notice. Also, the color may indicate the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  Moreover, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or they may be linked. For example, when a gold meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is also easily changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, or conversely, a display where the navigation character YM wears a golden kimono In the aspect, the gold meter ascending item UpIg may easily appear or may appear.

  Furthermore, the order of appearance of meter rising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading advance notice, and may function as a normal advance notice. Also, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of the big hit. Or, conversely, the order of appearance of metered items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the jackpot expectation.

  Also, in this example, the meter stores 15 (the meter is full 3 times). In addition, in the meter display filled up at 6 levels of FIG. 149, it accumulates until the meter reaches 18 (this is also filled up 3 times). Here, when the meter overflows by displaying the meter rising item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are stored), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. You may make it save the amount which is not stored. For example, when a red meter up item UpIt is displayed when three meters are stored, the meter is full once, and two more levels of meters are stored.

  If the meter overflows after the meter is full twice, the meter may be full and the meter may indicate the amount that has not been stored. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the pre-reading subject change or the change ends, or may be displayed regardless of the pre-reading subject change or the change. In addition, it may be cut off because it did not accumulate. For example, a meter may be stored, and the meter at that time may be in the state of 0, may be full, may be a special display, or may not be displayed. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three are already stored, only two white meter up items UpI or only one blue meter up items UpIb are displayed.

  In the example beginning with FIG. 150 (Sei 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 149 (Sei 1-1), in the same diagram (Sei 1-4-2), the red beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is The navi character YM is illuminated toward the default display mode navigation character YM, and changes to the display mode wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. The balloon is attached. It is reported by this "Up high certainty" that the meter rising item is easily stored.

  It should be noted that, depending on the display mode of the advance notice for changing the navigation character YM, a notification of "Up High Probability" may occur or may be generated. In addition, when the navigation character YM changes, notification of "Up High Probability" may be performed by all means, and multiple types of effect display (notice display) including notification of "Up High Probability" may be performed. The effect display including the notification of “Up High certainty” may not be performed.

  Further, the effect to be performed by the navigation character YM may be different depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, in the case of a red navigation character YM, notification of “Up High Probability” is performed, in the case of a gold navigation character YM, a superheat display is displayed, and in a rainbow navigation character YM, an iron plate display is displayed. It may be done. The navigation characters YM having different display modes may give the same notice (the same kind of notice).

  In Fig. 149 (set 5-1), in Fig. 150 (set 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is white blinking and is at 1 level, and the kimono of the navigation character YM is also blinked white. There is. After that, once the meter is full and returns to the empty state, in FIG. 150 (5-2-3), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a green kimono is worn, The gauge of the white meter display MW also turns green and rises to 3 levels. Thereafter, after the meter becomes full again and returns to the empty state, in FIG. 150 (set 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a rainbow-colored kimono is worn. The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to rainbow color and is full. As described above, the storage condition of the meter and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to coincide with each other. Also, the color of the gauge may correspond to the color of the navigation character YM.

  In addition, when all the meters are stored, a pattern in which the jackpot confirmation or the expectation of the jackpot is high, and a pattern in which the meters are stored and discharged may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, if it is released when the meter is stored up to 2 levels, effects equivalent to blue will be performed, and if released when the meter is saved up to 4 levels, effects equivalent to red Is done.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing still another modified example of the example described using FIG.

  In FIG. 151 (set 6-2), the roulette display icon RI and the meter increase icon MUI are displayed on the white blinking meter display MW ′ in which the meter frame mf blinks in white instead of the setting in FIG. 149 (set 6-1). Is displayed, but a part of the meter rising icon MUI overlaps from a front side to a part of the roulette display icon RI, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is more difficult to view than the roulette display icon RI shown in Section 7-1). On the other hand, a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. 149 (No. 7-1). Note that the meter rising icon MUI may overlap from the front on all of the roulette display icons RI, or at least a part of the roulette display icons RI at least partially on the front of the meter rising icons MUI. You may wrap it. In addition, as a priority displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when a notice that a meter rising icon may be displayed, such as the display of a roulette display icon, is made, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying a white blink meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it has been informed that there is a possibility that it will be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame even if there is a notice that there is a possibility that the meter rising icon will be displayed. You may be comprised so that it may not be alert | reported that a meter raise icon may be displayed. In addition, the advance notice for notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed may be performed not only by the meter frame but also by other display or rendering means.

  In FIG. 151 (set 7-2), the blue meter ascending item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, instead of the set shown in FIG. 149 (set 7-1). However, it is difficult to view because the meter rising icons MUI still overlap. Thus, the meter rising icons may overlap with each other. When the meter rising icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rising icons, or the higher meter rising degree may be prioritized, or the meter rising degree Lower may be prioritized. Also, in the navigation character YM, the meter rising icons may not overlap from the front side, but may overlap.

  Also, in place of FIG. 149 (set 7-1), in FIG. 151 (set 7-3-1), an image up for notifying (predicting) that a meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear what color meter rising icon is displayed, and thereafter, several colors of meter rising icons are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this manner, when it is notified that the meter rising icon is displayed by the roulette effect although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 151 (set 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI is displayed. The effect display Ed1 to which the aura is applied is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 151 (set 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the blue meter rising icon is displayed as if it is enlarged. At this stage, it is not known in which color meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may be displayed also in the roulette display icon RI.

  In Fig. 151 (set 7-3-4), the blue meter rising icon UpIb that resembles the enlarged blue meter rising icon that was overlapping the roulette display icon RI becomes the white blinking meter display MW Move to 'White Flashing Meter Display MW' is displayed overlapping. Also, the roulette display icon RI fades out and the display becomes dim and gradually disappears. In addition, the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown as to what color. Thereafter, the blue meter ascending item UpIb is taken in (stocked) in the white blinking meter indication MW ', and the white blinking meter indication MW' is leveled up.

  A blue meter ascending item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and be taken into the white blinking meter display MW '. In this case, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter ascending item UpIb may be displayed before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed. It may be displayed after being done. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter rising item UpIb may be displayed before or at the same time as the blue meter rising icon is enlarged. It may be displayed or may be displayed after being displayed.

  In Fig. 149 (set -20-2-1) in place of Fig. 149 (set 20-1), the white meter display MW in the full state is temporarily changed to the letter display of "stock" and is empty When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. In addition, when the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, only the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed, and icons other than the navigation character (pending icon, fluctuation icon) or other effect display may be changed.

  As mentioned above, the description regarding the meter display demonstrated using FIGS. 62-87 is applicable to the description using FIGS. 149-151. That is, all the statements including the statement that the rate of increase of the meter is different when the color of the meter frame is different can be applied. Alternatively, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151 can be applied to the description using FIGS. 62 to 87.

  FIG. 152 shows an example of presentation in which a telop effect is associated with the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (part 1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12 are displayed. The two display icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 152 (about 2-1), a telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed that the navigation character YM may change, which corresponds to an example of the change advance display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change high certainty" and a character display such as "Navi character change high certain preparation" are flowed from right to left on the screen. In addition to this, in the telop display trp, no character is displayed in plain color, and by the telop display, “○○ high confidence”, “×× & ○ high confidence”, “○○ high accuracy” In preparation, it may be notified in advance that there is a possibility that "In preparation for xx or xxx high preparation", "Under preparation for high accuracy", etc. may be displayed. Even if a plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high resolution middle", "×× & ○○ high resolution middle", "○○ high resolution right now", "XX or high resolution ready" "" And "High preparation in progress" may not be displayed. In addition, "○○ high sure preparation in progress", "XX or ○ high precision prepare in progress", "high precision preparation in progress", etc. may be displayed, and a high probability state may occur from this onwards of the effect displayed in telop It may be notified in advance. The “XX” and “○○” described here are various effects (eg, hold (hold icon and / or change icon) change, pseudo-link, notice with high expectation color, high expectation for big hit) It shows the name of the notice (so-called "super heat" notice).

  The high-probability state of the effects described here means that the notice notified that the high-probability state was indicated by the telop display, and the notice notified by the telop than when the high-probability state was not notified by the telop display. It shows a state where the frequency of occurrence is high. That is, in FIG. 152 (1) to (14), (2-2), (2-3), and (2-8) in FIG. “” Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than in the case where it is not notified that “the navigation character change high probability is in progress” in the telop display. In addition, “Highly under preparation in progress” included in “○ × Highly under preparation”, “XX or 高 High with preparation”, “Highly under preparation”, etc. is notified by ticker display. It is from now on that the effect being displayed is in high probability state (The fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation when the display of the telop including “Highly prepared is started” or the fluctuation after the display of the telop including “Highly prepared” is started Informing) (or being likely to be in a high probability state)

  In FIG. 152 (part 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the lost decoration symbols. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front by the telop display trp. However, on the contrary, the second decorative symbol may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

  In FIG. 152 (4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and also in FIG. 152 (part 6), the symbol variation display is started. The telop display trp is continuing.

  In FIG. 152 (7), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 152 (# 8-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is started also in FIG. 152 (part 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in the same figure (part 11).

  In addition, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display may appear, the change animation may be started, the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box may be opened, and the navigation character YM may change. In this case, it can be said that the display such as "Navi character change high probability" in the telop display trp indicates the appearance of the icon I1 of the treasure box or the start of the change animation.

  In FIG. 152 (12), the change animation of the navi character YM is started again, and the navi character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 152 (# 13), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode in which a golden kimono is worn. Even if the second change presentation of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

  While displaying the telop display trp, it is possible to perform the change effect of the navigation character YM any number of times, but if the navigation character YM changes once during the display of the telop display trp, then the navigation character YM changes. It may be configured not to.

  In FIG. 152 (# 14), the reach state is entered, but the telop display trp is still continuing. The timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears is at the start of super reach (for example, FIG. 136 (24)), at the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, at the first stop, the second stop, the third stop) , Symbol stop letters, start of the next change, etc.

  In this example, although the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, the navigation character may be changed by the change preview display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change preview display. It may be configured such that only the change effect by the navigation character itself is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 152 (part 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in upper and lower two stages, instead of FIG. 152 (part 2-1). Then, different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

  In addition, in the telop display, the high-prediction middle display may be displayed for other notices. As to the same prefetch target hold, the timing to be displayed may be the same or one may be later than the other. In addition, when one telop display of “○○ high sure middle” is shown, the telop display may not be displayed for another prefetch target hold, or may be displayed. In that case, the telop display (for example, "Navichara high accuracy middle") about the same notice may be displayed separately, and it may be constituted so that the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the order of display start, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 152 (part 2-1), the same contents may be displayed by the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in FIG. 152 (part 2-3). That is, a plurality of the same telop display may be displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to show that the expectation of the big hit is higher than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of displays are made, the expectation of the big hit may be the same as in the case where only one display is made. Also, displaying the same telop display plural times may be repeated. That is, each time display of telop display is started, plural telop displays of the same content may be displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 152 (step 8-2) instead of FIG. 152 (step 8-1), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), no further change is made. May be notified by the telop display trp. In this example, a character display of "Done" is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may be further changed.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of effects in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b).

  A first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown in FIG. 153 ((1a-1)). In addition, the 2nd decoration symbol and the 2nd reservation number display are performed by the 3rd decoration symbol display device 208N of the right side.

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 153 (at 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 153 (at 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol, and in FIG. It shifts to reach production, and all displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 to h14, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are off.

  In FIG. 153 (T4a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the pattern of the swordsman of the enemy character on the entire screen. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the first decorative symbol, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM which are displayed in a reduced size. The variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decoration symbol display devices.

  In FIG. 153 (or 5a), the background of the wilderness that is the background display of the super reach effect is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character are facing each other.

  Here, in place of FIG. 153 (To 1a-1), in FIG. (To 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the reserved icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display region CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third hold icon h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Furthermore, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, the frame disturbs and the image displayed straddling is divided.

  In addition, although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the right base icon bIr may be displayed in an enlarged manner together with the navigation character YM.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 153 (to 1a-2), even if the display is not enlarged, a plurality of display devices may be straddled. For example, a pattern which is spanned from the beginning of display, a pattern which is moved from the original position and displayed across, a pattern which is changed and displayed over an image, an image is expanded and displayed over And a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the screen. In addition, as shown in FIG. 153 (1a-2), when the display is enlarged, the expectation of the big hit becomes high, the holding icon becomes easy to change, the changing icon becomes easy to change, or the navigation character YM May change easily. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, when the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices, and a part of the display area of the display device B is overlapped by the display device A in the front, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display device B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display device A in FIG.

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 153 (to 1a-2) are applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later.

  Further, instead of FIG. 153 (To 1a-1), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed in FIG. (To 1a-3). That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be easily changed, or the expectation of the big hit may be increased, or the change of other effects (for example, suspension) It may be easy to perform icon and change icon changes etc.). In addition, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the degree of expectation of the big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, change of pending icon or change icon) It may be different or it may be the same without any impact. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM changes may be higher when moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the change icon moves to another display device.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 153 (or 1a-3), it can also be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 153 (to 1a-3) are applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later.

  Further, instead of FIG. 153 (To 1a-1), in FIG. (To 1a-4), the navigation character YM is divided when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is split into two, and is displayed on both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can also be viewed as an increase in the navigation character YM.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM is split (increased), the navigation character YM may be easily changed, or the expectation of the big hit may be increased, or another change in presentation (for example, a reserved icon or The change of the change icon, etc.) may be facilitated.

  Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

  The items described above with reference to FIG. 153 (to 1a-4) are also applicable to the example of effect described above, and are also applicable to the example of effect to be described later. That is, even in the other presentation examples, the navigation character YM may be split (increased), and may always be split (increased).

  FIG. 154 is a view showing an example of another effect obtained by entanglement of the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b).

  In FIG. 154 (or 1b), the background of the sea is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 153 (at 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 154 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. In addition, the background display of the sea disappears in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display devices 208N shown in FIG. 154 (or 2b).

  In (b) of FIG. 154, the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and instead, an icon of a signboard "searching" is displayed. In addition, on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared, the same character (a lady) YM 'as the navigation character YM is displayed and running. In addition, a text display of "searching" is displayed on it. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with the image of the question mark on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared.

  The icon of the signboard “in search” may be a notification indicating that there is a high possibility of success in the change presentation (promotion presentation) of the navigation character YM. In addition, the probability of success is higher when the color of the sign is blue than white, and the probability of success is higher when the sign is red than blue. In addition, if it is red, promotion confirmation may be sufficient. In addition, the signboard may be changed in color, display character or the like but may not be changed. In addition, the display mode of the signboard may suggest a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn.

  In FIG. 154 (at 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state) so far, are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that they approach each other. Will move. Note that this period corresponds to a period of roaring effect.

  In FIG. 154 ((5b-1)), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to the fully closed position (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be a position before contact.

  Fig. 154 (Fig. 6b-1) shows an example of the promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (dominant) YM 'takes a pose with the thumb raised The character display showing the level up is displayed on. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and a two-car box is displayed. In addition, the display mode in which the navigation character YM may be changed may be suggested depending on the display mode of the one and two box. For example, if the one thousand box is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. In addition, although the color, the open / close state, and the like may change in this thousand box, it may not change. In FIG. 154 (or 7b), the character (ten-like) YM 'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn.

  Then, in FIG. 154 (8 b), the second decorative symbol display device 208 M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state . When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restored to the initial state, the wipe effect is performed by the respective decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 154 (at 9b) and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the middle of wipe-in, and the wipe-in is completed in the same figure (t 10b), and the second decorative symbol display device 208M Also in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 154 (t10b), a smoke image is displayed at the position where the icon of the signboard was displayed until then.

  In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 154 (or 11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, wipe out is started in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this example, the animation of wipe-in (animation that closes from the left and right) and the animation of wipe-out (animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different but may be the same animation. In FIG. 154 (to 12b), the wipe out is completed, and the background of the sea is displayed across the three decoration symbol display devices 208L to N. In one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this embodiment may be performed. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced by one or more effect movable bodies not including the liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation) And the navi character is promoted.

  The change effect (promotional effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 154 is applicable to the effect examples described so far, and is also applicable to the effect example described later.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b).

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (at 1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all default display modes. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 155 (at 1a-3-2), a moving animation in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. In FIG. 155 (1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is exactly located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Also in this case, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame disturbs the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (1a-3-3), the navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 155 (1a-3-2 '), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device An example of enlarged display is shown at 208N. Although only the right hand and the right toe of the navigation character YM are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (1a-3-2 ′), the right toe of the right hand and the right foot is enlarged and displayed. The navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the part which has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (1a-3-3 ′), the navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. . As described above, when the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, or the expectation of the jackpot may be higher than in the case where the navigation character YM is not displayed in an enlarged manner. A change in the effect of (for example, a change in the hold icon or the change icon) may be facilitated, or may be the same without any influence at all. In addition, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be always displayed enlarged or may not be displayed enlarged.

  The moving animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 155 is applicable to the example of the effects described above, and is also applicable to the example of effects described later.

  Also, instead of FIG. 154 (or 8b), FIG. 155 (or 5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotional effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 154 (or 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving closer to each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are stopped halfway, also return to the initial state, but notification of a change effect (promotional effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (or 5b-2), the character (tendon) YM 'takes a pose in which the character is directed backward and depressed. Note that notification of failure may be started while returning to the initial state. Alternatively, notification of failure may be started when the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

  When both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may fail without fail, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotional effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This is also true for the effects divided into success and failure described so far.

  In addition, when the change effect (promotional effect) fails here, the navigation character YM is for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until N times of variations end from promotion failure, The change may be regulated until the change of the prefetch target hold related to the promotion failure ends).

  Also, instead of FIG. 154 (t6b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol are shown in FIG. 155 (t6b-2) up to a certain position (for example, the position in the fully closed state) A pattern in which the change rendering (promotional rendering) has failed despite the display device 208N moving is shown. Similarly to the above, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 155 (6b-2) also displays a character YM 'with a pose facing downward and falling. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to the real display, and the orange box is displayed there.

  Thus, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Alternatively, on the contrary, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. Also, even in the state shown in FIG. 155 (t6b-2), the navigation character YM may be promoted in some cases, or conversely, in this state, it may be determined as a failure.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the navigation character YM is entangled by the effect device 206 in which the second display device is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (or 1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the holding frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, the reserved icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. In the reserved icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the base icon bIn. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or capable of moving up and down.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (or 1c), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

  A bird's-eye view image for wipe effect is displayed on the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (or 2c), and in the state shown in FIG. 156 (or 3c), the bird's-eye view image is completely closed (wipe-in state) It is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (T4), wipe out starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (T5), the overhead image is fully open (wipe out state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (5c) after the wipe effect is finished, neither the holding frame UI nor the holding icon h11 nor the variation icon h0 nor the navigation character YM is displayed, but instead, The animation of the mini game by is displayed. That is, by the wipe effect, the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, the changing icon h0, and the navi character YM also become non-displayed, and a bet of change (promotion) of the display mode of the navi character YM The game has been started. Even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach effect is started. In the stage of FIG. 156 (T4c), although it can be understood that the mini game is started on the second display device 208S, it does not know what the bet (diving) is the mini game, and it can be seen in FIG. I do not understand until it becomes a stage. For this reason, at least the second display device 208S may be able to be focused on until the explanation about the mini game (here, "If you enter the cup, you are promoted to Yoshimune") is performed.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (or 6c-1), the cup-in succeeds. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, and the bird's-eye view image begins to close again in FIG. 156 (to 7 c), and the state shown in FIG. is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (at 9c), wipe-out starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (at 10c), the overhead image is fully open (wipe-out state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 156 (10c) wiped out again, the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. Thus, after the wipe-out is completed, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (Fig. 156 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, the smoke image disappears in FIG. 156 (12c), and the navigation character YM is changed to the display mode of the red kimono.

  Also, in place of FIG. 156 (6c-1), in FIG. ((6c-2)), the cup-in fails. Thus, when the mini game fails to bet the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM may not be absolutely promoted, but may be promoted. . When the mini game succeeds as shown in FIG. 156 (6c-1), the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

  In the wipe out from FIG. 156 (or 8c), it may be a wipe effect that can suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM will be promoted, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

  Also, when wiped out in FIG. 156 (or 10c), the navigation character YM may already be changed (promoted).

  In addition, the second display device 208S may perform the rendering operation while the mini game is being executed. In addition, success (in the case of this example (Fig. 156 (To 6c-1)) and failure (in the case of Fig. 156 (To 6c-2) in the case of this example) or circling effect (in the case of Fig. 156 (as 5c)) Different rendering operations may be performed. In addition, the rendering operation by the rendering movable body may be performed instead of the second display device 208S.

  The mini game described with reference to FIG. 156 is applicable to the effect examples described above, and is also applicable to the effect examples described later.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example when another effect is executed while the effect selected by the player is being executed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 121 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, in the "holding frame selection", the "holding frame B" of 02 is set, and in the "holding display selection" The "icon C" of 03 is set, and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11, which is a default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (A1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, the first decorative symbol is in high-speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation icon h0 which is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM of the copanda is also displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (Aa3-1), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in the same figure (Aa4-1), the icon I2 of the carpet Disappear, and the icon I1 of the treasure chest is left. In FIG. 157 (Aa5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM Is clearly less visible than before the appearance of the smoke image. Note that the change animation may be started by the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, a back button may be used, or an operation promotion notification may be performed. In (157) of FIG. 157, the smoke image has disappeared, and the navi character YM has changed from the copanda to the bancho. As shown in FIG. 121 (b), the game's character in the navigation character YM is a character that can not be selected by the player. Note that the character may be changed to a character (for example, a princess or a princess) selectable by the player, or may be changed to a character which can not be selected by the player.

  In FIG. 157 (Aa7), the icon I1 of the treasure box disappears, and in FIG. 157A (A8), the reach state is entered. A balloon icon of “NEXT” indicating a pseudo continuous effect is added to the navigation character YM of the group leader shown in FIG. 157 (Aa 8).

  In FIG. 157 (Aa 9), the pseudo continuous symbol (the symbol of the character of Toten-sama) temporarily stops at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol, and in FIG. Cut-in display is performed. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. Here, the pseudo-link is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo run is performed, the easier it is to be a big hit.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 157 (Aa 11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started again. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is largely displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a12), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

  A balloon icon “NEXT” indicating a pseudo-series effect is again added to the navigation character YM of the group leader shown in FIG. 157 (Aa 13), and the continuation of the pseudo-series still has a high expectation. Thereafter, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times or once or a plurality of times, the reach state is entered, and further, it is developed into the super reach production (Kenou reach production). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (Aa15) changes to the background of the wilderness, which is the background display of the sword master reach effect, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hero of the protagonist and the swordsman of the enemy role. The confrontation duel scene is displayed. Further, in the holding frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 of the holding icon display area HIS disappear. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navy character YM of the group leader is displayed above the right base icon bIr.

  A balloon icon of “chance” for hitting a big hit is added to the navigation character YM of the bank leader shown in FIG. 157 (Aa 16), and the navigation character YM of the bank leader is executing a honing effect.

  A scene after the majesty and the swordsman have been cut in super reach production is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (Aa 18), and in this case the majesty has fallen and the middle symbol is left and right. "Decoration 6" different from the design ("decoration 7") is displayed (swinged) largely. Although the height of the pedestal of the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM of the bank leader is also displayed. Thereafter, the wipe effect is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a a19), the wipe is in the middle, and in the same figure (a a20), the wipe in is completed and then the wipe out is started. In the diagram (a 21), as the background (the background of the sky) of the background E is returned, the navy character YM of the copanda is beginning to be visible. In FIG. 157 (step a22), the wipe effect is ended, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing. Further, the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variation icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is also resumed. In addition, a blue hold icon (pre-reading hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (E2) to FIG. (E4-1), there are also cases where the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode. In this example, although the change animation using the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display is executed, it is missed, but the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the icon I1 of the treasure box It may be easier for the player to eventually shift to a state advantageous to the player than when changing (for example, changing by oneself) without using the icon I1 of the treasure chest. Here, the advantageous state includes the transition to the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the jackpot gaming state with a large number of balls, and the transition to the probability change state or the electric support state.

  In this example, even if the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is not displayed when the hold icon is changed from the hide to the display. Pre-reading notice may be given. In addition, if the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold is digested until the hold is digested (it may be displayed in the variable icon display area, or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area). May be configured to restrict the advance notice and / or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the increase of the hold while the hold icon is not displayed, the target of the change in the increase of the hold It may be configured such that the preview notice by the hold icon is regulated, and the preview notice and / or the notice of the change may be issued from the next change of the change of the increase of the hold.

  In this example, while the prefetch notice by the one hold icon is being executed, the prefetch notice by the other hold icon may be performed, but the prefetch notice by the other hold icon is performed while the prefetch notice by the one hold icon is performed. The restriction is imposed until the holding corresponding to the one holding icon is digested (may be displayed in the variation icon display area or may be deleted from the variation icon display area) It is also good.

  In this example, the advance notice and / or the advance notice of the change may be given by the navi character selected by the player, but the advance notice and / or the advance notice of the change may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not want to In addition, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by the balloon icon), but the tutorial display is displayed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not want to Further, in this example, a notice of advance and / or advance notice of the change may be given by a navi character which can not be selected by the player, but advance notice and / or advance notice of the change may not be given. In addition, the navigation character that can not be selected by the player may be configured to be more likely to perform the promotion effect of the holding icon and / or the fluctuation icon than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, and the navigation character changes It may be configured to have high expectation (or big hit confirmation (or big hit may be heavy)) of the jackpot variation within the selected symbol and / or the hold, and the notice and / or the announcement that the navigation character appears The super-reach effect may be configured to be generated frequently (or generated).

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 158 (FIG. 158 (a3-2)), the change notice display is performed by the light emission of the light guide plate IL in place of the icon I1 of the treasure box. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be notified by a different presentation means than the presentation means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 157 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 158 (Aa3-3), in place of the icon I1 of the treasure box, a change notice is displayed due to the rendering operation of the movable means (here, family crest 224E). It is carried out. That is, the family crest 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Here, although there is no hold icon, if there is a hold icon, the hold icon is also overlapped. Thereafter, the family crest 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest 224E may be rotated at the initial position. Also, the household crest 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Also, it is possible to raise only and not to rotate and vibrate. In addition, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the rendering operation of the family crest 224E, that is, after the family crest 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the easiness of change to the navigation character YM or the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by the light emission effect by the LED provided on the household crest item 224E.

  Also, in FIG. 158 (Aa3-4) instead of FIG. 157 (Aa3-1), a change advance display is performed by sound output from the speaker 120, instead of the icon I1 of the treasure box. Note that the change notice may be displayed by the game board lamp 442 or the game stand frame lamp 452.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 158 (Aa 4-2) instead of FIG. 157 (A a 4-1), while the icon I 1 of the treasure box of the change preview display is temporarily displayed in the effect icon display area DIS In some cases, the icon I1 may fly away on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Also, in FIG. 158 (Aa6-2) instead of FIG. 157 (Aa6-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change although the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened. Also corresponds to so-called failure patterns.

  Also, in FIG. 158 (Aa6-3), instead of FIG. 157 (Aa6-1), a copanda that has different colors of clothes although the navigation character YM of the copanda is the same copanda (here, red clothes Copanda), and has succeeded in the change production (promotional production) of the navigation character YM.

  Also, in place of FIG. 157 (a a3-1), in FIG. 158 (a b1), the second display device 208S is located below the decorative symbol display device 208 (the first display device) as in the example shown in FIG. Are arranged, the second display device 208S is provided with the reserved icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, the effect icon display area DIS, and the pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. . In the reserve icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navy character YM of the copanda is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (Ab1), a conversation notice is made by the notice of the character display of the rose character and the "Navichara change", and the change notice display is made by this conversation notice. It is That is, the fact that the navigation character YM changes is notified by means of another presentation means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the presentation means (here, the second display device 208S) where the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 158 (ab2), the navi character YM is changed from the copanda to a bancho that is a character that can not be selected by the player.

  Also, in place of FIG. 157 (Aa2), a speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 158 (Ac1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 123 (9) and the brightness (light amount) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 123 (3) It is noted at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example both are three levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to be output from the speaker 120, or for the game board lamp 442 and / or game frame Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is described in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the “actual setting value”. This is the same in the following examples. In FIG. 158 (ac2), the notification that the “superheat” notice may be given is notified by the speaker 120, which is different from the presentation means having the possibility that the “hot heat” notice may be given. ing. The volume (actual setting value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user setting value. After that, in FIG. 158 (ac3), the notice of “superheat” is executed, the character “superheat” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 in large size, and the sound is output from the speaker 120. The lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of the "superheating" advance execution exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) is also level 5 exceeding the user setting value. That is, the sound is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and the light is emitted at a brightness higher than the brightness level set by the player. In addition, at the time of effect execution, there are cases where the volume and brightness exceed the user setting value and are forcibly below the user setting value (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the timing at which the volume and the luminance forcibly change is not limited to this example, for example, the luminance may also change at the timing at which the sound in the heat close approach is output, or the sound in the heat close approach The volume and brightness may change while the signal is output. In addition, when a certain effect is performed, only the volume among the volume and the luminance may be output exceeding the user setting value, or only the luminance may emit light exceeding the user setting value. There are also cases where both go beyond.

  In addition, the user setting of the volume and the brightness may be possible even in a game console in which the convenient volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW are not prepared as described with reference to FIG. 123, and the player It may be any game console that can set the volume and brightness. In addition, the technical idea can be applied to the case where the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color tone of the image, and the like referred to here (the same applies hereinafter).

  As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 158 can be applied to the effect examples described above, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

  FIG. 159 is a table summarizing music that can be output from the speaker 120.

  In the gaming stand in this example, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 159 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive jackpots. For example, if you do not have 15 jackpots, you can not select the song "Dumping behavior". Also, multiple songs may be selectable. For example, when 15 jackpots are hit, all songs of serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

  In addition, the 12 songs with serial numbers are songs that can be selected when the chance button 136 is operated 5 times during the big hit start interval (during big hit start effect execution), and when the back button navigation mode is set During the start interval, guidance on operating the chance button 136 is notified, but not notified in the case of back button navigation mode non-setting. Note that the guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, or the guidance may be notified also when the back button navigation mode is not set.

  Also, the songs of serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on the condition of a big hit with a specific reach. The "collaboration SP" mentioned here refers to super reach production in which a plurality of characters perform in parallel (for example, super reach production in which Yoshimune and a panda perform in parallel with Kagoshima reach). A "big hit" is a cut-in image during super reach, in which the "楓" of the premier character appeared and hit a big hit.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example where the music selection described using FIG. 159 is performed.

  In FIG. 160 (i), it is a definite change state (special drawing high probability common drawing high probability state), and is in the process of high speed fluctuation of the first decorative symbol. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (B1), and the number of holds of the special view 1 is 3, and It is three. Moreover, this pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and only the reserved icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown in FIG. These three hold icons h21 to h23 are all default display modes. In addition, it is the jackpot third consecutive class. Furthermore, in the song title display area MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed, and the music of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music being output here is the music being output in the definite variation state. Furthermore, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music title display unit MN, and it is informed that music selection is possible by operating the up and down keys 137u and d. In addition, a background screen of the space is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background screen of the space is a background screen for a probability variation state.

  In FIG. 160 (b), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 160 (b), the song title of the song title display portion MN is changed to "mega giga summer". Note that since the music is output from the speaker 120 slightly after the music selection operation (for example, 500 ms), there is a period in which the music title of the music name display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the music title of the music title display unit MN may be configured to match the music actually output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 160 (b), the music of “Mega giga summer” is also output from the speaker 120. When the music change is performed, the music is output from the beginning, but for example, the timing or time when the music flows is determined by power on or RTC (Real Time Clock) effect, or the output from the continuation of the previous output. If it is, it may be output halfway.

  In FIG. 160 (B5), the reserve of the special figure 2 increases, and the special 2 becomes full (the number-of-reserves display displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). The start of the display of the fourth hold icon is slightly later than the hold number display is updated to 4, and the fourth hold icon 24 of the display mode (blinking white) of the prefetch notice is displayed in FIG. It is done. After that, the suspension of Special Figure 2 is digested three, and the symbol stop of Special Figure 2 is performed in Figure 160 (A8), and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. There is. In addition, the number of remaining reservations of the special figure 2 is 1, and the 1st reservation icon h21 is changing into the display mode of red.

  In FIG. 160 (b), the last hold of the special figure 2 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Even in the state of FIG. 160 (B10), the selected music is still “Mega Giga Summer”, and in FIG. 160B (B), the character C11 of the Bancho appears and a music change notice is given. The music change notice is a jackpot notice including an effect of forcibly changing the music selected by the player to another music, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a prefetch notice. . In this example, by displaying the music change notice, the big change confirmation (or big hit rich) is notified about the symbol change for which the music change notice is displayed, but the symbol change displayed with the music change notice is removed There may be cases. For example, if "Make DREAM", which is the theme song of the character who has appeared, is output (it is a high hit expectation, or a big hit decision (it may be a big hit)), it is successful. "" Is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol change on which the music change notice is displayed may be removed. In addition, even if "make DREAM" is not output and the music change advance notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been determined by another effect (for example, resurrection effect). In addition, since the music change notice is displayed, the jackpot confirmation (or the big hit rich) / or the expectation of the big hit than when the notice other than the music change notice is performed for the next change of the symbol change displayed the music change notice It is possible to give a pre-reading notice to give notice that the degree is high. In addition, even when the music change advance notice fails, it may be configured to be notified that the big hit is definitely determined by another effect (for example, resurrection effect). However, since the music change notice may cause an annoying effect for the player in some cases that the music selected by the player is forced to be replaced, if the music change notice is started as a compensation, the jackpot It may be decided.

  A song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 160 (12). Moreover, although the output of the music of "mega giga summer" output by the speaker 120 is not performed, the music of "mega giga summer" may be output. In addition, the character C11 of the bank leader who appeared in the music change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the music title display portion MN.

  In FIG. 160 (13), the song title of the song title display section MN is changed to "Distance", but no song is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the music of "Mega Giga Summer" is continuously output as it is in Fig. 160 (B12) to Fig. 160B (B15-1). The output may be started from the speaker 120 as "Distance" changed by the music change notice. Here, as shown in FIG. 159, “Distance” is not a music released next to “Mega Giga Summer”, but is a music different from “Burn DREAM”. However, "Distance" is the music that precedes "Bake DREAM" in the open order. In the music change notice here, such a music of "Distance" is sandwiched, and finally, "make DREAM" is output. In addition, "scramble DREAM" may be displayed on the music title display portion MN at the stage of FIG. 160 (B13).

  In FIG. 160 (i), again, the song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120, and the character C11 of the master has raised one hand. Even if a certain period of time has passed since the song title of the song title display section MN has been changed to "Distance", the song "Distance" may not be output from the speaker 120, but may be output.

  In FIG. 160 (i), the song title of the song title display portion MN is changed to "speaking DREAM", and the speaker 120 outputs a song change effect sound again. The music change notice may be a success at the stage when "speaking DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, and in FIG. That is, when "speaking DREAM" is displayed on the song title display unit MN, the music of "songing DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that even when “Denage DREAM” is displayed, there may be provided a case where the music of “Denage DREAM” is not output from the speaker 120 and a failure occurs.

  Also, in the present example, when the music change notice is displayed, "Bringing DREAM" is always output, but in Fig. 160 (B15), the original "Mega giga summer" is displayed on the music name display section MN. In this case, it is a failure (deterioration), and then “mega giga summer” may be output from the speaker 120 as well. Alternatively, if “Distance” is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (i), it is also a failure (deterioration), and then “Distance” may also be output from the speaker 120. The original "mega giga summer" may be displayed on the song name display section MN which the player has selected, and output of the "mega giga summer" song may be started.

  Note that “Distance” is displayed on the song title display section MN at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (B13) or “Your tears” released next to “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed. The jackpot expectation may be expressed for symbol variation within the variation and / or hold. That is, when "Distance" is displayed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot may be higher than when "your mind" is displayed.

  In addition, you may express the big hit expectation about the said fluctuation | variation and / or the symbol fluctuation in suspension by the change frequency of the music by music change advance notice. For example, when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, it may be configured to be more likely to make a big hit with respect to the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation within the hold when the music is changed twice. . In addition, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, seven times) due to the music change notice, the change and / or the symbol change in the hold may be a big hit decision (or a big hit rich). Conversely, if the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to a music change advance notice, it may be a lost decision.

  In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (A16), an animation of "Bright DREAM" is also displayed. Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (i 19), “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” which is a combination of big hit with definite variation is displayed with shaking (FIG. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to "Make DREAM", and then the music of "Make DREAM" is outputted from the speaker 120, and the decoration symbol display device 208 outputs "Make DREAM". An animation (including the lyrics display) is displayed and becomes a big hit. In addition, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Bake DREAM", the music of "Bake DREAM" is outputted from the speaker 120, and / or the decoration symbol display device 208 has "Bake DREAM" It may be configured such that the animation may not be displayed. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and changed to a specific music, there may be a case where the next time there is no effect display corresponding to the music, there may be a loss.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  A big hit game start screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (i 21), and a big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120, and during the big hit start interval (during a big hit start effect) It is.

  The timing in FIG. 161 (b) is the timing immediately after the first round is started. In the jackpot game effect in this example, the first round and the second round become the music selection period. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 automatically displays a music selection screen. Note that the music selection may be started by the player's intention, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. In addition, even if it is a music selection period, if selection of a music is complete | finished, a music selection screen will disappear and round production will be started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display ("1R") indicating that it is the first round and a display (0 pt) of the number of balls (the number of winning balls) are also performed.

  The music selection list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. As we have achieved 4 consecutive homes in this big hit, "Kiseki's Universe" is newly added to the music release list GR and is selectable. The display of "the universe of Kiseki" is marked with "New". Note that in this example, the newly added music is configured to be displayed on the second row of the music release list GR, so "may be there" and "Mega Giga Summer" are already open. "Is hidden. Here, the newly opened “Kiseki universe” is selected, and the speaker 120 outputs the rust part of the “Kiseki universe”. In the music release list GR, the previous "Daake DREAM" is not displayed, and "Daake DREAM" can not be selected. However, in the case where the effect of "Bakee DREAM" is executed, "Bakee DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position in the music release list GR of "Makeru DREAM" may be a position immediately below the song ("Your Scarecrow") released by the previous time, or "Kishikino's released this time" It may be located directly below the universe. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 161, since the opening order is the sixth music, it may be the position of the sixth music counting from the leading music, but in this case, three question marks are displayed in a row. It will be caught. In addition, when the production of "Makeru DREAM" is executed, "Makeru DREAM" among the music released in response to the number of consecutive houses ("Kiseki's Universe") and the music of "Makeru DREAM" Only the song may be released, or both songs may be released.

  In FIG. 161 (i), the cursor csd is aligned with the display in which three question marks under the display of "Kiseki's Universe" are arranged in the music release list GR by operating the down key 137d. The display in which three question marks are arranged is an unreleased display, and the song title is also unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unclear what music is scheduled to be released in the future. At the timing shown in FIG. 161 (i), the gaming ball has begun to win the attacker.

  When the cursor csd is placed on the display where three question marks are arranged, the downward scroll is automatically started (Fig. 161 (b) 25), and the cursor csd goes to the end and It may be back to ". It should be noted that the scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation instead of the scrolling directed downward automatically. Also, instead of displaying three question marks in a row, the name of the song scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed dimmed. Or conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged may not be displayed in the music open list GR, and only the open music titles may be displayed.

  Also in FIG. 161 (i), the automatic scrolling does not end, and the rust part of "the space of Kiseki" is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. Note that during music selection, a part (in this example, the chorus part) of each music is output so as to loop, but it does not have to be looped. For example, when output for a certain period is completed, the next music Automatically, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. In addition, all may be output from the beginning of each music, or all may be output from the middle of the music (for example, a portion of rust).

  Even in FIG. 161 (b), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "may be there", but from the speaker 120, "the universe of Kiseki" is substituted for " The output of the part of the chorus of "may be there" has been started. Note that it may be configured such that the music of "may be there" may not be output until the cursor csd is set to "may be there". FIG. 161 (b 30) shows that the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling, and in the same figure (b 31), the cursor csd may be located at the top of the list. "I'm back", and automatic scrolling has ended. Basically, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is placed on the display of the target music (it may be at the same time as or before the cursor is set). Although the output of the music is started, since “it may be there” is output in the middle of the automatic scrolling, the music which was output at the time of FIG. The continuation of is output as it is. Furthermore, after the cursor csd is adjusted to "may be there" (may be simultaneous with or before being adjusted), it may be "newly there" The music of "" may be newly started from the beginning of the portion of the chorus of "may be there" (that is, the beginning of the music outputted by the music selection).

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is brought to the display of "Mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. 161 (b). In this state, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the chance button 136 is operated and it is determined to be "Mega Giga Summer". In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 161 (b), the display of the determined "mega giga summer" is displayed in red, and the music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

  When the music is determined in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. The second round of the round effect screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (b), and the title of the selected music "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is done. Also, the music of “Mega giga summer” is outputted from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning at the start of the round effect. In addition, when all is output from the beginning of not only the chorus part but the music at the time of music selection, you may make it be output from the continuation at the time of a round production start.

  Also, instead of FIG. 160 (i), in FIG. 161 (i), a song title "CREA" is displayed on the song title display section MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The song of this song name is a song not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, the music can not be selected by the player. The music of "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 160 (i. 15-2-2), and an animation of the character of "CREA" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, The lyrics for the song "CREA" are also displayed. As described above, when music that can not be selected by the player is output, the degree of expectation of the big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, the case of losing may be included. Also, in the subsequent music selection by the player, since the music of "CREA" is output once, it may be added as one of the selectable musics in the music open list GR, or vice versa. , May be prohibited to add. Also, it is possible to select in the song selection during the big hit game and not selectable in the song selection during the symbol variation, and conversely, in the song selection during the big hit game, it is not selectable and select in the song variation during the symbol variation It may be possible.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of effects by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 115 (b).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (A1), the first decorative symbol is in high-speed variation, and the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one reserve of special figure 1 is stored, and the first reserve icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 162, similarly to FIG. 158 (ac1), “user setting value” of “volume” and “brightness” is described at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” is at the lower right. And the "actual setting value" of the "brightness". In addition, the types of "BGM", "SE (sound effect)", and "light emission" among the effects actually executed are also described.

  In FIG. 162 (Wa1), the BGM for symbol variation is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for game board and the lamp 452 for game frame according to the lamp pattern for symbol variation It emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user setting value.

  In addition, in order to forcibly set the volume and the luminance to the actual setting value, the effect control data may ignore the user setting value and instruct to execute with the value defined by the effect data, or the user setting The sub control units 400 and 500 may self-manage according to a table in which effects ignoring the value are summarized, or may be managed based on a command from the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 162 (Wa3), a super reach effect (Kenou reach effect) is developed, and the left symbol temporarily stopped by the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and temporarily stopped similarly. The right symbol is moved to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 162 (Wa3), BGM for super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set values, and the lamp 442 for game board and the lamp 452 for a game frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach development. However, light is emitted at the same three levels of luminance as the user set value.

  In FIG. 162 (Wa4), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd operate and advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 162 (Wa4), the BGM disappears, and the super reach development feature character movement effect sound is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the super reach development feature film moving lamp According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set values. As described above, although the first large-screen behavior character article 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior character article 224 Gd and characters such as the light guide plate IL perform the rendering operation, the volume and the luminance remain at the user setting values.

  In addition, the 1st large board behavior character thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd return once to an initial position at an appropriate timing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Wa6), a scene after the main character Tonosama and the enemy character swordsman have a duel on the background screen of the wilderness, and the statue of the lord and the swordsman has been cut is displayed. In FIG. 162 (Wa6), the BGM for super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for game board and the lamp 452 for game frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach It emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user setting value.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (A7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 162 (A8), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and in the same figure (A9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreases, and thereafter, as shown in the same figure (A10) , Chance button 136 is operated at the timing within the operation effective period. During this time (Fig. 162 (ウ a 7-1) to Fig. 162 (ウ a 11-1), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the super reach result turning sound effect Are also output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value according to the symbol variation lamp pattern. In addition, the button effect may correspond to the suggestion that the effect of changing the setting of the volume and the brightness may start.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 162 (Wa10), the effect image is displayed from the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other It is switched to the display of Ed2. In FIG. 162 (A11-1) in response to the chance button 136 being operated, the BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation effect sound is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user setting value, and it is for jackpot confirmation According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 also emit light with five levels of luminance exceeding the user setting value. That is, both the volume and the luminance are forcibly raised.

  Note that even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 162 (Wa11-1) is executed. However, if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform the resurrection effect.

  In FIG. 162 (Wa12), the first large-screen behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character article 224Gd are operated again, each advancing from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device It is overlapped from the front side at 208. Then, in FIG. 162 (Wa13), the one-handed box character 224H operates to move downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-screen behavior and objects 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior and objects 224Gd. The light guide plate IL emits light again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this time (Fig. 162 (ウ a12) to Fig. 162 (ウ a14)), as with Fig. 162 (ウ a11-1), from the speaker 120, the jackpot confirmation sound output is output at five levels beyond the user setting value. The game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with five levels of luminance exceeding the user set value according to the big hit determination lamp pattern.

  In addition, even when the special effects fail and the rendering operation is not performed, the volume and brightness may be changed from the user setting value, or in this case, the user setting value may be left unchanged.

  Also, when the button image 136 is displayed, such as in FIG. That is, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed before the effect that the special effects operate is performed. The change here becomes a notice (withdrawal a big hit notice) as a result of the button effect, and such a pre-change may be treated as one of the big hit finalization effects.

  In addition, here, the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation start of an object such as a one-man box character 224H or the like, or the movement of the character to the effect position is completed In accordance with the above, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed at timings other than the operation timing of the accessory. In addition, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one pattern change, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed only once at the maximum by one pattern change. Furthermore, here, the volume and the luminance are aligned and changed, but only the volume may change, and only the luminance may change (the same applies to the following).

  Eventually, in FIG. 162 (A15), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the sub control unit 400, 500 side receives the command for returning the one-man box character 224H to the initial position, and the one-man box character 224H is upward. Start moving toward and return to the initial position. Here, the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emitting light according to the big hit confirmation lamp pattern is lowered to the user set value and the brightness of the big hit confirmation sound from the speaker 120 is also up to the user set value. It has been pulled down. This is because the sub control unit 400, 500 side returns to the user setting value by receiving the command to return the one-to-two box character 224H to the initial position.

  Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Fa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and becomes thinner and gradually disappears, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (Fa17), The display of the scene after the swordsman defeated fades in. Further, at this timing, the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character objects 224Gd are beginning to return to their initial positions. During this time (Fig. 162 (ウ a16) to Fig. 162 (ウ a17)), as in Fig. 162 (ウ a15), the speaker 120 outputs a big hit definite sound effect at the volume of the user setting value. The game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emitting light in accordance with the determination lamp pattern also emit light with the brightness of the user setting value.

  It should be noted that the volume and / or luminance changes from the user setting value during the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as shown in FIG. 162 (c. A11-1) to FIG. The volume and / or brightness may be configured to return to user settings when switching to light emission data and / or. Conversely, the volume and / or luminance may change from the user setting value across the period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data changes one or more times.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (Fa18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman have cut each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large-scale behavior character objects 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character objects 224Gd stop at the initial position. In FIG. 163 (Wa18), BGM for super reach victory is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the lamp 442 for game board or the lamp 452 for a game stand frame according to the lamp pattern for super reach victory. However, light is emitted at the same three levels of luminance as the user set value. Note that the timing at which the volume and brightness return to their original state is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 162 (Wa15) (the timing at which the character (San-Chu character 77H) starts to return from the rendering position to the initial position). It may be the display switching timing), or it may be the timing when the victory of the duel scene is determined (the timing shown in FIG. 163 (a 19-1)), or the timing when the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is stopped and displayed It may be

  In FIG. 163 (Wa19-1), a scene where the enemy character swordsman has fallen and the hero of the lord has won is displayed, and the lord of the world navigation character YM also poses a victory pose. In FIG. 163 (Wa19-1), the BGM for super reach victory is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the voice of the main character "I'm done" is also the same as the user setting value3. A level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of luminance as the user set values in accordance with the super reach victory lamp pattern.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the finalized display is performed.

  Also, in place of FIG. 162 (Wa11-1), in FIG. 163 (Wa11-2), after the majesty and the swordsman cut in response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 162 (Wa10). The display of the scene of is switched to a display in which a symbol ("decoration 6") different from the left / right symbol ("decoration 7") is largely displayed (swing display) as a middle symbol. This is a display that suggests button production failure. At this time, BGM for super reach defeat is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for game board according to the lamp pattern for super reach defeat The game stand frame lamp 452 emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. In this manner, when the rendering fails, or when there is a loss of concentration or a determination of loss, the volume and / or brightness may not be changed from the user setting value, but the volume and / or brightness may be changed from the user setting value. It is also good.

  In addition, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (a a11-2 ′) in place of FIG. 162 (a a11-1) is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Although the display screen is the same as the display screen in this example, in this example, the volume is lower than the user setting value, and the luminance is also lower than the user setting value. Thus, when the rendering fails, or when there is a loss of concentration or a determination of loss, the volume and / or luminance may be reduced. Also, the volume and / or brightness may be reduced when the rendering is successful, or when the jackpot is rich or jackpot determined.

  In FIG. 163 (in a7-2-1), instead of FIG. 162 (in a7-1), the button effect is not started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The character of the main character, Tonosama, is displayed in an enlarged size, and reports that it has won. As described above, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 and the like (moving means) such as the one and two box character product 224H is not involved, when the specific effect display is displayed, The volume and / or brightness may be forced to change. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (Wa7-2-3), the display returns to the display of the scene after the majesty and the swordsman break, and the volume and brightness also return to the same level as the user setting value. ing.

  Note that the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed according to the effect by other effect means, not limited to the feature or display. Examples of other effects referred to here include a light guide plate IL, a Versa Lighter (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), etc. The volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed depending on the winning on the winning opening (for example, the general winning opening, the starting opening, the attacker) or the passage of a specific gate. Furthermore, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed also in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

  Also, instead of FIG. 163 (Wa19-1), in the example continued from FIG. (Wa19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the same figure (Wa19-2-1), The display of the scene won by the hero of the main character fades out as shown in the figure (Wa19-2-3), and then, as shown in the figure (Wa19-2-4), the first decorative symbol is displayed. The display is swayed by the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". In this example, after the sound volume and the luminance are forcibly changed in FIG. 162 (Wa11-1), the state is continued until FIG. 163 (Wa19-2-3), and thereafter, it returns to the user setting value. That is, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed continues until the super reach effect is finished or until the same display of three same decorative symbols is started. Also, the display may be continued until the display of the shake ends. Also, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

  In addition, although the volume or / and the luminance are forcibly increased at the time of the bonus item operation or the like, the volume or / and the luminance may be reduced. Also, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or / and the brightness may not change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume and brightness which can not be set, and in this case, it is changed to a value larger than the maximum value which is the user set value or smaller than the minimum value which is the user set value. Good.

  Also, the luminance may be high and the volume may be low, and conversely, the volume may be high and the luminance may be low. In addition, the luminance may change and the volume may not change. Conversely, the volume may change and the luminance may not change. In addition, when the volume or luminance adjustment (setting) screen is displayed at the time of volume or luminance change, the value set by the player may be left as it is, or the value being forcibly changed is displayed. May be In addition, the player may be able to adjust the volume or the brightness when the volume or the brightness changes, or may not be adjustable when the volume or the brightness changes.

  FIG. 162 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed. Note that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon, in which the volume or / and the luminance is not forcibly changed. For example, in the case of changing to a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is not so high, the volume or / and the brightness may not be forcedly changed. For example, if the expectation of the big hit is going up in the order of white flashing, blue, green, red, gold and iridescent, the volume or / and the luminance will not be forcedly changed unless it changes more than red. It is also good. Or, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes, the volume or / and the brightness may be forcedly changed.

  FIG. 162 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed at the appearance of the effect (hot effect) having a high expectation of the big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. The hot effects are red, gold and iridescent effects. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed. Also, the amount of change may differ between red (for example, one level up), gold (for example, two level up), and rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. It may be.

  FIG. 162 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed once the resurrection effect is started after the lost design symbol is temporarily stopped. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (c d-2), a resurrection effect accompanied by a wipe effect is executed. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be changed prior to the result display. That is, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed simultaneously with the start of the resurrection effect.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the above-mentioned customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 121 (b), the "copanda" of 07 is set, and in the "holding frame selection", the 04 "holding frame D" to which the overhead image for the wipe effect is added is The "icon C" of 03 is set in the "hold display selection", and the "background E" of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  In the description herein, the color used in the effect represents the level of the expectation of the big hit, and the expectation of the big hit increases in the order of white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. For example, a color as a display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be mentioned. Hereinafter, the change in color in the direction in which the expectation of the big hit becomes higher may be referred to as promotion. This is the same in the following description. This is also applicable to the above explanation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and a copanda as the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11, which is a default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D1), the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed.

  Thereafter, the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by two, and three suspension icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during stop display shown in FIG. 164 (D3). Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 164 (D4), one hold is digested and symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. In addition, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not been started yet.

  In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 164 (D5), the moving animation of the first holding icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift moving animation of the holding icons h12 and h13 are started, but Images appear from the left and right. Note that the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed during the appearance of the overhead image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 164 (D6), the bird's-eye view image is fully closed (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 164 (f7), the first decorative symbol also starts variable display, and in FIG. 164 (d), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation. Also in FIG. 164 (d), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

  In FIG. 164 (D9-1), the wipe out is started, the overhead image for the wipe effect starts to open, and in FIG. 164 (D), the overhead image is fully open (wipe out state). In the wipe effect here, the holding frame is changing. That is, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 164 (D10) is a “holding frame R” different from the “holding frame D” selected by the player in the customization setting, and the holding is surrounded by a red frame around It becomes a frame. Although “holding frame R” is a holding frame that can not be selected in the customization setting, it may be selectable. Note that the leg of the navigation character YM is not visible due to this red frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame having a function to notify that the display mode of the holding icon is in a state of change easily, and it is called "hold change !? time" next to the copanda of the navigation character YM. Text display is displayed. It should be noted that the suspension of the pre-reading advance notice object is the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 because one suspension is digested in FIG. 164 (D4). Here, "hold change !? time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high probability state of effect".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D12), the bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 shoots a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11 for hold of the previewed preview target. The display mode changes for the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 164 (D13) changes to the blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, no missile is fired, or any pending icon or fluctuation icon does not hit the missile, or the display does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. These all correspond to the failure of the promotion effect.

  In FIG. 164 (D15), it is in the reach state, and in the figure (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The pending change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is promoted to two levels, and when the blue pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the pending icon is The display mode is promoted to one level. In FIG. 164 (D16), the red hold change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 164 (D17), the hold change animation is started. That is, the first reserve icon h11 shown in FIG. 164 (D17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in the figure (D18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first reserve icon h11 is It has changed to the red display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (D19), the middle symbol, which has been a red hold change symbol, changes to "decoration 2" and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1" Is displayed in a variable manner (temporary stop). In FIG. 164 (D20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the losing is decided.

  In FIG. 164 (D22), the red reserve icon, which has been the first reserve icon 11 so far, is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variation icon h0 of the red display mode. Even if the pending notice target pending is digested, the pending mark UI continues to display the text "pending change !? time". In FIG. 164 (D23), a golden light beam is emitted from the navi character YM toward the fluctuation icon h0, and in the figure (D24), the fluctuation icon which has been red is changed to gold.

  In FIG. 164 (D26), it is in the reach state, and in the figure (D28), it is developed into the super reach effect. In Super Reach production, the background of the sky changes to the background of the wilderness, and a duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the holding frame UI has all remaining rests of the pedestal hs0, and the holding icon also disappears. However, the fluctuation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. A pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 164 (D28) is a pedestal of the “holding frame D” before changing in the wipe effect. That is, it is the original pedestal. However, it may be a pedestal of "holding frame R" after changing in the wipe effect. In addition, the pedestal hs0 or the variation icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or in the normal reach state (FIG. 164 (D26)). In addition, all the holding frame UI and the holding icon may not be displayed. Furthermore, when the super reach effect ends, items such as the holding frame UI and the holding icon that have been hidden may be displayed, or after the end of the super reach effect, the holding frame R is displayed, and the next symbol change is performed. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

  In this example, even if the reach state is reached, the color of the frame of the holding frame UI remains red, but if the color of the frame of the holding frame UI also changes, the expectation of the big hit is increased It is also good.

  It should be noted that the holding frame not selected by the player (for example, “holding frame R”) is more than the case where the prefetch holding icon is displayed on the holding frame (for example, “holding frame D”) selected by the player. If the pre-reading suspension icon is displayed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation corresponding to the pre-reading suspension icon, or the holding frame selected by the player (For example, in the case where the prefetching icon is displayed in the holding frame (for example, "pending frame R") not selected by the player than in the case where the prefetching icon is displayed in (for example, "pending frame D") However, even if it is the display mode of the same pre-reading reservation icon, it is constituted in the symbol fluctuation which corresponds to that pre-reading reservation icon so that it is easy to be displayed the big hit design feature finally It may be.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Instead of FIG. 164 (D 9-1), in FIG. 165 (D 9-2-1), both the reserve icon and the change icon are temporarily changed to the special mode (character). Also, the navigation character YM is also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color is changed to reflect the degree of expectation of the big hit. Here, the ease of change to the color with high expectation of the jackpot is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

  In FIG. 165 (D9-2-2), the mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is performed. The character that has won the mini game changes to a big hit expected color icon (hold icon or change icon). The wolf character wins with a probability of 50%, the princess character wins with a probability of 75%, and the princess character wins with a probability of 100%. In addition to the character of the lord, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to a big hit finalized color icon (here, rainbow color).

  In FIG. 165 (D9-2-3), the Janken game was played as a mini game, and everyone played Janken all at once. As a result, both of the characters of the nephew lost and the character of the lord won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

  In FIG. 165 (D9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and the bird's-eye view image in FIG. (D9-2-5) is completely closed (wipe-in state), and then wiped out (FIG. (D9-2-6) In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. (D9-2-7), the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the holding amount UI remains as “holding amount D”.

  165 (A1) to (A12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change advance display are displayed across a plurality of changes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, two reservations of Special Figure 1 are stored, and a first suspension icon h11 and a second suspension icon h12, which are the default display mode of the icon C, are displayed. Further, the background (sky background) of the background E is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 165 (2), the suspension of Special Figure 1 is increased by one, and the third suspension icon h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 165 (O3), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. , The fluctuation display of the decoration pattern is started. In FIG. 165 (5), the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change preview display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, the icon I1 of the treasure chest of the change notice is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is consumed, and the hold of the pre-reading notice object is put on hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 165 (O7), the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I1 of the treasure box continues to be displayed on the carpet icon I2.

  In FIG. 165 (e9), the suspension of the first hold icon h11, which is the suspension of the pre-reading advance notice object, is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I1 of the treasure box is still displayed while riding on the icon I2 of the carpet, and the icon I1 of this treasure box is displayed across a plurality of changes. In FIG. 165 (10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the waiting display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation is started. That is, in FIG. 165 (E11), the treasure box of the icon I1 of the treasure box is wide and a smoke image appears from inside, and the navigation character YM is covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 165 (12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the copanda selected by the player in the above-described customization setting is changed to the navigation character YM of the game head. Although the navi-cap character YM is a character that can not be selected in the customization setting, it may be selectable.

  In addition, in this example, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM over the true symbol change display such as the special drawing symbol change display. The navigation character YM or the change notice may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (the icon I1 of the treasure box, the icon I2 of the carpet) is displayed due to the change, and the navigation character YM constantly displayed changes due to the change notice display in the third pseudo ream. The change notice is displayed due to change (treasure box icon I1 and carpet icon I2), and the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo run, and the navigation letter YM constantly displayed by the change notice display at the third pseudo run. It may change.

  FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of effect in a pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed that the auto button mode is set.

  In FIG. 166 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed on the background of the sea, with the combination of the lost decoration symbols being stopped. In addition, one suspension of the special view 1 is stored, and a first suspension icon h11 which is a default display mode is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. Further, at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance button 136 is shown. The chance button shown in FIG. 166 (A1) performs normal white lighting. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always on even when the chance button operation is out of operation, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button's operation valid period. It may be

  In FIG. 166 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation announcement is started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1), the speech notice is updated, and the speech image CI1 of the lady is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, And a conversation image CI2 of a whistle on which a button effect image is displayed. The button effect image is an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. At the timing shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to view. In this example, it is more likely that the conversation announcement will be a big hit if the conversation announcement is not given. In addition, when the speech advance notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the conversation image CI1 of the fond may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (A6). By operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 166 (A6), the player may be able to view an effect corresponding to the operation. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 166 (A6) starts blinking in white.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 166 (A7), the reserve of special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not started to appear at this time. Moreover, since time has passed since the operation effective period started, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced. In FIG. 166 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 166 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed above the white circle. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 166 (A8-1) changes to blue lighting and starts to vibrate in response to the appearance of the button holding icon.

  In FIG. 166 (A10), a fixed period of time elapses after the operation effective period of the button effect in conversation announcement is started. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the preannouncement of conversation, and as shown in FIG. 166 (A11), the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows is updated, and “Summer vacation still ~” as a response display for the auto button. Text display is displayed. As for the button holding icon, the automatic button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIG. 166 (A12) to FIG. 166 (A13), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue as an operation promoting mode with respect to the button holding icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (A15), the combination of the decorative symbols of lost is stopped and displayed. The vibration of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 166 (A15) is ended, and the blue light is returned to the normal white light. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 166 (A14), the chance button 136 has ended its vibration and returned to white lighting. This is because the operation period of the button hold icon has ended. The operation valid period of the button holding icon may end, for example, when a predetermined valid period has elapsed, or the decorative symbol may end when the first stop is performed, or the decorative symbol of The process may end upon confirmation display. However, the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 166 (A16), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 which is the button suspension icon is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (A16), the second decorative symbol starts variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started variable display, and the display mode of the button hold icon The first hold icon h11 is also still displayed.

  In FIG. 166 (A17), the hold reduction animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and in FIG. Reaches the top of the pedestal hs0 with the display mode of the button holding icon, and the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the figure (A19), and in the figure (A20), the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode It is changing.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  After that, in FIG. 167 (A22), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 167 (A23), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation.

  In this example, although the auto button mode has been set all the time, the chance button 136 is not operated until the symbol variation display changed to the button holding icon is confirmed regardless of the setting of the auto button mode. In the case of the hold reduction animation, the display mode automatically changes. That is, while it is the hold icon of the display mode of the button hold icon, it changes to the hold icon of the blue display mode according to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold decrease animation is started (the fluctuation icon h0 It can also be seen that the display mode does not change in response to the operation of the chance button 136).

  Further, the automatic button mode may be ended by operating the chance button 136 during the automatic button mode. In that case, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may not be ended while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, or the chance button is displayed even while the remaining period meter MT is displayed. Operating the button 136 may end the auto button mode.

  Also, when the chance button 136 is not operated, the variation icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button holding icon, or may not be changed to the variation icon h0 of the blue display mode, or default. It may change to the change icon h0 of the display mode of. In addition, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not be finished. Furthermore, that the change icon h0 of the blue display mode is not changed when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same whether in the auto button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and furthermore, it may change during the auto button mode but not during the non-auto button mode or vice versa.

  Furthermore, in the state where the auto button mode is not set, when there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 166 (A11), the characters "Summer vacation still ~" are displayed. It is not updated to the conversation image CI2 of the wolf. However, it may be updated.

  Also, in place of FIG. 166 (A5-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM in FIG. 167 (Aa 5-2-1). The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in FIG. 167 (Aa5-2-1), a meter display MW 'is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 167 (Aa5-2-2), a button display icon 136D is displayed together with a dialog image CI2 of a whistle on which a button effect image is displayed. As described above, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 167 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes even if the button is not operated since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the talk notice. There is.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (A5-1), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed in FIG. 167 (Aa5-3). In this case, there is a need to operate the chance button 136 multiple times, and the auto button function does not have to work even when the effect requires the chance button 136 to be operated multiple times. It should be noted that, when operated a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (A5-1), in FIG. 167 (Aa5-4), a button effect image (button is displayed on the second display device 208S disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device) An image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 167 (Aa5-4), although there is one button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S, one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S can The button function may not function.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (A5-1), in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-1), a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to continuously hit the chance button 136 is performed. In FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-2), the button continuous hitting effect is started, and the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and the continuous hitting meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 . The automatic button function does not work for the button continuous hitting effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-2) changes to blue lighting while it starts to vibrate, and urges the operation. Eventually, in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous hitting meter RHM shown in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-6) rises, and the response display is performed. In FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-5), the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, and the response display such as the rising of the continuous hitting meter RHM is also performed. However, the chance button 136 shown in the same figure (Aa5-5-6) is The vibration continues and the blue light continues. In the previous examples, it was sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since the batting is required, the vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 are continued. Also in the case of long press, the operation of the chance button 136 is long as in the case of the continuous hit, so the technical idea here can be applied. The timing shown in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation effective period has passed and the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. The vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. After this, the chance button 136 immediately stops the vibration and returns to white light. Note that the auto button function may be configured to operate when operated one or more times. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hit function is configured to work, and by performing the long press for a certain period, the same response display as performing continuous press operation is performed. However, if the auto button function does not work, it may be configured such that the long press auto continuous hitting function does not work either.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In the example continued from FIG. 168 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 166 (A8-1), it is after the start of the operation effective period of the button hold icon, to the button effect in the conversation notice This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function of. In this case, both the response presentation of the button hold icon and the response presentation of the button presentation in the conversation announcement are displayed. That is, the button hold icon changes as the response effect of the button hold icon, and the dialog image CI2 of the bag is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation advance notice. The change of the button holding icon corresponds to the pre-reading notice, and the update of the speech image CI2 of the whistle in the pre-reading speech also corresponds to the pre-reading notice. Note that the conversation announcement may be a normal announcement. Also, the change of the button fluctuation icon in FIG. 166 (A20) corresponds to the normal notice.

  It should be noted that only the response effect of the one in which the auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button holding icon may be displayed, and the dialog image CI2 may not be updated. Alternatively, on the other hand, only the response effect of the auto button function may be displayed.

  In addition, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the one in which the auto button function does not work may be displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the one in which the auto button function works may be displayed. And, conversely, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person with the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person without the auto button function is displayed You may

  Furthermore, although the above description using FIG. 168 (A 8-2-1) to FIG. 168 (A 8-2-4) has been described during the auto button mode setting, the auto button mode is not set yet. The same is true for

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (A8-1), in FIG. 168 (Aa8-3), even when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (here, blue). Indicates Note that different notifications may be performed when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

  Also, instead of FIG. 166 (A8-1), in FIG. 168 (Aa8-3 ′), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in the normal color (here, it blinks white) An example is shown.

  Also, as another example, in FIG. 168 (Ab1), a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to continuously hit the chance button 136 is made during the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (Ab2), a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed together with the display of the third round, but during the big hit game, the auto button function May be disabled or, conversely, the auto button function may be enabled.

  FIG. 168 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 168 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of effects on the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (Ba1-1), effects by the navigation character YM are started. However, the chance button 136 is a normal white light, is not vibrated, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 168 (Ba2), the appearance of the button hold icon (first hold icon h11) at which the auto button function does not work causes the chance button 136 to start vibrating and change to blue and prompt an operation. In FIG. 168 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which is the button hold icon, is changed (see FIG. 168 (Ba1-5)).

  FIG. 168 (Ba1-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 168 (Ba1-1), but the only difference is that in FIG. 168 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The light turns blue and the back button is notified.

  The remaining period meter MT, which represents the remaining period of the operation effective period described above, will be described in more detail. The description here is applicable to any of the examples of effects in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. In the remaining period meter MT, the display mode changes in accordance with the passage of time (in the present example, the decrease display is performed) and in the back of the remaining time display region, the display mode is displayed according to the passage of time Is composed of two of the elapsed time display area MT2 (in this example, the increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color, shape, etc.) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (in this example, blue) or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is not in the default color (white in this example) When displayed in, etc. In the case where the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed to decrease as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. May be displayed on the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). Conversely, if the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode, and if the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased and displayed with the passage of time, Since the area displayed in the special display mode increases accordingly, the player who wants to see the special display mode by the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (chance button 136 etc. in this example), etc. There are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the way of enjoyment and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed when the remaining period meter is first displayed (in the case of the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is displayed first). In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the remaining time display area MT1 decreases and the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time) special The display mode may be displayed, or the display mode may be changed from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  Further, the navigation character YM described above is further supplemented. The description herein can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described above is displayed. First, various advance notices may not be given by the navigation character. In addition, while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character A”) is displayed, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character B”) may be displayed. In such a case, the navigation character B displayed earlier may be configured to overlap the navigation character B displayed first, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later is first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions not overlapping each other. For example, the navigation character YM that is always displayed may be overlapped by a navigation character that gives a notice of the change and / or a preview of the change during one or a plurality of changes. Furthermore, the change preview may be displayed by the effect display indicating that the change preview may be displayed by the navigation character.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the overlapping relation between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the counter-full error and the other displays of the luminance adjustment windows BW.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α1), a holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Moreover, the combination ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the loss of the decoration design is displayed also to the 1st decoration design (the 3rd design) and the 2nd decoration design (the 5th design) The symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second number-of-holds display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the number of special views of the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no suspension, and the symbol variation display is not started after the final display of the stop symbol of the special figure is performed, and the menu icon MI is overlapped with the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. The volume adjustment icon VI and the brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball removal notification such as “Please pull off the ball” is displayed at the lower part of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball removal notification is a slightly transparent display, and when the display of the ball removal notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the rear side is in a state of being slightly visible. Hereinafter, displaying being displayed so as to overlap from the front side or being displayed in the front layer may be simply expressed as “overlap”. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification may be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all. Furthermore, a sound such as "Please pull the ball" is also output from the speaker 120.

  The display of the ball removal notification is shifted from the display position of the second decorative pattern on the upper left and the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, and these displays are not overlapped. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol and / or the second number-of-retentions display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification also has a shifted display position with respect to the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and the frame RW does not overlap either. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to be absolutely overlapped with the frame RW, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position with the holding frame UI, and is not overlapped with the holding UI. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the holding frame UI absolutely, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 169 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed later than the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is a layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, and the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI also become non-displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (1) Fluctuation indication of the decoration pattern is done. However, the ball removal operation has not been performed yet, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. It is to be noted that although the ball removal operation is performed, once the plate filling error is eliminated, the plate filling error occurs again, and the same is true when the display of the ball removal notification is newly displayed. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Also, in FIG. 169 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed above the holding frame UI. The bar display VB for volume control is displayed from the front side so as to overlap at least a portion of the first decorative symbol, at least a portion of the variation icon h0, and at least a portion of the navigation character YM. In the following description, when the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. In addition, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, it is possible to display a bar display for brightness adjustment, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment The following description of the bar display VB for volume adjustment can be applied to the bar display for luminance adjustment. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be simultaneously displayed. Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment or the bar display for luminance adjustment may be always displayable or may be displayable for a predetermined period. Also, display may be possible only while operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys.

  Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment and the display of the ball removal notification are displayed at positions not overlapping. The indication of the removal of the ball may be displayed so as not to overlap with the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

  Furthermore, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position for both the hold icon and the change icon, and these icons do not overlap. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the hold icon and / or the change icon, or may overlap. Further, the display of the notice of removal of the ball is deviated also in the display position of the display of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α4), super reach effect is performed, and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here too, the display of the ball removal notification is displayed, and the left symbol of the "decorative 7" moved to the upper left and the right symbol of the "decoration 7" moved to the upper right and the display of the ball removal notification overlap ing. In addition, the indication of the ball out notification is displayed overlapping with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. Note that the volume adjustment is possible even during the super reach, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α 4). The bar display VB for volume control also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

  Although the big hit game start screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α5), the display of the ball removal notification also overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, even in the big hit game, the volume adjustment is possible, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α5). The bar display VB for volume control also overlaps the jackpot start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted from the right-handed suggestion display on the upper left of the screen (display different from the right-handed warning. Equivalent to the mini right-handed display in FIG. 119 (52) above). It does not overlap to the right strike indication indication. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the right-handed suggestion display, or may overlap. The right strike indication may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α6), a right strike instruction screen for instructing the player to strike the right is displayed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is from the jackpot state in the first jackpot (normal state (special figure low probability map low definite state) to the first hit (first train) jackpot, but the latent probability change state The first (first series) jackpot from (Toku figure high probability drawing low certainty) and the first (first series) jackpot from sudden definite change state (special figure high certainty drawing high probability) In addition, the latent positive change state and / or the sudden positive change state described above indicate only the state shifted from the normal state, excluding those that occur in the positive change state or the short time state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. In the right-handed instruction screen here, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped, but on the other hand, the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped by the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, a right-handed warning display (corresponding to a right-handed notification in FIG. 118 (60) described above and a liquid crystal display at the time of right-handed hitting in FIG. 174 described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although not performed, a right strike warning may be displayed while the right strike instruction screen is displayed. Further, while the left-handed warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of the left-handed hitting warning in FIG. 174 described later) is not displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, although the right strike suggestion display is performed while the right strike designation screen is displayed, the right strike suggestion display may not be performed while the right strike designation screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 169 (α7), the first round is started, and the round effect is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of the round effect. Note that the display of the ball removal notification is not in the same display as the display of the number of rounds at the upper right of the screen, and the display of the number of rounds is not overlapped. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number of rounds display, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is also deviated in the display position of the number-of-balls display (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and the display of the number-of-balls display does not overlap. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the number-of-balls display absolutely, or may overlap.

  In the fourth round, Figure 169 (α8), a promotion effect is performed to indicate whether a second chance will be reached in the fifth round, where the second variable winning opening is open for a long time to facilitate V passage As a result, a success effect representing that the promotion effect is successful is executed. That is, it is notified that it is a big hit game in which the probability change transition condition is easily established. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of this success effect. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α8), the display of “V chance GET” of the star mark is also started. The display of the ball out notification is not in the same display position as the display of “V chance GET” of this star mark, and this display is not overlapped. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to completely overlap with the indication of “V chance GET” of the star mark, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 169 (α 9), the fifth round is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the indication that it is the fifth round of the big hit game is displayed, and it is promoted to encourage V passage in this round. The message "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, there are cases where it is possible to make the player reliably perform the V-pass. The display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the display of "Aim for V".

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the gaming ball to the probability variation operation area in the second variable winning prize opening, and the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies The display of "V" which is is displayed large. That is, the display of "V" which is a notification that the definite variation acquisition has been determined is displayed based on the V passage. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of “V”. In the timing shown in FIG. 169 (α10), the display of “V chance GET” of the star may be hidden.

  When the fifth round is over, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in a mode as shown in FIG. 169 (α11). In the big hit game mentioned above, the probability change transition condition is established by passing V in the 5th round, so while the symbol change display of the fixed number of times is performed after the end of the big hit game, the positive change state (special figure high probability popular figure Transition to the high probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, a display of "Yoshimune RUSH plunging" indicating that it shifts to a probability change state (provisional change effect) is performed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the display of this "Yoshimune RUSH plunging". In addition, even in the end effect of the big hit game, although the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α12), a prepaid card removal warning display (corresponding to the alert display in FIG. 119 (57) described above) is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the prepaid card removal warning display. Even in the end effect of the prepaid card removal warning display, although the right-handed suggestion display is displayed, it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α13), a display (BONUS × 3) of the number of big hit consecutive villas is displayed immediately below the right hitting suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. Further, at the upper right of the screen, a music title display portion MN is displayed, and on the left side, icons of upper and lower keys of the operation key unit are displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  The display of the ball out notification is not in the same display position as the display of the number of big hit consecutive houses, and does not overlap this display. The indication of the ball out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the indication of the number of big hit consecutive houses, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the notification of removal of the ball is deviated in the display position of the music title display section MN, and is not overlapped with the music title display section MN. The indication of the removal of the ball may be displayed so as not to be absolutely overlapped on the music title display unit MN, or may be overlapped. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in the display position with the icons of the up and down keys, and does not overlap with the icons of the up and down keys. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is also deviated in the display position with the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and is not overlapped with the second hold number display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the second number-of-retentions display, or may overlap.

  Further, although the bar display VB for volume adjustment shown in FIG. 169 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, it may be displayed at a position not overlapping.

  Also, in FIG. 169 (α14), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (α15), the music selection screen shown in FIG. The display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap the music release list GR.

  Also, in FIG. 169 (α16), the music selection is finished, and the round effect is started. At the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (α16), the song title of the currently selected song is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification does not overlap with the display of the music title because the display position is not the same as the display of the music title. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the song title indication, or may overlap.

  In addition, in the fourth round of FIG. 169 (α17), the display “Aim for V with next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in the fifth round of FIG. 169 (α18) The indication "Aim for V" is displayed, and the indication of the ball removal notification overlaps with the indications displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 169 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. Further, FIG. 169 (α 18) is at the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to the time when the special control in-progress signal of the main control unit 300 is switched from off to on. In this case, the period between FIG. 169 (α 17) and FIG. 169 (α 18) corresponds to the interval period between rounds from the end of the fourth round to the start of the fifth round, and the special control combination signal of the main control unit 300 is It is a period that is on from off.

  Also, in FIG. 169 (α 19), the display of “V” based on the presence of V passage is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap the display of this "V".

  Note that FIG. 169 (α 20) may be in a state where a certain period of time has elapsed since 5 R is being executed and V has passed, or at the end of five rounds (for example, the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit It may be in the state corresponding to the end).

  After that, the big hit game proceeds to 15 rounds (Figure 169 (α21)-Figure (23)), and in Figure 169 (α 24), as in Figure (α 11), the display of "Yoshimune RUS H plunge" ) Is displayed, and a bar display VB for displaying a ball out notification and adjusting the volume is overlapped with the display of “Yoshimune RUSH plunging”. In FIG. 169 (α24), the big hit end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

  In addition, since the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 and received by the first sub-control unit 400 and various controls are performed, a time lag occurs between the timing in the main control unit 300 and the actual timing.

  Also, in FIG. 169, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the inter-round interval. For example, "5R" may be displayed during the inter-round interval between the 5th and 6th rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only the R may be displayed to hide the numeric part.

  The same applies to the end of the fifteenth round, and the interval between rounds may or may not be displayed in a round display.

  In this example, the right-handed warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but the left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but the left-handed warning display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that the alerting | reporting regarding a warning may not be performed.

  As mentioned above, although the display of the ball pulling out notification was mentioned as an example and explained, the explanation here is not limited to the display of the ball pulling out notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIG. 172 and FIG. 173) It is applicable to the display of the notice regarding.

  FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball removal notification.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (β) is a display such that the display on the rear side of the display of the ball removal notification disappears at all.

  The display of the sphere removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ1) overlaps the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the sphere removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ1) overlaps a part of the luminance adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. Note that the display of the sphere removal notification may overlap with the entire brightness adjustment window BW, or may overlap with the entire volume adjustment icon VI. Also, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display like the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 169, and the display on the back side is in a state where it can be seen a little. However, it may be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all, as in the display of the ball out notification shown in FIG. 170 (β).

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ2) overlaps with the bar display VB for volume adjustment displayed during the symbol variation display. Although the display of the notice of removal of the sphere does not overlap the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM overlaps the bar display VB for adjusting the volume. Also, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ1) may be a display such that the display on the rear side can not be seen at all as in the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,the same.). In addition, not only the bar for volume adjustment but also the display relating to the function that can be set by the player during symbol fluctuation and the above-mentioned Daitomo etc. (the effect customization screen shown in the above-mentioned FIG. A list of missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the fluctuation state of the symbol while setting the song title display area MN, the bar for adjusting the brightness, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. 160 (i) etc. Display the game history (number of rotations, number of balls, number of mission clears, number of big wins for this play, maximum number of consecutive runs for this play, etc.), characters or background set by the user, holding frame, etc. It is applicable also to the display etc. which can be set and changed.

  The display of the balloon removal notification shown in FIG. 170 (γ3-1) overlaps with each of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. Then, when the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 170 (γ3-1), the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed, but as shown in FIG. 170 (γ3-2), In the display of the ball removal notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and is displayed on the front side. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed on the front side with priority. Also, in any case, the bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may overlap the hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 170 (γ 4), contrary to FIG. 170 (γ 3-2), the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped with the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  In FIG. 170 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS, and in the figure (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to inform that the ball is removed. Overlapping the display of. Here, although the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the navigation character YM, the navigation character YM may overlap with a part of the display of the ball removal notification. In addition, the navigation character YM may not perform animation so as to overlap with all or part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea is also applicable to the display regarding other errors described later.

  In FIG. 170 (ε), the display of the ball removal notification has no frame display, and is displayed using only characters.

  FIG. 170 (ζ 1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132 (see FIG. 49). By the peripheral image display 132G, the first decorative symbol and a part of each of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are overlapped.

  In FIG. 170 (ζ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 169 (α9) and hides the character display.

  In FIG. 170 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim for V with next R” shown on the right of FIG. 169 (α17).

  In FIG. 170 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of “V chance GET” of the star.

  In FIG. 170 (η 2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the display of “Aim for V with next R” displayed on the right.

  In FIG. 170 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and hides a part of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap all of the bar display VB for volume adjustment. In this example, the peripheral image display 132 G does not overlap with the display of the characters “Aim for V” and the display of “V chance GET” of the star mark.

  In FIG. 170 (θ 2), the peripheral image display 132 G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the bar display VB for volume adjustment and a part of “Aim for V with next R” on the right.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

  An example of the errors A to E shown in FIG. 171 will be described later. These error A to error E may or may not include the ball out notification.

  In FIG. 171 (ι 1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error A notification.

  In FIG. 171 ('1'), the opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

  In FIG. 171 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps each of the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM in the same manner as FIG. 170 (γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 170 (γ3-1).

  In FIG. 171 (ι3-1), a plurality of types of error display (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in order of error occurrence. That is, the newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first error generated is error A. The speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the newest error E. The warning sound may be output in the order of occurrence of all the displayed errors.

  In FIG. 171 (ι3-2), since the error E is eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the last occurring error is canceled, the warning sound of the previous error is output.

  In FIG. 171 (“3-2”), the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (error display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparent display of the lowermost error E notification, and the character display of the error E is hidden. A plurality of types of error displays may overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  In FIG. 171 (ι4-1), when errors occur in the order of the errors ABCDE, an error with high priority to be notified is displayed on the upper side, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error with the highest priority. Be done. Errors with high priority are errors with high importance (for example, serious errors for the game arcade), and more specifically, are the order of the list shown in FIG. In FIG. 171 (ι4-1), the error B is the error with the highest priority.

  In FIG. 171 (ι 4-2), since the error B is eliminated, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error E, which has been the second one so far, is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 171 (ι 5-1), the error A occurs, and the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a warning sound of the error A notification. In this state, an error Z occurs. The error Z is an error for stopping the game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (ι5-2) has a blue screen, and all the displays are not displayed except for the display relating to the error Z ing. The error for stopping the game referred to here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery. That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 can not or can not perform various types of lottery. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 like the error Z is not limited to the error for stopping the game, but is, for example, an error of the effect movable means described later, an error for stopping the payout operation, etc. It is also good. Also, some or all of various errors described in the list of FIG. 174 described later may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 174 May not be displayed in the display mode of the error Z. In addition, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery, the command is not transmitted to the side of the secondary control unit 400, 500, so that the secondary control unit 400, 500 side eventually does not perform the various lottery.

  In FIG. 171 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification non-transparency display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. The error display in FIG. 171 (κ1) is a display such that the display on the rear side of the error display is not visible at all, but is a slightly transparent display so that the display of the ball pull notification overlaps from the front When displayed on the back, the display on the back may be in a state of being slightly visible.

  In FIG. 171 (κ2), the display of the ball removal notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 171 (κ1). Here, the error of ball removal notification (sink full error) is not included in multiple types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in multiple types of errors (error A to error E) It is also good. It should be noted that, instead of the error of the ball removal notification, an error with a high frequency of occurrence may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

  A part of the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 171 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. In addition, all the errors of the ball removal notification may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  On the other hand, the error of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 171 (κ2) overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  Note that the error notification display regarding the control on the side of the sub control unit 400, 500 may be overlapped by the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the batting warning display may be overlapped by the display of the ball pulling out notification, and conversely, the display of the ball pulling out notification may be overlapped by the batting warning display. In addition, both error notification displays are displayed at a position where the error notification display related to the control of the sub control unit 400 and 500 and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. May be

  In FIG. 171 (λ1-1), symbol variation display is being performed, and simultaneous effects to be executed on a plurality of game machines are started halfway through the symbol variation display. FIG. 171 (λ1-2) shows an example of a display screen of simultaneous effect in normal time (error not generated and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 171 (λ1-2), the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the background display of the simultaneous effect at the normal time. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed overlapping the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the opposite may be applied. Moreover, about an error display, although there is an example shown in FIG. 171 ((lambda) 2 ') mentioned later, it may overlap and be displayed on the background display of simultaneous presentation. However, the opposite may be applied.

  FIG. 171 (λ 2) shows an example when simultaneous effects occur during super reach effect. During the super reach effect, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display section OFD in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect be able to. In the case of a game console provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, displays of simultaneous effects are displayed on the display devices 208S, 208M, and 208N. May be

  FIG. 171 (λ 2 ′) shows an example of the case where simultaneous effects occur during the error notification display. Here, the situation of super reach effect is also overlapped, but it may be before the first stop of the decorative symbol, or in the normal reach state, or may be the same. The simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and a plurality of types of error displays (error notification of error A to error E notification) are displayed without any change before the simultaneous effect occurrence, and the separate frame display unit The display of simultaneous effects in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error displays.

  Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may overlap the display of simultaneous rendering on the separate frame display unit OFD. Alternatively, on the contrary, the bar display VB for volume adjustment may have overlapping display of simultaneous effects in the separate frame display unit OFD.

  In addition, in the gaming table provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as "second display means" ) Overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter referred to as “first display means”), the first display according to the movement of the second display means A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, an error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

  As mentioned above, although the word "error" and the word "warning" are used in the description using FIGS. 169 to 171, it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is notified that an error has occurred. It may be a notification that there is an instruction to cancel an error that has occurred or has occurred. Moreover, what is described as an error may be set to have a higher priority than that described as a warning.

<Error notification / error detectable by main control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) non-connection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level error, and winning Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric chew), special winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, large winning opening exhaust excess error, large winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error and the like.

  A magnetism (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetism detection signal changes from off to on in the power on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and the power is turned on again. It is an error to return if it happens. Switch (sensor) not connected error is the state of power on (PW_WATCH signal is ON). Special drawing 60 start port, general drawing start port (gate), or attacker not connected (harness disconnected or connector missing) Occurs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 ms), and the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and the unconnected device (Special figure 60 start port, common drawing start port, attacker) is in a connected state It is an error that returns when it is detected. A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error generated when a magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

  The switch (sensor) level abnormal error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning percentage abnormal errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings on the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 51) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of gaming balls are detected when the ordinary electric character (for example, the second special view starting port 232 shown in FIG. 51) is not activated, and the error of the special winning opening Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings on the special winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 51) is an abnormal value.

  The large winning opening overrun error occurs when the number of balls discharged exceeds the number of ball entry during the definite variation area validity period and out of the definite variation area valid period, and the next main control timer that the large winning opening excess passing error occurs This error is returned when interrupt processing occurs.

  The big winning opening winning excess error occurs when the number of ball entry> the number of discharge after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special battery operation interval timer is 0), the number of ball entry = the number of discharge Is an error that returns when the power is turned on again. In return processing of the large winning a prize winning excess error, the probability variable area related number of passes is set to zero.

  In the impact abnormality error, the level of the impact sensor changes from OFF to ON and the state is ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and during the definite variation area (specific area) effective period. This error occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the shock sensor level changes from ON to OFF or when it changes from during the definite change area validity period to outside the definite change area validity period.

  A solenoid error error occurs when the photosensor does not perform an operation that changes from OFF to ON or an operation that changes from ON to OFF at least during the probability change region effective period, and the next solenoid error error occurs. This error is returned when timer interrupt processing occurs.

  In this example, the top row (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 172 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is not allowed to operate (no game), and thereafter, the errors are prioritized sequentially toward the bottom row. Although the degree is lower, other errors may be the top priority errors, and the priority levels may not be in the order of the list shown in FIG. The details of the conditions under which each error occurs, the recovery conditions, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the recovery operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. It should be noted that "when the hit end display period ends" of the return condition of the winning rate abnormal error of the special winning opening (attacker) is when the big hit or small hit end display period is finished.

<Error that can be detected by the error notification / delivery control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  The errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include lower tray full error (lower full tray error, full tray error), number-of-dispenses error, number-of-dispenses switch error, fraudulent delivery error, excess payout Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 can not be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, the magnetic error error, the external clock error, the magnetic field error, the switch level error, the switch disconnection error, the impact sensor error, etc., are not shown.

  Further, the occurrence condition of each error, the return condition, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 173 (a). Note that "stop" described in the item "stop emission" shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the release permission signal.

  FIG. 173 (b) is a view showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error which is a condition for generating a door opening error. The door open error is generated when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is generated, and is released when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are released. It is an error.

<Error notification / Other examples>
Note that the above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error may be another error (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch non-connection error (error related to connector disconnection or disconnection of the device controlled by the main control unit), impact abnormality error, The error may be a higher priority than the payout control communication error, the switch level abnormal error, the winning rate abnormal error, the door open error, the upper limit error, or the same priority.

  Also, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and an error with a low priority occur simultaneously, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is After execution, the operation of the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be performed. In that case, all devices in which notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 performs notification from magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to magnetic (magnet) detection error (decorative symbol display device 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120) may be switched (data is overwritten), and only one or more partial devices (eg, the speaker 120) may be overwritten, One or more devices may continue to notify for magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of the notification form of the error notification will be described using FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG.

  The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 174 indicates an error display by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and displays the character display described in “”. Here, the error display by the display means is displayed until the error is released, and is configured to be non-displayed when the error is released, but after the error is released for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) The display may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured to disappear when a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the error occurrence even if the error is not canceled. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be an error display by lighting of a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

  The sound effect described in FIG. 174 may be a notification by a sound output means (in this example, the speaker 120), and the portion in “” is repeatedly output as sound. Here, the notification by voice is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is canceled, but even if the error is not canceled, a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the error occurs. Then, it may be configured not to output voice, or may be configured to output voice for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is canceled.

  The error illumination LED shown in FIG. 174 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position where the player can see), and is configured to light up only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to light up with some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, sub control (sub control), or even if it is configured not to light up with some or all of them. Good. Further, in the warning regarding the sub control (in this example, the shock warning and the strike warning), the error illumination LED is configured not to be lit, but may be lit. The error illumination LED may be always on, and may be turned off when an error occurs to notify that an error has occurred. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 174 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position where the player can visually recognize), and lights up during a period in which payout by the payout device 152 is being performed. The light is turned off during a period in which the payout device 152 has not paid out. Moreover, although the payout lighting LED is turned on also when a partial error related to the payout (in this example, the number-of-payouts error occurs), it may be lit only during a period in which the payout device 152 is making a payout. It may be configured to light up when an error regarding dispensing occurs. In the decoration LED shown in FIG. 174, the game board 200 or the frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The decoration LED is provided on the main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102 It is the lamp provided in (it may be comprised so that it may not be provided) and performs light-emitting production according to various production. In addition, even if the decoration LED illustrated in FIG. 174 performs the light emission effect at the time of occurrence of an error, the light emission effect may be stopped and the light emission pattern for the error may be lit. (As an example at the time of return, the light emission effect may be progressed in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of error return may be restored when the error is recovered, but Also, it may be configured not to perform the light emission effect until the timing when it is easy to return (for example, at the start of a new light emission effect), even if it is configured to return from the effect data at the time the error occurred. Good) Here, the error notification by turning on the various LEDs lights up or flashes until the error is released, and is turned off when the error is released, but even after the error is released It may be configured to light up or blink for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the error occurrence even if the error is not canceled. Then it may be configured to turn off.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 of this example are (1) an error related to the payout (the payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to the power supply (the power control unit 660), and (3) the main control (main control unit 300). Etc., and (4) Warning about sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each of these will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error regarding payment>
First, we will explain the errors related to the payout. As the “error related to the payout (delivery control unit 600)” in this example, a lower receiving plate full error (hereinafter, also referred to as a full tray error), a glass frame opening error, a payout number shortage error, a payout excess error, a fraud payout error, There may be a delivery switch error, a main control communication error, a CR unit non-connection error, a CR unit communication error, and a door open error. Here, the 7-segment LED for dispensing error display is provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170), and can be viewed only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 (transparent or high transmittance) It is visible through the delivery board case 172 made of resin.

  In this example, when the lower pan error occurs, the number “2” is added to the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control board (dispensing board 170)). The notification by the light emitting means is performed by displaying, the notification by the display means (in the present example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in the present example, the display of characters indicating that the lower receiving tray full error has occurred), and the sound output means (In this example, notification by the speaker 120) (In this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the lower receiving tray full error has occurred is output). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper tray 126 and the lower tray 128, the case where the lower receiving tray full tank error occurs when the lower tray 128 is full is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper tray 126 (one storage tray), this error (full tray error) may occur when the upper tray 126 is full. .

  Also, when a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170)). And the second light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) notifies the second light emitting means (in this example, the decorative LED (in this example)). A frame lamp or a board lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and a sound output means (this example) Then, the notification (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that the glass frame opening error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed.

  When a door opening error occurs, the first light emitting means (in this example, 7-segment LED for dispensing error display provided on the dispensing control substrate (dispensing substrate 170)) has a number "1". The notification by the first light emitting means is performed by displaying, and the notification (in this example, the decorative LED (frame in the present example) by the second light emitting means (in the present example, the decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) ) And notification by a display means (in the present example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and a sound output means (in the present example) The notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, the sound output of the effect sound indicating that the door opening error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, notification of a door opening error may be notification of a glass frame opening error, and different notification modes (for example, notification by a display means) of a glass frame opening error and a part of an inner frame opening error are made different. The other notification may be the same, or all the notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game balls may be interrupted, and the payout of the game balls may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

  In addition, when the number-of-payouts error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for displaying the dispensing error provided on the dispensing control board (dispensing board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and a notification (lighting of the LED for payout lighting in the present example) by the third light emitting means (in this example, the LED for payout lighting) is performed. Note that other notification modes of error notification regarding payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Example of error notification / information notification mode / error related to power supply>
Next, errors related to the power supply will be described. As the “error related to the power supply (power control unit 660)” in this example, there are a fuse blow 1, a fuse blow 2, and a fuse blow 3. In this example, when an error related to the power supply occurs, the error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) during the error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, no notification is given as to an error related to the power supply, but notification using a display means, a sound output means, or various LEDs may be performed. In addition, a power supply status confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply substrate. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always on from the power on, and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, the power status confirmation LED is from the power on to off and an error occurs. It may be configured to be turned on.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / error concerning main control etc.>
Next, errors relating to the main control and the like will be described. The “error related to main control (main control unit 300) etc.” in this example includes a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch non-connection error, a shock abnormality Errors, winning rate abnormal error, large winning opening excess winning error, large winning opening excess ejection error, solenoid abnormal error (large winning opening abnormal error) may be mentioned.

  In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) And a panel lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred), and a sound output means (in In this example, notification (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed.

  Also, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board) Flashing), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) In this case, notification (in this example, sound output of a sound effect that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred) by the speaker 120) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Also, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (Flashing), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that an impact abnormal error has occurred), and by sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) Informing (in this example, sounding of a sound effect that an impact abnormal error has occurred) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Also, when a big winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board) by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) Flashing), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a large winning opening overrun error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sounding of a sound effect indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, when a special winning opening exhaust excess error occurs, the error notification is not performed. In addition, notification by error notification (light emitting means (in this example, LED for decoration (frame lamp and panel lamp)) (in this example, blinking of LED for decoration (frame lamp and panel lamp)) and display means ( In this example, notification by the decorative symbol display device 208 (in the present example, display of characters to the effect that a large winning opening overrun error has occurred) and notification by the sound output means (the speaker 120 in the present example) Then, a sound of the effect sound indicating that a special winning opening overrun error has occurred may be output).

  Also, when a solenoid abnormality error (large winning opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( A frame lamp or a board lamp), notification by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a solenoid abnormal error has occurred), and a sound output means (this In the example, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. Also, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  In addition, the prize rate abnormal error, general winning a prize opening (in this example, general winning a prize opening 226), starting opening 2 (this example 2nd special figure starting opening 232) and large winning a prize opening (this example, variable winning a prize opening Although the same error notification is performed for 234), different error notifications may be performed depending on the winning opening in which an error has occurred. Further, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning error means that the target winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226, the second special view starting opening 232, the variable winning opening 234, etc.) under a specific condition (for example, at N-ball launch, during a big hit) Other than this, it is an error that occurs when a specific number or more of winnings is detected on a computer support (except during normal condition). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, or measure of the gaming machine may be the same as the winning rate abnormal error.

  The error regarding the main control or the like may include a door open error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) Blinks, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and notification by the sound output means (in the present example, the speaker 120) (In this example, the sound of the effect sound indicating that the door opening error has occurred is output). Note that other notification modes of error notification regarding the main control etc., the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / Warning / error concerning sub control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub control will be described. Examples of “warning / error regarding sub control (first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500)” in the present example include impact warning, strike warning, and effect movable means error. In this example, when an impact warning is generated, notification (in this example, display of a character indicating that an impact warning has been generated) is performed by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). There is no notification by.

  In addition, when a warning is generated, a notification (in this example, display of characters to the effect that a warning has been generated) is displayed by a display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and a sound output means (in In this example, although notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, sound output of the effect sound indicating that the strike warning has been generated) is performed, notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

  The effect movable means error means various effect movable means (in the present example, the effect movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the house crest role item 224E, the first large-area behavior character article 224Ga to the fourth-large-area behavior character article 224Gd and one-seven box Effect movable means provided on the game board such as the character 224 H. (In this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102) Note that the effect movable means is provided on the frame In the case where there is a frame, the effect moving means is included, but it does not have to be included. It is determined that there was an abnormality when the initial operation of the frame) does not have to be provided. It is an error that occurs in the case. The abnormality referred to here indicates the case where the initial operation is not normally performed, but for example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect moving means (ON when in the initial position) is in the OFF state The case where it does not become ON even if the retry operation is performed one or more times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor is in the ON state may be shown. Further, the initial operation may be composed of all or any one or two operations of a home position return operation, a sensor check operation, and a full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect movable means whose sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing a minimum operation in which the sensor is switched from ON to OFF. The full stroke operation is an operation in which the effect moving means moves to the maximum position where it can operate and returns to the initial position. The home position return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means which is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position, and the full stroke operation is performed as it is) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. In addition, after the origin return operation is performed for all of the effect movable means, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C and the effect movable body B is not at the initial position, the origin of the effect movable bodies A to C After the return operation is performed (appearingly, the operation is performed for the effect movable body B), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C Furthermore, the initial operation may be performed for the other effect movable means after being performed in the initial operation for the effect movable means that is not at the origin position. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body B → the effect movable body C and the sensor of the initial position of the effect movable body B is OFF, the initial effect of the effect movable body B is The operation is performed, and then the initial operation of the effect movable body A → the effect movable body C is performed.) If it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not at the initial position, the effect movable means having higher priority is used. The operation (initial position return operation or initial operation including the origin return operation) may be configured to be performed.

  In addition, the effect movable means error is, when the connector of the effect movable means is not properly connected, the disconnection of the harness of the effect movable means or the damage of the connector, etc. This error occurs even if the connection is not properly established. In addition, “error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of the production moving means” and “error generated when it is determined that there is abnormality when performing the initial operation of the various production moving means at the time of power on” are different errors. It may be divided and reported.

  Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during display of the return-in-progress display described later, but may be configured not to be displayed during display of the return-in-progress display.

  The error related to the sub control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, shape of image, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control or payout, and a different display mode An error display may be displayed at. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Also, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub control may be displayed in a different display mode from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

  In addition to the error display by the display means, the frame and the decoration LED provided on the game board 200 are configured to light or blink in an error related to the sub control (in this example, the effect movable means error). The sound output means may be configured to notify an error, or both may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button)) by the player. (When a part of the error notification ends, for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during occurrence of the effect movable means error, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means ends, the game The blinking display by the decoration LED of the board is finished, a part of the decoration LED of the frame is also turned off, the blinking by the other part continues as it is, etc. The notification may be continued, the error notification by the effect means B may be terminated, a part of the effect means C may be terminated, and the other portions may be continued as they are. Decoration LED etc. correspond.)
When the liquid crystal loading display is displayed when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display showing a state in which data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is being read. When reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol variation display) or the return display (in preparation display) is displayed. Ru. The display during return is a display that is displayed when game control returns during a symbol change or a big hit, and if a symbol change is in progress, until the symbol stops (until the special display display determination timer reaches 0), If the jackpot is in progress, it is displayed until the jackpot ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). In addition, you may be comprised so that it may return to a symbol change display from the display in return during specific timing (for example, the start of a super reach effect, temporary stop display of three decoration symbols, etc.) during symbol change. In addition, various big hit displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the big hit (for example, start or end of a specific round, start or end of a big hit start effect, start or end of a big hit end display). Here, while the display of the indication during recovery may be displayed also for all or part of the above-mentioned error display, it is configured not to be displayed for all or part of other error displays. May be In addition, while all the above error displays are not displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display. .

  The change effect display may be a change advance display.

  In the case where the display mode of the hold icon is selected by the player to the icon A, the icon A is forcibly changed to the icon B to the icon G which can be selected by the player when the hold pre-reading notice is started. There may be a case where the icon A may change to the form of an icon that the player can not select when the pre-hold notice is started.

  In addition, multiple operation means regarding an effect may be provided. Here, when the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation means B (lever) are provided, an image (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means A or an “operation means A character display such as “press A”, etc. Hereinafter, an image (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or “image showing the appearance of the operation means B” is more prompting the user to operate the operation means B) Character display such as “press operation means B.” Hereinafter, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol form may be more easily displayed finally than when “operation means image B” is displayed. The image relating to the operation means in which the big hit symbol aspect is likely to be determined and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the big hit symbol aspect is definitely displayed may not be changed. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function may not work for the operation means B, and the operation means for the auto button function may be reversed. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operation means. In addition, the display of the operation means image B may be configured so that the change of the display mode of the navigation character is easier to succeed than the case where the operation means image A is displayed, but may be reversed. The degree of success of the change of the display mode of the navigation character may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (In other words, it may be the same.) Also, when the operation means image B is displayed, the display mode of the navigation character changes to a display mode having a high hit probability as compared to the case where the operation means image A is displayed. Although it may be configured to be easy, it may be reversed, and it may be configured such that the display mode in which the navigation character is likely to change does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (In other words, it may be the same.) Also, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but may be reversed or the same. . In addition, there may be a case where an effect (a promotion effect or a demotion effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B is performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the period of the operation effective period of A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B, during the period of the operation effective period of the operation means A, and outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means B Alternatively, it may be during the operation effective period of the operation means A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. As described above, in the description herein, the two operation means of the operation means A and the operation means B have been described as an example, but the same applies to three or more operation means.

  In addition, effects that can be selected by the player, special drawing starting port, common drawing starting port, general winning a prize opening and / or gate for effect (enter into the gate, even if the sensor is detected no winning balls are performed, only the effect It may increase depending on the points obtained by passing through the gate). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the points obtained by passing become a specific point, for example, on the decorative symbol display device 208 A “display for performing an effect to draw an effect to be acquired from now on (Gacha effect)” may be performed, and an effect selected by the effect lottery by the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be acquired.

  The player may be configured to be able to switch between displaying and non-displaying the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). Switching between displaying and non-displaying the navi character may always be possible, or may be possible only while the navi character is being displayed, until one period or more elapses from the start of the symbol variation (for example, one or more, or All decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, etc.), and it may be configured so that switching of display / non-display of the navigation character can not be performed during execution of the super reach effect, while the super reach effect is being executed. The navigation character may be configured to be switched between display and non-display, or may be configured to be switched between display and non-display only while the symbol is stopped (during stop of the special view).

  As mentioned above, although the example which made the present invention apply to a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine) was explained in detail, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) The present invention is also applicable to a used gaming machine (slot machine). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 175 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 175, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown at 90 are not provided.

  FIG. 176 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 176) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown in FIG. 176) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being played. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three sheets are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is performed to perform a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of roles has been won or not. It is determined whether to make the player relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. The operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, there is provided the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. At the upper part of the front door 1002, a rendering device 1080 is disposed. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 disposed on the back side of the door member 1063 (shown in FIG. When the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is the front of the slot machine 1000 It has a structure that appears on the It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, consisting of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen can be viewed by the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as the operation means, the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means or the third operation means And effect buttons 1091 (an example of the second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 176, a display panel 1070 displaying a title or the like of a device can be protruded toward the front side. In addition, a light emitting diode (LED) is incorporated in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 176 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operating means (button) like the transmitting portion 191, and an example of the operating means (for example, It corresponds to one example of the operation means, and also corresponds to one example of the movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091 and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a change icon h0],
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter referred to as a "variation icon") related to a symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display in progress].
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, a default (white) display mode],
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a white flash, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.],
In the case where the variation icon of the second display mode is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is finally determined and displayed more easily than when the variation icon of the first display mode is displayed [e.g. , The high expectation of the jackpot]],
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [eg, FIG. 135 (I)-FIG.
The second icon is an effect of changing the variation icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [eg, the effects shown in FIG. 135 (i-9) to FIG. 11 (i)]. Icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a crown-like lady wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a crown-like fashion, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a princess wearing white kimono, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a Icon that may be displayed in
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the variation icon may be an icon that may be displayed in an icon display area in the display unit, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. . Further, the variation icon and the second icon may be icons that may be simultaneously displayed in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon simultaneously displayed with the change icon in the icon display area during a first period. Furthermore, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

  Moreover, "crossing" is to put a period of stop display of symbols (a change stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon continuously displayed during display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon which disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon may be displayed continuously while the stop display of the symbol is displayed, or it may be an icon which disappears in the middle, or the icon which continues to disappear while the stop display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, "an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation display" is an "an icon that is always displayed, and an icon that may be once erased and re-displayed". .

  In addition, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  The display means may be means for displaying plural types of display without fail.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of certain conditions referred to here, there are at least n pendings, that there is a pending with pre-reading advance notice, that customization by a player is being performed, a certain advance notice (eg timer notice, That a conversation notice etc. is displayed, that the second icon is a notice display of a prefetch notice, that the second icon is stocked, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed is It is possible to enumerate that the game is high and that the advance lottery has been won. That is, as the certain condition, all the items listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the change icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The display of one of the above-mentioned plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, eagle character Conversational notice including the character display “Navi character has changed”, an image of an eyebrow, an eyebrow image for a wipe effect, etc.],
The change effect display is an effect that changes the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [eg, FIG. 133 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 134 (Fig. 6-3-2) to Fig. (Fig. 6-3-4a), Fig. 141 (く 1-3-1) to Fig. (く 1-3-4), meter effect shown in Fig. 149, Fig. 147 (2-2-1) to Fig. ((2-2-3), Fig. 158 (A b1) to (A b 2), Fig. 138 (6) to Fig. (O 8), Fig. 9-2-1) Etc.] is a display that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon It is a notice display about a mode changing from the said 3rd display mode to the said 4th display mode.

  Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect of changing the display mode of the change icon. Alternatively, the change effect display may be an icon not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the change icon, and in this case, the change effect display is a display of the second icon The icon may be used only for the effect of changing the mode.

  The second icon may be an icon that changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

  The change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.

Also,
“If the display mode does not change even when the change effect display is displayed, the second icon [eg, FIG. 133 (3-2-1) to FIG. (3-2-2), FIG. Icon (1-3-2), FIG. 158 (a 4-2), and FIG. 158 (a 6-2)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, finally the big hit symbol pattern mode when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed Is likely to be displayed finalized [for example, the expectation of the big hit is high],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means that the second icon of the third display mode is displayed and the second icon is displayed. In the case of not changing to the fourth display mode, it may be ".

  Moreover, in the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally obtained as compared to the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm display.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon which may be a notice display for a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, FIG. 136 (A 20-1), FIG. 145 (A b 15-1)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the second icon may be a notice display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed," means that "the notice of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon It may be done by

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode of a notice about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a preview advance notice [eg, FIG. 141 (step 5-1) to FIG. (Step 13), FIG. 144 (here a11)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the second icon may be a notice display of a prefetch notice" may be "a prefetch notice is given by a second icon".

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode of pre-reading advance notice.

  The second icon may be an icon that also functions as the change icon. That is, in this case, two types of variation icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

  In addition, in the case where both icons of the variation icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both the icons are not displayed is more effective. Finally, the jackpot design may be easily displayed.

  Further, in the case where both the change icon of the second display mode and the icon of the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, either one of the both icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol form than when only the icon is displayed.

  Further, when any one of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, no icon is displayed either. It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case.

  In addition, in the case where both icons of the variation icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode are displayed, the case where both the icons are not displayed is more effective. Finally, the jackpot design may be easily displayed.

  In addition, the variable icon of a display mode (for example, the second display mode) different from the default display mode and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The second state of the display mode (e.g., the fourth display mode) is different from the default display mode (e.g., the first display mode) and the second display mode (e.g., the fourth display mode). It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finalized than the state in which both icons are displayed.

  Alternatively, conversely, the variable icon of a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) In the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode), the variation icon of the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) are different from the default display mode. It may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form finalized than the state in which both the second icons are displayed.

  In addition, the fluctuation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode, and when the fluctuation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the big hit symbol mode is finally definitely displayed. May be In addition, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed. It may be definitely displayed. Although the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. In addition, although the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the one display mode or the second display mode. Good.

  Furthermore, the variation icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous big hit is decided (for example, definite variation with big hit decision, long round big hit decision), a rare reach (for example, full turn reach etc.) tends to appear, or other premiere effects appear It may be easy to do, or it may be easy to hit a revival. Or, conversely, it may be difficult to revive the jackpot. In addition, the mode of the operation means may be changed (for example, the button may pop out, rotate, or be recessed, or the built-in lamp may emit light in a rare light emission mode (for example, rainbow light emission mode changing to seven colors)) . In addition, special effects can be obtained, special super reach is started, special super reach is started, and the number of special super reach is available (for example, the second attacker is open). Round) may be started.

  In addition, the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach, etc.). For example, in the case where the display mode of the variation icon is a lord and the display mode of the second icon is a sword auspicious, it may be suggested to develop into a sword alive reach where the lord and the sword alive make a battle. Alternatively, when the display mode of the variation icon is 兜 and the display mode of the second icon is a hallmark, the two icons are displayed for the first time to function as a notice (normal notice) of the change. May be configured.

  Moreover, the reliability (expected degree) of the big hit may differ depending on the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the combination of the change icon of the first display mode, the combination of the second icon of the fourth display mode, the change icon of the second display mode, and the change of the third display mode In the second combination of icons, the jackpot reliability (expected degree) may be different.

Also,
“When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is larger than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the probability that the change icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more than the case of changing the fluctuating icon of the first display mode to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

  Here, "more than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means that "the variation icon is changed from the first display mode by the second icon of the third display mode". It may be "" rather than the case where the production | presentation which changes to two display modes was performed.

  In addition, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon may change from the first display mode to the second display mode. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change icon may not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may change.

  In addition, the variation icon is the fifth one when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed than when the second icon is the fourth display mode. It may be easy to change to the display mode of.

  As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. It is also good.

  Furthermore, the change icons of the display modes that are easy to change may be different depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notices that are likely to appear (a pseudo continuous notice, a timer notice, a prefetch notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
[When a plurality of the second icons are displayed [eg, the example shown in FIG. 139, the example shown in FIG. 140 (1) to FIG. (5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be easily changed.

  In addition, depending on the combination of the plurality of second icons (combination of the second icons in the same display mode or combination of the second icons in different display modes), it is easy to make a big hit, the hold icon or the fluctuation icon The display mode may be changed easily, or the notices that are easy to appear (pseudo linked notices, timer notices, advance notices) may be changed.

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
The second icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the operation means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 140 (1-1) to 140 (7)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, for example, the third display mode may be changed to the fourth display mode in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the second icon is a display mode regarding the operation means, and the display mode may be changed according to the operation of the operation means. The display mode relating to the operation means may be a display mode imitating the operation means, or may be a display mode (operation promotion display mode) for prompting the user to operate the operation means. The display mode related to the operation valid period of the operation means (more specifically, the display mode of the remaining period of the operation valid period (remaining period display mode)) may be displayed, or the display mode reminding of the operation means It may be present, may be a combination of these display aspects, or may be a display aspect including at least one of these display aspects.

  Further, the display means is means capable of displaying a meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display and the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode of may be changed.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the second icon is displayed when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which a notification to operate the operation means is not issued even during the operation valid period of the operation means. May change.

  In addition, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

  The second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

Also,
“The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [eg, character selection of 73 (b)],
The fourth display mode is a display mode that is not selected by the player [for example, a display mode of the key length shown in FIG. 137 (E4-3)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that can not be selected by the player, or the game It may be a display mode that can be selected by the person.

Also,
“When the display mode changes without the effect of the other display, the second icon [eg, FIG. 137 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), FIG. 140 (E 2-1) ) To the same figure (7)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the display mode may change without the effect by the other display and the second icon" may be "the display mode of the second icon according to the effect by the second icon" May change ".

Also,
“The variation icon is an icon that has a case where the display mode changes [for example, FIG. 148 (S3) to FIG. (S4)] without accompanying effects by other displays.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the display mode may change without the effect by the other display, and the display mode of the change icon may change depending on the effect by the change icon". It may be ".

Also,
“The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [eg, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.],
The third icon is an icon according to the number of holding balls (hereinafter referred to as a "holding icon"),
The hold icon has a plurality of types of display modes [eg, icons A to G in the hold display selection of FIG. 121 (b), FIG. 136 ((2), FIG. (う 3), FIG. ((12), An icon that may be displayed in the default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208 S, etc.], and
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a first icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, the hold icons h11 to h14 and h21 to h24 and the fluctuation icon h0 and the like],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, default (white) display mode],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a white flash, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.],
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [eg, FIG. 135 (I)-FIG.
The second icon is an effect that changes the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIG. 135 (i-9) to FIG. 11 (i) Etc.] is an icon that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a statue wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a statue, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a princess wearing white kimono, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color kimono, a display mode of a princess, a display mode of a Icon that may be displayed in
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“When the display mode changes without the effect of the other display, the second icon [eg, FIG. 137 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), FIG. 140 (E 2-1) ) To the same figure (7)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The display of one of the above-mentioned plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, icon I1 of a treasure box, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, eagle character Conversational notice including the character display “Navi character has changed”, an image of an eyebrow, an eyebrow image for a wipe effect, etc.],
The change effect display is an effect that changes the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [eg, FIG. 133 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6), FIG. 134 (Fig. 6-3-2) to Fig. (Fig. 6-3-4a), Fig. 141 (く 1-3-1) to Fig. (く 1-3-4), meter effect shown in Fig. 149, Fig. 147 (2-2-1) to Fig. ((2-2-3), Fig. 158 (A b1) to (A b 2), Fig. 138 (6) to Fig. (O 8), Fig. 9-2-1) Etc.] is a display that may be used
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“If the display mode does not change even when the change effect display is displayed, the second icon [eg, FIG. 133 (3-2-1) to FIG. (3-2-2), FIG. 1-3-1 to 1-3 (1-3-3 b 2, Fig. 158 (A 4-2), Fig. 158 (A 6-2))
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The second icon is an icon which may be a notice display for a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, FIG. 136 (A 20-1), FIG. 145 (A b 15-1)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The second icon is an icon which may be the display of FIG. 141 (step 5-1) to the same view (step 13) and the advance notice of the prefetch notice [eg, FIG. 144 (here a11)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[When a plurality of the second icons are displayed [eg, the example shown in FIG. 139, the example shown in FIG. 140 (1) to FIG. (5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
The second icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the operation means is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 140 (1-1) to 140 (7)].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first icon is an icon having a case where the display mode changes [eg, FIG. 148 (S3) to FIG. (S4)] without effect by other display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "the first icon may change the display mode without effect by the other display," means "the display mode of the first icon according to the notice by the first icon. May change ".

Also,
"The icon regarding the hold display described above is the" concept icon that includes both the hold icon and the change icon ".
The hold icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24] representing an unheld hold.
The fluctuation icon is an icon [for example, fluctuation icon h0] representing a digested hold.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The" on hold display icon "mentioned above refers to the" on hold icon "
The hold icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24] representing an unheld hold.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that "the icon relating to the suspension display" described above is a "variation icon", and the variation icon is an icon [for example, a variation icon h0] representing a digested suspension. Good.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
"Presentation means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game stand frame lamp 452, one thousand two box character article 224H, etc.],
Operation means [eg, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.];
Equipped with
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of effects.
The effect of one of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
One of the effects of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
When the operation means is operated during the first period [for example, the effective period of operation] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “summer vacation is not yet shown in FIG. 166 (A11) There may be a response display of "~"
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (FIG. 166 (A6) to the time immediately before (A11)) elapses since the start of the first period, The first effect may be performed,
When the operation means is operated during a second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, a period of operation valid period (FIG. 166 (A8-1) to FIG. A14)], the second operation is performed. [For example, a response icon in which the suspension icon changes to a blue display mode, and a response display in which the continuous hitting meter RHM in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-6) to FIG. (Aa5-5-7) rises] is executed. There is a case,
In the auto button mode, the second effect is not executed even if a second time [for example, auto button function activation time] elapses after the second period is started [for example, FIG. 166 Example of the state of the continuous hitting meter RHM in FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG. 167 (Aa5-5-4)],
In the auto button mode, when the operation means is operated before the second time elapses after the second period is started, the second effect is executed. Yes,
The state of the operation means is configured to be changeable from one of the first state and the second state (for example, white lighting) to the other state (for example, special color (blue) lighting),
In the case where the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [eg, FIG. 166 (A8-1) to FIG. In the case of A14), etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the invention of this description, it is possible to realize the game stand which features the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, a line of sight is induced in the operation means to urge the operation of the operation means. There are times when you can.

  Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even without the operation of the operation means. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

  Even in the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), or may be accepted or not accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of acceptance and the case of non-acceptance may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may not be accepted in the period of A and accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation of the A operation means (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation of the B operation means (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. It is also good.

  In addition, during the second period, rendering means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) other than the operation means may be configured to change.

Also,
In the case where the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [eg, in the case of FIG. 168 (Aa8-3) There is]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  By doing this, the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that the operation means can be induced to look at the line of sight to urge the operation of the operation means. There is a possibility. In addition, regardless of the setting of the auto button mode, to notice that the second effect will not be executed unless the operation means is operated during the second period, and improve the operation desire of the operation means There are times when you can.

Also,
At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [eg, immediately before FIG. 166 (A8-1) to FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 168 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
A period in which at least a portion of the first period and at least a portion of the second period overlap in the auto button mode [eg, FIG. 166 (A8-1) to FIG. (A11) In the period until immediately before, when there is an operation of the operation means in FIGS. 167 (Aa5-2-2) and 168 (Aa8-2-1)], the first effect and the second effect are At least one of the effects is executed [eg, FIG. 168 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 168 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect is executed. It is also good.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated before the first time elapses after the first period starts, effects of both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Or only the first effect may be performed, or only the second effect may be performed.

  For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, the function of the auto button mode works for one button display, the response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and the user may feel uncomfortable to operate the button by himself, which may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
In the period in which at least a portion of the first period and the at least a portion of the second period overlap in the non-auto button mode, the first operation is performed when the operation means is operated; And at least one of the second effect is executed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, or only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect is executed. It is also good.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, even if there is no operation until the said 1st period complete | finish, the said 1st presentation may be performed.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Note that the second effect may be performed even if there is no operation before the second period ends.
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all The second display device 208S etc.],
The plural types of effects are plural types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a response display,
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,
The first effect is a first response display of the response effects [for example, a response display of “Summer vacation is still ~ of FIG. 166 (A11)”.
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect that the holding icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,
When the display of the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1) or the like) is performed as the operation display] When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,
When the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 166 (A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, when the operation means is operated, the second operation display is performed. 2 response display may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The operation display may be an image representing the appearance of the operation means [for example, a button image 136a] or a display prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, the remaining time display meter MT, PUSH The display may include a character display of, a character display of "press", a display of an arrow indicating an operation direction, and the like.

Also,
[At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect [for example, a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol change display (normal advance notice)] for a symbol change display being executed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, both of the first effect and the second effect may be so, or only the first effect may be so, or only the second effect is so. May be

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is the end of the symbol variation display in progress, and an effect on the symbol variation display to be started thereafter [for example, the symbol variation to be started next] It is a display, a symbol variation display to be started next to the next, or a notice effect about a big hit in a symbol variation display to be started next to the next (prereading notice)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, both of the first effect and the second effect may be so, or only the first effect may be so, or only the second effect is so. May be

Also,
"The first period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective (hereinafter referred to as" first operation effective period ").
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation effective period”).
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  A meter display showing at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period, for example, a display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1) ] May also be displayed during the auto button mode. Note that the display of the remaining period meter MT may be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 166 (A8-1).

  Further, as the meter display, a display by a gauge (a bar display that increases or decreases) may be used, or the display color may change with the passage of time, for example, a display that grays out when the remaining period disappears Good.

  Or, conversely, the meter indicating the operation valid period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow shown in FIG. 166 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, the remaining period meter MT is omitted, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 168 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

  Also, regardless of whether or not the automatic button mode is selected, a case where the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 166 to FIG. 168] is not made [for example, FIG. There may be a button fluctuation icon or a button hold icon] shown at 168.

Also,
"The operation means is a means that may perform a rendering operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.],"
I also explained about

  Further, the first state is a state in which the rendering operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the rendering operation is being performed [for example Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

  The first state may be a state in which the operation means is stopped.

  Further, the effect means is an effect movable means [for example, a vibrator] provided inside, and the effect operation is an operation for which the effect movable means operates [for example, vibration]. Good.

  Further, the second state is a state in which deformation (for example, protrusion or depression) or the effect moving means is in operation (for example, advanced state, retracted state, vibrating state, rotating state, hardened state) Etc.].

  The operation means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a drive operation such as lighting, blinking or extinguishing,
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means performs the driving operation in a first mode,
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means performs the driving operation in a second mode,
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

  The first aspect may be an extinguished aspect, and the second aspect may be an luminant aspect.

  The first aspect may be an aspect lit in a first color, and the second aspect may be an aspect lit in a second color.

  The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
[Presentation means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, lamp for game board 442, lamp for game stand frame 452, one thousand and two box characters 224H, etc.], and
The effect means is a means capable of at least performing a plurality of effects.
The effect of one of the plurality of effects is the first effect,
The first effect is the effect selected by the player [e.g., the effect of each option of character selection in (b) of FIG. 121 (b), the effect of each option of (c) reservation frame selection, e) Effects by each option of hold display selection, (f) Effects by each option of background display selection, music output effect of the song title shown in FIG. 159],
The one type of effect among the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect, etc.]
If a third effect [for example, a notice of a change by a treasure box icon I1, a notice of changing a music, a wipe effect, a notice of a background change, etc.] is executed during execution of the first effect, the first effect is In the case of being changed to the second effect [eg, as shown in FIG. 157 (a a3-1) to FIG. (A a6-1), FIG. 160 (i 11) to FIG. (I 15-1), FIG. For example, when background A is selected by the player in FIG. 138 (1), the background change notice of (6) to (7) in the figure (wipe-in and wipe-out of the overhead image for wipe effect) ), And changes to the background of the prefetch notice shown in (8) to (21).
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  Here, the third effect may be an effect of one type among the plurality of types of effects, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may not be executed by the effect means (for example, the display means), but may be effect performed by another effect means (for example, the sound output means) different from the effect means .

  Further, the first effect may be an effect of a customization system that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display does not start for a predetermined time, or an effect that can be selected even during execution of the symbol variation display It is also good. Furthermore, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect in a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

  Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until simultaneous effects such as island simultaneous effects are started.

  Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) display device, leaf display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) as an example of the effect means , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means etc. can be listed. A light guide plate that emits light from the side and emits light forward, and a POV display capable of displaying a pattern by an afterimage effect can also be listed as an example. As the effect means, all of the items listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied.

  Further, the effect means may be a device that performs light emission effect, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed by light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. .

Also,
"The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (including all , Second display device 208S, etc.],
The first effect is the first effect display [for example, effect display by each option of (b) character selection in (b) of FIG. 121 (b) effect display by each option of (c) holding frame selection, (e) Effect display according to each option of hold display selection, (f) effect display according to each option of background display selection, song title shown in FIG. 159 displayed in song title display portion MN in FIG.
The second effect is the second effect display [for example, the effect display by the navigation character YM, the effect display by the holding frame UI, the song title display portion MN “Distance in FIG. 160 (B13) to FIG. ", The song title display section MN" open space DREAM "in FIG. 160 (i 15-1)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the effect means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
[The third effect is a third effect display [eg icon of treasure box I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, icon of meter display MW, MG, icon of giant panda, giant panda character This is a notice of conversation including a character display of “change”, an image of a whistle, a bird's-eye image for wiping effect, a character C11 of a leader of FIG. 160 (i 11) to FIG.
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display overlaps with a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display May overlap, or all of the third effect display may overlap with only a portion of the first effect display. With all of the third effect display. The entire first effect display may overlap. In addition, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), or conversely, the first effect display At least a part of may overlap from the front side (player's side) to at least a part of the third effect display.

  In addition, the image display device displays a variation display of a decorative symbol, a stop display of a decorative symbol, an icon (hold icon) according to the number of holding balls, and an icon (variation icon) relating to a symbol variation display under execution May be The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variation display of the decorative symbol, or is closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative symbol. May be displayed, or may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or displayed closer to the first effect display than the variation icon It may be done.

Also,
[Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [eg, FIG. 137 (E1) to FIG. (E 3-1), Fig. 140 (く 2-1) to Fig. (く 7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the player may be provided with operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. .

  The change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the change in the effect mode is: Even if there is a change in response to the operation of the operation means, or even if there is a change in response to the start of the pre-reading notice (for example, a rush to a pre-read mode (corresponding to a second effect display)). Good.

Also,
[When the third effect is executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [for example, in the case of FIG. 157 (A a4-1) to FIG. (A a6-1) ] When the third effect is not performed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [eg, FIG. 137 (E2) to FIG. (E4-1) In the case where it is easier for the player to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player [eg, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of ball appearances, a definite change state, a power support state] rather than
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Here, when the third effect is executed, it may be configured to shift to an advantageous state for the player without fail. Or, conversely, even if the third effect is executed, the player may not shift to the advantageous state.
Further, if the symbol variation display is being displayed as the advantageous state, a big hit gaming state is raised. In addition, it may be in the super reach state or may be in the pseudo connected state. On the other hand, as the above-mentioned advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, there is a probability change state or a power support state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the number of rounds may be in the state of round promotion in which the appearance is increased.

Also,
[An operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, for example, a chance button 136 etc.]
When the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, in the case of FIG. 124 (37) to FIG. 50 (50)],
The third effect may be executed when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“When the first effect is not changed from the first effect to the second effect even when the third effect is executed during execution of the first effect [eg, FIG. 133 (3-2-1) The same figure (3-2-2), FIG. 141 ((1-3-1) to the same figure (1−31-3-3b2), FIG. 158 (a 4-2), and FIG. 158 (a a6-2). If there is]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, when the effect means is a display means, even if the third effect is executed, the first effect display may not be changed to the second effect display. When the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light effect may not be changed to the second light effect, and the effect means may output a sound. In the case of means, even if the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means may be movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is performed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

  Alternatively, conversely, when the third effect is performed during execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect.

Also,
"The second effect is one of the effects selectable by the player.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Alternatively, the second effect may be an effect that can not be selected by the player.

Also,
[The sound output means [for example, speaker 120] which can output a music,
The effect means may be a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, The second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [e.g., the music title display unit MN in FIG. 160 (a 15-1) and the same (a 16) to a same (a 18), etc.]
The music display is a display related to music output by the sound output means [for example, display of music name and lyrics],
The first effect is the first music display [eg, "mega giga summer"],
A game console characterized in that the second effect is a second music display [eg, "Daake DREAM"]. "
I also explained about

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in a third display mode [for example, a default display mode],
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of blinking with white, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow kimono]. And that
The second icon is an icon having a case where it is displayed across continuous symbol variation display [for example, in the case of FIG. 157 (a a1) to the same figure (a a2)],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "to straddle" is to put a period of stop display of symbols (a change stop period) in between. Further, the second icon may be an icon continuously displayed during display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon which disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon may be displayed continuously while the stop display of the symbol is displayed, or it may be an icon which disappears in the middle, or the icon which continues to disappear while the stop display is displayed. It may be

Also,
"The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all of them) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N , The second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
The icon of one of the plurality of icons is a first icon,
One of the plurality of icons is a second icon,
One of the icons of the plurality of icons is a third icon,
The first icon is an icon [hereinafter, referred to as "variation icon"] relating to a symbol variation display being executed [for example, variation icon h0],
The second icon is an icon [eg, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation display,
The third icon is an icon according to the number of holding balls (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) [for example, holding icon h11].
The second icon is an icon different from the fluctuation icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The fluctuation icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, the fluctuation icon display area CIS of the holding frame UI having the hold icon display area HIS, the fluctuation icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. If it is an icon,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI],
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [eg, the hold icon display area HIS of the hold frame UI],
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, "pending frame D"],
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, "pending frame R"],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the icon display area may be an area where an area icon is displayed, an area where a holding frame is displayed, or an area where a user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, or a frame icon. Also, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. Further, the icon display area may be an area including a reserved icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigation character icon) display area.

  Further, the third effect may be an effect of switching an aspect of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping the icon display area from the front side is displayed.

Also,
"One of the effects of the plurality of effects is the fourth effect,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, a telop display trp shown in FIG. 152] about the third effect being executed before the third effect is executed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The third effect is a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol variation display in progress [eg, a normal notice effect by the color of a treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit heavy notice by a character C11 of a game leader]) ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The third effect is an effect of pre-reading notice [eg, pre-reading notice by color of treasure box icon].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],"
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The game console is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  In addition, even if the constituent requirements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, and supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements are not limited to the other embodiments, examples, or examples. The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes. That is, as long as there is no factor that hinders application, the constituent features included only in the description of the embodiment, the examples, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. are other embodiments, examples, or modifications. Even if applied to examples and various examples and appendices, it holds as one cohesive technical idea.

<< 4th Embodiment >>
Next, an example of effects that can be applied to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90 described above will be described.

  In the example of the effect to be described below, the display means (for example, any one or two or all of the decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51 etc.) The notice icon, the notice display, the icon for the mini game A, the icon for the mini game B, the hold icon, the change icon, and the icon change notice are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

  FIG. 177 shows various notice icons and various notice displays.

  Five types of notice icons are shown in FIG. 177 (a). Of these five types of notice icons, four are box-shaped icons, and the other is an icon of an operation means type (button type).

  There are four types of box-shaped icons: box icons, red box icons, gold box icons, and rainbow box icons, which have different colors, and two types of modes (mode a and mode d) are prepared. The mode a is a display mode in which the box is closed, and the mode d is a display mode in which the box is open.

  In the above description and the following description, the type and the display mode may differ depending on the color difference and the display method. For example, the color of the first type or the first display mode is white, and the color of the second type or the second display mode is also white, but the second type or the second display mode has a blinking display method (white Alternate display with other colors (for example, background color or black). The first type and the first display mode correspond to the default type and the display mode. The color of the third type or the third display mode is blue, the color of the fourth type or the fourth display mode is green, the color of the fifth type or the fifth display mode is red, and the sixth type or the fifth display mode The color of the six display modes is gold, and the color of the seventh and seventh display modes is rainbow. The first to seventh types and display modes may be prepared for various icons and various displays, and light emitting means such as various LEDs can emit light in the first to seventh display modes. There is. Among the first to seventh types and display modes, the larger the number and the display mode (the seventh is the largest), the more advantageous the display mode for the player may be or must be. For example, the larger the number or the display mode, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot may be or the more likely that a certain effect will be started. In the following description, changing from the n-th display mode to the n + 1-th display mode may be said to be one step up or one step promotion. In addition, changing from the nth display mode to the n + m display mode may be referred to as raising the display mode by m levels or promoting it. Furthermore, a display mode in which the number of n is relatively large may be referred to as the upper display mode, and a display mode in which the number of n is relatively small may be referred to as the lower display mode. Note that n or m is a natural number greater than or equal to 1 (the same applies to the following description).

  Although there are only one type of button type icon (button icon), four types of modes (mode a, mode b, mode c, and mode d) are prepared. The mode a is a display mode consisting only of button images imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 49, FIG. 90, etc. Aspects b and c are display aspects in which a remaining time display meter indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is added below the button image. The mode a is a mode representing that even if the chance button 136 is operated, the modes b and c do not have a remaining time display meter. In mode b, the remaining time display meter is full (display that the operation effective period remains for the entire period), and in mode c, the remaining time display meter is 0 display (in which no operation effective period remains) ). That is, the mode b is the mode immediately before the start of counting (counting down) of the operation effective period or immediately after the start of the time counting. In addition, the mode c is a mode after or after the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. When the clocking of the operation effective period starts, the meter of the third display mode starts to decrease with the passage of time. Mode d is a display mode of a button image or an effect image (here, a smoke image) that hides the display of the operation valid period. The button icon may have a plurality of types of icons which differ in type as in the case of the box-shaped icon. For example, there may be default button icons, red button icons, gold button icons, and rainbow button icons that differ in color.

  Further, the type of notice icon or button icon is not limited to color, and there may be icons having different sizes and shapes of icons, and any two or more of plural elements such as icon size, shape, and color May be combined. For example, no. In addition to the box icon 1, there may be other types of icons, such as a treasure box icon and a 1000 box icon that imitates the one and two box character 224 H shown in FIG. Also, the higher the reliability, the larger the size of the icon (for example, the gold box icon is larger than the red box icon). Also, the shape of the box may be different between the red box icon and the gold box icon box.

  The advance notice icon may be displayed by changing the display position from the display position at which the display is first started. That is, there is a case where it moves from the first position to the second position and is continuously displayed (stocked) at the second position. The second position is the stock display position. In addition, the display (stock) may be continued without changing the display position. The mode a is a mode at the start of stock, but is also a mode at the start of display. The aspect d is an aspect when the notice icon is used. That is, when the notice icon shown in FIG. 177 (a) is used in the effect, the display mode changes to mode d. The box-shaped icon is used at a predetermined timing and changes to aspect d. The button icon is used when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, and changes to mode d. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon always changes from the mode c to the mode d after the operation valid period has elapsed, but may or may not change. It is also good. In addition, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon may not change to the mode d. In that case, the button icon may be erased or may remain displayed as aspect a, and the display in which only the remaining time display meter of aspect b or aspect c is hidden (a part of the peripheral edge is aspect a) May be displayed, and may be configured to change to the mode d but not to display a notice display described later. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the mode c may be displayed and then the mode d may be displayed.

  The appearance rate and the reliability are different for each type of notice icon. The appearance rates are easily displayed in the order of A, B, C, and D. That is, it indicates that A is most likely to be displayed (the frequency of display is high). Although not shown in FIG. 177 (a), E represents that it is the least likely to be displayed (the frequency of display is low). The reliability represents the reliability of the big hit, the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display in which the icon is used (the reliability of the prior notice), or the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display of the pre-reading object Reliability). This reliability is likely to be hit in the order of description of A, B, C, D, E, F. That is, it indicates that the probability is the most likely to hit (must be hit = reliability 100%), and that F is the most difficult to hit. The reliability represented by the first type and the first display mode described above is F, the reliability represented by the second type and the second display mode is E, and the reliability represented by the third type and the third display mode is D The reliability expressed by the fourth type and the fourth display mode is C, the reliability expressed by the fifth type and the fifth display mode is B, and the reliability expressed by the sixth type and the sixth display mode is It becomes A, and the reliability which a 7th type and a 7th display mode represent becomes exact. The reliability F may be 0% or higher than 0%. If the reliability F is 0%, it can not be said that a big hit is predicted, but in this specification, the one including the reliability 0% may be referred to as a preview.

  FIG. 177 (b) shows 31 types of notice icons. The explanation about these 31 types of notice icons is as described in the outline of the contents of the effect in the figure, but in this description, the phrase “must be performed” means that “not done” in the modification. It may be read as "may be." In addition, the description such as “may be” or “may be” can be read as “always” in a modified example.

  In addition, “VS Kengo reach” described in “Summary of presentation contents” is Kensho reach shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 118, FIG. 133, etc., and “all meeting reach” is FIG. It is a super reach not shown which develops from -3). In addition, the symbol variation display in which the super reach has been performed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit when the "all group reach" is performed than when the "VS swordswoman reach" is performed. “Senryo Box (Characters)” becomes the Senry Box Character 224H shown in FIG. 115 and the like, and “The Family Crest (Acts)” becomes the Family Seal 224E shown in FIG. 115 and the like.

  Further, the 31 types of notice icons shown in FIG. 177 (b) may also function as notice displays. The notice display is a display that is started when the notice icon is used. For example, the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 177 (a) may change to mode d, and a notice may appear from the inside. In this case, it is not known what notice display appears until the box-shaped icon changes to mode d. That is, the relationship between the advance notice icon and the advance notice display is not determined in advance as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship, and is a one-to-many or many-to-many relationship. However, the relationship between the advance notice icon and the advance notice display may be determined in advance as a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship. For example, if the red box notice icon and the red change notice display (No. 7) are previously defined in a one-to-one relationship, and the red box notice icon is displayed, then the red box notice The icon may be changed to mode d, and it may be determined that the notice display of red change appears from the inside, or the case where the notice icon of the red box is changed to mode d, without changing it. It may disappear as it is, and when it changes to aspect d, a notice of red change may appear without fail. In addition, as a box-shaped icon which is a notice icon, a transparent box-shaped icon in which the contents can be seen is prepared, and it can be seen that this transparent box-shaped icon contains one or more types of notices. May be If only one type of notice display is included, the player can know in advance the type of notice display that appears when changing to mode d, but if there is more than one type of notice display, it knows I can not In addition, when multiple types of advance notices are included, roulette may be displayed in a transparent box. In addition, "a notice icon of an embodiment in which it is not known which notice display appears" such as a box-shaped icon shown in Fig. 177 (a) may be displayed when "the notice icon is used. The notice of the notice may be made. For example, when "super heat" is displayed (noticeable) by a balloon or the like by a warning icon of a box, a warning display of "hot heat" may be displayed whenever the warning icon of a box is used, It may or may not be displayed. In addition, if "super heat" and "?" Are displayed (noticeable) by a balloon notice or a roulette display by a notice icon of a box, when a notice icon of a box is used, "super heat" and "?" Either one of the notice displays may be displayed, or both may not be displayed, and a different notice display different from the displayed one may be displayed. In this manner, a plurality of options may be notified in advance by a notice icon (and / or a notice different from the notice icon), and one or more notice displays may be displayed among them.

  If the icon shown in FIG. 177 (b) is a notice icon, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display is determined in advance as a one-to-one relation, and if the notice icon changes to mode d, The notice icon functions as a notice display. The difference between the notice icon and the notice display is that the notice icon corresponds to a notice of a certain notice, and the notice display corresponds to a certain notice. That is, the notice icon corresponds to the notice of the notice display.

  In the description of the outline of the contents of the effect in FIG. 177 (b), the phrase “at displayed variation” is a description when the icon functions as a notice display, and the icon functions as a notice icon. If it is, it is read as "in the variation where the notice icon is used". That is, while the notice display is used in the displayed symbol variation display, the notice icon may be carried over until the symbol change display started later than the displayed symbol change display.

  In FIG. 177 (b), the embodiment A and the embodiment B are shown, but the embodiment A is only when functioning as a notice display and the embodiment A is stocked when functioning as a notice icon. The mode B is a mode in which the advance notice icon is used, and is a mode in which a circle is added to the mode A. The notice icon may be used again without disappearing even if it is used once. In this case, after changing from mode A to mode B, the process returns to mode A again, but during the period displayed in mode B, the use of the notice icon is not possible, and after returning to mode A, it can be used Become. There are also notice icons (Nos. 1, 27 to 31) for which the mode B is not prepared, but these notice icons are icons that disappear when used.

  The 31 types of notice icons or notice displays shown in FIG. 177 (b) have different color icons and different color displays, and the reliability of the big hit differs as described in the above-mentioned display mode depending on the displayed color. That is, the "red change" (No. 8) of red (the fifth display mode) is higher in the jackpot reliability than the "change" (No. 7) of the default color represented by "de". .

  The appearance rate is also shown in FIG. 177 (b), but the appearance rate is the same as the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a). No. The appearance rate of the 16 "○○ high certain advance notice" differs depending on the contents of ○○. For example, the occurrence rate is “B” for “pending icon change high certainty notice” and “notice icon stock high certainty notice”. Note that "notice icon stock high confirmation notice" may be displayed only during execution of the notice icon stock effect, or may be displayed before the notice icon stock effect is started. In addition, the appearance rate is “C” for “super-attsu production high certainty advance notice”, “timer advance notice for high certainty notice”, and “presence for feature work high degree certainty notice”. However, the appearance rate may be the same as or different from the contents of ○. This "○○ High certainty advance notice" is more likely to be executed if 表示 is displayed if it is displayed than is not displayed, but if it is displayed, ○ may be always executed.

  No. 2 “chance” icon and No. When the "red chance" icon in 3 is functioning as a notice, even if the other chances are used to warn you as a "chance", reach effects may not occur, but the "chance" icon or the "red chance" The normal reach effect may be configured to be generated whenever the "chance" is announced by the icon. In addition, other notice effects (for example, notice effects with a high frequency of appearance such as conversation notices), notice effects with a higher appearance frequency than notices by notice displays, and notice effects displayed when the symbol variation display is shortened. "Chance" icon or "Red Opportunity" icon indicates "Chance chance" rather than "Chance" or "Chance?" "" May be configured to be more likely to generate reach effects (which may be normal reach effects or super reach effects) if or when both are notified. There is no difference and the occurrence probability may be the same.

  The notice icon described with reference to FIG. 177 is an icon that may be displayed as a result of the mini game effect. The mini game is a kind of effect display, and two types of mini games are prepared. As two types of mini games, there are a mini game (mini game A) of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice and a mini game (mini game B) of rock-paper-speaking confrontation notice. Each mini-game uses a dedicated icon. The mini game is automatically started when the start condition is established, and the result of the mini game is determined according to the result of the pass / fail judgment and the result of the pre-reading.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a mini game icon.

  In FIG. 178 (a), four types of mini game A icons are shown. Each of these four types of mini game A icons includes an image (box image) of a box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 177 (a). The "box" icon includes the white box image of the first display mode, that is, the notice icon of the white box. The “red box” icon includes the red box image of the fifth display mode, that is, the notice icon of the red box. The "gold box" icon includes the golden box image of the sixth display mode, that is, the notice icon of the gold box. The "rainbow box" icon includes the rainbow box image of the seventh display mode, that is, the notice icon of the rainbow box. Of the four types of icons, four aspects (embodiments a to d) are prepared for each of the remaining three types of icons except for the "rainbow box" icon. Only two of the two aspects (Aspect c, Aspect d) are provided. Aspects a to c are aspects in which each notice icon is placed on a carpet and a meter display of hit points (HP) is shown thereon. In the mini game A, a character of Yoshimune attacks a carpet, and if the attack is effective, this hit point (HP) decreases, and if HP becomes 0, a treasure (notice icon) can be acquired. In the meter display of aspect a, the gauge of the third display aspect (blue) is full, and the HP is 100 points. In the meter display of aspect b, the gauge of the fourth display aspect (green color) is in a half state, and HP is 50 points. In the meter display of aspect c, the gauge of the fifth display aspect (red) is in a state of being displayed only a little, and HP is 10 points. And aspect d is an aspect displayed after HP becomes 0, and while a carpet disappears and a meter display also disappears, each advance notice icon is displayed and it represents having acquired a notice icon under it. The character "Get !!" is displayed.

  In the mini game A, the display for the four types of mini game A icons is started in any manner. That is, when the display is started in mode a, the remaining HP at the time of display start (when appearing) is 100/100, and when the display is started in mode b, the remaining HP at the start of display is 50. When the display is started in the mode c, the remaining HP at the start of the display is 10/100. Although the appearance rate for each aspect is shown in FIG. 178 (a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a). The icon for the mini-game A for the rainbow box has a small amount of HP left from the start of display, and you can always obtain a treasure (notice icon), but other icons can be obtained as a treasure (notice icon) Sometimes you can or can not. It should be noted that the icon for the mini game A for the rainbow box may be able to obtain a notice icon during the symbol variation display in which the display has been started, if it is in the symbol variation display started next to the symbol variation display. In some cases, it is possible to obtain a notice icon. However, the advance notice icon may be acquired during the symbol variation display whose display has been started, or may be acquired only when the symbol variation display is started next.

  FIG. 178 (b) shows the relationship between the number of remaining HP points at the start of symbol variation display and the probability of acquiring a notice icon. The mini game A icon may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, it may be carried over and displayed to the symbol change display started after the symbol change display by which the display was started. The meter display in the mode when the display of the mini game A icon starts is decreased by 10 points each time a valid attack on the carpet is determined. Therefore, the icon for the mini game A for the rainbow box can acquire a notice icon once a valid attack is determined.

  When disclosing the symbol variation display started later than the symbol variation display when the display of the mini game A icon is started, if the number of remaining HP points is 60 points or more, the meter display indicates the third display mode (blue The probability that the notice icon can be acquired while the symbol variation display displayed and started is 10%. If the number of remaining HP points is 30 or more and 50 or less at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fourth display mode (green), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display The probability of being able to do is 50%. If the number of remaining HP points is 10 points or 20 points at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fifth display mode (red), and a notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display The probability of being able to do is 100%.

  In FIG. 178 (c), opponent icons for two types of mini games B are shown. One type of icon among the opponent icons for the two types of mini games B is a swordsman character icon, and the other type is a panda character icon. The appearance rate of the character icon of the swordsman is A, and the appearance rate of the character icon of the panda is B. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a). Therefore, the swordsman character icon is more likely to appear than the panda character icon. In the mini game B of the jangken confrontation notice, the icon of a certain character and the icons of these opponents make a jann confrontation, and when a certain character wins (when the opponent loses), the animating icon is displayed. It is possible to obtain, and conversely, when a certain character is defeated (when the opponent wins), the advance notice icon can not be obtained.

  In addition, an aspect a to an aspect f are prepared for each of the character icons of the opponents. The mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or is a mode of standby after the mini game is started. The aspect b is an aspect when a gou is put out in a jaunting confrontation, the aspect c is an aspect when a chow is put out, and the aspect d is an aspect when a par is put out. In addition, the mode e is a mode when the opponent character loses in the Janken confrontation (when a certain character wins), and the aspect f is opposite when the opponent character wins in the Janken confrontation ( When a character loses).

  In FIG. 178 (d), the degree of expectation for acquiring the notice icon in the mini game B is shown. In the above description, a certain character is used, but in the mini game B, the character of the opponent, the character of the villager, the character of forgiveness as the character corresponding to the certain character (the character corresponding to the certain character described above), A character is prepared. Therefore, there are six match cards as shown in FIG. 178 (d), and the expected acquisition rates are determined. A represents 100% of expectation for acquisition, B represents 80%, C represents 60%, D represents 40%, and E is 20% , F represents 10% and G represents more than 0% and less than 1%. The panda character icon is less likely to appear as the opponent character than the sword character character icon, but the expectation for acquiring the advance notice icon is higher than the sword character character icon. In addition, in the case of a confrontation between Yoshimune and panda, regardless of the type of the notice icon, the notice icon can be acquired with 100% probability. The notice icon of the rainbow box is selected only at the time of the big hit. The "-" display in FIG. 178 (d) represents that the advance notice icon of the rainbow box does not appear (the expectation of acquisition 0%).

  FIG. 179 shows a hold icon and a change icon.

  The hold icon is an icon related to an undigested symbol fluctuation display, the fluctuation icon is an icon related to the digested symbol fluctuation display, and each icon is an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display. Here, "variation of xxx reserve" means "a symbol variation display corresponding to xxx reserve".

  FIG. 179 (a) shows each aspect of each type for the hold icon and the change icon. The explanation of each type of icon is as described in the remarks in the figure. No. 1 is a default mode, and No. 1 is. 2-No. 7 is a notice mode. That is, if it is a hold icon, it becomes a mode of pre-reading notice, and if it is a change icon, it will become a mode of notice. The reserved icon of the pre-reading notice mode may be displayed from the display start time (when starting start winning), or may be displayed by changing at the start of symbol fluctuation, or by changing by the effect during symbol fluctuation display. It may be displayed. The fluctuation icon of the normal advance notice mode may be displayed from the display start time (timing according to the symbol fluctuation start) or may be displayed by changing according to the effect in the symbol fluctuation display.

  The hold icon and the change icon are configured to be able to change (rank up) one step at a time in the order of default mode> white blink> blue> green> red> gold> rainbow. For example, if you want to rank up with blue hold, it changes to green hold. The hold icon and the change icon may not necessarily change one step at a time. For example, in the icon change notice display to be described later, when the change of the aspect of the icon is successful, there is one in which the changing aspect is predetermined regardless of the aspect of the icon to be changed (for example, FIG. No. 2 to No. 3, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 8 to No. 10). When a change notice is given by the icon of the default mode itself, it usually ranks up to white blinking, but when the icon of the default mode is changed due to icon change notice, it does not change to white blink, and blue pending Rank up. Also, the icon of the default mode is No. 2-No. 7, No. 14-No. Although there are cases where it changes to the icon display mode of 19 icons, the VS display mode of FIG. 189 described later, or the icon display mode to which the letter “SP” of FIG. 2-No. The icon of 7 is NO. 14-No. There is no case of changing to the 19 icons, the VS display mode shown in FIG. 189, or the icon display mode with the letter “SP” shown in FIG. 240 described later, but may change. Also, no. 8-No. The 13 display modes are assumed to be displayed in that mode from the time of winning, but icons of other display modes (for example, No. 1 to No. 7 and / or No. 14 to No. 19) It may change from the icon). Also, only the default mode may be changeable.

  The display mode of the variation icon is determined according to the result of the determination of the success or failure. However, even if the result of the determination of the success or failure is a loss, the display mode is other than the default display mode. A presentation may be performed. Further, among display icons of a plurality of displayed icons, it is determined according to the result of the pre-reading about which display icon the type of display of the icon is to be made. However, when the result of the pre-reading is lost Even if there is an effect, the display mode may be changed to a mode other than the default display mode. In addition, the display mode may change for a plurality of hold icons.

  No. 8 and No. An icon 9 may be displayed when or before a button effect (for example, a button advance effect) is started, or during a button effect. Here, no. It supplements about the function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” in No.8. When the button A icon has the function (1), the display mode of the button A icon is performed even when the chance button 136 is operated until the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started. Is configured not to change from blue to rainbow, and after the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started (or immediately after or simultaneously), the operation valid period is started and the operation valid period is ended. The display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow when there is an operation of the chance button 136 or until the operation effective period ends. If there is no operation of the chance button 136 during the operation valid period, the display mode of the button A icon may not be changed. When the button A icon has the function (2), the button A icon is displayed and then before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started (that is, before the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon When the operation of the chance button 136 is performed until the symbol variation display), the display mode of the button A icon is changed to any of blue to rainbow. Here, when the button A icon has the function (2), the display mode of the button A icon does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated while the symbol is stopped. It may not change, and may be configured to always change. Further, when the button A icon has the function (2), the operation valid period may be set also during the symbol variation display corresponding to the button A icon. That is, the same function as that of (1) may be included. , No. Also for the functions (1) and (2) described in the remarks of “Button B” in No. It is the same as the function of (1) and the function of (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” in No. 8.

  No. An icon 10 may be displayed at or before the start of a timer effect (for example, a timer advance effect) or during the timer advance effect.

  No. 11 is at the start or before the start of the promotion effect of the temporary holding in FIG. 216 (Ec1) to FIG. 216 (Ec8) and FIG. 216 (Ec 5-2-1) to FIG. It is an icon that may be displayed during the promotion effect.

  No. When 12 is displayed at the start or before the start of the effect of roulette suspension (N option suspension) in FIG. 211 (A1-2-1) to the same figure (A1-2-12) described later, or during that effect There is an icon. The roulette icon in this example may be configured such that the roulette icon itself changes to a mode stopped at the roulette, but an icon different from the roulette icon always changes to a mode stopped at the roulette, the roulette icon itself May change and another icon different from the roulette icon may change.

  No. 13 is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the meter effect, or during the meter effect, and if it is a hold icon, the meter decreases until it is consumed, if it is a change icon, until it disappears If the presentation is done and the meter display becomes 0, it is a success and something changes or something happens. That is, the meter display is of a decreasing type. If the meter display does not finally become 0, both the Echigoya image and the HP meter image are displayed as they are, and the HP meter image shows the final remaining HP. ing. In addition, in the case of the hold icon, an effect of reducing the meter display may be performed even in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, and the meter display may be zero. Further, in the case of the reserved icon, an effect of reducing the meter may be performed in one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation displays, and there may be a fluctuation in which the effect of reducing the meter is performed and a fluctuation not being performed. Further, even when the icon is displayed as a hold icon, it may be only the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that the effect of reducing the meter is actually performed. Also, in the above description, the meter display is of a type that decreases, but may be of a type that increases. If it is of an increasing type, it is successful if the meter display is full within the valid period.

  No. 14-No. The reference numeral 16 denotes an icon displayed in the notice of obtaining the Yoshimune treasure of the mini game A described with reference to FIG. 178 (a) and FIG. 178 (b). That is, the icon may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini game A, or during the mini game A. Use this icon to attack the carpet with the notice icon on it. Aspect a is a pause pose, aspect b is a pose pose, and aspect c is a pose in which an arrow is fired. No. 17 to No. A character 19 confronts the character icon of the opponent shown in FIG. 178 (c), which is displayed in the “Janken confrontation notice of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 178 (c) and FIG. 178 (d). Icon). That is, the icon may be displayed at the start or before the start of the mini game B, or during the mini game B. The mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or is a mode of standby after the mini game is started. The aspect b is an aspect when a gou is put out in a jaunting confrontation, the aspect c is an aspect when a chow is put out, and the aspect d is an aspect when a par is put out. In addition, the mode e is a mode when the player loses in the Janken confrontation (when the opponent character wins), and the aspect f is when the player wins in the Janken confrontation (when the opponent character loses). It is an aspect of No. 14-No. The 19 icons correspond to white blinking icons.

  The numbers shown in FIG. 179 (a). No. 14 to No. 16 are icons dedicated to mini game A. Since 17 to No 19 are dedicated to mini game B, if these dedicated icons appear, the player knows that mini games will be started, and these dedicated icons It also works as

  Further, although the appearance rate and the reliability are also shown in FIG. 179 (a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a), The symbol representing the degree of reliability here is also the same as the symbol representing the degree of reliability described in FIG. 177 (a).

  In addition to the types shown in FIG. 179 (a), there are also types of hold icons and change icons.

  An icon change notice display is shown in FIG. 179 (b). The icon change advance display is a display used for an effect of changing the mode of the hold icon or the change icon. That is, it is a display that appears in the change animation that changes the aspect of the icon. In addition, the display is also used for an effect that fails in an attempt to change the mode of the hold icon or the change icon. That is, this is a display that appears in non-change animation in which the form change of the icon fails and the form of the icon does not change. The explanation of each type of icon change notice display is as described in the remarks in the figure.

  No. 1 to No. The mode a in each of the sixteen displays is the mode at the start of the change animation (the mode at the start of display of the icon change notice display and the default mode), and the mode b is the mode when changing the icon. Also, no. 11 to No. Aspect c in each of the 15 displays is an aspect when the aspect change of the icon succeeds, and is an aspect that may be displayed as a change animation. On the other hand, no. 11 to No. Aspect d in each of the 15 displays is an aspect when the aspect change of the icon fails, and is an aspect that may be displayed as a static animation. No. The display of 17 is a display of a giant panda displayed in FIG. 147 (2-2-1) to FIG. 2 (-2-2-3), and there is no change in aspect from the time of appearance to the time of change.

  Although the appearance rate of each type of display is shown in FIG. 179 (b), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 177 (a). Further, FIG. 179 (b) also describes the type of icon whose mode is to be changed. That is, no. 1 to No. Each display of 10 may change the aspect of the variation icon or may change the aspect of the hold icon. On the other hand, no. 11 to No. Each of the sixteen displays changes only the aspect of the variation icon. The display of 17 pandas changes only the aspect of the hold icon. No. 11 to No. Each of the 16 displays may be changed to change only the aspect of the hold icon, or the aspect of the change icon may be changed, or the aspect of the hold icon may be changed. It is also good. Also, no. The display of the 17 pandas may be changed so as to change only the aspect of the fluctuation icon, or the aspect of the holding icon may be changed or the appearance of the fluctuation icon may be changed. May be

  Also, no. 1 to No. No. 3 display of each balloon system and No. 4-No. No. 6 bomber system displays and No. 7-No. Each indication of 10 airships, No. 12 to No. Each of the 15 Yoshimune displays is displayed in different colors. The color difference here is the same as the success rate of the aspect change of the icon, that is, the probability when there is no aspect change of the icon (probability of changing the icon) may differ depending on the displayed color. In some cases. Further, even when the aspect change of the icon is performed, the number of the icons to which the aspect change is performed may differ depending on the displayed color. In FIG. 179 (b), “icon change rate” is shown as the success probability of the aspect change of the icons, and “probability of the number of changing icons” is also shown as the probability of the number of icons subjected to the mode change. For example, no. 4-No. In each display of the bomber system of No. 6, the display of the default color (No. 4) represented by "D" is the success probability of the change of the aspect of the icon than the display of the other colors (No. 5, 6) Is high. However, the default color bomber display (No. 4) can raise the display mode of the icon by only one level. That is, the display mode is changed from the nth display mode to the n + 1th display mode. For example, when changing the mode of the holding icon in the white blinking mode (second display mode), it is changed to the blue mode (third display mode), and the blue icon (third display mode) When changing an aspect, it changes to the green aspect (4th display aspect). However, only when changing the mode of the hold icon in the default mode (first display mode), the mode is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). On the other hand, the red (the fifth display mode) bomber display ("red bomber" of No. 5) changes the mode regardless of the mode of the holding icon when the bomber display is started. , Be sure to change to the same display mode (fifth display mode) as self. That is, the display mode is always changed from the n-th display mode to the fifth display mode. For example, even if it is the hold icon of the default mode (first display mode) or the hold icon of the blue mode (third display mode), the red mode (fifth display Make sure to change to In addition, the bomber display (No. 6 "gold bomber") of gold color (sixth display mode) is also changed in the mode regardless of the mode of the holding icon when the bomber display is started. Make sure to change to the same display mode as the oneself (sixth display mode). That is, the display mode is always changed from the n-th display mode to the sixth display mode. For example, even if it is the hold icon of the default mode (the first display mode) or the hold icon of the green mode (the fourth display mode), the gold mode (the sixth display) when changing the mode Make sure to change to Further, the “red bomber” display (No. 5) has a higher probability of success in changing the form of the icon than the “gold bomber” display (No. 6). That is, no. 4-No. In the bomber type 6 display, although the success probability of the change in the form of the icon becomes lower as the display mode goes up, it becomes easier to make a big hit with the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon. No. 1 to No. The same is true for the balloon system display of 3. However, in the bomber type display, in the default color display (No. 4), the success rate of the aspect change of the icon is 100%, and when the default color bomber is displayed, the aspect of the icon always changes Do. Moreover, the default color bomber changes the mode of the two icons with a probability of 5% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the default color bomber is displayed. For example, each of the aspect of the variation icon and the aspect of one holding icon may change, or the aspect of two holding icons may change. The default color bomber is displayed, and when two icons are displayed after the symbol variation display is started, the default color bomber does not change two icons, but the default color bomber If the second icon is displayed between the start of the symbol variation display in which the symbol is displayed and the bomber of the default color is displayed, the two displayed icons may change. It may be. For this note, no. 7-No. 10 airship display and / or no. It is also applicable to the display of 17 "pandas". On the other hand, in the balloon type display, in the default color display (No. 1), the success rate of the form change of the icon is 30%, and when the form of the icon changes, the form is limited to one icon. Change.

  Also, no. 7-No. In each display of 10 airships, regardless of the display mode (display color), the success rate of the mode change of the icon is 100%, and if the airship is displayed regardless of the color, the icon mode is It always changes. Moreover, for the default color flight aircraft (No. 7), if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the default color flight aircraft is displayed, there are two 50% probabilities. Change the aspect of the icon. However, here too, the default color of the flying boat can raise the display mode of the icon by only one level. On the other hand, the flying boats (No. 8 to No. 10) other than the default color always change the display mode of one certain icon to the same display mode as the icon itself. Therefore, no. 7-No. In the display of the 10 airships, as the display mode goes up, it becomes easier to make a big hit with the symbol variation display corresponding to the changed icon. Note that the timing at which two or more icons are displayed is not limited to the start time of the symbol variation display in which the default flight is displayed, and may be the time at which the default flight is displayed. (The same applies to the following).

  Furthermore, no. 12 to No. In the display of 15 Yoshimune, in the display of the default color (No. 12) represented by "de" and the display of red (No. 13 "Akyoshimune"), the success probability of the variation of the variation icon is 50 %. In addition, since the change target of the display of Yoshimune is limited to the fluctuation icon and only one fluctuation icon is displayed, there is no case where the aspect of two or more icons is changed. Further, in the gold display (No. 14 “Kinyoshi sec”), the success probability of the aspect change of the fluctuation icon is 25%, and the success probability is lower than the display of “Akyoshi sec”. However, in the rainbow-colored display (No. 15 “Nijikyoshi-shu”), the success probability of the aspect change of the fluctuation icon is 100%, and the success probability is higher than that of “Kinkyoshi-shu”. In addition, even in the display of Yoshimune, Yoshimune (No. 13 to No. 15) other than the default color changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon to the same display mode as that of the user.

  In the display of the leader (No. 16), the success probability of the change in the form of the change icon is 100%, and when the display of the set is displayed, the change icon always goes up by one step.

  In the panda display (No. 17), the success probability of the mode change of the hold icon is 100%, and when the panda display is displayed, the mode of the hold icon always goes up by one step. Moreover, if two or more suspension icons are displayed at the start of the symbol variation display in which the display of the panda is performed, the modes of the two suspension icons are changed with a probability of 50%. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), only up to two icons are changed, but three or more icons may be changed, and all displayed items may be changed regardless of the number. It may be possible to change the hold icon of or all the displayed icons.

  Subsequently, the effects of using various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179 will be described using a specific example.

  FIG. 180 shows, in stages, an example in which the notice icon is stocked by winning in the mini game B, and the notice display is displayed by using the stock notice icon and the display mode of the variation icon changes. It is.

  In FIG. 180, it is a normal state (non-probable change state and non-electric support state (non-short time state)), and in the subsequent example of the effect, it is an example of effect in the normal state unless otherwise specified. Further, FIG. 180 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N shown in FIG. 51, but the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the decorative symbol shown in FIG. It may be the display device 208 (the same applies to the following figures).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) performs variable display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A1), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 179 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Although the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A1) is white only, this white only means that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of white only, the background screen is not shown, as in the case of FIG. 180 (A1).

  In FIG. 180 (A), there is a ball entry in the special view 1 start opening 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 92, and the suspension of the special view 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A), the number-of-holds of the special view 1 is displayed as "3".

  In FIG. 180 (3-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. In FIG. 180 (3-1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes so far, are both No. FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. Here, the icon of the default display mode has changed to the icon of the mode a of the villager's type, but the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice (for example, the blue display mode described in No. 3 of FIG. 179 (a) or The green display icon described in No. 4 may be changed to a villager's type icon. In this case, the upper display mode (for example, the green display mode of the fourth display mode) is better than the icon of the villager type than the lower display mode (for example, the blue display mode of the third display mode). It is easy to become an icon of a certain type, and the display mode above (for example, the red display mode of the fifth display mode) tends to become an icon of a Yoshimune type. In addition, although the third hold icon h13 representing the target hold of the prefetch notice is the default display mode, the third hold icon h13 may also be changed to a villager's type icon. Furthermore, only the first hold icon h11 may change to a villager's type icon, or only the second hold icon h12 may change to a villager's type icon. That is, the number of icons changing to a villager's type of icon may be one or plural. In addition, when the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 change to a villager's type icon, the mini game (specific mini game is performed in the symbol variation display respectively corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. It may be notified that a game (in this example, mini game B) or an unspecified mini game (in this example, mini game A, mini game B, or other mini games, etc.) will be played. In addition, the mini game is started simultaneously with (or immediately after) the start of the symbol variation display (in the case of the present example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) to start the mini game B. The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

  In FIG. 180 (A4), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"- "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left also halts and displays the combination of the decoration patterns of the loser ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

  In FIG. 180 (A5), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A5), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started, and the first upper right symbol 2 In the number-of-retentions display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2". In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Also, in FIG. 180 (5), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first suspension icon h11 of the villager character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1 so far, has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far The second holding icon h12 of the villager's character starts moving toward the first stage hs1, and it is the default display mode that has been displayed on the third stage hs3 so far, but it is the third for previewing notice target pending The hold icon h13 starts moving toward the second stage hs2. Note that the appearance animation of the opponent icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started simultaneously, or the appearance animation of the opponent icon may be started first, or conversely, the movement of the hold icon The animation may be started earlier.

  In FIG. 180 (A6), although the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and the variation icon h0 indicates the type a of the villager (a waiting mode). Icon is displayed. The villager character of this variation icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). Further, the appearance animation of the opponent icon is also ended, and the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the manner of the pant type shown in FIG. 178 (c) as the opponent icon TI (a A standby mode icon is displayed, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI also executes a standby animation (default animation). Further, on the right side of the opponent icon TI, an appearance area AS which is a first area is displayed surrounded by a frame. In this appearance area AS, a character display of "Premium" is displayed, and a notice icon YI that can be acquired when the mini game B wins the rock-paper-scissors match is displayed. That is, the display start position of the notice icon YI is a position in the appearance area AS. Also, from the perspective, the first area can be said to be a notice area for giving notice of the icons that can be acquired in the mini game B. In the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 180 (A6), No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. Further, a stock area SS which is a second area is provided above the emergence area AS, and is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 180 (A6). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS overlap. The appearance area AS and the stock area SS may be configured not to overlap. Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI and the movement animation of the hold icon may end simultaneously, or the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI may end earlier, or conversely, the hold icon The moving animation of may end earlier. Also, the appearance of the opponent icon TI and the appearance of the notice icon YI may be simultaneous, or the opponent icon TI may appear first, or the notice icon YI is opposite. It may appear first.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A7), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini game B's rock-solid confrontation is started. In the mini game B, the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI make a jaunting confrontation, and if the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins, the notice icon displayed in the appearance area AS You can earn YI. In addition, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B may be started simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation display of a 1st decoration symbol, and may be started when the fluctuation display of a 2nd decoration symbol is started. Since the Janken confrontation here is a villager vs. panda and the prize is the notice icon YI of "box", according to the acquisition expectation shown in FIG. 178 (d), the probability of C (60%) Can be earned. That is, the villagers win with a probability of 60%.

  In FIG. 180 (A-8-1), a janiken confrontation animation is performed by the character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the fluctuation icon h0 corresponds to the type b of the villager It has changed to the icon of the mode when it was put out. On the other hand, the opponent icon TI is changed to the icon of the type c of the panda type (the type when the choki is released). As a result, the character of the villager of the variation icon h0 wins. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the type a of the villager (a mode of standby), and the standby animation is executed.

  In FIG. 180 (A 9-1), the change icon h0 changes to an icon of the villager's type aspect f (an aspect when winning), and the opponent icon TI is a panda type aspect e (when defeated) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A 9-1), an animation is executed to celebrate that the character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 has won. Although the standby animation is continued at the first hold icon h11, when the result of the mini game is obtained, the animation according to the result may be executed. That is, even with the hold icon changed to the same character icon as the fluctuation icon h0, it is executed only for an animation that celebrates winning the mini game, an animation that regrets losing it, or an animation that celebrates winning the mini game May be Also, even with the hold icon changed to an icon of a different character instead of the same character as the fluctuation icon h0, an animation according to the result of the mini game may be executed similarly.

  In FIG. 180 (A10), when the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins, stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. That is, the No. shown in FIG. 177 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of "box 1" goes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, moves to a certain position (stock position) in the stock area SS, and is displayed at the certain position (stock display) ) (See FIG. 180 (A. 11)). In FIG. 180 (A12), an animation is continued to celebrate that the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 has won, but the lost opponent icon TI is an icon of the mode a (type of standby) of the panda type. And the panda character is performing a wait animation (the default animation).

  In FIG. 180 (A13), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6” — “decoration 4” — The "decorative 1" is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 180 (A14), the stop display is in progress (the final display is in progress), and in the fluctuation icon h0, the deletion animation is started while the animation for celebrating that the villager character has won is continued The villager's character gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. FIG. 180 (A15) is also in the stop display mode (during the fixed display mode), and the fluctuation icon h0 has completely disappeared.

  The mini game B may end simultaneously with the end of the symbol variation display, or may end simultaneously with the end of the variation display of the first decorative symbol, or may end simultaneously with the end of the finalized display of the first decorative symbol. May be

  In FIG. 180 (A16), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A16), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started and the first upper right symbol In the 2 pendings display, the number of pendings in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “1”. Further, in FIG. 180 (A16), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first suspension icon h11 of the villager character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1 so far, has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far Also, in the default display mode, the second hold icon h12 for holding for previewing advance notice is starting to move toward the first stage hs1.

  In FIG. 180 (A17), although the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and the variation icon h0 indicates the type a of the villager type (a waiting mode) Icon is displayed. Further, in this example, the opponent who has played first is displayed as it is, and the opponent icon TI becomes an icon of a panda character. Therefore, it becomes villager vs. panda. However, the character of the opponent may change at each confrontation (at each symbol variation display). Furthermore, in this example, the match is played with the character (village character) whose reserve icon first changed, but the character may change each time the reserve is finished (shift movement). For example, it may change from a villager to a wolf, from a wolf to a Yoshimune, from a villager to a Yoshimune, or from a wolf to a villager. As described with reference to FIG. 178 (d), when the confrontation between Yoshimune and the panda is reached, the notice icon can be acquired with a probability of 100% regardless of the type of the notice icon. Further, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 180 (A17), the No. 1 shown in FIG. Notice icon YI of 2 "red box" has appeared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A18), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B to be the second time is also started. Since the second jangken confrontation is a villager vs. panda and the giveaway is the notice icon YI of “red box”, according to the acquisition expectation shown in FIG. 178 (d), the probability of D (40%) Can be acquired by That is, the probability is lower than the first time, and the villager wins with a probability of 40%.

  In FIG. 180 (A 19-1), a janiken confrontation animation is performed by the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the fluctuation icon h0 corresponds to the type b of the villager type It has changed to the icon of the mode when it was put out. On the other hand, the opponent icon TI is changed to an icon of a type d of a panda type (a type when a par is put out). As a result, the panda character of the opponent icon TI wins.

  In FIG. 180 (A 20), the variation icon h0 changes to an icon of the villager type aspect e (a mode when defeated), and the opponent icon TI has a panda type aspect f (a type when it is won). In the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A21), the display animation of the villager's character and the exchange animation of the default display are started. . That is, at the same time as the character of the villager who has been the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 gradually disappears, the icon of the default display mode gradually appears. In other words, the replacement animation is a change animation of the display mode of the change icon h0. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, since it is lost in the confrontation with the rock-paper-scissors, it can not acquire the notice icon YI of "red box" displayed in the appearance area AS, and it appears with a frame surrounding the appearance area AS in FIG. The area AS itself gradually fades out to the right end of the screen, and the notice icon YI of "red box" also gradually disappears from the screen. In FIG. 180 (A22), the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

  In FIG. 180 (23), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"- The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 180 (A24), the pre-reading notice object holding which has been the first hold until now is digested, and the symbol variation display which is the pre-reading object change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A24), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start variable display, and a default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. In addition, there is no hold icon, and "0" is displayed for the 2nd number-of-holds display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 for both.

  In FIG. 180 (A 25), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a conversation notice as a normal notice is started. It should be noted that while no other effects were performed during the period in which mini game B is being performed, even if it is a period in which mini game B is being performed, other effects such as conversational announcement etc. may also be performed. Good. The notice of conversation here is the same as the notice of conversation shown in FIG. 117 (10) to FIG. That is, when the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the statue of the lady on which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lady is displayed in the central region. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped. On the other hand, the speaker's conversation image CI1 is not overlapped with the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. That is, although the notice icon YI continuously displayed in the stock area is displayed from before the conversation image CI1 of the lord, it overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI1 from the front side.

  It should be noted that the notice icon YI is a stock without being overlapped with the notice display even in the notice display (for example, the indication display of the super reach, etc.) performed using the full screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. You may continue to be displayed. Alternatively, on the contrary, the display of the notice effect performed using the entire screen may have a period in which it is overlapped and temporarily hidden. For example, if the notice icon YI is a display of notice effect using, the notice icon YI continues to be displayed in stock without being overlapped. Also on the user customization screen during symbol variation shown in FIG. 126 (93) etc., the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the bar display VB for volume adjustment or, conversely, the volume adjustment The bar display VB may be overlapped. In addition, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the display related to the various errors described with reference to FIGS. You may wrap it. For example, if the importance of an error or warning is low or the relationship with fraud is low, the display of the notice icon YI has priority, and the notice icon YI continues to be displayed in stock without being overlapped. Good.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (A26), the conversation notice is updated. In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period It is composed of Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (A), the operation effective period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative pattern is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the wolf, but the notice icon YI displayed in stock is displayed in front of the conversation image CI2 of the wolf, and is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the wolf It has not been.

  Eventually, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 180 (A 27) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period has started.

  The timing shown in FIG. 180 (A 28) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the continuation of the effect example shown in FIG. 180 in a step-by-step manner, and a diagram showing a modification of the effect example.

  In FIG. 181 (A 29) continued from FIG. 180 (A 28), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, the talk image CI2 of the eyebrow is a reach effect from the operation promotion notification image. It has changed to the word display of "reach it!" In addition, the character display of the notice such as "reach it!" May be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed also in the case of

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the grandfather and the conversation image CI2 of the spear are erased and the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see There is.

  In FIG. 181 (A 31-1), reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” swings and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 181 (A32), when used, the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is a display mode in which the box is closed changes to the mode d which is a display mode in which the box is opened. An animation in which the notice display YH pops out from inside is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "red change" of 7 red, and the notice display of "red change" is a display for giving notice that the display mode such as the hold icon or the change icon is changed in two steps. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 181 (A33), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of red “change in red” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 181 (A34), the variation icon change animation using the advance notice YH is started. In FIG. 181 (A34), the notice display YH of "change in red" is changed to the ball YHb of light in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 181 (35), the light ball YHb flies with the fluctuating icon h0 and strikes the fluctuating icon h0. In FIG. 181 (A36), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 which is the default display mode before the start of the animation after the fluctuation icon change animation ends is No. 3 in FIG. 179 (a). It has changed to the blue display mode described in 3. That is, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the normal notice.

  On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 181 (A 37), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 changed to the display mode of blue is continuously displayed. In FIG. 181 (A 38), the normal reach effect is finished, and the “decoration 5” which is not the “decoration 6” shakes and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols is fluctuating.

  In FIG. 181 (A39), the display is stopped with the combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” displayed, and in FIG. The fluctuation icon h0 changed to the blue display mode is continuously displayed until the definite display is started, and disappears when the definite display is started. The timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears may be before the finalized display.

  Then, the modification of the example of an effect of FIG. 180 (A1)-FIG. 181 (A 40) demonstrated until now is demonstrated. In the following, differences from the examples of effects described above will be mainly described, and overlapping points may be omitted.

  The first modified example is the same up to FIG. 180 (A7), and as shown in FIG. 181 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 180 (A8-1), in this first modified example The character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 is the mode b when the gou is put out, while the character of the panda of the opponent icon TI is the manner d when the par is put out, the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 Lose the character of. In FIG. 181 (A 8-2-2), the variation icon h0 changes to an icon of the villager type aspect e (a mode when defeated), and the opponent icon TI is an aspect f of the panda type It changes to the icon of the mode when it did, and the loss production (animation that sads about losing) is performed.

  In FIG. 181 (A-8-2-3) in which the first decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance region AS due to the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 losing is an appearance region Both the villager character of the variation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI disappear from the AS, and the standby animation (default animation) is executed. As a result, the notice icon YI is not displayed in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 181 (A 8-2-4), the symbol variation display is finished, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped, and in FIG. 180 (A 8-2-5), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped. Being displayed (fixed display), the character of the villager with the fluctuation icon h0 gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0 by the deletion animation. Also in FIG. 181 (A8-2-6), the stop display is in progress (the final display is in progress), and the fluctuation icon h0 is completely disappeared.

  Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 179 (A 16) to FIG. 180 (A 19-1), a second jaunt fight is performed, and the character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 loses even in the second jaunt confrontation. In FIG. 181 (A8-2-7), a loss effect of the character of the villager with the fluctuation icon h0 is performed as in FIG. 181 (A8-2-2). In FIG. 181 (A8-2-8), as in FIG. 180 (A21), the animation of replacing the display mode of the character of the villager and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Go. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of "red box" gradually disappears from the screen. In the meantime, as shown in FIG. 181 (A 8-2-9), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in FIG. 181 (A 8-2-10), the pre-reading is performed. The symbol variation display as the target variation is started.

  The first modification described above is an example in which the mini game B is a so-called gusset.

  Subsequently, a second modification will be described. In FIG. 181 (A 22), when the notice icon YI which has been stocked is used, the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d (the box is opened), but in this second modification, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. Is concerned.

  The second modification is the same as in FIG. 181 (A 31-1), and in FIG. 181 (A 31-2-1), the state in which reach effect is started as in FIG. 181 (A 31-1) It is. When the reach effect is started, an operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked advance notice icon YI as shown in FIG. 181 (31-2-2) in the second modification. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is comprised by meter MT. Note that the timing in FIG. 181 (A 31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation valid period, and the operation valid period It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

  The operation effective period is started at the timing of FIG. 181 (A 31-2-3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 181 (A 31-2-4) has a certain amount of It is shown by the display mode when time passes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 181 (31-2-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 181 (A 31-2-6), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the above-mentioned effective period of operation, the notice icon YI, which is the aspect a which is the display aspect in which the box is closed It changes to the aspect d which is an open display aspect, and the animation (box open animation) which notice display YH pops out of a box is displayed. The subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 181 (A 33).

  Here, the operation prompting notification image configured by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed after the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0, or may not be displayed when the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed. In addition, the deletion animation of the operation promotion notification image may be started or executed simultaneously with the box opening animation, the deletion animation may be started or performed first, or the box opening animation is started first It may be performed.

  The change of the notice icon YI to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation is performed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be performed if the validity period has expired. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated, the box opening animation may be different depending on whether or not the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the box-opening animation may be the same animation regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the advance notice icon YI to the mode d may be performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

  FIG. 182 is a view showing third to sixth modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 180 (A1) to FIG. 181 (A40).

  In the third modified example, the advance notice icon YI is not the icon of the “box” but the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. 177 (a). 5 “button” icon. The icon of this "button" may be displayed from the beginning in the appearance area AS, or may be an icon changed from other icons in the appearance area AS, or from other icons in the stock area It may be a changed icon.

  The notice icon YI of the “button” shown in FIG. 182 (A 31-3-1) is an icon of the mode a showing that even if the chance button 136 is operated, it is invalid since there is no remaining time display meter. . That is, this is an aspect of only the button 136a.

  In FIG. 182 (A 31-3-2), the mode of the notice icon YI of “button” is changed to the mode b in which the remaining time display meter MT is added. However, the remaining time display meter MT is full display and is before the start of the operation effective period. The remaining time display meter MT may be in a non-display mode.

  In FIG. 182 (A 31-3-3), the operation effective period is started, and in FIG. 182 (A 31-3-4), the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced.

  The timing shown in FIG. 182 (31-3-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 182 (A 31-3-6) in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, the mode of the notice icon YI of the “button” is the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) In the same figure (A 31-3-7), the effect image (smoke image) disappears, and a notice display of red "red change" appears. The change in the form of the notice icon YI after the chance button 136 is operated is the display of animation (post-operation animation). The subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 181 (A 33).

  The change to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) of the notice icon YI of the “button” may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may also be executed when the operation effective period has elapsed. Furthermore, in the configuration that is also executed when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated, the post-operation animation may be different depending on whether the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the post-operation animation may be the same animation regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the advance notice icon YI to the mode d may be performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

  In the fourth modification, the advance notice changes the display mode of the hold icon instead of the change icon in parallel with the progress of the mini game.

  The fourth modification is the same up to FIG. 180 (A 18), and FIG. 182 (A 19-2-1) is the same as FIG. 180 (A 19-1). The panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 182 (A 19-2-2), with the mini game B still continuing, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, the notice icon YI of the mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, changes to the mode d, which is a display mode in which the box is opened. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. This is a notice display of the "change" of the default color of 6, which is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a pending icon change animation using the notice display YH is started.

  In FIG. 182 (A19-2-3), as in FIG. 180 (A20), a losing effect of the character of the villager with the variation icon h0 is performed. Further, in FIG. 182 (A 19-2-3), the notice icon YI used in the middle of the mini game B has disappeared in the middle of the mini game B, and “change” of the default color is caused by the suspension icon change animation. The notice display YH of the first symbol changes to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c as shown in FIG. 181 (A34), and the first hold icon h11 indicating that the light ball YHb holds the prefetch target for previewing It flies with the aim, and it collides with the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 182 (A 19-2-4), while the effect of the villager's character in the mini game B continues to lose, the pending icon change animation ends, and the first pending icon was the default display mode before the start of the animation. The display mode of h11 is No. 1 in FIG. It has changed to the display mode of the white blink described in 2. That is, the display mode of the hold icon h11 indicating the hold of the pre-reading advance notice object is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. Thereafter, as in the case of FIG. 180 (21), the exchange animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of "red box" gradually disappears from the screen. After the symbol variation display is ended and the combination of the lost design symbols is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display as the pre-reading target variation is started.

  In the fifth modification, the advance notice changes the combination pattern of the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol.

  The fifth modification is the same up to FIG. 180 (A 18), and FIG. 182 (A 19-3-1) is the same as FIG. 180 (A 19-1). The panda character of the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-2), with the mini game B still continuing, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, the notice icon YI of the mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, changes to the mode d, which is a display mode in which the box is opened. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is an advance notice of 12 "chance eyes" and is displayed once in the right symbol display area 208c. Here, the pre-reading notice display of "the chance eye" is a display for giving notice of occurrence of the pre-reading notice in which the combination of the chance eye is fixedly displayed at the time of the final display of the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of the “chance of eye” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. As shown in FIG. 182 (A 19-3-4), the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is a right symbol display area 208c for a while after the box of the notice icon YI is opened (appeared). Is displayed on. On the other hand, since the player loses the Janken confrontation, the exchange animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of "red box" gradually disappears from the screen. In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-5), the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. In this example, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol changes to a low speed, chance eye endorsement production is started, but chance eye eye end production starts immediately after the notice display YH of "chance eye" appears. It may be done. As shown in FIG. 182 (A 19-3-6), after the variable display of the first decorative symbol changes to a low speed, the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is a ball of light YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. Has changed. In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-7), the ball YHb of the light flies with the first decoration pattern changing at a low speed and flies, and collides with the decoration pattern of the middle pattern display area 208b. In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-8), the effect image EF2 is displayed on all of the three decorative symbols moving at a low speed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182 (A 19-3-9). The first decorative pattern is swinging fluctuation "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" which is a chance eye. In addition, chance eyes of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6" or "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7" Similar to the chance eyes, it is a weak chance eye that is relatively hard to hit big in the target change in the look-ahead (following symbol fluctuation display), and the strong chance eye that is relatively easy to hit big is "decoration 7"-"decoration 1" -"Decoration 1", "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 8", "decoration 4"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 8". In FIG. 182 (A 19-3-10), an effect image EF3 notifying that the chance eye of “decoration 1”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 5” is stopped and displayed is displayed. In 3-11), the chance eyes of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are stopped and displayed.

  In the sixth modification, No. 1 in FIG. In the notice display YH of “chance” of 2, the preview notice in which the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped is combined with the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 (A 19-4-1) is a state in which the panda character of the opponent icon TI has won in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B. In FIG. 182 (A 19-4-2), reach effect is started with the first decorative symbol, and “decoration 6” is fluctuating in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. It should be noted that the display mode of the villager's character has been changed to the default display mode and the opponent icon TI has disappeared since the player lost the battle. In addition to the appearance area AS, the notice icon YI of "red box" is also disappearing. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 182 (A 19-4-3), in the reach state, the notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of “chance” appears. That is, the notice display YH of the "chance" has appeared after the start of the reach, and the notice display YH of the "chance" here increases the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display currently performed. It corresponds to a kind of The symbol variation display currently performed is the symbol variation display of one time before the symbol variation display of the previewed preview target variation, and the notice display YH of the "chance" is different from the symbol variation display of the previewed preview target variation It corresponds to a regular notice of symbol variation display. After the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 182 (19-4-4). The notice icon YI may disappear in the deletion animation, or may disappear in a moment without using the deletion animation. Further, in FIG. 182 (A 19-4-5), in the reach state, the notice display YH of “chance” has disappeared.

  Then, in FIG. 182 (A 19-4-6), the pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped at the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The pending change symbol HHZ has a red symbol and a blue symbol, and when the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of one of the displayed pending icons (here, the first pending icon h11) is displayed. When the blue hold change symbol is temporarily stopped by promoting two stages, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by one stage. In FIG. 182 (A 19-4-6), the blue hold change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, the hold change animation as shown in FIG. 164 (D 17) is started, and in the default display mode A certain first hold icon h11 changes to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking). Note that the pending change symbol HHZ is a prefetch notice for the first pending icon h11.

  FIG. 183 is a view showing seventh to tenth modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 180 (A1) to FIG. 181 (A40).

  The seventh modification is the same up to FIG. 181 (A 30-1), and FIG. 183 (A 31-4-1) is the same as FIG. Reach effect has been started in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 183 (A 31-4-2), the notice icon YI is used after the start of the reach, and the No. in FIG. The notice display YH of 2 "chance" appears. The notice display YH of the "chance" that appears here is a normal notice that raises the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol change display, which is the pre-read notice target change. In addition, after the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 183 (A 31-4-3).

  The eighth modified example is an example in which one of the hold icons changes to the opponent icon TI. That is, as shown in FIG. 183 (A 3-2-1), when winning of the hold (the third hold) targeted for the advance notice, the hold icon representing the hold before the advance notice target hold is the opponent Change to icon TI. In addition, a holding icon representing a hold prior to the pre-read advance notice target hold also changes to the character fighting with the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the character of the villager). In the eighth modified example, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, it is changed to the icon of the panda character type. In addition, the second hold icon h12 is changed to an icon of the villager character type. In FIG. 183 (A3-2-2), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the same drawing (A3-2-3), the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and the right base of the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. In the icon bIr, the effect image EF1 is displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 183 (A3-2-4), the variation icon h0 becomes the opponent icon TI, and the first hold icon h11 fights the character of the opponent icon TI (here, the villager Character icon). Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, an appearance area AS surrounded by a frame appears, and a notice icon YI which can be acquired when the mini game B wins a win is displayed It is done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (A3-5-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the game of the mini game B is also started. In FIG. 183 (A3-2-6), a rock-in-the-top confrontation animation is performed by the panda character of the opponent icon TI which is the change icon h0 and the villager character of the first hold icon h11. Villager's character wins. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (A3-2-7), an animation celebrating that the villager character of the first hold icon h11 has won is started, and the same FIG. In 2-8), stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. In FIG. 183 (3-2-9), the notice icon YI is displayed at the stock position.

  In FIG. 183 (A3-2-10), the mini game B ends, and in the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area HIS, the display animation of the villager character and the exchange animation of the default display mode are started. There is. In addition, on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS, the exchange animation of the icon of the panda character and the fluctuation icon of the default display mode is started. Here, each of the replacement animations may be an animation returning to the display mode before changing to the villager character or the panda character, or another display mode different from the display mode before the change. It may be a replacement animation. For example, even if the display mode before the change is the default display mode, the display mode may be replaced with the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice or the normal advance notice. In FIG. 183 (3-2-11), both the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode. Also, the notice icon YI remains displayed in stock. This notice icon YI is a notice icon in FIG. 183 (A3-2-11) which is an object of pre-reading notice to put on hold for the second hold, and is used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold. . However, it may be used in the symbol variation display currently performed, and may be used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the 1st suspension which was an icon of a villager's character.

  The ninth modification is the same as the eighth modification up to the middle. That is, FIG. 183 (3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 183 (3-2-8b1) is the same as FIG. 183 (3-2-8). In the ninth modification, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is once displayed large, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving into the stock area SS, and the display mode until then is default. Instead of the second hold icon h12 representing the target hold of the prefetch notice, the stock icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS (FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8 b2) to FIG. -2-8b3)). It can also be seen that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of the advance notice icon YI. Also, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS may move to the stock icon display area HIS after moving to the stock area SS. In addition, the reserved icon display area HIS may double as the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 183 (3-2-8b4), the reserve is digested, and the notice icon YI replaced with the second reserve icon h12 becomes the variation icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. ing. In FIG. 183 (3-2-8b5), the notice icon YI that is the fluctuation icon h0 is used in the pedestal hs0 and changes to the aspect d in which the box is opened, and from among The notice display YH of 2 "chance" appears. Since FIG. 183 (A 3-2-8b5) is before the start of the reach, the notice display YH of the “chance” here indicates that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the symbol variation display currently performed. It will be displayed to give notice.

  The notice icon YI is moved to the pedestal hs0 while being displayed in the appearance area AS or once displayed in the stock area SS, and is replaced with the change icon h0 during symbol variation display of the preview notice target pending. Alternatively, the symbol may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS while the symbol is being displayed or stopped before the symbol change display of the prefetch notice target hold, and may be replaced with the hold icon of the prefetch notice target hold.

  Further, the notice icon YI may be used in the state of the hold icon, and the notice display YH of the advance notice may appear. Also in this case, the notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS or once displayed in the stock area SS, and then the symbol change display prior to the symbol change display of the pre-reading notice object pending is displayed or the stop display During the process, the user may move to the hold icon display area HIS and replace it with the hold icon for the pre-read notice target hold.

  The tenth modification is also the same as the eighth modification up to the middle. That is, FIG. 183 (3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 183 (3-2-8c1) is also the same as FIG. 183 (3-2-8). Also in this tenth modification, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is temporarily displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving to the stock area SS. Then, in the tenth modified example, the notice icon YI is replaced with the first suspension icon h11 of the villager's icon who has played the mini game B. In other words, it replaces the hold icon different from the hold icon representing the pre-read notice object hold. In some cases, a plurality of preview icons may be acquired, and in this case, the number of acquisition icons may be replaced with the number of reserved icons. That is, one notice icon YI may be replaced with one hold icon. Alternatively, a plurality of notice icons Yi may be collectively replaced with one hold icon, and a plurality of notice icons replaced with the hold icon may have a number indicating the number of pieces, or the hold icon A plurality of advance notice icons replaced by may be displayed in a color representing the plurality of pieces. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be replaced with the change icon h0.

  In FIG. 183 (A3-2-8c3), the character “I did it” of the animation celebrating the mini game victory remains, but the first icon h11 for the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. ing. Note that the panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variation icon h0, remains in the mode e, and the character “I did it” disappears at the timing when it changes to the mode a. In addition, the character of "I did it" may disappear at the same time as the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI, and before the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced by the notice icon YI It may be gone. For example, it may disappear at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (3-2-8c2).

  In FIG. 183 (3-3-8c4), the notice icon YI replaced with the first hold icon h11 becomes the fluctuation icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The symbol variation display performed in FIG. 183 (A3-2-8c4) is the symbol variation display prior to the target variation of the advance notice. During the execution of this symbol variation display, an animation for stocking a notice icon is started. Although the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 183 (3-2-8c4) is the notice icon YI, it is not the notice icon used in the target change of the advance notice. In the animation started here, it becomes an animation for stocking the notice icon used in the target change of the advance notice. The fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 183 (3-2-8c4) functions as an icon for confirming the stock of the notice icon used in the target change of the advance notice.

  In FIG. 183 (3-2-8c5), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes, and an effect image EF4 notifying that the notice icon used in the change of the object of the advance notice is stocked is displayed. It should be noted that some icon is beginning to be faintly visible behind this effect image EF4. In FIG. 183 (3-2-8c6), the effect image EF4 pops out of the fluctuation icon h0 and moves to the stock area SS. On the other hand, the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the default display mode. The default display mode is a display mode when the change icon h0 is started to be displayed as the hold icon (third hold icon h13). That is, although the display mode changed in various ways after the start of display, the display mode before the change is returned. In addition, it may be displayed in display modes other than the display mode before changing.

  In FIG. 183 (3-3-8c5), the effect image EF4 is displayed as the notice icon YI used in the target change of the advance notice in the stock area SS.

  The notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 183 (3-2-8c3) may be used before it becomes a change icon. In addition, the animation for moving the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 to the second hold icon h12 representing the pre-read notice target hold is performed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the symbol variation in which the notice icon YI is used The display may be notified in advance. After FIG. 183 (3-2-8c7), the process continues to FIG. 180 (22).

  FIG. 184 is a view showing another modified example of the effect example of FIG. 180 (A1) to FIG. 181 (A40).

  In the eleventh modification, the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are areas dedicated to the mini game. The eleventh modification is the same as in FIG. 180 (A2), and in FIG. 184 (A 3-3-1), the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS disappears, and the fluctuation icon display area CIS and the effect icon The display area DIS is connected. Hereinafter, the area in which the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are connected is collectively referred to as a mini game area MGS. In the mini game area MGS shown in FIG. 184 (3-3-1), an appearance area AS which is a first area is displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, in the variation icon display area CIS of the mini game exclusive area MGS, the panda character of the opponent icon TI is displayed in the form a. Here, the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the currently displayed symbol fluctuation display is changed to the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In the back of the appearance area AS, an entrance through which the character enters and exits is provided.

  In FIG. 184 (3-3-2), the symbol variation display is ended, but the panda character of the opponent icon TI continues to be displayed by the standby animation. That is, in this example, when the change icon h0 is changed to the opponent icon TI, it is continuously displayed as the opponent icon TI even if the corresponding symbol change display is finished. In other words, the icon of the panda character plays both roles of the variation icon h0 and the opponent icon TI during the symbol variation display, but plays only the role of the opponent icon TI when the symbol variation display is finished. It will be. Note that the icon of the panda character only plays the role of the opponent icon TI, and the variation icon h0 may be erased.

  In FIG. 184 (3-3-3), the first change icon h11, which is the character icon of the villager who was displayed in the change icon display area HIS and symbol variation display has been started, is directed to the mini game area MGS. Start moving. In FIG. 184 (3-3-4), the character icon of the villager who has been the first hold icon h11 so far is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area CIS of the mini game area MGS. . On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which was the fluctuation icon in the previous symbol fluctuation display, continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI, and the villager vs. panda's Janken confrontation is started (FIG. 184 (3-3-5. )). When the rock fight is started, the notice icon YI appears in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI may appear at the same time as the start of the confrontation, or the notice icon YI may appear before the start of the confrontation.

  In FIG. 184 (A3-3-6), the character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 wins, and in FIG. 184 (A3-3-7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed. It has been started. Also, an animation has been started to celebrate winning the Janken confrontation. In FIG. 184 (3-3-8), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and in FIG. 184 (3-3-9), the animation for celebrating winning the rock-paper-scissors match ends. When this animation is finished, as shown in FIG. 184 (3-3-10), the icon of the villager character that is the variation icon h0 exits from the entrance provided at the back of the appearance area AS, and then the symbol The variable display ends (FIG. 184 (3-3-11)). The icon of the villager character, which is the variation icon h0, may exit from the entrance provided at the back of the appearance area AS after the symbol variation display is finished. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which is the opponent icon TI, continues to be displayed until the end of all the fights. However, it may be replaced with the character of the swordsman character on the way. The exit timing of the villager's character icon may be simultaneous with the symbol variation display. Also, if the rock-paper-scissors match continues after this, the icon of the villager's character may be displayed in stock in the mini game area MGS until all the rock-scissors show-off is completed without leaving. Note that the opponent icon TI and / or the icon of the character that is the variation icon h0 that has exited from the entrance may enter the entrance. In addition, an animation may be performed in which the opponent icon TI exits when the mini game ends.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 184 (A 9-2-1) and FIG. (A 9-2-2), the variation icon h0 corresponds to No. 1 in FIG. The icon of the Yoshimune character shown in 19 is used, and the opponent icon TI is an icon of a panda character. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 178 (d), the player wins the battle with a probability of 100%, and further, in this example, the notice icon of the "rainbow box" of the big hit decision is displayed in the appearance area AS. In FIG. 184 (9-2-2), the symbol variation display is ended while the notice icon of the "rainbow box" is displayed in stock. The notice icon of the "rainbow box" has a high degree of confidence in the big hit and functions as a prefetch notice. In addition, the notice icon of "a rainbow box" may function as a notice of the change concerned.

  Moreover, in the box-shaped notice icon, the notice display (item) contained in the box is more advantageous for the player in the case of the “red box” than the “box” (for example, a notice that tends to develop into a super reach) In this case, the "gold box" is more advantageous to the player than the "red box". Therefore, only when a box-shaped notice icon is displayed, and depending on the color of the box-shaped notice icon, whether the notice display actually appears or not, if the notice display appears, how advantageous the notice is It can be estimated in advance whether it is a display. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 177 (a), since the reliability of the big hit is also determined by the color of the box-shaped notice icon, the color of the box-shaped notice icon indicates the ease of the big hit and the game It shows both the ease of acquisition of the advance notice which is advantageous to the person. It should be noted that the display mode of the advance notice icon may indicate only the ease of obtaining an advantageous advance notice, or only the ease of winning a big hit.

  The modification shown in FIG. 184 (A3-4) is an example in which there may be a case where the pre-read advance notice object hold pending icon is also used for the mini game. That is, in FIG. 184 (3-4), the third hold icon h13 representing the pre-read advance notice target hold is also changed to the icon of the villager's character, and participates in the rock-paper-scissors match. As a result, if the player wins the battle, there may be a case where a notice display used during execution of the symbol change display of the previewing notice target hold is obtained. In addition, the hold icon representing a hold behind the pre-read advance notice target hold may also be changed to an icon that can participate in the mini game. In this case, when the mini game is played by changing the pause icon for the preview advance notice object hold to a variation animation, the mini game is ended until the end of the mini game or until the symbol variation display of the prefetch notice object hold is ended. It may be an aspect of an icon capable of participating in the game, and thereafter, may return to the original display aspect. Also, after the mini game (for example, mini game B) is finished, the icon does not change to a dedicated icon that can participate in the mini game (for example, mini game B), but a new mini game (of the same type Even if it may change to a dedicated icon that can participate in a mini game (for example, mini game B) or a different type of mini game (for example, mini game A) Good.

  The modification shown in FIG. 184 (3-5) is an example in which the hold icon displayed as an icon capable of participating in the mini game is not limited to one type of icon. That is, in FIG. 184 (A3-4), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as an icon of the kind of a rose character, and the second hold icon h12 is a No. 1 icon shown in FIG. 179 (a). It is displayed as an icon of 18 villager character types.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 184 (3-6), the previously digested holding icon displayed as an icon capable of participating in the mini game is displayed as an icon also capable of participating in the mini game. This is an example in which at least a part may overlap with the retention icon to be digested later. That is, in FIG. 184 (A3-6), the first hold icon h11 corresponds to the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. The 19th icon of the Yoshimune character type is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is also displayed with the same icon of the Yoshimune character type, and the back foot of the icon of the Yoshimune character which is the first hold icon h11 is 21 is overlapped with the forefoot of the icon of the Yoshimune character that is 21 reserved icon h12.

  In addition, the relationship of the overlap may be reversed, or a reserve icon with high reliability of the big hit may be displayed in the foreground. Furthermore, the displayed pending icon may suggest the expectation of the pre-reading target change. For example, in the case where two icons are displayed, it may be easier for the player to hit the jackpot due to the pre-reading target fluctuation than when only one icon of the icon of the Yoshimune character is displayed.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 184 (31-5-1) to FIG. 184 (31-5-3), the cursor CS is used as the notice icon YI displayed in stock. FIG. 184 (A 31-5-1) is the same state as FIG. 181 (A 31-1), and FIG. 184 (A 31-5-2) shows a notice of the embodiment a which is a display mode in which the box is closed. The display of the cursor CS points to the icon YI. The display of the cursor CS is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now on. After FIG. 184 (A 31-5-3), the process continues to FIG. 181 (A 33). When the display of the cursor CS points, the notice icon YI may be always used or may not be used. In addition, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which a box vibrates and vibrates, etc.) for giving a notice in advance that the box will open may be used in combination with the display of the cursor CS, and further, a second modification As shown in FIG. 181 (31-2-2), the display of the operation promotion notification image may be used in combination.

  In FIG. 184 (A 31-5-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and instead, an open box animation is displayed, and the box changes to the mode d, which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH from the box is displayed. It is jumping out.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 184 (A 30-2-1) to the same figure (A 30-2-4), an effect of giving a prior notice that the box is opened is executed. FIG. 184 (A 30-2-1) is in the same state as FIG. 181 (A 30-1), and in FIG. 184 (A 30-2-2), the icon of the box displayed as the notice icon YI is An animation effect that vibrates with a rattle is being performed. By this animation presentation, it is told that the notice icon YI may be used. Note that this animation effect is started before the first temporary stop is performed in the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be started simultaneously with the first temporary stop, or may be started after the first temporary stop. Moreover, this animation production may be started before reach production is started, may be started simultaneously with reach production, and may be started after reach production is started. Furthermore, when the box-shaped notice icon is used, this animation presentation may be an animation that is always executed or an animation that may not be executed. In addition, this animation presentation may be performed across continuous symbol variation displays. That is, it may be executed even during symbol fluctuation stop, or may be temporarily stopped during symbol fluctuation stop, and this animation effect may be started when symbol fluctuation display is started again. Alternatively, the animation effect may be started and ended within a period of one symbol variation display, and may not be executed across continuous symbol variation displays.

  In FIG. 184 (A 30-2-3), the reach state is reached, but the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates is continued, and during the reach state, this animation effect is switched to the box open animation effect The notice icon YI shown in FIG. 184 (A30-2-4) changes to a mode d which is a display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH pops out of the box. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 181 (A33).

  In addition, the effect which announces beforehand that a box opens may be performed over a reach effect like this example, and it is not necessary to straddle a reach effect. In addition, if the effect of giving notice in advance that the box will open is executed, the box of the notice icon YI may be always opened or may not be opened.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 184 (A 30-3-1) to the same figure (A 30-3-4), a modified example of the effect of giving advance notice that the box is opened is executed. In this example, the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates as squeezing indicates whether the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is near or far depending on the size of the vibration. That is, if the vibration is weak as shown in FIG. 184 (A 30-3-2), the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is far, and the timing at which the notice icon YI is used is close It changes to strong vibration as shown in -3-3). In other words, the vibration becomes larger as the use timing approaches. In FIG. 184 (A 30-3-4), when the vibration is maximized, the box of the notice icon YI is opened, and the notice display YH pops out from inside. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 181 (A33).

  The strength of the vibration may indicate the reliability with which the notice icon YI is used, and the advantage of the notice display contained therein. That is, the higher the reliability or the advantage, the larger the vibration may be.

  FIG. 184 (A 30-3-4 ′) shows an example in which the box of the advance notice icon YI is not opened although the vibration is maximized. As described above, in the case of the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates in a rattling direction, there may be a case in which a caster effect is performed. The notice icon YI disappears when the display of the lost design is stopped.

  Subsequently, an example in which a plurality of advance notice icons are stocked will be described.

  FIG. 185 shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using a plurality of stock notice icons stored, and the display mode of the variation icon changes FIG.

  The description here will be focused on the differences from the effect example of FIG. 180 (A1) to FIG.

  In Fig. 185 (1-1), as in Fig. 180 (A 4), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost ("Decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of decorative symbols of lost. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 185 (1-1) are both No. 179 (a) in FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. In addition, the third hold icon h13 indicating the target hold of the prefetch notice is a default display mode.

  In FIG. 185 (2) after the start of the symbol variation display, as in the case of FIG. 180 (A), the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is an aspect a of the type of pant as the opponent icon TI The icon of “box” is displayed, and the notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the appearance area AS which is the first area. Further, a stock area SS which is a second area is provided above the emergence area AS, and is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 185 (1-2). In the stock area SS in this example, a first stock position SS1, a second stock position SS2, and a third stock position SS3 are provided, and a part of the third stock position SS3 overlaps with a part of the emergence area AS. ing.

  In (185-3) of FIG. 185, as in the case of (180-1) of FIG. 180, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation of the mini game B is performed, and the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 is victorious. In FIG. 185 (i), an animation is executed to celebrate that the villager character of the variation icon h0 has won, and in FIG. 185 (i), it is displayed in the appearance area AS, FIG. 177 (a) No. shown in The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed in the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 185 (2)) in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 185 (6), as in FIG. 180 (15), the symbol variation display is finished, the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost is in the stop display (during the definite display), and the variation icon h0 is also off.

  In FIG. 185 (7) after the symbol variation display is started, the second game, mini game B, is started. Also, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 185 (7), the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. In (185) of FIG. 185, the mini-game B's rock-solid confrontation animation is performed, and the character of the villager with the fluctuation icon h0 is giving a second victory. In FIG. 185 (i), an animation is executed to celebrate that the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 has won, and in FIG. 185 (i), it is displayed in the appearance area AS, FIG. 177 (a) No. shown in The notice icon YI of “1” “box” comes out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. In the following FIG. 185 (11), the second notice icon YI of the "box" is displayed in the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 185 (2)) in the stock area SS. That is, the notice icon YI newly stocked is displayed under the notice icon YI stocked one before. The distance between the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 is a distance less than the height of one advance notice icon. In addition, the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 may not be provided, and the free space may be randomly stocked. When the first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is used (the stock area SS is released) before the third notice icon YI is stocked. Case), the third notice icon YI may be stocked at the first stock position SS1.

  In FIG. 185 (12), as in FIG. 180 (23), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed. In Fig. 185 (13), as in Fig. 180 (24), the symbol variation display as the target change is started. Anticipation of conversation as is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (14-1), a hallmark conversation image CI1 is displayed in the central region. The two notice icons YI in the stock area SS overlap from a front side to a part of the image picture CI1 of the lady. As shown in FIG. 185 (15), the first preview icon YI stocked before (the preview icon YI stocked in the first stock position SS1) is displayed after the display of the conversation image CI1 of the main character. The first notice icon YI used is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is popping out of the box. The notice display YH of this "reach" also overlaps from a front side to a part of the Tonosama's conversation image CI1. The notice display YH of "reach" at this timing is a display for giving notice that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed by the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 185 (16), the conversation announcement is updated as in FIG. 180 (26). In the preannouncement of conversation, the conversational image CI1 of the lady is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversational image CI2 of the eyebrow on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the eyebrow character. At the timing shown in FIG. 180 (A), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is not deleted yet in FIG. 185 (16), but is deleted in FIG. 185 (17). The notice display “H” of “reach” is still displayed. Even in the same figure (17), the operation effective period has not started. Thus, the first notice icon YI may be deleted before the start of the operation effective period, or may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period, and is deleted after the operation effective period is started. May be

  Eventually, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 185 (18) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period has started.

  The timing shown in FIG. 185 (i) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

  In FIG. 185 (20), as in the case of FIG. 180 (20), in response to the chance button 136 being pressed within the operation effective period, the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow is generated from the operation promotion notification It is changing to the character display of "reach it!" Which predicts that the reach production is started in the symbol variation display being done. Therefore, the same thing (that the reach effect is started with the symbol variation display currently performed) is also notified by the notice (here, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle) different from the notice display YH of “reach”. It will be. In addition, when two types of notices are given as described above, one notice may be a notice having a higher reliability than the other notice. Alternatively, occurrence of normal reach may be notified by the notice display “H” of “reach” displayed first, and occurrence of super reach may be notified in the conversation notice displayed later. By giving notice in such a time series, it may appear that the effect (reach type) is promoted. Alternatively, on the contrary, the occurrence of super reach may be notified by the notice display “H” of “reach” displayed first, and the occurrence of normal reach may be notified in the notice of the conversation displayed later. ) May appear to be demoted. However, since it is a notice about reach production within the same change, there are also cases where either is better. Also, for example, when the notice display YH gives notice of "reach" and the conversation notice displays "continuing" giving notice of the pseudo-series effect, the pseudo-series notice (for example, the pseudo-series symbol stops after the reach occurs) ) Can occur, and it is possible to give notice that the pseudo-series effect is started.

  In addition, even if the pseudo-continuous notice is performed twice by the notice display YH and the other notice within one division (the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the temporary stop for the pseudo continuous) during the symbol change display, the pseudo-run 1 It may be configured to perform only once (i.e., only one temporary stop), or may be configured to generate pseudo-trains (temporary stop occurs) the number of times the advance has been made.

  As described above, by combining the notice display YH and the notice by the other effects, it is possible to perform the promotion effect and the demotion effect within one symbol variation display. For example, in the pseudo-series effect, the promotion effect can be performed as the number of pseudo-sequences increases. For example, it is possible to give notice of the third display mode in the first change of the pseudo repeat number, and give notice of the fifth display mode in the second change of the pseudo repeat number. It should be noted that the third display mode may be notified in the second change of the pseudo run number, and further, the second display mode may be announced in the second change of the pseudo run number as a demotion effect. Good. In addition, in the case of not being a pseudo-series effect, in a single symbol variation display, it is possible to first give a notice of the third display mode and then give a notice of the fifth display mode, or conversely, first Alternatively, the fifth display mode may be notified, and then the third display mode may be notified.

  Note that the character display of the notice such as “reach it!” In the introductory conversation image CI2 is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. However, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated.

  In FIG. 185 (22), the same as in FIG. 181 (A 30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lady and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle are erased and the conversation announcement is finished, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see There is. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle may simultaneously disappear, or the conversation image CI1 of the honor displayed on the far side may disappear first, or the whistle displayed on the near side The conversation image CI2 of may disappear first.

  In FIG. 185 (23), as the advance notice, reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” swings and fluctuates in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Before long, in the reach state, the second stocked notice icon YI is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 185 (24), the box of the notice icon YI is opened, and the notice display YH of “change” pops out of the box. In this example, the notice icons YI are used in the order in which the notice icons YI are stocked, but the notice icons YI may be used regardless of the stock order. For example, the notice icon YI in which the notice display YH having a high degree of advantage appears may be used earlier or later. Also, the higher the degree of reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI may be used earlier or may be used later. In addition, here, the notice display YH of the “change” that has appeared is a temporary stop right symbol (here, it overlaps with “decoration 6”, and it is difficult to view compared to the case where it does not overlap. The notice display YH of the “change” is overlapped from the front to the right symbol. This is not the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1, but the second stock position SS2. It is related that it is the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon Y2 being stocked.

  In FIG. 185 (25), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display “H” of “change” is still displayed. In the following FIG. 185 (26), the variation icon change animation using the advance notice YH is started. In FIG. 185 (i), the notice display “H” of “change” changes to a ball YHb of light while overlapping with the temporarily stopped right symbol. In FIG. 185 (i), the light ball YHb flies with the fluctuating icon h0 and strikes the fluctuating icon h0. Also here, the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH has been released affects the light ball YHb at a position different from the example shown in FIG. 181 (34) to FIG. 35 (35). The trajectory is flying with a fluctuating icon h0 aiming at it. However, even if the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH is released is different, the notice display YH is released at the same position (for example, the position of the notice display YH of “change” shown in FIG. It may be changed to a light ball YHb at the position, and may fly with the same trajectory with the fluctuating icon h0.

  In FIG. 185 (i), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 which is the default display mode before the start of the animation after the fluctuation icon change animation ends is No. FIG. It has changed to the display mode of the white blink described in 2. That is, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the normal notice. Thereafter, the flow continues to FIG. 185 (16).

  In the example shown in FIG. 185, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to give notice that the reach effect is performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but from the symbol variation display where the reach effect is not started Even in the case of the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be finally determined and displayed, and as a result, the notice display Y of "reach" is not displayed as a result than the symbol variation display In the case of the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed.

  FIG. 186 is a view showing a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 185 and an example of the effect of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 186 (14-2 1) to FIG. 18 (14-2-3), the state shown in FIG. 186 (14-2-1) corresponds to FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 186 (14-2-2), the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI to be used. Here, the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 185 (2)). The display of the cursor CS is also overlapped from the front on the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

  In FIG. 186 (14-2-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS 1, which the display of the cursor CS pointed to then, is opened. The notice display YH of "reach" is jumping out from inside.

  The box of the notice icon YI may be opened by the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the operation promotion notification image for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 may be displayed or may not be displayed and may be the back button. Further, the player can select the notice icon YI by operating the display position of the cursor CS with the up and down keys of the cross key 181a, and the notice icon YI selected by the cursor CS is opened by the operation of the chance button 136. You may Alternatively, the display of the cursor CS may point to the notice icon YI that is not used. In addition, the cursor CS may or may not be displayed. In this case, if the cursor CS is displayed rather than displayed, then the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed, or conversely, the big hit symbol may not be finally displayed. It does not matter if there is a difference between the two. Thereafter, the flow continues to FIG. 185 (16).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 186 (14-3 1) to FIG. 18 (14-3-3), the state shown in FIG. 186 (14-3-1) corresponds to FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 186 (FIG. 14-3-2), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed and point to both of the notice icons YI. As a result, it is not clear which notice icon YI will be used first.

  In FIG. 186 (No. 14-3-3), the display of the two cursors CS both disappear and the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 is opened, and the notice of “reach” is made from the box Display YH is jumping out.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 186 (14-4-1) to the same diagram (14-4-3), the state shown in FIG. 186 (14-4-1) is the same as FIG. 185 (14-1). In the state shown in FIG. 186 (FIG. 14 (4-14-2)), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed and point to both of the notice icons YI. In this example, as shown in FIG. 186 (or 14-4-3), after both displays of the two cursors CS have disappeared, the display of the two cursors CS so far indicated both warning icons YI. The box opens, and the notice indicator YH of "reach" pops out from the box of the notice icon YI stocked in the first stock position SS1, and is stocked in the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 185 (2)). From the box of the notice icon YI, the notice display "H" of "Change" has popped out. The boxes of both notice icons YI may be opened at the same time, may be opened in the order of stock, and may be opened earlier or later when the notice display YH having a high degree of advantage appears. Also, the higher the reliability according to the type of the notice icon YI, the earlier it may be opened or it may be opened later. After that, the notice display YH of "reach" is erased as shown in FIG. 185 (20), while the notice display YH of "change" is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 185 (26). It changes to ball YHb of the light while it is in the overlapping state. After that, the variation icon change animation ends, and the display manner of the variation icon h0, which was the default display manner before the start of the animation, is No. 179 (a) in FIG. It has changed to the display mode of the white blink described in 2. Note that the end of the variation icon change animation may be earlier than the deletion of the "reach" notice display YH, may be simultaneously deleted, or may be later deleted.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 186 (1-2-1) to FIG. 186-1 (1-2-4), the maximum stock number of the advance notice icon YI is described.

  In FIG. 186 (1-2-1), the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is the upper limit of four, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Among these holding icons, for example, the third holding is the pre-reading notice target holding, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are all icons that can participate in the mini game (icon of villager character) Has changed. The maximum stock number of the advance notice icon YI is “3” (maximum hold number−1), which is less than 4 which is the maximum hold number of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. However, it may be the same number as the maximum number of pending in special figure 1 or 2 or even the same number as the total number of the maximum number of pending in special figure 1 and the maximum number of pending in special figure 2 The number may be good (e.g., 8) or one less than the total number. Also, it may be more than the maximum number of holdings or more than the total number.

  In FIG. 186 (1-2-2), the mini game B is won in a state where two advance notice icons YI have been obtained. As a result, as shown in FIG. 186 (1-2-3), the third notice icon YI comes out of the appearance area AS and is temporarily displayed large. In this state, the third enlarged notice icon YI is overlapped from the front with the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2. As a result, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 is difficult to visually recognize for a moment. However, by setting the position of the notice icon YI coming out of the appearance area AS to a position separated from the second stock position SS2, it is made not to overlap the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2. It can also be done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (1-2-4), the first stock position SS1, the second stock position SS2, and the third stock position SS3 provided in the stock area SS (FIG. 185 (FIG. 185). A notice icon YI is displayed on each of them. A part of the notice icon YI displayed in the third stock position SS3 shown in FIG. 186 (1-2-4) overlaps with a part of the appearance area AS from the front side.

  On the other hand, a part of the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 186 (1-2-4 ') overlaps from a front side with a part of the notice icon YI displayed in the third stock position SS3, The lower half of the notice icon YI displayed at the position SS3 is difficult to view.

  It should be noted that the stock area SS may be provided at a position not overlapping the appearance area AS so as not to overlap the appearance area AS or to overlap the appearance area AS. For example, the stock area SS may be provided in the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  An example of the effect shown in FIG. 186 (U1) and subsequent figures is a view showing the example of the effect of the mini game A of the advance notice of Yoshimune treasure acquisition in stages.

  In FIG. 186 (1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) performs high-speed variation as in FIG. 180 (1). Also, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 179 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In Fig. 186 (う 2), as in Fig. 180 (22), there is a ball in the special figure 1 start opening 230 shown in Fig. 51 or 92, and the reserve of special figure 1 increases by one. Become one. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (2), the number-of-holds of the special view 1 is displayed as "3".

  In FIG. 186 (3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. In FIG. 181 (3), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes up to now, are both No. FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the kind of Yoshimune (bow) described in 14. The change of the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be performed before the third hold icon h13 of the target hold of the pre-notice notice is increased and displayed, or simultaneously with the increase display. It may be performed after the increase display. More specifically, before the increase animation of the third hold icon h13 is started, the change of the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 (the change of the hold icon) may be completed. The change of the hold icon may be completed simultaneously with the start of the increase animation, or the change of the hold icon may be completed after the increase animation is started. In addition, when the change of the hold icon is performed by the change animation, the change animation may be started before the increase animation is started, or the change animation may be started simultaneously with the increase animation. Then, the change animation may be started after the increase animation is started. When the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 change to an icon of the type a of Yoshimune (bow), in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. A mini game (a specific mini game (in this example, mini game A) or an unspecified mini game (in this example, mini game A, mini game B, or other mini games, etc.) is to be played You may give notice. In addition, the mini game is started simultaneously with (or immediately after) the start of the symbol variation display (in the case of this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) to start the mini game A. The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

  In FIG. 186 (4), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 186 (5), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (5), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started, and the first display in the upper right 2 In the number-of-retentions display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2". In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 178 (a) is started, and the icon AI slightly at the right end of the screen 'Is beginning to be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 186 (5), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character, which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and on the second stage hs2 so far The second reserved icon h12 of the displayed Yoshimune (bow) character starts moving toward the first stage hs1 and is the default display mode that has been displayed so far in the third stage hs3 but it is read ahead The third hold icon h13 for holding the preview target is moving toward the second stage hs2. Here, when the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the pedestal hs0 is slightly lowered. Note that the appearance animation of the mini game A icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started simultaneously, or the appearance animation of the mini game A icon may be started earlier, or vice versa. The moving animation of the hold icon may be started earlier.

  In Fig. 186 (6), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is a mode a of the Yoshimune (bow) type a (standby Icon is displayed. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of this variation icon h0 is executing standby animation (default animation). On the other hand, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon continues, and the white box image of the first display mode (FIG. 177 (a)) is displayed on the carpet on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The icon AI 'on which the notice icon YI) of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown is displayed. This icon AI 'is different from the icon AI for mini game A shown in FIG. 178 (a).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186 (7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, in FIG. 186 (G7), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI '. Ru. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is empty (state of 0).

  The appearance animation of the icon for mini game A is continued also in Fig. 186 (8), and here, the hit point (HP) is displayed as a part of the appearance animation on the empty meter display MTh added earlier The animation to be displayed is executed. In FIG. 186 (A8), although slight, blue gauge gag begins to be visible. As described with reference to FIG. 178 (b), the color of the gauge changes according to the number of points of HP. Since the animation here is a blue gauge from the beginning, it can be seen at the stage of seeing the color of the gauge that the HP has 60 points or more. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the icon AI for the mini game A includes the aspect a in which the gauge is full, the aspect b in which the gauge is half, and the aspect c in which the gauge is only a little. And since there is only aspect d, it can be expected that the gauge will increase to full when the blue gauge gag is seen. Here, after the display of the HP is completed (after the increase of the gauge stops), the color of the gauge may be changed to a color according to the number of points of the HP, in accordance with the increase of the gauge, The color of the gauge may then be represented in a color according to the number of points at that time. In FIG. 186 (A9), the blue gauge gag has increased to half, and in FIG. 186 (A10), the blue gauge gag has increased to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, which completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, in this example, the “box” icon of aspect a has appeared as the icon AI for mini game A.

  In (186) of FIG. 186, the character mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variation icon h0 is changed to the mode b holding the bow, and the character mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first holding icon h11 It is changed to a mode b with a bow slightly different from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0. In FIG. 186 (12), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 both shoot arrows and change to aspect c.

  In FIG. 186 (U13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of variation icon h0, which was close to icon AI for mini game A, is stuck in the carpet, and Yoshimune (bow) of first reserved icon h11 The arrow fired by the character of is flying towards the carpet. In FIG. 186 (う 14-1), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the 1-hold icon h11 is also stuck in the carpet, and both arrows hit the carpet wonderfully.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram gradually showing a continuation of the example production of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

  In FIG. 187 (FIG. 18-1) continued from FIG. 186 (FIG. 14-1), damage calculation is performed, and the damage is 60 points due to the two arrows being stuck. In FIG. 187 (う 15-1), damage point notification (the numeral “60”) is displayed, and in FIG. 187 (う 16), the blue gauge gag which is full (100 points) is reduced. I'm starting. In addition, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the display of the damage point notification starts to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 187 (17), the gauge gag is reduced to the remaining 40 points. The color of the gauge gag changes from blue to green until it reaches 50 points or less. In addition, you may start the damage calculation when the arrow bites into the carpet. That is, the damage gag may be reduced by starting the damage calculation at the timing of FIG. 186 (13) when the first arrow hit the carpet.

  Both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 that has fired the arrow and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 continue to be displayed as aspect c, but change to the aspect of standby a May be

  In FIG. 187 (No. 18), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6” — “decoration 4” — The "decorative 1" is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost.

  FIG. 187 (No. 19) is in stop display (fixed display), and the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 gradually enters the pedestal hs0. It will disappear. Also in FIG. 187 ((20)), the stop display is in progress (the final display is in progress), and the fluctuation icon h0 has completely disappeared.

  In FIG. 187 (う 21), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (う 21), the first decorative symbol remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started. When the symbol variation display is started, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a (default). Then, in FIG. 187 (A22), the moving animation of the holding icon is started, and the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character, which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is a variation icon display area Starting to move to the pedestal CIS pedestal hs0, the second display icon h12 in the default display mode, which has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far, is the default reserved display pending notice target h12 toward the first stage hs1 It has started moving. Further, in the second number-of-holds display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (Au 22), the number of holdings in the special view 1 is reduced by one to “1”.

  Also in FIG. 187 (B), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon is ended, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) is displayed as the change icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 187 (う 24), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the figure (う 25), the mode of the character of the Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 Is changing to the aspect b which held the bow. In (187) of FIG. 187, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of variation icon h0 fires an arrow and changes to mode c. In Fig. 187 (う 27), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 is stuck in the carpet, the damage calculation is performed, and in the figure (う 28), the damage point notification ("40 The green gauge gag, which was the remaining 40 points, began to decrease, and it changes from green to red from that point when it became 20 points or less. ing. In addition, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification starts to thin and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 187 (う 30), it decreases to 0 point, and the gauge gag disappears. Thus, the hit points (HP), which were initially 100 points in the mini game A start, have been successfully reduced to 0 points, and a treasure (preliminary icon) can be acquired. Note that the number of damage dealt may exceed the number of remaining HP points.

  In FIG. 187 (u 31), the icon AI for mini game A in which the meter display MTh has become 0 is covered by the effect image EF5, and in FIG. 187 (ii), the effect image EF5 disappears. Icon AI is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (33), when the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. 32), for the mini game A of the mode d. The icon AI has the No. shown in FIG. 177 (a). It changes to notice icon YI of mode a of "a box" of 1, and notice icon YI of mode a which the box closed is displayed on stock field SS as shown in Drawing 187 (34).

  Finally, in FIG. 187 (35), the symbol variation display is finished, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a combination of the lost decorative symbols in the central region (“decor 4” — “decor 4”) "-" "Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost.

  Figures 187 (36) through (36) are in stop display (during fixed display), and the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 is It gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. Also here, the pedestal hs0, which had been slightly lowered, has been rising towards its original height. Also in FIG. 187 (FIG. 38), the stop display is in progress (during the final display), the fluctuation icon h0 completely disappears, and the pedestal hs0 is returned to the original height. The notice icon YI stocked in the stock area SS is displayed without being used. Subsequently, the process continues to FIG. 180 (24). In this example, the hit points are not recovered (for example, the remaining hit points are 40 in FIG. 187 (17) and the remaining hit points are 40 in (21) to (24)). , Hit points may be recovered. For example, the hit point may be recovered when the next symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 188 is a view showing up to the middle of the first to third modified examples of the effect example of FIG. 186 (1) to FIG. 187 (38).

  The first modified example is an example of acquiring a notice icon once, and is the same up to FIG. 186 (14-1). In FIG. 188 (報 知 15-2-1), although the damage point notification is displayed originally, it is not displayed here, and in the same figure (う 15-2-2), the meter display MTh is full. The icon AI for mini game A of the state aspect a is covered by the effect image EF5, the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for mini game A of the state d is displayed in FIG. There is. That is, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are omitted, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is displayed at once. Of the damage point notification display and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases, only the damage point notification display may be omitted, or only the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases may be omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 188 (Fig. 15-2-4), when the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see the same figure (Fig. 15-2-3)), the aspect The icon AI for the mini game A of d is the same as the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It changes to notice icon YI of mode a of "a box" of 1, and notice icon YI of mode a which the box closed is displayed on stock field SS as shown in Drawing 188 (a 15-2-5).

  Eventually, in FIG. 188 (う 15-2-6), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decor 6”) -The "decoration 4"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 188 (No. 15-2-7), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 188 (No. 15-2-7), the first decorative symbol remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started. When the symbol variation display is started, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a (default). Then, in FIG. 188 (う 15-2-8), the moving animation of the holding icon has been started, and the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character, which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is The second display icon h12 in the default display mode, which has been displayed on the second stage hs2 until now, has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, but the first hold It has started moving toward hs1. In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is started again, and the icon AI 'is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen.

  Even in FIG. 188 (15-15), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and a variation icon h0 of the type of Yoshimune (bow) The icon of mode a (the mode of standby) is displayed. Further, in the second number-of-holds display at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 188 (No. 15-2-9), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “1”. Furthermore, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon continues, and the white box image of the first display mode (FIG. 177 (a)) is displayed on the carpet on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The icon AI 'on which the notice icon YI) of the aspect a of the "box" of No. 1 shown is displayed. In FIG. 188 (う 15-2-10), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed on the icon AI ′. Be done. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is empty (state of 0). Even in FIG. 188 (15-2-11), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and here, in the empty meter display MTh added earlier, as a part of the appearance animation, hit points The animation for displaying (HP) is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, which completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, here too, the “box” icon of aspect a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

  In (188-2) of FIG. 188, the character mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a mode b in which the bow is held, and then Yoshimune (the first hold icon h11). The bow is fired from the bow character. In FIG. 188 (No. 15-2-13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is stuck in the carpet, and here too, the display of the damage point notification and the gauge gag decrease. In FIG. 188 (Fig. 15-2-14), the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect a in which the meter display MTh is full is covered with the effect image EF5 in FIG. In 15-2-15), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d is displayed at once.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (Fig. 15-2-16), when the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see the same figure (Fig. 15-2-3)), the aspect The icon AI for the mini game A of d is the same as the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the embodiment a with the box closed is changed to the notice icon YI of the embodiment a of the “box” of 1 as shown in FIG. 188 ((15-2-17). It is displayed under the notice icon YI stocked earlier in 5). Thus, continuously, one shot of the notice icon is successfully obtained, and two notice icons YI are stocked.

  In the second modified example shown in FIG. 188 (15-2-2b1) to FIG. 8 (-15-2-2b5), the same applies to FIG. 186 (14-1). The modification example here is also an example of acquiring one shot of the advance notice icon, but in this example, display of damage point notification and animation display of decreasing gauge gag are also executed without omission. In FIG. 188 (う 15-2-2b1), damage point notification (red number “100”) is displayed. Also, in FIG. 188 ((15-2-2b2), the blue gauge gag which was full (100 points) starts to decrease, the gauge gag is reduced to the remaining 50 points, and the color of the gauge gag is The green gauge gag continues to decrease, changing from blue to green. In addition, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the display of the damage point notification starts to fade and gradually disappears.

  A notice may be given by the display of damage point notification or the color of the carpet. For example, if the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow color, even if the notice icon on the carpet is not the notice icon of the "rainbow box", the notice icon of the "rainbow box" can be acquired, From the characteristics of the notice icon of "rainbow box", the big hit of the prefetch target change is determined. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow color may be a big hit decision. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red), the probability of acquiring the notice icon may be higher than when the display color is the default color. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red) may be more likely to be a big hit than the symbol variation display when it is the default color. Moreover, the same may be said of the case of the color of a carpet.

  In FIG. 188 (1515-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to 20 points, and the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, and the red gauge gag continues to decrease further. Also, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing.

  In FIG. 188 (1515-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to 20 points, and the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, and the red gauge gag continues to decrease further. Also, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 188 (う 15-2-2b4), it decreases to 0 point, and the gauge gag disappears.

  When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 188 (15-2-2b5), and thereafter, FIG. 188 (15-2-3), etc. And the advance notice icon YI can be acquired.

  188 (第 15-3-1) to the same figure (う 15-3-3) in the third modification are the same as FIG. 188 (1 15-2-1) to the same figure (例 15) in the first modification. Same as -2-3). In the third modified example, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is started again earlier than the first modified example, without waiting for the start of the next change. That is, as shown in FIG. 188 (15-3-4), when the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the icon for the mini game A to be played in the next change is The appearance animation is started again, and the icon AI 'is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen. Then, in FIG. 188 (No. 15-3-5), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS is white in the first display mode on the carpet. An icon AI ′ is displayed on which a box image (the notice icon YI of the aspect a of the “box” of No. 1 shown in FIG. 177 (a)) is displayed. The stock display of the advance notice icon YI and the entire display of the icon AI 'may be the same, or the stock display may be faster, or conversely, the entire display may be faster. The meter display MTh is added to the icon AI 'after the start of the next change.

  Eventually, in FIG. 188 (No. 15-3-6), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6” -The "decoration 4"-"decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  FIG. 189 is a view showing the continuation of the third modification example of the effect example of FIG. 186 (c) to FIG. 187 (c) and the middle of the fourth to fifth modification examples.

  In FIG. 189 (15-3-7), which is a continuation of the third modified example, the change icon h0 which is in the stop display (during the final display) and is the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) completely disappears. There is.

  In the next figure fluctuation display is started in Fig. 189 (う 15-3-8), the meter display MTh of the HP in the empty state is additionally displayed on the icon AI ' In the), the animation that HP is displayed is executed on the empty meter display MTh, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. The subsequent flow is the same as that shown in FIG. 188 (15-2-12).

  189 (第 15-4-1) in the fourth modification to FIG. 189 (う 15-4-5) are the same as FIG. 188 (う 15-3-1) in the third modification. Same as -3-5). In the fourth modified example, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is executed a plurality of times within one pattern variation display, and a plurality of mini game A icons AI appear. The number of appearances of the mini game A icon AI may be limited to the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number. However, if the above-mentioned maximum stock number is exceeded, before obtaining a new notice icon YI, the stock notice icon YI which has been stocked is used or a mini game A of cassette is performed, and a new notice icon YI is performed. Can not earn.

  In Fig. 188 (う 15-4-6), HP indicator display MTh in the empty state is additionally displayed in new icon AI 'in the symbol variation display in which one notice icon YI has already been acquired, and so on. In FIG. 188 (う 15-4-7), an animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to full. The symbol variation display is still continuing, and in FIG. 188 (Fig. 15-4-8), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0, which was the aspect c up to now, is also Yoshimune (bow The character of) also changes to the mode b holding a bow together, and is aiming at the carpet of the icon AI for a new mini game A. In the fourth variation, a plurality of attacks can be performed in one symbol variation display. For example, the same mini game A icon AI can be attacked multiple times. However, even if multiple attacks can be made, the same icon AI for mini game A may be attacked only once.

  Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two characters, and in FIG. 188 (Fig. 15-4-9), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (the bow) of the variation icon h0 is also Yoshimune (the first reserved icon h11). Arrows fired from the bow character were also stuck in the carpet, damage was calculated, damage point notification (number "40") was displayed, and it was full (100 points). The blue gauge gag is beginning to decrease in the figure (Fig. 15-4-10). In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 188 (う 15-4-1), the color of the gauge gag remains blue and decreases to 60 points. Here, before the meter display MTh decreases to 0 point, as shown in FIG. 188 (15-4-1), the symbol variation display ends, but the meter display MTh becomes 0 point, It is also possible to obtain the second notice icon YI. In addition, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 following FIG. 188 (15-4-12), the mini game A is continuing, and it is possible to obtain the second notice icon . In the same manner as described for the appearance number of the mini game A icon AI, the acquisition number of the notice icon YI can be variously set based on the maximum stock number. That is, the number of acquisitions of the notice icon YI may be limited to the maximum stock number, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number.

  The fifth modified example is an example in which a dedicated area of the mini game A is prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 ((1-2-1)), the background screen, which has been omitted from the illustration so far, is displayed. This background screen is a background screen of the sea. In FIG. 189 ((1-2-1)), as in FIG. 186 ((1)), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. Also, a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 179 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In Fig. 189 (う 1-2-1), as in Fig. 186 (う 2), there is an entering ball in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 shown in Fig. 51 or 92, and the reserve of special figure 1 There will be three in all. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (う 1-2-1), the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”.

  In FIG. 189 (FIG. 1-2-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is a hold icon of a display mode not shown in FIG. 179 (a). That is, it is a display mode (VS display mode) in which characters are displayed as VS, and is a display mode for giving notice that mini game A is to be played in symbol variation display corresponding to suspension before suspension of the suspension icon of this display mode. It is. That is, when the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the VS display mode, the mini game A is executed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold and / or the second hold. In addition, when the holding icon of VS display mode is displayed, the mini game A may be always performed or may not be performed. In addition, the hold of the hold icon of the VS display mode becomes the target hold of the prefetch notice, and the VS display mode is also a kind of the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 189 (FIG. 1-2-4), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 189 (う 1-2-5), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (う 1-2-5), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started , In the second display of the number of reservations on the upper right, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to "2".

  Also in FIG. 189 (う 1-2-6), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in this FIG. 189 (う 1-2-6), the animation of the exclusive area appearance of the mini game A Has been started. That is, when the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is started, the effect image EF6 of the flame is displayed in the effect display area 208d in which the holding frame UI was displayed, and the holding icon is also obscured by the effect image EF6. It is done. In FIG. 189 (う 1-2-7), the flame effect image EF6 becomes thin, and icons and the like in the back of the effect image EF6 begin to be faintly visible.

  In FIG. 189 (う 1-2-8), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 completely disappears, and the effect display area 208 d is a mini game instead of the holding frame UI. A dedicated area MSS has appeared. In the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A shown in FIG. 189 (う 1-2-8), icons YMI1 and YMI2 of two Yoshimune (bows) are displayed. Both of these two icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in the mode a (the mode of standby). Further, at the right end of the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A, an icon AI 'with a notice icon on the carpet is displayed, and further, a dedicated area of meter display MTh of hit points (HP) is provided. The meter display MTh is displayed in the area. In the meter indication MTh shown in FIG. 189 (1 1-2-8), the blue gauge gag is full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (う 1-2-9), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game A is started in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. The mini game A may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the mini game A may be started after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the first decoration The mini game A may be started before the variable display of symbols is started. When the mini game A is started, the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with the mini game opening image. The mini game opening image is a translucent image, and the mini game match card is character-displayed (here, “Yoshimune VS vs. carpet”).

  In FIG. 189 (う 1-2-10), the mini game opening image disappears, and in the same figure (う 1-2-11), Yoshimune (bows) of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2 which have been aspect a so far The characters both change to the mode b holding a bow and aim at the carpet of the icon AI for mini game A. Here, the more the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow), the more likely the mini game A will be played in the next change. In this example, since two icons of Yoshimune (bow) are displayed, there is a high possibility that the mini game A will be played even at the next change than when only one icon of Yoshimune (bow) is displayed. . In addition, the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow) may represent the degree of expectation that the advance notice icon Yi can be obtained. That is, the more the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow), the higher the degree of expectation for acquiring the notice icon Yi.

  Alternatively, the number of icons of Yoshimune (bow) may correspond to the number of pending icons prior to the pending icon of the VS display mode. That is, if the number of pending icons prior to the pending icon of the VS display mode is 3, the number of icons of Yoshimune (bows) is also three, and as in this example, it is prior to the pending icon of the VS display mode If there are two pending icons, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons will also be two. Also, for one icon of Yoshimune (bow), the number of possible confrontations is determined according to the number of pending icons prior to the pending icon in the VS display mode, like one carpet or one attack. The number may be displayed on the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A.

  Soon, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 189 (う 1-2-12), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, the damage is calculated, and the damage point notification The numeral 40) is displayed, and the blue gauge gag which is full (100 points) is beginning to decrease in the same figure ((1-2-13).

  FIG. 190 is a view showing the continuation of the fifth modified example of the effects shown in FIGS. 186 (1) to 187 (38) and the effect example in which the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted.

  In FIG. 190 (う 1-2-14), which is a continuation of the fifth modification, a semi-transparent advance notice image such as “follows the next change” because one attack during one pattern change display is finished. Is displayed. The dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with this notice image. Note that this preview image may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 190 (で は 1-2-15), the notice image disappears, and in FIG. 190 ((1-2-16), the symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost (“decoration 6” — “decoration”) 4 "-" decorative 1 ") is displayed stopped.

  Fig. 190 (1 1-2-17) is in the stop display (during the final display), and the arrow stuck from the carpet disappears, and even in the same drawing (領域 1-2-18), the first decoration of the central region is displayed. The symbol still remains stopped, but the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (う 1-2-18), variable display is started on the second decorative symbol on the upper left.

  Thereafter, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 190 (う 1-2-19), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, and in the following FIG. 190 (う 1-2-20) In the meter display MTh shown, it decreases to 0 point, and the gauge gag disappears. When the meter display MTh becomes 0, as shown in FIG. 190 (う 1-21), the icon AI for mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5. In FIG. 190 (FIG. 1-22), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for mini game A of the mode d is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 190 (う 1-2-23), when the icon AI for mini game A in the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (1-2-2) in the same figure). , The icon AI for a mini game A of the aspect d is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the aspect a of the “box” 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the aspect a in which the box is closed, as shown in FIG. 190 (1 1-2-24). In addition, when stocking of the notice icon YI is completed, the dedicated game disappearing animation of the mini game A is started. That is, when the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 gradually appears in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. In FIG. 190 (う 1-2-24), the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is covered by the translucent flame effect image EF6, and in the same figure (う 1-2-25), the effect of the flame It is obscured by the image EF6. It should be noted that the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started before the stocking of the advance notice icon YI is completed. For example, immediately after the mini game A icon AI of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started. In addition, the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A may be started simultaneously with the completion of stocking of the notice icon YI.

  In FIG. 190 (う 1-2-26), the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 completely disappears, and the dedicated display area MSS of the mini game A appears in the effect display area 208 d. It is back to the previous configuration. That is, the holding frame UI is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The variation icon h0 of the default display mode corresponds to the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 189 (う 1-2-3) to FIG. 189 (う 1-2-5). Further, in the first stage hs1 of the variation icon display area CIS, the first holding icon h11 of the default display mode is displayed. The first suspension icon h11 of this default display mode is the third suspension icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode shown in FIG. 189 (う 1-2-3) to FIG. 189 (う 1-2-5). It corresponds to The first hold icon h11 corresponding to the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode may be displayed as it is in the VS display mode, or any icon among blue to rainbow colors. It may be displayed in an aspect.

  Note that the hold (fourth hold) after the third hold icon h13 displayed in the VS display mode becomes the target hold of the prefetch notice, and is stored as shown in FIG. 190 (う 1-2-26). The notice icon YI may be used during symbol variation display of the fourth hold. In addition, the second hold icon h12 may be displayed in the VS display mode, and the mini game may be played until the second hold symbol change display is being performed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 190 (1 1-2-27), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decor 4”) -The "decoration 4"-"decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left also is halted and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  Next, an example of effect that the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

  In FIG. 190 (E1-1), the icon AI for mini game A of mode d is displayed. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 is an icon of a character of Yoshimune (bow), but the first holding icon h11 is an icon of a default display mode. In this modification as well, the hold of the first hold icon h11 is a prefetch notice hold. In addition, the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 190 (E2), the notice icon YI changed from the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is stocked in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI stocked here is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. 177 (a). It is a notice icon of mode a of 1 "box". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the symbol variation display is finished, and the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7"). The stop display is also displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also displayed with stop showing the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 190 (e3), the hold which has been the first hold so far is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (e3), the first decorative symbol remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started. Then, the movement animation of the holding icon is started, and in FIG. 190 (F4), the first holding icon h11 of the Yoshimune (bow) character which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 ing. The character of Yoshimune (bow) that has become the variation icon h0 is changed from the mode c to the mode a (default).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (F5), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is started. The mini game here is slightly different from the mini game A described so far, and a notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI in which a target icon is hanging on a parachut appears. In FIG. 190 (E6), the icon YSI dedicated to advance notice icon promotion in which the target icon hangs on the umbrella has fallen from the upper right of the screen, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. , Changing to a mode b holding a bow, aiming at a target icon, and eventually, an arrow is fired from a character of Yoshimune (bow). In FIG. 190 (E8), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is finalized. In FIG. 190 (e9), the letter “Lv. UP” notifying of the confirmation of the promotion is displayed next to the icon YSI dedicated to promoting the advance notice. In addition, the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 may or may not always hit the target icon of the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI. .

  In FIG. 190 (F), when the notice icon YI displayed as a stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is the No. 1 shown in FIG. No. 1 shown in FIG. It is promoted to the notice icon of 2 "red box" (Fig. 190 (e. 11)).

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 190 (F12), the icon YSI for exclusive use of the notice icon promotion disappears, and in the same figure (F. 13), the promoted notice icon YI is used. That is, when used, the notice icon YI of the "red box" of the mode a which is a closed display mode changes to the mode d which is a display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH An animation that pops up is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 7 is a notice display of the red "red change" of 7, and is a display for giving notice that the display mode such as the hold icon or the change icon is changed in two steps.

  In FIG. 190 (F), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the variation icon change animation using the notice display YH of red “change in red” is started. In FIG. 190 (F14), the notice display YH of red “change in red” is changed to the ball YHb of light.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of effects in which the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted and a modification of the example of effects.

  In FIG. 190 (e 15) continued from FIG. 190 (e 14), the ball YHb of light in which the notice display YH of the red "red change" has changed is changed icon h0 which is the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow) The flying icon h0 strikes the fluctuating icon h0, the fluctuating icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF8, and when the effect image EF8 disappears, the fluctuating icon h0 becomes the No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (a). It has changed to the "green" fluctuation icon of 4 (Fig. 190 (16 16)).

  In this example, the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is performed, but a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may be performed together. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

  Also, in this example, a dedicated icon such as the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI appears, but the hold icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon. It may be. Furthermore, an icon for acquiring a notice icon such as the mini game icon AI may be changed to an icon for promoting a notice icon. In addition, the appearance of the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI becomes a notice for giving notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself for promoting the notice icon YI also gives notice that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the effect to do. Then, here, the effect of giving notice that the notice icon may be promoted is executed using the change icon h0, but even if there is a case where a notice is given using something other than the change icon h0 and the hold icon You may or may not give notice.

  Next, a modified example of the effect example in which the stocked advance notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-1), the icon AI for mini game A of mode d is displayed. Both the variation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are icons of characters of Yoshimune (bow). The hold of the first hold icon h11 is a prefetch notice hold. In addition, the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 191 (e 1-2-2), the symbol variation display continues, and the notice icon YI of the aspect a of “box” changed from the icon AI for the mini game A of the aspect d is stocked in the stock area SS. It is done.

  In FIG. 191 (e 1-2-3), the special figure 1 starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 92 has a ball, and the suspension of the special figure 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (e 1-2-3), the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is displayed as “2”.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-4), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 representing the increased second hold is a display mode of a character of Yoshimune (bow). In addition, when the mini game which acquires a notice icon is performed to the symbol variation display currently performed, the character of the Yoshimune (bow) of this 2nd holding icon h12 may be made unusable, and it may be contrary. It may be used for That is, during the symbol variation display where there is a pending increase, the use of the increased pending icon may or may not be prohibited from being used in the mini game for acquiring the advance notice icon.

  In FIG. 191 (e 1-2-5), the symbol variation display is ended without using the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is lost in the central region, The combination of the decorative designs ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also halts and displays the same combination of the lost decorative designs. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared.

  In FIG. 191 (E1-2-6), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (e 1-2-6), the first decorative symbol remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started. Then, the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 191 (E1-2-7), the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is the default display mode It is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (え 1-2-8), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also started in this modification. In FIG. 191 (No. 1-2-9), the icon YSI dedicated to promoting the advance of the notice icon in which the target icon hangs on the falling umbrella has fallen from the upper right of the screen, and this modification (shown in (E 1-2-10)) In the example, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b in which the bow is held, and targets the target icon. In Fig. 191 (E 1-2-11), an arrow is fired from the character of the holding icon Yoshimune (bow), and in the same E (E 1-2-12), the fired arrow faces the target icon I'm flying. In FIG. 191 (E 1-2-13), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is finalized. In FIG. 191 (E1-2-14), the letter “Lv.UP” notifying of the confirmation of the promotion is displayed next to the icon YSI dedicated to advance notice icon promotion, and FIG. 191 (E 1-2-15) Then, when the notice icon YI displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI is promoted from the previous “box” to the notice icon of “red box” (FIG. 191 (E1-2-16)).

  In FIG. 191 (え 1-2-17), reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” is fluctuating in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Before long, the notice icon YI promoted to “red box” is used in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 191 (F1-2-18), the box of the notice icon YI is opened, and the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice display YH of 19 "VS Kenshi reach" comes out. The notice display YH of “VS Ken-Oh reach” is a face icon of a character of the Ken-Au, and it is a display for anticipating that the super reach production of VS-Ken-Oh reach will be performed by the displayed variation. In FIG. 191 (E1-2-19), although the used notice icon YI disappears, the notice display YH of “VS Kenshi reach” is still displayed.

  In Fig. 191 (E 1-2-20), the notice display YH for "VS Kengo reach" has disappeared, but at the same time as the notice display YH disappears, super reach production of VS Kengo reach is started as the notice . In addition, when notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" is displayed, super reach production of VS swordsman reach may always be started or may not be started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (E1-2-21), the image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed large, and the first decoration shown in the same figure (E 1-2-2) follows. On the symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy character swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is all hidden (disappears) except the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear but continues to be displayed on the top board that has remained. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display continue to be displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be erased or, conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 191 (E 1-2-23), “decoration 5” as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene where Yoshimune has lost. In the following FIG. 191 (E 1-2-24), the same effect as the wipe effect described using FIG. 134 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. 134 (A 14-2-5) is performed. As shown in (E1-2-24), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L temporarily becomes a wipe display of a non-pattern same color. By this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. Also, the model title is displayed at the left corner. The variation icon h0 may be displayed.

  At 143 (E 1-2-25), the wipe-out, the background is usually returned to the background, and the first holding icon h11, which is the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow), is also returned to the default display mode . However, until the first holding icon h11 is digested, the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character may be displayed, or the display mode may change at another timing.

  At 143 (E1-2-26), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".

  Also in this modification, a mini game may be additionally performed to further obtain the advance notice icon. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

  Also in this modification, the hold icon may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon or the change icon may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon. Furthermore, an icon for acquiring a notice icon such as the mini game icon AI may be changed to an icon for promoting a notice icon. In addition, the appearance of the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI becomes a notice for giving notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself for promoting the notice icon YI also gives notice that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the effect to do. Then, in this modification, although the effect of giving notice that the notice icon may be promoted is executed using the hold icon, there is a case where a notice is given using other than the change icon h0 and the hold icon. You may also give notice.

  FIG. 192 is a view gradually showing an example of an effect in which the notice display YH of the button appears from the notice icon YI.

  In FIG. 192 (a1), the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a1), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start variable display, and a default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. In addition, there is no hold icon, and "0" is displayed for the 2nd number-of-holds display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 for both. Also, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 192 (a2), the first notice icon YI stocked in advance (the notice icon YI stocked in the first stock position) is used, and the box for the first notice icon YI is opened. The display mode is changed to mode d which is the display mode shown in FIG. 177 (b) from the box. Notice display YH of 21 "buttons" has popped out. The notice display YH of this "button" is a button image imitating the chance button 136, and is a displayed symbol variation display, which is a display for giving notice that the button effect will be performed, but it may be a case, and a display Even if this is done, the button effect may not actually be performed.

  In FIG. 192 (a3), although the first notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is deleted, the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 192 (a4), the notice display YH of the “button” changes to the light ball YHb, and as shown in the same figure (a5), the light ball YHb is in the effect icon display area DIS Flying to the right end of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 192 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion. In addition, on the button image icon 136aI, the characters "in preparation" indicating that the button operation has not been received yet are displayed. Therefore, the display of the button image icon 136aI and the character "in preparation" is also a display showing that the button effect is stocked, and the button effect is performed in the symbol variation display currently being performed. It is also a display to give notice.

  In FIG. 192 (a7), reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” is fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 192 (a8), “decoration 6” that was swingingly fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decorative symbol and shifts in the right symbol display area 208c before shifting to the super reach effect. The "decoration 6" that has been fluctuating moves below the second hold number display. Next, the button image icon 136aI and the characters "in preparation", which have been displayed in the lower right corner so far, are moved to the lower left corner before shifting to the super reach effect. In FIG. 192 (a9), the button image icon 136aI and the fluctuation icon h0 overlap in the middle of movement. That is, the button image icon 136aI passes through the back side of the fluctuation icon h0. As a result, the variation icon h0 overlaps the part of the button image icon 136aI from the front side. The button image icon 136aI may pass through the time and effort side of the fluctuation icon h0 so that a part of the button image icon 136aI overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 from the front side. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the characters "under preparation" may be moved so as not to overlap the variation icon h0. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character “in preparation” may not be animated, and may be moved to the movement position instantaneously. That is, momentary switching of the display position may be performed. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 192 (a9) disappears. In FIG. 192 (a10), the movement to the lower left corner of the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode and the characters “under preparation” has been completed.

  Soon, Super Reach production is started, and VS Kenshi reach is started here. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a11) displays a large image of an enemy swordsman, and the main character appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the following figure (a12). The animation of the duel scene between Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

  In the middle of the animation of the duel scene, as shown in FIG. 192 (a13), the second notice icon YI (predicted icon YI stocked at the second stock position) which has been stocked and remained until now is displayed. Among them, No. 1 shown in FIG. 177 (b) is used. Notice display YH of 20 "UP" has jumped out. The notice display YH of “UP” is a displayed symbol variation display, and is a display for giving a notice that the effect is to be promoted. When the notice display YH of “UP” is displayed, the effect is necessarily promoted You may or may not promote. When the notice display YH of “UP” is displayed, the notice display YH is immediately used, and as shown in FIG. 192 (a14), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started. That is, when the promotion animation is started, the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) displayed in the lower left corner has the effect image EF6 'of the flame together with the characters "under preparation". Covered by and difficult to see. In FIG. 192 (a15), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6 'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the button image icon 136aI in the fifth display mode (red color). There is.

  The animation of the duel scene continues while the cut-in image CI3 or the like is displayed (FIG. 192 (a16)). In FIG. 192 (a17), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started again. In the second promotion of the button image icon 136aI, the button image icon 136aI is promoted without any notice being given. However, due to other notices, promotion may be given notice, may be given notices by all means, or may not be given notices by any means. In FIG. 192 (a17), the button image icon 136aI of the fifth display mode (red) is again covered by the flame effect image EF6 'together with the characters “under preparation” and is difficult to view. In FIG. 192 (a18), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6 'disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the lever image icon 139aI. Although the operating lever is not shown in both the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90, the operating lever is provided at a position where the player can operate. Further, in place of the operation lever, a transmitting portion 191 which can be turned in the front-rear direction shown in FIG. 58 or the like, or a second chance button 137 may be used.

  In FIG. 192 (a19), the cut-in image CI3 disappears, and the animation of the duel scene is nearing its final stage, and the time of the button presentation start is approaching. In FIG. 192 (a20), an animation in which the lever image icon 139aI is gradually enlarged is started. The lever image icon 139aI becomes a lever image 139a by this animation. When this animation is started, the characters "under preparation" disappear, and through the same figure (a21), the lever image 139a is once enlarged to the maximum in the same figure (a22). Thereafter, in FIG. 192 (a23), the lever image 139a becomes slightly smaller, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period is additionally displayed. Incidentally, at the timing shown in FIG. 192 (a23), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the lever is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 192 (a 24)). The button effect here is a kind of final judge effect. The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 192 (a25) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 192 (a26) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the operation lever 139 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 118, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and The 1st large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the 4th large-top behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the object is not overlapped by the object 224Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, the one-handed box character 224H shown in FIG. 115 operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. In addition, light emission of the light guide plate IL is also performed. The feature presentation by the one-and-two-box character 224H shown in FIG. 115 is a big hit finalization presentation.

  In addition, the effects using various roles and the like in FIG. 192 (a27) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period is not operated. It may also be executed if it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, the various prizes return to their initial positions, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL also ends, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a28), “decoration 6” as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene where Yoshimune has won. After this, the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 193 is a diagram showing the effect example in which the number of times of execution of the button effect is stocked in stages.

  In FIG. 193 (o b1), the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started, and a large image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (o b1). Also, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (o b2), an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy character swordsman is displayed. In addition, a mode in which the first notice icon YI stocked in advance (the notice icon YI stocked in the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI is a display mode in which a box is opened. It changes to d, and the notice display YH of "Button" has popped out of the box. The notice display YH of the “button” in this example of presentation is a display for giving notice that the notice display YH of the “button” is itself stocked.

  In FIG. 193 (b3), although the first notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is deleted, the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed. In the following FIG. 193 (“b4”), the notice display “H” of the “button” changes to the light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. Flying to the right end of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 192 (a6), the button image icon 136aI of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion. In addition, on the button image icon 136aI, a character “× 1” representing the number of stocks is displayed. One button effect is performed for one stock. Here, although the button image icon 136aI is stocked, in short, the number of times of execution of the button effect is stocked.

  In FIG. 193 (o b7), the second notice icon YI stocked later (the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) is used, and the notice display of the “button” is again displayed from the box. YH is jumping out. In FIG. 193 (b8), the second notice icon YI which is the display mode in which the box is opened is erased, and further, the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the light ball YHb, and the light ball YHb flies aiming at the button image icon 136aI displayed in the lower right corner and collides with the button image icon 136aI. In FIG. 193 (b9), the stock number above the button image icon 136aI is “× 3”. This means that two button image icons 136aI are stocked when the light ball YHb hits the button image icon 136aI in FIG. 193 (o b8). As described above, the notice display YH of the "button" is a display for giving a notice that the notice display YH of the "button" is stocked, and by displaying the notice display YH of the "button", Whether the button image icon 136aI is to be stocked is not notified, and in this way, a plurality of button image icons 136aI may be stocked with respect to the notice display YH of one “button”. For example, a maximum of ten button image icons 136aI may be stocked for the notice display YH of one “button”. However, it may be configured such that only one button image icon 136aI is stocked with respect to the notice display YH of one "button". Further, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI may be determined according to the display mode of the notice display YH of the “button”. For example, in the notice display YH of the "display" in the first display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1, but in the notice display YH of the "display" in the fifth display form, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI May be five. The maximum stock number of the button image icons 136aI is, for example, ten. In other words, the maximum number of stocking of the button rendering execution count is 10 times.

  In FIG. 193 (b10), it is predicted that the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI and the button effect is started. In FIG. 193 (b11), the large button image 136a is displayed. The stock number on the button image icon 136aI is reduced from "x 3" to "x 2" at this stage. After that, in FIG. 193 (b12), the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (b12), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 193 (b13)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 193 (b14) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 193 (or b15) is within the above-described operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 117, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 193 (b16), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the non-display screen, and The 1st large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the 4th large-top behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, light emission of the light guide plate IL is also performed.

  Note that the effects using various kinds of roles and the like in FIG. 193 (Ob 16) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period is not operated. It may also be executed if it has elapsed.

  In FIG. 193 (b17), each of the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd returns to the initial position, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first reach Promotion of production is being done. That is, it is predicted that the panda will participate in the battle to help the main character, Yoshimune, in VS Kenshi reach. Thus, in FIG. 193 (b18), with the panda participating, the animation of the duel scene continues, and in FIG. 193 (b19), the effect image EF9 is again added to the button image icon 136aI, and the second button It is predicted that production will begin. In FIG. 193 (b20), the second button effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed, and the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed, and a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period. ing. Further, the stock number on the button image icon 136aI is reduced from "x 2" to "x 1".

  The timing shown in FIG. 193 (b21) is within the above-mentioned operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (b22), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a gold cut-in image GCT inscribed as "Go !! Go !!" in the sixth display mode (gold). It is predicted that the jackpot's expectation is quite high.

  Note that the display of the gold cut-in image GCT in FIG. 193 (b22) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 has been operated, or the operation effective period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be performed if

  In FIG. 193 (Ob 23), the gold cut-in image GCT disappears, and the animation of the duel scene is returned to, and in the following FIG. 193 (O b24), the animation of the duel scene is approaching the final stage. In FIG. 193 (b25), the final judgment effect is started, and as a part of the final judgment effect, the large-sized default button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, in FIG. 193 (b26), it is predicted that the effect image EF9 is added three times to the button image icon 136aI, and the third button effect is started. In FIG. 193 (b27), the promotion effect of the button image 136a is performed, the effect image EF10 is added to the large default button image 136a, and in the same figure (b28), the button of the fifth display mode (red) It is promoted to image 136. By promoting the button image 136 in the fifth display mode (red), the expectation of the big hit is further enhanced. Incidentally, at the stage of FIG. 193 (b27), the display of the button image icon 136aI and the number of stocks have disappeared.

  FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of effects in which the number of times of execution of button effects is stocked, and another example of effects.

  In FIG. 194 (b29) continued from FIG. 193 (b28), the button image 136a in the fifth display mode (red) is slightly smaller, and a remaining time display meter MT is additionally displayed to indicate the remaining time of the operation valid period. There is. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (b29), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even when the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation effective period starts (FIG. 194 (b30)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 194 (b31) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 194 (b32) is within the above-mentioned operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 118, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and The 1st large-screen behavior character object 224Ga to the 4th large-top behavior character article 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-scale behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-pattern behavior character It is considered to be difficult to view as compared with the case where the object is not overlapped by the object 224Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-retentions display are also overlapped by the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga and the second large-screen behavior character 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to view. Further, the one-handed box character 224H shown in FIG. 115 operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-size behavior character 224Gd. In addition, light emission of the light guide plate IL is also performed. The feature presentation by the one-and-two-box character 224H shown in FIG. 115 is a big hit finalization presentation.

  Note that the effects using various kinds of roles and the like in FIG. 194 (or b33) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period is not performed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed if it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, the various prizes return to their initial positions, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL also ends, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (b34), “decoration 6” as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene won by Yoshimune. After this, the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  In this example, when one button image icon 136aI stocked in the lower right of the screen is consumed (used), as shown in FIG. 193 (b12) etc., the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed. An operation promotion notification image including the is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 194 (b30), the button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be promoted, but one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is digested When (used) is selected, the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen may be displayed. The button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be configured to be always promoted when it is digested (used). Also, in this example, one operation promotion notification image is displayed when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used), but operation promotion notification is performed when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used). Two or more images may be displayed or one image may be displayed, or two or more images may be displayed. Here, the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136 may be promoted in accordance with the promotion of the button image 136a of the operation promotion notification image. Alternatively, the button image 136 of the operation promotion notification image may not be promoted, and only the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may be promoted. The emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may change from the default color to red when one of the stock button image icons 136aI is digested, and may change from red to gold when two are digested. In the case of the chance button 136, although it becomes the chance button lamp 138, in the case of the operation means (for example, the operation lever 139 etc.) different from the chance button 136, the luminescent color of the light emission means for emitting those operation means Will be promoted.

  In this example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, but only the button image 136a may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the remaining time as the operation promotion notification image Only the display meter MT may be displayed, and a character indication such as “press a button”, “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, “long press” or the like (even if it is a character indication instructing the operation method) as the operation promotion notification image And the button image 136a may be displayed, only the character notation may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the character notation and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. The character notation, the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. In addition, an image (for example, button display 136a) imitating the shape of the operation means, an image showing the elapse of the operation effective period of the operation means and / or the remaining time of the operation effective period (for example, remaining) Time display meter MT), character display related to operation (for example, "press a button", "PUSH", "continuous hit", "long press") and other image display (for example, the shape of one or more "operation means" Character image display different from the image imitating (by displaying the character image as the operation prompting notification display, the displayed symbol variation display may eventually become a big hit than when it is not displayed) and the like. Image display may be displayed.

  FIG. 194 (c1) to FIG. 194 (c7) are diagrams showing the first example in which the mini game is started in response to the button operation.

  In FIG. 194 (c1), although the first decorative symbol in the central area is stopped and displayed, the movement animation of the holding icon ends, and the icon of the aspect a of the villager type (the aspect of standby) as the fluctuation icon h0 Is displayed. Also, as the first hold icon h11, an icon of a type a of the villager (a mode of standby) is displayed. Furthermore, although the second hold icon h12 is also displayed, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, an icon of the type a of the panta shown in FIG. 178 (c) (the mode of the standby) is displayed as the opponent icon for the mini game B. The panda character of the opponent icon TI also executes a standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance area AS, the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (c2), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini game B's rock-solid confrontation is started. In this example, the mini game B is played by operating the chance button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 194 (c3), between the icon of the villager character that is the fluctuating icon h0 and the icon of the panta character that is the opponent icon, which is scheduled to make a rock-collar contest An operation promotion notification image including a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 194 (c3), the operation effective period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts, and the operation effective period starts (FIG. 194 (c4)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 194 (c5) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 194 (c6) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a rock-solid confrontation starts, and a rock-solid confrontation animation is performed. In FIG. 194 (c7), the character of the villager with the fluctuation icon h0 has won. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 180 (A 9-1).

  It should be noted that the start of the jaunting confrontation may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. That is, the mini game may be started only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the mini game is started even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, but the chance button 136 In the operation valid period, it may be configured that it is easier to win the mini game, that is, it is easier to win the mini game, that is, it is easier to win the notice icon YI, when not operating.

  FIG. 194 (d1) to (d7) are diagrams showing the second example in which the mini game is started according to the button operation.

  194 (d1) to (d2) are in the same state as in FIG. 194 (c1) to (c2) except that the notice icon YI is stocked.

  In FIG. 194 (d3), the stock notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of the “button” appears from the inside. In FIG. 194 (D4), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the notice display YH of the “button” is still displayed, and in FIG. 194 (D5), the notice display YH of the “button” is It moves toward between the icon of the villager's character, which is a variation icon h0, and the icon of the Panta character, who is the opponent's icon, who are scheduled to make a rock-and-eye match. In FIG. 194 (d6), the notice display YH of the "button" is located between the icon of the villager character whose variation icon h0 is and the icon of the panta character who is the opponent icon.

  In FIG. 194 (D7), the remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed on the notice display YH of the “button”. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (d7), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to this is not performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the operation valid period starts, and thereafter, it is the same as FIG. 194 (c6) and the like.

  FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of effect that the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI can be seen before the release.

  In FIG. 195 (or a1), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"- The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 195 (or a1) is the No. 1 icon in FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 representing the target hold of the advance notice is a default display mode.

  In FIG. 195 (or a2), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (or a2), the first decorative symbol in the central area remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, the variable display is started, and the first upper right symbol In the 2 pendings display, the number of pendings in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “1”. In addition, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 195 (or a2), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first suspension icon h11 of the villager character, which has been displayed in the first stage hs1 so far, has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS and has been displayed in the second stage hs2 so far The second display icon h12 in the default display mode starts moving toward the first stage hs1.

  Also in FIG. 195 (or a3-1), although the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, the moving animation of the holding icon ends, and as the fluctuation icon h0, the type a of the villager type a (waiting The icon of the aspect is displayed. The villager character of this variation icon h0 is executing a standby animation (default animation). Further, the appearance animation of the opponent icon is also ended, and the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the manner of the pant type shown in FIG. 178 (c) as the opponent icon TI (a A standby mode icon is displayed, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI also executes a standby animation (default animation). Also, in the appearance area AS, the No. 1 shown in FIG. A notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. In addition, the No. shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 181 and the like, the “change” of 6 is the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI, but is treated here as the notice icon YI. Strictly speaking, in the case of the notice display YH, there is no frame display surrounding the character of change, but in the case of the notice icon YI, there is the frame display. Since the notice icon YI of "change" is displayed with the character display of "change" in the default color, the player can obtain the notice icon from the notice icon which is won by winning the fight against the rock when the appearance area AS is displayed. The notice display YH to be released is known.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (or a4), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, then the mini game B's rock-solid confrontation is started. In FIG. 195 (or a5), a janiken confrontation animation is performed by the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 is victorious.

  In FIG. 195 (or a7), when the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins, stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started. That is, the notice icon YI of "change" displayed in the appearance area AS comes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed large, and moves to the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 195 (or a8). , Stock displayed. In this way, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also displayed with the character of "change" in the default color.

  On the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (or a9), the exchange animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the empty appearance area AS gradually fades out to the right end of the screen. In FIG. 195 (or a10), the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display region CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display region DIS. Absent.

  In FIG. 195 (or a11), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decor 4” — “decor 4” — The "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the second decoration pattern on the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decoration patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 195 (or a12), the pre-reading notice object holding which has been the first hold until now is digested, and the symbol variation display which is the pre-reading object change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195 (or a12), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start variable display, and a default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. Also, so far, the "change" notice icon YI is displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 195 (or a14), the fluctuation icon change animation using the “change” notice icon YI which has been displayed stock up to that point is started. In this fluctuating icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 195 (or a14), an effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now is added to the "change" notice icon YI. The notice icon YI of "change" corresponds to the notice display YH of "change" when the effect image EF11 is added. In FIG. 195 (or a15), the notice icon YI for "change" to which the effect image EF11 is added (the notice display YH for "change") is flying with the fluctuating icon h0 in sight, and it collides with the fluctuating icon h0. . In FIG. 195 (or a16), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, which is the default display mode before the start of the animation after the fluctuation icon change animation ends, is No. FIG. It has changed to the display mode of the white blink described in 2.

  Note that, in this example, it may be viewed that the notice icon YI of "change" itself collides with the change icon h0.

  The example shown in FIG. 195 (or a3-2) is an example in which the same type of notice icon YI is displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, three notice icons YI of "change" are displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 195 (or a3-3) is an example in which different types of notice icons YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, a notice icon YI of “red change”, a notice icon YI of “super heat”, and a notice icon YI of “SP” are displayed. The type is not limited to all different types, but may be partially different types. For example, the notice icon YI of "change", the notice icon YI of "change", and the notice icon YI of "SP" may be displayed.

  The example shown in FIG. 195 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI of the same type (here, notice icons YI of “change”) are stocked in the stock area SS.

  The example shown in FIG. 195 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of different types of notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. Here, the notice icon YI of “change in red” and “super heat” The notice icon YI and the notice icon YI of “SP” are displayed, and not limited to all different types but may be partially different types, for example, the notice icon YI of “change” The notice icon YI for "change" and the notice icon YI for "SP" may be displayed, Note that the notice icon YI for "box" and the notice icon YI for "red box" shown in FIG. And, the notice icon YI of "button" may be stocked, the notice icon YI of "box", the notice icon YI of "box" and the notice icon YI of "gold box" are also similar. ,stock There may be a case to be.

  The examples shown in FIG. 195 (or d), the same figure (or e), and the same figure (or f) are box-shaped notice icons YI whose contents shown in FIG. 177 (a) are not known in the appearance area AS. Is an example in which a plurality is displayed. The example shown in FIG. 195 (or d) is an example in which three notice icons YI of “box” shown in FIG. 177 (a) are displayed in the appearance area AS. That is, box-shaped icons of the same type are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 195 (or e), an example in which the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “box”, and the notice icon YI of “red box” are displayed in the appearance area AS It is. That is, boxed icons of the same type and boxed icons of different types are displayed in combination. In the example shown in FIG. 195 (or f), an example in which the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “red box”, and the notice icon YI of “gold box” are displayed in the appearance area AS It is. That is, all different types of box-shaped icons are displayed.

  Here, the example shown in FIG. 195 (or a3-2), (or a3-3), (or d), the same figure (or e) or the same figure (or f) appears if the mini game is successful. In this example, all the notice icons YI displayed in the area AS can be acquired. If the mini game is successful, any one or two of the notice icons YI displayed in the appearance area AS may be configured to be obtainable. In addition, a roulette advance notice in which the advance notice icon YI which can be acquired in the appearance area AS is displayed in order is given, and before the mini game is started / when the mini game is being executed / after the mini game is successful, the roulette It may be configured to stop and acquire an obtainable (or acquired) notice icon.

  Subsequently, an effect example in which one stock notice icon is used a plurality of times will be described.

  FIG. 196 is a diagram gradually showing an example of an effect in which one stock notice icon is used a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 196 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold indicated by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. In addition, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 196 (a), in the right base icon bIr, the appearance animation of the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 179 (b) is started, and the smoke-like effect image EF12 is displayed. In (a) of FIG. 196, the appearance animation of the icon change advance notice display is finished, and the No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (b) is displayed in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. An icon change notice display IYH of 16 "bancho" is displayed. The icon change notice display gives notice that the notice icon YI is to be obtained, and gives a notice that the display mode of the icon changes. The "bancho" icon change notice display IYH here is a display for giving a notice that the notice icon YI is to be obtained. In FIG. 196 (4), the character of the icon change notice display IYH is "box". The notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. That is, in this example, the notice icon YI is acquired without playing the mini game. Soon, as shown in FIG. 196 (A6), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the lost design symbols is stopped and displayed, in FIG. It has been started.

  When the symbol variation display as the pre-reading target variation is started, as shown in FIG. 196 (A 8-1), the notice icon YI stocked in the previous symbol variation display is used, and the box is closed in the display mode The notice icon YI of a certain aspect a changes to the aspect d, which is a display aspect in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "change" of the default color of 6, and is a display for giving notice that the display mode such as the hold icon or the change icon is changed by one step.

  In the example of the effect up to now, when the notice icon YI is used once and the box changes to the mode d which is the display mode opened, it is erased as it is, but in this example of effect As shown, the notice icon YI changes from the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed, and is not deleted. When the box of the notice icon YI is returned to the closed mode, the box may be reopened in the symbol variation display in which the box is opened, that is, in the symbol variation display serving as the currently performed prefetch target variation. It will be foretelling that. Even when the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed mode, the box may not be reopened, or it may be reopened without fail. Moreover, even if it does not open continuously (even if it does not open immediately), it may open in the continuation of the symbol variation display which becomes a pre-reading object variation. Or it may reopen during a specific period (for example, a specific period which straddles a continuous symbol variation display) irrespective of the symbol variation display used as pre-reading object variation. Furthermore, although it has been described here that it is reopened, it may be closed again and opened more than twice if it is reopened.

  In FIG. 196 (a 10), the notice display YH of “change” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the fluctuation icon which has been the default display form (first display form) blinks in white. The display mode (second display mode) is changed.

  Also, in FIG. 196 (A 11), the notice icon YI that has returned to the mode a, which is the closed display mode, once again changes to the mode d, which is the open display mode, and the second icon from the box The warning display YH has been released. The notice display YH released here is No. 7 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "reach" of 17, and the notice display of this "reach" is a display which displays that it is a displayed symbol variation display, and more than normal reach or reach turning effect is performed. As described above, there may be a case where a notice display of a type different from the type of the first (previous) notice display YH appears. However, the same type of notice display YH may appear in succession. In addition, it may be configured such that only a notice display of a type different from the type that appeared last or once appears, or it is configured such that a notice display of the same type as the type of the first notice display YH appears. May be In addition, you may notice that normal reach will be performed by the notice display of "reach", and when the notice display of "reach" is performed in that case, the normal reach occurs in the symbol variation display in which the notice display is displayed. It will be decided to do.

  In FIG. 196 (A12), the notice icon YI changes again to the mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, and is not deleted. Also, the preliminary announcement display YH disappears after a certain display period after appearance (Fig. 196 (A13)), but if the preliminary presentation YH of "reach" is to be performed when the reach effect is performed, It may continue to be displayed until the reach effect is started.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 196 (A), reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” shakes and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, when the advance notice display "H" of "reach" appears, reach production is always performed, but just because the notice display YH of "reach" appears, reach presentation is always performed. Alternatively, even if the "reach" advance notice display YH appears, the symbol variation display may end without the reach effect being performed. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (A15), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the advance notice icon YI is changed to the open display manner as the mode d again, and the third notice display YH is released from the box (FIG. 196 (A 16)). The notice display YH released here is No. 7 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "chance" of 2 default colors. If the notice display of the default color "chance" is displayed during the reach, it will be a display notifying the increase in the reliability of the jackpot due to the change. Here also, a notice display of a type different from the type of the second (previous) notice display YH appears. This is because the reach effect has already been started, and the notice display YH of "reach" can not be made to appear again, and if there is no such circumstances, even if the notice display YH of the same type appears Good. In addition, during the execution of the reach effect, the notice display YH of "reach" may be displayed again. For example, when the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed again during normal reach, the display of the notice display YH of "reach" may be notified of development into super reach, in which case It may be developed to reach, and may or may not be developed to super reach. In addition, it is foreshadowed that it will develop from Super Reach A to Super Reach B when the notice indicator "Leach" is displayed during the execution of Super Reach A, which is less credible to the big hit than Super Reach B. Also, in that case, it may evolve into Super Reach B, and it may or may not evolve into Super Reach B. In addition, in the reach effect, the appearing notice may be limited. In this example, an upper limit is provided for the number of notice displays YH coming out from the same notice icon YI (for example, up to five), and the notice displays YH appear in the range up to the upper limit number. . As described above, although the upper limit is set, the more the number of notice displays YH coming out from the same notice icon YI, or the type of notice display YH coming out from the same notice icon YI The more the jackpot, the higher or lesser the jackpot reliability may be, or the jackpot reliability may be any number or type. In this example, the upper limit number of the notice displays YH appearing from the same notice icon YI is configured to be larger than the maximum stock number of the notice icons YI, but the same number may be used, Conversely, the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI may be configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the notice display YH coming out of the same notice icon YI.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (A17), in this example, the notice icon YI that has released the third notice display YH disappears without returning to the mode a, which is a closed display mode. The notice icon YI may be configured to disappear whenever it is opened once during reach. Alternatively, it may be configured to disappear when the notice display YH is discharged up to the upper limit number. Furthermore, even if the notice display YH is released up to the upper limit number, the display may be continued without disappearing. This is the same even if the preliminary display YH is not released up to the upper limit number. In addition, the display may return to the closed display mode "a", and may continue to be displayed without reopening, or may continue to be displayed as the open display mode "b".

  In FIG. 196 (A 18), the normal reach effect is finished, and the “decoration 5” which is not the “decoration 6” shakes and fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols is fluctuating.

  In FIG. 196 (A19), the display is stopped with the combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” displayed, and in FIG. The fluctuation icon h0 changed to the blue display mode is continuously displayed until the definite display is started, and disappears when the definite display is started. The timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears may be before the finalized display.

  In the example described here, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to give notice that the reach effect is performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but the symbol effect display in which the reach effect is not started, In the case of the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed, and as a result, "reach" is not displayed as the notice display YH of "reach". In the case of the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "" is displayed, it is likely that the big hit symbol form is finally determined and displayed. Also, at first, the notice display of “change” is released in FIG. 196 (A8-1), and the notice display of “reach” is released in the same drawing (a 11) at the second time. The notice display of “change” may be released, and the notice display of “red change” of the same type as the notice display of “change” (notice display of No. 7 shown in FIG. 177 (b)) is released May be

  Subsequently, an example in which a plurality of notice displays YH of the same type are released from the same notice icon YI stocked will be described.

  It is the same as in FIG. 196 (A7), and when the symbol variation display as the prefetching target fluctuation starts, as shown in FIG. 196 (A 8-2-1), the notice icon YI stocked is used. And the box changes to the mode d, which is an open display mode, and the notice display YH is released from the inside of the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 7 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of 27 "small-size" and the notice display of this "small-size", if it can collect a predetermined number of sheets (here three pieces), it is super reach production or Although there is a display for giving notice that the effect will be performed, there are cases where it is not possible to collect a predetermined number. In addition, even if the predetermined number is collected, there may be a case in which the super reach effect and the effect of the one-man box are not performed. However, if one sheet appears, a predetermined number of sheets may be collected without fail, and if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, at least one of the super reach effect and the effect of the one-man box character may be performed. When the notice display YH of "small size" appears, it is stock-displayed in the area (small size stock area KS) next to the second decorative symbol display (Fig. 196 (A8-2-2)). This oval stock area KS is an area different from the stock area SS (see FIG. 196 (A5)) for stocking the advance notice icon YI, and these two areas do not partially overlap. However, these two regions may at least partially overlap or may be completely the same region. Further, although the stocked notice icon YI and the stocked "small-size" notice display YH do not overlap, at least a portion may overlap, or all may overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (A8-2-2), the notice icon YI that has released the notice display “H” of “Ob” returns to the mode b, which is the closed display mode, as shown in FIG. The symbol variation display is continued in). In addition, the notice display YH of "small size" may be configured such that only one piece of stock can be stocked in one symbol change display.

  In FIG. 196 (A8-2-4), the notice icon YI once returned to the closed display mode a changes to the open display mode d again, and two out of the boxes Noticeable notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is not the notice display YH of “Ob”, but the No. shown in FIG. 177 (b). The notice display of the “red change” of 7 is a notice that indicates that the display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, etc. is changed in two steps. In FIG. 196 (A8-2-5), the notice icon YI changes again to the mode a, which is a display mode in which the box is closed, and is not deleted. Moreover, the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode) so far, is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode) There is.

  In FIG. 196 (A8-2-6), the notice icon YI is also changed to the mode d which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH, which is the third in the box, is released. Here, the notice display "HH" of "Obari" has been released at once. As described above, a plurality of preliminary announcements YH may be released in one release. However, only one release may be performed in one release. In FIG. 196 (a 8-2-7), the notice display of these two “small-format” is displayed in stock in the small-size stock area KS and shown in FIG. 196 (a 8-2-7). In the KS, there are stocked three "small-size" advance notices YH as a predetermined number. In this example, the notice display YH of "small size" is released several times (two times in this example) from one notice icon YI, but the notice display YH of "small size" is only once from one notice icon YI. It may be configured not to be released. In addition, only one notice display YH of "small size" may be configured not to be released from one notice icon YI.

  FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of notice displays YH of the same type are emitted from the same notice icon YI being stocked, and another example of effects.

  In FIG. 197 (A 8-2-8) continued from FIG. 196 (A 8-2-7), the notice display YH of three “small-sized sheets” as a predetermined number of sheets is stocked in the small-sized stock area KS. The notice display YH of these three "small" is used. That is, it is used immediately when three "small-sized" advance notice displays YH, which are a predetermined number of sheets, are stored. Here, the numbers shown in FIG. In the form of the notice display YH of 28 "three 3 ovals", it is redisplayed relatively large at the center of the screen. No. The notice display YH of 28 “3 ovals” is a display for giving notice that super reach is performed over super reach A, super reach B, VS swordsman reach, or all group reach. However, even if the "three ovals" notice display YH is displayed, the super reach effect may not be performed, or if the "three ovals" notice display YH is displayed, the super reach effect is always displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, it is not used immediately when the notice display YH of 3 sheets of "small size" which becomes a predetermined number is accumulated, but after the state where the notice display YH of 3 "sizes" is kept stocked continues May be used. Moreover, the notice display YH of “Ob” can be stocked over the symbol variation indication, and stocking can be made up to the symbol variation indication of the pre-reading object, but three pieces are stored until the symbol variation indication of the pre-reading object If it is not, the notice display YH of the small size stocked until then is deleted from the small size stock area KS when the symbol variation display of the pre-read object is finished. Alternatively, even if three sheets are not stored, they may be used separately. In addition, stock of notice display YH of "small size" may be configured so as not to straddle symbol variation display, in that case, when symbol change display in which notice display YH of "small size" is stocked is finished, " The notice display YH of the "small size" is configured to be erased.

  In addition, the No. shown in FIG. The display of each of the 30 “character stock” notices (“To”, “爺”, “hime”) is the same as the notice display of the “obsolete” described here. The area for stocking the advance notice of the character may be provided as an area different from the small stock area KS, or may be provided in common with the small stock area KS.

  The numbers shown in FIG. 177 (b). 27 "Obari" and No. Each of the 30 "character stock" icons ("To", "爺", "Hime") is displayed as a notice YH and then stocked in each stock area (small stock area KS or character stock area not shown). Functions as a notice icon. The notice icon YI may be released from the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI may be stocked. That is, the notice icon YI may be stocked without the notice display YH.

  In FIG. 197 (a 8-2-9), the notice display YH of “three ovals” disappears, and reach production is started. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, the "decor 7" shakes. And in Figure 197 (a 8-2-10a), super reach production of VS swordsman reach is started as the advance notice, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the main battle scene of the battle between Yoshimune of the protagonist and swordsman of the enemy character An animation is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, in the stock area SS, the stock display of the notice icon YI continues, but it may disappear when the super reach effect is started.

  Also in FIG. 197 (A8-2-11) during the super reach effect, the notice icon YI is also changed to the mode d which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 7 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of "super heat" of 4. The notice display of "super heat" displayed after the reach effect is started corresponds to a kind of normal notice that considerably increases the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 197 (A8-2-12), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the mode a which is the closed display mode, but the notice display YH of “super heat” is displayed. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 197 (A8-2-13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. "Decoration 6" as is displayed in a large size, and then, a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is finalized and displayed.

  FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b1) to FIG. 197A (A8-2-10b11) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

  The same is true for FIG. 197 (A8-2-9), and FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b1) is also in the same state as FIG. 197 (A8-2-10a). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b2), along with the scene where Yoshimune has been defeated, “Decoration 6” as a middle symbol is displayed large, but in the stock area SS , The closed form notice icon YI is still displayed in stock.

  In FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b3), the wipe effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197A (A8-2-10b4), the display screen is wiped once with no pattern and the same color. It will be displayed. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, and the notice icon YI displayed in stock also disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. Also, the model title is displayed at the left corner. In FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b5), wipe-out starts, and the display of the back gradually begins to be seen. Here, the first decorative design ("decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7") that is fluctuating is beginning to be visible. In the subsequent FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b6), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be visible. Here, the player starts to see the notice icon YI, so after the wipe out is completed (after the wipe effect is finished), the notice icon YI is further released from the notice icon YI, as shown in FIG. 190 (F10). Such as forecast icon YI expect itself to be promoted. At the wipe-out stage, the notice icon YI may disappear and may not be displayed again. The notice icon YI displayed in stock may also be displayed during execution of the wipe effect. Also, the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be used during the execution of the wipe effect, and the notice display YH may be released, but the presence or absence of the stock indication of the notice icon YI is in progress during the execution of the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used. Furthermore, although the notice icon YI described here is the notice icon YI used one or more times, the same applies to an unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 180 (A 11) or the like). Yes (same below).

  In FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b7), the user wipes out and the background is normally returned to the background, but the variation icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Moreover, in the 1st decoration pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" shakes and fluctuates. Furthermore, in the stock area SS, the closed notice icon YI is displayed. In addition, although promotion of notice icon YI itself has not arisen, it may be promoted from a kind of "box" to a kind of "red box", for example.

  In FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b8), the notice icon YI is also changed to the mode d which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 7 shown in FIG. It is a notice display of 5 "iron plate". The notice display of the “iron sheet” is a display for giving notice that the big hit has been decided in the symbol change display of the pre-reading object, that is, the symbol change display currently performed. Here, the notice display of “change” may be released, and the fluctuation icon YI may be promoted to one level, which may lead to a resurrection effect described later. Alternatively, even in the case of the change icon of the default display mode, there may be a case where the notice display of “change in red” is released, which may lead to the resurrection effect described later. Furthermore, the release of the advance notice at the same time of the swing change may be a big hit decision.

  In FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b9), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the mode a which is the closed display mode, but the notice display YH of “iron sheet” is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b10), a resurrection effect is started, and in FIG. 197A (A8-2-10b11), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“ The combination of the decoration pattern of the jackpot of the decoration 7 "is displayed shaking. After that, this combination is confirmed and displayed.

  The notice icon YI may be carried over to the next change. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed across the wipe effect as in this example, the notice icon may not be used and may be hidden at the end of the symbol variation display. Furthermore, there may be cases where the notice icon YI may be carried over to the jackpot effect or the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and such carryover may be prohibited. As described above, the same is true for the unused advance notice icon YI (for example, the advance notice icon YI in FIG. 180 (11) etc.).

  FIG. 197 (A 1-2-1) to FIG. 197 A (A 1-2-6) are diagrams showing other examples in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

  In FIG. 197 (A 1-2-1), as in FIG. 196 (A 1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 of the default display mode is It is displayed. The first hold indicated by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. In addition, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  Thereafter, the same effects as those shown in FIG. 196 (A2) to FIG. 196 (A.7) and FIG. 196 (A.8-2-1) to FIG. 196 (A.8-2-11) are performed. The state (a 1-2-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 197 (a 8-2-10 b1). Thereafter, the wipe effect is started through the same state as shown in FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b2) (FIG. 197 (A1-2-3)). The wipe effect here is the same as the wipe effect shown in FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b3) to FIG. 197 (A8-2-10b6).

  In FIG. 197 (a 1-2-4), the wipe effect is ended, and the background is normally returned to the background, but the fluctuation icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Moreover, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is fluctuating. Furthermore, in the stock area SS, the closed notice icon YI is displayed. The notice icon YI may disappear at the wipe-out stage, and may be re-displayed when the next fluctuation starts or may be re-displayed during a big hit game. The notice icon YI displayed during the big hit game may be prohibited from use or may be used in the same manner as during the symbol variation display. Furthermore, in the first place, during the big hit game, the display of the advance notice icon YI may be restricted (prohibited) and not displayed.

  In FIG. 197 (a 1-2-5), the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d which is the open display mode, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is a notice display of "change in red". The notice display of “red change” here is the No. shown in FIG. Unlike the notice display of “red change” of 7, it is a display for giving a notice of changing to the same display mode as the display mode of its own.

  In FIG. 197 (1-2-6), there is no change in the display mode of the variation icon h0, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 is the same as the display mode of the advance notice display of “change in red” (in the fifth display mode It changes to a certain red display mode). That is, it is promoted four stages here. In this example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is displayed as it is without the resurrection effect being performed.

  According to this example, the notice icon YI is used as a further advance notice, not the current symbol change display which is the symbol change display of the pre-read object. If the symbol fluctuation display behind the current symbol fluctuation display is high in expectation of the big hit as a result of pre-reading (for example, it may be long fluctuation of fluctuation time, even if it is big hit fluctuation it is lost fluctuation) May be like this example. In this example, the display mode (here, the fifth display mode) above the fluctuation icon (see FIG. 197 (1-2-6)) of the third display mode (display mode of “blue”) that has become lost. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed in the display mode (third display mode) equivalent to the display mode of the fluctuation icon which is lost, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon which is lost is better than the display mode of the fluctuation icon. In the lower display mode (for example, the second display mode), the display mode of the hold icon may be changed. In addition, when the fluctuation icon of the lost fluctuation is the third display mode or more, it may be as in this example, or when it is the third display mode or less, it may be as in this example. Furthermore, regardless of the display mode of the change icon of the lost change, it may be as in this example. Further, the pre-reading notice is not limited to the display mode change of the hold icon, and another pre-reading notice may be made notice (for example, chance eye, pre-reading background change (red stage change), etc.).

  In addition, although the notice display of "the red change" is discharge | released here, the notice display of the "change" may be discharge | released. In addition, a notice display for giving notice of changing to a display mode above the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 (for example, one or more stages) (for example, green one level higher than blue in this example) is released It is also good.

  FIG. 198 is a view gradually showing an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

  In FIG. 198 (a 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 are displayed. These pending icons h11 and h12 are both default display modes. In addition, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is also displayed. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  After that, the reserve is digested, and in FIG. 198 (A 1-3-2) showing the state in the symbol variation display in the state where the special figure is not reserved, two notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. There is. In FIG. 198 (a 1-3-3), the first notice icon YI stocked earlier is used, and the first notice icon YI is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. The notice display YH of "Red change" has been released from the inside of the box. In FIG. 198 (a 1-3-4), the notice icon YI is returned to the mode a in which the box is closed, and the notice display YH of “change in red” is used, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is It is changing to the 3rd display mode (display mode of "blue").

  Subsequently, in FIG. 198 (a 1-3-5), the second notice icon YI stocked later is used, and the second notice icon YI is a display mode in which the box is opened. It changes, and the notice display YH of "reach" is released from the inside of the box. In FIG. 198 (a 1-3-6), the second notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed, and in the same figure (a 1-3-7), “reach” The notice display YH disappears, the reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" shakes and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (a 1-3-8), the display of normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach effect, the remaining notice icon YI is changed to the open display mode again, and the notice display YH, which is the second in the box, is released (FIG. 198 (A. 1-3-9). ). The notice display YH emitted here is a notice display of "chance" of the default color. In FIG. 198 (a 1-3-10), the first notice icon YI also disappears, and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

  In FIG. 198 (Ar 1-3-11), the normal reach effect is finished, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the “decoration 5” which is not the “decoration 6” fluctuates. That is, the combination of the lost symbols of the decorative symbols is swayed and then displayed.

  In the example described above, the notice icon YI is used in the stock order, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. In addition, the number of times of use of the notice icon YI was two, while the notice icon YI stocked first was two times, and the notice icon YI stocked later was only one. Thus, although the number of times of use may differ depending on the notice icon YI, it may be the same. When the number of times of use of the notice icon YI is the same, the number of times of use may be the same from the time when one notice icon is stocked to the time when all the plurality of notice icons are used. For example, if the previously stocked notice icon is used twice, then the previously stocked notice icon is also used twice, and if the previously stocked notice icon is used three times, the stock is posted later The pre-announced icon is also used three times. Thus, the number of times of use of other icons may be adjusted. Moreover, the number of times of use may be predetermined. In this case, regardless of how many pieces are stocked, any notice icon is always used a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the notice icon YI stocked earlier may be configured to use the notice icon YI more frequently than the notice icon YI stocked later, or vice versa. .

  Also, the maximum number of times of use may be predetermined or may change. When the maximum number of times of use changes, it may change according to the gaming state (normal state, power support state (time reduction state), definite change state)), and the maximum number of times of use increases in the state of certain prefetch zone It is also good. In addition, in a certain gaming state (for example, a normal state, but may be a power support state (a short time state) or a definite change state), the advance notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIG. 198 (1-4-1) to (1-4-4-11) are diagrams showing gradually another example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

  Figure 198 (a 1-4-1) to the same diagram (a 1-4-4) are in the same state as the same diagram (a 1-3-1) to the same diagram (a 1-3-4), In FIG. 198 (a 1-4-5), the first notice icon YI previously stored is continuously used. As a result, the notice display YH of "reach" is released. In FIG. 198 (A 1-4-6), the first notice icon YI used continuously disappears, and the notice display YH of “Leach” is displayed, and the same figure (A 1-4-7). In), the notice display YH of "reach" disappears, and reach production is started. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (A 1-4-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started, and during this normal reach effect, it has not been used so far, The second notice icon YI stocked from is used, and the notice display YH of the default color "chance" is released (Fig. 198 (A 1-4-9)). In FIG. 198 (a 1-4-10), the notice icon YI which has been left disappears, and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

  In FIG. 198 (a 1-4-11), the normal reach effect is finished, and the combination of lost symbols of the decorative symbols is swayed and then displayed.

  As in this example, the notice icon YI may disappear in the stock order. That is, it may be configured to start using the stocked notice icon YI when the stocked notice icon YI is used up.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used multiple times while the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI is known before release.

  FIG. 199 (Ia1) to FIG. 199 (Ia3) are in the same state as FIG. 196 (A1-1) to FIG. 196 (A3), and FIG. 199 (Ia4) shows the state of the effect icon display area DIS. In the right base icon bIr, an icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is displayed. The "bancho" icon change notice display IYH here is also a display for giving a notice that the notice icon YI is to be acquired, but the No. 1 shown in FIG. 177 (b) is the same as the effect example described using FIG. A notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. That is, the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of "change" has been acquired, and the player simply sees the display (only by reading the characters), and the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is "change". Recognize that it is a notice of.

  In FIG. 199 (a5), the notice icon YI of "change" is moved to the stock area SS, and is displayed in the stock area SS in the same figure (a6). Soon, as shown in FIG. 199 (I a7), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (I a8), the symbol variation display to be the prefetch target variation is It has been started.

  When the symbol change display which is the preread target change is started, the conversation notice as the normal notice as described with reference to FIG. 180 is started. A detailed description will be given above, and briefly described here, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (A9), a conversational image CI1 of the maroon is displayed in the central region. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this courtesy person does not overlap the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in front. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (Ia 10), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI2 of the habit in which the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed Is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (A10), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the user is displayed at a position deviated from the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the both do not overlap.

  Eventually, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 199 (A11) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the operation effective period has started.

  The timing shown in FIG. 199 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 199 (A13), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, the conversation image CI2 of a whistle announces that the reach effect will be started from the operation promotion notification image. The word display has changed to "Leach!" In addition, the character display of the notice such as "reach it!" May be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation effective period elapses without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed also in the case of

  Also, in the state where the conversation image CI2 of the rose that has been changed to the character display of "reach it!" Is displayed, the variation icon change animation is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 199 (a14), an effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI will be used from now is added to the notice icon YI of "change". In FIG. 199 (a15), the ball of light is flying from the stock area SS with a fluctuating icon h0, and it strikes the fluctuating icon h0. The fluctuation icon h0, in which the ball of light collides, is changed to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking).

  The display of “change” displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 199 (a 15) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 1 (a 16), the notice display Y H of “change” is FIG. It changes to the aspect b shown to these. That is, it is changed to the aspect showing what was used. In addition, during the mode b, since it is the notice display YH, it can not be used as the notice icon YI.

  In FIG. 199 (a 17), the notice display YH of the mode b is changed to the notice icon YI, and it is possible to use it again. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (Ia 18), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle are erased, the conversation announcement ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible.

  In FIG. 199 (a 19), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” shakes and fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (a 20), display of normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variation icon change animation is started, and the notice image YI is added with the effect image EF11 again (FIG. 199 (a 21)), and in FIG. 199 (a 22), light from the stock area SS The ball flies with a flutter icon h0 and strikes the flutter icon h0. The fluctuation icon h0 which the light ball has collided with is now changed to the third display mode (blue display mode).

  The display of "change" displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 199 (a 22) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 1 (a 23), the notice display Y H of "change" is shown in FIG. Although the mode is changed again to the mode b shown in, in the same figure (a 24), it is returned to the notice icon YI, and can be used again. In addition, super reach development effect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (Ia 24), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the following FIG. Super reach production is started, and the image of the enemy player swordsman is displayed large. Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (Ia 26), an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy character swordsman is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, and the notice icon YI is displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 199 (I a27), during the animation of the duel scene, the variation icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is also added to the notice icon YI, and in FIG. A ball of light from SS is flying with a fluctuating icon h0 and strikes the fluctuating icon h0.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of effects and the like continued from FIG. 199.

  In FIG. 200 (I a29) continued from FIG. 199 (I a28), in the fluctuating icon change animation, the fluctuation icon h0 where the light ball collides is changed to the fourth display mode (green display mode) . In addition, although the notice display YH of “change” is changed to the mode b again, in FIG. 200 (a 30), the notice icon YI is returned to be usable.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (a 31), “decoration 5” as a middle symbol is largely displayed together with the scene where Yoshimune has been defeated, but in the stock area SS, the notice icon YI Is still listed.

  Then, the wipe effect is also started here (FIG. 200 (a 32)), and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208 L shown in FIG. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, and the notice display YH displayed in stock also disappears. In FIG. 200 (a34), the wipe out starts, and the display of the back gradually begins to be seen. Here, the first decorative design ("decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6") that is fluctuating is beginning to be visible. In the following figure 200 (a 35), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be visible.

  In FIG. 200 (a36), the user wipes out and the background is normally returned to the background, but the variation icon h0 remains in the fourth display mode (green). Moreover, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is fluctuating. Furthermore, the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

  In FIG. 200 (a37), the notice icon YI has disappeared. Note that the notice icon YI may disappear before the wipe effect, or may disappear without being displayed again at the wipe out stage, or disappear simultaneously with the end of the wipe effect. There may be a case where there is a case, a case where the character does not disappear until the super reach effect ends, or a case where the character does not disappear until it is displayed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock may also be displayed during execution of the wipe effect. Also, the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be used during the execution of the wipe effect, and the notice display YH may be released, but the presence or absence of the stock indication of the notice icon YI is in progress during the execution of the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may be configured not to be used.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (a 38), the first decorative symbol is displayed in a final combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6".

  Subsequently, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked will be described.

  It is the same as in FIG. 199 (Ia 6), and thereafter, before the end of the symbol variation display, No. 1 shown in FIG. Notice icon YI of 21 "buttons" and No. After the seventeen "reach" notice icons YI are continuously stocked, as shown in FIG. 199 (b1), the symbol variation display ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (ii b2), the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is started. In this example, a plurality of notice icons that can recognize what the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is by simply looking at the display or reading a character, the next change (the symbol that becomes the target change for look-ahead Variable display).

  In the symbol change display which becomes the pre-reading target change, the same conversation announcement as the conversation announcement which has been described many times such as FIG. 199 (A9) to FIG. (A17) is started (FIG. 200 (Ab3) ). Here, the explanation of the conversation announcement is minimized, and the explanation of the announcement icon YI stocked will be made. In FIG. 200 (b), of the three notice icons YI of “change”, the notice icon YI of “button”, and the notice icon YI of “reach”, the notice icon YI of “button” and The effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is to be used from now is added to each of the notice icons YI of “reach”. In FIG. 200 (b5), the effect image EF11 disappears from each of them, and it becomes the notice display YH of the “button” of the form b, and also becomes the notice display YH of the “reach” of the form b. Here, in the stock region SS, the circles of the aspect b of each other partially overlap, but may be displayed so as not to overlap. Also, the earlier the stocked order may be overlapped in the later one, and conversely, the slower one may be overlapped in the earlier one. In FIG. 200 (b5), since the notice display of the "button" is used, the button effect is executed in the notice of the conversation. That is, the operation promotion notification image configured by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. In FIG. 200 (b6), the notice display YH of the “button” and the notice display YH of the “reach” are both returned to the notice icon YI, and can be used again.

  Then, the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period (FIG. 200 (b7)), and since the notice display of "reach" is used from the operation promotion notification image, reach effect is started It has been changed to the word display of "reach it!"

  When the speech advance notice ends, in FIG. 200 (b10), the first stop of the left symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol. When the first stop is performed, the effect image EF11 is added to the "reach" notice icon YI. Note that the effect image EF11 may be added to the notice icon YI of "reach" before the first stop is performed, or may be added at the same time as the first stop is performed, or the first stop May be added before the second stop is performed (i.e., before the reach state occurs). In FIG. 200 (b11), the effect image EF11 disappears, and the notice display YH of the "reach" of the mode b is made. In FIG. 200 (b12), a second stop of the right symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the reach state is reached. ing.

  In the reach state, the variation icon change animation is started this time, and as shown in FIG. 200 (b13), the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. Then, in FIG. 200 (b14), the ball of light flies with the fluctuating icon h0 and hits the fluctuating icon h0, and in the diagram (b15), the fluctuating icon h0 where the ball of light is bumped is the second one. The display mode (display mode of white blinking) is changed. In addition, although the notice display YH of “change” is also changed to the mode b, in FIG. 200 (A16), the notice icon YI is returned to be usable.

  On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (b17), the display of normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach effect, the variation icon change animation is also started, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the "change" notice icon YI (Fig. 199 (b18)).

  FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

  In FIG. 201 (b19) continued from FIG. 200 (b18), the ball of light flew with a fluctuating icon h0 and flew against the fluctuating icon h0, and in the same figure (b20), the ball of light bumped The icon h0 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). In addition, although the notice display YH of “change” is changed to the mode b again, in FIG. 201 (b21), the notice icon YI is returned to be usable. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (I b21), super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L shown in the following FIG. Super reach production is started, and the image of the enemy player swordsman is displayed large. Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (b23), an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy character swordsman is displayed. Even when the super reach effect is started, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed, and the stock area SS still displays three notice icons YI in stock. As shown in FIG. 201 (b24), in the middle of the animation of the duel scene, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in the following FIG. 201 (b25), the first decorative symbol is displayed On the device 208L, an operation promotion notification image configured by a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (b25), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even if the button is operated. In addition, although the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the mode b again, it returns to the notice icon YI and becomes usable. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation effective period is started (FIG. 201 (b26)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (i b 27) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period.

  The timing in FIG. 201 (b28) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button operation in this case is an operation to determine whether or not the cut-in image CI3 of the crown shown in FIG. 118 (32) appears. In this example, the cut-in image CI3 of the crown does not appear, and The animation stays in progress (FIG. 201 (b29) to (b31). Note that, in response to the button operation, the variation icon change animation is started, and the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. And the display mode of the fluctuation icon may change.

  In FIG. 201 (b32), the effect image EF11 is again added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in the subsequent FIG. 201 (b33), the chance button 136 is simulated on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An operation promotion notification image is displayed, which includes the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation valid period. Eventually, the button effect is started, the operation effective period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201 (b34) is a display mode when the above-mentioned operation effective period starts and a little time passes. It is shown. Further, although the notice display YH of the “button” is changed again to the mode b (FIG. 201 (b33)), it returns to the notice icon YI and becomes usable thereafter.

  The timing in FIG. 201 (b35) is within the operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button effect here is the final judge effect, and on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (b36), “decoration 5” as a middle symbol is displayed large together with the scene where Yoshimune defeated ing. After that, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is subjected to the wipe effect to be performed in FIG. 200 (a 32) and thereafter, and after the notice icon Y I is erased as shown in FIG. "--Decoration 5"-the combination of the decorative patterns of the "decor 6" is confirmed and displayed.

  Note that the display of the final judge screen shown in FIG. 201 (b36) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be performed.

  FIG. 202 is a diagram showing the example of the roulette effect for the advance notice icon stock in stages.

  The state shown in FIG. 202 (c1) is a state in which no special drawing is held, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not perform variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, a roulette RLT for notice icon stock is provided in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (c). The roulette RLT is divided into left and right areas, and the name (icon name) of one of the notice icons YI among the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b) stops in the left area. . On the other hand, one of the cross mark, question mark and surprise mark stops in the right area. Also, in the left area and the right area, the colors (for example, white, blue, green, red, gold) of a plurality of areas are prepared, and the icon name and the mark (symbol) are used in combination Be done. In the roulette display RLT shown in FIG. 202 (C1), the icon name of "Change" is displayed on the green background in the left area, and the cross mark is displayed on the white background in the right area. It is not possible to obtain the icon YI. That is, when the cross mark is displayed, the advance notice icon can not be acquired.

  After that, there is a ball in special drawing 1 starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 92, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. However, in the upper left second decorative pattern, the variable display is started. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuating icon display area CIS, the animation of increasing the fluctuating icon is started, and on the pedestal hs0 shown in FIG.

  When the symbol variation display is started, the roulette display (variation display) is also started in the roulette RLT for the advance notice icon stock (FIG. 202 (c4)). Here, the roulette display is started before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, but the start of the roulette display may be simultaneous with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the first decoration It may be after the start of the variable display of the symbol.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (c), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. After the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the left region of the roulette RLT is stopped, and the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the green background (Fig. 202 (c5)). On the other hand, the fluctuation display of the right area is continued. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 202 (c. 7-1), the variable display of the right area is also stopped, and a question mark is displayed on the green background. This combination can obtain a notice icon "reach?", And the notice area Y of "reach?" Is stocked in the stock area SS shown in FIG. 202 (c). The notice icon YI of "reach?" Is a weak notice icon of a degree to which reach production may be performed, and in many cases, the reach production is not performed than when the notice icon YI of "reach" is used .

  When the notice icon YI of “reach?” Is acquired, the display of the roulette RLT may be turned off, but in this example, the display continues. In this example, although the display of the roulette RLT crosses the symbol fluctuation display in a state where the fluctuation display of the left area and the right area is stopped, the display of the roulette RLT displays the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area. In the state where it is done, it is possible to straddle the symbol fluctuation indication. In addition, during stop display of the symbol, display of RLT (the state in which the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area is performed or the fluctuation display of the left area and / or the right area is not displayed) is not displayed It may be configured as follows.

  In FIG. 202 (c), the first stop of the first decorative symbol is performed, and "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol. In this symbol variation display, the notice icon YI of "reach?" Is not used, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in Fig. 202 (c10) without reaching a reach effect, "decoration 6"-" The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decor 4"-"decor 1" is fluctuating, and in Fig. 11 (c), the combination is fixedly displayed. Here, since there is no subsequent hold, when the finalized display is performed, the "reach?" Notice icon YI disappears. However, when there is a subsequent hold, it may carry over to the next fluctuation, or may always carry over. Alternatively, even if there is a subsequent hold, it may not be carried over.

  In addition, although the number of times of fluctuation of the roulette is one time per symbol fluctuation display here, it may be changed a plurality of times. In addition, in the symbol fluctuation display of the prefetch target fluctuation and the symbol fluctuation display before that, a difference may be provided to the number of times of fluctuation of the roulette in one symbol fluctuation display. For example, the symbol fluctuation display of the prefetch target fluctuation However, the number of times of fluctuation of the roulette may be larger or smaller than that of the symbol fluctuation display before that. For example, in symbol fluctuation display prior to symbol fluctuation display of prefetch target object fluctuation, roulette display may be performed once as prefetch notice, and in symbol fluctuation display of prefetch target object fluctuation, roulette display may be performed three times as advance notice. However, the number of times may not be fixed, and may be zero.

  In addition, the notice icon YI may be stocked by another effect (for example, a mini game such as a rock-and-collar confrontation) other than the roulette display described here, and while the roulette display is being performed, the notice icon YI A presentation such as a mini game capable of acquiring a game may not be performed. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the roulette display is performed or performed, effects such as a mini game capable of acquiring the advance notice icon YI may not be performed.

  Next, the reach tilt effect will be described.

  FIG. 202 (c) is the same, and in FIG. 202 (c 9-2-1), the notice image Y of “reach?” Is an effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI is to be used from now. It is attached. In the next FIG. 202 (c9-2-2), the reach turning effect is started, and the turning fluctuation is performed in the first decorative symbol. That is, here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol switch to low-speed fluctuation, the left symbol rotates upward, the right symbol rotates downward, and the effect of temporary stop at the vertical center position is executed However, as shown in FIG. 202 (C9-2-4), the temporary stop is not performed, and the reach-rolling effect ends in failure. Although it has disappeared when the reach directing effect is started, it may be continuously displayed on the notice icon YI of “reach?” During the reach directing effect, as shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “reach?” Is indicated by a circle representing that it has been used, but the circle disappears immediately and the notice icon YI becomes reusable. 1st decoration in 9-2-5a) In the pattern, all three decorative patterns change at a low speed, and in the same figure (c 9-2-6a), the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8" shakes and fluctuates The notice icon YI of “reach?” Is hidden before the decoration symbol is displayed in a finalized manner (FIG. 202 (9-2-6a)).

  In this example, the effect image EF11 notifying that the notice icon YI is to be used is added to the notice icon YI, but the mode of the notice icon YI itself changes before the start of use or at the time of use disclosure. You may For example, the notice icon YI itself may be enlarged, or the color of the notice icon YI itself may be changed. Also, during use, the mode may be returned to the original mode, or the mode may be changed.

  Next, another example of the reach tilt effect will be described.

  FIG. 202 (c 9-2-4b) is in the same state as FIG. 202 (c 9-2-4a), and is a state after the reach-turn effect has failed. In this example, all three decorative symbols are not changed to the low speed fluctuation as it is, but are switched to the high speed fluctuation conversely (FIG. 202 (W 9-2-5b), shown in the notice icon YI of "reach?" The effect image EF11 is again added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" In Fig. 202 (c 9-2-6b) in which the circle mark disappears, and in the subsequent Fig. 202 (c 9-2-7b), In the first decorative symbol, the swing fluctuation is started again, and here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol each start to move toward the middle symbol continuing the high speed fluctuation, without passing the middle symbols to each other Before the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged and displayed (Fig. 202 (c 9-2-9b)), and then temporary stop is performed, and the reach state is established (Fig. 202 (c 9- 2-10b)), final In FIG. 202 (c 9-2-2) to FIG. 202 (c 9-2-4 a) or in FIG. From the same drawing (c 9-2-5b) to the same drawing (c 9-2-5b) or the same drawing (c 9-2-9b ') described later (c 9-2-9b'), a series of reach-caching effects It may be.

  Next, an example will be described in which in the reach-turn production, a turn fluctuation is started although it is started again.

  As shown in the previous FIG. 202 (c 9-2-8b), each of the left symbol and the right symbol starts moving toward the middle symbol continuing high-speed fluctuation, and FIG. 202 (c 9-2-9b ' In 1), the left symbol and the right symbol pass through the middle symbol each other, and as shown in (Fig. 203 (W 9-2-9b)), the enlarged display in front of the middle symbol is not performed, and eventually, The temporary stop is not performed, and all three decoration symbols have low speed fluctuation (Fig. 202 (c 9-2-9b'2)), and in the same figure (c 9-2-9b '3), "decoration 7" "-Decoration 7"-The combination of the decoration design of the loss of "decor 8" is swayed, and it is determined and displayed by the combination.

  Although the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" Every time a new change in swing is started, the reach change effect is a matter of a series of effects, and the effect image EF11 is firstly Only once may be added to the notice icon YI of "reach?".

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for the advance notice icon stock and an example of the effect accompanied by a button operation.

  FIG. 203 (c 9-2-4c) is an example continued from FIG. 202 (c 9-2-3), and shows a successful example of the reach tilt effect. Here, the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned at the center in the vertical direction, and before the temporary stop, the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged and displayed (FIG. 203 (W 9-2-4c)), and then the temporary stop is performed. The reach state is established (FIG. 203 (c 9-2-5c)).

  Also, FIG. 203 (c 7-2-1) is an example continuing from FIG. 202 (c 6), and in this FIG. 203 (c 7-2-1), the right region of the roulette RLT has a red background. An exclamation mark is displayed. As a result, it is a combination of the icon name of "reach" on the green background and the surprise mark on the red background. In this combination, it is possible to obtain the "reach" notice icon YI that is more reliable than the "reach?" Notice icon YI. Also, with the combination of the icon name of "reach" on the red background and the question mark on the green background, it may be possible to obtain only the notice icon YI of "reach?", Or the notice icon YI of "reach" You may be able to earn In addition, when the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the red background, and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the icon name of the "reach" on the green background and the red background are surprised The symbol variation display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. In addition, when the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the red background and the question mark is displayed on the green background, and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the question on the icon background of "reach" and the red background is asked The symbol variation display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. That is, the background color in which the icon name is displayed relates to the reliability of the big hit than the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed. Therefore, when the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background, and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the icon name of the "reach" on the green background and the green background are surprised The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon tends to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. Furthermore, when the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background, and the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired, the icon name of the "reach" on the red background and the surprise mark is displayed on the green background When it is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired, the probability that the symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon will be a big hit is the same. However, the background color in which the icon name is displayed and the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may have the same relationship to the jackpot reliability. Alternatively, the background color on which the mark (symbol) is displayed may be related to the reliability of the big hit than the background color on which the icon name is displayed.

  In addition, the name of the color in the above description can be represented by a display mode. That is, "red" is the fifth display mode, and "green" is the fourth display mode (the same applies to the following description).

  Also, FIG. 203 (c 7-3-1) is an example continuing from FIG. 202 (c 5), and in this FIG. 203 (c 7-3-1), the left region of the roulette RLT has red background. The icon name "reach" is displayed, and in the right area, a surprise mark is displayed on a red background. With this combination, it may be possible to obtain the "reach" notice icon YI for the first time. That is, if neither the left area nor the right area has a red background, the "reach" notice icon YI can not be obtained, and if one is a green background, the "reach?" It becomes notice icon YI. Also, in this case, if the red background is stopped earlier, the red background may be configured to be more easily stopped at the other than when the green background is stopped first, or the same in probability It may be

  Also, FIG. 203 (c 7-4-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 202 (c 5), and in this FIG. 203 (c 7-4-1), the left region of the roulette RLT An icon of a box shown in 177 (a) is displayed, and the number of stocks is displayed in the right area. In this example, one “box” icon shown in FIG. 177 (a) can be acquired. In addition, as a stock number, it is 0-3. In the left area, either “box” or cross mark may be displayed, and in the right area, colors (white, red, gold, rainbow) may be displayed. In this case, for example, in the case of the cross mark and the rainbow, the box-shaped notice icon YI can not be obtained, and in the case of the "box" and the red, the notice icon YI of "red box" can be obtained. it can.

  Also, FIG. 203 (c 7-5-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 202 (c 5), and in this FIG. 203 (c 7-5-1), the left region of the roulette RLT is made of gold. (Sixth Display Mode) The icon name of "reach" is displayed on the background, and a surprise mark is displayed on the gold background in the right area. In this combination, as shown in FIG. 203 (c7-5-2), it is possible to obtain a golden "reach" notice icon YI. The golden "reach" notice icon is more reliable than the regular "reach" notice icon. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may be high.

  Note that even if the left area and the right area are both gold background in this way, only the same notice icon as the advance notice icon that can be acquired when both the left area and the right area are red background While making it impossible to do so, the gold background may be more likely to hit the red background than the red background for the preread target change.

  Further, the display of the roulette RLT and the stocked notice icon YI may be contradictory. For example, although the display of roulette RLT is "reach" and "?", The notice icon YI is a notice icon of "reach", or the display of roulette RLT is "reach" and "!" The notice icon YI may be a notice icon of "SP" indicating super reach, or the notice icon YI may be a green icon although the background is a gold background in the display of the roulette RLT. Such contradiction may cause the big hit symbol to be more likely to be finally determined and displayed, or the lost symbol may eventually be more likely to be determined, rather than having no contradiction. In addition, even if the background is a gold background in the display of the roulette RLT, the jackpot confirmation may be made if the notice icon YI is a green display icon.

  Also, re-variation of the roulette may be performed. For example, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at “reach” and “x”, the right area may be changed again to finally become a combination of “reach” and “!”. In addition, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "?", By changing the left region again, the combination may finally be a combination of "SP" and "?". Furthermore, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at the “box” icon and “× 1” shown in FIG. 177 (a), the icon of the “red box” and It may be a combination of x 2 ". Furthermore, even if only one of the left area and the right area is fluctuating and the other is stopped, the other stopped may be revaried.

  As described above, although the roulette effect has been described, in the example here, all icon names are “reach”, but the same applies to the names of various notice icons YI shown in FIG. However, depending on the icon name, only the question mark or only the question mark or cross mark is displayed on the green background color, or only the surprise mark or only the surprised mark or cross mark is displayed on the red and golden background colors. It is also good. Furthermore, No. 1 shown in FIG. 5 and No. 23 and No. The icon name of the notice icon leading to the big hit determination such as 24 may not be combined with the question mark. That is, only the combination of "cardboard" and "cross mark", or the combination of "cardboard" and "surprise mark" may be displayed. In addition, the icon name of the notice icon (for example, "red chance" of No. 3 or "super hot" of No. 4 or "iron plate" of No. 5) leading to the relative reliability of the big hit becoming relatively high In the case of the name), it may be combined with only "the surprise mark". Further, the icon name of the notice icon leading to the big hit determination may be rainbow color (the seventh display mode) for both the background color of the icon name and the background color of the mark (symbol).

  In addition, the mark (symbol) may be notified by the background color of the icon name of the advance notice icon (for example, the icon name of the “iron plate” of No. 5) leading to the big hit determination. For example, if the background color of the "iron plate" which stopped earlier is green, it is a notice that the stop of the cross mark may also be possible, and if it is rainbow, the stop of the surprise mark is determined It is also good.

  Furthermore, the icon name (the left area in this example) may always stop first, or the mark (the right area in this example) may always stop first. In addition, the cross mark may not be stopped if the mark stops first when it is not known which stop first.

  In addition, when the notice icon is stocked in the roulette effect, the notice icon may be used by all means.

  Subsequently, an example of effect accompanied by a button operation will be described.

  In FIG. 203 (a1), the symbol variation display of the pre-reading object is performed in a state where there is no suspension of the special drawing, and only one notice icon “I” of “box” is stocked in the stock area SS. . In FIG. 203 (a2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked advance notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting to operate the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is comprised by meter MT. Note that the timing in FIG. 181 (A 31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation valid period, and the operation valid period It may be displayed at the same time as the start of.

  The operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (Aa3), and the display time when a little time has passed after the operation valid period has started since the operation valid period starts and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. It is indicated by.

  The timing in FIG. 203 (a5) is within the above-mentioned operation effective period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, in FIG. 203 (Aa 6), as shown in FIG. 203 (A a7) after the notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF 13, The effect image EF 13 disappears, and the notice icon YI which is the mode a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation (box open animation) is displayed.

  The change of the notice icon YI to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation is performed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be performed if the validity period has expired.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 203 (D8), the notice icon YI changes from the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed. In (a) of FIG. 203, the notice display YH of “change in red” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the fluctuation icon which has been the default display form (first display form) is blue The display mode (third display mode) is changed.

  In FIG. 203 (d) a10, the operation promotion notification image is displayed again on the left side of the stock notice icon YI, and then the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter shown in FIG. The MT is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the start of the operation effective period.

  The timing in FIG. 203 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, in FIG. 203 (Aa13), the notice icon YI changes to a mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" from the inside It has been released. Then, in FIG. 203 (d) a notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed mode a.

  In this example, although the operation promotion notification image is displayed each time, the operation promotion notification image is not displayed, and so-called back button effect may be performed.

  FIG. 204 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the notice icon YI of “button” changes in accordance with the button operation, and another example.

  In FIG. 204 (b1), a super reach presentation of VS Kenshi reach is executed, and an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the Ken Osa of the enemy character is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in FIG. 204 (b1), the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 21 "buttons" is stocked. In FIG. 204 (b2), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in FIG. 204 (b3), the central region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is enlarged. After the button image 136a is displayed, the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller and a remaining time display meter MT is added (FIG. 204 (b4)). Further, in this example, a character of “double hit” requiring continuous operation of the chance button 136 and a confrontation meter MTV indicating superiority or inferiority of Yoshimune and Ken-Asu are also displayed. The confrontation meter MTV is a blue meter on the Yoshimune side (left side) and a red meter on the sword side (right side). At the start of the display of the confrontation meter MTV, the blue meter is half and the red meter is half. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (b4), the operation valid period is not started, and the display according to the button operation is not performed even if the button is operated. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation effective period starts (FIG. 204 (b 5)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 204 (b6) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. Although the confrontation meter MTV is overlapped by part of the fluctuation icon h0, the confrontation meter MTV may be displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon h0, and the confrontation is made at a position where the fluctuation icon h0 does not overlap. A meter MTV may be displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 204 (b7) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (b8), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button", and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. However, here, the effect image EF11 does not notify that the notice icon YI will be used from now.

  Since a continuous hit operation is required, the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (b9). Then, in FIG. 204 (b10), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. This effect image EF11 disappears immediately (FIG. 204 (b11)), and the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing shown in FIG. 204 (e12). Then, in FIG. 204 (b13), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. If the interval between the player's button operations becomes short, addition and disappearance of the effect image EF11 to the notice icon YI are performed at high speed, and the effect image EF11 appears to be always on.

  The blue meter of the confrontation meter MTV increases in accordance with the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. However, in this confrontation meter MTV, when the operation effective period is started, the red meter of the swordsman automatically increases according to the passage of time. If the chance button 136 is hit continuously so as not to lose the speed of increase of the red meter, the increase of the red meter is overwhelmed by the increase of the blue meter, and the blue meter is increased. As shown in FIG. 204 (b13), when everything is blue, a cut-in image CI3 of Yoshimune appears as shown in FIG. 204 (b13). On the other hand, when everything is a red meter, a cut-in image of swordsman not shown here appears.

  The timing at which the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button" may not be every time the chance button 136 is operated once, but may be every time the blue meter is increased by one division in the confrontation meter MTV.

  Subsequently, an example in which the stock number of the advance notice icon YI is displayed will be described.

  FIG. 204 (o a1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (a 9-1), and the icon of the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 204 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the villager character of the variation icon h0 having won. That is, the No. shown in FIG. 177 (a) displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of "box" 1 is outputted from its appearance area AS and temporarily displayed in a large size. At this stage, the display of the stock number (here, “stock × 1”) is started between the second decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second reserved number display. That is, before the notice icon YI reaches the stock area SS, the display of the stock number is started, and it is unclear if how many notice icons can be obtained by merely looking at the appearance area AS. Before the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, it is possible to know the number acquired by displaying this stock number. In FIG. 204 (Oa3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 204 (Oa3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

  After that, the reserve is digested, and in the state of symbol variation display in the state where the special figure is not reserved, in FIG. 204 (o a4), one notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS, and the stock number is displayed. Is also "stock x 1".

  In FIG. 204 (o a5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” is fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 204 (a6), the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “change” is released from the box. Since the notice icon YI is used as described above, the display of the stock number is once "stock x 0" (Fig. 204 (o a6)) and the stock number display itself disappears (Fig. 204). (O a7)). Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 181 (A33). When the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, the display of the stock number does not change, and in this case, "stock x 1" continues to be displayed. In addition, even if the same notice icon YI is used repeatedly, if it is used once, the display of the stock number may be temporarily changed to "stock x 0" and then returned to "stock x 1" immediately. . In addition, when the stock number of the advance notice icon becomes 0, “stock × 0” may not be displayed, and the display itself of the stock number may be erased as shown in FIG. 204 (a7).

  Also, a plurality of stock areas SS may be provided. In the example shown below, two stock areas SS are provided: a first stock area SSR on the right side and a second stock area SSL on the left side.

  FIG. 204 (O b1) is also in the same state as shown in FIG. 180 (A 9-1), and the icon of the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 204 (Oa 2), stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the notice icon YI of “box” comes out of the appearance area AS and is temporarily displayed large. After that, the notice icon YI of "box" is stocked one by one in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side (Fig. 204 (a a3)). An animation in which the notice icon YI of “box” is split may be displayed, or may be displayed instantaneously in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side. The number of obtained notice icons YI is one.

  After this, the reserve is digested, and the state in the symbol variation display in the state where the reserve of the special figure is lost is also shown in FIG. 204 (O b4), also in the first stock region SSL on the left, the second stock region SSR on the right. Also, the notice icon YI of "box" is stocked one by one.

  In FIG. 204 (o b5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” is fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used. At this time, only one of the two notice icons YI may be used. In addition, an effect of telling which notice icon YI is used (which box is open) or an effect of giving notice may be performed. Here, both notice icons YI are used simultaneously. That is, as shown in FIG. 204 (Ob6), both notice icons YI simultaneously change to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “change” is released from the respective boxes. Then, as shown in FIG. 204 (a7), the two notice icons YI disappear at the same time.

  FIG. 205 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect continued from FIG. 204 and an example in which the same advance notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

  In FIG. 205 (o b8) continued from FIG. 204 (o b7), the notice displays YH of “change” emitted to the left and right respectively change to the light ball YHb. Therefore, one light ball YHb is displayed on the left and one on the right. In FIG. 205 (o b9), the left light ball YHb and the right light ball YHb both fly toward the fluctuation icon h0, become one at the fluctuation icon h0, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 An animation that changes is displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 205 (b10) changes from the first display mode to the third display mode. This is changed by two steps, since it is based on the notice icon YI for two minutes. Note that only one step may be changed. Thereafter, the process continues to FIG. 181 (37).

  In addition, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the method of stocking the advance notice icon YI. That is, normally, stocking is performed in order from a fixed position of the stock area SS. For example, stocking is performed in the order of the first stock position, the second stock position, and the third stock position. However, contrary to this order, it may be possible to stock in the order of the third stock position, the second stock position, and the first stock position, and in such anomalous case, in the normal case In comparison, the jackpot reliability may be higher or lower. Also, while normally stocked in both the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side, anomalously, only one stock area (for example, the second stock area SSL on the left side) May be stocked only). In such anomalous cases, the jackpot reliability may be higher or lower than in the normal case. Furthermore, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on which of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. For example, if the first stock area SSR on the right side is normal and is prioritized, the jackpot may be more reliable if it is stocked in the second stock area SSL on the left side Or vice versa.

  Moreover, even when the obtained notice icon YI is a notice icon of “white”, when displaying the white notice icon YI in the respective areas SSL and SSR, both of the notice icons YI of white are displayed and The white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI may be displayed. In the latter case, expectations may be given to the notice display YH emitted from the obtained notice icon YI. For example, in the case where both the white notice icons YI are displayed, the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. When the notice display of the “change” of the default color of 6 is released, but the white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI are displayed, the No. 6 shown in FIG. There may be a case where the notice display of the red "red change" of 7 is released.

  Fig. 205 (Oc 1) to Fig. 205 (O d) are diagrams showing an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (Oc1), a background screen which has been omitted so far is displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 189 (A 1-2-1). The background screen of the sea is displayed as well. In FIG. 205 (Oc1), the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is displayed in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and the icon change notice display IYH of "bancho" is shown in FIG. Similarly to the "bancho" icon change notice display IYH shown in a4), the No. 1 shown in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of "change" of 6 has been acquired.

  In FIG. 205 (Oc2), the notice icon YI of "Change" is moved to the stock area SS, and in the figure (Oc3), it is displayed in the stock area SS. Further, in this example, a band icon OBI is displayed on the left side of the background screen, and the name of the obtained notice icon YI (here, “change”) is also displayed on the band icon OBI. Therefore, in this example, the display regarding the acquired advance notice icon YI is performed at two places. In addition, since the band icon OBI is an icon displayed on the background screen, any display (for example, the display of the first decorative symbol, the display of the second decorative symbol, or the second hold icon h12 to 4 Displayed on the back side of the display of the hold icon h14 and the like).

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 205 (Oc 4), after the symbol variation display is finished and the combination of the decoration symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (O c 5), the symbol variation display as the prefetching object variation is It has been started. When the symbol change display as the preread target change is started, the notice icon YI is used. In FIG. 205 (Oc6-1), the variation icon change animation using the notice icon YI is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 205 (Oc6-1), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "Change", and in the figure (Oc7), the notice icon YI of "Change" which has been stocked is It disappears. Subsequently, in FIG. 205 (Oc8), the ball of light is flying from the stock area SS with a fluctuating icon h0, and hits the fluctuating icon h0. As shown in FIG. 205 (c9), the fluctuation icon h0 in which the light ball collides is changed to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking). On the other hand, no effect is performed in the band icon OBI, and no change occurs in the display of the name of the acquired advance notice icon YI displayed in the band icon OBI. However, even with the band icon OBI, some animation such as a variation icon change animation may be executed, and some change (for example, blinking display, display color change, etc.) may occur in the display of the name of the obtained advance notice icon YI.

  The notice icon YI in the stock area SS disappears prematurely with use, but the band icon OBI is displayed at least until the fluctuation icon h0 actually changes, as shown in FIG. 205 (O c10). , After the change of the fluctuation icon h0 has disappeared.

  The example shown in FIG. 205 (Oc6-2-1) is an example in which the notice icon YI of "change" is reused. In the figure (O c6-2-1) continuing from FIG. 205 (O c6-1), the notice display of the notice icon “YI” up to now is the notice display of “change” in the mode b shown in FIG. Although it has changed to YH, in the same figure (O c6-2-2), it returns to the notice icon YI and becomes usable. In FIG. 205 (Oc6-2-3), the reach effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (Oc6-2-3), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. When the normal reach effect is started, the background screen of the sea is switched to the background screen of the normal reach effect, and along with this, the band icon OBI in which the name of the obtained notice icon YI is displayed disappears. On the other hand, even during the normal reach effect, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS continues to be displayed.

  In FIG. 205 (O c6-2-5), the normal reach effect is over, and a background screen of the sea is displayed again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a band icon in which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed. The display of OBI has also been revived. Thus, the display of the band icon OBI in which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed is displayed across the reach effect. After that, the display of the band icon OBI disappears before the finalized display shown in FIG. 205 (O c6-2-7) to the same figure (O c6-2-8) is performed during swing fluctuation of the decorative symbol. . In addition, the display of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS also disappears. In this example, there is no subsequent hold, and it can be seen that the display related to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI in the stock area SS) has disappeared, but there is a subsequent hold. Also, before the finalized display, the display related to the notice icon YI (the display of the band icon OBI, the display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) may disappear or, conversely, if there is a subsequent hold, the notice The display regarding the icon YI may be continuously displayed until the finalized display.

  FIG. 205 (D) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. In this example, in addition to the display of the notice icon YI in the stock area SS, the display using the band icon OBI is also performed. That is, display by one band icon OBI is performed for one notice icon YI.

  Although the band icon OBI has been displayed as a background display in the example so far, in the example shown in FIG. 206 (e), the display area of the first decorative symbol is narrowed by the band icon OBI. The display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the band icon OBI.

  In the example shown in FIG. 206 (Of), the display area of the first decorative symbol is 1 because the three notice icons YI which are the maximum stock number are stocked and the three band icons OBI are displayed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the notice icon YI which is narrowed to about 4/4 and displayed in stock. However, the first decorative symbol may be prioritized, and the first decorative symbol may overlap with the notice icon YI. Note that the second pending number display is not overlapped with the band icon OBI. In addition, the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are also visible. In this example, although the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the holding frame UI, the variation icon h0, and the holding icon are narrowed, the display of the second decorative symbol, the second holding number display, and the stock are displayed. The display of the notice icon YI is not narrowed. In addition, as an example of the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the holding frame UI, the fluctuation icon h0, the holding icon, various notice displays (for example, the above-mentioned conversation notice It is possible to enumerate image CI1, conversational image CI2 of mini, mini game, icon change notice, timer notice effect, meter display (white meter MW mentioned above, meter display MD mentioned later etc), etc. That is, band icon OBI The display narrowed by the display of may be all of the above listed, while some of those listed above may not be applied, and a display not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI As an example, the display of the second decorative symbol, the second number of reservations display, the notice icon YI stocked, the bar for volume control Indication VB, display of mode name set to ON in effect customization (for example, mode name displayed in the frame RW and frame RW at the upper right of the screen described above), various error displays (description using FIG. 172 to FIG. 174) Display related to various errors (indications and warnings), the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI, “the current level of the tomo mode (here level 1) and the experience shown in FIG. 132 (e1) It is possible to enumerate the display of the value (EXP) (here 0), the display of simultaneous effects, etc. That is, as the display that can not be narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, all of the above listed items can be listed. On the other hand, some of the above listed ones may not be applicable.

  FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of effects and the like by the configuration in which the display means is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Up to this point, the description has been made centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the following description). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and the arrangement is the same even in the vertical arrangement. That is, it is not the case that the technology described in this specification can not be applied merely by the difference in hardware configuration, and viewed from a technical idea, even if the arrangement of the display means is horizontally arranged, vertically arranged Even if there is, it is applicable. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical alignment of the display means, a description will be made using an example in which the display means is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the display means disposed below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M '.

  A fourth display means 208M 'disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown in FIG. 206 (f1). The fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 206 (car a1) is in the state at the initial position. The fourth display means 208M 'is surrounded by a frame fm around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M' in the initial position is the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlap from the front side. The fourth display means 208M 'is disposed on the front side (player's side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position where the display screen central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps from the front side It can be moved from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display means 208M 'in FIG. 206 (car a2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M 'is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. Further, in addition to the raising and lowering operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. In addition, as a modification of the fourth display means 208M ', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

  In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 206 (car a1), a holding frame UI' having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI that has been displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed It is done. The holding frame UI 'also has a holding icon display area HIS', a variation icon display area CIS ', and an effect icon display area DIS'. A pedestal hs0 'is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS'. The reserved icon display area HIS 'is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS', and four stages (first stage hs1 'to fourth stage hs4') are arranged above the left base icon bIl '. The effect icon display area DIS 'is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS', and the right base icon bIr 'is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS'.

  Further, in the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 206 (car a1), the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1' and the second stage hs2 '. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 179 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. In the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS ', the variation icon h0 is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

Furthermore, a background screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (car a1). This background screen is a background screen of the sea. On the other hand, the background screen of the fourth display means 208M 'is all white, but this one white color indicates that the background screen is not shown. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (f1) Then, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is in high-speed fluctuation. The state of FIG. 206 (car a1) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (A1).

  In FIG. 206 (car a2), there is a ball entry in the special view 1 start opening 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (car a2), the number-of-holds of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3". According to the increase in the reserve of this special view, or regardless of the increase in the reserve of this special view, in the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. The icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are both No. 179 (a) in FIG. It changes to the icon of aspect a of the villager type described in 17. In addition, the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3 '. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by the increase animation in the default display mode, the third hold indicated by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold of the prefetch notice. The state of FIG. 206 (car a2) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (A 3-1).

  In the right base icon bIr ′ of the effect icon display area DIS ′ in the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 (f3), an aspect a of the type of pant shown in FIG. 178 (c) as the opponent icon TI. The icon of the mode of waiting is displayed. Also, in the upper left corner, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and in the inside, the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. The state of FIG. 206 (car a3) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (ar 6).

  In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 206 (Ka4), the mini game B is played with a jack-on-bell match, and the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the panda character of the opponent icon TI and appears The stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the area AS has been started. That is, the notice icon YI of the "box" displayed in the appearance area AS comes out of the appearance area AS and is temporarily displayed in a large size. The state of FIG. 206 (car a4) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (ch 10).

  A stock area SS is also prepared for stocking the notice icon YI in the fourth display means 208M ', and in the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 206 (key a5), notice is made in the stock area SS. The icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 206 (car a5) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (am 11).

  In (206) of FIG. 206, the state of symbol variation display in a state in which the reservation of the reservation progresses and the reservation of the special drawing disappears is shown. The symbol change display performed here is a symbol change display that is a pre-reading target change. Note that the panda character of the opponent icon TI and the appearance area AS also disappear. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 is a default display mode. The state of FIG. 206 (car a6) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 180 (24).

  In FIG. 206 (key a7), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a with the box closed is used, the mode changes to the embodiment d with the box opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is released from the box, In the diagram (f8), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. After appearance, the notice display YH disappears when a predetermined display period elapses, and in FIG. 206 (key a9), the notice display YH of “reach” disappears. After this, reach effect may be performed or may not be performed. In addition, when reach production is performed, notice display YH of "reach" may continue to be displayed until reach production is started.

  Subsequently, modified examples will be described. FIG. 206 (car a4) is the same, and in FIG. 206 (car a5 '), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the stock animation of the notice icon YI here, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS of the fourth display means 208M ′ moves from the fourth display means 208M ′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation is played back. At this time, there is a period in which the advance notice icon YI is displayed across the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, without crossing over the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation jumps (instantly moves) from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L at a stretch. It is also good.

  The fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 206 (car a2') has moved from the initial position shown by the dotted line to the operation position, covering the central region of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side There is. The fourth display means 208M 'may move from the initial position before the start of the mini game, may move simultaneously with the start of the mini game, may move during the mini game, You may move after the end of the mini game only if you win the game. In addition, before the result of the mini game comes out, it may move as a notice of the result of the mini game. In this case, moving may be easier to win the mini game or may be more difficult to win than the non-moving. The fourth display means M 'may be configured to be stationary at the operation position across one or a plurality of symbol variation displays during the mini game. Here, when a mini game is played across a plurality of symbol variation displays, an initial position (or an operating position from an operation position until a result of a mini game in the symbol variation display comes out and each symbol variation display ends) The fourth display means M ′ may be configured to move to a position different from the operation position and the initial position). Further, the fourth display means M 'is configured not to move from the operating position during symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, the fourth display means M 'may move from the operating position during symbol stop display. In addition, the fourth display means M 'is at least a part of or all of the periods during which the symbol variation display is determined and displayed even while moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position. , Is configured to remain stationary. The movement may be continued or stopped in the state of temporary stop in the pseudo-series effect or in the state of swing fluctuation before the finalized display. In addition, the stop operation may be performed as described above only when the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the fourth display means M '. Furthermore, the fourth display means M 'may be configured to stop at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or the predetermined stop position in synchronization with the timing when the symbol variation display is determined and displayed.

  FIG. 206 (f1) shows an example where the initial position of the fourth display means 208M 'is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the holding frame UI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the mini game is also played on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (ka b1), an icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is displayed. In addition, a background image is displayed on the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 206 (f1) without being shown. On the fourth display means 208M 'shown in the next FIG. 206 (car b2), the name ("change" in this case) of the stocked advance notice icon YM is displayed as a band icon OBI'. That is, when the notice icon YM is stocked, its name is also displayed on the fourth display means 208M '. In addition, the display method is not limited to the band icon OBI ', and may be the entire screen.

  In the example shown in FIG. 206 (ka b3 '), a band icon OBI' 'is displayed from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon OBI '' displays a stocked notice The name of the icon YM (here, "change") is shown. The name of the notice icon YM in the band icon OBI '' is displayed across the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, the band icon OBI is displayed while narrowing the display area of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 205 (Oe) and FIG. The way is applicable. That is, the part displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L of the band icon OBI ′ ′ narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. In addition, also when the 4th display means 208M 'moves and the area | region which overlaps with the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L is expanded, it is a 1st decorative symbol displayed on the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L. The display area may be narrowed similarly to the movement of the fourth display means 208M '.

  The fourth display means 208M 'described above can be replaced by the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51 or the like, or can be replaced by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or other display means (for example, , A light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I described later, etc.).

  Subsequently, a rendering example using other rendering means will be described.

  The state shown in FIG. 206 (ka c1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A7), and in the following FIG. 199 (ka c2), the mini game exclusive features are on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 225 have appeared. The mini game B is played not only by the character of the villager of the variation icon h 0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, but also by the mini game special feature 225. In the mini game special feature 225, the left side is the villager character of the variation icon h0, and the right side is the panda character of the opponent icon TI. The directing operation of the mini game special feature 225 may be started after the start of the jangken confrontation animation, may be started simultaneously with the start of the jangken confrontation animation, or is started before the jangken confrontation animation is started. It may be In addition, when the mini game is won, an effect for boosting the victory may be performed by the mini game special feature 225, or another movable effect means (for example, the fourth display means 208M 'or FIG. 115). It may be performed by the movable effect by the one thousand box character product 224H etc.) or may be performed by the light emission effect by the light emitting means.

  Further, other display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I described later, etc.) are also related to the mini game. An effect may be performed.

  FIGS. 206 (d1) to (d5) are diagrams showing examples of effects using the POV display 224I.

  In this example, a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body described with reference to FIG. 116 is provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be capable of overlapping on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The state shown in FIG. 206 (f1) to FIG. 206 (f3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A7) to FIG. 180 (A9-1), and in FIG. The state is the same as the state shown in 180 (9-1), that is, the mini-game B is played in a jian-jing match, and the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 wins over the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 206 (ca. d4), the POV display 224I appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pattern and "GET" of the notice icon YI obtained by winning the mini game are displayed on the POV display 224I. Is displayed. Here, even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area thereof The effect display may be performed. Further, in the state during acceleration from when the POV display 224I reaches the stationary state to the constant speed state, and the state during deceleration before the constant speed state returns to the stationary state, the display area is more visible than in the constant speed state. The effect display may be performed in the above display area even in a state during acceleration or a state during deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in a state during acceleration or a state during deceleration. In addition, in the state of accelerating or decelerating, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I more noticeable. It is also good. Alternatively, in the acceleration state, effect display may be performed on the display area, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached.

  In FIG. 206 (d d), the POV display 224I returns from the position on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the initial position, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easily visible. .

  FIG. 207 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 51 and the like.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (cal e1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 207 (cal e1) are in the initial positions of each other and are in the opened state (a separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device The 208L display screen is visible.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (car e2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (ch 3-1), and the state shown in FIG. 207 (car e3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. is there.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (key e4) is a state in which the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 207 (cal e4) remains stopped but the second decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N In the second number-of-holds display, which is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variable number display is started, and the number of holdings of the special view 1 is reduced by one to “2”.

  In FIG. 207 (key e5), the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started, and the effect image EF1 'is divided and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 207 (key e6), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which were at the initial position so far, are beginning to approach each other and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L A second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap at both ends of the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 207 (Ca 7), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact and completely closed, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not visible. . When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other, the effect image EF1 'divided so far is displayed as one.

  In FIG. 207 (key e8), the effect image EF1 ′ disappears, the villager character of the variation icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the panda of the opponent icon TI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The character of is displayed. In the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and among them, the No. 1 shown in FIG. 177 (a) is displayed. The notice icon YI of 1 "box" is displayed. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the number of times the mini-game B is confronted (here, “first time”) is shown on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. Although the number indication here indicates the current number of confrontation, it may be an indication (for example, “three more times”) of giving a notice of how many times the fight will be performed after this. According to this example, the hold icon is hidden.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (key e9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (3-7), and the mini game B's rock-solid confrontation is started.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (f10) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A9-1), and the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state of winning over the panda character of the opponent icon TI. .

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (cal e11) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 180 (A10), and stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The notice icon YI is temporarily displayed large so as to straddle the device 208N. A part of the villager character of the variation icon h0 and a part of the panda character of the opponent icon TI are also overlapped by a part of the notice icon YI displayed largely.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (car e12) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 180 (A11), and the notice icon YI is the first stock in the stock area SS provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed on the position (stock display). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS are displayed on different symbol display devices, but may be displayed on the same symbol display means.

  In the state shown in FIG. 207 (key e13), the character of the villager of the fluctuation icon h0 disappears due to the end of the battle of the mini game B in the symbol fluctuation display currently performed, and the character of the panda of the opponent icon TI disappears. Is waiting for a jaunting confrontation in the next change, and is performing a waiting animation. Although the variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not visible here, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are opened, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is When the display screen becomes visible, the fluctuation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS '.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (key e14) is a state in which the symbol variation display is ended, and the panda character of the opponent icon TI still continues the standby animation. Eventually, when the next change is started, the character of the villager of the change icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, as the character of the variation icon h0, the No. 1 character shown in FIG. No. 18 characters of the nephew. It is also a 19 Yoshimune character. Then, a second jaunt fight is held.

  Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured not to move from the operating position during symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may move from the operating position during symbol stop display. In addition, even in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, even during movement between the initial position and the maximum movement position, at least one of the periods during which the symbol variation display is finalized and displayed. It is configured to remain stationary for some or all of the periods. The movement may be continued or stopped in the state of temporary stop in the pseudo-series effect or in the state of swing fluctuation before the finalized display. In addition, only when the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed by the second decoration symbol display device 208M, or only when the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed by the third decoration symbol display device 208N, You may make it stop operation like this. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are stopped at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or the predetermined stop position in synchronization with the timing when the symbol variation display is determined and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

  The state shown in FIG. 207 (key e15) corresponds to the No. 1 state shown in FIG. 177 (a) in the appearance area AS. Although the notice icon YI of “red box” 2 is displayed, the villager character of the fluctuation icon h0 is lost to the panda character of the opponent icon TI in the second jangken confrontation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 207 (key e15), “second time” is shown on the panda character of the opponent icon TI as the display of the number of times the mini game B is played. .

  In (207) of FIG. 207, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are straddled to notify that the rock-solid match has ended. In FIG. 207 (key e17), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which have been closed so far begin to open, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be seen. In FIG. 207 (cal e 18), both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 N have returned to their initial positions, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L shown in FIG. 207 (cal e 18) The combination of the decorative design of the loss of 4 "-" decoration 4 "-" decoration 7 "is displayed.

  The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above can be replaced by the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206, and other display means (for example, the light guide plate IL, described later) Can be replaced with the POV display 224I).

  Also, in the above description, the notice display of "change" of the default color shown in FIG. 177 (b) is the display of the notice that raises the level of the display mode by one step, and the first display mode (default display mode) If it is displayed, it warns that it will change to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking), and in fact it has also changed to the second display mode (display mode of white blinking), but the first display Only when the display mode is selected in the mode (default display mode), the display may be changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) by displaying a two-step advance notice. When the display mode is the second display mode (display mode of white blinking) or more, it is a display of an advance notice to be raised by one stage, and only one step is actually changed.

  In addition, during the execution of a certain mini game, the notice icon may be stocked by another notice different from the mini game, but during the execution of the mini game it is possible by the notice different from the mini game. The notice icon may be configured not to be stocked.

  In addition, it may be notified in advance that there is a possibility that a mini game will occur (for example, by a mini game preparation display or a telop display described as “mini game high probability”).

  In addition, before the mini game is started or while the mini game is being executed, another notice (for example, “Tip notice icon obtained with high certainty” or the like) is displayed that the notice icon is likely to be obtained. ) May be notified. Here, the situation in which the advance notice icon is likely to be acquired indicates that the advance notice icon is easier to be acquired than in the case where the other advance notice is not notified that the advance notice icon is likely to be acquired.

  In addition, when a notice icon is stocked in a certain combination (for example, when a maximum of three notice icons can be stocked, a combination in which "box", "red box", "gold box" are stocked, or "gold box") The combination may be configured such that a big hit is determined in the symbol variation display in which all the advance notice icons are digested. In this case, the notice icon may be used as an icon related to the advance notice, or may be used as an icon related to the normal notice.

  Note that, in a mini game for acquiring a notice icon, a notice of the change may be given. For example, when the carpet shown in FIG. 186 (e.g. 13) is stationary, but an animation is displayed such that the carpet escapes from the arrow, the graphic of the animation is displayed at that time. It corresponds to a notice (usually a notice) about a big hit in the variable display. Moreover, if the display of this animation is a display with a low appearance rate, it may be a notice of a big hit decision.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 186 (ア ニ メ ー シ ョ ン 13), an animation in which the carpet escapes from the arrow is displayed, and although the super reach effect is performed due to the change, if the move is lost due to the change The mini game A may end. In this case, the icon of Yoshimune (bow), which was the first hold icon h11, may be changed to the hold icon of the default display mode, or the icon of Yoshimune (bow) may remain. When the icon of Yoshimune (bow) remains, it becomes a hold icon corresponding to white blink (second display mode level). Further, the change timing to the default display mode may be during the super reach (for example, during the wipe effect). Also, at the start of the next change, it may be displayed as a default change icon h0. Furthermore, when an animation is displayed such as a carpet fleeing from an arrow, the icon of Yoshimune (bow) that was the fluctuating icon h0 may disappear during the above-mentioned super reach (for example, during the wipe effect) or the above-mentioned super During reach (for example, during wipe effect), it may disappear once and be redisplayed in the default display mode.

  In addition, it is a big hit in the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons are digested when b (a <b) stock of notice icons is stocked than when a pieces (a is an integer of 0 or more) are stocked. It may be configured to be easy.

  FIG. 208 is a diagram showing the effect example using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 179 (b) step by step.

  In FIG. 208 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is changing at high speed, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 208 (A2-1), the numbers shown in FIG. An icon IHI of “red bomber” 5 appears at the right end of the screen, and an icon change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "red bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. In the icon change animation, while the icon IHI of "red bomber" flies from right to left, a bullet is fired with a hold icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be paused in front of the target holding icon. In addition, this pause may be pause of the cassette that disguises the target icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" performs animation passing through the stock area SS described above. Here, when the notice icon is stocked, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be overlapped by the stocked notice icon, and conversely, the notice stocked by the icon IHI of the "red bomber" The icons may be overlapped.

  In FIG. 208 (A3-1), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" is composed of a red bomber icon RBI and a red bullet icon BTI. The goal here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 208 (A4-1), the bullet icon BTI overlaps with the first reserved icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 208 (A5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 208 (A6), the effect image EF 14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode (fifth display mode) which is the same display mode as the “red bomber”. It is in the process of changing, and in the same figure (A7), the change is completed. In this example, the icon change animation is an animation from FIG. 208 (A2-1) to the immediately before FIG. (A7). In this example, after the icon IHI of "red bomber" disappears from the screen, the display mode change of the icon is completed, but before the icon IHI of "red bomber" disappears from the screen, The display mode change may be completed, or the icon display mode change may be completed at the same time as the “red bomber” icon IHI disappears from the screen.

  The red bomber icon RBI may be configured to be necessarily fired a red bullet icon BTI, or may be configured to be fired a bullet icon BTI of another color. In this case, the changing mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the bomber, and the changing mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the bullet. Alternatively, when the gold bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, the color of the upper one (here, gold) may determine the change mode of the icon, or the lower one (here The color of the icon may be determined by the color of red).

  In FIG. 208 (A1 '), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. Of the two hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the green display mode (the fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode (the first display mode). It is displayed. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 208 (A2 '), the No. 1 shown in FIG. The “bomber” icon IHI of 4 appears at the right end of the screen (displayed), and an icon change animation is started. Also in the icon change animation here, the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 208 (A5 ')), as in the previous example. In this example, since the icon IHI of "bomber" is used as the display of the icon change notice, the display mode is raised by one step for the green display mode (the fourth display mode). In FIG. 208 (A7), the first hold icon h11 that is the green display mode (the fourth display mode) is changed to the red display mode (the fifth display mode). In addition, in the icon change animation by the icon IHI of the "bomber", if it is a reserved icon of the default display mode (the first display mode), white blink is skipped only for the first attack to promote to blue Can be raised by one step in the second and subsequent attacks, so to promote up to the hold icon in the red display mode (fifth display mode), a total of 3 attacks (default color → blue → Green → red) is required. The first attack may be configured to raise only one level (that is, default color → blink on white).

  FIG. 208 (A3-2-1) is a modification continuing from FIG. 208 (A2-1), and icon change animation using the icon IHI of “red bomber” is started. In this icon change animation, the target is the change icon h0 displayed in the default display mode. In FIG. 208 (A3-2-3), the bullet icon BTI hits the fluctuation icon h0, the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the same drawing (A3-2-4), the fluctuation icon h0 is red. To the display mode (fifth display mode).

  Although the example here is an example using the icon IHI of "red bomber", the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "bomber" shown in FIG. 208 (A2 ') also changes the icon h0 May be targeted. In this case, if the target is the change icon h0 displayed in the default display mode, the change icon h0 changes to the blue display mode, but the change icon h0 is displayed in the green display mode. If there is, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode.

  FIG. 208 (A4-2-1) is a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), and icon change animation using the icon “IHI of“ red bomber ”is started. In this icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 208 (A4-2-1) to the same figure (A4-2-3), the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI and then the icon It pauses in front of the target holding icon until the change of the display mode of the first holding icon h11 is finished. Then, as shown in FIG. 208 (A4-2-4) to FIG. (A4-2-6), the icon RBI of the red bomber faces the left end of the screen when the change in the display mode of the icon is completed. I will fly away.

  FIG. 208 (A2-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 208 (A1-1). However, in this modification, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a display mode (second display mode) of blinking in white. The display mode of white blinking may be a display mode that suggests that the display mode may change after the start of display. That is, in the second display mode (display mode of blinking white), the display mode is more likely to change after the start of display than in the first display mode, and the display mode is likely to change after the start of display than the third display mode. It may be In the state where the icon of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking) is displayed, when the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 179 (b) is displayed (for example, the icon IHI of “red bomber” is When it appears, attention is focused on the icon of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking).

  In FIG. 208 (A2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first holding icon h11, and the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and in FIG. The first hold icon h11 is changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

  In addition, the icon of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking) does not change, but the other icon (in this case, the second hold icon h12 which is the icon next to the first hold icon h11, or The variation icon h0) may change, or the other icons may change along with the icon of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking). In addition, even when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, there may be a case where a change in the display mode of the icon does not occur (case of effect). Or, conversely, when the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the display mode of the icon may be changed without fail. When the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon next to the icon of the second display mode (for example, if the icon of the second display mode is the first hold icon, the second hold icon). It may be notified that it may be an icon). Here, based on the first hold icon h11 of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking), only the icon next thereto (the second hold icon h12 or the change icon h0) may be changed, or the first Although it has been described that the icon next to the holding icon h11 may change along with the holding icon h11, the display mode may not be a versatile display mode such as the second display mode, but may be another mode (for example, a tank mode). In the case of a tank, it may be foreseen that the icon to which the main gun of that tank points may change. Also, in place of the aspect of the tank, No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (a). No. 10 may have a display mode of “timer” type. Display mode of No. 8 “Button A” type and No. It may be a display mode of the type of "button B" of 9.

  FIG. 209 is a view showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 209 (A3-3-1) is a modified example continued from FIG. 208 (A2-1), and is an example in which the icon change animation is not started even when the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears. That is, in this example, the icon non-changing animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the icon invariable animation here, the bullet icon BTI is not fired, and the red bomber icon RBI only flies over the holding frame UI (FIG. 209 (A3-3-1) to FIG. (A3-3-3)). Therefore, the aspect of all the displayed pending icons has not changed. Also, the form of the fluctuation icon h0 has not changed. In the icon non-changing animation, the icon IHI of “red bomber” may be hidden on the way.

  Even if the red bomber icon RBI is bypassed as in this example, all the pending icons (the default display mode is suspended, as compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear) The icon may also be a preview notice with a big hit and a high degree of confidence. Also, similarly, the fluctuation icon h0 may be a normal advance notice having a high jackpot reliability. Alternatively, if there is a hold icon for the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice such as the display mode of white blinking among the displayed icons, those hold icons are compared with when the red bomber icon RBI does not appear If the display mode of the fluctuation icon is the display mode of the normal notice, the fluctuation icon may be compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. , It may be a regular notice with high reliability of the jackpot.

  FIG. 209 (A3-4-1) is also a modification continuing from FIG. 208 (A2-1), and the icon non-changing animation is executed here as well. In this icon-invariant animation, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, but the bullet icon BTI does not hit any of the icons h0, h11, h12. That is, the red bullet icon BTI fired from the red bomber icon RBI flies above the hold icon as shown in FIG. 209 (A3-4-2) to FIG. (A3-4-4). Even if it disappears out of the screen or overlaps with the hold icon or the change icon, it may be left obliquely downward. Although the fired bullet icon BTI overlaps with an icon different from the target icon, it may fly off the screen without generating the effect image EF14. Furthermore, although the fired bullet icon BTI is a locus that overlaps the hold icon if the hold icon is displayed, the hold icon is not displayed (the dotted line in FIG. 209 (A3-4-3). Reference), it may be possible to fly off the screen through a track that does not overlap (does not hit) the hold icon. . In FIG. 209 (A3-4-4), the modes of all the displayed reserve icons have not changed.

  In FIG. 209 (A3-4-3), the red bomber icon RBI flies first out of the screen rather than the bullet icon BTI, but the opposite may be applied, or the same. It may be

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 209 (A3-3-1) to (A3-3-3) and in the examples shown in FIGS. 209 (A3-4-1) to (A3-4-4), Although the example used the icon IHI of "red bomber", there is also a case where an icon invariable animation using the icon IHI of "bomber" shown in FIG. 208 (A2 ') is executed. Furthermore, in the case of No. 1 shown in FIG. In some cases, an icon change animation or an icon non-change animation may be executed using the “gold bomber” icon of 6.

  In addition, although the bullet icon BTI is fired with the variation icon h0 as a target, there is also a case where icon non-change animation is executed which does not hit the variation icon h0 and does not hit any of the reserved icons h11 and h12.

  In addition, even if the display of the icon change notice such as the icon IHI of the "bomber" is displayed, the animation using the display of the icon change notice is not performed, and the displayed icon change notice displays the still. You may disappear after Furthermore, even if the icon change animation is not performed by the icon IHI of the "red bomber", or even when the icon change animation is not performed by the icon IHI of the "red bomber", the "red bomber "Red Bomber" icon IHI is displayed than when the icon IHI is not displayed, so that the icon displayed at the start of the symbol variation display can be easily changed to the "Red" display mode finally It may be configured, and the ease of change of the "red" display mode may be the same as when the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed.

  In addition, even if the pending change due to the display of the icon change notice fails, the pending of the target for which the pending change is attempted (in this example, the pending for the first pending icon h11) is not a pending change target. In the example, it may be a jackpot more likely to hit than the second hold icon h12). In addition, even if the hold icon of the same display mode (for example, the hold icon of the display mode of the white blink (the second display mode)), the change from white blink to blue fails and remains white blink The icon may be a read ahead notice with a higher hit probability than the white blinking hold icon which was not targeted for hold change. Also, similarly, the fluctuation icon h0 may be a normal advance notice having a high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 209 (A3-5-1) is also a modification continuing from FIG. 208 (A2-1), but here, an icon change that looks like an icon non-changing animation and finally a bullet icon BTI hits It is an example of animation. That is, the same scene (FIG. 209 (A3-5-2) as the scene of the previous icon non-changing animation (FIG. 209 (A3-4-2)) is displayed, but the bullet icon BTI returns and the first A hit on the hold icon h11 (in FIG. 209 (A3-5-3), the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF 14. After this, it is the same as FIG. 208 (A7). In the change animation, the same scene as the icon non-change animation is reproduced halfway, and the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI also coincides with the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI in the icon non-change animation, but it is completely different trajectory. You may come back through and hit the target icon, or the bullet icon BTI will disappear once from the screen After the, after the may come back to hit the target icon. Fig. 209 (A3-5-4), subsequent to FIG. 208 (A7).

  FIG. 209 (A3-6-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 208 (A2-1), but here, a button image is added to the display of the icon change advance notice, resulting in a combined effect with a button effect.

  First, a red bomber icon RBI appears, and an icon change animation or an icon non-change animation is started. After that, the red bomber icon RBI pauses in front of the target holding icon (FIG. 209 (A3-6-1)). Then, the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI (FIG. 209 (A3-6-2)). Here, although the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added, it may be added. In addition, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

  The timing shown in FIG. 209 (A3-6-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period, in FIG. 209 (A3-6-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The firing of the bullet icon BTI may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. . Also, the firing of the bullet icon BTI may be fired only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the firing of the bullet icon BTI is performed whether or not the chance button 136 is operated, but when the chance button 136 is not operated, compared to the case where the chance button 136 is operated, It may be difficult to hit the target icon, or if the chance button 136 is not operated, the target icon may never be hit. In addition, when the bullet icon BTI does not hit the target icon, another icon change animation or an icon non-change animation may be performed.

  FIG. 209 (A3-7-1) is also a modification following FIG. 208 (A2-1), but here, the first hold icon h11 is a mode of a button image. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (a). It is an icon of "button A" of 8. The icon of “button A” is an icon for giving notice that an icon change notice by button operation is to be performed. Subsequently, in FIG. 209 (A3-7-2), as in FIG. 209 (A3-6-2), the button image 136a is added to the icon RBI of the red bomber. Here, although the remaining time display meter MT is not added here, it may be added.

  The timing shown in FIG. 209 (A3-7-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 209 (A3-7-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation effective period. The bullet icon BTI flies with the first hold icon h11, which is an icon of "button A" (FIG. 209 (A3-7-5)). Subsequently, in FIG. 209 (A3-7-6), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 209 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which is the icon of “button A”, is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

  FIG. 209 (A3'-2-1) is a modification following FIG. 208 (A2 '). That is, the first hold icon h11 is a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is a default display mode (first display mode). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 209 (A3'-2-1), the white bomber icon WBI fires a plurality of white bullet icons BTI. The firing of the plurality of bullet icons BTI may be simultaneous or may be fired one by one. Here, two white bullet icons BTI are fired at the same time. The two bullet icons BTI partially overlap each other. The target icon here may be a single icon or a plurality of icons. That is, one holding icon may be attacked by one bullet icon BTI, and one holding icon may be attacked by multiple bullet icons BTI. In this example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 become target icons. A bullet icon BTI aiming at the second holding icon h12 is displayed on the front side, and a bullet icon BTI aiming at the first holding icon h11 is displayed on the back side. Note that this relationship may be reversed. Also, multiple bullet icons BTI may not overlap.

  In FIG. 209 (A3'-2-3), the bullet icons BTI and BTI hit one by one both for the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12, and the first holding icon h11 is also the second holding icon h12. Each is also covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 209 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11 that is the green display mode (the fourth display mode) changes to the red display mode (the fifth display mode), and the default display mode (the The second hold icon h12, which is the first display mode), is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode).

  FIG. 210 is a view showing a modified example of the effect example and the like shown in FIG.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 210 (A3-2-1) to FIG. 210 (A3-2-4) are the effect examples shown in FIG. 209 (A3'-2-1) to FIG. 209 (A3'-2-4). It is a modified example of Here, the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" has appeared. In addition, the first hold icon is a display mode (second display mode) of white blinking. In FIG. 210 (A3-2-1), the red bomber icon RBI fires two red bullet icons BTI. One of the two bullet icons BTI that has been fired hits the first holding icon h11, and the other does not hit any of the icons (FIG. 210 (A3-2-3)). That is, the hold icon for which the advance notice is made is hit, and the hold icon (second hold icon h12) for which the advance notice is not made is not hit. In FIG. 210 (A3-2-3), only the first reserved icon h11 of the hit is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the subsequent FIG. 210 (A3-2-4), the effect image EF14 disappears, and Only the 1-hold icon h11 changes to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

  In addition, the bullet icon BTI may be hit even with the hold icon for which the advance notice is not made. In addition, the bullet icon BTI may be hit only on the hold icon for which no advance notice is given. Alternatively, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which no advance notice is given. Or, conversely, the bullet icon BTI may always be hit on the hold icon for which the advance notice is given.

  Here, the red bullet icon BTI hits the hold icon (the hold icon in the first display mode) for which the advance notice is not performed, and the read-ahead notice in the white blink display mode (the second display mode) is performed. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the hold icon, the hold icon for which no advance notice was given has a higher jackpot expectation than the previously held hold icon. It will be changed to the hold icon. Thus, for icons having different display modes, which icon changes to the red display mode, all the icons change to the red display mode, or a plurality of red bullet icons BTI There are various patterns, such as whether one icon does not change while being fired, and it may function effectively as a scribble effect.

  It should be noted that the pre-read advance notice may be configured such that the bullet icon BTI is more likely to hit, ie, it is easier to change the hold, than the pre-read advance notice. In addition, the change icon may be configured to be easier to hit the bullet icon BTI, that is, to change the hold more easily than the hold icon.

  Furthermore, the launch of the plurality of bullet icons BTI is also applicable to the icon of "gold bomber" shown in FIG. 179 (b).

  FIG. 210 (A3-8-1) is also a modification continuing from FIG. 208 (A2-1), but here, the red bomber icon RBI pauses immediately above the fluctuation icon h0. Then, with the pause, the red bomber icon RBI does not fire the bullet icon BTI, and the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 210 (A3-8-2)). When started, the red bomber icon RBI remains paused just above the fluctuating icon h0, ie the red bomber icon RBI here is displayed across successive symbol fluctuating displays When the next change is started, the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first reserved icon h0 as shown in FIG. 210 (A3-8-4). As described above, when the symbol variation display is crossed, the icon change may be always succeeded, or even when the symbol variation display is crossed, there may be a case where it fails. , Figure When straddling the variable display, the hold icon changes icon and the change icon does not change icon, or conversely, the change icon changes icon and the hold icon does not change icon Good.

  FIGS. 210 (A3-9-1) to (A3-9-5) are modifications of FIGS. 209 (A3-8-1) to 209 (A3-8-4). This example is an example in which the icon IHI of the "red bomber" flies away without directing the firing of the bullet icon BTI, even if the symbol fluctuation display after straddling successive symbol fluctuation displays.

  In the symbol variation display after straddling consecutive symbol variation displays, the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI is always performed, regardless of whether it is hit or not (except whether the icon changes or not). May be

  FIG. 210 (A3-10-1) is also a modification following FIG. 208 (A2-1). In this example, the suspension of the prefetch target change is the second suspension represented by the second suspension icon h12 illustrated in FIG. 210 (A3-10-1). The red bomber icon RBI paused just above the fluctuation icon h0, which is in front of the hold icon, fires a red bullet icon BTI targeting the second hold icon h12, but does not hit (Figure 210 (A3-10-2)) and the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 210 (A3-10-3)). And, even if the next symbol variation display is started, the red bomber icon RBI is paused right above the variation icon h0 (Fig. 210 (A3-10-4), A red bullet icon BTI is fired aiming at the first reserved icon h11 which is to be suspended, but it is not hit here either (FIG. 210 (A3-10-5)), and the symbol variation display is ended (FIG. 210 (FIG. 210 (A). A3-10-6)). This time, the hold that was the pre-reading target change is digested, and the symbol change display is started. That is, the symbol variation display started here is the pre-reading variation, and the red bomber icon RBI flips around to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, and the variation icon h0 The red bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the fluctuation icon h0 (FIG. 210 (A3-10-8)), and flies away toward the left end of the screen. The bullet icon BTI fired here hits the fluctuation icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 (FIG. 210 (A3-10-10)). Although not shown, the variation icon h0 changes to a red display mode (fifth display mode) when the effect image EF14 disappears.

  Note that FIG. 210 (A3-10-9 ') is a modification that continues from FIG. (A3-10-8), but even in the case of the final change, there may be cases in which a hit is not made. This results in all three failures. In this example, the icon non-changing animation with the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the same icon, but the icon non-changing animation with the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the different icons. May be In addition, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times on the same icon, or may be performed multiple times on different icons.

  FIG. 210 (A2-3-1) is an example continuing from the symbol variation display 160 (A1-1), but a plurality of displays of notice of icon change may appear. That is, in FIG. 210 (A2-3-1), icons IHI of three types of bombers, which are all kinds of “bomber”, “red bomber” and “gold bomber”, have appeared. The types of displayed icon change notices may be all different as in this example, or all may be the same. In addition, systems such as bombers may or may not be aligned (for example, "red balloon", "gold bomber", "red flying boat").

  As described above, when the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers appear, the icon change effect may be performed by all the aircraft, but as shown in FIG. 210 (A2-3-2), one bomber The icon (here, the icon of “red bomber”) IHI may perform the icon change effect, or even if the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers that are a part perform the icon change effect Good.

  In FIG. 210 (A2-3-3), the change icon, which is the default display mode, is changed to the red display mode, and the icon change presentation has succeeded. However, it may fail. Moreover, when performing icon change presentation by the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers, a plurality of icons may change, or only one icon may change.

  Moreover, the icon of "bomber" or No. shown in FIG. 179 (b). In the case of the icon of "7" "airplane", one icon can change two icons.

  FIG. 211 is a view showing a modification of the effect example and the like shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special view 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed. The hold icon h11 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-2-2), the special figure 1 starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 92 has a ball, and the suspension of the special figure 1 increases by one, resulting in a total of two. In the second number-of-holds display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-2-2), the number-of-holds of the special view 1 is displayed as "2".

  In FIG. 211 (A1-2-3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 is a No. 2 icon shown in FIG. 179 (a). It is an icon of the display mode of 12 "roulettes". The icon of this "roulette" display mode is displayed by switching the display mode of N choice selected among 2 options to 5 options (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow) in order and stopped at the roulette The display icon itself changes to the display mode. In this example, there are three choices of blue, green and red, and the display is switched in the order of “blue → green → red → blue →”. That is, the icon of the display mode of "blue" is displayed in the 2nd holding icon h12 of the display mode of "roulette" shown in FIG. 211 (A1-2-3), and in the same figure (A1-2-4) In the second hold icon h12 of the display mode of "roulette" shown, the icon of the display mode of "green" is displayed, and the second hold of the display mode of "roulette" shown in the figure (A1-2-5) In the icon h12, the icon of the display mode of "red" is displayed. In subsequent figures, it represents with the mark of the arrow showing in-transit. In FIG. 211 (A1-2-7), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration" 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also halted and displayed a combination of“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-2-8), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of a display mode of “roulette”. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI with the first hold icon h11 as a target.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-2-10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 208 (A1-2-11), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the icon of the display mode of “red” is seen in the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (A1-2-12) following FIG. 208 (A1-2-11), the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of “red”. In addition, the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" is about to disappear in the left corner of the screen. In addition, when the icon change animation is not performed by the icon IHI of the "red bomber", or when the icon invariable animation is not performed by the icon IHI of the "red bomber", that is, "red bomber" Even if the animation used is not performed, the first hold icon h11 is configured to be more easily changed to the “red” display mode than when the “red bomber” icon IHI is not displayed. It is also possible that the "red bomber" icon IHI may not be displayed and the ease of change of the "red" display mode may be the same.

  The example shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-1) to FIG. 211 (A1-3-7) is an example in which the telop effect described using FIG. 152 is executed.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-3-1), symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-2), in the central region, the first decorative symbol is displayed. Variable display has been started. In the subsequent FIG. 211 (A1-3-3), the telop effect is started. That is, the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed that the display mode of the hold icon is highly likely to change, which corresponds to an example of the display of the icon change notice. In the telop display trp here, text display such as "Hold on hold change" continues to flow from the right to the left of the screen.

  After the telop production is started, as shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is displayed. It has been started. That is, while the telop effect continues, as shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, aiming at the first hold icon h11. If the icon as the icon change advance notice is displayed (here, the icon “IHI of“ red bomber ””) is displayed while the telop display trp such as “hold change high sure” is displayed, “hold change high sure The display mode of the hold icon may be changed more easily than in the state where the telop display trp such as “middle” is not displayed.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-3-7), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Eventually, when the effect image EF 14 disappears, the first hold icon h 11 changes to the “red” display mode.

  Subsequently, an example in which a silhouette preview of the hold icon is executed will be described.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-4-1), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration" 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”) is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left is also halted and displayed a combination of“ decoration 4 ”-“ decoration 1 ”-“ decoration 7 ”).

  In FIG. 211 (A1-4-2), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-4-3), the first decorative symbol in the central region remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, variable display is started, In the second pending number display on the upper right, the pending number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “2”. Further, the effect image EF15 is generated so as to cover the pending icon display area HIS and the variation icon display area CIS, and both the pending icon and the variation icon can not be seen.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 211 (A1-4-3), variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, the effect image EF15 disappears, and silhouette notice is started in the hold icon display area HIS and the variation icon display area CIS. That is, the cabin sil appears over the holding icon display area HIS and the variation icon display area CIS. The interior of this cabin sil is displayed by a silhouette display. In FIG. 211 (A1-4-3), the fluctuation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are displayed by silhouette display. In the silhouette display, colors such as icons are displayed not in the usual colors but in colors representing shadows. The silhouette notice started here is a notice that indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a state of change easily, or there is a hold icon that may change to a display mode with a high expectation of the big hit. It is a notice that suggests that you

  After the silhouette announcement is started, as shown in FIG. 211 (A1-4-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. Ru. That is, in the state where the silhouette advance is performed, as shown in FIG. 211 (A1-4-4), the red bomber icon RBI approaches the cabin sil. Soon, the red bomber icon RBI passes passing through the hut sil and fires a red bullet icon BTI during the pass. The fired bullet icon BTI enters the cabin and is displayed by the silhouette display.

  In FIG. 211 (A1-4-7), a state in which the bullet icon BTI is likely to be hit is displayed in a silhouette display on the first hold icon h11. Also, in FIG. 211 (A1-4-8), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the state where the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 is displayed by the silhouette display. Then, in FIG. 211 (A1-4-9), the first suspension icon h11 is displayed by silhouette display so that it can be understood that the display mode has changed to "red". In addition, it may be displayed in a silhouette display so that it does not know which display mode has been changed until the silhouette advance notice ends.

  FIG. 212 is a view showing a continuation of an example in which a silhouette preview of a hold icon is performed and another example of presentation.

  In FIG. 212 (A1-4-10), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration" 4 "-" decoration 1 ") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern at the upper left is also stopped and displayed the same combination of the decorative patterns of the lost.

  In FIG. 212 (A1-4-11), the stop display is in progress (confirmation display), the fluctuation icon h0 disappears, and the same figure (A1-4-12) is also in stop display (confirmation display), In the figure (A1-4-13), the suspension which has been the first suspension until now, that is, the suspension of the first suspension icon changed to the display mode of "red" is digested, and the symbol variation display is started . In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (A1-4-13), the first decorative symbol in the central region remains stopped, but in the upper left second decorative symbol, variable display is started, In the second pending number display on the upper right, the pending number in Special Figure 1 is reduced by one to “1”. In addition, in the cabin sil, it can be seen that the moving animation of the holding icon is displayed in a silhouette display, and the first holding icon that has changed to the “red” display mode is displayed at the position of the change icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (A1-4-14), after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, The silhouette advance notice is ended, and the fluctuation icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (A1-4-15).

  In addition, the effect itself of silhouette notice may be promoted by the effect by the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber". For example, the cabin sil may be promoted to become a home, the hold icon may change easily, or the color of the cabin sil may change to red, and the display mode of the hold icon may also be likely to be a red display mode . Then, the display mode of the hold icon may change after the silhouette advance notice is finished (after the cabin sil is hidden) or at the same time the finish is finished.

  FIG. 212 (B1-1) to FIG. 212 (B8) are diagrams showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted after the display of the icon change notice is displayed.

  In FIG. 212 (B1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 212 (B2), the icon IHI of "bomber" of the default color, which is the display of the icon change notice, appears (is displayed) at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, the icon IHI of "bomber" pauses on the fluctuation icon h0 as shown in FIG. 212 (B3-1), and as shown in FIG. (B4), The bomber's icon IHI displays a flashing light that changes, and is promoted to the "red bomber" icon IHI. In addition to this, when promoting within the same bomber system (“I Bomber icon IHI is promoted to“ Gold Bomber ”icon IHI,“ Red Bomber ”icon IHI is“ Gold Bomber ” In the case of promoting to the icon IHI of the bomber, or when changing to a different system (the icon IHI of the "bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of the "flying boat", or the icon of the "bomber" IHI may be promoted to the icon "IHI" of "red flying boat".

  In FIG. 212 (B6), a red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 212 (B7), the fired bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 212 (B8), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of “red”.

  FIG. 212 (B3-2-1) to FIG. 212 (B3-2-5) illustrate an example in which the display itself of the icon change advance is promoted by the button effect.

  FIG. 212 (B3-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 212 (B2), and the state shown in FIG. 212 (B3-2-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (B3-1) is there. In FIG. 212 (B3-2-2), the button image 136a is added above the icon IHI of "bomber" that is the display of the icon change notice. Here, although the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added, it may be added. In addition, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing shown in FIG. 212 (B3-2-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 209 (B3-2-4), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the above-mentioned effective period of operation, the icon IHI of the “bomber” is displayed with a flashing light indicating a change, and then “red It is promoted to the icon IHI of "bomber" (Fig. 209 (B3-2-5)). . Then, although it continues to Drawing 212 (B6), the display mode of a reservation icon may not change. Promotion of icon IHI of a "bomber" is performed on condition that chance button 136 was operated. It may be executed, or may be executed when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated. In addition, although the button image 136a is added above the icon IHI of "bomber", the button image 136a may not be added and may be executed as a so-called back button effect.

  FIG. 212 (B3-3-1) to FIG. 212 (B3-3-5) are diagrams showing an example where the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted by the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 212 (B3-3-1), the notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. In FIG. 212 (B3-3-2), the notice icon YI is used, and the box is changed to the opened mode d. From the box, No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice display YH of 20 "UP" is released, and in the figure (B3-3-3), the notice icon YI used disappears, and the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed. The notice display YH of “UP” changes to the light ball YHb, and as shown in FIG. 212 (B3-3-4), the light ball YHb pauses on the fluctuation icon h0 “ I'm flying for the icon IHI of the bomber, and I hit the icon IHI for the "bomber". Then, in FIG. 212 (B3-3-5), the icon IHI of "bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of "red bomber". Although the process after FIG. 209 (B3-3-6) is continued from FIG. 212 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change advance notice is promoted while failing to be promoted halfway through a plurality of changes.

  FIG. 213 (B3-4-1) is an example continued from FIG. 212 (B2). In this example, with the suspension of the prefetch target change, the second suspension icon h12 shown in FIG. 213 (B3-4-1) It becomes a second hold.

  The state shown in FIG. 213 (B3-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (B3-1), and the icon IHI of the “bomber” of the default color that is the display of the icon change notice is a change icon It is suspended just above h0. Further, the state shown in FIG. 212 (B3-4-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 212 (B4), and the icon IHI of “bomber” has a flash display displaying a change. In this example, the promotion fails in this case, and the flash display disappears, and in FIG. 213 (B3-4-3), the icon IHI of "bomber" remains. Eventually, in FIG. 211 (B3-4-3), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decor 4”- Stop display of "decoration 1"-"decoration 7"), and stop display of the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the second decoration pattern on the top left too There is.

  And, even if the next symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of "bomber" remains suspended just above the variation icon h0 (Fig. 213 (B3-4-5)). In Fig. 213 (B3-4-6) that follows, the icon IHI of "bomber" again shows a flashing light that changes, and this time it is successfully promoted and the flashing display disappears (Fig. B3-4-7) ) In the "red bomber" icon IHI has been promoted. The red bomber icon RBI, which has been successfully promoted, fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0, but as shown in FIG. 213 (B3-4-8), it does not hit here, In FIG. 213 (B3-4-9), the symbol variation display is ended, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed.

  This time, the suspension which was the pre-reading target change is digested, and the symbol change display is started (FIG. 213 (B3-4-10)). That is, the symbol variation display started here is the pre-reading variation, and the red bomber icon RBI flips around to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, and the variation icon h0 The red bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the fluctuation icon h0 (FIG. 213 (B3-4-11)). Then, although it continues to FIG. 208 (A3-2-2), the display mode of a fluctuation icon may not change.

  In this example, although promotion is successful for the second time, the presentation may end without success. Also, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be further changed to the icon IHI of the "gold bomber". Also, in this example, the bullet icon BTI is fired after being promoted, but the bullet icon BTI may be fired even before the promotion. For example, the bullet icon BTI may be fired at the timing of FIG. 213 (B3-4-3).

  FIG. 213 (B1-2-1) to FIG. 213 (B1-2-10) are diagrams showing examples in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the timer notice effect.

  In FIG. 213 (B1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. There is. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 213 (B1-2-2), the timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TYH is displayed on the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 213 (B1-2-2), the remaining time (5 seconds in this case) up to the time serving as the reference of the promotion effect start is displayed. In 3) the countdown has been started. The timer notice effect started here corresponds to a notice of the promotion effect. After the timer preview effect is started, as shown in FIG. 213 (B1-2-4), the icon IHI of "bomber" of the default color, which is the display of the icon change alert, is displayed, and directly above the fluctuation icon h0. It flies until it stops and pauses (FIG. 213 (B1-2-5)), and it will be in a standby state. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 213 (B1-2-6) has no remaining time (it becomes 0 seconds), and in the subsequent figure (B1-2-7), the timer notice display TYH is a character of "attention" Has been switched to At the same time as the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH disappears (it becomes 0 seconds), the promotion effect is started. The promotion effect may be started (when there is a time lag) after the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH is exhausted.

  In FIG. 213 (B1-2-8), with the letter “attention” displayed on the timer notice display TYH, the flash display displays a change in the icon IHI of the “bomber” which has been in the standby state. Is displayed. After that, the flash display disappears and the flash display disappears, and in FIG. 213 (B1-2-9), it is promoted to the icon “IHI” of “red bomber”. It is easier to promote the display of the icon change notice itself than when the timer notice effect is not performed. When the timer advance notice effect is passed, the display itself of the icon change advance notice may be promoted without fail. In FIG. 213 (B1-2-10), the timer advance notice effect is ended, and the timer advance notice display TYH is not displayed. The timer notice display TYH may be used to give notice of the type of display of the icon change notice to be promoted. For example, instead of the character display of "attention", the character display of "red" may be performed.

  In addition, when the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH disappears (it becomes 0 seconds), the display of an icon change notice (for example, the icon IHI of "bomber") may appear. That is, the timer notice display TYH corresponds to the notice that the display of the icon change notice may be performed. Furthermore, the background color of the timer notice display TYH may be used to give notice of the color of the appearing icon change notice. For example, in the case of a white background, the appearance of the icon IHI of "bomber" is notified, and in the case of a red background, the appearance of icon IHI of "red bomber" is notified, and in the case of a gold background, "gold You may also notice the appearance of the icon IHI of "bomber". However, such a notice may not be made.

  Moreover, although this example was an example in which the timer advance announcement effect and the promotion effect were combined, both are independent, and after the timer advance announcement effect start, the icon IHI of "bomber" appears, and the timer announcement display TYH Even if there is no remaining time in, the promotion effect is not started, and another notice or effect corresponding to the timer notice display TYH may be started. In this case, the promotion effect of the icon IHI of "bomber" is irrelevant to the timer advance effect. Also, there may be a coincidence that the timing when the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH disappears and the timing when the icon IHI of the "bomber" is changed on hold may coincide.

  Next, an example will be described in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect.

  In FIG. 213 (B1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. There is. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed. Further, on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, a meter display MD similar to the meter display shown in FIG. 149 and the like is displayed. The meter display MD shown in FIG. 213 (B1-3-1) is a state in which up to 5 divisions have already been stored when the 6 divisions are full. When the meter display MD is full, the icon IHI of "bomber", which is the display of the icon change notice, is promoted. Note that this meter display MD may be a display that is always displayed except for a specific state such as super reach production being performed, or a display that is started when the display start condition is satisfied. It may be

  Eventually, in FIG. 213 (B1-3-2), the symbol variation display ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decor 4”- Stop display of "decoration 1"-"decoration 7"), and stop display of the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7") of the second decoration pattern on the top left too There is.

  Then, even if the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MD accumulated up to 5 divisions is displayed on the right base icon bIr (FIG. 213 (B1-3-3)). When the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 213 (B1-3-4), an icon IHI of "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen. That is, the icon IHI of the "red bomber" displayed here is the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice display YH of 20 "up" is loaded, and in the figure (B1-3-5), when passing over the meter display MD, the notice display YH of "up" is dropped, The notice display YH of “up” is taken into the meter display MD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 213 (B1-3-6), the meter display MD becomes full, and in the subsequent FIG. (B1-3-7), the meter display MD is displayed as the text “promotion”. It is changing.

  FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which the display itself of the icon change advance notice is promoted via the meter effect and another example of the effect.

  In FIG. 214 (B1-3-8) continuing from FIG. 213 (B1-3-7), the icon IHI of the default color "bomber" changes in response to the meter display MD becoming full. In FIG. 214 (B1-3-9) in which the flashing display is performed and the flashing display disappears, the icon is promoted to the icon “IHI” of “red bomber”. The color of the display of the icon change notice that has changed here matches the background color of the letter display of "promotion" on the meter display MD, and the display of the icon change notice is in the stage of FIG. 213 (B1-3-7). The changing display mode is predicted. Subsequently, the meter display MD shown in FIG. 214 (B1-3-10) returns to the empty state. In addition, when the meter display MD is full, the display mode of the display of the icon change notice may always change (promotion) or may not change (promotion) (in the case of failure).

  FIG. 213 (B1-4-1) to (B1-4-4) will be described with respect to an example in which the display of the icon change notice appears when the meter display in the meter effect is full.

  A meter display MD is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 213 (B1-4-1). This meter display MD is in a state where it is already stored up to 5 divisions when it is full on 6 divisions. Further, in FIG. 213 (B1-4-1) in the symbol variation display, the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed. In the following FIG. 213 (B1-4-2), the notice display “H” of “up” is taken into the meter display MD, the meter display MD becomes full, and in the same FIG. (B1-4-3), the meter The display MD is changed to a display of "bombarding" on a red background. Here, it is predicted that an icon of a background-colored bomber will appear as a display of the icon change notice. In addition, if it changes to the display of "bombing" on a gold background, the icon of "gold bomber" may be displayed, and if it changes to the display of "bombing" on a white background, the icon of "bomber" will change. It may be displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to give notice of the display of the icon change notice that appears. Even in this case, when the meter display MD is full, the "bomber" icon, the "red bomber" icon, Or the icon of "gold bomber" may be displayed.

  And, in FIG. 214 (B1-4-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen.

  In addition, when the appearance notice of the display of the notice of the icon change notice is performed by the meter display MD, the display of the notice of the icon change notice may appear or may not appear.

  FIG. 214 (C1) to FIG. 214 (C13) are diagrams showing an example in which the display of the icon change notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In FIG. 214 (C1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed on the first decoration symbol display device 208L. During this stop display, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 214 (C2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS even when the symbol variation display is started, but if the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, it is shown in FIG. 214 (C3) As shown, the smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the smoke image disappears in the figure (C4), and the No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (b) is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon IHI of 13 red "Akyoshimune" is displayed. The icon of "Akyoshimune" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the icon of "red bomber" and the like. The icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon to the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (fifth display mode), when the change of the icon is successful. Therefore, if the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it corresponds to the advance notice of the pre-reading advance notice, and if the display mode of the change icon is changed, it corresponds to the advance notice of the normal advance notice.

  In FIG. 214 (C5), the change effect of the fluctuation icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akyoshi sec” is started. That is, until then, the icon IHI of "Akyoshi sect" which has been the mode (a) which is the default mode shown in FIG. 179 (b) is changed to the mode (b). That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was a posture standing up facing the front, faces the fluctuating icon h0, holds a sword, is holding it, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. In Fig. 214 (C6), the wave is oscillated from the sword of "Akyoshimune" but the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 remains the default, and in the figure (C7), the icon IHI of "Akyoshimune" is Returning to the mode a, the change animation has ended. That is, the change presentation here is a failure. In FIG. 214 (C8), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decoration symbols of the lost is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed as the aspect a on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 214 (C9), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of “Akyoshi sect” is displayed as the aspect a on the right base icon bIr, and is displayed across continuous symbol variation displays. In FIG. 214 (C10), the change animation is started as the change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akyoshi sec”. In FIG. 214 (C11), the variation icon h0 which has been the default display mode up to that point is changed to the red display mode, and a normal advance notice is started. In FIG. 214 (C12-1), the icon IHI of “Akyoshi sect” changes from the mode b to the mode c, and it is appealed that the change presentation has succeeded. When the change presentation is successful, the icon IHI of "Akyoshi sect", which was the display of the icon change notice, disappears from the right base icon bIr.

  The icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" described above is the same as the navigation character YM of the display mode with a red kimono shown in FIG. 135, 142 and the like, and the effect example shown in FIG. 135, FIG. 142, etc. And mutually applicable.

  In addition, when the icon IHI of "Akyoshimune" is displayed, the display mode of the icon may always change to a red display mode without failure, but it may fail as in this example but the final The display mode may be changed to a red display mode or may eventually fail.

  FIG. 214 (C12-2) shows a state after the display mode of the variation icon h0 can not be changed to the red display mode and eventually the change presentation has failed, and the icon IHI of "Akyoshimune" However, it changes to the aspect d from the aspect b, and has alerted | reported that the change production failed.

  Subsequently, an example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 179 (b) will be described.

  In FIG. 214 (D1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 214 (D2), the icon of “red thunder cloud” starts to be displayed small above the hold icons h11 and h12. This "red thunder cloud" icon corresponds to the display of the icon change notice, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. The icon of "red thunder cloud", like the icon of "red bomber" or the icon of "Akyoshimune", when the icon changes successfully, the display mode of the icon is the same as the display mode of itself, ie, the red display mode The fifth display mode is an icon to be changed.

  The icon of "red thunder cloud" grows into a large thunder cloud by the growth animation after the display starts. In addition, it may not grow into a large thundercloud, and in this case, it may be a display of “Gasse”, or it may be grown into a big thundercloud.

  The icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" shown in FIG. 214 (D3) has grown from the top to cover the area from the variation icon display area CIS to the reserved icon display area HIS, and the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are also displayed below.

  In FIG. 214 (D4), lightning is falling from the icon IHI of “red thunder cloud” toward the first holding icon h11, and in the same figure (D5) that follows, the first holding icon h11 where the lightning is falling is an effect image In the figure (D6) in which the effect image EF16 is covered by the EF 16 and disappears (D6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, remains the default display mode, and the change effect fails. The icon “IHI” of “red thunder cloud” strikes the pending icon or one or more icons of the fluctuating icon simultaneously or sequentially, and if the change effect is successful, the display mode of the fallen icon is , Changes to red display mode. In FIG. 214 (D6), the symbol variation display is stopped and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped displaying the combination of the lost decorative symbols, but the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is displayed. It is done.

  In FIG. 214 (D7), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is displayed, and the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is also displayed across continuous symbol variation displays.

  FIG. 215 is a view showing the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 179 (b) and the example of other effects.

  In FIG. 215 (D8) continued from FIG. 214 (D7), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the suspension of the special drawing disappears, and the next change is in a state of waiting for winning. However, the icon "IHI" of "red thunder cloud" is still displayed.

  A symbol demo is started when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in a state where symbol variation display is not started after confirmation display of the stop symbol of the special figure is performed in the state of holding 0 (FIG. 215 (D9)). In this symbol demo, the combination of the stopped decorative symbols continues to be displayed. Further, although the background screen is not shown, it is continuously displayed without being changed from the symbol variation display of FIG. 214 (D7). However, you may switch to the background screen of the symbol demo. Furthermore, when the symbol demo is started, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started. The display start timing of these icons MI, VI, and BI may be before the start of the symbol demonstration, simultaneously with the start of the symbol demonstration, or after the start of the symbol demonstration. A detailed description of these icons MI, VI, and BI will be omitted here because they are performed using FIG. 123 and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 215 (D9), the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is still displayed even during the symbol demonstration.

  The display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started in a state in which the symbol display of the special figure is not started after the final display of the stop figure of the special drawing is performed in the state of holding 0. Further, when the second time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses in that state, the design demonstration is switched to the animation demonstration. When the animation demo is started, the background screen changes and switches to the animation demo screen (FIG. 215 (D10)). When switched to the demonstration screen of this animation, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" is hidden. On the other hand, in this example, even when switching to the animation demo screen, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are still displayed at the same positions as before switching. However, when the animation demo screen is switched, these icons MI, VI, and BI may be changed in display position or may be hidden.

  When the first time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the animation demonstration screen may be switched. In this case, at the same time as switching to the animation demo screen, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” may be hidden, or the second time may be displayed after switching.

  Eventually, the special figure 1 starting opening 230 shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 92 enters the ball, and the suspension of the special figure 1 increases by one, and the symbol variation display is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation demonstration screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 215 (D11). As a result, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" which has grown greatly is re-displayed. However, when the symbol demonstration or the animation demonstration is held, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 215 (D8), the symbol variation display started in the same figure (D11) is stopped and displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. During execution of the symbol variation display started in (D11), there is one more ball ball in special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of reservations in special figure 1 becomes 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed ing. For this reason, the next change is immediately started, and after the symbol change display here, the reserve of the special figure 1 starts to be accumulated, and the symbol change display is executed continuously. During this time, as shown in FIG. 215 (D13), the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" continues to be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 215 (D14), the first stop is performed on the first decorative symbol, and the left symbol fluctuates. When the symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times, the deletion animation is started for the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud". The count of the number here does not change even if the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is held. However, the number of times may be reset by inserting the symbol demo or the animation demo. The start timing of the deletion animation may be simultaneous with the start of the next symbol variation display in which the symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times, or may be after the start, or the first stop is performed. It may be the other timing. In the erasing animation, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" gradually decreases and eventually disappears and disappears (FIG. 215 (D16)). In this example, after all, the change presentation by the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud" has ended without any success.

  In this example, although not shown, lightning is dropped to any of the icons for each change. However, the lightning may be dropped only when the icon change is performed. There are also default thundercloud icons and golden thundercloud icons available as thundercloud icon types. However, the colors of the clouds may be the same, and the types may be divided by the color of the lightning. That is, the icon from which the red lightning has fallen may change to red when the change effect is successful. In this case, the type of display of the icon change notice may not be known until the thunder falls, and it may be possible to draw attention to the thundercloud icon. In addition, it may be configured so as not to know which display mode to change only when lightning of the default color falls. For example, even if lightning of a default color falls on the icon of the default color, it may change to red. On the other hand, in the other colors (display mode), since it changes to the same color (display mode) as the color of the lightning (display mode), it also functions as a notice of the changing display mode.

  FIG. 215 (Ea1) to FIG. 215 (Ea9) are diagrams showing examples of effects combining the icon of the display mode of "timer" and the display of the icon change notice.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It is an icon of the display mode of ten "timers." The icon of the display mode of the "timer" is an icon whose icon changes to the display mode of the fourth display mode or more when the timer reaches zero. However, it may not change even when the timer reaches 0, or may always change when the timer reaches 0. The mode of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the “timer” shown at 167 (Ea1) is the mode a before the start of the countdown. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea2-1), the numbers shown in FIG. In the icon of "bomber" of the default color of 4, an icon of a dedicated mode in which the word "Timer" is attached appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as an icon IHI of the "timer activation dedicated bomber". The icon IHI of the "timer activation dedicated bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The icon IHI of the "timer activation dedicated bomber" may appear when the hold icon or the change icon is displayed by the "timer" display mode icon, and is displayed by the "timer" display mode icon Even if it has been, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display mode of "timer" is displayed, it may be displayed without fail. In FIG. 215 (Ea2-1), the icon change animation using the icon IHI of the appearing “timer operation dedicated bomber” is started. Note that, even if the icon change animation is started, the timer of the first hold icon h11 does not start to count down, and is displayed as the mode a.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea3), the bullet icon BTI of the default color is launched from the icon TBI of the bomber with the word "Timer". The goal here is the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the "timer". In addition, although the icon TBI of the bomber attached with the character of Timer does not aim at anything other than the icon of the display mode of a "timer", it may be made a target. In this case, when the bullet icon BTI is hit, the display mode of the "timer" may be changed.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first reserve icon h11 of the "timer", and the first reserve icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 215 (Ea6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the mode a before the start of the countdown to the mode b in the countdown. That is, the bullet icon BTI is hit and the countdown is started. In this example, the icon change animation is an animation from immediately before FIG. 215 (Ea2-1) to FIG. 215 (Ea6). The bullet icon BTI can be viewed as equivalent to the display of the icon change notice, in which case the display is started by being fired from the bomber icon TBI with the word "Timer". Thereafter, the animation up to immediately before the completion of the change to the aspect b corresponds to the icon change animation.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea7), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” becomes a mode in which the timer has become 0, and at the same time the timer becomes 0, as shown in FIG. 215 (Ea8), the first hold. The icon h11 is covered by the smoke image. In FIG. 215 (Ea8), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the "timer", changes to the green display mode (the fourth display mode). In addition, even if the icon IHI of the "timer activation dedicated bomber" is not attacked, the timer may start operating even when the "timer" holding icon is not attacked. In this case, it may be a prefetching notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when the operation is started by the icon IHI of the “timer activation dedicated bomber”, or conversely, it is a prefetch notice with a jackpot reliability lower. There may be, and the jackpot reliability may be the same. In addition, the "Timer" hold icon may be activated by the timer even if it is not attacked by the "Timer Operated Bomber" icon IHI, and conversely, the "Timer Activated Bomber" icon The timer may not start as long as it is not attacked by IHI.

  In FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-1), when the icon of the display mode of “timer” is displayed, the icon of “red bomber” which is general-purpose, not the icon IHI of “timer-operated dedicated bomber” IHI has appeared. In FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired from the icon IHI of "red bomber", and the fired bullet icon BTI becomes the first holding icon h11 of the display mode of "timer". Hit. Then, the countdown is started at the first hold icon h11 of "timer". In FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-3), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of the “timer” is a mode in which the timer has become 0 and the timer becomes 0 at the same time (Ea2-2-4). As shown in FIG. 5, the first hold icon h11 is covered by the smoke image. In this example, it is determined that the display mode of the first reserved icon changes to the same red display mode (fifth display mode) as the display mode of the icon IHI of "red bomber" when the timer becomes 0. . In FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-5), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the “timer”, is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

  FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a certain type of reserved icon is combined with the display of the icon change notice.

  FIG. 216 (Eb1) to FIG. 216 (Eb8) are diagrams showing an example in which the pending icon of the type of “bomb” not shown in FIG. 179 (a) and the display of the icon change notice are combined.

  In FIG. 216 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special figure 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is an icon of the "bomb" type not shown in FIG. 179 (a). The icon of the "bomb" type is an icon that changes the display mode of the icon when the bomb explodes, which is similar to the "timer" icon in this respect, but the "timer" icon counts down When it becomes 0, the display mode of the icon changes, so it is easy to understand the timing of the change of the display mode, but with "bombs" it is difficult to know when to explode, and as a result, the timing of the change of the display mode The two are different because they are confusing. In the "bomb" type icon, there is a squib, and it is necessary to ignite this squib to get the "bomb" out of the box.

  In FIG. 216 (Eb2), the icon IHI of “red bomber”, which is the display of the icon change notice, appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In FIG. 216 (Eb3), the red bomber icon RBI mounted with the ignition icon CYI is gradually approaching the first suspension icon h11 of “bomb”, and in the diagram (Eb4), the first suspension is The ignition line CYI for the ignition line of the bomb icon which is the icon h11 is dropped. The "red bomber" icon IHI may be a fixedly deployed flamethrower, in which case the bullet icon BTI and the ignition icon CYI, etc., are separated from the aircraft It disappears. Even if the ignition icon CYI is dropped, the first pending icon h11 of “bomb” may or may not be successfully ignited by the squib. The squib of the icon of the bomb, which is the first reserved icon h11 shown in FIG. 216 (Eb5), is ignited, and in the figure (Eb6), the squib is burning and becoming shorter. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 216 (Eb7-1), the first holding icon h11 of “bomb” explodes, and as shown in FIG. 216 (Eb8), the first holding icon h11 is “red bomber”. The display mode is changed to the same red as the display mode of the icon IHI.

  FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. (Eb6), and in FIG. 216 (Eb6), although the squib is burning and becoming shorter, FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-1) Then, the fire of the squib has been extinguished on the way. For this reason, the first holding icon h11 of "bomb" does not explode, and no change in display mode occurs. The icon of "bomb" whose squib has been extinguished on the way continues to be displayed as it is. The aspect of the "bomb" in which the fire of the squib has disappeared halfway corresponds to the second display aspect (the display aspect of "flashing white"). In FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-2), the symbol variation display ends, and in the same diagram (Eb7-2-3), the “bomb” icon in a mode in which the squib has disappeared halfway is displayed as the variation icon h0 It is done. Even if the squib has been extinguished halfway, the squib which has been extinguished may be ignited again due to the fluctuation after the next fluctuation. In FIG. 216 (Eb 7-2-4) following FIG. 216 (Eb 7-2-3), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, even if the "bomb" icon (hold icon or change icon) is not attacked by the display of the icon change notice such as the icon IHI of the "red bomber", the squib may be naturally ignited. Good. In this case, it may be a prefetching notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when it is ignited by the display of the icon change notice, or conversely, it may be a prefetch notice with a jackpot reliability lower than that of the jackpot. The reliability may be the same. In addition, the icon of "bomb" may be naturally ignited naturally even if it is not attacked by the display of the icon change notice, and conversely, the squib is ignited unless attacked by the display of the icon change notice. You do not have to.

  It should be noted that due to the icon change notice, the icon (pending icon and / or fluctuating icon) indicated by No. 179 shown in FIG. 2-No. It may be notified that it changes to the 19 icons, the “bomb” icon described above, the hold icon of the VS display mode, and the “patramp” icon described later.

  FIG. 216 (Ec1) to FIG. 216 (Ec8) correspond to the numbers shown in FIG. 179 (a). It is a figure which shows the example which combined the display of the icon change notice of the kind which is not shown by 11 "target" icons and FIG. 179 (b).

  In FIG. 216 (Ec1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is the No. 1 icon shown in FIG. It is an icon of the display mode of 11 "targets." In the case of the icon of the display mode of this "target", when the arrow does not stick to the target icon, it remains as the mode a shown in FIG. 179 (a), and the confidence of the big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon The degree is about the level of the second display mode (display mode of white blinking), but when the arrow is pierced on the target icon, it changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 179 (a), and the symbol variation display corresponding to the target icon The reliability of the jackpot in the case of the second display mode rises to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 216 (Ec2), the icon YMP of Yoshimune, who carries the umbrella, appears in the upper right of the display screen. The icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying the parachute is a type of display of the icon change notice, but becomes a display of an icon change notice of a type not shown in FIG. 179 (b). In FIG. 179 (b), the icon change animation has been started, and Yoshimune in the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying the fall umbrella is aiming at the target icon which is the first hold icon h11, holding the bow and arrow (FIG. In Ec3), the arrow icon YII is fired. The icon YII of the fired arrow hits the target icon which is the first holding icon h11, and in FIG. 216 (Ec5-1), the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In the following FIG. 216 (Ec6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 179 (a). In this example, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first reserved icon h11 is increased to the level of the sixth display mode (golden display mode). In FIG. 216 (Ec7-1), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying the parachute passes over the first holding icon h11, and eventually, the icon TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 216 (Ec8)) .

  FIG. 216 (Ec5-2-1) is a modification continuing from FIG. (Ec4), and in FIG. 216 (Ec5-2-1), the icon YII of the fired arrow is the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (Ec5-2-2) which has not hit the target icon, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as it is. Then, as in the case of the hit, the icon YMP of Yoshimune, carrying the parachute, passes over the first holding icon h11 (Fig. 216 (Ec5-2-3)), and that icon eventually The TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 216 (Ec5-2-4)). As described above, if it fails in one time in the symbol variation display, it is not possible to try again and it ends as it is. However, the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying the parachutar may appear again at the next change, and the change presentation aiming at the target icon may be executed, or the change presentation may be executed by another presentation. In addition, even if it fails once in the symbol variation table temple once, it may be possible to re-challenge up to a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, three times including re-challenge) even if it fails once It may be configured to always be able to try again a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram showing another rendering example using a bomber-based icon as a display of icon change advance notice.

  Fig. 217 (Ed 1) to Fig. (Ed 5) are examples in which icons of types not shown in Fig. 179 (a) and display of icon change notice of types not shown in Fig. 179 (b) are combined. FIG.

  In FIG. 217 (Ed1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. The first holding icon h11 of the special view 1 is an icon of the type of "patram" of a type not shown in FIG. 179 (a). When the icon of the "Patrump" icon is activated, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the icon of the "Patrump" is the level of the seventh display mode (the display mode of rainbow color), that is, the jackpot determination Rise to the level of On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 217 (Ed1), the numbers shown in FIG. In the icon of "bomber" of the default color of 4, an icon of a dedicated mode in which the character card is attached and the character of pat is attached appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as an icon IHI of "card for playing with a padlock". The icon IHI of "Patrump operating dedicated bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The icon IHI of "card for playing with a playing card" may appear when the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is displayed by the icon of the playing mode of "playing card", and is displayed by an icon of a playing mode of "patram" Even if it has been, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display mode of "Pat Ramp" is displayed, it may appear without fail. In FIG. 217 (Ed1), an icon change animation is started using the icon IHI of the appeared “Patrump operating dedicated bomber”.

  In FIG. 217 (Ed2), from the icon PBI of the bomber to which the card is attached and the character of pat is attached, the bullet icon BTI of the default color is targeted for the first holding icon h11 of the display mode of “cardboard” It has been launched. In FIG. 217 (Ed3), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11 of “Pat Ruck” and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 217 (Ea4), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the icon of the card holder of the first hold icon h11 is activated, and it is notified that the first hold is the hold of the big hit decision. Note that the icon IHI of the "card for tramp card operation only" is flying away on the left side of the screen and is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 217 (Ea5).

  FIG. 217 (Fa1) to FIG. 217 (Fa5) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice of the appearance of the icon change notice is given by using the movable character and the like.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special drawing 1 is in high-speed variation, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed. These two hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, the variation icon h0 of the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa2-1), among the large board behavior objects arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 115 etc., the fourth large board behavior arranged at the lower right From the initial position, the character 224Gd starts to advance to the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward the overlapping position from the front side, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is made to coincide with the advance of the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd. A red effect image EF17 is displayed around the portion overlapped with the fourth large-area behavior part 224Gd in. The operation of the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd becomes an operation to predict that the display of the icon change notice appears from the vicinity of the fourth large-pattern behavior character 224Gd, and the effect image EF17 of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. The display becomes a notice as to what color icon change notice display will appear. That is, the appearance itself of the display of the icon change notice is notified with the character and the effect image EF17, and the appearance of the display is notified with the character with the effect image EF17.

  In addition, although it may be comprised so that the change of the display mode of an icon may occur more easily when the accessory works, it is not necessary to change the ease of occurrence. In addition, depending on the number of operated items, the change in the display mode of the icon may easily occur, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa3), the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd moves to the maximum advance position, and in the same figure (Fa4), the fourth large-scale behavior character object 224Gd moved to the maximum advance position returns to the initial position. I'm starting. Note that, as shown in FIG. 217 (Fa2) to FIG. (Fa4), the display position of the effect image EF17 is also changed in accordance with the movement operation of the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd. When the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd having moved to the maximum advance position starts retreating toward the initial position, the display of the icon IHI of “red bomber” as a display of the icon change notice starts to be seen in the back. In this way, the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and effects similar to those after Fig. 208 (A3-1) are executed after Fig. 217 (Fa5), but the display mode of the variation icon does not change There may be.

  FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-1) to FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice of the appearance of the icon change notice is given notice using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-1) during symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position so far, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, It is in the state of

  In FIG. 217 (Fa 2-2-2), when the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches constant speed rotation on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I displays an icon of “red bomber” IHI is displayed, and the appearance of the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" is notified.

  In FIG. 217 (Fa2-2-3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon “IHI” of “red bomber” is still displayed, but “red bomber” on the far side The emergence of the icon IHI. When the icon "IHI" of "red bomber" appears, the POV display 224I stops rotating (FIG. 217 (Fa 2-2-4)) and returns to the initial position (FIG. 217 (Fa 2-2-5)). Thus, the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and effects similar to those in Fig. 208 (A3-1) or later are executed after Fig. 217 (Fa2-2-5), but the display mode of the variation icon May not change.

  Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is An effect display may be performed. Further, in the state during acceleration from when the POV display 224I reaches the stationary state to the constant speed state, and the state during deceleration before the constant speed state returns to the stationary state, the display area is more visible than in the constant speed state. The effect display may be performed in the above display area even in a state during acceleration or a state during deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in a state during acceleration or a state during deceleration. In addition, in the state of accelerating or decelerating, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I more noticeable. It is also good. Alternatively, in the acceleration state, effect display may be performed on the display area, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The remarks described here are also applicable to the following example of the POV display 224I.

  In addition, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon IHI of “red bomber” may be earlier in the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or the appearance timing of the icon is earlier. Or both may be at the same timing.

  In addition, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display shown in FIG. 206) The above occurrence notice may be performed by means 208 M ′ or the like, or another notice may be performed.

  FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of various notices and the like regarding the display of the icon change notice.

  FIG. 218 (Fb1) to FIG. (Fb9) are diagrams showing an example in which the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icons is previewed using a feature effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 218 (Fb1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 208 (A1-1), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. The state shown in FIG. 218 (Fb2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 208 (A1-2), and the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and the change effect of the display mode of the icon is started.

  In FIG. 218 (Fb3), feature presentation is started before the red bomber icon RBI fires the bullet icon BTI. The feature presentation here is, among the large board behavior objects arranged at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 115 etc., the third large board behavior character article arranged at the lower left. 224Gc and the 4th large board behavior character thing 224Gd arrange | positioned in the lower right start advancing to the position which overlaps with the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L from the front side from each initial position. Although this feature presentation can be continued until just before the display mode of the icon changes, the function as the advance notice is before firing the bullet icon BTI. In this feature presentation, the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is foretold depending on how many of the four large-scale behavior characters 224GA to 224Gd operate. In other words, if all four work, it succeeds with 100% probability, if three works, it succeeds with 75% probability, if only two works, it succeeds with 50% probability and only one works. It predicts that it will succeed only with a 25% probability.

  Of the four large-screen behavior characters 224Ga to 224Gd, the highest probability of success is obtained if the first large-pattern behavior member 224Ga is operated, and the second highest probability of success is obtained if the second large-pattern behavior member 224Gb is operated. If the third large-screen behavior part 224Gd is operated, the success probability may be the third highest, and if the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Ge is operated, the lowest success probability may be set. Alternatively, the success probability can be forecasted depending on the position from which the initial position is advanced. For example, the probability of success may be increased as the position of maximum exit is approached.

  In addition, the change in the display mode of the icon may be more likely to occur when the accessory works, than when it is not performed, but the likelihood of occurrence does not have to be changed. In addition, depending on the number of operated items, the change in the display mode of the icon may easily occur, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (Fb 8), the feature effect is ended when the change of the display mode of the icon is completed.

  FIG. 218 (Fc1) to (Fc6) are diagrams showing an example of giving notice of promotion of the display itself of the icon change notice.

  In FIG. 218 (Fc1), the icon IHI of “bomber” of the default color appears, and the change effect of the display mode of the icon is started. Here, before the icon IHI of the "bomber" pauses, the notice effect is started. Here, as with the effects shown in FIGS. 217 (Fa2-1) to (Fa4), the fourth large-screen behavior part 224Gd arranged at the lower right from the initial position is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Beginning to move forward from the front to the overlapping position, and in accordance with the advance of the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd, the portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlapped with the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd An effect image EF17 is displayed around the periphery. Here, the display mode of the effect image EF17 is to notice the display mode to be promoted by the icon IHI of the default color "bomber". Here, the red effect image EF17 is displayed, and in FIG. 218 (Fc5), it is promoted to the icon “IHI” of “red bomber”. Although FIG. 218 (Fc6) is followed by FIG. 212 (B6), there may be cases where the display mode of the hold icon does not change.

  In this example, the behavior of the fourth large-scale behavior character item 224Gd is a kind of scolding effect regardless of the notice, but it is configured such that promotion is more likely to occur when the item works. It may be done. However, the likelihood does not have to change. In addition, promotion may easily occur depending on the number of operated features. In other words, the promotion may easily occur as the number of operated features increases. However, here also the likelihood does not have to change.

  FIG. 218 (Fd1) to (Fd6) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the icons using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 218 (Fa1) during symbol variation display, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position so far, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is in a state before rotating operation. . Note that the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 of the special view 1 are displayed, and these two holding icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

  In FIG. 218 (Fd2), when the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches constant speed rotation on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I displays the “red bomber icon RBI and default The rotation range of the POV display 224I completely overlaps the display position of the first holding icon h11, and the rotation position of the POV display 224I is displayed at the display position of the second holding icon h12. Partially overlap.

  In the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 218 (Fd3), a state where the red bullet icon BTI is launched from the red bomber icon RBI with the first reserved icon h11 as a target is displayed. On the POV display 224I shown in Fd4), it is displayed that the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11 and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14.

  Then, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 218 (Fd5-1), the first holding icon h11 changed to the red display mode is displayed together with the red bomber icon RBI.

  In this example, while the POV display 224I is performing constant-speed rotation, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is on the back side, may or may not be visible. It may be While the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the icon IHI of “red bomber” and / or the effect image EF14 is displayed on the portion of the display screen behind the POV display 2241 that rotates at a constant speed May or may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 218 (Fd6), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first hold icon h11 of the red display mode and the second display mode of the default display mode. The hold icon h12 is displayed, and the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. However, the icon IHI of “red bomber” may be displayed.

  The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change while the POV display 224I is performing constant-speed rotation, or may change at the same time as the POV display 224I stops constant-speed rotation. Alternatively, it may change after the POV display 224I has stopped rotating at a constant speed.

  Further, although an example using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL or other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M shown in FIG. 206) The above display may be performed by 'etc.' That is, part of the scene displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be enlarged and displayed on the POV display 224I. For example, the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 218 (Fd2) is shown in FIG. 208 (A2) -1) corresponds to the enlarged display of a scene between the same figure (A3-1) and the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 218 (Fd3) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene shown in FIG. 208 (A3-1) It may be In this case, the enlarged display is performed not only on the POV display 224I, but also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. Or may be used in combination with the POV display 224I. In addition, such enlarged display can also be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIG. 217 and FIG. 218, although the notice is related to the display of the icon change notice, the present invention can also be applied to the notice of the appearance of the notice icon. For example, the probability of appearance of the notice icon may be represented depending on how many large-scale behavior characters operate out of the four large-scale behavior characters 224Ga to 224Gd (the more the number of operating features, the appearance probability is Get higher).

  FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and another display means.

  The example shown in FIG. 219 (Fd5-2-1) to FIG. 219 (Fd5-2-2) is a modified example of FIG. 218 (Fd5-1) to FIG. 218 (Fd6). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 219 (Fd 5-2-1) is a display of the notice of icon change notice (the icon IHI of “red bomber”) and a display showing the display mode of the changed icon. It does not indicate whether the icon has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fd5-2-1), it is slightly visible that the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image EF14.

  In FIG. 219 (Fd5-2-2), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first hold icon h11 of the default display mode and the red display. The second hold icon h12 of the aspect is displayed. In this example, the POV display 224I displays the display as to whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has succeeded although the target icon is unknown. Then, when the change effect of the display mode of the icon is displayed by the POV display 224I, the display mode of the target icon actually changes in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the POV display 224I and the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be performed simultaneously, conversely, the first decorative pattern The POV display 224I may be performed after the display device 208L is performed first.

  Also, in this example, the POV display 224I can be used as a notice as to whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is successful although it is unknown until the target icon.

  Hereinafter, in FIG. 219, an example of effects in the device configuration in which the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 206 are combined will be described, but as described in FIG. However, the technology described in this specification can not be applied simply by the difference in the configuration of the present invention, and it can be applied whether the arrangement of the display means is horizontal or vertical as viewed from a technical idea. It is.

  In FIG. 219 (Fe1) to (Fe6), the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is completed only in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display on the fourth display device 208M 'is the fourth display device It is a figure which shows the example completed only in 208M '.

  The state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe1) is different from the state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (f1) and whether or not the background screen is displayed. Is the same. Further, the state of the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 219 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 206 (f1).

  In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-1), the tip portion of the icon IHI of “red bomber” as a display of the notice of icon change appears at the right end of the screen, and in FIG. In the fourth display means 208M ′ shown, an icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 219 (Fe4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, and in the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 219 (Fe5), the bullet The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 219 (Fe6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe1) to FIG. (Fe6), variable display of decorative symbols is continuously performed.

  FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-1) to FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-6) are diagrams showing an example in which a part of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L enters the fourth display means 208M '.

  FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-1) is a continuation from FIG. 219 (Fe2-1), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-1), as a display of an icon change notice The icon IHI of "Red Bomber" appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon IHI of "Red Bomber" is used in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (Fe 2-2-2). A change animation has been started, and a red bullet icon BTI has been fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-3), the lower end area in which the bullet icon BTI is overlapped with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M ′ in the initial position. It is hard to see for a moment because it is displayed on. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-4), the bullet icon BTI has moved into the display screen of the fourth display means 208M 'at the initial position, and the fourth display means 208M. 'The tip of the bullet icon BTI is displayed. In addition, although it does not appear to be overlapped with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M 'at the initial position, the rear end portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . However, it does not have to be displayed. In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-5), the default display mode in which the tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the pedestal hs0' of the variation icon display area CIS '(first display (A part of the variation icon h0 of the embodiment). In this situation, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the fourth display means 208M '. In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-6), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 219 (Fe2-2-6).

  The variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged beyond the size of the display screen of the fourth display means 208M 'and displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be done. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed across both the fourth display means 208M 'and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 51 and the like.

  The state shown in FIG. 220 (Ff1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 208 (A1-1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 220 (Ff1) are in the initial position of each other and are in an opened state (a separated state), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L The display screen of is visible.

  The state shown in FIG. 220 (Ff2) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 208 (A2-1). Here, the icon of "red bomber" as the display of the icon change notice is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. IHI is beginning to appear, and the entire icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 220 (Ff4), the red bomber icon RBI is moving in the left direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the same figure (Ff4) is red The third decorative symbol display device 208N itself starts moving in the left direction (the same figure (Ff5) to Ff6)) instead of moving the icon RBI of the bomber in the left direction. That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved in accordance with the original movement display of the red bomber icon RBI. Eventually, the third decorative symbol display device 208N reaches the maximum movement position and can not move further in the left direction. Then, next, as shown in FIG. 220 (Ff7), the icon RBI of the red bomber has moved into the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L The tip part of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, and the rear part of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the far side, the entire icon RBI of the red bomber may be displayed.

  In FIG. 220 (Ff8), the third decorative symbol display device 208N that has reached the maximum movement position starts moving toward the initial position, and about 2/3 of the red bomber icon RBI is the first decoration The red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI since it is displayed on the symbol display device 208L and has reached the position in front of the target first reserved icon h11. In FIG. 220 (Ff9), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. Further, the entire icon RBI of the red bomber is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 220 (Ff10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In addition, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 220 (Ff11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. In addition, the red bomber icon RBI is about to fly away further to the left from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 220 (Ff12), the red bomber icon RBI is the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It has disappeared from

  In the example described above, one image may be displayed across a plurality of display units, but the same image is not displayed on a plurality of display units. For example, although the same image may not be displayed in part on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be displayed.

  In addition, even when the icon non-change animation is performed, the icon RBI of the red bomber is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M through the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation may be performed, but when the icon invariable animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI may be configured to be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Only the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be displayed.

  In FIG. 220 (Fg), the icon IHI of "bomber", the icon IHI of "red bomber", and the icon IHI of "gold bomber" are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N as the display of a plurality of icon change notices. Is displayed. Although these bombers may start moving animation simultaneously as shown in the example shown in FIG. 210 (A2-3-1), they are only displayed in stock, and moving animation is one by one. It may be performed.

  Note that the hold icon or the change icon itself may also be used to display an icon change notice. In this case, it is notified that the user is changing itself, or another icon different from itself (hold icon or change It will be predicted that the icon changes.

  In addition, a notice display for notifying that the display of the icon change notice is performed in any of the symbol change displays among the held symbol change displays or that it is performed in the currently performed symbol change display (icon A change notice may be displayed). For example, only the tip of the icon IHI of "bomber" is visible at the right end of the screen, or the icon IHI of "bomber" appears as a display during the icon change notice preparation, and stands by in a dedicated stock area (standby area) The indication which is done is raised. In addition, a notice may be given by a telop display trp shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-3). In addition, a plurality of icon change notice preparation display may be displayed. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of display of the icon change notice, the icon change notice preparation display may be displayed for each display mode of the display of the icon change notice. In addition, there may be a dedicated area for performing stock display of the icon change notice preparation display. In addition, at least a part (including the whole) of the area in which the icon change notice preparation display is displayed may be displayed in the area overlapping the display of the icon change notice, or may be displayed in the non-overlap area. .

  In addition, before the display of the icon change notice (the icon change notice by the other notice display such as the "bomber" icon or the icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, as the notice and / or the advance notice of the change. , “The icon (display icon and / or change icon) whose display mode changes after the icon change notice” changes to a display mode (for example, the enlarged display mode etc.) different from the display mode which changes due to the icon change notice Therefore, it may be notified that it is an icon that changes due to the icon change notice, or the display mode of the icon changes due to other display such as cursor display on the "icon whose display manner changes after the icon change notice." By displaying an indication suggesting that the icon The may be foretold.

  In addition, after the display of the icon change notice (the icon change notice by the other notice display such as the "bomber" icon or the icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed, it is informed that the change is a big hit. Execution of notices (notice display by various display devices such as liquid crystal display device, light emission by various lamps (frame lamp 122, panel lamp) (color and light emission pattern, notice sound by speakers, notice operation of operation means and various devices, etc.) Among them, various notices described in the present specification may be made. For example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change in a state where the big hit decision sound of the fluctuation is outputted from the speaker 120. Alternatively, the icon change animation may be displayed in a state where the jackpot decision sound is output. However, the various types of advance notice may not be performed during the execution of the advance notice for notifying that the change is a big hit. In addition, there may be various notices that are performed only during the execution of a notice notifying that the change is a big hit.

  Although various advance notices may not be performed during execution of the island simultaneous rendering, they may be performed. In addition, there may be various notices that are performed only during the execution of the island simultaneous rendering.

  In addition, depending on the effect background or the effect mode, there may be various notices to be performed and various notices not to be performed. Conversely, there may be various effects to be performed regardless of the effect background. For example, on the background screen of the sea, the display of the icon change notice (the icon change notice by the other notice display such as the "bomber" icon or the icon change notice by the changing icon itself) is displayed. In this case, the display of the icon change notice may not be displayed. Further, the effect background may be selectable by the player, and in this case, it is also possible to select whether or not to display the icon change advance notice.

  As mentioned above, although the example of presentation which used various icons and displays which were explained using Drawing 177-Drawing 179, or icons and displays other than those icons and displays was explained, it collects it at the last and explains seven example of presentation Do.

  FIG. 221 is a diagram schematically illustrating seven example effects for which various icons and displays are used. In FIG. 221, the progress of the effect is shown stepwise from the left to the right of the figure. Further, FIG. 221 also shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  An example of the effect of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 178 is roughly shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of these reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. 179 (a). This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (1), a mini game dedicated to the mini game is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game A mini game B (Janken Showdown) is being played in Windu MGW. On the left side of the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of a Yoshimune character is displayed. The icon of this Yoshimune character is shown in FIG. 179 (a), which is a type of a pending icon or a variation icon No. The icon of the character of Yoshimune of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the left side of FIG. 221 (1), which is the same as the icon of “19 Yoshin (Janken)”. On the other hand, on the right side in the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of a character of swordsman as the opponent shown in FIG. 178 (c) is displayed. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (1), the icon of the character of swordsman of aspect a is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 221 (1), the No. 1 shown in FIG. 221 (a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune which is the same as the icon of the aspect c of 19 and the icon of the character of the swordsman of the aspect d shown in FIG. 178 (c) are displayed. That is, in this Janken confrontation, Yoshimune has issued a choki and a swordsman has issued a par, and the character of "Yoshimou victory" is also displayed in the mini game Windu MGW. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (1), No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune which is the same as the icon of the aspect f of 19 is displayed together with the character of "Yoshimoku victory", and the icon of the character of Yoshimune is also displayed a balloon marked as "hold change" The display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the No. 1 display icon, is No. The display mode is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (2), the mini game window MGW is not displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game B (jang ken confrontation) Is performed on the left base icon bIl arranged in the hold icon display area HIS. That is, the mini game B is played using the hold icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side and center of FIG. 221 (2), the first hold icon h11 is an icon of a character of swordsman as an opponent shown in FIG. 178 (c), The hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. 179 (c). It is an icon of 19 "Jisune (Janken)".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (2), the first holding icon h11 is displayed by the icon of the sword character of aspect a, and the second holding icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect a It is displayed by the icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 221 (2), the first holding icon h11 is displayed as the icon of the sword character of mode d, and the second holding icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of mode c. It is displayed by the icon. That is, in this jangken confrontation, the swordsman gave a par and Yoshimune gave a choki, and Yoshimune won. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (2), the second hold icon h12 is displayed as the icon of the character of Yoshimune of the aspect f, and the icon of the character of Yoshimune is "hold change" The written balloon is also displayed. And although the 1st holding icon h11 next to it was an icon of a character of swordsman until now, No. in FIG. 179 (a). The display mode is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3. In the example shown in FIG. 221 (2), the mini game B using the hold icon is performed, and the display mode of the hold icon used for the mini game B is changed. That is, the hold icon displayed by the opponent's icon becomes the pre-read target hold icon.

  As described above, the mini game may be played with the hold icon as shown in FIG. 221 (2) or the mini game may be played in another area as shown in FIG. 221 (1). Also, although the example here is an example of a mini game of whether or not the display mode of the hold icon changes, it is a mini game of whether or not various advance notice icons shown in FIG. 177 can be acquired. Good.

  In FIG. 221 (3) and FIG. 221 (4), the No. in FIG. An example of an effect for giving a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes by the “bancho” change notice display BCH of 16 is roughly shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 221 (3) and (4), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the change icon h0 is a change icon The display area CIS is displayed on the pedestal hs0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (3) and FIG. 221 (4), both the first reserved icon h11 and the variation icon h0 correspond to No. It is displayed in the default display mode described in 1. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (3) and FIG. 221 (4), the No. 16 of FIG. 179 (b) is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. The change warning display BCH of "bancho" of the aspect a described in is displayed. A balloon inscribed as “pending change” is added to the “bancho” change notice display BCH here, and it is notified that the display mode of the pending icon changes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 221 (3), the change notice of "bancho" on the right base icon bIr disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the third display mode. It has changed to (blue display mode). Note that the timing at which the “bancho” change notice display BCH disappears may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, or the “bancho” change notice display BCH disappears Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 221 (4), the change notice display BCH of "bancho" does not disappear from the top of the right base icon bIr, and the balloon attached to the change notice display BCH of "bancho" However, it has been changed to a balloon marked "one more time", and it is predicted that the display mode of the hold icon changes once again. Further, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the third display mode (display mode of blue). Note that the timing at which the balloon attached to the “bancho” change notice BCH changes (the re-notice start timing) may be the same as the time at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The start timing of the advance notice may be earlier or, conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (4), the “bancho” change notice display BCH disappears from above the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the fourth display mode It has changed to (the display mode of green). In this example, the display mode of the hold icon changes twice in one pattern change display, but the next symbol change display of the symbol change display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes once The display mode of the hold icon may change again. Further, in one symbol variation display, the display mode of the hold icon may change three or more times. Furthermore, although the “bancho” icon used as the change notice display BCH in FIG. 221 (4) is used again without disappearing for re-noticing, the icon or display to be subjected to the notice target disappears (non- Until it is displayed, the change notice may be used many times. For example, if the icon to be notified is the hold icon, until the hold icon becomes a change icon, or until the change icon disappears, in other words, the symbol change display of the pre-read change object is started or the symbol The change preview may be used until the change display ends, and the display mode may change repeatedly. Further, the icon or display to be notified may be a notice icon or a notice display, and the display mode of the notice icon or notice may be repeatedly changed until the notice icon or notice display disappears. In addition, even if the change notice display BCH is displayed, there may be a case where no display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. In addition, even if the “bancho” change notice display BCH shown at the center of the symbol change display 173 (4) is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon may not change again. That is, the "bancho" change notice BCH may not be used again to change the icon to be notified.

  In FIG. 221 (5) and FIG. The effect example of notifying that the display mode of the holding icon changes by the change notice display of the bomber system of 4 and 5 is roughly shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 221 (5) and FIG. (6), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the change in the default display mode The icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (5), the first hold icon h11 corresponds to the No. in FIG. 179 (a). It is displayed in the 4th display mode (display mode of green) described in 4. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (5), the No. of FIG. 179 (b) is displayed. The icon IHI of the default color "bomber" described in 4 has appeared, and an icon change animation using the icon IHI of the "bomber" has been started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 221 (5), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first holding icon h11 of the fourth display mode (display mode of green color), and the bullets fired The icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode) in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (5). There is. Since the change in display mode of the icon by the default color "bomber" icon IHI only raises one step, it can not be changed to the icon of the fifth display mode unless it is the icon of the fourth display mode.

  On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 221 (6), the first hold icon h11 corresponds to the No. in FIG. 179 (a). It is displayed in the first display mode (default display mode) described in 1. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, No. 1 in FIG. 179 (b). The icon "IHI" of red "red bomber" described in 5 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber" has been started. Furthermore, a tutorial display is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. This tutorial display is a tutorial display on the change presentation of the display mode of the icon using the change notice display, and may be displayed until the change presentation starts and may be hidden thereafter, or the bullet icon BTI It may be displayed until it is fired and may be hidden thereafter, or may be displayed until the change of the display mode of the icon is completed or the change failure is determined. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown at the center of FIG. 221 (6), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first holding icon h11 of the first display mode (default display mode), and the bullets fired The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode) in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 221 (6). There is. In changing the display mode of the icon by the red bomber “red bomber” icon IHI in red (the fifth display mode), change the display mode of the icon before the change to the icon of the fifth display mode regardless of the level Can.

  An error message (warning message) such as “Please remove the ball” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L when a fullness error occurs in the state shown in FIG. Display (hereinafter referred to as "error display EWM") is displayed. The error display EWM overlaps at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side, and hides at least a part of the notice icon YI. In addition, the error display EWM may overlap from the front side to all the notice icons YI. Further, the error display EWM may overlap from at least a part from the front side only after the notice icon YI is used (for example, the display of the mode d shown in FIG. 177 (a)), or the notice icon Only before YI is used (for example, the display of mode a shown in FIG. 177 (a)), at least a portion may overlap from the front side. In addition, the error display EWM may overlap over the entire display period of the error display EWM from the front to at least a part of the notice icon YI, and a part of the period (for example, the error display EWM) It may overlap only for a fixed period of time) after the start.

  Or, conversely, the notice icon YI has a case where the error display EWM overlaps from at least a part of the front (for example, when the importance of the error display EWM is low or the relation with cheating is low, etc.) This may be done only after the notice icon YI is used, or before the notice icon YI is used. Also, although the example shown in FIG. 221 (7) is a relation with the notice icon, the relation with the notice display is also the same as that described above.

  In Fig. 221 (8), a full error occurs in the state shown in Fig. 208 (A2-1), and an error display EWM such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. The error display EWM does not overlap the change effect of the display mode of the icon. That is, the error display EWM is displayed at a position deviated from the display position of the icon (red bomber icon RBI, bullet icon BTI, etc.) used for the change effect of the display mode of the icon. More specifically, the error display EWM is displayed at a position not overlapping the change notice display. Also, the error display EWM does not overlap with the mini game (for example, the icon or display of a character appearing in the mini game).

  However, the error display EWM is at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the icon (for example, at least a part of the change notice display) or at least a part of the mini game (for example, the icon or display of a character appearing in the mini game Of the error indication EWM may overlap over the entire period of the display period of the error display EWM (for example, the start of the error display EWM) It may overlap only for a predetermined period of time, etc.).

  Moreover, although FIG. 221 (7) and the same figure (8) were the examples of the error display EWM, such as "Please remove a ball," the display and warning regarding various errors described using FIG. The same applies to the display regarding.

  In the game table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 221, only one notice icon is displayed in the case of a loss (in the case of a gusset), and in the case of a big hit, the game is boosted. It is configured to display a plurality of notice icons.

  As described above, the description using FIGS. 177 to 221 can be combined with the simultaneous rendering or the volume adjustment display (for example, the above-described bar display VB for volume adjustment) described with reference to FIG. 171 and the like. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 215, it can be combined with a scene of customization by the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI.

  In addition, although the example applied to a pachinko machine (ball-ball game machine) is described in the description using FIGS. 177 to 221, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a game machine (slot machine) that uses balls (pachinko balls). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and is also applicable to, for example, the enclosed pachinko machine described with reference to FIG. The present invention is also applicable to the slot machine described with reference to FIG.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Game console provided with one or two, fourth display means 208M ', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I etc.],
The display means is a means by which a first icon may be displayed;
The first icon is an icon related to symbol variation display [for example, hold icon h11 to h14, variation icon h0],
The display means is a means by which a second icon may be displayed;
The display means may display a notice icon [eg, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
The second icon is an icon of a type different from the advance notice icon [eg, an icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 178 (a), an icon for mini game B shown in FIG. 178 (c)] The icon is not an icon that represents the number of holds by the number displayed
The display means is a means by which an effect display may be displayed,
The effect display is display of an effect using any one of the displayed first icons [for example, one or more (all or a part of) icons] and the second icon. [For example, display of mini game A or B]
When the notice icon is displayed after the effect display is displayed [eg, FIG. 180 (A11), FIG. 183 (A3-2-9), FIG. (A3-2-8c1), Fig. (3-2-8c7), Fig. 185 (11), Fig. 187 (34), Fig. 188 (う 15-2-17), Fig. 190 (う 1-2-24), Fig. 195 (( a8) etc]
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to entertain the player by making the process of presence / absence of the advance notice icon pay attention to the display of the effect display using two icons.

  The first icon may be an icon that may be displayed corresponding to the number of holds. For example, the variable icon may be displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 0, or the first hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 1, displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 2 The second second hold icon to be displayed, the third third hold icon to be displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 3, and the fourth fourth hold icon to be displayed corresponding to the number of holds = 4 It may be. The notice icon may be another type of icon than the change icon or the hold icon.

  Here, the number of pending is the number of pending start of symbol variation display, and the first icon may include a variation icon as an example in addition to the pending icon. The variation icon is an icon relating to a symbol variation display being executed, and is an icon indicating a digested hold. That is, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension represented by the suspension icon representing the undivided suspension is started, the suspension icon is displayed as a variation icon corresponding to the started symbol fluctuation display.

  Note that the number of reservations may be displayed depending on the number of first icons displayed, and the number of reservations may not be displayed depending on the number of notice icons displayed.

  The effect display may be display of an effect using one of the displayed first icons and the second icon.

  When the effect display is performed, the notice icon may be displayed.

  The any one of the icons may be one first icon or may be a plurality of first icons (for example, all or part of the displayed first icons).

  The second icon may be an icon for presentation (for example, an icon of a character), may be a hold icon, or may be a change icon. More specifically, the icon for the above-mentioned effect may be an icon for giving notice of the start of the notice effect, may be an icon dedicated to the mini game, or may be an icon serving as a hold icon. And may be an icon that doubles as a fluctuation icon.

  Examples of the effect display include effects of a mini game using any of the displayed first icons and the second icon. That is, as a result of performing a mini game effect using any one of the icons and the second icon, the notice icon may be displayed.

  "The notice icon may be displayed" means that the notice icon may not be displayed. Furthermore, "the notice icon may not be displayed" may include that the notice icon may not be displayed and another display other than the notice icon may be displayed. It does not have to be included. This concept also applies in the following description.

  The notice icon may be displayed (stocked) after changing the display position after the display is started, or may be displayed continuously (stocked) without changing the display position. It may be. For example, the display means is provided with an appearance area where the display of the advance notice icon starts and a stock area where the notice icon is stocked, and the appearance area and the stock area are different areas (partially overlapping Good, but not all overlap). The stock area is a display area where the notice icon continues to be displayed. The advance notice icon moves from the appearance area to the stock area, is used in the stock area, may disappear in the stock area, or may change in the display mode. Alternatively, there may be a case where the material leaves the stock area and disappears, or the display mode may change.

  The effect display may be an effect (for example, a mini game) that simultaneously uses any one of the icons and the second icon, or any one of the any icon and the second icon. One of the icons may be used first, and the other of the one may be used later (for example, a mini game).

  Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed by the display of the effect using only one of the displayed first icons. . Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed by the display of the effect in which only the second icon is used.

“A plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [eg, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
The display means is a means by which a notice display may be displayed;
A plurality of types of notice displays are prepared as the notice display [eg, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
The preview display of one type among the plurality of types of preview displays is a first preview display [e.g. Notice of "change"],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display [e.g. Notice of 17 "reach"],
Of a plurality of types of notice icons, a notice icon [e.g. 1 When the notice icon YI for "box" is used, the first notice may be displayed [eg, Fig. 181 (Fig. 33), Fig. 186 (186 14-4-3)]. ,
When the given notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [eg, FIG. 185 (15), FIG. 186 (14-2-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, which notice display is displayed until the given notice icon is used (whether the first notice display is displayed or the second notice display is displayed) May be noticed until the certain advance notice icon is used. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not determined in advance in a one-to-one relationship, and the player can not recognize which notice display is displayed only by looking at the type of the notice icon. You may be interested in watching the notice icon until the display appears.

  Here, it may be unclear itself that the notice display is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed. That is, there may be a case where the notice display is displayed or a case where the notice display is not displayed, and it may be unclear in which case. The fact that the display of the advance notice is unknown is, as a result, it is also unclear which type of the advance notice is displayed among a plurality of types of advance notices.

  Also, only one type of notice icon may be prepared as the notice icon. In this case, when the notice icon is used, a notice display of a plurality of kinds of notice displays may be displayed, and the notice display is displayed until the notice display is displayed. The thing itself may be unknown.

  The display means may be means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon used when the notice icon is used. That is, at the time when the notice icon is displayed, it may be possible to know which notice display among the plurality of kinds of notice displays is the notice display displayed after the notice icon is used. In short, the relationship between the advance notice icon and the advance notice display may be determined in one-to-one correspondence in advance.

  Also, "when a certain notice icon is used" means, for example, when the certain notice icon is used in the effect, and more specifically, the display mode of the certain notice icon is It may be the case where it has changed, or the case where the certain advance notice icon disappears (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

  In addition, after the start of display, the notice display may be displayed (stocked) by changing the display position, or may be continuously displayed (stocked) without changing the display position. May be

  In addition, when a certain notice icon of a plurality of kinds of notice icons is used, one kind of notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “some notice display”) of a plurality of kinds of notice displays is displayed. In some cases, it may be unclear which type of notice display among the plurality of kinds of notice displays is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed.

  In addition, there may be a case where it is not notified that the first notice display is displayed only by the display of the given notice icon, and that the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where no notice is given. Or, conversely, there may be a case where it is notified that the first notice display is displayed only by the display of the certain notice icon, and the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where it is foreseen.

Also, when the first preliminary display is displayed, the display mode of any of the displayed first icons may change [eg, in the case of FIG. 181 (A 36)] ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the first preliminary display may be a display for changing the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons. For example, the display mode of any one of the first icons changes to the display mode of the notice. In this case, the first notice display functions as a notice of the notice by the first icon.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to cause the first icon to be focused even after the effect display is finished.

  Here, "any of the displayed first icons" may be the first icon used for the effect display, or may be used for the effect display. It may be the first icon that is not displayed. Further, any one of the icons may be a plurality of icons or one icon (for example, all or part of the first icons displayed).

  Further, the first icon used for the effect display may be a display mode as it is when the effect display is performed, or may be a display mode which is changed from the display mode where the effect display is performed. . For example, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is different between the display mode before being used for the effect display and the display mode for which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. May be returned to the previous display mode, or may be the display mode as it is without returning to the previous display mode, or from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. It may change to the display mode of. Further, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is the same as the display mode before being used for the effect display and the display mode in which the effect display is performed, the effect display is performed. Later, the display mode may change, or may remain the same without changing. In any of the cases described above, when the first preliminary display is displayed, the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display may change.

  In addition, when the first advance notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed, or the displayed first notice may be displayed. The display mode of any one of the icons may not change. Further, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons is more effective when the first notice display is displayed than when the first notice display is not displayed. It may be variable.

  Further, the effect display includes a plurality of types of effect display, and any one of the first icons displayed is any of the first type of icon than the effect display of changing the display mode of the icon. In the case of the effect display of the type which does not change either, the application frequency may be higher or lower, or the appearance frequency of both may be the same. Furthermore, one type of effect display among a plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display, and the first effect display is displayed rather than the case where the first effect display is not displayed. The display mode of one of the displayed first icons may change more easily.

In addition, “the second advance notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that the reach will be performed] regarding the symbol change display on which the second notice display is displayed,
The big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second preview display is displayed, than the second preview display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, even if the second preliminary display is displayed, the big hit symbol form is not necessarily finalized in the final display, and even the symbol variation display in which the second preliminary display is displayed is final There may be a case where the symbol form of the loss is displayed in a definite manner. Or, conversely, if the second advance notice (for example, premier notice etc.) is displayed, the symbol variation display in which the second notice is displayed, the symbol mode of the big hit is finally definitely displayed May be

  Note that the display means is a means that may display a third notice, and the third notice is a display for giving a preliminary notice (for example, a chance to look ahead). In the case where the third advance notice is displayed, the big hit symbol form may be more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the third advance notice is not displayed. That is, even if the third advance notice display is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect is not necessarily finally displayed in the final display, and even if the third notice display is displayed, it is final There may be a case where the symbol form of the loss is displayed in a definite manner. Or, conversely, if the third advance notice display is displayed, finally the symbol pattern of the big hit may be definitely displayed in the symbol change display in which the third advance notice display is displayed.

“The first icon has a plurality of types of display modes [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (a). 1 to No. Icon in any one of 19 display modes], and
The display mode of one of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [eg, "display mode of" default "],
The display mode of one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode of "villagers" (Janken), a display mode of Yoshimune (bows),
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first display mode may be a default display mode. The second display mode may be a display mode used for the effect display. For example, a display mode that may be used for the effect display may be used, or a dedicated display mode used for the effect display may be used.

In addition, the effect display may be a display icon of the first icon of the second display mode being displayed [for example, a display icon of a display mode of "village" (Janken) or a variation icon, a display mode of Yoshimune (bow) Display of effects using the hold icon or the change icon] and the second icon [for example, the panda's opponent icon TI, the icon AI for mini game A] [for example, starting from FIG. 185 (A 8-1) It is a display of the acquisition of Yoshimune treasure shown in Figure 186-Figure 187, which is a rock-paper-scissors match animation being done.
The effect display is a display of an effect in which the first icon of the first display mode is not used.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, it is notified that the effect display is displayed by displaying the first icon of the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, justifying that the effect display is displayed does not mean that the notification icon is displayed during and / or after the end of the effect display. That is, just displaying the first icon of the second display mode does not mean that the notice icon is displayed during and / or after the effect display is displayed.

  Also, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display is displayed, and when the first icon is displayed in the first display mode, the effect display is displayed Alternatively, the notification icon may not be displayed based on only the display of the first icon in the first display mode.

  Here, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display may be always displayed, or conversely, the effect display may not be displayed.

  Only after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, it may be unclear whether the notice icon is displayed thereafter.

  The second icon may also be displayed only when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

  Here, the first icon and the second icon displayed in the second display mode may be simultaneously started to be displayed, or the first icon displayed in the second display mode The display of the second icon may be started earlier, or the display of the second icon may be started earlier.

  In addition, even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may be displayed. In addition, if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may not be displayed. Alternatively, the second icon may be displayed even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed.

  The second icon may also be displayed only when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed. Furthermore, when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may also be displayed.

  Furthermore, the second icon may not be displayed when the first icon is not displayed, or may be displayed in the opposite manner. That is, the second icon may not appear alone, or may appear alone.

In addition, after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the second icon may be started [for example, the opponent started from FIG. 180 (A5) Animation of appearance of icon, animation of appearance of icon for mini game A, which has been started from FIG. 186 (5)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The “second icon” referred to here is neither the hold icon nor an icon serving as the hold icon, nor is the change icon nor an icon serving as the change icon. That is, the “second icon” may be a display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “display mode for effect display”) used for the effect display.

  After the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the second icon may not be started. Even when the display of the second icon is not started here, the display of the second icon is started before the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Or when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

  When the display mode of the first icon changes (for example, when the display mode changes to the second display mode), the second icon may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, after the second icon is displayed, the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed.

  When the second icon is the change icon or the hold icon (including the change icon or the hold icon), the second icon may be displayed after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. The second icon may change from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, the display mode for effect display), or even if it is always changed Good. In addition, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is displayed from a third display mode (e.g., a default display mode) to a fourth display mode (e.g., effect display) May change, or may change. Alternatively, when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is displayed from the third display mode (for example, default display mode) to the fourth display mode (eg, effect display) May change, or may change.

  When the second icon is displayed, one pattern (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed only after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) There may be only one before or only when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or a plurality of patterns (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) After that, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, and when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, a certain combination of 2 or 3 at the same time) It may be.

  Here, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may be displayed, or the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. After that, the second icon may be displayed, and the second icon may also be displayed at the same time as the first icon of the second display mode is displayed.

Also, in some cases, a plurality of the first icons in the second display mode may be displayed [eg, FIG. 180 (a 3-1), FIG. 186 (c 3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, only one said 1st icon of a said 2nd display mode may be displayed. In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of the first icons of the first display mode may be displayed, or only one may be displayed. Furthermore, only one second icon may be displayed, or a plurality of second icons may be displayed.

Also, a first effect display may be displayed as the effect display.
A second effect display may be displayed as the effect display,
After the first effect display is displayed, the notice icon is displayed [eg, FIG. 180 (A 11)],
After the second effect display is displayed, the advance notice icon is not displayed [eg, FIG. 181 (A 8-2-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, the second effect display is a so-called false effect display.

In addition, “a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [eg, FIG. 185 (11), FIG. 188 (15-2-17)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, after the effect display is displayed one or more times, a plurality of advance notice icons may be displayed. That is, a plurality of notice icons may be stocked. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed only once the effect display is performed, or 0 or one notice icon is displayed each time the effect display is performed once. A plurality of notice icons may be displayed by performing the effect display a plurality of times. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed (stocked) by other effects other than the effect display.

In addition, it may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Even when the second number of advance notice icons are displayed, there may be a case where the lost symbol pattern is finally displayed. Alternatively, when the second number of notice icons are displayed, finally the jackpot symbol aspect may be definitely displayed.

  Even if the preview icon is displayed in the second preview mode, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol mode than the display of the preview icon in the first preview mode. Good.

In addition, “operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.] are provided,
When the operation means is operated during display of the effect display, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 180 (c 9) onward and subsequent FIG. 180 (c 9)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Even if the operation means is not operated, a notice icon may be displayed, and conversely, the notice icon may be displayed only when the operation means is operated.

  While the effect display may be displayed, the operation icon may or may not be operated, and the notification icon may be more easily displayed if the operation can not be operated, or vice versa , It may be difficult to display the notice icon. Further, the probability that the advance notice icon is displayed may be the same as in the case where it can be done or not.

  During the display of the effect display, a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) may or may not be displayed. The operation display referred to here may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display of only the image, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display) The display may include only the operation prompting display, or the display including the display (operation valid period display) representing the operation valid period of the operation means, or the operation Only the term of validity may be displayed. Furthermore, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the mode change of the operation means itself (for example, change of color, change of projection amount, , Display shape corresponding to change of shape, change of position, change of posture, etc. may be included.

In addition, “production effect means [for example, FIG. 206 (ca c1)]” is provided,
There is a configuration in which the effect movable means may perform the effect operation after the display of the effect display is started [for example, the mini game special feature 225 shown in FIG. 206 (ca c2)].
When the rendering operation is performed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, FIG. 206 (f2)),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The effect movable means may be configured to perform the effect operation after the effect display is displayed. That is, after the display of the effect display is completed, the effect movable means may be configured to perform the effect operation. Alternatively, the effect movable means may be configured to perform the effect operation while the effect display is displayed.

  When the rendering operation is performed, the preview icon may be more easily displayed than when the rendering operation is not performed, but the preview icon may not be displayed even if the rendering operation is performed. It is also good. Alternatively, the notice icon may be displayed whenever the rendering operation is performed.

  When the rendering operation is performed, there may be a case where a pre-reading advance notice may be started, or a normal advance notice (a notice on a symbol variation display being performed when the production operation is performed) may be started. It may be. Moreover, when the rendering operation is performed, there may be a case where the advance notice is more likely to be started than when the effect operation is not performed, but the advance reading is not started even if the effect operation is performed. There may be. Alternatively, when the rendering operation is performed, the prefetch notice may be displayed. Furthermore, when the rendering operation is performed, the normal advance notice may be more likely to be started than when the effect operation is not performed, but the normal advance notice is not started even if the effect operation is performed. There may be. Alternatively, when the rendering operation is performed, the normal advance notice may be displayed without fail.

  However, during the display of the effect display, the effect movable means may be configured not to perform the effect operation absolutely, or the effect movable means does not perform the effect operation regardless of the display of the effect display. It may be done.

In addition, the above-mentioned notice icon is a notice mode of one type among a plurality of notice modes [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box”, “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 177 (a)] It is an icon that starts being displayed with
If the notice icon is displayed in a second notice mode [for example, "red box"] rather than the notice icon is displayed in a first notice mode [for example, "box"] In the symbol variation display being executed when the advance notice icon is used, the big hit symbol form may be likely to be finally displayed in a final manner [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 177 (a)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  When the notice icon is used before the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "the notice change") to be subject to notice by the notice icon is started, the notice by the notice icon is a prefetch notice. There are cases, and there are cases where it is a normal notice, but it may be unclear whether the notice was a pre-reading notice or a normal notice only by seeing the notice by the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be used in an effect before the change of the notice object ends. Also in this case, the notice by the notice icon may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a normal notice.

  When the notice icon is displayed in the first notice mode, the notice display may be more easily displayed than when the notice icon is displayed in the second notice mode. There may be a case where a certain display (a display different from the advance notice display) may be easily displayed.

"The display means may be a means for displaying a change icon [eg, change icon h0]
The variation icon is an icon related to symbol variation display being executed,
The second icon is an icon different from the fluctuation icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The first icon is the fluctuation icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first icon may be an icon dedicated to the variation icon, or may be an icon also serving as the variation icon.

"The display means may be a means for displaying a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of the special view 1].
The hold icon is an icon representing the hold number according to the number displayed.
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The first icon is the hold icon,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 or 90]]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Game console provided with one or two, fourth display means 208M ', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I etc.],
The display means is a means by which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of the special view 1],
The display means is a means by which a notice icon may be displayed;
The notice icon is an icon of a type different from the hold icon [eg, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b)], and the display means is , A notice display [eg, notice display YH] may be displayed,
A plurality of types of notice displays are prepared as the notice display [eg, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
When the preview icon is used, one type of preview display may be displayed among the plurality of types of preview displays [for example, FIG. 181 (A 32), FIG. 190 (F 13), FIG. 191 (E 1-2-18), FIG. 196 (A 8-1), FIG. 196 (A 8-2-1), FIG. 198 (A 1-3-3), FIG. 199 (A a 15), the same figure (A 28), etc.],
When the notice icon is used, the notice icon may be hidden [eg, FIG. 181 (35), FIG. 191 (e. 15), FIG. 191 (eg 1-2-20), etc.]
Even if the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be displayed but the notice icon may be used again as an effect, and a notice of a plurality of kinds of notices may be displayed [eg, for example, 196 (A11), FIG. 196 (A16), FIG. 196 (A8-2-4), FIG. 196 (A8-2-6), FIG. 198 (A1-3-9), FIG. (A 28), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, even after the notice icon is used, the display condition of the notice icon can be noticed and the player may be entertained in some cases.

  "When a notice icon is used" means, for example, the case where the notice icon is used in the effect, more specifically, when the display mode of the notice icon changes The warning icon may disappear (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

  When the notice icon is used once, the notice icon may be hidden, and even if the notice icon is used once, the notice icon is not hidden but the notice icon is displayed again. It may be used and some advance notice may be displayed.

“A plurality of types of notice icons are prepared as the notice icons [eg, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b)],
The preview display of one type among the plurality of types of preview displays is a first preview display [e.g. Notice of "change"],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display [e.g. Notice of 17 "reach"],
Of a plurality of types of notice icons, a notice icon [e.g. When the notice icon YI of 1 “box” is used, the first notice display may be displayed [eg, FIG. 196 (A 8-1), FIG. 198 (A 1-3-3) 199 (Ia 15), the same figure (I a 28), etc.],
When the given notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [eg, FIG. 196 (a 11), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, it may not be notified that the notice display is displayed before the notice icon is used.

  In addition, before the notice icon is used, it may be configured not to give notice of which kind of notice display among the plurality of kinds of notice displays is displayed.

  In addition, there may be a case where it is not notified that the first notice display is displayed only by the display of the given notice icon, and that the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where no notice is given. Or, conversely, there may be a case where it is notified that the first notice display is displayed only by the display of the certain notice icon, and the second notice display is displayed. There may be cases where it is foreseen.

Also, when a certain type of notice icon among the plurality of kinds of notice icons is used, a notice display of a type corresponding to the certain type of notice icon is displayed [ For example, the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 177 (b) are associated with the various notice displays shown in FIG. 177 (b) in a one-to-one relationship,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The plurality of types of preview displays and the plurality of types of preview icons may be associated with each other for each type.

  The plurality of types of preview displays and the plurality of types of preview icons may be associated with each other in one-to-one correspondence, in many-to-one correspondence, or in one-to-many correspondence. It may be associated with many to many.

Also, “the notice icon of a certain type is not hidden even if it is used once, and the notice icon of a certain kind is used more than once until the notice icon of a certain kind is hidden. Of the type corresponding to the type of notice icon are displayed a plurality of times [eg, FIG. 199 (a 15), (a 28), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the second advance notice display is a display for giving a notice [for example, a notice that the reach will be performed] regarding the symbol change display on which the second notice display is displayed,
The big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the second preview display is displayed, than the second preview display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “type of notice display displayed when the notice icon is first used [for example, No. 7 shown in FIG. The type of notice display that is displayed when the notice icon is used for the Nth (N is a natural number of 2 or more) [for example, the third time] may be the same [For example, FIG. 196 (A8-2-2) and FIG. 196 (A8-2-6)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  However, they may be different, and different types of notices may be displayed. Or conversely, it may be always the same.

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
The display means is a means by which an operation display may be displayed;
The operation display is a display including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image configured by the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT],
When the notice icon is used [for example, FIG. 200 (b4)], the operation display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 200 (b5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
The display means is a means by which an operation display may be displayed;
The operation display is a display [for example, display of an operation promotion notification image] including at least an image [for example, a button image 136a] imitating the operation means,
After the operation display is displayed [for example, FIG. 181 (A 31-2-2), FIG. 203 (Ea 2)], the notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. -6), Fig. 203 (d) a7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The operation display may be a display of only an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "operation prompting display"). The display may also include a display representing the operation effective period of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation effective period display”), or the image and the operation promotion display may be only, or the image And the operation effective period may be displayed only. Furthermore, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the mode change of the operation means itself (for example, change of color, change of projection amount, , Display shape corresponding to change of shape, change of position, change of posture, etc. may be included.

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
When the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 181 (A 31-2-5), FIG. 203 (Aa 5)], the notice icon may be used [for example, FIG. 181 (A 31-2-6). Figure 203 (d) (a7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
When the operation means is operated, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow from FIG. 180 (c 9) to the subsequent FIG. 180 (a 9-1) and the like]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, it is equipped with “production movable means [for example, family crest actor 224E, one-and-two-box actor 224H] shown in FIG.
When the notice icon is used, a display for giving a notice that the effect movable means performs the effect operation is displayed as the notice display [e.g. No. 24 "Senryo Box Character Works", no. There are cases where 25 “Crest Movements” are displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display for giving notice that the effect moving means performs the effect operation is referred to as an effect operation notification display.

In addition, “a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [eg, FIG. 185 (11), FIG. 188 (15-2-17)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, it may be easier to finally display the jackpot symbol form when the second number of notice icons are displayed than when the first number of notice icons are displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, the above-mentioned notice icon is a notice mode of one type among a plurality of notice modes [for example, “box”, “red box”, “gold box”, “rainbow box” shown in FIG. 177 (a)] It is an icon that starts being displayed with
If the notice icon is displayed in a second notice mode [for example, "red box"] rather than the notice icon is displayed in a first notice mode [for example, "box"] In the symbol variation display being executed when the advance notice icon is used, the big hit symbol form may be likely to be finally displayed in a final manner [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 177 (a)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 or 90]]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Game console provided with one or two, fourth display means 208M ', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I etc.],
The display means is a means by which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of the special view 1],
The hold icon has a first icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (a). Display mode of icon of “default” of 1, or No. The display mode of the icon of “flashing white” in No. 2 or the display mode of “roulette” shown in FIG. 211 (A1-2-3) or the like, or No. 1 shown in FIG. This is an icon that may be displayed in the 10 "Timer" display modes,
The hold icon has a second icon display mode [e.g. This is an icon that may be displayed in the 5 "Red" icon display mode,
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode Big hit symbol form is easy to be displayed clearly [for example, reliability shown in Figure 179 (a)],
The display unit is a unit that may display a change notice display [eg, display of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 179 (b)].
In some cases, a first change animation using the change advance display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation [eg, an icon change animation] that changes the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons,
The change advance notice display is a first change notice mode [e.g. This is a display that may be displayed in the form of the icon of "bomber" in 4,
The change advance notice display is a second change notice mode [e.g. This is a display that may be displayed in the form of the "red bomber" icon icon of 5,
The change notice display of the first change notice mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first change notice display”) [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. The first change animation may be performed after the "bomber" icon IHI] of 4 is displayed,
When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode In some cases, for example, the first display icon h11 shown in FIG. 209 (A3′-2-4) may be changed to a blue display mode other than the red display mode, as shown in FIG. 208 (A6 ′ It may be changed to the red display mode as shown in)],
The change preview display of the second change preview mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second change preview display”) [e.g. The first change animation may be performed after the “I Bomber” icon IHI] of 5 is displayed.
When the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the hold icon of any one of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode [For example, FIG. 208 (A6), FIG. 208 (A4-2-3), FIG. 208 (A2-2-4), FIG. 209 (A3-5-4), FIG. 209 (A3-7-7), FIG. (A3-2-4), FIG. 212 (B8), FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 218 (Fd6), FIG. 219 (Fe6), and FIG. 220 (Ff11). Always changed],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  A fourth change animation may be performed in which the change preview display is used, and the fourth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or the mode of the notice icon. In addition, a fifth change animation may be performed using the change notice display, and the fifth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and / or the mode of the notice display.

  When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons is an icon other than the second icon display mode It may be changed to a display mode (for example, an icon display mode of one of third to fifth icon display modes described later, or a sixth icon display mode).

  The m-th change animation using the n-th change notice display means the m-th change animation by the n-th change notice display, and the n-th change notice display appears The change animation of m (n and m are both natural numbers of 1 or more, and the same applies to the following).

  A plurality of types of change notice displays are prepared as the change notice displays, and one of the plurality of types of change notice displays is a first change notice, and the plurality of types of change notices are displayed. One type of the change notice of the change notice is the second change notice. The first change notification display may be displayed in the first change notification mode, or may be displayed in the second change notification mode. Alternatively, the second change notification display may be displayed in the first change notification mode, or may be displayed in the second change notification mode. Furthermore, the first change animation may be more easily performed when the first change notification display is displayed than when the second change notification display is displayed.

  Here, although the first change animation changes the mode of the hold icon of any one of the displayed hold icons, the change notice display is the mode of any one of the hold icons. It can sometimes be interpreted as changing.

  The hold icon of any one of the hold icons may be a plurality of hold icons or one hold icon, for example, all or part of the displayed hold icons. Also good (the same applies below).

  The mode before the change of any one of the hold icons may be the first icon display mode, the third icon display mode, or the like. That is, the mode when the display of the change notice is started in any one of the pending icons is not limited to the default mode.

Also,
"A game console equipped with display means,
The display means is a means by which a hold icon may be displayed,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds.
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first icon display mode,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second icon display mode,
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode Big hit symbol form is easy to be displayed,
The display means is a means by which a change notice may be displayed;
In some cases, a first change animation using the change advance display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation that changes the aspect of the hold icon of any one of the displayed hold icons,
The said change notice display is a display which may be displayed in the first change notice mode,
The said change notice display is a display which may be displayed in the second change notice mode,
The change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used rather than the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode. It is easier for the first change animation to change the mode of any one of the displayed pending icons to the second icon display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  According to this game console, it is possible to infer what mode (here, the second icon display mode) there is a possibility of changing the mode of the hold icon according to the mode of the change notice display. It may be possible to entertain the player. For example, the aspect of the change advance indication is related to the aspect after the change of the hold icon, and if the aspect of the change advance indication is a red aspect (here, the second change advance aspect), the hold It can be inferred that the aspect after the change of the icon is also the red aspect (here, the second icon display aspect).

  In the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, the state of any one of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons is There may be cases where it is changed to a mode other than the first icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the sixth icon display mode etc.), or from the case where it is changed to the sixth icon display mode Also, the second icon display mode may be easily changed.

  In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used, the state of any one of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons is the first change animation It may be changed to modes (for example, the seventh icon display mode etc.) other than the icon display mode and the second icon display mode. The seventh icon display mode may be a jackpot determination mode (premium mode). That is, in the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used, the mode of any one of the hold icons is a pre-reading notice mode, but a big hit confirmation In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used, although it is easy to change to a mode (for example, the second icon display mode) which does not go up to May be changed to the aspect of (premium aspect). In addition, you may make it change into the aspect (premium aspect) of big hit decision. Also, although the seventh icon display mode is not originally a jackpot determination mode, it may be treated as a jackpot determination mode. In this case, the pre-reading notice contradicts the usual time, and this contradiction becomes a premier and will be a big hit.

  The second icon display mode may be different from the first icon display mode. The first icon display mode may be a default mode. The default mode is the mode that is displayed most frequently. The second icon display mode may be a preview advance notice mode. In addition, the first change animation is more easily performed when the second change notification mode is displayed in the second change notification mode than when the first change notification mode is displayed. It is also good.

“The hold icon has a third icon display mode [for example, No. 3 shown in FIG. 179 (a). This is an icon that may be displayed in 3 “Display modes of the“ blue ”icon”,
The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode Big hit symbol form is easy to be displayed clearly [for example, reliability shown in Figure 179 (a)],
If the first change animation using the first change notice is performed by displaying the first change notice, the mode of any one of the hold icons among the hold icons is displayed. It may be changed to the third icon display mode [for example, it is changed to a blue display mode (third display mode) like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 209 (A3'-2-4). May)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The third icon display mode may also be a preview advance notice mode.

  The symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode The jackpot symbol form may be easily determined and displayed.

  The first change animation in which the first change notice display is used is the third icon of any one of the displayed hold icons, rather than the second icon display mode. It may be easy to change to the display mode. The probability of changing to the second icon display mode may be 0%.

Also, even if the first change animation using the second change notification display is performed, the modes of all the displayed pending icons are not changed to the third icon display mode [for example, FIG. 208 (A6), FIG. 208 (A4-2-3), FIG. 208 (A2-2-4), FIG. 209 (A3-5-4), FIG. 209 (A3-7-7), FIG. 210 (A3-2) −4), FIG. 212 (B8), FIG. 215 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 216 (Eb8), FIG. 218 (Fd6), FIG. 219 (Fe6), and FIG. 220 (Ff11). There are no pending icons changed to the form],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in some cases, a first non-change animation [for example, an icon non-change animation] using the change preview display may be performed,
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, the modes of all the displayed pending icons do not change if the first unchanged animation using the first change notice display is performed. [Eg,],
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, the modes of all the displayed pending icons do not change if the first invariable animation using the second change notice display is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 209 (A3-3-3) and FIG. 209 (A3-4-4), the display mode of all the hold icons does not change],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “the first non-change animation is a scene in which the mode of any one of the displayed pending icons has failed to be changed by the second change notification display [eg, FIG. An animation including the scene of A3-3-2) to the same figure (A3-3-3) and the scene of FIG. 209 (A3-4-2) to the same figure (A3-4-4),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, there may be a case in which a third change animation using the change advance display is performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation [eg, FIG. 209 (A3-4-1) to FIG. (A3-4-2)] until halfway [eg, FIG. 209 (A3-5-1) to the same figure (A3-5-2)],
The third change animation is a scene that has finally succeeded in changing the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons according to the second change notice display [eg, FIG. The scene from (A3-5-3) to the same figure (A3-5-4)] is included,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The first change animation is a scene in which the state of any one of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed by the second change notice display [eg, FIG. 208 (A4 -1) to an animation including the scene of FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

here,
"The first non-change animation where the said change advance notice display was used may be performed.
The change notice display is a display composed of a plurality of change notice icons,
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a first change notice icon,
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a second change notice icon,
The first unchanging animation includes a scene (hereinafter referred to as a "first scene") in which it has failed to change the aspect of any one of the displayed pending icons. Is an animation that
The first scene is a scene that fails using the second change notice icon,
The first change animation includes a scene (hereinafter referred to as a “second scene”) that succeeded in changing the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons. It is animation,
The second scene is a successful scene using the second change notice icon.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  The first change animation is one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. The animation that may be displayed, and the first unaltered animation may also be an animation in which one of the first scene and the second scene may be displayed, The successful scene may be more easily displayed when the second scene is displayed than when the first scene is displayed. Alternatively, there may be no difference in the displayability of the successful scene between the two cases.

  The first change animation is an animation in which a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used may be displayed, and the first change animation is the first change notice The first scene in which the icon is used is an animation that is not displayed, and the first unchanged animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed; The change animation is an animation in which the second scene is not displayed, and when the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed and the first scene is displayed. The failed scene may always be displayed.

  Furthermore, the first change animation is either one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. The first unchanged animation is an animation that the first scene may be displayed, and the first unchanged animation is the second animation. If the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and even if the first scene is displayed, the failed scene is always displayed. It may be an aspect that is not limited to being displayed.

  There may be only one scene using the first change notification icon for the hold icon displayed at a certain position.

Also,
"A third change animation may be performed in which the above change announcement is used.
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation halfway through,
The third change animation is a scene (hereinafter, referred to as a “third scene”) that finally succeeded in changing the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons. The included animation,
The third scene is a scene that is ultimately successful using the second change notice icon.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  The third change animation is an animation that succeeds by making the form change of the hold icon fail. The third change animation appears less frequently than the first change animation. However, it may be higher or the same.

  The symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the third change animation corresponds to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the first change animation In the case of the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol form may be finally determined and displayed in the end (the big hit reliability (expected degree) is high), or conversely, the big hit symbol form is finally determined There may be a case where it is difficult to be displayed (the big hit reliability (expected degree) is low), or the big hit reliability (expected degree) may be the same in both cases.

[The first change preview display is used rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation using the first change preview display. In the case of the symbol variation display corresponding to the suspension icon whose mode has been changed by the variation animation, the big hit symbol mode may be more likely to be finally displayed finally [For example, if the suspension icon is the same as the default display mode before the change] The first change animation in which the first change notice is used changes to the third display mode (the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 209 (A3'2-4)), but the second change notice As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the display mode is changed to the fifth display mode in the first change animation in which the button is used (the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 209 (A7)). Confidence,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, the first change notification display may change to the second change notification display [for example, FIG. 212 (B4) to FIG. (B5), FIG. 212 (B3-2-1) to FIG. Fig. (B3-2-5), Fig. 212 (B3-3-3) to Fig. (B3-3-5), Fig. 213 (B1-2-5) to Fig. (B1-2-9), Fig. 213 (B1-3-6) to FIG. 214 (B1-3-9)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The aspect of the change notice display started to be displayed in the first change notice mode may be changed to the second change notice mode, or the change changed to the first change notice mode The mode of the advance notice may be further changed to the second change notice mode. Further, in the first change animation, the second change notice mode may be changed, or the second change notice mode is started before the first change animation is started. It may change to the second change notification mode after the first change animation ends.

  Note that the mode of the change preview display displayed in the first change preview mode does not change as it is displayed in the first change preview mode than the frequency when the second change preview mode changes to the second change preview mode. The frequency of cases may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of the frequency may be reversed, or the frequency of both may be the same.

  The aspect of the change annunciation display displayed in the first change annunciation aspect may be configured not to change to another aspect.

  The aspect of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode may be configured not to change to the first change notice mode, or may even change in the opposite case. Good.

  Even if the aspect of the change annunciation display displayed in the second change annunciation aspect (for example, the red aspect) may change to a third change annunciation aspect (for example, the golden aspect or the rainbow aspect) Good. In addition, the mode of the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode does not change as it is displayed in the second change notice mode than the frequency when changing to the third change notice mode. The frequency of cases may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of the frequency may be reversed, or the frequency of both may be the same.

  When the change notice is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode than when the change notice is displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode The first change animation may be easily performed to change any one of the displayed pending icons to the second icon display mode. Alternatively, conversely, the change notice is displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode than when the change notice is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. The first change animation in which one of the displayed pending icons is changed to the second icon display mode may be easier to be executed if the second change icon is displayed. Furthermore, in both cases, there is no difference in the execution probability of the first change animation for changing any one of the hold icons to the second icon display mode, and the execution probability may be the same.

  The first change notice rather than the symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation using the change notice display displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode The symbol variation display corresponding to the pending icon whose aspect has been changed by the first change animation using the change annunciation display changed from the aspect to the second change annunciation aspect is finally the jackpot symbol aspect There may be a case where it is easy to be displayed definite (reliability (expected degree of big hit) is high) or conversely, the big hit design pattern is hard to be displayed finally finally (reliability (expected degree of big hit is low) There may be cases, and the two may have the same jackpot reliability (expected degree).

"The display means is a means by which a change icon may be displayed,
The variation icon is an icon [for example, variation icon h0] related to symbol variation display being executed,
There may be a case where a second change animation using the change preview display is performed,
The second change animation is an animation that changes the aspect of the change icon [eg, an icon change animation],
If the second change animation using the first change notice display is performed by the first change notice display being displayed, the mode of the displayed change icon is the second icon It may be changed to the display mode,
If the second change animation using the second change notice is performed by the second change notice being displayed, the mode of the displayed change icon is the second icon The display mode is changed [eg, FIG. 208 (A3-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the variation icon may be an icon representing a digested hold.

  The change icon can also be viewed as an icon displayed corresponding to the number of reservations of 0, and in a broad sense it can be said that it is a kind of reservation icon, but here, it is distinguished from the reservation icon and limited. However, the aspect of the variation icon is common to the aspect of the hold icon and is referred to as the n-th icon display aspect.

  Also, the "pending icon" described so far can be replaced with the "variation icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with the "second change animation", and the "pending" will be described later. The icon "can also be replaced by the" variation icon ", and the" first change animation "can also be replaced by the" second change animation ". These are the same in the following.

  In addition, the configuration in which the second change animation is more easily performed when the change notification display is displayed in the second change notification mode than when the change notification display is displayed in the first change notification mode. It may be According to this configuration, if the second change animation is executed, it is possible to have a jackpot expectation in the symbol change display currently being performed, and if the first change animation is executed, it will be performed later. A big hit can be expected in the symbol variation display to be started, and the player is interested in which one of the first change animation and the second change animation is to be executed, The interest of gaming may improve.

Also, there may be a case where a second non-changing animation [for example, an icon non-changing animation] in which the change preview display is used is performed,
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the second unchanging animation using the first change notice display is performed, the form of the displayed change icon does not change.
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, the mode of the displayed change icon does not change if the second unchanging animation using the second change notice display is performed [e.g. Figure 209 (A3-3-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The second non-change animation referred to here is an animation in which the aspect of the change icon does not change, and if the change of the aspect of the change icon is regarded as a success, the second change animation is displayed It corresponds to success and corresponds to failure when the second unchanging animation is displayed.

In addition, “operation means provided at a position where the player can operate (for example, the chance button 136, the operation lever 139, the transmitting portion 191, the second chance button 137, etc.) are provided,
The first change notification mode is an embodiment including the display [for example, display of the button image 136a] related to the operation means [for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 212 (B3-2-2)].
When the mode of the change notice is changed from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode when the operation means is operated while the first change notice display is displayed. [Eg, FIG. 212 (B3-2-5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Either of the hold icons may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode according to the first change animation. In addition, the change icon may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode by the second change animation. The eighth icon display mode referred to here is an aspect including a display related to the operation means.

  The operation means is a means for setting an operation valid period, and a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed at least during the operation valid period, and within the operation valid period. When the operation means is operated, the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode according to the operation, and within the operation effective period. If the operation has not been performed, the first change notification mode may be changed to the second change notification mode after the operation effective period has elapsed. In addition, when the mode of the reserved icon or the variation icon changes from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode in response to the operation, the operation is not performed within the operation valid period. Alternatively, the eighth icon display mode may be changed to the second icon display mode after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  However, when the operation is not performed within the operation effective period, the mode of the change notice, the hold icon, or the change icon changes to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode. You do not have to. Alternatively, the second change notification mode or the second icon display mode may be changed at a timing different from the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed, and the first change notification display is the first change notification display mode. The display may be started again in the change notification mode, or the display of the hold icon or the change icon may be started again in the eighth icon display mode. Further, the change notice display may continue to be displayed in the first change notice mode until the operation is performed, or the hold icon or the change icon may be displayed as the eighth icon until the operation is performed. It may continue to be displayed in the display mode.

  The operation display may be a display including an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display of only the image, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). It may be a display including, or may be only the operation promotion display, or may be a display including a display (operation effective period display) representing the operation effective period of the operation means, or the operation effective The period display may be only. Furthermore, as the display mode of the operation display, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the mode change of the operation means itself (for example, change of color, change of projection amount, , Display shape corresponding to change of shape, change of position, change of posture, etc. may be included.

  In addition, when the operation means is operated during the display of the change preview display displayed in the first change preview mode, the mode of the change preview display is from the first change preview mode. It may be changed to the second change notice mode. Alternatively, the first change notification mode may be changed or may not be changed (for example, the first change notification mode remains) from the first change notification mode.

[The above-mentioned change notice display is a display which may be displayed straddling continuous symbol fluctuation display [for example, FIG. 210 (A3-8-1) to FIG. (A3-8-3), FIG. 210 (A3-9-1) to FIG. (A3-9-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, "to straddle" is to put a period of stop display of symbols (a change stop period) in between. Further, the change advance notice may be a display which is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be a display which disappears in the middle. In addition, while the stop display of the symbol is being displayed, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears once in the middle, or a display that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. It may be

  "Displays that may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays" means "displays that are always displayed", but also "displays that may be erased once and re-displayed" included. For example, the super reach effect may be once erased, and may be redisplayed when the super reach effect is over.

“The change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of“ red thunder cloud ”]” is a display that is displayed at least in a state where the number of reservations is 0 and the decorative symbol stopped and displayed is displayed [for example, Figure 215 (D9)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The said change advance notice display may be a display displayed only in the state where the number of reservations is 0 and the decorative symbol stopped and displayed is displayed, and it is a display displayed also in other states. May be

[The above-mentioned change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of "red thunder cloud"] is a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of times of symbol change display,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The said change advance notice display may be a display which disappears (display which becomes non-display), when the symbol change display of the predetermined number of times is completed.

In the case where “the change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of“ red thunder cloud ”]” disappears temporarily even during the symbol change display of the predetermined number of times [for example, FIG. 215 (D10) If a demonstration screen of the animation to be shown is displayed
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  For example, the change advance notice may temporarily disappear or may disappear temporarily during a part or all of the super reach presentation.

  The change advance notice may be, for example, a display of a navigation character (a character performing an explanatory display or the like).

  Further, the change advance notice may be a display that is constantly displayed for a certain period of time. The certain period may be a period until the reserve subject to the advance notice is digested, or a time period until the symbol variation display corresponding to the reserve subject to the advance notice ends, or a prescribed number of times. The period until the end of the symbol variation display of may be the same (hereinafter the same).

  The said change advance notice display may be non-displayed while the symbol is stopped in a state where there is no hold or during a demonstration display. That is, for a certain period, a period during symbol suspension without holding or a demonstration display period is not included. However, the change notice may be displayed even while the symbol is stopped in the absence of a hold.

  The change notification display may be a display that may disappear once within a certain period.

Also, if the first change animation is not displayed even if the change preview display is displayed [eg, if the first non-change animation, the second change animation, or the second non-change animation is displayed, , If the change notice display is hidden while remaining stationary],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Even if the change preview display is displayed, the second change animation may not be displayed.

  The change preview may be displayed, and the first non-change animation may be performed, and the first non-change animation may be the same animation as the first change animation. In addition, the change preview may be displayed, and the second non-change animation may be performed, and the second non-change animation may be the same animation as the second change animation. As described above, when the first non-change animation is displayed, it corresponds to a failure, but a part of the scene (for example, at least the first part, or the first half part, or a scene whether or not the mode of the holding icon changes) The same animation, the player may first distinguish whether the display of the first change animation is started or the display of the first unchanged animation is started In some cases, the interest of the game may be improved.

  Moreover, even if the change advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where neither the first change animation nor the first non-change animation is displayed.

Also, before the display of the first change animation is started, it may be notified that the state of any one of the displayed hold icons is in a state of being easily changed [eg, Notification by telop display trp shown in FIG. 211 (A1-3-3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The notification that the status of any one of the pending icons is in a state of change (hereinafter referred to as “change prior notification”) is displayed when the change notification display is displayed in the second change notification mode. It may be informed. For example, the second change notification mode may include a display of the change advance notification. That is, the change advance notice display may be a display also serving as the change advance notice. Alternatively, the change advance notification may be performed separately from the change advance display. The first change animation may be more easily performed when the change advance display is performed than when the change advance notification is not performed. That is, the aspect of any one of the displayed pending icons may be changed easily. Or, conversely, it may be difficult to execute, and the ease of execution may be the same.

  In addition, the change prior notification may be started or may be notified before the display of the first change animation is started after the change preview display is displayed. Alternatively, the change prior notification may be started or may be notified before the change preview display is displayed.

“The first change animation is an animation that may change the aspect of any one or more of the displayed pending icons [eg, FIG. 209 (A3′-2-1) to Figure (A3'-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first change animation is an animation including a scene that succeeded in changing the aspect of any one or more of the displayed pending icons, and the first unchanged animation The may be an animation including a scene in which it has failed to change the aspect of any one or more of the displayed pending icons.

  The first change animation and the first non-change animation may be simultaneously executed, and the aspect of any one or more of the hold icons displayed may be changed. In this case, a scene that changes the aspect of one or more suspension icons and a scene that fails to change the aspect of one or more suspension icons may be displayed.

  Further, the first change animation may be an animation that always changes the aspect of any one or more of the hold icons displayed. The first invariant animation may be an animation that does not necessarily change the aspect of any one or more of the displayed pending icons.

Also, when the second change notification display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed [For example, No. 1 with an icon change ratio of 100% shown in FIG. 179 (b). 8 "red flying boat"],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  There may be a case where a first non-change animation using the change preview display is performed. The first non-change animation referred to here is an animation that does not change the mode of any one of the displayed pending icons, and the change of the mode of the pending icon is regarded as a success. When the first change animation is displayed, it corresponds to success, and when the first unchanged animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

  In addition, the first change animation is an animation including a scene in which it is successful to change the aspect of the hold icon of any one of the displayed hold icons, and the first invariant The animation may be an animation including a scene that failed to change the aspect of the hold icon of any of the displayed hold icons.

“The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth icon display mode,
A mode that suggests that the fourth icon display mode may change the mode of the reserved icon of the fourth icon display mode [eg, a display mode of "bomb" shown in FIG. 216 (Eb1) or the like ],
In the case where the mode of the pending icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the second icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change preview display is used For example, FIG. 216 (Eb8)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

“The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth icon display mode,
The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed [eg, the arc of the squib shown in FIG. 216 (Eb7-2-1) is halfway] It is display mode of "bomb" which has disappeared,
In the case where the mode of the holding icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change preview display is used [E.g. (Eb 7-2-1), which continues from FIG. 216 (Eb 6)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode is used in the first change animation in which the state of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display view is displayed in the second change notice mode. It may be changed to the first icon display mode.

Further, the fourth icon display mode is a display showing the length of the remaining time until the mode of the reserved icon changes (for example, the shape according to the time lapse of digital clock display, analog clock display, bar display, etc. And / or a display in which the size, the length, the color, and the like change. ← Dynamite is a display in which the length of the squib changes. Furthermore, in the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, the change preview display displayed in the second change preview mode is used. A display showing how the remaining time elapses when the first change animation is started (for example, a countdown display, a change in shape, size, length, color, etc. according to the elapsed time) Display) may be performed.

[The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 or 90]]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  Subsequently, an example of effects applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above, the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 49, and the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 90 will be described.

  In the example of the effect to be described below, the display means (for example, any one or two or all of the decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 51 etc.) The notice icon, the notice display, the mini game A icon, the mini game B icon, the hold icon, the change icon, the icon change notice display, the chance up meter, the timer notice, etc. are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

  First, effects using various icons and displays described with reference to FIG. 222 will be described using a specific example.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

  FIG. 222 shows a normal state (non-probable variation state and non-electric support state (non-short time state)), and in the subsequent example of the effect, it is an example of effect in the normal state unless otherwise specified. Further, FIG. 222 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N shown in FIG. 51, but the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. It may be a decorative symbol display device 208 shown (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A1) to (A15), the chance up meter in-progress display is displayed before the chance up meter is displayed, and the effect is to announce that the chance up meter is to be displayed. It is shown that it is being done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Although the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A1) is white only, this white only means that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but in the case of only white, as in this FIG. 222 (A1), the background screen is not shown.

  In FIG. 222 (A2), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. As a result, it is predicted that a chance up meter (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "CUM") may be displayed during preparation. The CUM preparation display may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. In addition, the CPU preparation display may be displayed whenever the flame effect EF 101 is displayed. Further, in the example of the effect, the flame effect EF 101 covers the entire reserved icon display area HIS, but only a part of the reserved icon display area HIS may be covered, or the entire variable icon display area CIS Alternatively, part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered, or all or part of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered. In addition, although the flame effect EF101 is displayed as opaque with the invisible on the back side, it may be displayed as semi-transparent so that the image displayed on the back side can be made visible.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A3), it is shown that the flame effect EF 101 is erased and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. In the CUM preparation display MTY, the start point SP is displayed at one end of the meter, and the final point GP is displayed at the other end of the meter. In addition, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is waiting at the start point SP, and a balloon with the letters "STANDBY" is also displayed. That is, it is predicted that the chance up meter will be displayed. This CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter. In this presentation example, it is shown that a chance up point displayed in the chance up meter presentation using the chance up meter is not notified. Further, at this time, while the pending icon display area HIS is covered and hidden by the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY, the display mode does not change and the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are visually recognized. It is made possible. Note that the display mode of at least one of the variation icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS may be changed. Moreover, in this production example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display before reaching the reach, but the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed while the reach presentation display after the reach is displayed. It may be done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A4), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation variation display is performed is shown. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the fluctuation variation display is performed may overlap with a part of the display during CUM preparation, or the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position not overlapping the display during CUM preparation.

  In FIG. 222 (A5), before moving to super reach effect, “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decorative symbol, and is swinging and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. Moved "Decoration 7" below the second hold number display. Further, in this example of rendering, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is also displayed while transitioning to super reach rendering. When the effect to shift to the super reach effect is started, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be hidden. In addition, when the effect to shift to the super reach effect is started, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed or may not be displayed. Also, in FIG. 222 (A5), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and the frame hocking out of the display screen is shown leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. . FIG. 222 (A6) shows that the holding frame UI is completely out of the frame with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining.

  FIG. 222 (A7) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Also at this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. Here, when the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect is not performed. Even when the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A7), the image of the sword avenger is displayed large, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the figure (A8), the main character The animation of the battle scene with the hostile swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is all hidden (disappears) except the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear but continues to be displayed on the top board that has remained. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display continue to be displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be erased or, conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 222 (A9) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT is a display displayed at the beginning (at the time of introduction) of the super reach. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter indicating the progress of the reach production, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the progress of the current reach production is summarized according to its position. Informing The chance up meter CMT may be referred to as a super reach timeline. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be referred to as a description effect using the chance up meter CMT. Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In other words, the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 can be said to be an indication of a chance up point indicating a chance up occurrence, and the chance up meter CMT is a chance up during the reach (during super reach) It can also be said that it is a display of a meter that suggests the place of occurrence. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. In this production example, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the state of development to the super reach shown in FIG. 222 (A7) is started. The display may be started at the specified timing, may be started when the reach state is reached, may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may change The display may be started when the display is started. Further, the timing at which each check point CP1 to CP3 is displayed may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or may be simultaneous with the display of the chance up meter CMT, or the chance It may be after the up meter CMT is displayed. In addition, the display start time of placard may be before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or may be simultaneous with the display of the chance up meter CMT, or the chance up meter CMT May be displayed.

  FIG. 222 (A10) shows that the character SBH of Sabohan, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. In addition, the balloon of "START !!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed after the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, and whether the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed or not Regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be displayed or may not be displayed. In addition, by displaying a balloon of “START !!”, it may be notified that a chance-up advance notice is likely to occur at the check points CP1 to CP3.

  FIG. 222 (A11) is the same effect example as the effect example shown in FIG. 29 (2). After that, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. 29 (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A12) are performed.

  In FIGS. 222 (A12) to (A13), the same effects as the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (26) to (27) are performed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 222 (A14), it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed in a state in which three "decorations 7" are aligned. At this time, a big hit exclusive background displayed when the background is a big hit is displayed. In addition, the background of the default (normal), the background in the pre-reading mode, the background which suggests the development of the super reach, etc. may be displayed, and the background displayed when reaching the reach is displayed. It is also good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (A15), a final display is made with a combination (big hit symbol pattern) of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Here, after the end of the super reach, the chance up meter CMT is always hidden but may be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed when stopped by the combination of the big hit decorative symbols (big hit symbol form), it may be decided to be promoted to a definite variation big hit .

  In this effect example, the display during CUM preparation is switched to the chance up meter CMT at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (A9), but it is not limited to this. For example, FIG. 222 (A3) It may be switched at the timing of FIG. (A4), or it may be switched at the timing of FIG. 222 (A5) to FIG. (A6), which is a period of transition from normal reach to super reach. Switching may be performed in FIG. 222 (A7) to FIG. (A13) in which the super reach is being performed, or may be switched after the end of the super reach. In this case, the occurrence of the chance-up notice that has occurred during super reach is notified afterward.

  In this presentation example, since the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the super reach presentation, the CUM in-progress display is displayed to notify that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is started, thereby displaying the reach presentation It can be said that it will be announced that it will be displayed.

  In this production example, when the chance-up notice occurs at all the check points and becomes a big hit, when the chance-up notice does not occur at any one or more check points (the chances at all the check points It may be a big hit if there is no advance notice or if there is a chance up notice at some check points. For example, in FIG. 30 (18 b), even when the lever image 136 Va is not displayed and a chance-up advance notice does not occur, an example of a big hit is shown. In addition, even if there is a lot of chance-up notices at the check points, it is likely that the big hit symbol form will be finally clearly displayed than if no chance-up notices occur at all and / or some of the check points. Good. In addition, the number of occurrences of chance-up notices and the likelihood of a big hit need not be related.

In the present embodiment, when CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed and chance up meter CMT is displayed, the final result is more than when CUM preparation indication MTY is not displayed and chance up meter CMT is displayed. The jackpot symbol form is easily determined and displayed on FIG. 222 (B1) to the same figure (B8). The example of the effect shown in FIG. 29 (22) is another example of the effect following FIG. In the lever effect shown in FIG. 22 (22), the player operates the effect lever 136V, but a state where the effect has failed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of the "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 222 (B2), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are once displayed thinner than the normal density. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 222 (B3), all the decoration symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are again displayed in normal density, and in the same figure (B4), wipe effect is performed, and a scene of super reach (effect The display is switched between the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1) and the like). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 222 (B5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily becomes a wipe display of non-pattern same color. In this wipe display, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT disappear, and the second decoration pattern and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the lower left corner. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. In FIG. 222 (B6), it is wiped out and the background usually returns to the background. In FIG. 222 (B7), the wipe effect is finished, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays “decoration 7” − “decoration 6” − “decoration 7” which is a combination of losing, and then FIG. As shown in B8), the symbol is displayed in the form of a lost symbol. Further, the holding frame UI is also displayed, and the variation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11 are also displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT has been eliminated. In addition, the chance up meter CMT and / or the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed at the time of wipe out (FIG. 222 (B6) to FIG. (B7)), and when it is displayed, The configuration may be such that the resurrection effect is more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when displayed, the arrangement may be such that the resurrection effect is always performed, and when it is not displayed, the resurrection effect may or may not be performed. In addition, when the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed, it may be suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to the super reach after the next change.

  In this production example, chances-up notice occurs at all check points and it is lost, but chance-up notice does not occur at any one or more check points (chances at all check points Even if there is no up-noticing or if there is a chance-up in some checkpoints, there may be a loss. In addition, even if there is a lot of chance up notice at the check point, it will be difficult to finally display the big hit design as compared with the case where no chance up notice occurs at all and / or some check points. Good.

  In this demonstration example, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. Good.

  Further, for example, when a power failure recovery occurs while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed as the prefetch notice, it may be erased at the next fluctuation or may be displayed again at the next fluctuation start. In addition, the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY at the start of the next change may be displayed at the time of return of the display screen after power interruption or is displayed again after the display screen is restored (for example, Redisplay by animation / no animation)).

  FIG. 223 is a diagram showing one example of presentation using the chance up meter in stages.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 223 (A1) to FIG. 223 (A8) shows that a background change notice is given. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 223 (A1), the background of the sea is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (A1), the situation immediately after the start of the symbol variation display during stop display with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Lots 4-1-1-7" is displayed. At this time, the second decorative symbol has started to change.

  FIG. 223 (A2) shows that variable display of a decorative symbol has started.

  In FIG. 223 (A3), a background change notice, which is a type of notice (the change notice), is started. The subject of the background change notice here is the symbol change display under execution. In the background change notice, an image of an eyebrow appears from the left and right, and an animation in which the eyelid is closed causes the entire display screen to become an eyebrow image (see FIG. 223 (A4)). Therefore, both the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, and the change icon h0 are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelid and become invisible. Note that, instead of the image of the eyebrow, an image overlapping from the front may appear on a part of the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, and the variation icon h0. Alternatively, an image may not be superimposed on the holding frame UI, the holding icon h11, and the change icon h0. A background change notice may be executed when a change to a stage change indication, a pre-reading notice, a super reach suggestion background, etc. is performed in addition to the change notice.

  It should be noted that in the background change notice, the big hit expectation may be represented by the display mode (for example, color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the appearing image (here, an image of a rose). In addition, it may also function as a notice of the background itself that the color of a rose changes to the background of a mountain if it is green. Further, it may be notified that the prefetching zone will occur depending on the display mode of the bookmark. Here, the pre-reading zone means an effect mode in which a dedicated pre-reading background is displayed when there is a pre-reading target being held within the holding state. Furthermore, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 223 (A5), although the eyelids are open and the holding frame UI and the change icon h0 are beginning to be visible, the CUM in-provision display MTY appears in place of the holding icon display area HIS. Also, at this time, the background has been changed from the background of the sea to the background of the super reach. That is, by changing to the background of super reach, it is predicted to shift to super reach in the change. In addition, it may notice that it shifts to super reach by pre-reading object change as pre-reading advance notice. When multiple types of super reach are prepared, it may be suggested that they will necessarily develop into the super reach corresponding to the displayed background. Note that there may be a case in which a super reach does not develop, or it may indicate that a super reach corresponding to the background displayed on the condition that a reach has been made will necessarily develop. Also, there may be a case of transition to another type of super reach.

  In FIG. 223 (A6), the eyelids are completely open and the eyelid image has disappeared. The background of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is changed to the background of the super reach by the background change notice. Note that the CUM preparation display MTY is completely displayed, and the display of the chance up meter CMT is notified. Note that the CUM in-provision display MTY may start to be displayed after the overhead image is completely opened. In addition, even if the background of the super reach is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed, or may be displayed.

  In FIG. 223 (A7), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is shown.

  In FIG. 223 (A8), the "decoration 7" that was fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moved below the second decorative symbol, and the "decor 7" that was fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c is It is shown moving to the bottom of the 2 pending number display. In addition, while transitioning to super reach production, CUM preparation indication MTY continues to be displayed. Further, FIG. 223 (A8) shows that the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining. This effect example shows an example in which the reach transition effect is special. In addition, it may be made to shift to super reach through the same process as when a normal background is displayed. At this time, an animation in which the display area CIS of the variation icon moves is performed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A8) to FIG. 222 (A15) are performed.

  Figures 223 (B1) through (B3) show the effects of Figures 222 (A8) through (A11) through Figures 223 (A1) through (A8), and as a result, the lord loses to the swordsman, In the middle pattern, “decoration 6” is displayed to indicate an example of a presentation that is lost.

  FIG. 223 (B1) shows that the lord is defeated by the swordsman, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing. Then, after the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (B2) to (B5) are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 223 (B2) wipes out, and the background is the background at the start of symbol variation. It is shown that it returns to the background of a certain sea. In FIG. 223 (B3), the wipe effect is over, and the decoration symbol display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" which is a combination of losing, and then the losing symbol is displayed. The display is confirmed in the form. Also, after wipe out, the chance up meter CMT is erased. In addition, when the background is a special background (for example, the background of a super reach etc.) at the time of wipe out, it may be considered as a big hit decision.

  FIGS. 223 (C1) to (C7) show that the CUM in-provision display MTY is performed as a prefetch notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 223 (C1) to FIG. (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A1) to FIG.

  Fig. 223 (C4) shows that the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, and it is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Loss 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" It is shown that it is being done. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is erased but may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 223 (C5), a state is shown in which the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the “Holis 4-Decorative 1-Decorative 7”. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased. Also at this time, the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed, but the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed while the decorative symbol is displayed.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (C6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed again so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. . Here, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed again, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed in the same manner as the mode displayed in the previous symbol variation display, or in a different display manner (animation) It may be re-displayed, or the flame effect EF 101 may be displayed without any animation. After that, when the flame effect EF 101 is erased, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 223 (C7).

  That is, in this effect example, the display of the effect EF101 of flame and the display of CUM in-progress display MTY in FIG. 223 (C1) to (C3) in FIG. It can be said that the display of the effect EF101 of flame and the display of the display during CUM preparation MTY in 223 (C6) to (C7) in the figure function as a notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display under execution.

  In this production example, CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed each time symbol variation display starts to give advance notice (continuous advance notice) of the rendering by the chance up meter, but for example, the rendering by the chance up meter is Count down the number of times of symbol variation display until it is performed (for example, display “2 more variations”, “1 more variation”, etc.), and when it becomes the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading notice, chance up meter It may be displayed. That is, by the display of such a countdown, it may be possible to have the same function as the CUM in-provision display MTY. Also, the advance notice may be made by setting the display mode of the hold icon as a display mode that indicates that the effect is to be performed by the chance up meter. Also by this, it may be possible to provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. And when it becomes a symbol variation display which became a target of advance notice, and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode which suggests that the effect by the chance up meter is performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started The fluctuation icon may be deleted. In addition, when it becomes a symbol fluctuation display which became a target of advance notice, and the fluctuation icon is displayed in a display mode which suggests that the effect by the chance up meter will be performed, when the effect by the chance up meter is started It is not necessary to erase the fluctuation icon. In addition, after the chance up meter is displayed or at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the fluctuation icon is changed (for example, a display mode that suggests that presentation by the chance up meter is performed) May be changed to the default display mode).

  In addition, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed each time the symbol variation display starts and the advance notice (continuous advance notice) of the effect by the chance up meter is performed, it is more than the symbol change display that is the target of the advance notice. If presentation by the chance up meter is started in the previous symbol variation display, the CUM in-provision display MTY may not be displayed while the chance up meter is displayed, or the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY may or may not be displayed. In addition, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed while the chance up meter is displayed, the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY may be hidden before the chance up meter is displayed, The CUM in-provision display MTY may be hidden at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed. In addition, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed even while the chance up meter is displayed, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed at a position overlapping the chance up meter or may be displayed at a position not overlapping . In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter is displayed, which is the symbol variation display prior to the symbol variation display which is the target of the preview notice, and the type of super reach performed in the symbol variation display which is the object of the prefetch notice. The type of super reach to be performed may be the same, different, or the same or different.

  FIGS. 223 (D1) to (D7) show that the CUM in-provision display MTY is performed as a prefetch notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 223 (C1) to FIG. (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A1) to FIG.

  In FIG. 223 (D4) to FIG. (D5), FIG. 223 (C4) to FIG. (C5) is different, and the CUM in-provision display MTY is continuously displayed even during the swing fluctuation of the decorative symbol and the definite display. Is shown. In addition, animation display may be performed in CUM preparation display MTY, and in this case, animation may be continuously performed even while the symbol is stopped, or different animation may be performed while the symbol is stopped. . Also, the animation may not be performed and may be displayed still.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (D6) to FIG. (D7), the CUM in-provision display MTY is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 224 is a diagram gradually showing an example of a display start mode of the display MTY during the preparation of the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 224 (A1) to (A7) show another example in which the CUM-in-provision display MTY is performed as the advance notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 224 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 224 (A2), it is shown that the game ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the start of the symbol variation display has been suspended by one, and the number of suspension has become two. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (A3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, the advance notice by the hold display is given. Is shown. In this example, the display of the hold icon by blue hold is performed, but the display of the hold icon by another display mode (for example, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 179A) is performed. Alternatively, a default display mode holding icon may be displayed.

  After that, when the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 224 (A4), there is a state in which the final display is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Losing 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (A5), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the first hold of the special view 1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (A6), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. As a result, it is predicted that the CUM preparation indication MTY may be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 224 (A7), the flame effect EF 101 is erased, and a CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed in the symbol variation display being executed when the hold that is the target of the advance notice is generated, and the CUM is displayed in the symbol variation display started next It is shown that a preparation display MTY is displayed. In this effect example, the CUM in-provision display MTY functions as a pre-reading notice, but when the hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice is the first hold, the CUM in-provision display is displayed in the symbol variation display to be started next MTY functions as a notice of the chance up meter CMT in the said fluctuation. Note that the CUM preparation indication MTY functions as a prefetching advance notice, and may not function as the notice. In addition, the CUM preparation indication MTY may function as the notice and may not function as the prefetch notice. In addition, the CUM in-provision display MTY may function as a pre-reading advance notice or may function as the advance notice.
There is a case.

  FIGS. 224 (B1) to (B11) show another example in which the CUM-in-provision display MTY is performed as a prefetch notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (B1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L illustrated in FIG. 224 (B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 224 (B1), since the hold is 0, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “0” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

  In FIG. 224 (B2), it is shown that the game ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, one start of symbol variation display is suspended, and the number of suspension becomes one. After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (B3), the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, the prefetch notice is given by the hold display. Is shown. Note that the flame effect EF 101 shown in FIG. 224 (B4) may be displayed without displaying the hold icon. Further, the flame effect EF 101 shown in FIG. 224 (B4) may be displayed during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. Also, when the flame effect EF 101 shown in FIG. 224 (B4) is displayed without the hold icon being displayed and after the hold icon is displayed and / or while the increase icon of the hold icon is being executed, FIG. 224 (B4) The flame effect EF 101 shown in may be displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 224 (B4), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. As a result, it is predicted that the CUM preparation indication MTY may be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 224 (B5), the flame effect EF101 is erased, and a CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed.

  In FIG. 224 (B6), the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and middle pattern, so that they are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Losing 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that it is being done. At this time, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is maintained.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 224 (B7), a state is shown in which the final display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the "los 4-1-7". At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased but the CUM preparation display MTY remains displayed.

  After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 224 (B8) to FIG. (B11), the hold digest animation is started and hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the moving icon movement animation in which the first reserved icon h11 which has been moved toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is performed. In this example, the same moving icon movement animation is performed regardless of whether the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed or not, but when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, A different variation icon movement animation may be performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 224 (B9 '), even if an animation in which the variation icon h0 comes out from the center of the pedestal hs0 is performed. Good. Note that one animation of the moving icon moving animations may be selected and executed regardless of whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

  As described above, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, the CUM preparation display may be displayed as the preview notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

  FIG. 224 (C1) to FIG. 224 (C4) are diagrams showing how a display start animation of the CUM-in-provision display MTY is performed. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 224 (C1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 224 (C2) shows that the display start animation of the CUM in-provision display MTY is started, and the CUM in-provision display MTY is rising from the lower side of the display screen. At this time, the pending icon display area HIS rises in a manner to be lifted to the CUM preparation display MTY. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (C3), the reserved icon display area HIS is arranged at the top of the CUM in-provision display MTY so as not to affect the visibility of the CUM in-provision display MTY. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (C3), the suspension of the special view 1 is one, and only the first suspension icon h11 is displayed. However, to facilitate the description, the second suspension icon h12 to the second 4 The hold icon h14 is indicated by a broken line.

  Thereafter, when the display start animation of the CUM in-provision display MTY is completed, as shown in FIG. 224 (C4), a balloon with the word “STANDBY” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The display of the has been announced. At this time, the balloon is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon (the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 in the example shown in FIG. 224 (C4)). Note that the entire hold icon of at least one of the four hold icons may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the balloon, or the entire four hold icons may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the balloon. Good. Further, in this example of the effect, the balloon is made to overlap also with a part of the hold icon display area HIS, but it may be made to overlap with the whole hold icon display area HIS.

  The CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed in a mode as shown in FIG. 224 (C3 ′) instead of the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 224 (C3). Specifically, the frame of the CUM in-provision display MTY may be extended upward, and the upper surface of the frame may be displayed to indicate the reserved icon display area HIS. The CUM preparation display MTY may be a display mode different from the CUM preparation display MTY displayed during super reach.

  FIGS. 224 (D1) to (D2) show an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A1), for example, and show another example of the flame effect for previewing the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY. There is.

  FIG. 224 (D1) shows that a great flame effect EF 102 different from the flame effect EF 101 shown in FIG. 222 (A2) is displayed. The great flame effect EF 102 is an effect display that is displayed so as to cover the entire holding frame UI in a difficult-to-see manner. It is predicted that the CUM preparation display is also displayed by this great flame effect EF102. In addition, when the large-fired effect EF102 is displayed, the big-hit symbol form may be more easily displayed as in the case where the flamed effect EF101 shown in FIG. You may make it easy to generate a chance up notice.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224 (D2), when the large-flame effect EF 102 is erased, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. At this time, the holding frame UI is framed out downward leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not changed, and is the default display mode, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 may be changed before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be always changed before and after the display of the large-flame effect EF102. After that, for example, after the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A4) to the same figure (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to the same figure (25) are performed, and thereafter, FIG. The effects shown in FIG. (A15) or FIG. 222 (b1) to FIG. (B8) are performed.

  FIG. 225 is a diagram gradually showing an example of a display start mode of the display MTY during the preparation of the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 225 (A1) to 225 (A3) are an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A1), for example, and show an effect example in which the CUM preparation display is displayed in a silhouette while the flame effect EF101 is displayed. .

  The effect example shown in FIG. 225 (A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A2). After that, in FIG. 225 (A2), during display of the flame effect EF101, a CUM in-provision silhouette display MTYa imitating the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in a mode displayed on the back side of the flame effect EF101. . At this time, the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM is displayed in black as a whole, and it is shown that a display by silhouette is performed. The display of the silhouette display MTYa in preparation for CUM also functions as a notice that the chance up meter CMT will perform the rendering. In addition, a plurality of types of display modes of the silhouette display MTYa being prepared during CUM preparation are prepared, and by changing (promotion) the display mode, it is suggested that the occurrence rate of the chance up notice is increased in the rendering by the chance up meter CMT. It may be done, or it may be suggested that the big hit reliability is increased.

  After that, a reach state is formed, and FIG. 225 (A3) shows transition to the super reach. During this time, the silhouette display MTYa is continuously displayed during preparation of CUM. The silhouette display MTYa may be deleted during preparation of the CUM while the flame effect EF101 is displayed. In this case, for example, the deletion animation is performed when the silhouette display MTYa during the preparation of CUM is not displayed. Alternatively, it may be hidden without the erase animation being performed. After this, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A11) is performed, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. 29 (25) are performed, and then, FIG. 222 (A12) to FIG. Or effects shown in FIG. 222 (B1) to FIG. 222 (B8) are performed.

  FIGS. 225 (B1) to 225 (B6) are an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A1), for example, and show another effect example of the display start aspect of the display MTY during CUM preparation.

  FIG. 225 (B1) shows that the wipe effect is started. This wipe effect is a display in which the display screen is gradually switched from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the display screen as if the calendar looks like it is being swung. In FIG. 225 (B1), the wipe effect is started in a state where the background of the sea is displayed, but the background is not changed even before and after the wipe effect. However, in FIG. 225 (B1), the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed at the position where the reserved icon display area HIS is displayed, and it is predicted that the chance up meter will start rendering. At the timing shown in FIG. 225 (B1), a part of the CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed in a viewable manner. The background may be changed before and after the wipe effect.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (B2), the area of the display after switching (the reversed side) is enlarged, and most of the CUM preparation display MTY is visible. In the display area after switching, a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT may be given, or a pre-reading notice or the change notice may be given that is not related to the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 225 (B3) shows that the display area after switching is further enlarged. Note that if the background is wiped out, a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT other than the CUM in-progress display MTY may be visible and a notice that is not related to the chance up meter CMT may be visible. An indication of preparation MTY and other notices may be visible. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 225 (B4) to FIG. (B6), the display area after switching is expanded so that the background is blurred, and the display area after switching is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (B6) Are all visible. After that, for example, after the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A4) to the same figure (A11) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to the same figure (25) are performed. The effect shown in FIG. 22 (A15) or FIG. 222 (B1) through FIG. In the state of FIG. 225 (B1), the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed before the start of the wipe effect, and in that case, the CUM in-progress display MTY is continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect. May be In addition, a CUM in-provision display MTY, which is upgraded after the wipe effect, may be displayed. In addition, the CUM in-provision display MTY may continue to be displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect, or the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed after being ranked up.

  FIGS. 225 (C1) to 225 (C4) are an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A1), showing another example of the effect of the display start mode of the display MTY during CUM preparation.

  FIG. 225 (C1) shows that the switching effect of the background screen is started. The effect of switching this background image is, as shown in FIG. 225 (C1), after reducing the background image before switching, and then, as shown in FIG. 225 (C2), the right side of the background image before switching is in the depth direction While moving and displaying in a mode in which the right side is directed in the depth direction, a background image after switching appears on the right side of the display screen. The background image after this switching is displayed in a mode in which the left side is in the depth direction. The background image after switching shows that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed at the display position of the reserved icon display area HIS in the background image before switching. In the state where the background image before switching and the background image after switching are displayed side by side, the background image after switching may not be displayed, and the background image before switching may be displayed again. That is, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may not be displayed. In this effect example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in this background screen switching effect, but a display other than the CUM in-provision display MTY (for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes) is switched It may be displayed in the background image of. In addition, the background image after switching may be a background image of a notice, and for example, a background image on which a severe heat notice is displayed may be displayed.

  After that, FIG. 225 (C3) shows that the background image before switching is erased and the background image after switching including the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the front-facing manner. At this time, the background image after switching is displayed in a reduced size. After that, the background image after switching is enlarged and displayed on the entire display screen as shown in FIG. 225 (C4), and thereafter the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A4) to FIG. Then, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. 25 (25) are performed, and then the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A12) to FIG. (A15) or FIG. 222 (B1) to FIG. Is done.

  FIG. 225 (D1) is an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A2), in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed, and a notice display of a cassette is performed. The situation is shown. When the flame effect EF 101 is displayed, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be displayed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display on which the advance notice display of “Gasse” has been made may be a lost decision. Moreover, in the symbol change display in which the advance notice display of Gasses was performed, it may become a big hit. In addition, even if the effect EF101 of fire is displayed after the next change that the advance notice display of gasse was carried out, when there is one or more suspension when the symbol change display where the advance notice display of gasse was carried out is started Good. In this case, a pattern (a pattern in which the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed until the end is displayed) and a symbol variation display as a target of the advance notice are performed until the start of the symbol change display that is the target of the advance notice. In the above, there may be a pattern in which the CUM preparation indication MTY is finally displayed.

  FIGS. 225 (E1) to 225 (E9) are an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A1), for example, and show a state in which the timer advance effect is performed.

  FIGS. 225E1 and E2 show that the timer notice display TMY rises from the lower side from the lower side of the hold icon display area HIS and the timer notice display TMY lifts the hold icon display area HIS. At this time, the character "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TMY, and it is shown that the start of the timer notice is suspended. When the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TMY in this effect example is performed, it is announced that the hold icon or the change icon changes. As compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 224 (C2), it may be possible to grasp whether or not the CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed depending on whether or not the safari character SBH appears. Note that it may be difficult to specify whether the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed or the timer notice display TMY is displayed. For example, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the flame effect EF101 is erased before the CUM preparing display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed. Either one may be displayed. Note that although the timer notice in this example of presentation is to notice the change of the hold icon (the fluctuation icon), the timer notice as shown in FIG. 20 to FIG. 27, FIG. 38 and FIG. It goes without saying that it is possible to carry out any preview effects to be executed as a result. Further, the display mode of the timer advance notice display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 225, and can be applied to any display manner of any timer notice advance display described above. Further, in this effect example, both of the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed below the hold icon display area HIS. In this case, the area in which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed And the area where the timer notice display TMY is displayed may be displayed overlappingly or may be displayed so as not to overlap.

  In FIG. 225 (E3), the display on the timer advance notice display TMY is changed to "10:00", and then the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon (variation icon) may change when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown in the timer advance notice display is started. The timing of the start of the countdown in the timer advance notice display is not limited to that described above. For example, after the display of “STANDBY” is changed to the notation of seconds, the start of the countdown may be waited for a while. In addition, the number of seconds may be written from the stage when the display of the timer notice display TMY is started. In this case, the countdown may be started after the display animation of the timer notice display TMY is completed, or the timer notice display The countdown may be started from the stage when the display of TMY is started.

  FIG. 225 (E4) shows that 0.01 second has elapsed since the countdown starts. Thereafter, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown starts, as shown in FIG. 225 (E5), the timer display becomes “00:00”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 225 (E6), in the timer notice display TMY, the display of “00:00” is switched to the character display of “change !!”, and at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is overlapped. As the effect EF 103 is displayed, the change animation of the hold icon is started. This suggests that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Here, the change icon of the hold icon may be started after switching to the character display of “change !!”, or the change icon of the hold icon is started, and “change !!” is displayed. The change animation of the hold icon may be started at the timing of switching to the character display of "change !!".

  Thereafter, when the change icon of the hold icon ends and the effect EF 103 is erased, as shown in FIG. 225 (E7), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is changed to the display mode of blue hold. . That is, it is shown that the rank of the hold icon has been increased by two levels. Note that the rank of the hold icon may be increased by one stage before or after the change animation of the hold icon, or may be increased by three or more stages. Also, there may be a rank down.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 225 (E8) to FIG. (E9), the timer announcement display TMY is frame-out animation in which the frame is displayed below the display screen. Due to this frame out animation, the hold icon display area HIS also descends and returns to the default display position.

  It should be noted that in this effect example, both of the timer advance notice display TMY and the CUM in-provision display may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TMY is moved further upward, and the timer advance notice display TMY is below. The CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed on the screen. In addition, the pending icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed again within the same symbol variation after the end of the timer advance presentation effect, and the CUM in-progress display MTY may be displayed. In addition, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed and the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed after the symbol variation started next after the end of the timer advance presentation effect.

  FIGS. 225 (F1) to (F2) show an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A2), for example, and show another display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 225 (F1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). That is, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT displays the position of the check point (in this demonstration example, the second check point CP2) where a chance up notice may occur in the meter portion of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the notification is made before it is done. In this case, at the check point notified in advance by the CUM in-provision display MTY, the chance-up advance notice may be performed without fail. In addition, when the check point is notified in advance by the CUM in-provision display MTY, the chance-up notice may be generated more easily than in the case where the check point is not notified. Further, in the CUM preparation indication MTY, a part or all of the check points displayed in the chance up meter CMT may be always displayed. In this case, the check point may be displayed based on the probability of occurrence of the chance-up notice, or may be displayed regardless of the occurrence probability. After that, after the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A4) to the same figure (A7) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 225 (F2) are performed. The effect shown in FIG. 225 (F2) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A8) except that a check point is being displayed on the CUM in-provision display MTY, so the description will be omitted. Check points are displayed at the start of the CUM preparation display MTY display, and after a CUM preparation display MTY display starts, display is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, when reaching reach or transition to super reach). The checkpoint may be increased.

  FIG. 226 is a view showing a modification of the display mode of the display MTY during preparation for the chance up meter.

  226 (A1) to (A3) are an example of the effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A3), at least a part of the check points are displayed while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, and the check is It is shown that a chance up notice is always executed at points.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1) is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 225 (F1). In FIG. 226 (A1), the second check point CP2 displayed on the CUM in-provision display MTY is marked in red, and a letter of "UP" indicating that the jackpot reliability has been increased by the appearance of the advance notice. Is displayed in the information, and as described above with reference to FIG. 29 (6), this is a display mode for notifying that the chance-up advance notice has occurred. That is, in this example of presentation, by performing this display, it is notified that a chance up advance notice will be performed. Note that the chance-up advance notice may not actually be performed, and in this case, the game may proceed as if the chance-up advance notice was made.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A2) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 225 (F2). As shown in FIG. 22 (A2), the second check point CP2 remains marked in red and displayed even after transition to the super reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (A3), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, other checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1 and third checkpoint CP3) not displayed are displayed. The production by chance up meter is started. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 226 (A3 ′), the display of the second check point CP2 may be cleared to the default display mode. After FIG. 226 (A3) or FIG. (A3 '), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. (25) are performed, and thereafter, FIG. 222 (A12) to FIG. (A15) or FIG. The effects shown in FIGS. (B1) to (B8) are performed. In the case where a part or all of the check points are displayed by the CUM preparation indication MTY, the displayed check points may not give a chance-up notice, and in this case, the displayed check points show a chance An advance notice may be made, or a chance up notice may or may not be made. In addition, when a part or all of the check points are displayed by the CUM in-provision display MTY, the game may proceed as if the chance-up advance notice has been made but the chance-up advance notice has not actually been made, In this case, the check point considered to have been chanced up may notify that a chance up notice has occurred, may not have to notify, and may or may not notify. It is also good.

  FIG. 226 (B1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1). In FIG. 226 (B1), although the second check point CP2 is displayed in red in the CUM in-provision display MTY, an example in which “UP” indicating that a notice has appeared is not performed is shown. It is shown. In this case, for example, the display of “UP” may be performed after the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 and a chance-up notice occurs.

  FIG. 226 (C1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1). In FIG. 226 (C1), the second check point CP2 is displayed in the CUM in-provision display MTY, but is not marked in red, nor is the character “UP” displayed, and “UP” is It is shown that "question mark" is displayed in place of characters. This suggests that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur at some check points in the production by the chance-up meter CMT. For example, the appearance rate of the chance-up notice may be changed in the order of “question mark” <“!” <“UP”.

  FIG. 226 (D1) shows a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1). In FIG. 226 (D1), in the CUM preparation display MTY, all the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed, and characters such as "question mark", "!" And "UP" are displayed for each check point. In addition, it may be made to indicate the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the chance-up notice for each check point.

  FIG. 226 (E1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). FIG. 226 (E1) shows that the balloon in the CUM-in-provision display MTY is changing from "STANDBY" to "chance up high confidence". When this display is performed, it is suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each check point in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In the balloon, “STANDBY” may be displayed once and then changed to “chance up high probability”, or the display of “STANDBY” and the display of “chance up high probability” may be alternately switched and displayed. You may In addition, the display of “chance up high probability” may be displayed without displaying “STANDBY”.

  FIG. 226 (F1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). FIG. 226 (F1) shows that the balloon in the CUM-in-provision display MTY is changed from "STANDBY" to "one chance up finalized". When this display is performed, it is suggested that a chance-up notice always occurs once in the presentation by the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this example of rendering, it is considered that it is difficult to identify at which check point the chance up notice occurs, but the chance up notice must occur n times (once in this example of rendering). I have a notice. In addition, the number of the chance up notices to be generated may be one or two or more. Also, in the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "1 chance confirmed", or the display of "STANDBY" and the display of "1 chance confirmed" may be alternately switched and displayed. You may In addition, the display of “chance up once confirmed” may be displayed without displaying “STANDBY”.

  FIG. 226 (G1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). In FIG. 226 (G1), the placard on which "V" is displayed is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM in-provision display MTY, and it is informed that the big hit is decided. In addition to "V", for example, a placard on which "progress" is displayed may be arranged, and in this case, it may be notified that it is decided that super reach will be developed. . In addition, by placing a placard with a "question mark" displayed, when a Sabohani character reaches the final point, some direction (for example, the development of the super reach, the development of the super reach / does not develop while developing It may be suggested that a pattern presentation etc. be performed. In addition, even when it is notified that a certain effect is performed by the placard, there may be a case where no effect is performed or a case where it is not performed.

  FIG. 226 (H1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). In FIG. 226 (H1), the placard on which "superheat" is displayed is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM in-provision display MTY, and (a) the advance notice on the symbol variation display in which the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed If it is performed, or (b) there may be a case where advance notice and / or advance notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be performed. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (a), and may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (b).

  FIG. 226 (I1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). In FIG. 226 (I1), a placard in which “V” is displayed is arranged at the final point GP in the CUM in-provision display MTY, and a display in which the sabothani character SBH has reached the final point GP is performed. And, it is informed that it is a big hit confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed at the start point SP to be moved and displayed at the final point GP. It may be left as it is. In addition, even when "V" is displayed on the placard, there may be a big hit and a big hit. In addition, (a) when a notice is notified of a symbol change display in which a CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, or (b) a prefetch notice and / or a notice notification regarding a symbol change display where a chance up meter CMT is displayed. It may be done. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (a), and may be performed only in the case of the above-mentioned (b).

  FIG. 226 (J1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (I1), and shows that the character SAH of the sabo hani is also displayed at the start point SP. That is, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is arranged at both the start point SP and the final point GP, and thereby, it is informed that the big hit has been decided. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabothani of the start point SP may be moved and displayed, or may not be moved and displayed. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani at the start point SP may be deleted, and only the character SBH of Sabohani displayed at the final point GP may be displayed.

  FIGS. 226 (K1) to (K2) show an example of the effect following FIG. 222 (A2), for example, showing that another notice display is being performed even while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. ing. FIG. 226 (K1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A3). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (K2), it is shown that the conversation annunciation starts while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. It is needless to say that a notice other than the talk notice may be given while the CUM preparation indication TMY is displayed. In this example, although the CUM in-provisioning display TMY is started before the other notices, other informings that are always started before the CUM in-provision display TMY (for example, the hold icon or the change icon) There may be a notice that the display mode of the icon changes, a notice that starts at the start of fluctuation, etc., and there may be another notice display that is always started simultaneously with the CUM preparation display TMY. In addition, even if other notices of the same type are displayed, the display may be started at the same timing as the case where the display is started earlier than the CUM in-provision display TMY and may be started later. It should be noted that while the CUM preparation indication TMY is being displayed, other notices may not be given, and only specific notices of a plurality of kinds of notices can be executed, and for notices other than the specific notices. It may not be executed. For example, while the CUM in-provision display TMY is being displayed, a change effect of the display mode of the non-displayed reserved icon may not be performed, or may be performed. Specifically, while the CUM in-provision display TMY is displayed, a notice display of "change" appears from the notice icon YI of "box" shown in FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, and then the display of the hold icon or the change icon An advance notice effect that changes the mode may be performed or may not be performed. Also, while the CUM in-provision display TMY is displayed, icon change notification by the icon IHI of “bomber” shown in FIGS. 208 to 221 may be executed. In this case, for example, the icon IHI of “bomber” or The effect displayed on the bullet icon BTI, the bombarded hold icon or the change icon may be displayed so as to be overlapped on the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be displayed so as to be overlapped.

  FIGS. 226 (L1) to (L2) are an example of the effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A3), and an example of displaying only a part of the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed as the CUM in-provision display. It shows. In FIG. 226 (L1), only the balloon of the character SBH of the Sabohani and "STANDBY" in the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, and the other configuration is in a non-display mode. By this, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be notified. The configuration to be displayed is not limited to the above-described one, and any component may be displayed as long as it is a part of the elements constituting the CUM in-provision display MTY. FIG. 226 (L2) shows how to shift to the super reach thereafter. As shown in FIG. 226 (L2), after a part of the display is performed as the CUM preparation display, the display mode may be maintained until the chance up meter CMT is displayed, for example, time The display mode may be changed in such a manner that the component of the CUM preparation display is added according to the passage of.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 226 (M1) to (M7) correspond to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (8). That is, FIG. 29 (3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the meter after the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is started, but in FIG. 226 (M1), the chance is raised inside Although the effect by the meter CMT is being performed, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and the CUM in-provision display MTY remains displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 226 (M2) corresponding to FIG. 29 (4), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. However, since the chance up meter CMT is not displayed and the CUM in-provision display MTY remains displayed, it is considered difficult to recognize the progress of presentation in the chance up meta CMT. In addition, in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY PASS” is displayed to notify the occurrence of a chance up advance notice, while in FIG. 226 (M3), a CUM is being prepared. Since the display MTY remains displayed, such notification is not performed. Thereafter, also in FIG. 226 (M4) corresponding to FIG. 29 (6), the CUM in-provision display MTY remains displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter “UP” indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved by the appearance of the advance notice. It is displayed at the top and shows the history of the occurrence of a notice. Thereafter, in FIG. 226 (M5), the CUM in-provision display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29 (7) corresponding to FIG. 226 (M5), the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (M6), it is suggested that the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased, and the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. FIG. 226 (M7) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 29 (8). In this rendering example, as described above, rendering is performed internally by the chance up meter CMT, and the first check point CP1 is marked in red as a history of occurrence of the chance up notice at the first check point CP1. In addition, the letters "UP" are also displayed. Note that the position of the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the vicinity of the second check point CP2, and it is informed that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 may occur.

  Thus, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 226 (M1) to the same figure (M7), although the effect by the chance up meter CMT is progressing with the start of the super reach inside, the super reach is performed as a display It is shown that the CUM in-progress display MTY is being switched to the chance up meter CMT during the process. At this time, for the chance-up notice corresponding to the first check point CP1 generated while the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the assumption that the chance-up notice has occurred. It is made to display as a history. Note that it may not be displayed as a history. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts, or it may be the timing at the middle of the super reach. In the case of the timing of the start of the super reach, the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily displayed in a definite manner than in the case of the timing of the middle of the super reach, or vice versa. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super reach starts or the timing at the middle of the super reach.

  FIG. 227 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIGS. 227 (A1) to (A9) show modified examples of the display mode of the CUM preparation display. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 227 (A1) to FIG. (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A1) to (A2), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 227 (A3) shows that the flame effect EF 101 is erased and the CUM in-provision display MTYb in a mode different from the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3) is displayed. The CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIG. 227 (A3) is displayed at a position where the display position thereof overlaps the display position of the chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter CMT. The CUM in-provision display MTYb is displayed in a rectangular frame with the words “meter in preparation” attached. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 227 (A4) to FIG. 227 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 227 (A4) to (A8) are the same as those in FIG. 222 except that the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTYb is different from the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. Since the effects shown in FIG. 8 (A8) are the same, the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 227 (A9) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, for example, by the chance up meter switching animation, the CUM in-provision display MTYb may be erased and the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. The chance up meter switching animation may be, for example, a mode in which the chance up meter CMT appears when the effect is erased after the effect is displayed and the CUM in-provision display MTYb is hidden. In addition, the chance up meter switching animation may not be performed, and the switching display may be performed from the CUM in-provision display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. After that, for example, effects shown in FIG. 222 (A10) to FIG. (A15) or effects shown in FIG. 222 (B1) to FIG. (B8) are performed. In the example of the effect, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, a balloon with the word “START !!” may be displayed, or the balloon may not be displayed.

  FIGS. 227 (B1) to (B5) show another mode in which the CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIG. 227 (A3) appears. FIG. 227 (B1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 228 (A1).

  In FIGS. 227 (B1) to (B2), the CUM preparing display MTYb rises from the lower side from the lower side of the reserved icon display area HIS, and the CUM preparing in progress display MTYb shows lifting of the reserved icon display area HIS. There is.

  In FIG. 227 (B3), a state is shown in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, and it is in the reach state.

  In FIG. 227 (B4), before moving to super reach effect, “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decorative symbol, and is swinging and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. Moved "Decoration 7" below the second hold number display. Further, in this example of rendering, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYb is also displayed while transitioning to super reach rendering. Also, in FIG. 227 (B4), the deletion animation is started, and the holding frame UI moves downward. At this time, the reserved icon display area HIS moves downward so as to be hidden behind the CUM in-provision display MTYb, and then becomes difficult to view as shown in FIG. 227 (B5). Also, the variation icon display area CIS is framed out below the display screen leaving the pedestal hs0. That is, FIG. 227 (B5) shows that the holding frame UI is completely out of the frame with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining. In this example of effect, the delete animation is performed at the timing of hiding the hold icon, but the hold icon may be displayed without performing the delete animation.

  FIG. 228 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIGS. 228A1 to A11 show modified examples of the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 228 (A1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A1), the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 228 (A2), the effect EF 104 of explosion is displayed in the central portion on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM in-progress display appearance animation is started. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the display during CUM preparation display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS but is started to be displayed at the upper left of the display screen. Note that the explosion effect EF 104 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decoration pattern. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may appear without the CUM preparation display appearance animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be displayed without the explosion effect EF 104 being displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (A3), when the explosion effect EF 104 is erased, a CUM preparation display MTY appears. The display position of the CUM-in-provision display MTY is substantially at the center of the left end portion of the display screen, unlike FIG. 222 (A3). In this presentation example, it is shown that the display position of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT.

  In FIG. 228 (A4), a state in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols is shown as being in the reach state. At this time, the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is less visible than in the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the CUM in-provision display MTY. ing. It should be noted that the CUM in-provision display MTY may be disposed on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 228 (A5), before moving to super reach effect, “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decorative symbol, and is swinging and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. Moved "Decoration 7" below the second hold number display. Further, in this example of rendering, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is also displayed while transitioning to super reach rendering. At this time, the CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decorative symbol. Note that even if the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed overlapping in front of the decorative symbol at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (A4), the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (A5). May be overlapped and displayed behind the decorative pattern. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. Also, in FIG. 228 (A5), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and a state of scrolling out below the display screen while leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS is shown. . Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 228 (A6) to the same figure (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 228 (A6) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A6) to (A8) except that the display position of the display MTY in preparation for CUM is different. So I will omit the explanation.

  FIG. 228 (A9) shows that a moving animation in which the CUM in-progress display MTY moves downward is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 228 (A10), when the CUM-in-provision display MTY moves to the lower left corner of the display screen, the moving animation is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (A11), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example, after the moving animation is completed, the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the sabothani character SBH starts to move (the former), but the CUM in-provision display MTY At the same time as switching to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may start moving (the latter). Further, the timing at which the sabothan character SBH starts moving may be either the former case or the latter case, only the former may be performed, or only the latter may be performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A10) to FIG. (A15) or FIG. 222 (B1) to FIG. (B8) are performed.

  FIGS. 228B1 to B5 show, for example, another effect example following to FIG. 228A2.

  In FIG. 228 (B1), unlike in FIG. 228 (A3), the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in a size smaller than that of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, you may be displayed by the size expanded rather than the chance up meter CMT. Also, the display size of the CUM in-provision display MTY may or may not be the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM in-provision display MTY and the display size of the chance up meter CMT may be the same or may be different.

  FIG. 228 (B2) shows transition to super reach in a state where the CUM in-provision display MTY of the reduced size is displayed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (B3), a moving animation in which the CUM-in-provision display MTY moves is started. At this time, the balloon with "STANDBY" is deleted. The balloon may be deleted before the moving animation starts, may be deleted after the moving animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the moving animation starts. Further, as described later, the balloon may be deleted after the CUM in-provision display MTY is enlarged and displayed, or the balloon may be deleted before the enlarged display.

  FIG. 228 (B4) shows that the moving animation is completed and the CUM in-progress display MTY has moved to the display position of the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and the display size becomes the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the display position may be switched without moving animation, and in this case, the display size of the CUM in-provision display MTY is reduced before and after the display position is switched to the same display size as the chance up meter CMT. You may do so. In addition, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be enlarged after the moving animation is completed, or the moving animation may be started after the enlarged display, or the CUM in-progress display MTY is moved by the movement animation. During this process, the display may be enlarged gradually. When the moving animation is completed and the CUM in-provision display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT, as shown in FIG. The presentation by the meter CMT is started.

  FIGS. 228C1 to C4 show, for example, another effect example following to FIG. 228A2.

  FIG. 228 (C1) shows an example in which only a partial display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed as the CUM in-provision display, unlike in FIG. 228 (A3). In FIG. 228 (C1), only the balloon of the character SBH of the Sabohani and the character "STANDBY" in the CUM in-provision display MTY are displayed, and the other configuration is in a non-display mode. By this, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be notified. The configuration to be displayed is not limited to the above-described one, and any component may be displayed as long as it is a part of the elements constituting the CUM in-provision display MTY.

  FIG. 228 (C2) shows how to shift to super reach thereafter. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (C3), a switching animation which is an animation to be switched from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF 105 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the CUM preparation display, and a state in which the CUM preparation display disappears is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the explosion effect EF 105 is erased, the CUM preparation display is also erased, and as shown in FIG. 228 (C4), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. It should be noted that the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without switching animation being performed, or the switching animation is performed and the CUM preparation display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In some cases, switching display may be performed from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT without the switching animation being performed.

  FIG. 229 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIGS. 229 (A1) to (A11) show modifications of the display mode and display position of the CUM preparation display. In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 229 (A1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 222 (A1), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 229 (A2), the effect EF 106 of explosion is displayed in the center on the left side of the display screen, and it is shown that the CUM preparation display appearance animation is started. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the display during CUM preparation display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS but is started to be displayed at the upper left of the display screen. Furthermore, in this effect example, as described later, the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTYc is different. Note that the explosion effect EF 106 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decoration pattern. Further, the CUM in-provision display MTYc may appear without the CUM in-provision display animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYc may be displayed without the explosion effect EF 106 being displayed.

  FIG. 229 (A3) shows that the CUM in-provision display MTYc is displayed. The display mode of the CUM-in-provision display MTYc is a display mode different from that in FIG.

  In FIG. 229 (A4), a state in which “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol is shown. At this time, the CUM in-provision display MTYc is displayed overlapping on the front side with respect to the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than the state in which the decorative symbol is not overlapped by the CUM in-provision display MTYc. ing. The CUM in-provision display MTYc may be disposed on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 229 (A5) to FIG. 2 (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 229 (A5) to (A8) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 228 (A5) to (A8) and the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTYc. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (A9), a switching animation which is an animation to be switched from the CUM in-provision display MTYc to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF 106 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM in-provision display MTYc, and a state in which the CUM in-provision display MTYc disappears is displayed. The display mode of this switching animation is the same as that of the CUM in-progress display appearance animation shown in FIG. 229 (A2) and described above, but may be a different display mode. In addition, the display mode of the switch animation and the CUM in-progress display appearance animation may have the same display mode or may have different display modes. Also, the switching animation may not be performed.

  Subsequently, when the switching animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 229 (A10), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed, and the appearing animation in which the chance up meter CMT appears is started. Note that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed without performing the appearing animation. Also, appearance animation may or may not be performed.

  After that, when the appearing animation is completed and the flame effect EF 101 is erased, as shown in FIG. 229 (A11), the chance up meter CMT is displayed, and then the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is started.

  FIGS. 229 (B1) to (B8) show an example in which the timer advance notice display functions as a CUM preparation display.

  FIG. 229 (B1) shows that variable display of a decorative symbol is performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B1), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is “1” indicating 1 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed in the fluctuation icon display area CIS. Further, in FIG. 229 (B1), the timer announcement effect is started, and for example, the timer announcement display TM1 is framed in from the left end of the display screen and displayed on the center left side of the display screen. The timer display on this timer advance display TM1 is "60:00". Thereafter, the timer display countdown is started in the timer advance display TM1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 229 (B2), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation variation display is performed is shown. ing. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed overlapping on the front side of the decoration pattern, and the decoration notice is considered more difficult to recognize than the state in which the decoration pattern is not overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. . The timer notice display TM1 may be disposed on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to be overlapped with the decorative symbol. In addition, the display may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. In addition, while this timer notice display TM1 is being displayed, there may be cases where other types of timer notice displays disclosed herein are displayed. In this case, the display mode of the timer advance notice may be the same as or different from that of the timer advance notice TM1 shown in FIG. 229 (B2). Further, the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be always displayed at the same position, or the display position may be different. Further, the type of notice performed as a result of the timer display countdown becoming "00:00" may be different depending on the display position of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the left side of the display screen) If this timer notice display TM1 functions as a CUM in-progress display and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right of the display screen, the timer display countdown is performed, and as a result, even if the pseudo link is executed. Good). At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B2), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “15:00”.

  In FIG. 229 (B3), before moving to super reach effect, “decoration 7” that was swinging and changing in the left symbol display area 208a moves under the second decoration symbol, and is swinging and changing in the right symbol display area 208c. Moved "Decoration 7" below the second hold number display. Further, in this example of effect, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is also continuously displayed while shifting to the super reach effect. When the effect to shift to the super reach effect is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be non-displayed, and may be displayed or non-displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B3), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “10:57”. In addition, in FIG. 229 (B3), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and the frame hocking out of the variation icon display area CIS with the pedestal hs0 remaining is shown. . FIG. 229 (B4) shows that the holding frame UI is completely out of the frame with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B4), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:21”.

  FIG. 229 (B5) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Also at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 229 (B5), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is “05:53”. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 6B (B5) displays a large image of an enemy swordsman, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The animation of the battle scene with the hostile swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the holding frame UI is all hidden (disappears) except the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is also hidden (disappears). However, the fluctuation icon h0 does not disappear but continues to be displayed on the top board that has remained. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol and the second number-on-hold display continue to be displayed. Note that the entire holding frame UI may be erased or, conversely, the entire holding frame UI may be continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased, or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 229 (B7) shows that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” while the super reach effect is being performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (B8), a switching animation that is an animation to switch from the timer advance notice display TM1 to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF 106 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the timer notice display TM1, and a state in which the CUM preparation display disappears is displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 229 (A10) to FIG. (A11) are performed. In this example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, and when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT is There may be a case where it is displayed and a case where it is not displayed (presence display of cassette by timer advance display). Also, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the chance up meter CMT may be displayed or another notice may be given. It is also good.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the chance up meter effect being performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effects performed in the period shown in FIG. 230 (A1) to FIG. (A5) are the same as the effects performed in FIG. 222 (A1) to FIG. (A8), and FIG. The effects performed in the period shown in FIG. (A14) are the same as the effects performed in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (11), so the description will be omitted.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (A15), the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) of the lord is displayed as shown in FIG. 230 (A16). . Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this production example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image having a display mode different from the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, and the reliability of the big hit increases in the order of the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image. In addition, the cut-in image which suggests big hit confirmation may be displayed. This weakly cut-in image CI3b is a cut-in image having a display mode different from that of the cut-in image (gold cut-in image CI3) of the crown pattern shown in FIG. 29 (13), and is longer than the gold cut-in image CI3. The image is a weak cut-in image that is short and surrounded by a green frame, and also shows how to shake the sword with a hail of "Go!". Although this weak cut-in image CI 3 b suggests that the reliability is lower than the gold cut-in image CI 3 but the jackpot is higher, it may also indicate that the reliability is not changed. . That is, in the example of the effect, the gold cut-in image CI3 which may be generated at the second check point CP2 is not displayed, and it is shown that the chance-up notice is not generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 230 (A17), the red marking is not attached at the second check point CP2, and it is shown that a chance-up notice has not occurred above the second check point CP2. The display of “×” is displayed, and the history of the fact that the chance-up notice has not occurred is shown. In addition, it is not necessary to leave a history that no chance up notice occurred when no chance up notice occurred (for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani is the first check point) It is not necessary to pass CP1 as it is, and marking at the first check point CP1 and displaying of the character of "UP" may not be performed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (7a '), the display of the first check point CP1 is erased. Also, if a chance-up notice has not occurred, the history may or may not be left, which is the case in any of the embodiments described herein. In this weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 230 (A16), the effect button 136 is within the operation valid period. It may be displayed on the condition that it has been created, or may be displayed whenever the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, and this may be displayed as shown in FIG. 230 (A16). The weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed even when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. If it does, it may be always displayed, or may not be displayed when the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136. Further, the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period. When the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed.

  Thereafter, when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (A18), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 230 (A19), the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice. Instead, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (A20), it becomes possible to receive the operation of the effect button 136 by the player. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (A21), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move and is positioned in front of the final point GP. Further, in the remaining time display meter MT, it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Alternatively, the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 or until the operation valid period elapses. In this example of presentation, the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is not displayed, so no red marking is attached at the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT, and above the third check point CP3. The display of “×” indicating that the chance-up notice has not occurred is displayed, and the history that the chance-up notice has not occurred is displayed.

  After that, the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (A22), but the operation of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) is not performed, and the operation shown in FIG. As shown, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the character of "x" indicating that the placard is a loss is indicated, and the character SBH of Sabohani becomes a disappointed expression ing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (A24), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed thinner than the normal density. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 230 (A25), all the decoration symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in the normal density. After that, for example, effects shown in FIG. 222 (B4) to FIG. (B8) are performed. Note that, in this example of production, no chance up notice occurs at the third check point CP3, and the button image 136a is displayed, and although the effect button 136 is operated, it is shown that the result of loss is derived. However, in this effect example, the effect button 136 may be operated to operate various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and the result of the big hit may be derived. In addition, when no advance notice of chance up occurs at the third check point CP3, it may indicate that a loss has been decided. In addition, when the effect in this example of presentation is performed, there may be a case where it will be a loss or a big hit in the end, and in that case, a case where a loss display mode is finally displayed, The effect of this effect example may be configured to be more easily generated than when the big hit display mode is finally displayed.

  In this presentation example, only one of the three check points CP1 to CP3 is notified of a chance-up, and then it is shown that a loss has been derived, but any of the three check points CP1 to CP3 is shown. A chance-up notice may be made, and then a loss may be derived, or a lose-up may be derived without any chance-up notice being made at any check point. In addition, when the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed, at least one chance up notice may be made to be always performed once or more, and even if the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed, the chance improvement notice is also made once. May not occur, there may be one or more chance-up notices, or a chance-up notice may always occur at every check point. It goes without saying that this is applicable to any of the chance-up announcement effects embodiments disclosed herein.

  FIG. 231 is a diagram showing another pattern of chance up meter effects performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 231 (A1) to FIG. 231 (A2) are the same as the effects performed in FIG. 230 (A1) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 231 (A3), it is shown that the flame effect EF 101 is erased and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. In this example of rendering, unlike the example of rendering shown in FIG. 230 (A3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohan character SBH is red, and the background color of the balloon is displayed in white. The chance-up notice is more likely to occur than that, and the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed. In the case where the background color of the balloon is red, chances-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example). There may be occasions when a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the checkpoints. Moreover, even if the background color of the balloon turns red, the chance-up notice may not occur once. In addition, when the background color of the balloon is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the background color of the balloon may be displayed in a color other than red or white, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Moreover, although the example which changes the background color of the balloon is shown in this presentation example, the shape of the balloon may be changed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 231 (A4) to FIG. 231 (A14) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 231 (A4) to FIG. (A14) are the same as FIG. 230 (A4) to FIG. 230 (A14) except that the background color of the balloon is different, so the description is omitted. .

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (A15), as shown in FIG. 231 (A16), the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. Is displayed. In addition, at this timing, the weak cut-in image CI3b, the red cut-in image (not shown), or the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated, and the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. If it is determined that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed or if the gold cut-in image CI3 is determined to be displayed even if the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, the chance-up notice is displayed. It is determined that a notification indicating that it has occurred (for example, a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP Gold cut-in” in FIG. 231 appended thereto) is displayed, and that the weak cut-in image CI3b and the red cut-in image are displayed In the case of or when displayed, a notification indicating that a chance has occurred has not been displayed, but the red cut-in image The notification may be performed in the same manner as the gold cut-in image CI3, and in that case, the notification indicating that the red cut-in image is displayed and the notification indicating that the gold cut-in image is displayed are only character notation. , And other display modes (for example, a balloon etc.) may be different. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 231 (A16) to FIG. 231 (A26) are performed. In addition, since the rendition performed in the period of FIG. 231 (A16)-the same figure (A26) is the same as the rendition shown in FIG. 29 (13)-the same figure (26), description is abbreviate | omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A13) to FIG. (A15) are performed. In this effect example, even if the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (A23), the various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 231 (A24) may not be operated and a loss may be derived. In that case, even if the big hit display mode is finally displayed in this case, the effect of this production example is more easily generated than the case where the lost display mode is finally displayed Good.

  FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of the change effect of the display mode during the chance up meter preparation display.

  FIGS. 232A1 to 232A3 are modifications of FIG. 231A3 and the CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIGS. 227A1 to A9 is displayed in another display mode. It shows how it is.

  FIG. 232 (A1) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 227 (A2). FIG. 232 (A1) shows that the flame effect EF 101 is erased and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYb is displayed. The CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIG. 232 (A1) is the same as the CUM in-provision display MTYb shown in FIG. 227 (A3), but the background color is red and the background color of the CUM in-provision display MTYb is The chance-up notice is more likely to occur than in the white case, and the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed. In the case where the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, chance-up notice may occur at all the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of presentation). There may be occasions when a chance up notice occurs only in one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb becomes red, there may be a case where the chance up notice does not occur even once. Further, when the background color of the CUM in-provision display MTYb is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the background color of the CUM-in-provision display MTYb may be displayed in a color other than red or white, and for example, when displayed in rainbow color, a big hit may be determined. Further, although the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is changed in this example, the shape of the CUM preparation display MTYb may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 232 (A2) to FIG. (A3) are performed. In addition, the effects performed in the period of FIG. 232 (A1) to FIG. 232 (A3) are the effects shown in FIG. 227 (A3) to FIG. 227 (A9) except that the background color of the display MTYb during CUM preparation is different. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 232 (B1) to (B4) are modifications of FIG. 231 (A3), and show how the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 232 (B1) is the same as FIG. 222 (A3), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 232 (B2), after the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed, the effect EF 107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in a red flame is displayed, and it is informed that the CUM in-provision display MTY is ranked up. It is done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani, which is a component of the CUM-in-provision display MTY, effects that rank-up of the CUM-in-provision display MTY is being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (B3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the sasohani character SBH changes from white to red, and it is informed that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In this example of rendering, the color of the flame effect EF 107 is displayed in red in accordance with the background color of the balloon after rank increase, but may be displayed in colors other than red. In addition, the rank of the CUM in-provision display MTY after rank up may be notified by the display color of the flame effect EF107. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow color, the rank The background color of the balloon of the display MTY in preparation for CUM after up may also be changed to rainbow color, and it may be notified that the big hit is determined. That is, when the flame effect EF 107 is displayed in a rainbow color, it may be informed that the big hit is determined at that time. In addition, even if a notice of rank-up of the CUM in-provision display MTY by the effect EF 107 is notified, the CUM-in-provision display MTY may not be ranked up.

  After that, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 232 (B4) is a modified example of FIG. 231 (A4), and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed. It is shown that the fluctuation display is performed. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in red.

  FIGS. 232 (C1) to (C6) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed.

  FIG. 232 (C1) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 222 (A3), and shows that the advance notice icon YI is stocked. The notice icon YI is displayed, for example, by any of the effect examples shown in FIG. 180 to FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 232 (C2), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the box is changed to the embodiment d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation that pops up a preview of "UP" to announce the is displayed. The display of “UP” appearing here is a display for giving a notice of the rank increase of the display MTY in preparation for CUM. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 232 (C3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display of "UP" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 232 (C4), the promotion animation using the preview display of “UP” is started. In FIG. 232 (C4), the notice display of “UP” changes to the light ball EF 108 in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the saharan character SBH of the CUM preparation display MTY is disappointing It is shown that it is flying and flying into a balloon. In this example, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or the promotion animation is in progress when the promotion animation is performed and the CUM in-provision display MTY ranks up. The CUM preparing display MTY may be ranked up without being notified. As described above, in this presentation example, the preliminary display is performed by an element other than the components of the CUM in-provision display MTY, and it is shown that the CUM in-provision display MTY is being ranked up.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (C5), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the sabotarian character SBH changes from white to red, and it is informed that the CUM in-provision display MTY has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color. Also, in spite of the promotion animation being performed, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 232 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation variation display is performed is It is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in red.

  FIGS. 232 (D1) to (D3) show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 232 (D1) is the same as FIG. 222 (A3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 232 (D2), after the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed, the entire CUM in-provision display MTY is covered with a large flame, the effect EF 109 is displayed, and the CUM in-provision display MTY is ranked up. Is reported. That is, in this presentation example, a preliminary display is performed by an element other than the components of the CUM in-provision display MTY, and it is shown that the CUM in-provision display MTY is being ranked up.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (D3), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the sabotary character SBH changes from white to red, and it is informed that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color. In addition, even if a notice of rank-up of the CUM in-provision display MTY by the effect EF 109 is notified, the CUM-in-provision display MTY may not be ranked up. In addition, as shown in FIG. 232 (D2 '), the color of the effect EF 109 of the flame may be the same color as the background color of the balloon of the display MTY during CUM preparation after change (in this example, red). According to the above, the rank of the display MTY in preparation for CUM after rank increase may be notified. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 232 (D3 '), the color of the balloon of the CUM in-provision display MTY after rank-up may change to rainbow, and in this case, it is informed that the big hit is confirmed Ru. Note that as shown in FIG. 231 (A3), the color of the balloon of the CUM-in-provision display MTY may be displayed in a rainbow color from the beginning.

  FIGS. 232 (E1) to (E6) show an effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes as a result of the timer advance notice being made while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 232 (E1) is the same as FIG. 222 (A3), so the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 232 (E2), the timer announcement effect is started, and for example, the timer announcement display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed at the center right of the display screen. The timer display on this timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a notice is given 3 seconds after the timer display countdown is started (in this example, CUM in-progress display MTY ranks up) It is suggested that be done. Thereafter, the timer display countdown is started in the timer advance display TM1. That is, in this presentation example, a preliminary display is performed by an element other than the components of the CUM in-provision display MTY, and it is shown that the CUM in-provision display MTY is being ranked up.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 232 (E3) to FIG. (E4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 232 (E5), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (E6), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the sabotarian character SBH changes from white to red, and it is informed that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change presentation of the display mode during the chance up meter preparation display.

  In FIG. 233 (A1) to (A7), the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is the pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed across multiple symbol variations The effect pattern which ranks up in the case is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 233 (A1) to (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 223 (C1) to (C6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, as shown in FIG. 233 (A7), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again, but in this presentation example, as a result of being displayed again, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. The background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH changes from white to red, and it is shown that the CUM-in-provision display MTY is ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color. For example, three background colors of white (default color), red (high hopeful degree), and rainbow color (big hit confirmed) are prepared as the background color of the balloon in this presentation example, and both before redisplay and after redisplay are provided. Patterns that do not change in white, patterns that do not change in red either before and after redisplay, patterns that do not change in rainbow colors before and after redisplay, and redisplay in white before redisplay After that, the pattern changes to red, the pattern changes to white after re-displaying and iridescent after re-display, the pattern changes to red after re-displaying and iridescent, and white at the first stage , And changes to red after the first redisplay, and is configured to be displayed in one of the display patterns that changes to the rainbow after the second redisplay. In addition, a display mode speech balloon that is an expectation degree between a white background speech bubble and a red background speech bubble, and a display that is an expectation degree between a red background speech bubble and an iridescent background speech bubble A balloon of the aspect may be prepared. In addition, there may be a display mode of the balloon that suggests that the background color of the balloon may change (for example, a balloon with a display mode of white blinking). This is applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

  In FIG. 233 (B1) to (B8), the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is the pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed across plural symbol variations. The other production | presentation pattern which ranks up in the case is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 233 (B1) to (B6) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 223 (D1) to (D6), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 233 (B7), after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the display of the effect EF 107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in a red flame is performed, and the CUM preparation display MTY ranks up. Is being reported. Note that the timing at which the display of the effect EF 107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in a flame is started and the rank-up effect of the display MTY in preparation for CUM is started is not limited to that described above, and may be started at an appropriate timing. For example, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol may be displayed, the final display of the decorative symbol may be displayed, or another reach effect may be performed. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY ranks up may be any timing described above.

  As described above, when the CUM in-provision display MTY has been ranked up, as shown in FIG. 233 (B8), the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH changes from white to red. , It is informed that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In this example of rendering, the color of the flame effect EF 107 is displayed in red in accordance with the background color of the balloon after rank increase, but may be displayed in colors other than red. In addition, the rank of the CUM in-provision display MTY after rank up may be notified by the display color of the flame effect EF107. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow color, the rank The background color of the balloon of the display MTY in preparation for CUM after up may also be changed to rainbow color, and it may be notified that the big hit is determined. That is, when the flame effect EF 107 is displayed in a rainbow color, it may be informed that the big hit is determined at that time. In addition, even if the CUM in-provision display MTY in the CUM preparation process is produced by the effect EF 107, the CUM in-provision display MTY may not be ranked up.

  FIG. 233 (C1) to FIG. 233 (C4) show another display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY which has been ranked up.

  FIG. 233 (C1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A2), and shows that the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 231 (A3), and the color of the meter part constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. In the case where the color of the meter portion is white, chance-up notice is more likely to occur, and the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed. If the color of the meter portion is red, chances-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example). There may be occasions when a chance-up notice occurs only at one or two of the checkpoints. Moreover, even if the color of the meter part turns red, there may be a case where the chance-up notice does not occur even once. In addition, when the color of the meter portion is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the color of the meter portion may be displayed in a color other than red and white, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow, a big hit may be determined. Moreover, although the example which changes the color of a meter part was shown in this presentation example, you may make it change the shape of a meter part. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 233 (C2) to FIG. (C4) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 233 (C2) to FIG. (C4) are the same as those in FIG. 231 (A4) to (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different from the above. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. In this presentation example, as shown in FIG. 233 (C4), when the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion becomes white and the default display mode is obtained. Note that the color of the meter portion may be red even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 233 (D1) to FIG. 233 (D4) show another display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY which has been ranked up.

  FIG. 233 (D1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A2), which shows that the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 231 (A3), and the color of the character SBH itself of the sabothani constituting the CUM in-provision display MTY. Has become red, and chance-up notice is more likely to occur than in the case where the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is the default color, and the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finalized and displayed. If the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of presentation), A chance-up notice may occur only in one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani turns red, there may be a case where no chance up notice occurs. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the color of the character SBH of the sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow color, a big hit may be determined. Further, although this example shows an example of changing the color of the character SBH of Sabohani, the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. In addition, a character different from Sabohan's character SBH may be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 233 (D2) to FIG. (D4) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 233 (D2) to FIG. (D4) are the same as those in FIG. 231 (A4) to FIG. 231 (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the above. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. In this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 233 (D4), when the CUM-in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the color of the sabohani character SBH becomes the default color, and the default display mode is obtained. The color of the character SBH of Sabohan may be red even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode during the preparation of the chance up meter.

  FIG. 234 (A1) to FIG. 234 (A4) illustrate another display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY.

  FIG. 234 (A1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A2), showing that the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3), and the character SBH of the sabothani constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is a princess. The character HME is changed to the character HME of the princess in the case where the big hit symbol display mode is definitely displayed rather than the case where the big hit symbol display mode is displayed than in the case where the lost symbol display mode is definitely displayed. It is easy to be displayed. When the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may occur at all the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example). A chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the princess character HME is displayed, there may be a case where the chance-up notice does not occur even once. In addition, when the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the effect by the chance-up meter CMT. When the princess character HME is displayed, the big hit may be determined. Further, although the princess character HME is displayed instead of the Sabohan character SBH in this presentation example, a character different from the princess character HME may be displayed. In addition, the character displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY may be selected in advance by the player. For example, when the player sets in advance that the princess character HME appears, the CUM preparation is in progress. The princess character HME may be displayed on the display MTY, or when the appearing character is not selected, the sabothan character SBH may be displayed as the default character. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 234 (A2) to FIG. (A4) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 234 (A2) to FIG. (A4) are the same as those in FIG. 231 (A4) to FIG. (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the above. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 234 (A4), when the CUM in-progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the princess character HME is switched to the Sabohan character SBH. Note that the princess character HME may continue to be displayed even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 234 (B1) to FIG. 234 (B7) illustrate another pattern of rank-up effects of the display MTY in preparation for CUM.

  FIG. 234 (B1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A2), and shows that the CUM in-provision display MTY is started to be displayed.

  After that, in FIG. 234 (B2), the button image 136 as of small size and the remaining time display meter MTs of small size start to be displayed in the vicinity of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH constituting the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the operation of the effect button 136 is urged. At the timing shown in FIG. 234 (B2), the operation effective period has not yet started.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (B3), and in FIG. 234 (B4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MTs according to the elapsed time after the operation effective period is started. It is shown that the A plurality of button images may be displayed including this small size button image 136as. In this case, one operation of the effect button 136 corresponds to all of the displayed button images. The operation to be performed may be accepted, or only the operation corresponding to any one button image may be accepted. In addition, when the button effect relating to the execution of the advance notice and the button effect relating to the execution of the notice of the symbol variation display under execution (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “the change notice”) may be simultaneously performed, The operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect according to the change notice may be prioritized by the operation of the button 136, or the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect according to the advance notice may be prioritized It is also possible that both the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect relating to the change notice and the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect relating to the pre-reading notice are activated by the operation of one effect button 136 You may In addition, even when a plurality of button effects relating to the pre-reading notice are being performed simultaneously, even if the effect button 136 is operated, only the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect relating to any one pre-reading notice is made effective. Alternatively, all operations of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effects relating to the plurality of pre-reading notices being executed may be enabled. In addition, in the case where a plurality of button effects relating to the change notification are being performed simultaneously, when the effect button 136 is operated, only the operation of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effect relating to any one change notification is valid Alternatively, all the operations of the effect button 136 corresponding to the button effects relating to the plurality of the change notices being executed may be enabled.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (B5), as shown in FIG. 234 (B6), a switching animation is performed in which the effect EF 110 in which the balloon explodes is displayed, It is reported that the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect of rank increase of the CUM in-progress display MTY is performed by a button effect different from the component of the CUM in-provision display MTY. Note that the switching animation may not be performed.

  After that, when the explosion effect EF 110 is erased, the background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH of the CUM preparation display MTY changes from white to red as shown in FIG. 234 (B7). It is shown that the display MTY during CUM preparation is ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the display MTY during CUM preparation, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red, and may change to another color. In this example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is ranked up by operating the effect button 136 in the operation effective period, but the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. Also, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be ranked up, or the CUM in-provision display MTY may not be ranked up when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. In addition, when the operation effective period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, the CUM in-provision display MTY may or may not be ranked up. Further, when the display of the button effect is performed as shown in FIG. 234 (B2), the CUM-in-provision display MTY may be always ranked up.

  FIG. 234 (C1) to (C6) show another pattern of presentation by the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 234 (C1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 231 (A5), showing that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT differs from the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 231 (A5) in that four check points are arranged, and the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 The fourth check point CP4 is disposed between the That is, it is informed that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur when the SABOHANI character SBH as the cursor reaches the fourth check point CP4. In addition, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in a ranked-up display mode, the chance is increased by the number of checkpoints being increased compared to the default display mode of the chance display meter CMT shown in FIG. 231 (A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. In addition, when the CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed in a ranked-up display mode, the chance increase in the number of checkpoints is reduced as compared to the chance display meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. The meter CMT may be easily displayed. In addition, the number of checkpoints in the chance up meter CMT is the same between when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the ranked up display mode and when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in the default display mode. May be. In addition, when the CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed in a ranked-up display mode, the chance increase in the number of checkpoints is greater than the default display mode of the chance display meter CMT shown in FIG. 231 (A5). The meter CMT may be displayed without fail. In addition, when the CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed in a ranked-up display mode, the chance increase in the number of checkpoints is reduced as compared to the chance display meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. The meter CMT may be displayed without fail.

  FIG. 234 (C2) shows that a chance-up advance notice occurs at the first check point CP1, and the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the meter.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 234 (C3), when the sabothan character SBH reaches the fourth check point CP4, an animation in which the blade edge of the sword held by the lord is shining is started. That is, this chance is a chance up notice at the fourth check point CP4, and this chance up notice is more likely to occur in the case where the big hit design is displayed rather than the case where the lost design is displayed. It has become.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (C4), a balloon with the word “Chance up, good sword” is displayed in the vicinity of the sabothani character SBH, and a chance up notice is given. It is reported that. Note that the timing at which the animation of the shining tip of the sword starts may be the same as the display start timing of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, or the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed after the animation of the shining tip of the sword starts. Alternatively, after the display of the balloon of the SABOHANI character SBH is started, the animation in which the tip of the sword shines may be started. Note that while the character SBH of SaboHani is stopped at the fourth check point CP4 during the execution of the animation in which the sword tip is shining, it may not be stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 234 (C5), the fourth check point CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (C6), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap is eliminated for a part of the display of “UP”, a part is made visible.

  In this example of presentation, the display mode of the character SBH of Sabohani and the chance up meter CMT is set as the default display mode in which the rank is not up. However, the meter portion of the character SBH of Sabohan and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. At least one of them may be displayed in a ranked-up display mode. In this case, the character SBH or meter part of Sabohani may be ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to display, and only the character SBH of Sabohani is ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to display There may be a case where the meter part ranks up while the chance up meter CMT is performing. In addition, at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to display, only the meter part may be ranked up, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be ranked up while the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is being performed. Moreover, it may be displayed in the display mode of rank up only when the chance up meter CMT starts to be displayed, so that rank up is not performed while presentation is being performed by the chance up meter CMT. It is also good.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram showing how the chance up meter ranks up while the chance up meter is performing. Here, the effects shown in FIG. 235 (A1) to FIG. (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 230 (A1) to FIG.

  FIG. 235 (A6) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is displayed in red, which is a color that is ranked up from the default color white, at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. As a result, it is suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each check point, and finally, it will be likely to be clearly displayed in the jackpot symbol form. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 235 (A7) to FIG. (A26) are performed. In addition, the display of the meter part of the chance up meter CMT in FIG. 235 (A6) and FIG. 235 (A7) becomes the same display mode. Further, the effects shown in FIG. 235 (A7) to FIG. (A26) are the same as FIG. 231 (A7) to FIG. (A26) except that the color of the meter part in the chance up meter CMT is different. , I omit the explanation. In addition, the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode (for example, default color, sabohani) when the big hit symbol mode is determined and displayed rather than the case where the lost symbol mode is determined and displayed. May be configured to be more easily displayed in a display mode (for example, red, princess character HME etc.) ranked up than the character

  FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the ranked up chance increase meter.

  FIG. 236 (A1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 235 (A5), showing that the display during CUM preparation MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, at the stage when the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed, the color of the SABOHANI character SBH itself is red, and a chance up notice occurs than when the SABOHANI character SBH is the default color. It is easy to do, and the jackpot symbol form is easily displayed. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. If the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of presentation), A chance-up notice may occur only in one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani turns red, there may be a case where no chance up notice occurs. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the color of the character SBH of the sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow color, a big hit may be determined. Further, although this example shows an example of changing the color of the character SBH of Sabohani, the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. In addition, a character different from Sabohan's character SBH may be displayed.

  FIG. 236 (B1) is an effect following FIG. 235 (A5), and shows another display mode of the ranked up chance increase meter CMT. In FIG. 236 (B1), the background color of the placard disposed at the final point GP changes from the default color (for example, white) to red, which also causes the chance up meter CMT to be ranked up. Can be notified. At this time, for example, only the background color of a specific surface of the placard (for example, the surface on which “V” or “progress” is displayed) is changed to red, and the surface on which “x” is displayed is the default color The background color may be changed to red also on the surface on which "x" is displayed. Although the display mode of the final point GP is changed in this effect example, the display mode of the start point SP may be changed to notify that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up.

  FIG. 236 (C1) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 235 (A5), and shows another display mode of the ranked up chance increase meter CMT. FIG. 236 (C1) shows that the second check point CP2 is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (square and white display mode). That is, it is shown that a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, the display mode of the second check point CP2 is a round and red display mode, and, for example, it is notified that a chance-up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 necessarily occurs. Note that the display mode of the other check points may be changed to a mode in which the rank is increased. Further, in this example of presentation, the shape and color of the check point are changed, but only the shape may be changed or only the color may be changed.

  Figures 236 (D1) to (D2) show the effects corresponding to the effects shown in Figure 222 (A10) to (A11), and the effects by the chance up meter CMT are started, and in this example of effects , It is shown that the background color of the balloon of "START !!", which informs that the movement of the character SBH of Sabohan, is started is red, and thereby, the chance up meter CMT is ranked up The situation is suggested. The balloon of "START !!" is then erased as shown in FIG. 236 (D2). In this effect example, since the time when the balloon of "START !!" is displayed is short, it may be easy to make the player pay attention to the display of "START !!". In this effect example, after the balloon of "START !!" is displayed, it is erased when a predetermined time elapses, but when the balloon is a display mode in which the rank is upgraded, it is not erased, The display may be maintained as it is. Moreover, although the background color of the balloon is changed in this example of effect, the color of the character of the balloon may be changed. Also, the contents of the characters displayed in the balloon may change or may be written as they are.

  236 (E1) to (E6) show another example of effect following, for example, FIG. 235 (A5), and correspond to the effects shown in FIG. 230 (A6) to (A11) .

  FIG. 236 (E1) shows that the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, the sabotary character SBH that constitutes the chance up meter CMT is changed to the princess character HME, and thereby, it is informed that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. In the vicinity of the princess character HME, a balloon in which the characters “START !!” are displayed is displayed in a default display mode. Here, the character displayed in the CUM-in-provision display MTY displayed before the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (E1) may be a Sabohan character SBH or a princess character It may be HME or any other character. In this rendering example, the sabotary character SBH is displayed in the CUM-in-provision display MTY, and it is shown that the character is changed to the princess character HME when switched to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 236 (E2) to FIG. 236 (E6) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 236 (E2) to (E6) are the same as those in FIGS. 230 (A7) to (A11) except that the characters displayed in the chance up meter CMT are different. So I will omit the explanation.

  FIGS. 236 (F1) to (F7) show another example of presentation following FIG. 235 (A5), for example, the situation in which the chance up meter CMT ranks up during the execution by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

  FIG. 236 (F1) shows that the CUM in-progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this presentation example, it is shown that the notice icon YI is stocked. The notice icon YI is displayed, for example, by any of the effect examples shown in FIG. 180 to FIG.

  FIG. 236 (F2) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 235 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 236 (F1) to FIG. (F2), for example, the effect shown in FIG. 235 (A6) to FIG. (A10) and described above except that the advance notice icon YI is displayed. It has been done. Thereafter, in FIG. 236 (F3), after a chance-up advance notice occurs at the first check point CP1, the presentation proceeds, and it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading for the second check point CP2.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 236 (F4), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the box changes to the embodiment d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation that pops up a preview of "UP" to announce the is displayed. The display of “UP” that appears here is a display for giving a notice of the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 236 (F5), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display of "UP" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 236 (F5), a promoted animation using the preview display of “UP” is started. In FIG. 236 (F6), after the notice display of “UP” changes to a ball of light in the right symbol display area 208c, the chance up meter CMT flies for the chance up meter CMT, and it appears It is shown. At this time, the explosion effect EF 111 is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. In this example, the chance up meter CMT may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or the promotion animation is conducted and the chance up meter is ranked up, and the promotion animation is not performed. The chance up meter CMT may be ranked up. Thus, in this example of presentation, it is indicated that the advance display is performed by an element other than the components of the chance up meter CMT, and the rank up of the chance up meter CMT is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 236 (F7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white to red, and it is informed that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT, not only when the meter part changes from red to red, it may change to another color. In addition, although the promotion animation is performed, the chance up meter CMT may not be ranked up.

  FIGS. 236 (G1) to (G7) show another example of effect following, for example, FIG. 235 (A5), and show the situation where the chance up meter CMT is ranked up by the timer advance notice.

  FIG. 236 (G1) shows that the CUM in-progress display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT is set as the default display mode.

  FIG. 236 (G2) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 235 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 236 (G1) to FIG. (G2), for example, the effects described above with reference to FIG. 235 (A6) to FIG. (A10) are performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 236 (G3), after a chance-up advance notice occurs at the first check point CP1, the rendering progresses, and it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading for the second check point CP2. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started. For example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display on this timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and 3 seconds after the timer display countdown is started, there is a notice (in this example, the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT) It is suggested to be done. Thereafter, the timer display countdown is started in the timer advance display TM1. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance display is performed by an element other than the components of the chance up meter CMT, and the rank up of the chance up meter CMT is performed. The timer display countdown may be started after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, or may be started during the execution of the animation in which the timer notice display TM1 appears.

  Thereafter, as shown in (G4) to (G5) in FIG. 236, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”.

  When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 236 (G6), the timer notice display TM1 changes the timer display to promote attention to the notice. The character "is displayed. In this effect, after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the character of "attention" is displayed and then rank increase of the chance up meter CMT is performed. When the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” without displaying the characters, the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT may be performed. In addition, when the character of "attention" is displayed and rank increase of chance up meter CMT is performed, the character of "attention" may not be displayed and rank increase of chance up meter CMT may be performed. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 236 (G7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white which is the default color to red, and it is informed that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up. In addition, after the rank increase of the chance up meter CMT, not only when the color of the meter part changes from white to red, it may change to another color.

  FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of rank increase of the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 237 (A1) to (A7) show, for example, another example of presentation following FIG. 235 (A5), where the chance up meter CMT ranks up while the chance up meter CMT is performing. Is shown.

  FIG. 237 (A1) shows that the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is set as the default display mode.

  FIG. 237 (A2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 235 (A10). That is, in the period from FIG. 237 (A1) to FIG. (A2), for example, the effects described above with reference to FIG. 235 (A6) to FIG. (A10) are performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 237 (A3), after a chance-up advance notice occurs at the first check point CP1, the presentation proceeds, and it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading for the second check point CP2.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 237 (A4), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani stops on the meter and the rank-up animation is started. When the rank-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 237 (A5), the smoke effect EF 112 is displayed so as to cover the entire character SBH of Sabohani.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (A6), the color of the SABOHANI character SBH itself that makes up the chance up meter CMT changes from the default color to red, and chance up notice is likely to occur, and the jackpot symbol It is suggested that the aspect is easily displayed. If the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, chance-up notice may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of presentation), A chance-up notice may occur only in one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani turns red, there may be a case where no chance up notice occurs. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance-up notice may be generated n times (n = 1 or more) in the rendering by the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the color of the character SBH of the sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color, and for example, when displayed in a rainbow color, a big hit may be determined. Further, although this example shows an example of changing the color of the character SBH of Sabohani, the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. In addition, a character different from Sabohan's character SBH may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (A7), the character SAH of Sabohani resumes the progress on the meter, and proceeds to the second check point CP2. In this presentation example, there may be a case where the display mode of the character SBH of Sabohani does not change despite the rank-up animation being performed.

  FIGS. 237 (B1) to (B8) show, for example, another example of presentation following FIG. 231 (A5), where the chance up meter CMT ranks up while the chance up meter CMT is performing an execution Is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 237 (B1) to FIG. (B2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 237 (A1) to FIG.

  FIG. 237 (B3) shows that a balloon with the character of “next point chance up effect high probability” is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohani character SBH traveling on the chance up meter CMT meter. There is. By the display of this balloon, it is informed that the chance-up advance is likely to occur at the second check point CP2 where the Sabo-Hani character SBH next arrives. In addition, for example, it changes to the balloon shown in FIG. 237 (B3), and as shown to FIG. 237 (B3 '), when the balloon with the character of "next point chance up production | generation occurrence !!" is displayed In this case, it may be notified that a chance up advance notice necessarily occurs at the second check point CP2. Also, as shown in FIG. 237 (B3 ′ ′), a balloon with the characters “Next point, chance up effect occurring?” May be displayed, and in this case, the second check point In CP2, it can be suggested that a chance up notice may occur but may not occur. When the balloon shown in FIG. 237 (B3 ′ ′) is displayed, for example, it is made difficult to generate a chance-up notice at the second check point CP2 than when the balloon shown in FIG. 237 (B3) is displayed. It is also good. Further, by displaying only "during high probability" in the balloon, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at any check point regardless of a specific check point. In addition, only the balloon with the character of "next point chance up production high probability" in Fig. 237 (B3) may be displayed, and "next point chance up effect occurring" in Fig. 237 (B3 '). Only the balloon with the letter "" may be displayed. In addition, a balloon with the character of “Next point, chance up effect high probability” in FIG. 237 (B3) and / or a character of “Next point, chance up effect occurring!” In FIG. 237 (B3 ′) is attached. The displayed balloon may be displayed, or the balloon with the character of FIG. 237 (B3 ′ ′) may be displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (B4), the display mode of the second check point CP2 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the chance-up (round and red display mode). That is, it is shown that a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. Note that a chance-up notice may always occur at a check point where the display mode changes and the rank is increased. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 237 (B5) to FIG. (B8) are performed. In addition, the effects performed in the period of FIG. 237 (B5) to FIG. (B8) are the same as FIG. 231 (A12) to FIG. Since it is the same as the effect shown in (A17) and described above, the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 237 (C1) to (C6) show another example of effect following, for example, FIG. 230 (A24), and show that a resurrection effect is being performed.

  Figure 237 (C1) shows that as a result of the super reach being performed, the lord is defeated by the swordsman, and all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed again with normal darkness. There is.

  After that, FIG. 237 (C2) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani at the final point GP notices something. That is, it is predicted that a resurrection effect will be generated by Sabohani character SBH.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (C3), the resurrection cut-in PCI with the character of “Good luck !!” is displayed together with the princess character, and then, as shown in FIG. 237 (C4), it is displayed large The character of the fallen lord YMN appears with a sword. At this time, the character of the lord YMN is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of a part of the chance up meter CMT, and it is considered that a part of the character is difficult to view. Note that a portion of the character of the lord YMN may be overlapped by the chance up meter CMT, and a portion of the character of the lord YMN may be made difficult to visually recognize. Also, the character YMN of the lord may be displayed at a position not overlapping the chance up meter CMT, and the character YMN of the lord and the chance up meter CMT may or may not overlap. In addition, when the character YMN of the lord appears, the character YMN of the lord and the chance up meter CMN may be sure to overlap. In this example, the resurrection cut-in PCI is displayed after being notified that the resurrection effect is generated by the Sabohani character SBH, but it is not notified that the resurrection effect is generated by the Sabohani character SBH. A resurrection cut-in PCI may be displayed, or a case where a resurrection effect occurs after anticipating that a resurrection effect is generated by the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice that a resurrection effect by the Sabohani character SBH occurs There may be a case where a resurrection effect occurs.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (C5), the character of the lord YMN cuts a sword from the upper left corner to the lower right corner of the display screen, and cuts the "decoration 6" as a middle pattern being stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (C6), the middle pattern is changed from “deco 6” to “deco 7”, and the combination of the decorative patterns of “big 7” of “dec 7” “dec 7” “dec 7” is derived. It is informed that it became. At this time, the placard at the final point GP of the chance up meter CMT is changed from the display of “x” to the display of “V”, and also in this display, it is notified that it is a big hit.

  In this presentation example, for example, when the display is maintained without erasing the chance up meter CMT when the combination of the lost design symbols is derived, it is shown that the resurrection presentation is performed. In this case, there may be a case where the resurrection effect is not performed.

  FIG. 238 is a diagram showing a state in which the ranked up chance-up meter preparation display MTY is still displayed in the ranked up display mode even after the chance-up meter CMT is switched.

  Figures 238 (A1) to (A5) show the effects following those in Figure 235 (A3), and are switched to the chance up meter CMT in a state in which the color of the meter part constituting the CUM preparation display MTY is red. In this case, it appears that the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 238 (A1) to FIG. 238 (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 233 (C1) to FIG.

  FIG. 238 (A4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation indication MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, it is shown that, when the CUM preparation display MTY is up, the chance up state is taken over even if the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 238 (A5) is performed. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 238 (A5) is the same as FIG. 235 (A7), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 238 (B1) to (B5) show an effect following to FIG. 235 (A3), and the chance up meter CMT in a state where the color of the character SBH of the sabothani constituting the MUM in-progress display MTY is red. When switched to, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. The effects shown in FIG. 238 (B1) to FIG. (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 233 (D1) to FIG.

  FIG. 238 (B4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-progress display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of rendering, even if the display is switched from the MUM-in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabothani of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 238 (B5), the SABO-HANI character SBH starts moving from the start point SP in the state of the red display mode.

  238 (C1) to (C5) are the effects following to FIG. 235 (A3), in which the princess character HME is displayed in place of the character SBH of the Sabohani character that constitutes the display MTY in preparation for CUM When the chance up meter CMT is switched, it is shown that the character constituting the chance up meter CMT is also a princess character HME. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 238 (C1) to FIG. (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 234 (A1) to (A3), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 238 (C4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the displayed character continues to be the princess character HME. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 238 (C5), the character making up the chance up meter CMT starts to move from the start point SP while the princess character HME remains.

  It goes without saying that the effect example shown in FIG. 238 is applicable to any of the effect example of the CUM in-provision display MTY and the chance up meter CMT shown in the present specification.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the CUM in-provision display MTY is upgraded, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be more easily upgraded than when not upgraded. In addition, when the CUM preparation indication MTY does not rank up, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be more easily displayed in the default display mode than when the rank is increased. In addition, it is easier for CUM in-provision display MTY and / or chance-up meter CMT to rank up more easily in the case where the big hit symbol aspect is finally displayed in a final display than in the case where the lost symbol aspect is finally displayed. May be configured. For example, a pattern in which (1) CUM preparation display MTY is the default display mode and the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode, and (2) CUM preparation display MTY is the default display mode, the chance up meter A pattern that is a display mode in which CMT is ranked up, (3) A display mode in which a display MTY in preparation for CUM is ranked up, and a pattern in which a chance up meter CMT is a default display mode, (4) A display MTY in progress for CUM It is a display mode which is ranked up, and when a pattern which is a display mode which ranks up the chance up meter CMT is prepared, it is displayed with a pattern of (2) than when it is displayed with a pattern of (1). In the case of a big hit design is easier to be displayed in the form, putter of (3) In person when it is displayed in the pattern of even (4) than when displayed it may easily be determined displayed in big hit symbol manner. Also, the display in the case of the pattern of (3) may be easier to be determined and displayed in the big hit symbol mode than the case of the display in the pattern of (2), and the case of display in the pattern of (3) In the case of being displayed in the pattern of (2), it may be easier to be determined and displayed in the big hit symbol mode than in the case of (2). In addition, the display in the case of the pattern of (1) is easier to be determined and displayed in the lost symbol mode than the case of the display of the pattern of (2), and (3) In the case of being displayed in the pattern of), it may be easier to be determined and displayed in the lost symbol form. In addition, the display in the case of the pattern of (3) may be easier to be determined and displayed in the lost symbol mode than the case of the display of the pattern of (2), and the case of display in the pattern of (3) The display in the case of the pattern of (2) may be easier to be determined and displayed in the lost symbol mode than in the case of (2).

  FIG. 239 is a diagram showing an example of an effect for informing that the chance up meter preparation display is to be displayed.

  FIGS. 239 (A1) to (A8) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is notified in advance by means of a conversation advance notice. Note that FIG. 239 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), so the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 239 (A2) shows that the speech advance notice has started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 239 (A3), the conversation announcement is updated. Specifically, the tous-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a short conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the short characters. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period It is composed of At the timing shown in FIG. 239 (A3), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to the operation is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 239 (A3), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the rabbit, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In this effect example, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is more likely to be displayed when the conversation announcement is given than when the conversation announcement is not given. In addition, the conversational image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, while the display of the same size as FIG. 239 (A2) is displayed), the conversational image CI1 It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A. The effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is then started.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 239 (A4) is shown in the display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (A5) When an assistant presses the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 239 (A6), the character “standby !!” may be displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows . As a result, it is notified that the CUM preparation indication MTY is displayed. In addition, the character display of the notice such as “standby !!” may be displayed on condition that the production button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the production button 136 being operated. In this case, the word "standby !!" may not be displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the user, and in this case, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY may also be displayed. It may be displayed. Furthermore, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, the characters “standby !!” may be displayed even if the operation effective period has elapsed, and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may also be displayed. In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated, there may be a case where a character display other than “standby !!” or a notice is given. It should be noted that only when the character “standby !!” is displayed by the conversation image CI2 of “爺”, the character “standby !!” is displayed even if the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, When characters other than “standby !!” are displayed or a notice is given by the conversation image CI2 of the user, it may be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, the character display and notice of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows may be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated, not based on the character display and the notice in the speech image CI2 of the eyebrows In addition, the character display and the notice of the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows may be displayed even if the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. This is applicable to any of the speech announcements described herein.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (A7), the tounama's conversation image CI1 and the conversation image CI2 of the whistle are erased, the conversation announcement is finished, the first decorative symbol is easily recognized, and the flame effect EF101 is It is displayed so as to cover the entire pending icon display area HIS. After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (A8), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (A7) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A2) to (A3), so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (B1) to (B5) show a state in which the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is notified by the effect display by the notification icon YI.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (B1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L illustrated in FIG. 239 (B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (B1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this presentation example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 180 to 207, and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (B2), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the box is changed to the embodiment d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation in which the advance notice display SH pops up is displayed. The notice display SH of the Sabo Hani that has appeared here is a display for giving a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 239 (B3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and a notice display SH of Sabohani is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (B4), the advance notice display SH of Sabohani is used, the advance notice display SH of Sabohani is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. Ru. After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (B5), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 239 (B4) to (B5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A2) to (A3), so detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 239 (C1) to FIG. 2C (C4) show a state in which the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is notified by the advance notice effect by the navigation character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (C1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (C1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (C1), the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the navigation character YM by the character of the lord is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM performs various effects and notices in accordance with the progress of the game.

  FIG. 239 (C2) shows that the navigation character preview by the navigation character YM is performed. Specifically, when the navigation character preview is started, a balloon with the characters "standby !!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (C3), the navigation character YM is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. The navigation character YM may not be deleted. After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (C4), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 239 (C3) to (C4) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A2) to (A3), and thus detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (D1) to (D7) show a state in which the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is notified by displaying the result of the success of the mini game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (D1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 239 (D1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is started in the effect icon display area DIS. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 239 (D1), a rectangular mini game display area MGD is formed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in this mini game display area MGD, the title of the mini game is “Janken It is displayed that the character "confrontation" and the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are facing each other. That is, it is shown that the mini game of the rock fight match is started in the mini game display area MGD.

  After that, in FIG. 239 (D2), the characters “じ ゃ” are displayed to notify that the result of the mini game is derived.

  FIG. 239 (D3) shows that the character "Pon" is displayed, and that the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are respectively taking a pose of rock-paper-scissors. Specifically, the character of the lord has put out "Choki", and the character of the swordsman has put out "par". Accordingly, the result is derived that the character of the lord has won the character of the swordsman. Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (D4), in the mini game display area MGD, the characters “Yoshimou victory” indicating that the character of the lord has won are displayed, and then as shown in FIG. 239 (D5), While the swordsman character is erased, a balloon with the word "STANDBY!" Is displayed near the character of the lord, and it is predicted that the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 239 (D6), the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. At this time, the mini game display area MGD is displayed, but may be deleted before the flame effect EF101 is started to be displayed, or at a timing when the flame effect EF101 is started to be displayed It may be erased, or may be erased after the flame effect EF 101 is started to be displayed. In addition, the mini game display area MGD may be displayed until the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Note that since the effect shown in FIG. 239 (D7) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A3), the detailed description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 239 (E1) to (E3) show how the result of the mini game failure is displayed. Here, FIG. 239 (E1) is an effect following FIG. 239 (D2).

  FIG. 239 (E1) shows that the character "Pon" is displayed, and that the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman are respectively taking a pose of rock-paper-scissors. In this rendering example, the character of the lord has issued "Choki", and the character of the swordsman has issued "Go". Accordingly, the result is derived that the character of Tonosama defeats the character of swordsman. Then, as shown in FIG. 239 (E2), in the mini game display area MGD, the characters “Yoshimune defeat” are displayed to indicate that the character of Tonosama was defeated, and then, as shown in FIG. 239 (E3), The mini game display area MGD is erased, and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed. Here, although the flame effect EF 101 is displayed, an animation may be performed in which the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. Also, although the character of the lord has been defeated, the flame effect EF 101 may be displayed, and then a CUM-in-provision display MTY may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, these preview effects for giving notice of the appearance of the CUM in-provision display MTY are performed, and finally the big hit symbol aspect is finalized and displayed in comparison with the case where the appearance of the CUM in-provision display MTY is not notified. It is suggested that it is easy to be done.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram showing another example of the effect of giving notice that the chance up meter preparation indication is displayed.

  FIGS. 240 (A1) to (A6) show how an example of the on-hold change animation is being performed. Here, FIG. 240 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A1), so the description will be omitted.

  In FIG. 240 (A2), the No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (b). The "bomber" icon IHI of 4 appears at the right end of the screen, and the on-hold change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the pending change animation, while the icon IHI of "bomber" flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombarded) with a pending icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "bomber" may be paused before the target holding icon. In addition, this pause may be pause of the cassette that disguises the target icon. Further, in the example of the effect, the letter "SP" is attached to the icon IHI of "bomber", and when the display mode of the hold icon changes, the display mode of the hold icon after the change is a preview notice of super reach preview It is suggested that it becomes a display mode which shows. In addition, when the holding change animation by the icon IHI of "bomber" is performed, the bombing on the holding icon may succeed and the display mode of the holding icon may always change, or the bombing on the holding icon fails. The display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  In FIG. 240 (A3), the white bullet icon is fired from the white bomber icon. That is, the icon "IHI" of "bomber" is composed of a white bomber icon and a white bullet icon. The goal here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 240 (A4), the bullet icon overlaps from the front side to the first reserved icon h11. In FIG. 240 (A5), the bullet icon hits the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF112. Then, in FIG. 240 (A6), the effect image EF 112 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the “SP” display mode for previewing that super reach is to be performed. As a result, by previewing and notifying that super reach will be performed, it is also indirectly previewed and notified that the chance up meter CMT and / or CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. In addition, even when super reach is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the 1st pending icon h11 displayed on the display mode of "SP", the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed. In this rendering example, the occurrence of super reach is predicted by changing the display mode of the hold icon, and as a result, the prediction of the chance up meter CMT and the CUM in-provision display MTY is also indirectly performed. However, it is also possible to give an advance read advance notice of the super reach by holding icons or other types of read advance notices, and give an indirect read advance notice of the display of the chance increase meter CMT or the CUM preparation indication MTY, By giving notice of the super reach in the symbol change display being executed by the change icon or other types of the change notices, it is possible to give an indirect notice of the display of the chance up meter CMT or the CUM preparation display MTY. It is also good.

  FIG. 240 (B1) shows a state of giving notice that the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the speech advance notice. FIG. 240 (B1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 239 (A2).

  FIG. 240 (B1) shows that the speech advance notice is updated. Specifically, the message image CI1 of the majesty is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and in this example, the character "STANDBY" together with the character of Sabohani, not the message image CI2 of the eyebrow Is displayed, the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani is displayed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by Sabo Hani's conversation image CIsh, the player can recognize that the special drawing is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the Sabohan conversation image CIsh or the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Also, as shown in FIG. 240 (B1), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the SaboHani's conversation image CIsh, and is more than the case of the Tonosama's conversation than in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In this example of presentation, it is notified that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed by displaying the Sabo Hani conversation image CI1 including the SaboHani characters that constitute the CUM in-provision display MTY. In addition, the conversational image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size when the speech advance notice is updated (for example, while the display of the same size as FIG. 239 (A2) is displayed), the conversational image CI1 It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A. Further, in the example of the effect, when the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani is displayed, the CUM in-provision display MTY may always be displayed, or the CUM in-provision display MTY may not be displayed. It is also good.

  FIGS. 240 (C1) to 240 (C3) show that the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is foretold in the conversation announcement, but the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed. In addition, FIG. 240 (C1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 239 (A2).

  FIG. 240 (C1) shows that the speech advance notice is updated. More specifically, the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a short conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this demonstration example, instead of the presentation button 136a and the display of the remaining time meter, a character display with a question mark attached to the characters "standby" is displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrows, and a CUM preparation display is performed. It suggests that MTY may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 240 (C2), the tounama's conversation image CI1 and the conversation image CI2 of the spear are erased, the conversation notice is finished, the first decorative symbol is easily recognized, and the flame effect EF101 is It is displayed so as to cover the entire pending icon display area HIS. However, in this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 240 (C3), the flame effect EF 101 is thereafter erased, but the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed. That is, it is shown that the CUM preparation indication MTY is not displayed, and that a conversation announcement of a cassette is given. The CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be displayed. In addition, this effect example is also applicable to pre-reading notices, and the pre-reading notice target pending for Gase (as a result, the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed or the chance up meter CMT is not displayed either) or CUM preparation is in progress. It may be executed for each change until the change of the pre-read advance notice target hold displaying the display MTY.

  240 (D1) to (D2) show, for example, the state in which the display during preparation of the timer notice for giving notice that the timer notice is given by the timer notice display TM1 is performed following FIG. 239 (A6). It shows.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (D1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (D1), the hold icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this example of presentation, it is shown that an animation (frame in animation) in which the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen is performed.

  Thereafter, when the frame-in animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 240 (D2), the timer display is not displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the word "STANDBY" is displayed, and a notice that the timer notice is started. The display is being done. In addition, there may be a notice display that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed instead of the notice display of the start of the timer notice. After that, on the timer notice display TM1, the display of "STANDBY" is switched to the display of time, and the timer notice is started. In addition, when a notice that “standby” is displayed is given by another notice display such as a conversation advance notice display, a CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be always displayed, and a CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. An in-provision display may be displayed to the effect that the display is in preparation for other effects such as an in-provision display for the timer announcement effect. The same applies to the effect examples shown in FIG. 240 (E1) to FIG. (E3) and FIG. 240 (F1) to FIG. (F3).

  FIGS. 240 (E1) to 240 (E3) show that the timer preview is started without displaying the CUM in-progress display MTY after the flame effect EF 101 is displayed.

  FIG. 240 (E1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A2), and shows that the flame effect EF 101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS.

  Thereafter, when the flame effect 101 is erased, as shown in FIG. 240 (E2) to FIG. (E3), the timer notice display TMY rises from the lower side from the lower side of the reserved icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY. Shows that the hold icon display area HIS is lifted. At this time, the character "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TMY, and it is shown that the start of the timer notice is suspended. In addition, since the effect example shown to FIG. 240 (E2)-the figure (E3) is the same as that of FIG. 225 (E1)-the figure (E2), description is abbreviate | omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 225 (E3) and thereafter are performed. In this rendering example, it is shown that a flame effect EF101 for previewing the display of the CUM in-provision display MTY is used to foretell the start of the timer preview.

  FIGS. 240 (F1) to (F3) show how the chance button preparation display for notifying that the chance button effect will be made is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (F1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (F1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 240 (F1), the reserved icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “1” and “0”) of the special views 1 and 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this example of effect, it is shown that the light effect EF 113 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS and the button image display animation is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (F2), the button image 136a appears on the back side of the light effect EF 113, and then, as shown in FIG. 240 (F3), the light effect EF 113 is erased and The word "in preparation" is displayed above the button 136a, and it is notified that the chance button effect is started (chance button effect notification). In addition, since the operation effective period has not started, nothing happens even if the effect button 136 is operated. In addition, after the chance button effect advance notice is displayed, the chance button effect may be started, and as a result of operation of the effect button 136 in this chance button effect, the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed. In addition, after the light effect EF 113 is displayed, there may be a case where a display may be performed to notify that the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed.

  FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a chance-up notice is given at a check point not shown in the chance-up meter.

  Figures 241 (A1) to (A7), for example, continue from Figure 222 (A11), and in the presentation by the chance-up meter CMT, the chance-up notice (of sharp swords at a check point not shown on the meter) It shows that the notice is made). In addition, since the rendition performed in the period of FIG. 241 (A1)-the same figure (A2) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 230 (A6)-the same figure (A10), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 241 (A3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2, and is approximately at the midpoint between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2. There is. At this time, the cutting edge of the sword held by the character of the lord is sparkling and shows a sharp sharpness. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice (a sharp-up sword chance-up notice) is being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 241 (A4), the effect EF 114 is displayed at the position where the character SAH of the sabo hani in the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is located, and the animation generating the fourth check point CP4 starts. Is shown. The fourth check point CP4 may be displayed without displaying the effect EF 114. For example, the fourth check point CP4 may be displayed by fade-in animation in which the fourth check point CP4 is faded in. You may Alternatively, the entire checkup signal CMT may be switched to be displayed without displaying a part of the check points increasing, and the fourth check point CP4 may be displayed on the switch after the changeover switch CMT. In addition, prior notification (preliminary notice) may be performed by displaying the fourth check point CP4 or the like before the chance up advance notice of the sharp sword starts.

  In FIG. 241 (A5), a balloon with the words “Chance up, good sword” attached is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohani's character SBH to notify that a chance up notice has been made. The timing when the display of the blade edge of the sword starts to shine may be the same as the timing of the start of display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, or after the display of the blade of the sword starts to shine, A balloon may be displayed, or a display may be displayed in which the cutting edge of the sword is bright after the display of the balloon of the sabohani character SBH is started. In addition, while the advance notice by the display in which the blade edge of the sword shines is performed, the character SBH of Sabohani may stop at the fourth check point CP4, but may not stop.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 241 (A6), the fourth check point CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 241 (A7), the character SAH of the SaboHani starts moving and moves toward the second check point CP2. In this production example, the chance-up notice is given at the check points not shown on the chance-up meter CMT, but the chance-up notice is given only at the check points shown on the chance-up meter CMT. It may be done.

Figures 241 (B1) to (B7) show another presentation pattern in which chances-up notice (preceding display of a sharp sword) is performed at check points not shown on the meter in the presentation by the chance-up meter CMT. Is shown. Figure 241 (B1).
The effects shown in FIG. 241 (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 241 (A1) through FIG. 241 (A3), so the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 241 (B4) shows a state in which a balloon with the word “Chance up, good sword” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH to notify that a chance up notice has been made. ing. In this example of presentation, although notification of the chance advance notice being performed is performed, the display of the check point corresponding to the chance up notice is not performed. In the chance up meter CMT, when a chance up advance notice is given at a point other than the point at which the check point is indicated in advance, the balloon for notifying the occurrence of the chance up may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 241 (B5), after the balloon is eliminated, as shown in FIG. 241 (B6), the character SAH of the SaboHani starts to progress toward the second check point CP2. In this presentation example, the display of the check point is not performed, but the letter "UP" is displayed at the position of the meter corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice is performed, and the reliability of the big hit is improved. Suggests that. Here, the display of “UP” is overlapped by the safari character SBH and is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. In addition, the letter "UP" may not be displayed, for example, it corresponds only when the chance up notice occurs at the timing corresponding to the check point displayed in advance in the meter portion in the chance up meter CMT. The characters "UP" may be displayed at the position.

  FIG. 241 (B7) shows that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the second check point CP2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (9) and thereafter are performed.

  FIG. 242 is a drawing showing the steps of another presentation example using the chance up meter.

  FIG. 242 (A1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 222 (A8). In the effect example shown in FIG. 242 (A1), the display mode of the chance up meter is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 222 (A9). Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa is configured in a green rod shape, and instead of the character SBH of Sabohani, the progress of the current reach effect is schematically notified by the position of the marker MRKa. At this time, the color of the advanced part of the marker MRKa in the gauge part changes from green to white. Further, the advancing speed of the marker MRKa is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. Further, in this presentation example, unlike the chance up meter shown in FIG. 31 (2 f), in the first check point CP <b> 1 a to the third check point CP <b> 3 a, marks of plain white circle display modes are displayed. As shown in FIG. 31 (2f), characters such as a question mark may be added to the mark and displayed. In this case, for example, the occurrence of the chance up notice is displayed by displaying characters such as “question mark”, “!”, “UP” letters / symbols, or notices related to chance up notice or high probability state, etc. It may be suggested that it is easy to do. In addition, in addition to the indication which indicates the possibility of the occurrence of a chance up notice or giving a notice such as “!”, “Question mark”, “heat” etc. in the mark, it is likely to occur a chance up notice. It is also possible to give notice of the ease of the big hit with the suggestion of The start and end points are also indicated by the beginning and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa.

  FIG. 242 (A2) shows that the marker MRKa starts moving from the start point.

  Thereafter, FIG. 242 (A3) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the first check point CP1a. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the first check point CP1a. Then, as shown in FIG. 242 (A4), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. In addition, the mark of the first checkpoint CP1a is erased. The mark of the first check point CP1a may be deleted at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a, or the mark may be deleted before the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a. The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a. Also, the mark may be deleted before the appearance of the Boy's character BOY, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the character BOY of the Boyy appears, or the mark may be deleted after the appearance of the Boy's character BOY. It may be done.

  When the character BOY of Boi appears, as shown in FIG. 242 (A5), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY PASS !!” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKa, and a chance up notice is given. Is notified. It is to be noted that, as shown in FIG. 242 (A5) to FIG. (A6), in the marker MRKa, the character BOY of Boi appears and at least while the balloon is displayed, the marker MRKa stands by at the first check point CP1a.

  Thereafter, FIGS. 242 (A7) to (A8) show that the marker MRKa has started to move. At this time, in place of the display of the mark at the first check point CP1a, the letters "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been increased due to the appearance of the advance notice are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. It is to be noted that the boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A8).

  Thereafter, when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in FIG. 242 (A10), and the button effect is started. . At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the second check point CP2a. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A10), the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is not started, and no effect is performed even if the effect button 136 is operated. Thereafter, the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the state in which the player can operate the effect button 136 can be received.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 242 (A11), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing with the start of the operation effective period, and thereafter, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A12) It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. Then, as shown in FIG. 242 (A13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. That is, in the example of the effect, the gold cut-in image CI3 which may occur at the second check point CP2a is not displayed, and it is shown that the chance-up notice has not occurred.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 242 (A13), the mark of the second check point CP2a is erased, but the character of "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion. Here, a display may be made to notify that a chance-up advance has not occurred, or may not be displayed. The mark of the second check point CP2a may be deleted at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a, or the mark may be deleted before the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the second checkpoint CP2a. Further, the mark may be deleted before the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is deleted after the button image 136a is displayed. May be In addition, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 is operated. Also, the mark may be deleted before the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. After that, the mark may be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 242 (A14), the marker MRKa starts moving from the second check point CP2a, and as shown in FIG. 242 (A15), when the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a, At 242 (A16), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va as the chance-up notice, and it is informed that the notice by the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, the player can be operated to receive the operation of the effect button 136. After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (A17), in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has started to move and is located in front of the final point. Further, in the remaining time display meter MT, it is shown that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Note that the marker MRKa may be stopped at the third check point CP3a until the player operates the effect button 136 or the operation valid period elapses. In this example of presentation, since the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is not displayed, at the third check point CP3a in the chance up meter CMTa, the mark is erased and the character of "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion .

  After that, the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (A18), but the operation of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) is not performed, and the operation shown in FIG. As shown, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. The chance up meter CMTa also shows that the marker MRKa has reached the final point GP. The mark of the third checkpoint CP3a may be deleted at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a, or the mark may be deleted before the marker MRKa reaches the third checkpoint CP3a. The mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. Further, the mark may be deleted before the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark is deleted after the button image 136a is displayed. May be In addition, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 is operated. Also, the mark may be deleted before the middle symbol is displayed, or the mark may be deleted at the timing when the middle symbol is displayed, or even if the mark is deleted after the middle symbol is displayed. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (A20), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily displayed thinner than the normal density. Also, in the same figure, a scene in which the majesty falls is displayed. In FIG. 242 (A21), all the decoration symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in the normal density. After that, for example, effects shown in FIG. 222 (B4) to FIG. (B8) are performed. Note that, in this example of presentation, no chance up notice occurs at the third check point CP3a, the button image 136a is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated, but it is shown that the result of the loss is derived However, in this effect example, the effect button 136 may be operated to operate various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23), and the result of the big hit may be derived. In addition, when no advance notice of chance increase occurs at the third check point CP3a, it may indicate that a loss has been determined.

  FIG. 242 (B1) to FIG. (B6) show another effect pattern that continues from FIG. 242 (A1). The effect shown in FIG. 242 (B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 242 (A2), and after the effect shown in FIG. 242 (B1) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. The effects shown before FIG. 242 (A2) to the same figure (A9) are performed.

  FIG. 242 (B2) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the second check point CP2a and the button effect is started. Moreover, in this demonstration example, the "super" part of the display of the characters of "super hot !!!" is displayed on the part corresponding to the second check point CP2a of the gauge part in the chance up meter CMTa It is shown. That is, in this demonstration example, in the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa, in addition to the indication of "UP" indicating that the chance up notice is performed, the indication of the change notice ("super !!!" is displayed It is shown that) may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 242 (A9) to FIG. (A13) are performed. During this time, the word "severely !!!!" is continuously displayed in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa, and as the gauge changes from green to white in accordance with the progress of the marker MRKa, "severely! The letters "!" Will gradually appear. After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (B3), the characters of "super heat !!!" come to completely appear. By looking at this, the player may be able to further improve the expectation for becoming a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 231 (A19) to FIG. (A23) are performed. At this time, it goes without saying that the chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 242 (B3) is displayed in place of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 231 (A19). In the case where a chance-up notice occurs in FIG. 231 (B2), a part or all of the characters of "super heat !!!" overlap due to the display of "UP" indicating that the chance-up notice is performed. It may be done.

  Then, when the effect lever 136V is operated by the player in the lever effect, as shown in FIG. 242 (B4), the first large-screen behavior character 224GA to the fourth large-surface behavior character 224Gd and the one-and-two-box character 224H are activated. Light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and an effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTa is not displayed but may be displayed.

  After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first to fourth large-screen behavior characters 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-man box character 224H are returned to their initial positions, and the effect image is faded out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. Although the chance up meter CMT is also faded in with the fade in of the animation display of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the fade in of the animation display of the due battle scene is completed. . Note that this operation is performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to (38) to (44) of FIG.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 242 (B5) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has reached the final point. Further, in the example of the effect, since the chance-up notice that the lever image 136Va is displayed at the third check point CP3a has occurred, the characters “UP” are displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. In this presentation example, it is shown that the entire volume displayed in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa is made visible for the first time at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (B5). As shown in FIG. 242 (B5), the display in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa may be erased at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene is resumed, or the chance up meter CMTa itself may be erased. The same applies to the case where the result of loss is derived.

  After that, in FIG. 242 (B6), the main character of the main character wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that it becomes a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A13) to FIG. (A15) are performed.

  FIG. 243 is a diagram showing another pattern of presentation using the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 243A1 to A6 show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 242B1 to B6.

  FIG. 243 (A1) shows that the marker MRKa starts moving from the start point. In this presentation example, unlike the presentation example shown in FIG. 242 (B1), it is shown that the progressed part of the marker MRKa in the gauge part is changing from green to white, not to rainbow. This rainbow display is a notice display of the big hit decision, and it is informed that the big hit decision is made by changing the gauge part to rainbow color. In this example of rendering, the advanced part of the marker MRKa in the gauge shows an example changing from green to iridescent, but may change to another color, and the changing color changes the reliability of the big hit You may do it. For example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa may be prevented from changing from green to green so that the big hit design may be more easily displayed than when changing to white, or from green to red or gold. May be Also, a pattern may appear on the advanced part of the marker MRKa. Moreover, in this example of presentation, a big hit is made in the display mode of the progressed part of the marker MRKa, but, for example, a notice regarding the chance up is given, such as suggesting the ease of occurrence May be performed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 243 (A2) to FIG. 243 (A6) are performed. In the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 243 (A2) to (A6), the color of the advanced part of the marker MRKa is different, and the character of "super heat !!!" is displayed at the second check point CP2a. Since this example is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 242 (B2) to FIG. (B6) except for the point that it is not included, the description will be omitted.

  FIGS. 243 (B1) to (B16) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A1) to (A15), and in the chance up meter CMTc, the timing when the chance up notice occurs It does not indicate clearly, but it shows a state that the number of occurrence is reported.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 243 (B1) is, for example, the effect following FIG. 222 (A2), and corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A3). In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYa is different from the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3), and the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 243 (B1) is FIG. 222 (A3) It extends above the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 1 and is also disposed above the gauge, and an information display area capable of displaying character information is formed below. In this information display area, the number of times a chance-up notice occurs or a big hit notice may be given. After that, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A3) to FIG. (A7) are performed.

  FIG. 243 (B2) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 222 (A8). The effect shown in FIG. 243 (B2) is the same as FIG. 222 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTYa is different, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 243 (B3) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this example of presentation, the check point is not displayed on the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTc, and it is difficult to recognize the timing at which the chance up advance notice occurs and the number of times it may occur. Further, the chance up meter CMTc also extends upward as in the case of the display MTMa in preparation for CUM, and the gauge is also disposed upward, and an information display area is formed below the gauge.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 243 (B4), the letters “3 more places” are displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the occurrence timing of the chance up notice is not clear, but 3 chances up It is informed that there is a possibility that a notice may be made. Also, FIG. 243 (B4) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani, which functions as a cursor, has started moving. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. This balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 243 (B5).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 243 (B6), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy.

  Then, in FIG. 243 (B7), a balloon with the character of “chance up BOY passing !!” is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan's character SBH, and it is notified that a chance up notice has been made. That is, the player may be able to understand that this timing is the first check point. In addition, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display is changed to the characters “two more places”, and it is informed that there is a possibility that the chance up notice may occur twice more. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the appearance of the Boy's character BOY, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing of the appearance of the Boy's character BOY. The display of may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the appearance of the character BOY of Boye. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the balloon display of the sabothan character SBH is displayed, or the information display is performed at the timing when the balloon display of the sabothan character SBH is displayed. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the area may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the balloon display of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 243 (B8), the first check point CP1 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice occurs, and the reliability of the big hit is raised by the appearance of the notice. The word "UP" is displayed above it to indicate that a chance-up notice has occurred. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is partially overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be less visible than in the non-overlapped state. Also, the contents of the generated notice may be displayed.

  FIG. 243 (B9) shows an effect corresponding to FIG. 231 (A19). In addition, in this production example, although not particularly illustrated, a gold cut-in image CI3 which is a second chance-up notice is displayed in the above-described manner, and a position corresponding to the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 The second checkpoint CP2 and the letters “UP” marked in red are displayed, and the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc is also changed to “one more place” ing.

  After that, in FIG. 243 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the word “chance up lever” attached is displayed near the sabo hani character SBH, and chance up notice by the lever effect is started. It is reported that At this time, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is changed to “0 more places”, and it is informed that there is no possibility of occurrence of further chance up notice. There is. In addition, there may be a case where a chance-up notice may occur after “0 more places” is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the lever image 136Va is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing when the lever image 136Va is displayed. May be changed, or after the lever image 136Va is displayed, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 243 (B11), in addition to the lever image 136Va, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and the lever effect is started. At this time, the third check point CP3 marked in red is displayed at the position corresponding to the timing when the chance-up notice occurs, and "UP" indicates that the jackpot's reliability has been raised by the appearance of the notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance up notice. At this time, the display of the number of times of occurrence of the chance-up notice "other 0 places" displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is erased. Note that the display may be continued without erasing the display of “0 more places”. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (B11), the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V has not yet started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the player can receive the operation of the effect lever 136V.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 243 (B12) shows that the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, the player at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (B13) When the production lever 136V is operated, as shown in FIG. 243 (B14), the first large-screen behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large-area behavior article 224Gd and the one-sided box article 224H are activated to emit light from the light guide plate IL, An effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is informed that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTc is not displayed but may be displayed.

  After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the first to fourth large-screen behavior characters 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd and the one-man box character 224H are returned to their initial positions, and the effect image is faded out in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted is resumed while being faded in. This operation is performed, for example, in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 17 (38) to FIG. (44).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 243 (B15) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and resumed. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the hostile swordsman has an appearance of dying out, and appears to be defeated even now. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SAH of the SaboHani reaches the final point GP, and the placard indicates the letter “V” indicating that the jackpot will be made. Also, in the information display area, "Congratulations!" Is displayed, and it is congratulated that the big hit will be derived. In addition, it is not necessary to display "Congratulations!". In addition, when the result of the loss is derived, for example, a character such as "sorry" may be displayed to display a display for comforting the player, and no display may be performed on the information display area. May be Also, for example, when performing a resurrection effect as shown in FIG. 237 (C1) to the same figure (C6), a display such as “!!!” is displayed in the information display area, and there is a possibility that the resurrection effect will be performed. You may suggest something.

  After that, in FIG. 243 (B16), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy role, and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A13) to FIG. (A15) are performed.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 243.

  Figures 244 (A1) to (A3) show that the number of occurrences of a chance up notice is displayed in the information display area in the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in Figure 243 (B1) to the figure (B2) An example is shown. Specifically, in the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in FIG. 244 (A1), the characters “three more places” are displayed in the information display area provided below the gauge portion, and the chance up meter CMTc is used. It has been reported that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur three times in the stage effect. Note that the number of times of notification in the information display area and the number of occurrences of the chance-up advance notice may always coincide or may not coincide with each other. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 244 (A2) to FIG. (A3) are performed. In addition, the effects performed in the period shown in FIG. 244 (A1) to FIG. (A3) are the same as those in FIG. 222 (A3) to FIG. (A8) except that the display mode of chance increase meter CMTc is different. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  According to this presentation example, for example, when the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs is fixed for each super reach, it may be possible to estimate the type of super reach to be developed. Also, for example, in the case where the number of times the chance-up notice occurs is displayed as a different number depending on the reliability of the big hit, it is possible to estimate the reliability of the big hit against symbol variation that causes super reach. There is a possibility.

  The effect shown in FIG. 244 (B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 243 (B4). In FIG. 244 (B1), in addition to the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the check points CP1 to CP3 are displayed, and the occurrence timing of the chance up notice is notified. There is. As described above, part or all of the timing at which the chance-up notice occurs may be notified by the chance-up meter CMTc, and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be notified. Instead of the display shown in FIG. 243 (B4), a display as shown in FIG. 244 (B1) may be performed.

  Figures 244 (C1) to (C4) show that in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the number of occurrences of the chance up advance notice is not displayed, and it is predicted that the chance up advance notice may occur. It shows the situation. In this case, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be displayed.

  In FIG. 244 (C1), it is shown that the Sabohan character SBH functioning as a cursor has started to move. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. This balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 244 (C2). In this presentation example, the presentation is different from the presentation shown in FIGS. 243 (B4) to (B5), and the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up advance notice is not performed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc.

  In FIG. 244 (C3), in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, a display with a question mark attached along with “Anything BOY has appeared” is displayed, and the character COY of Boye is at the timing corresponding to the first check point CP1. It is informed that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur due to the appearance of. That is, in this example of presentation, although the timing is not clear, it is indicated that it is notified that there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur. In addition, it may be made to notify only that there is a possibility that the chance up notice may occur, without notifying the contents of the chance up notice that occurs particularly.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 244 (C4), it is shown that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. In addition, even when the display of "Boo will appear soon" is displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the character BOY of Booui is not displayed, and there may be a case where a notice of a case where a chance up notice is not generated is performed. It is also good. In addition, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a different kind of chance-up notice may occur from the chance-up notice due to the appearance of the boy's character BOY at the timing when the boy's character BOY is displayed. In the case, for example, the jackpot may be finalized, or there may be a case where it is not for the chance to be notified, but it may be a forerunner of the cassette.

  In FIG. 244 (C5), a balloon with the word “CHANCH UP BOY !!” appended is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH to notify that a chance up advance notice has been made. At this time, the characters “Boothing BOY has appeared” in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc are erased. The display in the information display area may be deleted before the Boy's character BOY is displayed, or may be deleted at the timing when the Boy's character BOY is displayed, or the Boy's character BOY is displayed. It may be erased later. In addition, the display in the information display area may be deleted before the balloon of the safari character SBH is displayed, may be deleted at the timing when the balloon is displayed, or is deleted after the balloon is displayed. It may be done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 243 (B8), the display of the first check point CP1 or the display of “UP” may be performed to display the history of the occurrence of the chance-up advance notice. In addition, while a part or all of the timing which a chance up notice generate | occur | produces is alert | reported by the chance up meter CMTc, before the chance up advance notice corresponding to the timing alert | reported by the chance up meter CMTc is performed, As such, a display may be made to notify that a chance-up notice such as “Boy will appear soon” will occur in the information display area of the chance-up meter CMTc. That is, when the check point is displayed, "Boy will appear soon" may be displayed before the timing at which the character BOY of the boy is displayed.

  FIGS. 244 (D1) to (D5) show another effect pattern of effects following FIG. 243 (B8), informing that the number of occurrences of the chance-up advance notice increases in the effect by the chance-up meter CMTc It shows how the production is being performed. In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 244 (D1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 243 (B8), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  After that, FIG. 244 (D2) shows that the effect (smoke effect EF115) generating smoke is displayed in front of the character SBH of Sabohan who travels toward the final point GP.

  After that, when the smoke effect EF 115 is erased, as shown in FIG. 244 (D3), the character CHM of Princess Chibi appears, and as shown in FIG. 244 (D4), “near the character CHM of Princess Chibi” A balloon with the text “1 UP!” Is displayed, and it is informed that the number of times the chance-up notice occurs may increase by one. In addition, while the production which increases the occurrence frequency of the chance up notice by Chibi princess character CHM is performed, the character SBH of Sabohani is stopped and displayed, but the occurrence frequency of the chance up notice by Chibi princess character CHM It may be progressing while the effect of increasing the is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 244 (D5), when Chibi Princess character CHM is erased, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice displayed in the information display area of chance-up meter CMTc indicates “Two more places It changes to "three more places" from "", and it is alert | reported that a chance up notice may occur three more times. Note that the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the balloon of the character CHM "1 UP!" Of the character CHM is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice at the timing when the balloon is displayed. The display may be updated, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the balloon is displayed. In addition, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the character CHM of Chibi princess is deleted, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated at the timing when the character CHM of Chibi Princess is erased. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated after the character CHM of Chibi princess is deleted. In addition, since the character SBH of Sabohani is stopped and displayed while the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice by the character CHM of Princess Chibi is being displayed, the character SBH of the Sabohani is compared with the progress of the actual super reach. Since the position of is behind and is delayed, then the character SBH of Sabohani accelerates and effects showing that it is in a hurry or warping the character SBH of Sabohani to cope with the progress of the actual super reach For example, the display position may be changed to the desired position, or the display end of the display position of the Sabohani character SBH may be aligned, or the display end of the display position of the Sabohani character SBH may not be adjusted.

  In this example of rendering, the character CHM of Princess Chibi, who performs only renderings related to the chance up meter CMTc, is made to appear to increase the number of occurrences of the chance up notice, but the other components of the chance up meter CMTc By using an element (e.g. Sabohani character SBH), for example, an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be performed in the same manner as the rank-up effect described above. In addition, other elements that do not constitute the chance up meter CMTc may be configured to increase the number of occurrences of the chance up notice, for example, to increase the number of occurrences of the chance up notice by the timer notice described above. Alternatively, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be increased by the effect of the notice icon YI, or the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be increased by the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. The number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the effect using the navigation character YM shown in C1). In addition, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice to be increased is not limited to one, but may be two or more, and for example, "0UP!" It may be done. This is applicable also when the chance point is displayed.

  FIG. 245 is a view showing another effect pattern of effects using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 243.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 245 (A1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L illustrated in FIG. 245 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. In FIG. 245 (A1), the CUM in-provision display MTYa shown in FIG. 243 (B1) is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the reserved icon display area HIS, which is considered to be difficult to view. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (A1), the suspension of the special view 1 is one, and in the second suspension number display, “1” and “0” are displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is No. 1 in FIG. It is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this presentation example, for example, the notice icon YI appears in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 180 to 207, and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Further, in the example of the effect, the characters “meter × 1” are displayed in the information display area of the CUM in-provision display MTYa, and it is predicted that the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is performed once.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 245 (A2), the notice icon YI of the embodiment a which is the display mode in which the box is closed is used, and the box changes to the embodiment d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. An animation that pops up a preview of "UP" to announce the is displayed. The notice display of "UP" that has appeared here is a display for giving notice of an increase in the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc. In addition, before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates and the like, etc.) may be performed to give advance notice that the box is opened. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may actually be opened or may not be opened.

  In FIG. 245 (A3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display of "UP" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 245 (A4), the promotion animation using the preview display of “UP” is started. In FIG. 245 (A4), after the notice display of “UP” changes to the light ball EF 116 in the right symbol display area 208c, it flies away in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa and the information display area It is shown that a portion of “1” indicating the number of times in “meter × 1” is in collision. At this time, the entire CUM preparation display MTYa may be in a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the portion of “1” in “meter × 1” is an aspect that is difficult to visually recognize. In this production example, the number of developments of the rendering using the chance up meter CMTc may increase without the promotion animation being performed, or the number of developments of the rendering using the chance up meter CMTc is performed with the promotion animation There may be a case where there is an increase, and there may be a case where the number of developments of presentation using the chance up meter CMTc increases without the promotion animation being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 245 (A5), the display of “meter × 1” in the information display area becomes “meter × 2”, and the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is developed once and can be performed twice It is informed that there is sex. After that, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A3) to FIG. (A7) are performed.

  The effect shown in FIG. 245 (A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 243 (B2), and the contents of the effect are the same except that the display in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is different, so I omit it.

  FIG. 245 (A7) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this presentation example, even if the CUM in-provision display MTYa is switched to the chance up meter CMTc, the number of developments of the presentation using the chance up meter CMTc is still displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc. Also, in FIG. 245 (A7), at the timing when the display switches from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, the display of “meter × 2” in the information display area becomes “meter × 1” and the chance up meter CMTc It is shown that the first presentation used was started. It should be noted that the display of "meter x 2" in the information display area may be switched to "meter x 1" before the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, or the CUM in-provision display MTYa is up After the display is switched to the meter CMTc, the display of “meter × 2” in the information display area may be switched to “meter × 1”. Further, in this presentation example, similarly to the presentation shown in FIG. 222 (A9), the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are displayed, and the displayed number of times and the timing of display of the chance-up notice are shown. ing.

  FIG. 245 (A8) shows that the Sabohan character SBH functioning as a cursor has started to move. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. Note that the balloon of "START !!" may not be displayed. In addition, "START !!" may or may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 245 (A9), the display of the placard at the final point GP is displayed as a "question mark", and when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GP, the presentation using the chance up meter CMTc can develop It suggests that there is sex. After that, for example, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG. (16) are performed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 245 (A10), the same effect as that of FIG. 29 (17) is performed. The display of placards at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMTc is still the display of the "question mark".

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 245 (A11), not the lever image 136Va, but the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the lever effect as a notice of chance increase is not started The situation is shown. Therefore, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 245 (A10) to (A12), the character SBH of Sabohani passes the third check point CP3 as it is, and the third check point Neither the marking in CP3 nor the display of the character of "UP" is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 245 (A11), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not yet started. The operation valid period of the effect button 136 is then started, and the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 245 (A12) shows that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMTc, Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (A13) within the operation effective period, the first ornamental symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Along with the line saying "I wonder if the swordsman of the game has dropped ...", it will be displayed that the victory and defeat will not be decided. In addition, in the chance up meter CMTc, the placard at the final point GP is displayed with the character "develop", and it is informed that the reach effect is developed. Along with this, it is suggested that the presentation by the chance up meter CMTc develops and the second presentation is started.

  After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the Tonosama character shown in FIG. 245 (A15), as shown in FIG. 245 (A16), there is an effect that the panda character appears as a helper in Kagoshima reach. Is started. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and travels toward the start point SP. At this time, it is assumed that the effect by the chance up meter CMTc is developed and the second effect is performed, and the display of “meter × 1” in the information display area is changed to “meter × 0”. The display in the information display area may change before the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, or the display in the information display area may change at the timing when the cut-in image CI4 is displayed. The display in the information display area may change after the image CI4 is displayed. In addition, the display in the information display area may change before the effect of the panda character appears as a helper, or the information display area may occur at the timing when the effect of the panda character appears as a helper starts The display in may change, or the display in the information display area may change after the effect that the panda character appears as a helper is started. Further, the display of “meter × 1” may be deleted without changing the display to “meter × 0”.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 245 (A16) to (A18), the display is changed in which the chance up meter CMTc is changed while being overlapped by the SABOHANI character SBH while the SABOHANI character SBH is heading toward the start point SP. Do. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245 (A17), for example, a part of the chance up meter CMT after the change appears and the sixth check point CP6 appears due to the movement of the character SAH of Sabohani, and the sixth check point CP6 appears, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears.

  In FIG. 245 (A18), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is located again at the start point SP. At this time, the fifth check point CP5 and the sixth check point CP6 are displayed before the change in the chance up meter CMTc (the state in which the red marking is not attached and the letter “UP” is not displayed either) It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMTc, the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started.

  After that, FIG. 245 (A19) shows that it has developed into an SP swordsman reach. The SP Ken-Age Reach is a reach where the Ken-Achi reach develops and shifts, and it is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when it does not develop from a Ken-A-Kai reach to an SP-Ken-Age reach. In SP Ken-Age Reach, as shown in Figure 245 (A19), it is the same as the pre-developed Ken-Awa reach in that the main character of the main character and the enemy of the main character are opposed to each other, but follows the panda as a helper of the main character. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Furthermore, in FIG. 245 (A19), a chance-up notice showing that a copanda cheering party KPD 48 composed of three copanda characters is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fifth check point CP5. It is reported that the credibility against the big hit of the SP Kensetsu reach has been dramatically increased. The copanda cheering party KPD 48 may always appear in the SP swordswoman reach, or may not appear. After that, for example, the effects are performed in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 30 (31 b) to FIG. (34 b), and thereafter, for example, when the effect lever 136 V is operated, FIG. An effect is performed in the above-described manner as shown in FIG. 28 and it is informed that a big hit will be made. In addition, it may be notified that it becomes a loss.

  In this example, CUM is being prepared to perform an increase in the number of times of development using the chance up meter CMTc by an element different from the components of the CUM in-provision display MTYa and the chance up meter CMTc. An effect of increasing the number of times of development of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc may be performed using the display MTYa or a component of the chance up meter CMTc (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani). Alternatively, the number of times the chance up meter is displayed may be stocked and displayed. Also, in this example, the number of displayed chance up meters CMTc corresponds to the number of times the super reach is developed, but the chance up meters CMTc are displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, or the super reach It can be applied to the case where there are a plurality of scenes in which the chance up meter CMTc is started to be displayed, such as being displayed when transitioning to. In addition, when execution of the performance by the chance up meter is stocked, there may be a case where it is used all or only a case where it is used partially, or when execution of the performance by chance up meter is stocked by multiple In addition, it may be configured to be completely used.

  FIG. 246 shows, in a step-by-step manner, an example of the advance notice using the chance-up meter in-progress display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (A1), the first decorative symbol performs high-speed fluctuation in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The holding frame UI includes a holding icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and a pedestal hs0 is disposed in the variation icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged above the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is disposed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (A1), the holding icon of the special view 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 is No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the same as that of No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 246 (A2) to FIG. 246 (A5) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 246 (A2) to the same figure (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 223 (C2) to the same figure (C5) except that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is different, I omit explanation. In addition, as shown in FIG. 223 (D4) to FIG. (D5), the CUM in-provision display MTY may be displayed also during temporary stop display and stop display of a symbol, or during temporary stop display of a symbol and stop There may be both the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and the case where it is not displayed during the display. The same applies to the cases shown in FIG. 246 (A10) to FIG. 246 (A11). This is also applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

  In FIG. 246 (A6), the suspension (first suspension) of the special view 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special view display device 212 is started. In addition, the move animation of the reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first reserve icon h11 (the reserve icon which is the target of the symbol variation this time) arranged in the first stage hs1 The second holding icon h12 disposed on the second stage hs2 is moved to the first stage hs1 and displayed as a first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 246 (A7) to FIG. 246 (A8) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 246 (A7) to the same figure (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 223 (C6) to the same figure (C7) except that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is different, I omit explanation.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 246 (A9), the light effect EF 117 is displayed at the position corresponding to the second check point CP2, and it is shown that the checkpoint appearance animation is being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (A10), the light effect EF 117 disappears, and the second check point CP2 appears. As described above, in this presentation example, it is shown that a check point for notifying of a timing at which a chance-up notice occurs is displayed while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. In this production example, only some of the check points (second check point CP2) among the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, but the chance up meter All the check points (the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3) of the check points displayed on the CMT may be displayed on the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY. Further, in this example of rendering, the component (gauge portion) of the CUM in-provision display MTY is used to effect that a check point appears, but an element other than the CUM in-provision display MTY (for example, the above The check point may be made to appear by the effect using the notice item YI, the mini game, the timer notice, etc.).

  After that, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 246 (A11), it is determined by combining the decorative symbols of the "department 6-decoration 4-decoration 1" Is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon is erased. In addition, in this demonstration example, the CUM in-provision display MTY is not displayed during the final display of the decorative symbol, but the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed while the decorative symbol is in the final display. May be

  After that, the suspension (first suspension) of Special Figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first Special Figure display device 212 is started, the procedure shown in FIG. 246 (A2) After the flame effect EF101 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 246 (A12), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed again. At this time, the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed in the display mode in the previous symbol variation display, that is, the mode in which the second check point CP2 is displayed. After that, for example, after effects similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (A4) to (A7) are performed, the effects shown in FIG. 246 (A13) are performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 246 (A13) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 222 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different, so the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 246 (A14) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the first check point CP1 and the third check point CP3 which have been hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY appear. It is to be noted that an effect that appears newly at this timing may also be performed at a check point (second check point CP2) that has already appeared in the CUM-in-provision display MTY. In addition, before the display switches from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, a check point hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear, or the chance is raised from the CUM preparation display MTY. A check point which has been made non-display in the CUM preparing display MTY may appear at the timing when the display switches to the meter CMT, or CUM after the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. A checkpoint that has been hidden in the preparation display MTY may appear. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 246 (A15) to FIG. 246 (A16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 246 (A15) to FIG. 246 (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 222 (A10) to FIG.

  As described above, in this effect example, continuous announcements in which the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed are performed over a plurality of times of symbol variation display, and CUM in-progress display MTY is in progress during execution of the continuous announcement by the CUM in-provision display MTY. The effect of making the check point appear is performed, but the continuous announcement by CUM in-provision display MTY is not performed, and the effect that CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed is performed only in the symbol variation display under execution. It is also good. In this case, during the execution of the pseudo-series effect, as described above, an effect may be performed in which a check point appears on the CUM in-provision display MTY. Further, in addition to the effect of appearing check points in the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY, there may be a case where an effect of deleting the appearing check points may be performed. In addition, in the effect where the check point appears, the chance-up notice corresponding to the appeared check point may be always performed, or the case where the chance-up notice corresponding to the appeared check point is not performed is performed There may be. Also, all checkpoints may appear. This is the effect example shown in FIG. 225 (F1), and the effect example shown in FIG. 226 (A1) to FIG. (A3), FIG. (B3), FIG. (C1), and FIG. (D1). Is also applicable.

  FIG. 247 is a diagram for explaining another display pattern of the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 247 (A1) to (A15) show another example of presentation following FIG. 222 (A7), in which the marker MRKb is displayed as a cursor in addition to the character SBH of the sabo hani on the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

  FIG. 247 (A1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A7), and shows a state of transition to super reach effect. In the lower left portion of the display screen, a CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed.

  Thereafter, FIG. 247 (A2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this rendering example, a marker MRKb formed of an inverted triangle is also displayed at the foot of the character SAH of the character SAH in addition to the character SBH of the character SaboHani as a cursor. That is, it is shown that the progress of the super reach is displayed by two cursors. Although the character SBH of Sabohani is partially overlapped with the marker MRKb, it may be displayed at a position where the marker MRKb does not overlap with the character SBH of Sabohani (for example, below the gauge). In this rendering example, the marker MRKb moves in synchronization with Sabohan's character SBH. Thereafter, in the period shown in FIG. 247 (A2) to FIG. (A15), for example, the same effects as the effects shown in FIG. In addition, the effects performed in the period shown in FIG. 247 (A2) to FIG. 2 (A15) are the same as FIG. The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the above.

  In this example of rendering, the marker MRKb and the character SBH of Sabohani move in synchronization, for example, an animation in which the character SBH of Sabohani stands by at a checkpoint during execution of a button effect or a lever effect (for example, While an animation indicating a non-progressing state is being performed by stepping or the like, the marker MRKb may be made to advance, and there may be a period in which the marker MRKb and the sabothani character SBH do not move synchronously. Alternatively, one of the marker MRKb and the SABOHANI character SBH may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the other may be displayed at a position not corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect. In addition, the marker MRKb may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach production, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be warped to a check point to give notice of the occurrence of a chance up notice corresponding to the warped check point. . Also, if a chance up advance notice does not occur at a certain check point, then the Sabohani character SBH warps to a checkpoint at a position corresponding to the chance up advance notice that did not occur, and corresponds to the check point It may be made to indicate that the jackpot's reliability has been raised by assuming that the chance-up notice has occurred. Further, in this example of presentation, an example of the case of a big hit has been described, but also in the case of a loss, the marker MRKb can be displayed in the same manner. In this case, for example, there may be a case where the resurrection effect starts without reaching the marker MRKb and / or Sabohani character SBH final point GP. In this example, the sabotary character SBH is displayed as the CUM in-provision display MTY and the marker MRK is not displayed, but the marker MRK is displayed while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, and the sabothani character is displayed. The SBH may not be displayed, and the Sabohan character SBH and the marker MRK may be displayed while the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed. Further, (1) a pattern in which only the sabotary character SBH is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, (2) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and (3) a sabothani in the CUM preparation display MTY. In the case where there is a pattern in which both the character SBH and the marker MRK are displayed, the case of (1) may be present, the case of (2) may be present, or the case of (3). It is also good. Also, there may be a case of (1) or a case of (3). Also, there may be the case of (1) or the case of (2).

  FIGS. 247 (B1) to (B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 227 (A7).

  FIGS. 247 (B1) to (B2) are, for example, effects subsequent to FIG. 222 (A7), and illustrate a state of transition to super reach effects. In the lower left portion of the display screen, a CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed.

  Thereafter, FIG. 247 (B3) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this presentation example, the configuration of the gauge in the chance up meter CMT is different from that shown in FIG. 222 (A9). Specifically, only one check point (second check point CP2) is displayed on the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 247 (B3), and the display mode of the final point GPa is also different. That is, in this presentation example, the final point GPa does not correspond to the timing at which the result of the symbol variation display is derived, and the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is started and ended during the super reach presentation. There is. In other words, in this presentation example, it can be said that there is shown an example in which the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is performed informing the timing at which the chance up advance notice is given only for a certain period during the super reach presentation.

  FIG. 247 (B4) shows that the Sabohan character SBH functioning as a cursor has started to move. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has been started. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that presentation by the chance up meter CMT is performed in a period from the start to the end of the button presentation. Note that, in this effect example, the period from the start point SP to the second check point CP2 corresponds to the operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 136 is received. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (B4), the operation valid period has not yet started, and the operation valid period is then started.

  Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 247 (B5) shows that the operation effective period is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is moved to the position corresponding to the time after the start of the operation effective period.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (B6), as shown in FIG. 247 (B7), the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. Is displayed. At this time, the Sabohan character SBH accelerates to the second check point CP2 regardless of the display position. The second check point CP2 may be warped. Although the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed, it may not be displayed. Further, in the example of the effect, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the operation effective period, but for example, the character SBH of Sabohani advances on the gauge, and the check point ( For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing of reaching the second check point CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated at timing deviated from the timing of reaching the check point In this case, the gold cut-in image CI3 may not be displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (B8), a balloon with the word “chance up gold cut-in” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. It is informed that a notice has been made by the display of an image. Note that while the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second check point CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, it may not be stopped. Further, in this presentation example, the timing at which the sabohani character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 may be the same as the timing at which the button presentation is started, and the sabohani character SBH may be used as the second check point CP2. After reaching the button effect may be started, or after the button effect is started, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2. Further, in this example of presentation, the second check point CP2 indicates the point at which the chance-up notice occurs, but the final point GPa may indicate the point at which the chance-up notice occurs. In that case, the final point GPa may not be reached, and when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the final point GPa, a chance up notice occurs, and the SABOHANI character SBH does not reach the final point GPa. , You may not notice the chance up. Alternatively, the final point GPa may be reached without fail. In this case, a chance-up notice may occur whenever the Sabohan character SBH reaches the final point GPa, or even when the final point GPa is reached. There may be cases where no chance up notice occurs.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 247 (B9), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the appearance of the advance notice indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased. A letter is displayed above it, indicating the history of the occurrence of a notice. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapped state.

  After that, the character SBH of Sabohan starts to move, and FIG. 247 (B10) shows that it has reached the final point GPa. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (B11), the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the super reach effect is continuously performed.

  In this presentation example, the presentation with the chance up meter CMT is performed in a part of the super reach period, but it is not in a period other than the super reach (for example, a part period in the normal reach or a reach state You may make it carry out in the one part period in a symbol change display.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram for explaining an example of presentation of a chance up meter performed in another super reach.

  FIGS. 248 (A1) to (A16) are, for example, another presentation example following FIG. 16 (24), and a princess reach presentation different from the sword strike as an example of the above-mentioned super reach is performed. It shows how it is.

  FIG. 248 (A1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 16 (24), which shows transition to super reach.

  In FIG. 248 (A2), it is shown that the princess reach which is an example of the super reach is started. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the title display of "May be there ...", which is a song sung by the princess character, is performed, and the first decorative symbol is in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is shown moving to the department.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 258 (A3), a princess character appears and dances are shown, and a band-like lyric display area is slightly below the center of the display screen so as to overlap with the front side of the princess character. LYC is disposed extending to the left and right. Then, in the lyric display area LYC, the lyrics of the song sung by the princess character are displayed horizontally and a triangular marker MRKc is displayed below the lyrics, and the marker MRKc is displayed according to the progression of the song. It is configured to move in the right direction, and notifies the timing of singing out and the like. In the lyric display area LYC shown in FIG. 258 (A3), “but true kindness” is displayed, and the “excellent” character of those is displayed in bold and large size compared to the other characters. There is. That is, in this example of presentation, it is suggested that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the princess character sings the "excellent" part. In other words, it can be said that the word "excellent" has the function of the check point in the above-mentioned chance up meter CMT. In this example, the lyrics indicate the timing of occurrence of a chance-up notice, but, for example, in the speech in the speech advance, the display mode of a specific character is made different from the other characters, and the voice according to the speech is output Alternatively, it may be suggested that a chance-up notice may occur at the timing when the voice corresponding to the specific character in the speech is output.

  FIG. 248 (A4) shows that the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character. Thereafter, in FIG. 248 (A5), the upper and lower frames of the lyric display area LYC change from white, which is the default display mode, to red at the timing when the princess character sings the “excellent” part, and a chance up notice is given. Is shown.

  Then, in FIG. 248 (A6), a balloon in which the characters “chance up lyric frame is red” is added in the vicinity of the character “excellent” is displayed to notify that a chance up notice has been made. Note that a balloon may be displayed at a timing when the display mode of the lyric display area LYC changes, or a balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the lyric display area LYC changes, or the display of the lyric display area LYC A balloon may be displayed before the aspect changes. Note that the lyric frame may be ranked up in the order of white> red> golden> rainbow color, or it may be ranked up by skipping one or more ranks such as white to golden. In this case, the expectation of the big hit is high in the order of rainbow color> gold color> red color> white, and in the case of the rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. In addition, the changing aspect may be notified (for example, to make "excellent" red, etc.) by characters notifying the timing such as "excellent". Further, in this example of presentation, although the case where the chance-up notice occurs is one point has been described, there may be a plurality of points where the chance-up notice occurs. Further, depending on the color of the lyric frame, the point at which the chance-up notice occurs may change even with the same reach. Further, regardless of the color of the lyric frame, the points at which the chance-up notice occurs may be the same.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 248 (A7), the marker MRKc continues to move in accordance with the song of the princess character, and shows the timing at which the phrase “but the real kindness” is finished singing. In this production example, the history of the occurrence of the chance-up notice is displayed only while displaying the phrase displayed when the chance-up notice occurs, but when the chance-up notice occurs. The history of chance advance notice may be displayed even after switching from the phrase displayed in to another phrase, for example, the phrase for which chance up notice occurred is the lyc display area LYC It may be displayed in another display area to indicate the type of chance-up notice that has occurred, the number of times the chance-up notice has occurred may be displayed, and the type of the chance-up notice that has occurred. It may be displayed explicitly or implicitly.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 248 (A8), the display of the lyrics in the lyrics display area LYC is switched, and the phrase “may be there” is displayed, and these characters are all in the same display mode.

  In FIG. 248 (A9), the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase “may be there” has been sung.

  Then, in FIG. 248 (A10), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the final judgment effect by the button effect is started. Also, when the button effect is started, the lyrics display area LYC is once erased. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (A10), the operation valid period has not yet started, and the operation valid period is started thereafter. The lyrics display area LYC may be displayed as it is.

  Thereafter, in the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (A11), it is shown that the operation effective period is reduced.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (A12), the lyrics display area LYC is displayed again in FIG. 248 (A13), and the lyrics display area LYC The phrase "I do not know" is displayed, showing that the final judge was successful. Thereafter, when the marker MRKc moves along with the song of the princess character and the phrase "Known" finishes singing at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (A14), the marker MRKc is also located on the right of the phrase "Known". It will be. In the case of a loss, for example, when the effect button 136 is pressed, the screen is darkened, the song can not be sung to the end, and the effect display in which the final judgment effect is failed is performed.

  In FIG. 248 (A15), the lyric display area LYC is erased, and a state in which the song is completely sung is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 248 (A16), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit.

  FIG. 248 (B1) to FIG. (B11) show another example of presentation following FIG. 222 (A8), for example, and advance notice that a chance up notice occurs while the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is being executed. It shows how to inform.

  FIG. 248 (B1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 222 (A8), showing that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 248 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and it is suggested that the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived by the sabothani character SBH reaching the final point GP. Further, in this example of effect, the treasure box TRG is displayed above the second check point CP2 in the gauge portion. The treasure box TRG indicates that the Sabohani character SBH is released when it is close, and there is a possibility of giving notice of the occurrence of a chance-up notice. In the period in FIG. 248 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (2) to FIG. (7) is performed.

  In FIG. 248 (B3), it is shown that the Sabo-hani character SBH starts moving and then approaches the treasure chest TRG. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (B4), the treasure chest TRG is opened, and the character “UP” appears from the treasure chest TRG. As a result, at the second check point CP2, it is predicted that a chance-up notice will be generated by the display of the gold cut-in image CI3. In this example, the treasure box is opened before the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2 to give notice of the occurrence of the chance-up notice, but it reaches the second check point CP2. The treasure chest TRG may be configured to open. That is, the appearance of the treasure box TRG at the second check point CP2 may inform that the chance-up notice is likely to occur.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 248 (B5), it is shown that the treasure box TRG is erased together with the characters “UP”, and the character SBH of Sabohani continues to go to the second check point CP2. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 248 (B6) to FIG. (B11) are performed. In addition, since the rendition performed in the period of FIG. 248 (B6)-the same figure (B11) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 29 (9)-the same figure (16), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In this example, the treasure box TRG is opened and the letter "UP" appears so that it is notified in advance that a chance-up notice will occur at the timing when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the corresponding check point. For example, with the occurrence of a chance-up notice, it may be notified that it becomes a more reliable aspect. In addition, an icon may be made to appear from the treasure box TRG indicating the content of the chance-up notice that may occur at the timing when the Sabohan character SBH reaches the check point where the treasure box TRG is arranged, for example, A treasure box TRG is placed at one check point CP1, and when the treasure box TRG is opened, an icon of the face of the character BOY of the boy appears and a chance for the boy to appear the boy of the boy will be notified. It may be possible to give notice.

  FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining a variation of the effect based on the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 249 (A1) to (A6) show that a plurality of chance-up notices occur at one check point.

  FIG. 249 (A1) is an effect following, for example, FIG. 29 (1). Note that the effects shown in FIG. 249 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in (29) to (3) in FIG.

  FIG. 249 (A3) shows that the character BOY of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side at the timing when the sabo-hani character SBH reaches the first check point CP1. That is, it is shown that a chance-up notice is given by the appearance of the character BOY of the Boy. Further, in this effect example, the copanda character KPD appears from the right end of the display screen, and a chance-up notice is also given due to the appearance of the copanda character KPD. Here, the copanda character KPD overlaps the sword-master character in the super reach presentation. The copanda character KPD may be overlapped with the sword character. Here, the character KPD of the copanda may appear after the appearance of the character BOY of the boy, or the character BOY of the boy may appear after the appearance of the character KPD of the copanda, or with the character of the boy BOY. The copanda character KPD may appear simultaneously.

  Then, in FIG. 249 (A4), a balloon with the word “chance up BOY passing !!” is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan's character SBH, and the character “chance up copanda appeared !!” is displayed above it. The added balloon is also displayed, and it is notified that two chance-up notices have occurred at the first check point CP1. In addition, the balloon of "chance up BOY passing !!" and the balloon of "chance up copanda appearance !!" may be displayed at the same time, or after the balloon of "chance up BOY passing !!" is displayed. A balloon may be displayed for "chance up copanda appearance !!", or a balloon for "chance up BOY passing !!" may be displayed after the "chance up copanda appearance !!" balloon is displayed. The balloon of the Sabohan character SBH may be displayed after the appearance of the Bowie character BOY and the copanda character KPD, or during the appearance of the Bowie character BOY and the copanda character KPD (for example, while displaying the appearance animation). It may be displayed, or may be displayed before the appearance of the boy character BOY and the copanda character KPD. In addition, while the advance notice based on the display of the character BOY of the Boy and the character KPD of the copanda is being performed, the Sabohan character SBH may stop at the first check point CP1, but may not stop. Also, for example, it may be notified that a plurality of chance-up notices have occurred by one balloon, such as "chance-up BOY passing! And copanda appearance !!".

  FIG. 249 (A5) shows that the character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda are erased by the animation of the frameout, and the balloon of the character SBH of the sabothani is also erased. Note that the balloon may be deleted after the character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda are deleted, or the character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda may be deleted after the balloon is deleted. The balloon may be deleted while the character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda are deleted (during displaying of the animation of the frame out). Also, the character of Sabohani has started moving on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 249 (A6) is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 249 (A6) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (8), the description is omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. In this example, even if multiple chance-up notices occur, only one letter “UP” is displayed, which indicates that the chance-up notice has occurred, but the number corresponds to the number of the chance-up notices that occurred. "UP" (in this rendering example, two "UP" displays) may be displayed.

  Figures 249 (B1) to (B7) show that when there is a check point for which no chance up notice has occurred in the production by the chance up meter during super reach, then the chance up notice is given at the check point. It shows an example of an effect to be considered. In the period from FIG. 249 (B1) to FIG. (B2), for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 230 (A6) to FIG. (A17) is performed.

  After that, when the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (B3), as shown in FIG. Is displayed on. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is paused by the icon PSE of the pause being superimposed on the chance up meter CMT. Note that the temporary stop may be displayed by part or all of the components of the chance up meter CMT.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (B5), the effect of super reach is interrupted, and a cut-in indicating that the princess character says "Rewrite reach" is displayed. The display of the cut-in is, for example, a notice that the reliability of the big hit is improved by assuming that effects of other contents are performed for the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display. Note that the display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance improvement directly related to the chance up meter CMT. In addition, in this demonstration example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed along with the pause icon PSE even during the period when the display of the princess's cut-in is displayed, but the pause icon PSE and chance up meter CMT are displayed. It may be hidden. Further, the pause icon PSE may be displayed to display the cut-in of the princess before the effect by the chance up meter CMT is paused. In this case, for example, the cut-in of the princess is displayed The chance up meter CMT is hidden during a certain period, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed with the pause icon PSE displayed when the princess's cut-in display ends and the super reach effect is resumed. An effect in which the effect by CMT is temporarily stopped may be performed. In addition, during the period when the pause icon PSE is displayed, the effect of super reach is suspended while the effect is not stopped by the chance up meter CMT, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be advanced. The presentation of the super reach may not be paused, and the presentation on the chance up meter CMT may be paused. Moreover, when the display of the cut-in by the princess character is performed, the pause icon PSE may be displayed and the effect may be paused or may not be paused, for example, paused In the case where it does not stop temporarily, it is possible to make the big hit design feature easy to stop fixedly. In addition, the progress of the super reach production is advancing than the position of the character SBH of Sabohani shown in the chance up meter CMT, and by displaying the pause icon PSE and temporarily stopping the super reach production, An effect may be performed such that the progress and the position of the Sabohan character SBH are aligned with each other.

  FIG. 249 (B6) shows that the display of the cut-in by the princess character is ended, and the interrupted super reach effect is resumed. However, the pause icon PSE is displayed, and the presentation by the chance up meter CMT remains paused.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 249 (B7), the pause icon PSE is erased, and the presentation by the chance up meter CMT is resumed. At this time, the reach effect is rewritten, and the indication of the second check point CP2 where the indication that the chance-up notice has not occurred is displayed in a red-marked manner, and the chance-up notice is displayed. The letter "UP" is also displayed to indicate that a That is, in fact, although the chance-up advance notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 has not been made, it is shown as having been made, and it is shown that the reliability of the big hit is improved. In this example, the pause icon PSE is shown to overlap with the chance up meter CMT. For example, the chance up meter is provided with the above-mentioned information display area. The character of "pause" may be displayed in the said information display area, and only the character of "pause" is displayed on the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter such as the display of a bar or the character SBH of the sabothani Images constituting the CMT may be hidden.

  FIGS. 249 (C1) to (C6) show other display modes of the chance up meter.

  FIG. 249 (C1) shows, for example, another effect pattern that follows FIG. 29 (1). Specifically, when transitioning to the super reach (Kenou reach), the chance up meter CMTx formed in a band shape is extended and displayed on the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display of the chance up meter CMTx changes in such a manner that the gauge displayed in blue from the start point SPx to the final point GPx decreases from left to right according to the progress of the super reach presentation. In the area on the left side of the start point SPx, the character "start" is displayed, and in the area on the right side of the end point GPx, the character "end" is displayed. The start point SPx of the chance up meter CMTx and the end Point GPx is specified. Further, a check point CPx is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance up meter CMTx, which indicates that a chance up notice may be given at a timing when a marker MRKx described later reaches the check point CPx. The check point CPx is a display mode in which a question mark is given in a white circle, suggesting that there is a possibility that some chance up notice may be given, and giving the player a sense of expectation There is a possibility. In addition, the question mark may not be attached to the white circle, and may or may not be attached to the question mark. In addition, in the white circle, a mark, a letter or a symbol different from the question mark may be attached.

  In FIG. 249 (C2), presentation by the chance up meter CMTx is started, and the marker MRKx moves from the start point SPx toward the final point GPx according to the progress of the super reach presentation, and the gauge is correspondingly reduced It shows how you are doing.

  After that, when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (C3), as shown in FIG. 249 (C4), the balloon marked “super heat” is in the oval frame in the oval frame. It is displayed together with the face display YSMN, and a highly reliable chance-up notice (superheat notice) is performed. In addition, even if the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, the chance-up advance notice may not be performed, or another type of chance-up advance notice may be performed. In addition, while the chance-up notice is being performed, the marker MRKx may stand by at the position of the check point CPx, or may advance toward the final point GPx without waiting.

  FIG. 249 (C5) shows that the display YSMN of the face of the doll has been erased and the chance-up notice has ended, and the chance-up meter CMTx is advancing according to the progress of the super reach presentation.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (C6), when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, the main character of the hero wins against the hostile swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is informed that it will be a big hit Be done. When the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, there may be a case where a display may be performed in which the main character of the main character defeats the enemy player, the sword sword.

  FIGS. 249 (D1) to (D6) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIGS. 249 (C1) to (C6). In this rendering example, as shown in FIG. 249 (D1), the display at the check point CPx is a display mode in which the character of “heat” is attached in the white circle, and the timing at which the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx Thus, it is predicted that the extreme heat advance notice shown in FIG. 249 (D4) will be performed. It should be noted that the occurrence of another type of chance-up notice may be notified. Moreover, in the case of the display mode in which the character of "Heat" is attached in the white circle, the chance-up notice may be generated or may not be generated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 249 (D1 ′), a balloon may be displayed in which a character “presence of“ superheat ”is generated at this timing” is displayed in the vicinity of the check point CPx. It is to be noted that the effects shown in FIG. 249 (D1) to (D6) are the same as the effects shown in (249) (C1) to (C6) of FIG. I omit explanation. In addition, before the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, the "question mark" may change to the word "heat".

  FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining another effect pattern of effects by the chance up meter.

  FIGS. 250 (A1) to (A4) show that in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, a notice other than the chance up notice is given using the components of the chance up meter CMT.

  FIG. 250 (A1) shows an effect following, for example, FIG. 29 (2). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 250 (A1) to FIG. 250 (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 29 (3) to FIG.

  In FIG. 250 (A3), since the boy character BOY appears at the first check point CP1, a balloon with the word “chance up BOY pass” is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and a chance up notice is displayed. It reports that it has been done. At this time, the background color of the balloon is red, which suggests that the big hit design is more likely to be displayed in the symbol variation display being executed than when the background color of the balloon is the default color (white). ing. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the background color of the balloon becoming red. Thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (A4) is performed. In addition, the background color of the balloon is configured to be displayed in red more easily than the default color (white) when the big hit symbol display mode is determined and displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is determined and displayed. It is also good.

  Thereafter, when the chance-up notice ends, as shown in FIG. 250 (A4), the first check point CP1 is marked in red, and it is indicated that the jackpot reliability has been raised by the occurrence of the chance-up notice The characters "UP" are displayed, and the SABOHANI character SBH starts moving.

  FIG. 250 (B1) to FIG. 250 (B18) show an example of an effect in which the effect is displayed by the chance up meter CMT while the symbols other than the super reach change. FIG. 250 (B1) is an example of effects following, for example, FIG. 222 (A2), and the effects shown in FIG. 250 (B1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG.

  FIG. 250 (B2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT in this rendering example indicates, for example, the progress of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the present decoration is made according to its position. The status of progress of the variable display of the symbol is roughly notified. At the final point GP in this production example, the placard is rotated including the display of “x” and the display of the question mark, giving the player a sense of expectation as to whether it will be a loss or the development develops. ing. Here, the progressing speed of the character SAH of the sabothani is not constant, and may be variable depending on the progress of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 250 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific advance notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached while the character SBH of Sabohani moves, a specific advance notice may occur.

  FIGS. 250 (B3) to (B4) show that the character SBH of Sabohani, which functions as a cursor, starts moving. At this time, a balloon in which “START !!” is written is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, thereby notifying start of movement of Sabohan character SBH.

  In FIG. 250 (B5), it is shown that the speech advance has been started. When the speech advance notice is started, a speech image CI1 of the present with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the present. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation announcement. In addition, the above-mentioned conversational image CI1 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 250 (B6), the conversation announcement is updated. Specifically, the tous-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed in a reduced size and is displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and a short conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the short characters. The operation promotion notification image is an image prompting to press the effect button 136 within the operation effective period, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period It is composed of At the timing shown in FIG. 250 (B6), the operation effective period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display according to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of a whistle, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol, etc. There is a possibility. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow and the conversation image CI1 of the temple so as not to hide the decorative symbol. Also, as shown in FIG. 250 (B6), the Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the wolf, and the conversation on the Tonosama is more than in the non-overlapping state The display mode of the image CI1 is considered to be difficult to view. In addition, when the speech advance notice is updated, the speech image CI1 of the hallmark may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the speech image CI1 of the hallmark may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the previously displayed conversation image, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation It may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation notice B having a lower expectation of a big hit than the notice A. The effective period of operation of the effect button 136 is then started.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 250 (B7) is shown in a display mode when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period, and when the effect button 136 is pressed by the player thereafter As shown in FIG. 250 (B8), in the conversation image CI2 of the eyebrow, instead of the operation promotion notification image, the frame in which the operation promotion notification image was displayed is framed in gold and "It's super hot! A notice is given that the character "is displayed. Then, a balloon with the word "chance up gold frame advance notice!" Is displayed in the vicinity of Sabohan character SBH, and it is informed that the chance up advance notice has been performed by the conversation image CI2 of the user. Note that the balloon may be displayed at a timing when the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of a whistle changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of the whistle changes. Also, in FIG. 250 (B8), the No. 1 shown in FIG. 179 (b). An icon IHI of “gold bomber” 6 appears at the right end of the screen, and the on-hold change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the on-hold change animation in this presentation example, while flying from the right to the left, the icon IHI of the "gold bomber" fires (bombards) a bullet with a fluctuating icon h0. In addition, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" may be paused in front of the target fluctuation icon h0. In addition, this pause may be pause of the cassette that disguises the target icon. Further, in this example of presentation, when the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed by performing the hold change animation by the icon IHI of the "gold bomber", the display mode of the change of the reserved icon is golden. It is suggested that In addition, when the holding change animation by the icon IHI of "gold bomber" is performed, the bombing on the fluctuation icon h0 may succeed and the display mode of the holding icon may always change, or the bombing on the fluctuation icon h0 In some cases, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change. In this staging example, after the display mode of the conversation image CI2 of the wolf is changed, the icon IHI of "gold bomber" may appear and the pending change animation may be started, or after the pending change animation is started The display mode of the speech image CI2 of the user may change. That is, the period in which the chance-up notice relating to the first check point CP1 is made may overlap with the period in which the chance-up notice relating to the second check point CP2 is made. In addition, the suspension change animation may be started after the balloon of the sabothan character SBH is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the suspension change animation is started.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 250 (B9), while the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move, the first check point CP1 is marked in red, and “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance up notice. Further, FIG. 250 (B9) shows that a gold bullet icon is fired from a gold bomber icon. That is, the icon "IHI" of "gold bomber" is composed of a gold bomber icon and a gold bullet icon. The goal here is the fluctuation icon h0. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (B10), the bullet icon hits the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the gold display mode. Further, at this time, the character SBH of Sabohani travels on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second check point CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. In addition, the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 before the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes, or the character SBH of the Sabohani second check point after the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. May reach CP2. It is to be noted that Sabohan's character SBH is stopped at the second check point CP2 and stands by.

  Then, in FIG. 250 (B11), a balloon with the word “chance up gold reserve” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the SABOHANI character SBH, and there is a chance up notice that the variation icon h0 becomes a gold display mode. Is reported. Note that the balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 250 (B12), while the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move, the second check point CP2 is marked in red, and “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance up notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (B13), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and a reach state is formed, and a state in which fluctuation variation display is performed is shown. ing. Here, the decorative symbol on which the fluctuation display is performed may overlap a part of the chance up meter CMT, or may be displayed at a position where the decorative symbol does not overlap on the chance up meter CMT.

  In FIG. 250 (B14), “decorative 7” that was swingingly changed in the left symbol display area 208a moves to the lower side of the second decorative pattern before shifting to the super reach effect, and is shaken and changed in the right symbol display area 208c. It is shown that the "decorative 7" which had been moved to the bottom of the second number-of-holds display. At this time, the Sabohan character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, and at this timing, a background image including the genie character CLA is displayed. It should be noted that a background image including the genie character CLA may be displayed at the timing when the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, or after the sabothani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3. A background image including the character CLA may be displayed, or the sabothan character SBH may reach the third check point CP3 after the background image including the genie character CLA is displayed.

  Then, in FIG. 250 (B15), a balloon with the character of “Chance up Claire background” attached is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohan character SBH, and a chance up notice is generated that a background image including the genie character CLA is displayed. It has been reported that it did. Note that the balloon may be displayed at the timing when the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 250 (B16), while the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move, the third check point CP3 is marked in red, and “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, showing the history of the chance up notice. Also, in FIG. 250 (B16), the background image including the genie character CLA is switched to the default background image. Note that the background image including the genie character CLA may be continuously displayed until the background image of the super reach is displayed. Also, in FIG. 250 (B16), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and the frame hocking out of the display screen is shown leaving the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. .

  FIG. 250 (B17) shows that the holding frame UI is completely out of the frame with the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS remaining. Also, in FIG. 250 (B17), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the final point GP. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in a mode displayed as "SP", and it is notified that transition to super reach is made.

  FIG. 250 (B18) shows that the super reach production of the VS swordsman reach is started. Then, the chance up meter CMT is erased as having achieved the purpose. In addition, the presentation by a new chance up meter may be started even after shifting to the super reach. Also, the chance up meter CMT may be deleted before the super reach effect is started, or may be deleted after the super reach effect is started, or is deleted at the timing when the super reach effect is started May be After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (2) and thereafter are performed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect produced by the chance up meter performed in the probability change state.

  FIGS. 251 (A1) to (A19) show how effects are produced using the chance up meter as the advance notice in the probability change state.

  FIG. 251 (A1) shows that the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 is performed after the big hit game is over. The control states shown in FIG. 251 (A1) to FIG. 251 (A19) are the special figure high probability general drawing high probability state (probability change state with power assistance). Therefore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the power-added positive variation state, the reserve icon of the special view 2 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. In FIG. 251 (A1), since the number of reservations of the special view 2 is four, the suspension icons (first suspension icon h21 to fourth suspension icon h24) of the four special diagrams 2 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The more left the pending icon, the older the winning icon will be. In addition, you may make it the holding icon of the special figure 1 be displayed. Further, in this rendering example, a background image of the universe in which the rocket is directed to the planet is displayed as the background image in the power-assisted definite variation state. In addition, in this production example, it applies to the so-called ST machine to which a power change with probability of 50 rotations is given after the end of all the big hit games, but the next big hit occurs, for example, when a big hit with a probability change symbol The specification may be a definite change state with power support until it is done. In addition, it may be a so-called V-ST machine in which a certain change (e.g., 50 rotations) of electric power is provided when passing through a specific area provided in the variable winning opening in a big hit game. In addition, the gaming state in this production example may not be a power-assisted definite variation state, but may be a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state (power support state), or a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state It is also good. In addition, the second number-of-holds display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 3, and the number of special views 2 is 4 . Then, a second decorative symbol is displayed in the lower left corner, and the second decorative symbol is also variably displayed in accordance with the first decorative symbol. In the upper left corner of the display screen, a right-handed display instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area 124 is performed, and a general drawing low probability special drawing low probability is displayed below it. The number of jackpots that are the number of jackpots that occurred between the occurrence of a big hit in the state and the occurrence of a low probability special figure low probability state again is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (A1) “BONUS × 3” is displayed, which indicates a grandeur. In addition, below the display of the number of consecutive residences, the remaining symbol variation number for maintaining the probability variation state with electricity support is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (A1), “50 more times indicating the remaining 50 times "Is displayed.

  Further, in the example of the effect, the song title display unit MN is provided in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the song title of the currently output song (here, the default "may be there" "" Is displayed, and the music of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music being output here is the music being output in the definite variation state. Furthermore, the icons of the up and down keys 137u and d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the music title display unit MN, and it is informed that music selection is possible by operating the up and down keys 137u and d.

  In FIG. 251 (A2), the symbol stop of the special view 2 is performed, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . In addition, the number of remaining reservations of the special figure 2 is 4, and all are made into the default display mode.

  In FIG. 251 (A3), it is shown that the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the variation display of the decorative symbol. Even in the state of FIG. 251 (A3), the selected music is still "may be there". It should be noted that a prefetch notice or change notice may be given by a music change notice, or an effect of forcibly changing a music selected by the player to another music may be performed by the music change notice.

  In FIG. 251 (A4), a background change notice, which is a type of advance notice, is started. The background change notice in this effect example is a notice that the continuous notice is started. The subject of background change notification (pre-reading target hold) here is a hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon hs24 shown in FIG. 251 (A2). In the background change notice, an image (FSML, FSMR) of eyelids appears from the left and right, and the eyelid is closed, so that the whole display screen becomes an eyelid image (see FIG. 251 (A5)). For this reason, the reserved icons h21, h22, h23, the first decorative symbol, and the music title display portion MN are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyebrows and become invisible. At this time, the music output from the speaker 120 fades out and then becomes mute. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped, and the sound effects may be output.

  It should be noted that the background change notice may be started at the timing when the pre-read target is suspended. In this example, although it is started during the next fluctuation of the winning fluctuation, it is not limited to the next fluctuation, and it may be started before the fluctuation of the prefetch target hold. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In the background change notice, the big hit expectation of the pre-reading target hold may be expressed by the appearance image (here, the image of the eyebrows), and for example, if the eyebrow color is green, the background itself changes to a mountain background. It may also function as a notice. Furthermore, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  FIG. 251 (A6) shows that an animation in which the eyelids open is performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 251 (A7), the eyelids are completely opened, and the eyelid images (FSML, FSMR) have disappeared. In this presentation example, a continuous advance notice is started by the background change advance notice. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a title “Kana Can Be Found” indicating the contents of the effect of continuous notice is displayed, and a chance up meter CMTy is displayed above this title. The chance up meter CMTy in this example of presentation has the start point SPy and the final point GPy, and the first check point CP1y and the second check point CP2y disposed between them, and each has a white circle display mode, and a band between each point It is tied with a gauge. Further, at the final point GPy, a symbol consisting of "!" And a question mark is attached in a white circle, and an advance notice of symbol change corresponding to the final point GPy is performed. That is, it is predicted that a final judge effect which is a final effect to notify whether or not a big hit is performed after four times of symbol fluctuation display, including symbol fluctuation display being executed. The start point SPy corresponds to the symbol variation display being executed, the first check point CP1y corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, and the second check point CP2y is The final point GPy corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the second suspension, and the final point GPy corresponds to the symbol suspension display corresponding to the third suspension, which is the object of the pre-reading advance notice. In addition, another pre-reading advance notice may be performed about a point where no display is performed among each point. In addition, although the display mode of each point does not change until the end of the effect of the continuous notice, the display mode may change, for example, every symbol variation display. In addition, in the first check point CP1y and the second check point CP2y, when the check point is reached, it may be notified that a chance-up notice will be made. Moreover, the display in the white circle of the final point GPy is not limited to the above-mentioned one, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the big hit, for example, when "heat" is displayed. Is more likely to be a big hit than a symbol consisting of "!" And a question mark is displayed, and when "当" is displayed, the jackpot symbol aspect is displayed finalized in the symbol variation display of the object of pre-reading advance notice You may Further, depending on the display mode in the white circle at each point, the ease of development to super reach or the change thereof may be notified, or the type of super reach may be notified. In addition to the final point GPy, a notice may be displayed in the white circle at other points, for example, even if some advance notice is displayed at the final point GPy, the check point before that (white circle or white circle or It may be a big hit by the symbol variation corresponding to the check point which is performing some advance notice display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 251 (A8), a character YMy of the character that functions as a cursor is displayed at the start point SPy.

  After that, in FIG. 251 (A9), the character of Tonosama bears a box of thousands, and effect display is being performed in which only a surname is given to begging. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 251 (A10), stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7”.

  In FIG. 251 (A11), it is shown that the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Special Figure 1 indicates 3 and the hold of Special Figure 2 indicates 2. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations has been updated to "after 48 times". At this time, the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy is moved from the start point SPy to the first check point CP1y. In addition, it is shown that the character of the lord carrying the two-handed box has a red face and steps on to throw the two-handed box against the surname, showing a sense of expectation for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 251 (A12), stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 6—decoration 4—decoration 1”.

  In FIG. 251 (A13), it is shown that the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Special Figure 1 indicates 3 and the hold of Special Figure 2 indicates 1. Moreover, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations is updated to "47 times more". At this time, the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy has moved from the first check point CP1y to the second check point CP2y. Also, it is shown that the character of the lord who carried the 1000-inch box threw the 1000-inch box towards the peasant family, and has a greater sense of expectation for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 251 (A14), stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 7”.

  In FIG. 251 (A15), it is shown that the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Special Figure 1 indicates 3 and the hold of Special Figure 2 indicates 0. In addition, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations is updated to "after 46 times". At this time, it is informed that the character YMy of the lord in the chance up meter CMTy has moved from the second check point CP2y to the final point GPy, and that it is a change in which the final judge effect is performed.

  FIG. 251 (A16) shows that as a result of the final judge presentation, the thousand-two-boxes thrown by the lady reach the peasant and the small sheet is scattered from the one-and-two-boxes. That is, it is informed that the result of the big hit is derived as success in giving to the peasant. After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (A17), the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is derived, and it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (A18), a final display is made with a combination (big hit symbol pattern form) of the decorative symbols of the “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (A19), a jackpot start effect is performed. In this jackpot start effect, "Super Yoshimune bonus" is displayed, which indicates that a jackpot game by the jackpot will be started, as the symbols of the jackpot (special jackpot) are aligned.

  In this presentation example, for example, this presentation may be performed by the fluctuation pattern table from the 50th rotation to the 53rd rotation in ST.

  In this example of presentation, the continuous advance notice is performed by the presentation by the chance up meter, but such presentation by the chance up meter can be applied to a slot machine. For example, it is a slot machine capable of obtaining a high payout by stopping the reels in the correct order (pushing order). AT (assist time) which is an advantageous gaming state informing the correct pushing order. In the state, the character is advanced in the chance up meter according to the AT remaining game number on display, the last point is made to correspond to the AT remaining game number being 0, and the AT state continues by the display at the last point Alternatively, it may be informed that there may be a final judgment effect on whether the number of remaining AT state games will be added. In this case, depending on the display mode at the final point, it is suggested that it is easy to continue the AT state, or easy to add the remaining number of games in the AT state, the number of games to be added, etc. May be Also, at each of the start point, the final point, and one or more check points arranged between them, the winning combination is displayed in the corresponding white circle at the timing of lever ON, the first stop or the second stop, or the winning combination. It may be displayed in a white circle as a history.

  FIGS. 251 (B1) to (B8) show an effect following to FIG. 251 (A15), and show how a result of losing is derived as a result of continuous advance notice.

  FIG. 251 (B1) shows an effect following FIG. 251 (A15). In this production example, the game ball is won in the second special view starting opening 232 between the production shown in FIG. 251 (A15) and the production shown in FIG. 251 (B1). , The suspension of special figure 2 is increased by one. In Figure 251 (B1), as a result of the judge, the tombs don't throw the two-storied box and fail to reach the peasant, and the two-storied box flips over at the tossus's feet, the tombs are depressed and the peasant shows a drowning figure It has been done. That is, it is informed that the result of loss is derived as having failed to give to the family. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (B2), it is shown that the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is derived and that the swing fluctuation is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (B3), the finalized display is performed with the combination of the decorative designs of the lost "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". In addition, after the combination of the decorative symbol of a loss is derived | led-out, resurrection production may be performed and the combination of the decorative symbol of big hit may be derived | led-out.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (B4), the reserve of Toku-zu 2 is digested, and after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, the background is changed to the background in the power-added definite variation state in FIG. 251 (B5) Background change production is started. When the background change effect is started, an image (FSML, FSMR) of an eyebrow appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an eyebrow image by the animation in which the eyelid is closed (see FIG. 251 (B6)). For this reason, the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMTy are overlapped from the front side by the image of the eyelid and become invisible. At this time, the music for continuous announcement effect output from the speaker 120 fades out and then becomes mute. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped, and the sound effects may be output.

  In FIG. 251 (B7), the eyelids open and the variable display of the first decorative symbol starts to appear, and in FIG. 251 (B8), the eyelids completely open and the eyelid image disappears. At this time, the hold icon is not displayed because the hold of Special Figure 2 is “0”, but if there is a hold of Special Figure 2, the hold icon is visible during the execution of the animation that the eyelids open. start. Note that the hold icon may be displayed after the eyelids are completely opened. Also, as shown in FIG. 251 (B8), the background image after the release of the rose is the background image of the castle town. It may be a background image of the universe.

  FIG. 252 is a diagram for explaining an example in which a notice of the effect by the chance up meter is performed by a display device other than the decorative symbol display device.

  252 (A1) to (A5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance preview of the CUM preparation display MTY is made using the POV display 224I.

  In FIG. 252 (A1) during symbol variation display, the POV display 224I which has been hidden at the initial position so far appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is in a state before rotating Taking the state).

  In FIG. 252 (A2), when the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches constant speed rotation on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the icon SH of "Sabohani" is displayed on the POV display 224I, and CUM preparation is made. The appearance of the middle display MTY has been predicted. In addition, since any light emitting element of the POV display 224I does not emit light during acceleration of the POV display 224I, the variable display of the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the holding frame UI are visually recognized It is made possible.

  In FIG. 252 (A3), the POV display 224I keeps rotating at a constant speed, and the icon SH of "Sabo hani" is still displayed, but on the far side, the flame effect EF101 is in the reserved icon display area HIS. It is displayed to cover the whole.

  When the flame icon EF101 is displayed, the POV display 224I starts rotational decelerating operation, and then, as shown in FIG. 252 (A4), the POV display 224I becomes stationary, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 252 (A5) Return to the initial position, as shown. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. In this way, although the appearance of the CUM preparation indication MTY is predicted, the CUM preparation indication MTY may not appear. The display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM in-provision display MTY after the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started, or after the display is switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM in-provision display MTY The deceleration operation of the POV display 224I may be started, or the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparation display MTY at the timing when the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started.

  Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and the display area is An effect display may be performed. In addition, in the acceleration state in which the POV display 224I reaches the stationary state to the constant speed state, or in the deceleration state in which the POV display returns to the stationary state from the constant speed state, the display area is more easily visible than the constant speed state and the acceleration state Even in the deceleration state, effects may be displayed in the display area. Alternatively, effects may be displayed in the display area only in the acceleration state or the deceleration state. Further, in the acceleration state or the deceleration state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) may be darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I noticeable. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed on the display area in the acceleration state, and at least the display area may be darkened in the constant speed state. The remarks described here are also applicable to a rendering example using the POV display 224I disclosed herein.

  In addition, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon SH of "Sabo hani" may be earlier in the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or even if the appearance timing of the icon is earlier. It is good, and both may be the same timing.

  In addition, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means shown in FIG. 206) The above notification of occurrence may be performed by 208 M ′ or the like, or another notification may be performed.

  252 (B1)-the figure (B2) have shown the example of an effect by which the effect by a chance up meter is performed by the structure by which the display means is arrange | positioned under the 1st decorative symbol display apparatus 208L.

  Up to this point, the description has been made centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the description in the other embodiments herein). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to horizontal alignment, and may be vertical alignment. That is, it is not the case that the technology described in this specification can not be applied merely by the difference in hardware configuration, and viewed from a technical idea, even if the arrangement of the display means is horizontally arranged, vertically arranged It goes without saying that the present invention is applicable even if the number of display means is different. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical alignment of the display means, a description will be made using an example in which the display means is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the display means disposed below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M '.

  FIG. 252 (B1) shows a fourth display means 208M 'disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 252 (B1) is in the initial position. The fourth display means 208M 'is surrounded by a frame around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame in the fourth display means 208M' in the initial position is the front edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the front side. Overlap from. The fourth display means 208M 'is disposed on the front side (player's side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is an operation position where the display screen central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps from the front side For example, it can be moved from the initial position toward the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 206 (the key a2'). That is, the fourth display means 208M 'is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. Further, in addition to the raising and lowering operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. In addition, as a modification of the fourth display means 208M ', it may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

  In the fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 252 (B1), a holding frame having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI that has been displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. This holding frame also has a holding icon display area, a variation icon display area, and an effect icon display area. A pedestal on which the fluctuation icon is placed is disposed in the fluctuation icon display area. The reserved icon display area is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area, and four stages (first to fourth stages) are arranged on the left base icon. The effect icon display area is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area, and the right base icon is arranged in the effect icon display area. In the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second holding number display (here, “2” and “0”) of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. This basic configuration is the same in FIG. 252 (C1) to FIG. (C2) described later.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (B1), a state is shown in which transition to super reach effect (sword reach) is made after being a reach with “decoration 7”. On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M ', the above-mentioned CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed, and the start of presentation by the chance up meter CMT is notified. At this time, although the change frame is included and the holding frame is not displayed, the change icon may be displayed. In addition, the holding frame may be displayed. Further, during the period when the CUM in-provision display MTY or the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the fourth display device 208M ', the variation icon may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Alternatively, the holding frame may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The fourth display means 208M 'shown in FIG. 252 (B2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM in-provision display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. Thereafter, an effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed on the fourth display means 208M '.

  252 (C1) to (C2) show an example in which the effects shown in FIG. 228 (A8) to (A11) are realized using the fourth display means 208M '.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (C1), a CUM-in-provision display MTY is displayed substantially at the center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this presentation example, it is shown that the display position of the CUM in-provision display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after reaching a reach with "decoration 7", it is shown that it has shifted to super reach production (swords reach). On the other hand, in the fourth display means 208M ', "VS Swordsman Reach" is displayed to notify the type of super reach effect.

  Thereafter, a moving animation in which the CUM in-provision display MTY moves downward toward the fourth display means 208M 'is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. Move animation is completed when it is displayed. In this case, the CUM-in-provision display MTY may be moved between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M '. Specifically, the CUM in-provision display MTY may display so as to straddle these display means, or may display so as to warp between the display means without straddling these display means. It may be configured such that there are cases in which these display means are straddled and cases in which there is no straddling.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 252 (C2), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example, after the moving animation is completed, the CUM in-provision display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the sabothani character SBH starts to move (the former), but the CUM in-provision display MTY At the same time as switching to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may start moving (the latter). Further, the timing at which the sabothan character SBH starts moving may be either the former case or the latter case, only the former may be performed, or only the latter may be performed.

  FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 51 and the like.

  FIGS. 253 (A1) to (A7) show that a chance-up notice is given due to the appearance of the character BOY of the Bowie that occurs at the first check point CP1.

  In FIG. 253 (A1), it is shown that an animation of a duel scene of a hero who has developed into a super reach (a sword reach) and a sword battle between a hero and a hostess is displayed. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is displayed, and a chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT, the rendering is started, and the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Further, at the lower center of the display screen, a pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS constituting the holding frame UI is displayed, and a variation icon of a default display mode is placed on the pedestal hs0. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the second decorative symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at the upper part, the second number of reservations is displayed below (here, the special figure 1 is “1” and the special figure 2 is “0” is displayed).

  In FIG. 253 (A2), the character BOY of Bowie appears as the character of the advance notice on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and proceeds toward the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The situation is shown.

  Then, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 253 (A3) starts moving in the right direction according to the character BOY of Boi moving in the right direction on the display screen. There is. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved in accordance with the original movement display of the character BOY of the boy. At this time, in the display of the first decorative symbol display device 280L, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, in the portion of the character of the first character displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the chance up meter CMT, the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 253 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved to a position where the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is substantially at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When reaching the maximum movement position of the decorative symbol display device 208M, "chance up BOY passing !!" is added in the vicinity of the sabohani character SBH constituting the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The balloon is displayed. Note that a balloon may be displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position, or a balloon may be displayed after the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position. Alternatively, a balloon may be displayed at the timing when the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (A5), the character of Boi moves in the right direction so as to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second decorative symbol display device 208 M starts moving toward the initial position. Of the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M with the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the portion of the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M that is not overlapped with the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first one from the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The display position is shifted to the decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position after the character BOY of Boi has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position before the Boy's character BOY completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position at a timing when the character BOY of the boy completely moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 253 (A6) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M has returned to its initial position. At this time, the character of the lord and the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are completely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The Boy's character BOY continues to move to the right of the display screen, and is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N from the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the frame is out from the right end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In FIG. 253 (A7), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letter “UP” indicates that the reliability of the big hit is increased by the appearance of the advance notice. It is displayed, showing the history of the occurrence of a notice.

  FIG. 253 (B1) to FIG. (B4) show an example of presentation corresponding to FIG. 253 (A3) to FIG. (A6) and an example in which the display of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is shown. FIG. 253 (B1) shows an effect following FIG. 253 (A2).

  The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 253 (B1) shows that the character BOY of Boye starts moving in the right direction as it moves in the right direction on the display screen. At this time, of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the chance up meter CMT Is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M is overlapped on the front side, therefore, the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second It will be hidden by the decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 253 (B2) to FIG. (B4) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 253 (B2) to FIG. (B4) are the same as those in FIG. 253 (A4) to FIG. (A6) except that the chance up meter CMT is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The explanation is omitted because it is the same as the effect shown.

  In the above description, for example, when errors and simultaneous effects shown in FIGS. 169 to 174 occur or volume / brightness adjustment is performed during effect display, it is shown in FIGS. 169 to 174. It is displayed as described above.

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M ' Etc.], and
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [eg, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a gold cut-in CI 3 etc. shown in FIG. 29 (13)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first preliminary display [for example, a display in progress in preparation for CUM shown in FIG. 222 (3), etc.],
The period display is a display that may be started during display of reach effect display [eg, as shown in FIG. 222 (A9), the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed during super reach effect etc],
The period display is a display for informing the first timing [for example, the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2, etc.] during the display of the reach effect display,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display,
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 222 (3) to FIG. Etc. displayed before the meter CMT is displayed],
The first advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the time display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Further, according to this game stand, since the period display is displayed by displaying the advance notice before the period display is notified that the certain period is started, a certain period is started in advance. In some cases, it may be possible not to miss the display start of the period display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The period display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started even during the display of the reach effect display. In addition, the period display may be always started while the reach effect display is displayed, or may not be started while the reach effect display is displayed.

  Further, the period display may notify only the first timing during display of the reach effect display, or notify other than the first timing during display of the reach effect display. It is also good. In addition, the period display may always notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the first notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed before the time display is displayed, or the first notice may not be displayed before the time display is displayed.

  In addition, the first notice may be displayed only before the period display is displayed, or the first notice may be displayed other than before the period display is displayed. May be

  In addition, the first advance notice may notify only that the term display is displayed, or may notify other than the term display. In addition, the first advance notice may be to always notice that the term display is displayed, or may not notice that the term display is displayed.

  In addition, it is also possible to give notice by the operation of the effect movable body, the sound output by the speaker, or the light emission by the light emitting means instead of the advance notice display.

  Also, the advance notice display may be started during the big hit game.

  Further, the advance notice may be displayed during the display of the period display, and for example, it may function as a notice to notify that the first effect display is displayed.

  In addition, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is displayed. For example, the period display is performed after the notice display is performed, and then the notice display is displayed. May be

  Further, the advance notice may be displayed after the period display is not displayed, and may be displayed as a function to notify that the period display has been displayed, for example.

It should be noted that “the game console has display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first preview display,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the 1st timing in a certain period,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start.
The first advance notice may be displayed before the period display is displayed,
The first advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the time display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by ".

  Moreover, "the said period display is a display which alert | reports the 1st timing in display of the said reach production display", and "the said period display is the timing by which a chance up notice (or chance up production) is performed. "Display of a meter (chance-up timing meter) for informing

In addition, it is possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance up effect is performed is notified by the chance up meter preparation indication (that is, the chance up meter preparation indication is displayed regardless of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display). If a chance up meter informs you of a chance up point just by being displayed (for example, if a chance up meter is always displayed when a chance up preparation display is performed, or if it is always indicated once or more by the chance up meter) As a case of notifying a chance up point, etc.)),
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display in which the first timing is notified.
(3) The first preliminary announcement display may be a preliminary announcement display that can specify that one or more of the timings at which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed are notified by the period display. . In addition, there may be timings that can not be identified among the timings notified in the period display.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that “the timing when all certain effects are performed” is notified in the period display.
(5) The first notice display may be a notice display in which one or more timings among the timings at which a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are performed are notified. Among the notified timings, there may be a timing that is not notified.
(6) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display in which "the timing when all certain effects are performed" reported in the period display is reported.

In addition, when it is not possible to specify that the timing when a certain chance up effect is performed is notified by the chance up meter preparation indication (for example, even when there is a gap in the chance up preparation display or the chance up meter is displayed) Even when not reporting a chance up point)
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can not specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display in which the first timing is not notified.
(3) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display which can not be specified in the period display that "the timing when all certain effects are performed" is to be notified.
(4) The first preliminary display may be a preliminary display in which "the timing when all certain effects are performed" reported in the period display is not reported.

  In addition, the timing at which one or more certain effects are necessarily performed may be notified by the period display.

  In addition, there may be a case where the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed is notified or a timing at which one certain effect is performed is not notified by the period display.

  In addition, when the display of the period display is displayed, the cursor display may already be moved.

  The cursor indication may move after the period indication is displayed.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, a character SBH or the like of Sabohani constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9)],
The period display is a certain period during display of the reach effect display [for example, a period from the first timing in super reach to the middle symbol being derived shown in FIG. 222 (A9) to FIG. (A12). Etc.], and
The cursor indication is from the second position [eg, the starting point SP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9)] to the first position [eg in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9) By moving to the third position [for example, the final point GP etc. in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 222 (A9)] via 2 check points CP2 etc., from the start to the end of the certain period is notified Are configured to
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the timing of the first position may be easily understood.

  Here, the period display may include only the cursor display or may include displays other than the cursor display. Moreover, the period display may include cursor display or may not include cursor display.

  Further, the period display may notify only a certain period during display of the reach effect display, or may notify also a period other than a certain period during the display of the reach effect display . In addition, the period display may always notify a certain period during display of the reach effect display, or may not notify a certain period during display of the reach effect display. .

  In addition, the cursor display may be configured to be notified only from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position from the first position to the third position. The display may be configured to move from the second position to the third position from the first position to be notified of other than the start and end of a certain period. In addition, the cursor display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position from the first position to the third position. The display may be configured to move from the second position to the third position from the first position to be not notified of the start to the end of a certain period.

  In addition, the cursor display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period only by moving from the second position to the third position from the first position to the third position. The display may be configured to be notified of the start to the end of a certain period other than moving from the second position to the third position from the first position.

  In addition, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be notified that only the first timing is reached, or when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. Other things may also be notified. In addition, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be always notified that the first timing is reached, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. There may be cases where this is not notified.

  In addition, it may be notified that the first timing is reached only by the cursor display reaching the first position, or the first other than the cursor display reaching the first position. It may be informed that it is timing.

  The positional relationship between the first position, the second position, and the third position may be the first position> the second position> the third position, or any other positional relationship. The cursor display may be configured to move in the order of second position> first position> third position. More precisely, "the position where the cursor indication reaches first when moving" is before the "position where the cursor indication reaches after" is behind.

In addition, the above-mentioned period display is a chance-up display [for example, the display of the second check point CP2 marked in red shown in FIG. 29 (15) and the occurrence of a chance-up notice have raised the reliability of the big hit This is a display that may be displayed, such as the display of the letters "UP" indicating that
The chance-up display is a display notifying that the display of the first effect display has been started at the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second check The point CP2 is marked in red or the display of the character "UP" is displayed, and a chance-up notice by the display of the gold cut-in CI3 is displayed at the timing when the SABOHANI character SBH reaches the second check point CP2. Informing that it has been started, etc.],
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position [eg, as shown in FIG. 29 (15) As such, when a chance-up notice by the display of the gold cut-in CI3 is started to be displayed, the second check point CP2 is marked in red, and the character "UP" is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to understand that the first effect display is displayed.

  Here, as the period display, only the chance up display may be displayed, or a display other than the chance up display may be displayed. In the period display, the chance up display may be displayed without fail or the chance up display may not be displayed.

  Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, only the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first timing may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, displays other than the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position. In addition, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be always displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first timing may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance-up display may not be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

  In addition, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be displayed only at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first timing may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance-up display may be displayed also at a display position other than the display position corresponding to the first position.

  Further, only when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first timing may be displayed at the first timing. The chance-up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position also except when the display of the effect display is started.

  When the chance-up display is displayed, the chance-up display may be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the third position, and the chance-up display is displayed. In this case, the chance-up indication may be configured to be displayed before the cursor indication reaches the third position.

In addition, the first preliminary display is a display that may be displayed for movement [for example, as shown in FIG. 228 (A8) to FIG. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, when the first notice display may perform the movement display, the gaze may be guided to the first notice display and the first notice display may be noticed.

  Here, the first advance notice may be only for moving display, or may be other than moving display. In addition, the first advance notice may be a movement display, or may not be a movement display.

Also, the display of the period display is started after the first preliminary display starts the movement display [eg, CUM preparation display as shown in FIG. 228 (A 8) to FIG. (A 11) CUM in-progress display MTY switched to chance-up meter CMT, etc. after MTY is moved and displayed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to grasp the timing at which the display of the period display is started.

  Here, only the display of the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the movement display, and the display other than the display of the period display after the first notice display starts the movement display It may be started. Also, the display of the period display may always start after the first preview display starts the movement display, or the display of the period display may not start after the first notice display starts the movement display. It may be.

  The period display may be moved and displayed.

  In addition, after the movement display of the first advance notice display is ended, it may be notified that a certain period has started.

  Further, the timing at which the movement display of the first notice display is started can be set as appropriate.

Also, the display position of the first advance notice display is changed by the move display [eg, as shown in FIG. 228 (A 8) to FIG. The display position of the display MTY being prepared has been changed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to change the display of the first notice display by changing the display position of the first notice display.

  Here, only the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the movement display, or some may be changed other than the display position of the first notice display by the movement display. Further, the display position of the first notice display may always be changed by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may not be changed by the movement display.

  Further, the display position of the first notice display may be changed only by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the display other than the movement display.

In addition, “the first advance notice display is a display that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3), etc.],
In the first preview display, a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the background color of the balloon forming the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 231 (A3) is red or CUM shown in FIG. 238 (A1) In the display mode in which the meter portion constituting the display MTY under preparation is red, in the display mode in which the character SBH of the sabothani constituting the CUM in-progress display MTY shown in FIG. 238 (B1) is red, or in FIG. This is a display that may be displayed in a display mode etc. in which the cursor constituting the CUM in-provision display MTY shown is the princess character HME.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot symbol form is finally greater than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Easy to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give expectation to the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed by looking at the display mode of the first notice display.

  Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. May be In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the first display mode or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the second display mode. It is also good. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the second display mode or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

  In addition, the first display mode and the second display mode may be display modes different from each other in part or may be different from each other.

  Moreover, only the big hit symbol mode is finally determined in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to be displayed, and in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the final display is more than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Design modes other than the jackpot design mode may also be easily displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally finally determined as compared to the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to be displayed, and in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the final display is more than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be difficult for the jackpot symbol form to be difficult to be displayed.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the big hit symbol form may be finally confirmed and displayed in the end, or the big hit symbol form may not be finally displayed. It is also good. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the big hit symbol form may not necessarily be finally displayed in the final display, and the big hit symbol form is finally displayed. There may be.

  Further, the first advance notice may be displayed only in one display mode.

  In the order of the third display mode <the second display mode <the first display mode, the big hit symbol mode may be finally determined and displayed easily.

  In addition, the first preview display may be configured to be displayable in three or more display modes.

  Moreover, the easiness of the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol form may not be changed by the display form of the first advance notice display.

Also, “the first preview display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to start the display of the first effect display at the timing,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the first effect display is displayed by the display mode of the first advance notice display.

  Here, in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first display is performed at the first timing than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Only the display of the effect display may be easily started, or the first preview display may be displayed in the first display mode if the first preview display is displayed in the second display mode. Instead of the display of the first effect display at the first timing, the display may be more easily started. In addition, the first effect is displayed at the first timing in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the display may always start easily, and in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Also, the display of the first effect display may be difficult to start at the first timing.

  When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the first effect display may always be started at the first timing, or the first effect at the first timing. The display of the display may not start.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the display of the first effect display may not necessarily start at the first timing, or the first timing display at the first timing. The display of the effect display may be started.

Also, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode [eg, as shown in FIG. 232 (B1) to FIG. (B3) In CUM in-progress display MTY displayed in the default display mode, the background color of the balloon changes to red and ranks up etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even when the first advance notice display is displayed in the first display mode, it may be possible to have an expectation of changing to the second display mode.

  Here, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change only to the second display mode, or the first notice display displayed in the first display mode However, the display mode other than the second display mode may be changed. In addition, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may always change to the second display mode, and the first notice display displayed in the first display mode is the second It may not change to the display mode of.

  In addition, only the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode, or the first displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode The notice display of may also change to the second display mode.

  Note that the display mode of the first advance notice may be changed by the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the display mode is displayed by operating and displaying the operation promotion display including the button image. The display mode may be changed by operating in the back button operation acceptance state where the operation prompting display is not displayed.

  In addition, as a result of other advance notice display being done, the display mode of the first advance notice display may be changed, and the display mode of the first advance notice display may be performed without any effect such as notice notice being performed. May change.

  Further, it may be notified that the display mode of the first advance notice display is changed by the period display.

  In addition, the display mode of the first notice display after change may be notified.

In addition, the “period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 222 (A11), etc.]”.
In the period display, a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which a meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 235 (A6) is red, and a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (A1) In the display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani to be displayed is red, in the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (B1) is red, A display mode in which the second check point CP2 constituting the chance up meter CMT indicating a round shape is red and a display mode in which the background color of the balloon of “START !!” shown in FIG. 236 (D1) is red Display where the princess character HME as a cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown at 236 (E1) is displayed Is a display that may be displayed in the like, etc.],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
The fourth display of the period is the fourth display when the first preview display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, as shown in FIG. 238 (A1) to FIG. 238 (A4), it is easier for the CUM in-progress display MTY to rank up so that the chance up meter CMT is also likely to rank up, etc.)
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where the display mode of the first notice display can have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the third display mode. . Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  Further, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be display modes different in part, or may be all different.

  In addition, in the second display mode, the first preview display is displayed, but in the fourth display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode compared to when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. Only when it is easy to be displayed or when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is better than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. However, display modes other than the fourth display mode may be easily displayed. In addition, in the second display mode, the first preview display is displayed, but in the fourth display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode compared to when the first preview display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be displayed by all means, and the period display is more effective when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be difficult to be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be.

  Moreover, when the advance notice display of the second place is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the fourth display mode, and the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be.

In addition, the period display is more effective when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. Easy to be displayed in the third display mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display indicates the third display mode in comparison with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. May be displayed only in the first display mode, and the first preview display may be displayed in the first display mode as compared to when the first preview display is displayed in the second display mode. The display may be easily displayed even in display modes other than the third display mode. Further, the period display in the third display mode is more in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than in the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be always displayed, and the period display is more effective when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be difficult to be displayed in the third display mode.

  In addition, when the first advance notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode. It may be.

  Moreover, when the first advance notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the third display mode, and the period display is displayed in the third display mode. There may be cases.

  Further, depending on the display mode of the first advance notice display, the display mode of the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode or in the fourth display mode. When the display mode of the advance notice is one, it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or in the fourth display mode.

In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in a final manner than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Cheap,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display variety of the period display may be different, the period display may be noticed as a notice even to a player who does not see the period display.

  Here, even in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm the big hit symbol mode finally as compared with the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Better, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, finally the symbol aspect other than the big hit symbol aspect is also determined and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display aspect It may be easy. In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol mode may eventually be definitely determined and displayed more finally than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. It is also good.

  In addition, when a period display is displayed by a 4th display mode, a big hit symbol may be finally determined and displayed finally, and a big hit symbol may not be finally determined and displayed.

  Moreover, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not necessarily be finally displayed in a final manner, or the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.

In addition, the “period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 222 (A11), etc.]”.
In the period display, a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which a meter portion constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 235 (A6) is red, and a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (A1) In the display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani to be displayed is red, in the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 236 (B1) is red, A display mode in which the second check point CP2 constituting the chance up meter CMT indicating a round shape is red and a display mode in which the background color of the balloon of “START !!” shown in FIG. 236 (D1) is red Display where the princess character HME as a cursor constituting the chance up meter CMT shown at 236 (E1) is displayed Is a display that may be displayed in the like, etc.],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the display mode of the period display may be different, the period display may be noticed as a notice even to a player who does not see the period display.

  Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in display modes other than the third display mode. . Further, the period display may be necessarily displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

  Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

  Further, the third display mode and the fourth display mode may be display modes different in part, or may be all different.

  In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, only the big hit symbol mode may be finally determined and displayed more easily than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. In the fourth display mode, if the period display is displayed, finally the symbol aspect other than the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be determined and displayed than when the period display is displayed in the third display aspect May be In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol mode may eventually be definitely determined and displayed more finally than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally display the jackpot symbol form finally than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. It is also good.

  In addition, when a period display is displayed by a 4th display mode, a big hit symbol may be finally determined and displayed finally, and a big hit symbol may not be finally determined and displayed.

  Moreover, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not necessarily be finally displayed in a final manner, or the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display may be a second preliminary display [for example, the display of the effect EF101 of the flame shown in FIG. 222 (A2), and FIGS. 223 (A3) to (A5) Show a whistle effect shown, display of the effect EF 104 of the explosion shown in FIG. 228 (A2), notice of conversation shown in FIG. 239 (A2) to FIG. (A6), shown in FIG. 239 (B1) to FIG. The notice by the notice icon YI, the notice by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 239 (C1) to the same figure (C2), the notice by the mini game shown in FIG. 239 (D1) to the same figure (D5),
The second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed,
The second notice display is a notice for giving a notice that the first notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to focus attention on period display in stages, and in some cases, it may be possible to gradually increase the sense of expectation.

  Here, only the second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed, or the second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed. The display may also be displayed. In addition, the second notice may be displayed before the first notice is displayed, or the second notice may not be displayed before the first notice is displayed. It is also good.

  In addition, the second notice display may give notice only that the first notice display is displayed, or may give notice of other than the fact that the first notice display is displayed. May be Further, the second notice display may always give notice that the first notice display is displayed, or may not give notice that the first notice display is displayed. .

  In addition, when the second advance notice display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed, or even when the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display may not be displayed. .

In the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed and the first notice display is displayed. Rather, the jackpot symbol form is likely to be finally displayed finalized,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation for the display of the second advance notice.

  Here, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the final notice is displayed rather than when the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display being displayed. Only the big hit symbol form may be easily determined and displayed, or if the first notice is displayed after the second notice is displayed, the second notice is not displayed. Finally, a symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be more easily determined and displayed than when the first advance notice is displayed. In addition, when the first notice is displayed after the second notice is displayed, the final notice is displayed rather than when the second notice is not displayed and the first notice is displayed. The big hit symbol form may be easily confirmed by all means, or if the first notice is displayed after the second notice is displayed, the second notice is not displayed. Finally, the big hit symbol form may be more difficult to be determined and displayed than when the advance notice is displayed.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect may finally be definitely displayed, or the big hit symbol aspect is not finally displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, when the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display being displayed, the big hit symbol aspect may not necessarily be finally displayed in the final display, and the big hit symbol aspect is finally displayed. May be

  Moreover, the easiness of the finalized display of the jackpot symbol aspect may or may not be changed with or without the second preliminary display.

In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed after the first advance display is displayed, the first notification display is not displayed and the period display is finally displayed. Big hit design aspect is easy to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation for the display of the first notice display.

  Here, in the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, finally only the jackpot symbol aspect is displayed than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display being displayed. It may be easy to confirm the display, or when the period display is displayed after the first preliminary display is displayed, the first preliminary display is not displayed and the period display is displayed, Finally, symbol modes other than the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed. In addition, in the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the big hit symbol form is always final as compared to the case where the first notice display is not displayed and the period display is displayed. The finalized display may be easier, or the final display is better if the first display is displayed and then the period display is displayed than if the first display is not displayed and the period display is displayed. There may be a case where the big hit symbol form is not displayed in a definite manner.

  In addition, when the period display is displayed after the first preliminary display is displayed, the big hit symbol form may be finally definitely displayed in the end, or the big hit symbol form may not be finally displayed. May be

  Moreover, when the period display is displayed without displaying the first notice display, the big hit symbol aspect may not necessarily be finally displayed in the final display, and the big hit symbol aspect may be finally displayed. It may be.

In addition, at least a part of the display mode of the first preliminary announcement display and the display mode of the period display are the same display mode [for example, the CUM in-provision display MTY shown in FIG. 222 (A3) and FIG. In the chance up meter CMT shown in), at least the display mode is the same in that the character SBH of Sabohani is arranged, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the player may be able to recall the relevance between the first advance notice display and the period display.

  Here, the display mode of the first advance notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partially the same display mode, or all may be the same display mode.

In addition, the display mode of the first advance notice display and the display mode of the period display are different display modes [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. The display mode is different from the CUM in-provision display MTY shown at least in FIG. 222 (A3) in that the check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to distinguish and recognize the first advance notice display and the period display.

  Here, the display mode of the first advance notice display and the display mode of the period display may be display modes different in part, or may be display modes different in all.

In addition, it is notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the first advance display [for example, FIG. 222 (A3 ) ~ As shown in the figure (A9), it is notified that the reach effect indication will be displayed by giving notice that the chance up meter CMT will perform effects by displaying the CUM in-provision display MTY. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for a big hit by displaying the first notice display.

  Here, it may be notified that only the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first advance display, or the first notification display By notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the, the notification other than the reach effect display may be notified. In addition, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the first advance display, and the first advance display may be displayed. By being notified that the period display is displayed by being displayed, it may not be notified that the reach effect display is displayed.

  Moreover, it may be notified that only the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the first notification display, and the first notification display By being notified that the period display is displayed by being displayed, it may be notified that a display other than the reach effect display may also be displayed.

  Moreover, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed only by being notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the first notification display, or the first notification display It may be notified that it will be displayed reach reach indication other than being notified that it is displayed that the period display will be displayed.

  In addition, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that only the period display is displayed by the first notification display being displayed, or the first notification display may be displayed. It may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the display other than the period display is also displayed by being displayed.

  In addition, it may be notified that the reach effect display is displayed by being notified that the period display is displayed by displaying only the first notice display, and other than the first notice display. It may be notified that the period display is displayed by the display of the advance display of, or that the reach effect display is displayed.

  In addition, "when a notice that a period display is displayed" may be "a case where it is notified that it will be displayed purely from now on", or "a period display "It is an effect accompanying the reach effect display, and it may be the case where the reach effect display is directly foretold and that the period display is indirectly displayed", or " In the case where it is predicted that the display of the period is to be displayed directly and the display of the reach effect display will be performed indirectly.

In addition, the first preview display and the period display may start being displayed in the same symbol variation display [eg, as shown in FIG. 222 (A3) to FIG. MTY and chance up meter CMT are being started during execution of the same symbol variation display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to recognize the time when the period display is displayed.

  Here, the first notice display and the period display may be started only in the same symbol change display, or the first notice display and the period display are started to be displayed in different symbol change displays. There may be cases. In addition, the first notice display and the period display may be always started in the same symbol change display, or the first notice display and the period display may not be started in the same symbol change display. It may be.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed before the temporary stop of one or more decorative symbols, may be displayed before the decorative symbol is in the knowledge state, and reach effect display is started. May be displayed before the time period display is displayed.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.

  Also, the first notice display may be displayed in a symbol change display different from the symbol change display in which the period display is displayed, for example, displayed in the symbol change display before the symbol change display in which the period display is displayed It may be displayed in the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

In addition, the first preliminary display is a display that may start being displayed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the display of the period display is started [eg, FIG. A3) As shown in the figure (A14), the CUM in-provision display MTY is displayed prior to the symbol variation display in which the effect is displayed by the chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the first notice display may function as a pre-reading notice, and it may be possible to have an expectation for the symbol change display to be executed later.

  Here, the first notice display may be started only in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the display of the period display is started, or the period display may be performed. The display may be started also in the symbol change display other than the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the display of is started. In addition, the first notice display may be always started in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the display of the period display is started, or the display of the period display is started. In the symbol variation display performed prior to the symbol variation display to be performed, the display may not be started in some cases.

  In addition, the first advance notice display may be always displayed in the symbol change display prior to the symbol change display in which the period display is displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed with the same symbol fluctuation display as the symbol fluctuation display in which the period display is displayed.

  In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed during symbol stop display, or may be always displayed during symbol stop display.

[The above-mentioned first notice display is a display which is also displayed during the period of symbol stop display [For example, as shown in FIG. 223 (D3) to FIG. (D6), CUM in preparation display MTY is a symbol It is also displayed during stop display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation even during the symbol stop display period.

  Here, the first advance notice may be displayed only during the symbol stop display period, or may be displayed during a period other than the symbol stop display period. Further, the first advance notice may be displayed during the symbol stop display period or may not be displayed during the symbol stop display period.

[The above-mentioned first notice display is a display which becomes non-display during the period of symbol stop display [For example, as shown in FIG. 223 (C3) to FIG. (D7), CUM in preparation display MTY is It is not displayed during symbol stop display etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the first notice display is not displayed during the symbol stop display period, the game may be able to be sharpened.

  Here, the first advance notice may be undisplayed only during the symbol stop display period, or may be undisplayed during the period other than the symbol stop display period. . In addition, the first advance notice may be always hidden during the symbol stop display period, or may not be hidden during the symbol stop display period.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display is started, the first preliminary announcement may be displayed again.

In addition, “the first notice display is a continuous notice [eg, prior to the symbol change display in which the effect is displayed by the chance up meter CMT as shown in FIG. 246 (A1) to FIG. (A16) CUM in-progress display MTY is displayed etc. in each of the multiple times of symbol fluctuation display to be performed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the expectation may be enhanced in some cases by continuously performing the first notice display.

In addition, “the first advance notice display is a display that may be started while the reach effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where the sense of expectation for the reach effect display can be improved.

  Here, the first preliminary display may be started only while the reach effect display is displayed, or may be started while the display other than the reach effect display is displayed. It may be a certain one. In addition, the first preliminary display may be always started while the reach effect display is displayed, or may not be started while the reach effect display is displayed.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed while the reach effect display is being displayed and before a certain period is started, and is displayed before the reach effect display is started. It may be done.

In addition, “the first preliminary announcement display may be displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222 (A3) to FIG. (A4) In addition, CUM preparation display MTY is started before reaching the reach, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming table, by displaying the first notice display before the display of the reach effect display is started, an expectation for the reach effect display in which the period display is displayed is given. Can.

  Here, the first preliminary display may be started only before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. The display may be started. In addition, the first notice display may be necessarily started before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may not be started before the display of the reach effect display is started. It may be one.

  Note that the first preliminary announcement may be started while the reach presentation is displayed, or the display is started before the reach presentation is started, and is also displayed while the reach presentation is displayed. You may

  In addition, the reach effect indication is a combination of normal reach and super reach, and the first preview may be started during execution of normal reach performed before super reach is started, or the reach can be reached Display may be started during symbol variation display before effect display is started, and may be displayed until a period in which normal reach in reach effect display is being performed.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, "Whether the jackpot symbol aspect is finally displayed or the lost symbol aspect is finally displayed is the jackpot determination performed at the start of symbol fluctuation [for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (b) It is configured to be determined by the lottery process per special view, and the result of the big hit determination does not change according to the display mode of the variation icon, and the big hit determination is a starting opening provided in the game board [eg Acquired when the game ball enters the first special view start opening 230, the second special view start opening 232] [for example, acquired in the winning reception process in the winning opening winning process (step S508) shown in FIG. 97] It is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using random numbers [eg special figure 1 winning random number value, special figure 1 random number value, special figure 2 winning random number value, special figure 2 random number value] Big win in the big hit lottery The probability (hereinafter referred to as the "big hit probability") determined to be determined in advance is predetermined [for example, the high probability table for pass / fail judgment shown in FIG. 109 (a) and the low for pass / fail judgment shown in FIG. It is defined in a probability table], and the jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the fluctuation icon. "
I also explained about

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Supplementary Note 1)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying a time until a certain effect is performed,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display that may give notice that the time until the certain effect is started changes.
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, "a certain effect" may be an effect by display or effect moving means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa lighter, a light guide plate, etc.).

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Also, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note 1 or 2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means displaying the second display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 5,
After the timer reaches 0, a different display than the second one is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
If the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit a jackpot than if it is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
The display of one of the multiple displays is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the above-mentioned substitute sign is the effect display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect moving means is a means capable of performing a plurality of types of operations,
One of the plurality of types of motion is a rendering motion,
The certain effect is the effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, operations other than the rendering operation may be executed, and there are, for example, an operation at the time of power on, an initial position returning operation, or a retraction operation as an operation other than the rendering operation. Also, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on the frame (front door), for example.

(Supplementary Note 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
It is easier to make a big hit if the above-mentioned certain effect occurs than if it does not occur,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10, wherein
A hot effect display may be displayed between the display of the first display and the display of the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the displayed period of the period display is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or jackpot. Also, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Supplementary Note 15)
It is the gaming machine described in the supplementary note 14,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third effect display,
There may be cases where the timing at which the third effect display is displayed is not notified by the period display,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a discharge position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing withdrawal of a prepaid card, light emission by an LED, a rendering operation by a character May be performed. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by a period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Supplementary Note 16)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 17)
It is a game console described in Appendix 16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol change (hereinafter referred to as "a lost symbol change") in which the result of the pass / fail judgment is an off-state,
The big hit symbol variation is configured to have a higher frequency at which the third effect display is displayed than the lost symbol variation,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
Equipped with presentation movable means,
The effect movable means is a means which may perform an effect operation,
The game stand characterized in that the turn-out movable means may perform the effect operation while the third effect display is displayed.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 18,
After the period display is not displayed, the period display is in an easily visible state,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19, wherein
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 19, wherein
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 22)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 21,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "2nd timing") which displays a 2nd effect display.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance up is notified in response to the reach may be fixed, such as always reporting the chance up three times when a certain reach occurs and two times whenever another reach occurs, the same reach When it is, the part which reports a chance up may be made to fluctuate so that it may notify three times and may notify only once once. In that case, the case of "informing a lot of timing" may be more likely to be a big hit than in the case of "not giving much notification", or may be easy to lose. Also, the probability of a big hit may not change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances occurring, the easier it will be a big hit.

(Supplementary Note 23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means which may display the period display,
The second image display means is an image display means which may perform a rendering operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 14 to 23,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 25)
It is a game console provided with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The period display is a display displayed for a certain period during reach,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 1st presentation display may be displayed,
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 26)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display,
According to the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the second display changes at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 27)
It is a game console described in Appendix 26,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which the display mode of at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 28)
It is a game console described in Appendix 26 or 27,
The second display may be displayed while the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 28,
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Also, the third display may have a higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have a higher reliability than the third display.

(Supplementary note 30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 29, wherein
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a display of a first type,
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display,
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Supplementary Note 31)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The first type of display is a timer advance display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer advance notice display is a notice for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 32)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
Equipped with operating means,
The display of the first type is the display of the operation effective period,
The said operation effective period display is a display which shows the period which makes operation of the said operation means effective,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 33)
It is a game stand described in appendix 30,
The first type of display is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The said period display is a display which may alert | report the timing (henceforth a "1st timing") which there is a possibility that the said 2nd effect display may be displayed in a 1st period,
The first timing is reported from the start to the end of the first period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 33, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 35)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
The display of one of the plurality of displays is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be performed,
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in a first display mode,
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 36)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger than the first display size;
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 37)
It is a game console described in Appendix 35 or 36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 38)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein
When the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 39)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 37, wherein
When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed than when the first display mode is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 40)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 35 to 39, wherein
The start and end of the countdown display is performed within a period of one symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 41)
40. A game console according to any one of appendices 35 to 40, wherein
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 42)
It is a game stand described in appendix 41,
Even during the movement of the countdown display, the notification of the time by the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 43)
It is a game stand described in appendix 41,
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 44)
Supplementary note 35 to 43, wherein the gaming machine is any one of the following.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification is given indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 is performed by the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 45)
It is a game console described in Appendix 44,
When the time until the certain effect is performed is 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 45, wherein
There is also a case where it does not change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 47)
Supplementary note 35 to 46, wherein the gaming machine according to any one of
The display means comprises a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
In some cases, the countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 48)
It is a game console described in Appendix 47,
The second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 49)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 48, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 50)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 48, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 51)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying a first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased before the first timing after the display of the first display starts.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 52)
It is a game stand described in Appendix 51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the third display starts.
During display of the third display, the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 53)
It is a game console described in Appendix 52,
The third display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 54)
It is a game console described in Appendix 53,
In the case where the third display is displayed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol finally than when the third display is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 55)
Appendices 52 to 54, wherein the game console according to any one of
It is equipped with effect moving means capable of performing multiple types of motions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a rendering operation,
The first operation may be performed while the third display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 56)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 55,
The first display is configured to be displayed again after the first display is erased,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 57)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 55, wherein
After the first display is erased, the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time elapses.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 58)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 55,
The first display is configured to be redisplayed before the certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary note 59)
It is a game console as described in any one of supplementary notes 51 to 58,
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 60)
It is a game stand as described in any one of appendixes 51 to 59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 61)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices 51 to 60, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 62)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification in which the timing at which a certain effect is performed is performed by updating the display of the countdown display.
The display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 63)
It is a game console described in Appendix 62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 64)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note 63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger between the first display size and the second display size.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 64, wherein
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 66)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 65, wherein
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 67)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 65, wherein
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode It is easier for the final display of the big hit design,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 68)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 67, wherein
The display of the first display is started and ended during execution of one pattern variation display,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 69)
Appendices 62 to 68, wherein the game console according to any one of
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 70)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a game console.

(Appendix 71)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note 69 or 70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display is changed by the movement display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 72)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
Even during the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is continued,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 73)
It is the gaming machine described in appendix 71,
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 74)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 73, wherein
The countdown display is a display of a countdown of time,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 75)
It is a game console described in Appendix 74,
The timing notification is a notification that indicates that the timing at which the certain effect is performed is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 76)
It is a game console described in Appendix 74 or 75,
After the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 77)
It is a game console described in Appendix 76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When the indication indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown indication, the countdown indication is configured to be erased after the second indication is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 78)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices 62 to 77, wherein
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 79)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 80)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 79, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 62 to 79, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A1)
It is a game console provided with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays.
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , High expectations of the jackpot,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, it is more than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state , High expectations of the jackpot,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A2)
In the game console described in Appendix A1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is more than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state high,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A1 or A2, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, and
The game console characterized in that the first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped.

(Appendix A4)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The fourth meter display is a display started to be displayed in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A5)
It is a game stand according to any one of appendices A1 to A4,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may start being displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may start being displayed in the second state,
The expectation of the jackpot is higher in the case where the display is started in the second state than in the case where the display of the first meter is started in the first state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein
Among the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by the first icon being displayed a first number of times,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state by the first icon being displayed a second number of times,
The second number is a number less than the first number.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A6, wherein
One of the plurality of displays is a big hit display,
The third state in the first meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state of display showing that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the sixth state is displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A8)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A7,
The second state of the first meter display is a state of display indicating that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a state of display showing that the big hit display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the fifth state is displayed,
The big hit display is easier to be displayed when the fifth state is displayed than the second state,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a pseudo-sequence effect,
The pseudo-series advance notice is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A9, wherein
One display of the plurality of types of displays is an operation prompting display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A10, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a certain effect,
The certain effect is a effect in which the big hit display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A12)
A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports the start of a certain period in the period when a reach production display is performed,
The said period display is a display which alert | reports a 1st timing during display of the said reach production display,
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is displayed,
The preliminary display is a display for notifying that the first timing is notified by the period display,
The notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A13)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A12,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
By moving the cursor display from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) from the first position to the third position (end position), from the start to the end of the first period is notified. Is configured and
The second position is a position before the first position,
The first position is a position before the third position,
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A14)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13,
The period display is a display in which a chance up display (first chance up display) may be displayed,
The chance-up display is a display for notifying that the first effect display has been started at the first timing,
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A14, wherein
The said period display is a display which may perform movement display.
A game console that is long.

(Appendix A16)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15,
The movement display is performed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A17)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A15 or A16,
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the period display changes.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A17,
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
When the advance notice is displayed in the second display mode, the final hit (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) is larger than when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode It is easy to confirm the symbol form,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A19)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18,
The first effect display when the first timing is reached when the preliminary display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first display mode is displayed. Is easy to get started,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A20)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A18 or A19,
The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A20, wherein
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (e.g., a default),
One of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter),
In the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A22)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A21,
Depending on the display mode of the advance notice display, it is not understood whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or displayed in the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A23)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note A21 or A22,
The period display is easier to be displayed in the fourth display mode when the advance display is displayed in the second display mode than when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A24)
It is a game stand as described in any one of supplementary notes A21 to A23,
The period display is easier to be displayed in the third display mode when the advance display is displayed in the first display mode than when the advance display is displayed in the second display mode. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A24, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a second preview display,
The above-mentioned notice display is the first notice display,
In some cases, it may be notified that the first notice display is displayed by the second notice display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A26)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25,
The symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than when the first preliminary display is not notified by the second preliminary display.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A26,
If the advance notice is displayed before the period display is displayed, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the advance notice is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A28)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The preliminary display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display different from the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A29, wherein
By notifying that the reach effect display is displayed by the advance display, it is notified that the period display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A31)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A30, wherein
The preliminary display may be performed with the same symbol variation display as the period display,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A32)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A31, wherein
The preliminary display may be performed in a symbol change display prior to the symbol change display in which the period display is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A33)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A32, wherein
The advance notice is also displayed during a period in which symbol stop display is performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A32, wherein
The advance notice is not displayed during the period in which the symbol stop display is performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A35)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A12 to A34, wherein
The preliminary display is a display that may be displayed while the reach effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix A36)
The preliminary display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started,
A game stand characterized by

  It should be noted that what is described as the variation display of the decorative symbol in the above may be the variation display of the symbol (more specifically, the special figure), and the description that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol is described is the symbol (more Specifically, it may be a stop display of the special figure).

  In addition, "may be" may be replaced with "always", "always be", or "always become", etc., and "○ possible" in the above is It may be replaced by "must be xxx".

  FIG. 254 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 254, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  It should be noted that an embodiment may be adopted in which the display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and described above, and the display means 903 is further provided with a touch panel. May be That is, the touch panel provided in the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect relating to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation or long press operation with the touch panel, or in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is being continuously touched. In addition, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous hitting function. In addition, in a part of the effects, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to be less . Further, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel and the effect is performed by the touch panel, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured to be ineffective in many cases, or may be configured to be less. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 254 is used by enclosing a sphere and circulating the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, wherein the enclosed sphere is used as a firing sphere and the balls are dispensed May be implemented by credit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255, a slot machine (rotary gaming machine) as a game console applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 255 is an appearance perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 255 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of kinds of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 255) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel back light (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded by each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitter and a light receiver is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line. Hereinafter, a pay line to be valid may be called a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed 3 It is supposed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted from the medal insertion port 1041 (insertion operation). It is. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the number-of-payouts display 1027 are formed of seven-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 whose rotation has been started by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop button 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 as an example of the operation means is provided. The chance button 1100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting gaming history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of vouchers is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiver 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , The effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  As shown in FIG. 256 (a), the gaming machine according to the present invention inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

Fifth Embodiment
Hereinafter, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 257 to 345. Note that the enclosed type refers to an enclosed type game machine or the like that cyclically uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. The symbols shown in FIGS. 257 to 345 are basically used only for the description using FIGS. 257 to 345, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 257 to 345. In the description using the above, the codes shown in FIG. 257 to FIG. 345 have priority. On the other hand, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 257 to 345 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 256, and vice versa. It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in to the technical ideas shown in FIG. In that case, what attaches | subjects the same code | symbol may be handled as the same component, and may be able to be substituted.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 259) as an external structure. . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Moreover, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame It is a door member which made the opening part. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, the light source as an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like is a lamp if it emits light. , And one that emits light corresponds to an example of the light emitting means.

  The game area 124 (see FIG. 259) is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the door opening sensor 609 (refer FIG. 260) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmitting unit 190. The transmitting unit 190 includes a transmitting portion 191 different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmitting portion 191 can be pivoted in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the lower part. In addition, the transmitting unit 190 incorporates a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 257 is in the initial position. The transmitting portion 191 functions as an operating means (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 (see FIG. 259) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to emit light, a. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of the operation means. The chance button 136 is also an example of the movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 257 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, this chance button 136 is capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launcher 110 is attached below the main body 104, and is not shown in the figure, where the ball launch handle 134 is operated by the player to pivot the launcher (not shown) and the gaming ball is struck at the tip of the launcher. And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 258 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 257 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at an upper opening on the back upper side of the pachinko machine 100, and the ball tank 150 is positioned below the ball tank 150 at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 can play a game by this configuration. Pay out the ball to the disabled person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 259 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 259 is a so-called right-hand game board. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. In a game board of a generally known right-handed game machine, changing the strength to launch the game ball by the operation of the player allows the general drawing start port 228 and the second special view start port 232, which will be described later, and It can be divided into 1 special figure starting port 230. Specifically, with respect to the game area 124, the game ball rolling on the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special view start port 230 by the arrangement of the game nail 238 or the like is the second The game ball rolling on the second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special view start opening 232 is configured such that entering the special view start opening 232 is difficult or impossible, and vice versa 1) It is difficult or impossible to enter the ball into the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 equipped with a right-handed game board, and can be widely applied to pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed to the left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N disposed on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The second decorative symbol display device The length in the width direction of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height thereof is also short. However, the display screen of each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 has the right end side portion overlapping the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and similarly the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end side of the portion 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Also, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 259 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (the first decorative symbol display device 208L Position away from the left side). In addition, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (rightward toward the first decorative symbol display device 208L (A position away from). Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions of coming close to or separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may integrally rotate along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they come closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed as the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It should be added here that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol It is also possible to perform variable display of or perform multiple types of effect display. Furthermore, the number of decorative symbol display devices is not limited, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine provided with only one, or may be a pachinko machine provided with only two, 4 It may be a pachinko machine provided with one or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG. 259.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a lens cut in the transmission area. An irradiation means (a light emitter) such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light irradiated from the irradiation means is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, whereby the transmission area is predetermined It is configured to be able to look like emitting light with a pattern of. For example, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut of a pattern in which the face of the character is shaped, and a lens cut of a pattern in which an effect image is simulated. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion that refracts light toward the player is smaller than the thickness of the portion that emits light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Also, the light guide plate may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol The hold lamp 218, the second special symbol hold lamp 220, and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". Details of the rendering device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and are configured by liquid crystal display devices here. The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, reel (drum) type display devices, leaf type display devices, plasma displays, and projectors may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in this case, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs here. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are symbol display means. In addition, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). Here, holding a common drawing fluctuation game up to a predetermined number (for example, two) Is possible. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) which are being held, and here, the predetermined number of special view fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning openings 226 are disposed on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry into the general winning openings 226 (when winning in the general winning openings 226) The payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls into the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be referred to as being distinguished as the "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be distinguished from the "rental ball". It may be called a ball (game ball).

  The general drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Here, one on the right side of the game board 200 It is arranged. For this reason, the common view starting opening 228 is expected to enter the game ball by hitting the right. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  Only one first special view start port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 258 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper dish. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  Only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view starting opening 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting the right. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning opening) provided at the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special view start opening 230. In addition, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special view starting opening 232, and entering the ball by hitting the right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 also has a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 which can be opened and closed by the solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234, 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game is started when the big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between the open state and the closed state repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 maintains a closed state until a big hit game is started when a big hit occurs in the power support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state repeat. That is, in any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the second open / close state (here, open) in which the game ball is easier to win than in the predetermined first open / close state (here, closed state) and the first open / close state. The variable winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one of the states) to the other, winning the special figure fluctuation game in the non-power support state, and the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the big hit symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the power support state, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval, a predetermined number of times. Open and close. The closed state does not necessarily have to be completely closed in any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and it may be a state in which the game ball can not enter or is difficult even if it is slightly open. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the center variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball for the upper dish Discharge to 126. The ball entering the central variable winning hole 234 and the ball entering the right variable winning hole 235 are also guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the gaming island side.

  According to the arrangement of the common drawing start opening 228, the first special view start opening 230, the second special view start opening 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the power support state, the right A hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player, and in the non-power support state, a left hit is a hit that is advantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable) Whether to win in the winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special view starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) or without winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or Only by passing through, it reaches the out port 240.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the gaming ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N described above are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely opened (fully open), the player can view a part or all of the display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at any positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L To the extent that the player can identify, it is possible to shield only a part of the decoration pattern. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Shield all of the Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are effect display means, are also a shielding means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and also an effect movable means.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  In addition, the above-mentioned chance button 136 which can perform advancing / retracting operation, and the permeation | transmission part 191 which can be rotated in the front-back direction are also 1 type of effect movable means.

  Further, as the effect movable means, a not-shown family crest 224E (see FIG. 270 etc.) is prepared here. The family crest 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest 224E starts its operation, it rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (the player side). In the initial position, the family crest 224E is less visible to the player than in the state where it is overlapped with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  Here, although the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be one common circuit board other than the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 is controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub-control means (400), second sub-control means (500). ), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as the control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. One combination of the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can also be regarded as a second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the sensor and the bottom plate full-tank sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a common view display device 21 Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the various status display unit 328 (for example, general drawing hold lamp 216, first special view holding lamp 218, second special view holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222, etc.) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member such as blade member 2321 of second special view starting port 232, door member 2341 of central variable winning hole 234, door member 2351 of right variable winning hole 235, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 which are driven to open and close is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special drawing start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Also, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special drawing start opening 232 has a ball, the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing start opening 232 is the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to second special drawing start port 232, which is built in random number generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302, which indicates that the voltage has dropped if the voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, and the main control unit 300 constantly transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information, Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400 The first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is stored in the ROM 406 is connected.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative symbol Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N, and position detection sensor 430 detecting the current position of each of second decorative symbol display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N Detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, the detection unit 710 for the position detection sensor 430, the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 181 From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 which outputs the The image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 is read based on the signal, and a display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436, and the image is displayed on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L・ The processor) is connected.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation, a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in forward and backward directions, Yatsushiro character 224Fa, general character 224Fb, and family crest character 224E) Based on drive circuits 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E, detection signals from various movable means sensors 424 And a sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502. The basic circuit 502 further includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542; A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, but the second sub-control unit 500 controls the image display of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls various moving means 136, 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, and 224 E may be controlled, or any one sub-control unit may perform both controls.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 260, the display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 257 is also performed by the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door opening command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. In addition, even when there is a payout error or the like, the payout control unit 600 transmits an error command to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door open command, the detection signal of the door open sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without passing through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Alternatively, the door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first auxiliary control unit 400. The emission control unit 630 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via the other control units (main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, etc.) and respective devices. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via each of the other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage substantially simultaneously from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main control unit 300 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The first auxiliary control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300 or at least one of them.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be The second auxiliary control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660.

  In the island facility provided in the game machine installation sales office, the 100 V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24 V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with 24 V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300 into a 12V DC voltage. Although not shown in FIG. 260, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC voltage of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5 V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit. Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12 V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9 V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, through which a 12 V DC current flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. It corresponds to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the inputted 24 V AC current as it is or converts it into a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, a current of an operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 reaches the voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, the CPU 304 outputs a reset signal from the WDT 314. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a runaway state due to a program error, or a case where the CPU 304 can not perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraud, or the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power failure and immediate recovery, ie, automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is performed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. Subsequently, security check processing is performed. The security check process recalculates whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct or not. If the authentication code is correct, extension processing is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained at the state before reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described using FIGS. 261 (a) to (c). The types of the special view and the common view to be stopped and displayed will be described. FIG. 261 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the symbol variation display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2. After that, a confirmation display for maintaining the display is performed for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms).

  Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special figure 1 and the finalization of the final display, or after the "variation display of special figure 2" is started The period from the stop display of the stop symbol form of 2 to the end of the confirmation display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 261 (a), ten types of special views from "special view A" to "special view J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 261 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, as described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination as to whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different between the two, and even in the same state By providing the special drawing G "," special drawing H "and" special drawing F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 261 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decorative 1" to "decorative 10" as the decorative designs here. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are detected on the condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball enters the second special view start aperture 232. In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, the order of "decorative 1" → "decorative 2" → "decorative 3" → ... "decorative 9" → "decorative 10" → "decorative 1" → ... in order Switch the display with and perform "Modified Display of Decorative Pattern". At the beginning of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol changes at high speed (scrolling display) for each symbol display area. And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined up three times To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 259 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  In addition, one decorative symbol display device or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a fifth symbol It may be displayed. The fifth pattern is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 261 (b) may be reduced, or the display pattern of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 261 (b) may be a different number. When the fifth symbol is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also symbol display It is a kind of means. When the fifth symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fifth symbol is displayed in an area out of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  Furthermore, the fourth design may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to M. The fourth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol representing that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or being displayed in the stop state.

FIG. 261 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 261 (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 260 will be described using FIG. 262 (a). In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 260, a counter for generating a big hit special decision random number counter initial value, a big hit special shot decision random number counter, and a small hit special win for each special view 1 and 2 Counter for generating random number counter initial value for special drawing determination, counter for small drawing special drawing determination, counter for generation of random number counter initial value for special drawing determination, random number counter for special drawing determination for lost time special drawing timer, and special drawing timer Each counter of the random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, in the RAM 308, the number of reservations, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for big hit special figure determination, the random number value for small hit special figure determination, the special time special figure decision for each special figure 1 and special figure 2 A random number value, a success / failure predetermination result, a special figure predetermination result, a success / failure decision result, a special figure determination result, and a special figure timer determination result are stored. Furthermore, in the RAM 308, the reserve storage unit of the special figure divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas that can reserve the start of the determination of acceptance (lottery) separately is made separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is prepared. In the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value, the big hit special figure 1 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 1 decision random number value, and the lost time special figure 1 random number value for decision The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored one set at a time in the winning order (holding order) for each area. In addition, in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2, for the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value, the big hit special figure 2 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random number value, and the lost time special figure 2 decision The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 260 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 262A according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initialization of the I / O 310, and various kinds of storage in the RAM 308 as initialization 1. It initializes variables, permits operations to the WDT 314, and sets initial values. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 causes the power management unit 660 to operate via the second sub control unit 500 as the main control unit. It is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to the WDT processing, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), Perform setting 2. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  Next, in step S103, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process here, three initial values for generating initial values of the random number counter for big hit special figure determination, the random number counter for small hit special figure decision, and the random number counter for lost special order decision Update the value generation counter. After the basic random number initial value updating process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer number determination for each of the special and common figures, and any of these counters is capable of determining a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate random numbers for In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After completion of the effect random number update processing, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 260 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in about 4 ms). The main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of this timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, or WDT 314 is periodically (for example, once in about 2 ms which is the cycle of main controller timer interrupt). ) Or restart.

  First, in step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 260 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor presence / absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information of the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 260, winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before the previous time, presence of a previous detection signal, and presence of a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special view start opening 230, and the second special view start opening 232 entering the ball, or It is determined that the drawing start port 228 has been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. In addition, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal) is stored. Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value updating process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number updating process (step S205), the values of various random number counters are updated. The value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. For example, every time the random number counter for big hit special figure 1 determination makes one rotation, the value of the generation counter is set to the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same applies to other random number counters.

  In step S207, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the first special view display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the prize determination process (step S209), first, when there are prizes in the prize openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 provides an award for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value of the ball number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and it is set as the original ball number storage area.

  Subsequently, in the prize determination processing, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has a prize, and the number of the special figure fluctuation games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) And stores predetermined start information. That is, if the number of reservations is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random number value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 260 (for example, acquired value + R register value + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 260, the special drawing determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 which performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the start information deriving means. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as one set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (order of holding) in the holding storage unit of the special view provided in the RAM 308. The reserve storage unit of this special view has a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this case) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232. It corresponds to an example of the start information storage means which can be stored up to. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the reserve storage unit of the special view. In this case, the temporary area is started It may be used as information storage means, or it may be used as a start information storage means for the suspension storage unit and the temporary area of the special view. Also, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations of the special view stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reservations of the special view increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, and the number of common drawing fluctuation games being held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the common drawing wins at that timing. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area different from that for special drawing provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing win random number value which is start information.

  Also, in this winning determination process, to a first special view start opening 230, a second special view start opening 232, a common view start opening 228, a central variable winning opening 234, or a right variable winning opening 235 by a predetermined ball detection sensor The first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port 232, the common view starting port 228, and the center variable in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400 when a winning (entering) is detected. The winning a prize reception information indicating the presence or absence of a winning (entering) of the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  If the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

  When the winning determination process (step S209) is completed, the pre-reading process is called. In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased since the pre-reading process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of pending calls (the number of pending calls at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which will be referred to as the old pending number). The number of holdings at the time of executing the pre-reading processing of this time after the winning a prize judgment processing (step S209) is compared with the number of old holdings, and it is determined whether the number of holdings increases. If the number of reservations has not increased, this prefetch process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations is increased, the amount of increase in the random number value for the special view 1 jackpot determination in the special storage 1 of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read ahead, or The amount of increase in the random number value for the big hit judgment in Figure 2 is read ahead. In the look-ahead reading here, only the amount of increase may be read ahead, but all may be read ahead. In addition, although pre-reading here means reading start information prior to the pass / fail determination (this lottery), but in the subsequent pre-reading processing, the word “pre-reading” is the result of ahead (the result of pass / fail determination (this lottery) Sometimes used in the sense of reading).

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, the control state is either one of the special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and the relatively high special figure high probability state. Being in the special figure high probability state is called probability fluctuation. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a positive change flag is prepared. When this probability fluctuation graph is set to ON, it is a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and when the probability fluctuation graph is set to OFF, it is a special figure low probability state.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-qualification decision table used in the pre-reading process. In this success / failure predetermination table, a random number range is defined by being divided into the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is finished, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value It is determined as to which random number range in the table for belonging. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the random number value for special figure 1 big hit determination or special figure 2 big hit determination random number read ahead is a predetermined numerical range. At times, the success / failure predetermination result is pre-determined as "big hit", and when other than that, the success / failure pre-determination result is pre-determined as "loss". In the special drawing related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 262 (b)) described later, the success or failure judgment of the special drawing fluctuation game is performed again using the same table for the success or failure judgment as the content of the success or failure prior judgment table. The determination result here is the result of the prior determination.

  If the judgment result of the success or failure is "big hit", the big hit time special figure 1 determination random value in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2 A big hit special look 2 random number value for decision is preread. If the success / failure predetermination result is "small hit", the small hit time special figure 1 determination random value in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserve storage of the special figure 2 Look for a small-hit special figure 2 determination random number value in the department. If the result of the pass / fail judgment is “loss”, the random number value for special figure 1 determination at the time of loss in the reserve storage unit of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserve storage unit of special figure 2 When reading out, the random number value for determination of the special figure 2 is read ahead. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special-image prior determination table used in the prefetching process. A random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol forms (“Special figure A” to “Special figure J”) shown in FIG. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 261 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. In addition, the determination result of the special view here is also a result of prior determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of the special view is also performed again in the special figure related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. .

  The pre-reading of the start information described above and the prior determination using the pre-read start information are performed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special-pattern related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 jackpot determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information prefetching means, and the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value and various The main control unit 300 for prefetching the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of the second start information prefetching means. In addition, the main control unit 300 performing predetermination based on the special figure 1 jackpot determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first prior determination means, and is for the special figure 2 jackpot determination The main control unit 300 which performs the prior determination based on the random number value and the random numbers for determination of various special views 2 corresponds to an example of the second prior determination means.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage unit for the special view 1 divided into areas for each hold, and a prefetch information temporary storage unit for the special view 2 similarly divided into areas for each hold. It is done. Information representing the special-figure preliminary determination result (also information representing the special-figure and hereinafter referred to as pre-reading information) is stored in the corresponding hold area of the pre-reading information temporary storage unit.

  It should be noted that if the number of reservations has not increased, the prefetch information “no suspension” is stored in the corresponding suspension area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Also, in the pre-reading process, when a big hit is in progress, and when the current control state is the power support state (the short time flag is on), pre-reading and pre-judging of start information of the special figure 1 is performed. No, in these cases, "undetermined" information indicating that the predetermination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the special view 1 that has been read is not performed, the corresponding hold area of the read-ahead information temporary storage unit Remember to That is, based on having entered the starting opening where the pair of wing members 2321 is not provided (the first special view starting opening 230 whose state is a fixed starting area), it is acquired during the big hit game and during the power support Pre-judgment based on the start information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading advance notice) of the pre-judgment result is not performed. By doing this, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, pre-reading of starting information itself is not done, but pre-reading does not do pre-judgment and the result (the pre-reading notice) it does not do pre-judgment and pre-judging. The notification (pre-reading advance notice) of may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 262 (b), a general drawing related process is performed following the winning determination process of step S209 (step S211). In this common drawing related processing, first, as common drawing state update processing, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state is performed. For example, in the process during the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the lighting / lighting drive control which repeats turning on and off of the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeated. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (common drawing A shown in FIG. 261 (c) and lost symbol) The on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the common-diagram display device 210 is performed so as to display any one display mode of the common-diagram B shown in FIG. 261 (c). Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas are prepared in which various settings are performed in various processes, not limited to the general drawing related process here. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs finalized display of either symbol pattern of the hit symbol or the lost symbol. After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the hit symbol displayed in a definite manner is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, the common drawing loss flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set.

  Subsequently, in this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuating game and the second special drawing starting opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the common drawing being held. When the number of fluctuation games is one or more, the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is won or not by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number value stored in the above random number storage area In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 262 (b), the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the general drawing related process of step S211 described above. In this special drawing related processing, first, special drawing status update processing (special drawing 2 status update processing) for special drawing 2 is performed, and then, the special drawing status update processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 status update) Process). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step S233), and then the process is ended.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory time elapses (the time when value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), in special figure related lottery process which it mentions later The 7 segment LED constituting the second special view display device 214 is turned on / off drive control based on the special view determination result (the special design stop symbol form), and special view 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308 Make settings to represent things. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special figure C), and a short time symbol (special Figure D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first lost symbol (special A finalized display of any one of the figure I) and the first lost symbol (special figure J) is performed. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game. In addition, when the value is set in the number-of-charges storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shorts, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state) or during the small hit game, the time saving flag is turned off. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the non-power support state (first approach rate control state) when in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special game state).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that general command rotation stop setting transmission processing is to be executed in command setting transmission processing (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping variable display is The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that it is special view 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

  A big hit flag is also prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, the first decoration symbol display device 208L displays an image notifying the player of a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, starting the big hit game. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect presentation start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the central variable winning hole 234 or the right variable winning hole 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning hole 234 or the door member of the right variable winning hole 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 308 (for 1.5 seconds, for example) to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 and provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) The effect is stored in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to stand by for a period during which the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like displays an image notifying the player of the end of the game. Set the information indicating the waiting period.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / close state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the big hit gaming state (special gaming state) It corresponds to an example of the variable winning combination control means which controls. The open / close patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the ROM 306 to select the open / close pattern according to the success or failure determination of the special view fluctuation game. get.

  In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol aspect represented by the special drawing determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on when the special drawing determination result is “special drawing A” or “special drawing C” in the special drawing lottery process described later. . Further, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing E", only the definite change flag is set to ON among the definite change flag and the time saving flag. Furthermore, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing B" or "special drawing D", only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON and the number of times of electricity support stored in RAM 308 is stored. Set the number of charge support times 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special view start opening 232 (variable start area) is controlled, It corresponds to an example of the approach rate changing means for changing between the non-power support state which is the approach rate control state and the power support state which is the second approach rate control state.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, a lost flag is prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is lost, the lost flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, it is made to shift to the next process without doing anything.

  When the special view 2 state update process is completed, the special view 1 state update process is performed. In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed this time. In the special figure related lottery process, a process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first, and thereafter, a process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this manner, the main control unit 300 performs the special view 2 related lottery process prior to the special view 1 related lottery process, thereby achieving the same timing (the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at a predetermined timing) In the case where the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special view start opening 230 in S209) and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special view start opening 232 Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variation game are satisfied at the same time, or the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variation game are satisfied Even when there is a special figure 2 variation game is moving first, the special figure 1 variation game does not start to change. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special view fluctuation game by the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 is performed by the main control unit 300, and the winning of the second special view start opening 232 Based on the result of lottery based notification, it is carried out prior to the result notification of the lottery based on the winning to the first special figure starting port 230, as starting information and special drawing 1 of the special figure 1 as starting information where the lottery is not performed When only the start information of the special view 1 among the start information of 2 remains, if the start information of the special view 2 is newly stored, it is based on the start information of the special view 2 which is newly stored. Notification of the result of the lottery is performed prior to notification of the result of the lottery based on the start information of the special view 1 already stored. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the lottery means (the pass / fail judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, execution of a lottery (judgment determination), determination of a special view to be stopped and determination, and determination of a timer number are performed. First, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not established. Here, it is determined whether the second special view display device 214 is in the special view variation display or in the stop display, and when any of the display is in the main control unit timer interrupt processing If the display is not in any display, it is judged whether it is set during special drawing operation or not during special drawing operation, and if it is set during special drawing operation, main control unit timer interrupt processing If it is set in the special view non-operation state, it means that the yes / no decision prohibit condition is not established, and it is then decided whether or not the predetermined yes / no decision condition is met. The determination here refers to the holding storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether the number of holdings of the special view 2 variation game is greater than zero. If the number of reservations is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and if it is 1 or more, the predetermined yes / no determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, a random number value for one set, which is start information stored most in the past, from the holding storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308 The random number value for big hit special figure 2 decision, the random number value for small hit special figure 2 decision, and the random number value for lost time special figure 2 decision) are extracted and the start information (randomness) still stored in the reserve storage unit Move the set of numbers) from the area currently stored to the next area. In other words, if the start information stored in the past is taken out from the hold storage unit of Special Figure 2 and if the start information is stored in the hold storage unit of Special Figure 2, then the Nth oldest start information is held It is set as the (N-1) th oldest start information in the storage unit. Further, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. One set of random numbers from the reserve storage section of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value, big hit special figure 2 decision random number value, small hit special figure 2 decision random number value, and lost time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of the second start information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a table for deciding on a pass / fail is also stored. The contents of the success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the success / failure predetermination table described above. In this success / failure determination process, the random number value for the special figure 2 big hit determination is in the table for determining success or failure according to the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 Based on which of the random number ranges of the above, "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is derived as the result of the pass / fail determination. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving "big hit", "small hit", or "lost" is equivalent to a success or failure judgment (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the success or failure judgment processing here is a lottery means (a probability judgment means). Corresponds to one example. Also, "big hit" corresponds to an example of a specific result of the pass / fail judgment.

  When execution of the propriety determination processing is completed, it proceeds to the symbol determination processing of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing determination table. The contents of this special drawing determination table are the same as the contents of the special drawing prior determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the success or failure determination result is "big hit", the random number value for big figure special figure 2 determination belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table, when the big hit. The special drawing determination result is determined to be "special drawing A" to "special drawing F". In addition, when the success or failure determination result is "small hit", the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table belongs to the small figure special figure 2 determination random number value. It is determined to be “special figure G” or “special figure H”. Furthermore, if the result of the success or failure determination is “loss”, the special drawing determination result is “specially determined based on which random number range in the special drawing determination table belongs to the special drawing 2 determination table. Decide on figure I or "special figure J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determination process of the special drawing corresponds to an example of the symbol determination means.

  Subsequent to the symbol determination processing of the special drawing, in the fluctuation time determination processing, the fluctuation display period in the fluctuation stop display of the special drawing is determined. In this fluctuation time determination process, the timer number determination random number is acquired from the timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation start, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. A timer number determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each of the special figure determination results. The timer number is the time from when the second special view display device 214 or the first special view display device 212 starts changing the symbols until it displays the stop symbol representing the result of the pass / fail determination, that is, the special view changes display Represents a fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), but may be a fluctuation table time period of a decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257, timers of timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, and the super-shortened special figure fluctuation time is reached. It means to become. In addition, what is determined by timer 1 or timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 has a special drawing fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 259 is without reach.

  The timer 4 represents that the special drawing fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the reach pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as normal reach. With normal reach, decoration symbols with two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 259) are generally displayed in a stopped state (strictly, temporarily stopped) (a first stop and a second stop are performed) ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area being variably displayed is a specific symbol (symbol display area being stopped) It is a state where it will be stopped and displayed the combination of a predetermined big hit symbol if the stop indication (the third stop or the final stop) is the same as the symbol. The timer 5 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as Super Reach. The Super Reach is a product that improves presentation effects by adding a special variable display etc. to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the ornamental symbol in the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. When it is determined to be timer 8, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is selected as full rotation reach Ru. The probability that the timer 8 is selected is extremely lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the Premier Reach.

  In addition, when it only says reach, it means the change pattern of the decoration design including normal reach, super reach, and special change.

  The reach is determined after the success or failure determination that the result of the success / failure determination (main lottery) in the special drawing related process is a specific success / failure determination result (a predetermined result with high player's degree of advantage) It is a notice effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the success or failure judgment, and whether or not the reach is to be performed is determined after the judgment on the success or failure.

  In the fluctuation time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired random number for timer number determination belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number in accordance with the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the current special figure 2 as well as the timer number determination random number is also available. The timer number may be determined based on the above.

  The timer number representing the special drawing fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  In addition, before special figure lottery related processing is executed (for example, the above-mentioned winning a prize decision processing S209), from the plural types timer selection table which includes the timer number which is 1 or plural period information, to the special figure advance decision result Alternatively, one type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. Also in the determination of the timer number here, a lottery may be performed by a dedicated random number (for example, a timer number determination random number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined already without performing the lottery. . Further, the timer selection table may be selected in the special view lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

  When the fluctuation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process is ended.

  Subsequently, in the special drawing related processing, the special drawing 1 related lottery processing is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it.

  As described above, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds per minute specification command, big winning opening open command, big winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type), such as a clear command, a special figure hold increase command, and a general view hold increase command, which can specify the type of command).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information representing a special figure stop symbol, information representing a control state (information representing a setting state of a time saving flag and a probability variation flag), and information representing a timer number in the command data In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, it includes information representing a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc., and in the case of a prize effect start command and an end effect start command In the case of the hit round number designation command, the control state information is included, and the hit round number is included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning to the central variable winning opening 234 And the presence or absence of a winning on the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 as command data (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, information representing a timer number, hold The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are done is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc. is set as command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information representing a special drawing determination result, information representing a control state, the number of pending first special drawing fluctuation games or second special drawing fluctuation games, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to a big hit game start command. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418 and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, and information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game that are held are set. The first sub control unit 400 having received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 having received the termination effect control command displays an image on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like to notify the player that the predetermined termination effect period (for example, 3 seconds) is to end, ie, the big hit game is terminated. Let the jackpot game end. The end effect start command said here corresponds to a big hit game end command. In the above-mentioned general command large winning a prize opening opening setting transmission processing, the information which shows the information which shows the number of rounds which are stored in RAM308 the present round number and control state etc as a command data of big winning opening opening command . In the above-mentioned general command large winning a prize opening closing setting transmission processing, the current round number which is remembered in RAM308 as the command data of big winning a prize opening closing command, the information which shows control state, the 1st special figure fluctuation game which is suspended Alternatively, information is set that indicates the number of second special figure change games and the like.

  At step S215, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, the special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 as command data of the special view reserve increase command, control state And information representing the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance (the special figure prior determination result).

  Further, in step S215, general command hold drawing increase processing is also performed. In this general command draw increasing process, information representing a control state or the like is set in the command data of the draw increasing command. In addition, a common drawing fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing has been started (is performed) is also transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as the common drawing related command. It should be noted that from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a common drawing fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing is stopped, and the pair of blade members 2321 has started opening (done) It is also possible to transmit an electric chew open start command indicating that, or an electric chew close command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 is closed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until the end of all the rounds based on the number of rounds included in the command and the number of current rounds.

  Further, in the command setting transmission process, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be outputted to the payout control unit 600 are constituted by 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, the power on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), Bits 4 to 5 of this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 after encryption processing It indicates the number of requested payouts.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 262 (b), an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step S201 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the underfill error, etc. When an error or a bottom plate error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400. In addition, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 260 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process of step S219 is completed, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 262 (a), but before returning, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are stored in the original registers. Make settings, set interrupt permission, etc. Also, before returning, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not, and when the low voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the state at the time of power failure is restored Save a specific variable or stack pointer to the specified area of the RAM 308 as return data, perform power-off processing such as initialization of the I / O port, and then return to the main control main processing It is also good.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect involving the operation means described below is also controlled first in this effect control process. That is, when the symbol variation start command including the information on the variation time of the symbol is received, whether or not the effect involving the operation means is to be executed according to the length of the variation time in this effect control process If determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read out from the ROM 406. According to the effect data read out here, the image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and the movable unit control is read out to the second sub control unit 500 here A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination here, when pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into effect data according to pressing operation of the chance button 136, pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is effective, processing such as preparing effect data corresponding to an operation reception effect to be described later is performed.

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, when there is an operation instruction (move instruction or rotation instruction) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309. The setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. When the door open command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, in step S321, the door open command is set to be output to the second sub control unit.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle.

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, movable unit control processing is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation, a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the back and forth direction, and an eighth generation character capable of moving up and down) When a control command related to 224Fa and a general officer 224Fb and a vertically moveable family crest 224E) is received, various processing corresponding to the control command is performed, and various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (for example, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process in a predetermined cycle. Run with

  In step S901 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second auxiliary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  Subsequently, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257 will be described.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing an example of a button effect in stages. In FIG. 265, time passes in the order of the alphabets etc. written in parentheses (the same applies in the subsequent figures unless otherwise specified). In addition, the time interval between the alphabet etc. written in parentheses and the alphabet etc. written next in parentheses may be equal intervals or may be different intervals in one figure. The intervals different from the equal intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the subsequent drawings).

  In FIG. 265, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265, the variation icon display region 208e is provided at the center of the effect display region 208d, and the hold icon display region 208f is on the right side of the variation icon display region 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the variation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area, or when it is displayed in the opposite direction), further reach effect is performed. May be displayed only when the Note that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or more pending icons can be displayed in the pending icon display area 208 f. Four reserved icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (a). These four suspension icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles by dotted lines indicates that the suspension icon is not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special drawing or the start of the judgment of the special view is held, and the number of the hold icon displayed is basically that of the special view fluctuation game It is the same number as the number of reservations. However, before and after the hold processing, there may be timing when the number of display of the hold icon does not represent the hold number. The hold icon includes the hold icon of the special view 1 and the hold icon of the special view 2. The hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to be display areas for both icons. In addition, the hold icon can be previewed and notified of the hold status according to the display mode. The animation associated with the hold icon is, for example, an increase animation executed when the hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed, or the order of the hold fluctuates due to the previous hold being digested, and the hold is performed. Movement animation performed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position next to the left), change animation performed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-reading result, etc. hold is digested Erase animation that is executed when the reserve icon is erased, and save animation that is executed when the reserve icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is evacuated when reserve of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variable machine Etc. In addition to the animation described above, a stand-by animation that can be executed alone during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase or decrease in hold and no change in the hold icon). There is. An example of this standby animation is an animation (for example, a repetitive animation of a fixed scale animation) performed on the spot without changing the display position. In addition, there may be a case where a plurality of animations of increase, movement, change, deletion, evacuation, and standby of the hold icon are executed in a plurality of overlapping manners.

  One fluctuation icon can be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (b), a star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation game, which is displayed after the suspension is digested and the special drawing fluctuation game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or expressed as a change icon moves. May be Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the change icon display area 208 e is completed may be referred to as a change icon. The variation icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate identification of the change icon and the hold icon, but may be the same size. Also, the change icon may be a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuation icon can be notified of the success or failure of the fluctuation according to the display mode (the fluctuation prediction), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the fluctuation is notified. Therefore, the fluctuation icon can be viewed as an icon related to holding, and can also be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game is held. The erase timing may be a timing before, a same timing, or a timing after the timing at which the success or failure result of the change is notified.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the change icon display area 208e when the hold is digested, the hold icon with the oldest start winning timing being displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. There are a moving animation for moving as a fluctuation icon, and a changing animation for changing from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. These animations may be combined and performed simultaneously. If the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation that is executed during the execution of the special drawing fluctuation game, an erasing animation that is executed when the special drawing fluctuation game is ended and the fluctuation icon is erased, and the fluctuation icon There is a change animation etc. which are performed when changing a display mode of in the middle. These animations may be performed simultaneously in combination with one another. Also, the waiting animation of the variation icon may be performed simultaneously with the movement animation or the change animation.

  The above-described hold icon or change icon corresponds to an icon related to symbol change display.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special view 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special view 2 are displayed at the upper right. The fourth pattern 2081 of the special view 1 is a round display, and the fourth pattern 2082 of the special view 2 is a square display. In any of the fourth patterns 2081 and 2082, gray represents fluctuation, black represents stop display (final display) of big hit symbols, and white represents stop display of final symbol (final display). It represents that it is. These 4th designs 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative designs.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 265, in addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special view hold lamp 220 It is shown.

  In addition, in FIG. 265, a chance button 136 is also shown on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 265, the white display indicates the on / off state of the white of the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136, and the hatched display is a section of the chance button lamp 138. Indicates a red lighting condition. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Moreover, although it was set as "lighting" here, it may be "flashing" (following, the same).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 is a background image of a castle town. When the background image is a background image of the castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is the castle town mode among the prepared effect modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 265 (a), both the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 display the stop symbol of the lost (confirmation display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a loose eye. Some "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1" are displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are also displayed in white during stoppage. While four first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 265 (a) are on, four black circle holding icons, which are the special pattern display of the special figure 1, are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 265 (b), the symbol variation display of the special view is started in the first special view display device 212, and the change display of the decoration symbol is also started in the first decorative symbol display device 208 L. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, updating (variation display) of the decorative symbol is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. In addition, only three first special symbol pattern holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 265 (b) are turned on, and three holding icons are held in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (pending icons h1 to h3 Is displayed, and a star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. In this example, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 6A, the hold icon h1 having the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. It is the result of having moved to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th design 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changing to the display (gray) while it is fluctuating.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (c), reach effect is started. Up to this point, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is reduced in size at the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3 .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button effect here is the effect that tells the development of Super Reach. Also, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach to be developed. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 265 (d), the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 257 and the operation of the chance button 136 in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Arrow display 136 b and character display “press” as a prompting prompting (pressing), and remaining period meter display 136 c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as a valid one. The three are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136 c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 265 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 265 (d) starts to light in red and urges pressing.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, and after a short time, the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) (see FIG. 265 (f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 which has been lit in red is switched to being lit in white or is turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (g), the display of “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then it is developed into the super reach A as shown in FIG. 265 (h). doing. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 265 (h), the characters Super Reach A are displayed, indicating that the effect of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the super reach A presentation is also performed on the background of the castle town. In addition, when the effect display of the super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, the frame-like image which shows the position of 4th design 2081, 2082, the fluctuation icon c, and the fluctuation icon display area 208e is continuing being displayed. The fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may also be erased so as not to be visible. The Super Reach A is not a jackpot-confirmed Super Reach, and just because it has developed into a Super Reach A does not always mean a big hit. In addition, even when the display is made to expect that "CHANCE" is likely to develop into a super reach, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lost design is stopped and displayed without the super reach being started. In some cases. Also, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 265 (g) may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be

  On the other hand, in FIG. 265 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 265 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “Sorry” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then As shown in the same figure (h '), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol of the loss of "decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" The combination is displayed stopped. In addition, even if the display of "sorry" is made, it may be a big hit by the reversal production.

  Although the operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, the operation outside the effective period of operation is ultimately treated as an invalid one, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state in the operation valid period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation valid state) in which execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

  FIG. 266 is a diagram for describing the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257 in detail.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 257 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing and retreating operation and a transmitting portion 191 capable of rotating in the front-rear direction.

  In FIG. 266 (a), as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmitting portion 191 is also in a substantially parallel state with the transparent plate member 118. Even when the chance button 136 is in the initial position, it can be operated (pressed), and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked. Also, the chance button 136 may vibrate and can vibrate even in the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the depressed position.

  FIG. 266 (b) shows that the transmitting portion 191 is provided at the lower part from the initial position and is pivoted about a drive shaft (not shown) and inclined forward. The drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. In the transmitting unit 191, the LED contained in the transmitting unit 190 turns forward while turning on or flashing, and a speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. The transmitting portion 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Also, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 266 (b), vibration is possible in the front-rear direction or in the lateral direction. In addition, the transmission part 191 may turn in small increments in the front-rear direction as strong vibration with a large swing width of vibration. Even when the transmitting part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmitting part unit 190 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The state (second state) of the transparent portion 191 shown in FIG. 266 (b) is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. 266 (a), The player is operable to manually push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of the operation means. Even when the transmitting unit 191 is operated and pressed, the LED built in the transmitting unit 190 is lit or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. The transmitting portion 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 266 (c) shows that the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, (d) in the figure shows that the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can also stop at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum exit position. Therefore, it is possible to advance into multiple stages. In addition, the chance button 136 which has advanced (projected) from the initial position is also capable of vibrating, and vibrates in the lateral direction or in the vertical direction in the state of having advanced (projected). Also in this case, the chance button lamp 138 can be lighted or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output an effect sound or an effect sound. Furthermore, the chance button 136 advanced (projected) from the initial position is operable to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pressed, the chance button lamp 138 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. In addition, the chance button 136 may be configured to automatically retreat to the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  The vibration of the chance button 136 or the vibration of the transmitting portion 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is exhibited by setting by the effect customization function by the player or setting of a switch on the side of the game shop clerk. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be no vibration at all or only a partial vibration.

  FIG. 267 is a figure for demonstrating the presentation which tangled the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 266 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. Here, when the operation means A and the operation means B are compared, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. There is a difference that the means B can not be operated at the initial position, but the operation means B and the operation means A may be reversed, or both may be operation means of the same size, or the initial position The operation means may be operated together or may not be operated together. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. It is also good.

  In addition, the operation means described as the transmission unit 191 in the following description can be replaced with another operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 267 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operating means B (the transmitting portion 191) is more striking than the effect involving the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). The degree of expectation of is high. Further, both of the functions A are provided, but the functions B are provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of lighting. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 267 (a), the operation means B is inferior to the operation means A in the number of functions.

  However, as shown in FIG. 267 (b), both may have the same number of functions. That is, although the function B is provided only in the operation means A, the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function that can perform strong vibration.

  In the operation means A and the operation means B, the number of functions may be the same.

  FIG. 267 (c) is a view showing a part of effect data of the operation means A. FIG. Here, the display data in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is "liquid crystal", the operation data in Yatsushiro character 224Fa and general character 224Fb and family crest character 224E is "moving means", and the sound output data from the speaker 120 is " The light emission data of the "sound", the frame lamp 122, the LED, and various built-in lamps are displayed as "LED", and the vibration data of the operation means A is displayed as "vibrate". "..." in a figure represents abbreviation | omission of data. Production No. The data of “Vibrate” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” represents that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of "Vibrate" in 2 is "E1", and "E1" represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound", and "LED" in 2 becomes effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated According to each of these effect data, the effect after the operation is started. Production No. The data of "Vibrate" in 3 is "E2", and this "E2" represents that the operating means A is vibrated after the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound” and “LED” in 3 become effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. No. 2 data and effect No. The data of 3 may also be called up when the operation means B (the transmission unit 191) is operated. This is because there may be cases where each effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound” and “LED” can be used as effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. No. 2 data or effect No. The effects according to the "liquid crystal", "movable means", "sound" and "LED" in the data of 3 are started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, for the effect No. Data 2 includes data (E1) for vibrating the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal" become data after the operation of the operating means A, but the operating means B The operation No. When the data of 2 is read out, the data of “Vibrate” is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as “Liquid Crystal”. In addition, production No. No. 2 data and effect No. In the case of the data of 3, the data of at least "liquid crystal" is different as "A1" and "A2", and the data of "liquid crystal" of "A1" is used after the operation means B is operated. Is the effect No. It is not the data of 3, but the effect No. It is necessary to read out the 2 data.

  The effect data on the operation means B may also be called up when the operation means A is operated, and after the operation means A is operated, “liquid crystal”, “movable means” in the effect data on the operation means B, The presentation according to each presentation data of "Sound" and "LED" is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of "Vibrate". However, the effect data regarding the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing an execution timing regarding an effect in which the operation means A is involved and an effect in which the operation means B is in connection. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 268, time passes from left to right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 268 (a) to (c), "operation means B related effect" started from the top according to the operation of the operation means B (transmission part 191), the operation means B is operated "Operation means B operation effective state" in which the operation means B related effect is started, "operation means B operation" indicating that the operation means B is operated, and operation means A (chance button 136) "Operating means A related rendering" started according to the operation, "Operating means A operation enabled state" in which the operating means A related rendering is started when the operating means A is operated, the operating means A is operated “Operating means A operation” is shown to indicate the event. The "operation means B related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. The "operation means A-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the “operation means A-related effect” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. In the "operation means B operation valid state", there are cases where a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means B is performed and cases where it is not performed. Even in the "operation means A operation valid state", the operation is performed. There are cases where notification (operation promotion notification) for prompting operation of the means A is performed and cases where it is not performed. If these notifications are performed, the player can know that the operation is enabled, but if it is not performed, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (a), the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation enabled state, but the operation means B related effect is started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation enabled state. Thus, the "operation means B related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effect” may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the contents of the “operation means B related effect” may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means B. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A related effect is started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the "operation means A-related effect" may also be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A-related effect” may also be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the contents of the “operation means A related presentation” may be different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means A. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start simultaneously and end simultaneously.

  In the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state, from the operation means B operation valid state to the execution of the operation means B related effect Switch. On the other hand, with regard to the operation means A, here too, without passing through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A, the operation means A related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect It is done. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start simultaneously and end simultaneously.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 268 (c), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation valid state, the operation means B operation valid state is executed to the execution of the operation means B related effect. Switch. On the other hand, with regard to the operation means A, here too, without passing through the "operation means A operation valid state" and without operating the operation means A, the operation means A related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effect It is done. In the example shown in FIG. 268 (c), the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is simultaneously started, but after the vibration of the operation means A ends first and the vibration of the operation means A ends, the vibration of the operation means B ends.

  The start time may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start time is different, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, and then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. May be Also, conversely, the operation means A-related effect starts first, and then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. Further, the end time may be the same, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, and then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together Alternatively, the operation means A-related effect starts first, and then the operation means B-related effect starts, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may end together .

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 268 (a), when the operation related to the operation means B is executed without operating the operation means B, for example, the operation related to the operation means B corresponds to the operation effective of the operation means B If the mode is to be executed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state, the operation time of the operation means B related effect may be longer as the operation means B is operated earlier. become able to.

  FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing an execution timing regarding an effect in which the operation means is involved. Arrows in each of FIG. 269 (a) to (c) indicate a vibration period of the operation means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 269 (a) is an example during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and when the operation promoting means B is operated in a state where the operation promoting notification of the operating means B (transmissive portion 191) is performed, the operation is performed The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L etc., the judge effect is started. Here, the judgment effect is a judgment effect for a big hit, and is an advance effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). In addition, the judgment effect here is not a notice effect regarding the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judgment effect is displayed, the judgment effect is ended, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is started as the variable display of the decorative symbols. The vibration of the operation means A is continued to the middle of the execution period of the shaking display. Soon, the shaking display is finished, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 269 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol is already determined, so that the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. The execution period is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued until just before the end of the execution period of the shortened shaking display.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a), before the notification of the result regarding the player's profit such as the finalized display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result regarding the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 269 (b) is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the judgment effect is started. The judge in the judgment presentation here is a judge that leads to whether or not to shift to a definite change state. When the result of the judgment effect is displayed, the judgment effect is ended, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is informed that aiming at a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operation means A is continued halfway through the execution period of the notification. Soon, the next round is started, and it is notified again that aiming at a specific winning combination (for example, V winning combination).

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 269 (b), when the operation timing of the operating means B is delayed, the specific winning opening is aimed at the next round because the maximum allowable time for one round is already determined. The execution period for notifying that is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued until slightly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. Moreover, the round which should aim at a specific winning a prize mouth is limited, and if it can be made to win a specific winning a prize mouth in the round, it shifts to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game. For this reason, the round which should aim at the specific winning a prize opening is an important round leading to the player's profit, and before the start of the round leading to the player's profit, the effect such as the vibration of the operating means A is ended and the player We are focusing on aiming for a specific winning combination.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 269 (a) and the example shown in FIG. 2 (b), even if the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A does not change but becomes constant.

  The example shown in FIG. 269 (c) is an example of the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and in the state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed, the operation means B operates Then, the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) is started, and the stop display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is finished, and the vibration of the operation means A is also finished at the same time when the stop display of the pseudo run symbol is finished. Then, the next pseudo variation display is started, and the number of times of pseudo run is the nth time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is performed also in the nth pseudo variation display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 269 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of stop display of the pseudo-connected symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A is ended simultaneously with the end of the stop display of the shortened pseudo run symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 269 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A also changes.

  In summary including what has been described above, the operation means A can vibrate in a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is at least performed. In addition, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating in at least a part of a period in which a judgment effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being performed. For example, the vibration may be ended simultaneously with the end of the judgment effect, the vibration may be continued even if the judgment effect is ended, or the vibration may be ended before the end of the judgment effect. Moreover, the vibration period in which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, and may differ according to the presence or absence of operation of the operation means B, and operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 269 (d) is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge regarding whether or not to be a big hit in the variable display during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, or a judge showing the end of the reach production (the reach production of the final stage such as strong SP reach) It is In this upper example,
The period in which the operation means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operation means A is handled as effective, and when the operation means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect becomes long, and the period in which the operation means A vibrates becomes long. In addition, even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a fixed period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 269 (d), the final judgment effect is started according to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judgment effect become simultaneous, and the period length between them becomes zero. However, while the operation means A is vibrating, it can be ensured for a fixed period. The final judgment effect here is also a notice effect not using the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect concerning the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started according to the operation of the operation means B, the vibration of the operation means A is upward when it is started by operating the operation means A after the operation of the operation means B. If the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes long, and the period in which the operation means A vibrates becomes long.

  Then, the prizes etc. which are arranged on the front side rather than the 1st decoration symbol display device 208L are explained.

  FIG. 270 (a) is a diagram showing a movable part arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 270 (a), the front left side is the front side, and the rear right side is the rear side. A family crest item 224E is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 270 (a).

  FIG. 270 (b) is a view for explaining the family crest 224E.

  As shown in the drawing on the left side of FIG. 270 (b), the family crest 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the family crest 224E starts its operation, as shown in the right side of FIG. 270 (b), it moves upward from the initial position to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device It overlaps with the display screen of 208 L from the front side (player side). In the initial position, the family crest 224E is less visible to the player than in the state where it is overlapped with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. The light emission mode of the household object 224E shown in FIG. 270 (b) is the first mode (default mode).

On the front side of the family crest 224E shown in FIG. 270 (a), the eight generations stuff 224Fa and the general military thing 224Fb shown in FIG. 259 are disposed. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb may be collectively referred to as a logo character 224F. A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed further in front of the logo feature 224F. However, the light guide plate IL may be disposed between the logo accessory 224F and the family crest 224E, or may be disposed between the family crest 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. (C) is a figure for demonstrating logo character item 224F.

  As shown in the left side of FIG. 270 (c), the logo accessory 224F is disposed at an initial position above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb are arranged side by side and in contact with each other. When this logo accessory 224F starts to operate, as shown in the central diagram of FIG. 270 (c), from the initial position, the Yatsushiro official 224Fa and the general official 224Fb are in contact with each other side by side. It descends to the front side relative to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (the player side). The position of the logo accessory 224F shown in the middle of FIG. 270 (c) is referred to as the maximum operating position. As shown in the drawing on the right side of FIG. 270 (c), the logo accessory 224F can perform the separating operation along the rail member 224Fr at the maximum operating position. That is, while Yatsushiro character 224Fa arranged on the left side moves in the left direction, a general character article 224Fb arranged on the right side moves in the right direction. In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. The light emission mode of the logo accessory 224F shown in FIG. 270 (c) is also the first mode (default mode).

  Aspect (light emission aspect) of family crest 224E, aspect (display aspect) of logo character 224F, or other aspect of character with light emission function, or light emitting means (such as LED shown in FIG. 260) Aspects (display modes) of the lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542) (light emission mode), various icons in the liquid crystal display means and various displays (display of a notification area HZ described later (background color and character color)) The first to seventh aspects are prepared. For example, the first aspect corresponds to the white aspect, the second aspect corresponds to the white blinking aspect, the third aspect corresponds to the blue aspect, and the fourth aspect corresponds to the green aspect, The fifth aspect corresponds to the red aspect, the sixth aspect to the gold aspect, and the seventh aspect to the iridescent aspect. Among the aspects of the first to seventh aspects, the larger the number is, the more advantageous the player is. For example, the larger the number, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit, or the more likely that a certain effect is started. The mode may be changed (promoted) so as to rise one step at a time as in the first mode → second mode → third mode → ..., the first mode → the fifth mode, or There is also a case where a change (promotion) is made so as to rise at once in a plurality of steps, such as the first aspect → the seventh aspect. The first aspect is a deffiling aspect, which is the most likely aspect. The second aspect or more may be the aspect of the notice. For example, in the hold icon, the second mode or more is the display mode of the prefetch notice, and in the variable icon, the second mode or more is the display mode of the normal notice. What has been described here is the same for each of the following effect examples as well. For example, the second mode is a display or light emission in white blinks, and the fifth mode is a display light emission in red.

  In addition, the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F described here are an example of the effect movable means, and in the example of the effect described below, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is used instead of the family crest 224E. The third decorative symbol display device 208N may be operated instead of the logo accessory 224F. Alternatively, instead of the family crest 224E, other movable display means (for example, the fourth display means 208M ') and effect movable means (for example, the first large-screen behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-screen behavior character 224Gd) are operated Alternatively, other movable display means (for example, POV display 224I) or presentation movable means (for example, one thousand box character 224) may be operated instead of the logo character 224F.

  FIG. 270 (d) is a view showing a modified example of the common view display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 configured by the 7-segment LED shown in FIG. . In FIG. 270 (d), five rows of LEDs are prepared in which eight LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row. The top row L1 functions as a first special view display device, the second top row L2 functions as a second special view display device, and the third top row L3 is a common view display device Act as. In each row L1, L2 and L3, the stop symbol aspect is displayed by combining the patterns of lighting, extinguishing, or blinking of eight LEDs. The fourth column L4 from the top functions as a round display device for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game, and the bottom column L5 is a column for displaying a status such as whether or not the player hits the right. These LED rows L1 to L5 are configured by one device. Further, the main control unit 300 controls lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of the row L1 to L5 of the LEDs.

  FIG. 270 (e) is an enlarged view of components such as the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in each drawing in () in FIG. 272 through FIG. I will Although the reference numerals are given also in each drawing in () in FIG. 272 to FIG. 309, the reference numerals given in FIG. 270 (e) apply mutatis mutandis to the constituent elements without the reference numerals.

  Here, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, an aspect in which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged is formed. In the hold icon display area, one hold icon is displayed on each pedestal. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 270 (e), two symbol variation displays of the special view 1 are suspended, and the first suspension icon h11 and the second suspension icon h12 are in the suspension icon display area. It is displayed. The variation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the first display mode (default display mode). In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. Although nothing is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 270 (e), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and a notice display or a demonstration effect display may be performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 270 (e), a clear sky background is displayed, and in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, The high-speed variation display of the decoration pattern is performed.

  In addition, under the first decorative symbol display device 208L, from the left, the speaker 120, the family crest 224E described using FIG. 270 (b), and the logo character 224F described using FIG. 270 (c) are displayed. It is shown. In FIG. 270 (e), the light emission mode of the family crest 224E and the light emission mode of the logo accessory 224F are both the first mode (default mode). Although both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F are movable, they can not represent the movement, but represent the light emission. That is, the positions of the family crest 224E and the logo family 224F will be described by again illustrating the family crest 224E itself or the logo family 224F itself.

  Furthermore, on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, various operations such as the operation key unit 181 (OK button 181 b and cross key 181 a) shown in FIG. Means are shown. The second chance button 137 may be the transmitting portion 191 or an operation lever (not shown). In FIG. 270 (e), the light emission mode of the chance button 136 and the light emission mode of the second chance button 137 are also the first mode (default mode). In addition, the structure which does not have some operation means, such as 2nd chance button 137, may be sufficient.

  Further, under the various operation means, the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 are shown, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special figure 1 is a square, and the special figure In the variable display of 1, it lights in white, and in the stop display of the special figure 1, it lights in the lighting mode of loss (here, the lighting mode of gray) or the lighting mode of big hit (here, the lighting mode of black). In FIG. 270 (e), the special figure 1 is displaying the symbol variation display, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 of a square is lit in white. The fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 may be LEDs or the like provided separately from the liquid crystal display device, or may be provided in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display may be provided in the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be provided in the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Further, a notification area HZ is displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Each of the effects described with reference to FIGS. 272 to 309 is the effect using the notification area HZ. Although the details will be described later, in the notification area HZ, in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136, information on the big hit of the special view is displayed, or various advance notice displays are displayed.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram summarizing the preconditions and the like in the effect using the notification area HZ.

  FIG. 271 (a) is a table summarizing various notice displays displayed in the notification area HZ, and FIG. 27 (b) is a table summarizing the expectation of each display. Note that the degree of expectation in FIG. 271 is an excerpt of some of the various degrees of expectation, and the alphabet representing the degree of expectation is “S” or “A,” from the highest expectation. "," "B", "C", "D" in that order. "S" is 100% and "A" is less than 100%, but "A" may be "S". That is, it may be 100%. The lowest expectation "D" may be 0% or may be higher than 0%.

  The state in which the "question mark" is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which what kind of effect is to be performed after that and further whether or not any effect is to be performed is kept secret. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the expected degree at which normal reach is started is low, and the expected degree at which super reach is started and the expected degree of big hit are considerably low or 0%.

  On the other hand, the state in which "continuation" is displayed in the alerting | reporting area | region HZ is a state which alert | reports that it is decided that stop (temporary stop) of a pseudo | simulation continuous symbol is in symbol fluctuation display currently performed. In other words, it is a state of giving notice that the pseudo connected effect is always started. In addition, it may be in the state of giving a notice that the pseudo connected effect is not necessarily started but may be started. In addition, the state in which "continuation?" Is displayed is a state in which there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous effect may be started, and the state in which the "continuation" is displayed is always started the pseudo continuous effect It may be configured to be in a state of giving a prior notice.

  The state in which "Chance" is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which it is informed that the degree of expectation is higher than the state in which the "question mark" is displayed. In addition, when "Chance" is displayed, a certain effect may rank up. As shown in FIG. 271 (b), the degree of expectation that normal reach is started is high. However, the expectation to develop to super reach is low. Also, the expectation of the big hit is lower.

  The state in which "SP" is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which it is notified that the possibility of developing into super reach effect is high in the symbol variation display currently being performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the expected degree at which normal reach is started is very high, and the expected degree at which super reach is developed is also very high. Also, the expectation of the big hit is high. Note that the degree of expectation for developing to super reach may be “S”. Also, "it is highly likely to develop into a super reach effect" may be about a kind of super reach effect. Specifically, it may be battle-based super reach presentation or story-based super reach presentation. Also, it may be about a specific super reach effect.

The state in which the "large floor behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ is a state in which it is notified that it is decided that the big hit symbol is finally displayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed. In other words, it is a state where it is predicted that the big hit is decided. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the expected degree at which normal reach is started is very high, and the expected degree at which super reach is developed is also very high. And the jackpot expectation is 100%. Therefore, it may be a big hit without passing through the super reach, or it may be a big hit without passing through even the normal reach. However, the degree of expectation that normal reach starts or the degree of expectation that develops to super reach may be “S”. In addition, even if it is said that a big hit is decided, for example, it may be lost with the probability of 1 / 65,536. Moreover, the state in which "continuation" is displayed on alerting | reporting area | region HZ may be comprised so that the expectation of big hit may become high rather than the state on which the "question mark" is displayed at least.
In addition, as described above, the main control unit 300 performs the jackpot success determination (step S213 shown in FIG. 262 (b)), and the jackpot probability is also determined in advance, and the probability variation state The jackpot probability does not change unless the control state (playing state) state is changed, such as a non-deterministic change state. The effect using the notification area HZ is performed by the sub control unit sides 400 and 500. However, since "border behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ, the main control unit 300 performs the hit determination instead of the big hit. As a result of the result of being a big hit, "Ball behavior" is only displayed as an effect in the notification area HZ.

  As described above, as the notice display displayed in the notification area HZ, "Chance" has higher expectation of big hit than "question mark", and "SP" has higher expectation of big hit than "Chance". The degree is high, and "Ball behavior" is more likely to be a big hit than "SP". In the following explanation, "question mark", "Chance", "SP" and "big behavior" are used, but "question mark" indicates notice 1; "chance" indicates notice 2 and "SP" indicates The notice display 3 "Ball behavior" can be read as the notice display 4, and the size of the number after the notice display indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

  FIG. 271 (c) is a table in which the timing at which various types of notification contents are displayed in the notification area HZ is summarized.

  The “timing 1” is a timing before the start of the final re-variation (the maximum number of re-variations) of pseudo-series rendering. At this timing 1, any notification content may be displayed in the notification area HZ.

  The “timing 2” is a timing after the final re-variation (the maximum number of re-variations) of the pseudo-series effect is started. At this timing 2, the re-variation due to the pseudo-series effect is no longer started in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol currently performed, and therefore “Continuation” is not displayed in the notification area HZ.

  "Timing 3" is a certain timing after the start of the super reach production. At this timing 3, the super reach effect is started in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol currently performed, and the pseudo continuous effect is not started either, so "Continuous" and "SP" in the notification area HZ. Will not be displayed.

  The “timing 4” is a certain timing after the sway display (swing fluctuation) of the combination of the lost design is started in the fluctuation display of the decoration design. At this timing, there is a possibility that the possibility of a big hit remains from the resurrection production, so there is a possibility that the "question mark" and the "big game behavior" are displayed in the notification area HZ.

  As described above, in the notification area HZ, as the symbol variation display progresses once, in other words, as the effect progresses, the notification contents to be displayed are limited. Since the notification content may be displayed in the notification area HZ in response to the operation of the chance button 136, if the user operates the chance button 136 earlier, it is possible to obtain advance notice information in the notification area HZ. There is. If the notification content is displayed in the notification area HZ, there may be expectations for the start of the pseudo-series effect and the development to the super reach effect, and there may be expectations for the big hit, so the interest of the game may be improved. As a result, the operation of the chance button 136 may be promoted.

  Here, the reach effect will be described using FIG. 271 (d). The alphabet representing “variation time” in FIG. 271 is in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D” when stated from the longer time side. That is, a plurality of types of variation time are prepared for the symbol variation display of the special figure, and the longest variation time becomes “A” among the plurality of types of variation time, and “D” is, for example, 10 Represents a group of multiple types of time up to a second. Therefore, this "D" includes the shortest fluctuation time. The alphabet representing the “appearance rate” in FIG. 271 is in the order of “A”, “B”, “C”, and “D” when describing from the higher occurrence rate.

  FIG. 271 (d) shows the case where the reach effect is not performed at the top. "Leach 1" is a type of normal reach, specifically, "search reach". Here, although only one type of normal reach is shown, there are a plurality of types. “SP1” is an abbreviation of Super Reach 1, and specifically “Okake Reach”. "SP2" is an abbreviation of Super Reach 2, and specifically it is "Swordsman Reach". In Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, Super Reach 2 has a lower appearance rate, a longer fluctuation time, and a higher hit probability.

  The light emission mode of the logo accessory 224F described with reference to FIG. 271 (e) will also be described. The light emission aspect of this logo accessory 224F may change when the chance button 136 is operated only during reach. However, there is no display prompting the user to operate the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 functions as a back button. From the first mode of default, when the chance button 136 is operated twice from the first mode of default, it is promoted to two stages and becomes the third mode, and further, the chance button 136 is selected during the reach. When operated once, the stage is promoted to the fourth mode, and when the chance button 136 is operated once more during reach, the stage is promoted to the fifth mode. When the chance button 136 is operated twice, instead of being promoted to two stages to become the third mode, one stage is promoted to become the second mode, and when it is operated one more time, it becomes the third aspect, and further If it is operated once more, it may become the 4th mode. In addition, the number of operations is not limited to this ("twice, once, once"), but various patterns ("once, once, once" or "once, twice, three times, four One pattern may be selected based on the result of the lottery from “the times” and the like. In addition, the aspect does not change due to the chance button 136 being operated except during the reach. However, even during the reach, if the chance button 136 is operated only during the pseudo-series effect or during the chance button valid period, the aspect of the logo feature 224F may be changed. Alternatively, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F may be changed only in a specific state during reaching. Furthermore, the logo feature 224F may change its appearance according to the effect without the chance button 136 being operated. In the example to be described later, the aspect of the logo feature 224F may change in response to the operation of the chance button 136 only during the execution of the expansion / render effect to the super reach during the normal reach. In addition, the light emission mode of the logo character item 224F functions as a notice. To the extent that the logo feature 224F has been changed to the third mode, the degree of expectation for developing to super reach is low due to the change display of decorative symbols currently being performed, and the degree of expectation for developing to super reach 1 is also set to super reach 2. The degree of expectation to develop is also lower. In addition, the degree of expectation to hit the jackpot in the display of the variation of the decorative design currently performed is also low. On the other hand, when the logo feature 224F is in the fifth mode, the degree of expectation for developing into the super reach is very high with the change display of the decorative symbol currently performed, and the degree of expectation for developing into the super reach 1 is also the super reach 2. The degree of expectation to develop is also very high. In addition, the degree of expectation to hit the jackpot in the display of the variation of the decorative symbol currently performed is also very high.

  FIG. 271 (f) is a table summarizing various effect patterns other than the start of the pseudo connected effect.

  The column of "logo light emission" in this table represents the light emission aspect of the final step of the light emitting logo accessory 224F which can be lighted by being operated during reach.

  For example, no. In 01, the "question mark" is displayed in the notification area HZ, but reach effect is not started, therefore, the light emission mode of the logo feature 224F does not change either, and finally the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is decided It is an example displayed.

  On the other hand, no. 14 is displayed in the notification area HZ, "Damber behavior" is displayed, the chance button 136 is operated four times during reach, and the logo feature 224F is promoted to the fifth mode, and after it has been developed as a super reach 2 swordsman reach Finally, the example of the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit is displayed finalized.

  Although this effect pattern is an example to the last, the presence or absence of the development to the super reach 1 and the big hit expectation degree can be grasped to some extent by the aspect of the logo feature 224F emitting light by the back button effect. In the effect pattern summarized in Fig. 271 (f), the fourth aspect (green light emission) of the logo character 224F can be expected to develop into Super Reach 1, while it does not evolve into Super Reach 2. It has become. In addition, the fifth aspect (red light emission) of the logo character item 224F has a definite development to the super reach, and the development to the super reach 2 can also be expected.

  Subsequently, before describing in detail the effects using the notification area HZ, a rough description will be given of a representative example. In addition, the matter demonstrated here is the same also in subsequent examples, unless it refuses in particular, and the duplicate description may be abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 272 is a diagram schematically showing a representative example of effects using the notification region HZ.

  It should be noted that although a plurality of examples are shown in one figure in the diagrams of FIG. 272 to FIG. Moreover, the downward arrow is not attached to the final figure of each example. Also, each example is a continuation from a certain scene of another example, or an example following another certain scene of another example, which is described in each example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 272 (A1), the variation icon h0 is displayed in the second mode, and decoration is made in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. The high speed change of the pattern is done. A numeral "2" is displayed in the notification area HZ at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition to the display of the notification content shown in FIG. 271 (a), a number may be displayed in the notification area HZ. The background of the notification area HZ in which numbers are displayed is a default mode (white in the first mode). In addition, the background of alerting | reporting area | region HZ takes the aspect in any one of the above-mentioned 1st aspect-7th aspect. In addition, the aspect (color) of the characters and numbers displayed in the notification area HZ may be black or any of the above-described first to seventh aspects. The number displayed in the notification area HZ decreases by “1” when the chance button 136 is operated once. That is, in FIG. 272 (A1), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 272 (A2), the number in the notification area HZ is “1”. In the notification area HZ, the entire sway display (swing fluctuation) is performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The shaking display here can be viewed as a type of response display. In FIG. 272 (A2), the chance button 136 is operated one more time, and in FIG. 272 (A3), “border behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ. That is, the display of the numbers is switched to the advance display. As described above, in the notification area HZ, the display of the numbers does not become “0”, and the display may be switched to the advance notice at the timing of “0”. Note that the display of numbers may be "0". As shown in FIG. 272 (A3), the background of the notification area HZ in which "large screen behavior" is displayed is changed to the seventh mode (rainbow color). Further, at the same time when the display of “Ball behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the big hit confirmation advance notice effect is started. Here, the jackpot decision advance notice effect is an effect in which the logo character 224F emits light at the initial position in the same mode as the background mode of the notification area HZ (rainbow color of the seventh mode). The logo feature 224F changes to the seventh mode (rainbow color) only when "large screen behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ, and does not change to the seventh mode (rainbow color) when the chance button 136 is operated. . The operation of the chance button 136 does not change to the seventh mode (rainbow color), but the logo feature 224F may change to the seventh mode (rainbow color) in other effects. In addition to the effect that the logo feature 224F changes to the seventh mode as a big hit finalization effect, for example, effects that the logo feature 224F moves, effects movable means other than the logo feature 224F (for example, family crest features 224E Etc.) changes the mode (for example, changes to the seventh mode), the effect that the effect moving means (for example, family crest 224E etc.) other than the logo feature 224F operates, the big hit decision notice sound from the speaker 120 It is possible to enumerate the effects to be output, the effects of changing the mode of the LEDs of various lamps (for example, changing to the seventh mode), and the like. That is, the big hit finalized announcement effect may be all the items listed above. On the other hand, some of the above listed items may not be applied. In addition, the seventh aspect may be an aspect that is used only for the big hit determination advance notice, or may be an aspect that is not used other than the big hit determination advance notice. Furthermore, the big hit decision advance notice production may be started before “large behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, or may be started after “large behavior” is displayed.

  In the following description, the fact that the number is displayed in the notification area HZ disappears, and that the advance notice is displayed in the notification area HZ and / or the fact that the number is displayed in the notification area HZ disappears, That the effect is performed by another effect means is referred to as notification area development effect.

  The representative example described above is an example in which, after performing the same number of button operations as the number in a state in which the number related to the button operation is displayed, a certain notification is performed and then a big hit occurs. Since the result of the symbol variation subjected to a certain notification is configured to be a big hit, it can be said that a certain notification is a so-called big hit confirmation notification. Note that, as described later, there may be another notification, and in that case, it may not be a big hit. In addition, the big hit confirmation notification (rendering) may include all of a certain liquid crystal display, a certain sound output, and a certain light emission means, or may be only one of them. It may be a combination of two. Further, for example, only an output of a certain sound may be a big hit confirmation notification, and light emission of another certain liquid crystal display or a certain light emitting means may be notification (effect) performed accompanying the big hit confirmation notification.

  In addition, the number displayed in the notification area HZ may decrease by two or more when the chance button 136 is operated once. For example, it may decrease by "5" in a certain state, and may decrease by "10" in a different state. Furthermore, even if the chance button 136 is operated, it may not decrease or may increase.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. FIG. 272 (B1) is the same as FIG. (A1), the numeral “2” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 272 (B2), the number in the notification area HZ is not “1”, but is switched to the advance notice display. That is, in FIG. 272 (B2) after one operation of the chance button 136, “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ. As described above, even if the display of the numbers in the notification area HZ is a display of “2” or more, the display may be switched to the advance notice display. The background of the notification area HZ in which "SP" is displayed remains the first mode. Also, the logo accessory 224F is still the first mode. Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L of FIG. 272 (B3), the button effect is started, and the chance button 136 which has been the first mode of the default changes to the fifth mode, and the first decorative symbol On the display device 208L, in the middle symbol display area 208b, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b as a prompting prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and character indication "press" , And a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as a valid one is displayed as one set. The button image 136a is also displayed in the fifth mode. Although these three images 136a, 136b and 136c are images prompting the operation of the chance button 136, it is not always necessary that the three images are one set, and any one image or two images may not be necessary. Even the image is an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136. Moreover, although these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are shown in the central region of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, they may be shown in other regions. The area where the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are displayed is an area wider than the notification area HZ, but may be a narrow area or an area of the same size. The notification area HZ may be part of an area in which the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are displayed, or conversely, an area in which the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c are displayed is It may be part of the notification area HZ. In FIG. 272 (B3), in response to the button effect, the chance button 136 is operated once, and then the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. There is. That is, conversational announcement (serif announcement) has been started. Even in this conversational admonition, the line "I saw the swordsman" is displayed on the base of the default mode (the first mode), and it is forecasted that it will develop into a swordsman reach. That is, although this speech announcement is an announcement related to a big hit, it directly corresponds to an announcement specifying an effect (super reach to be developed) to be executed later. Soon, as shown in FIG. 272 (B7), the sword sword reach has been started. In this example, "SP" is displayed in the notification area HZ first, and it is predicted that it will develop into super reach. However, the type of super reach that develops (whether reach or swords reach) is unknown. On the other hand, in the conversation announcement started later, the kind of developing super reach is also announced. In addition, whether it is the advance notice display in the notification area HZ or the conversation notice, it is common in that it is started by the operation of the chance button 136.

  In addition, "under preparation button" being displayed on the lower left will be described later.

  In the representative example described above, after performing the button operation for the number of times smaller than the number while displaying the number related to the button operation, the notification different from the certain notification is performed, and then the other button effect is displayed. It is an effect that occurs and the result of the button effect is an advance effect for announcing a certain effect (super reach effect occurrence), and then a certain effect (super reach effect) is performed. As said another alerting | reporting, it is comprised so that it may evolve into a super reach in the symbol change by which the alerting | reporting containing the display of "SP" was performed. According to this example, it is possible to know the development to the super reach earlier than the other button effects by the notification area development effect, and it may be possible to save the trouble of operating the other button effects. In particular, the effort is reduced when another button effect is a button continuous hit effect. In addition, the range of information to be known in advance is configured to be different between the notification area development effect and the other button effects, and it is possible to dare to look back or not to notify. For example, the notice display of "SP" in the notification area HZ, which is one of the notification area development effects, is Super Reach 1 or Super Reach 2, and "I saw the swordsman in the other button effects" is Super It is announcing the development of Reach 2.

  The notification in the notification area HZ may be a notification that can be identified up to the type of super reach, and the notification in the conversation advance may be a notification that can not be identified up to the type of super reach. Further, the notification in the notification area HZ may be a notification that can be identified up to the type of super reach, and the notification in the conversation advance notice may also be a notification that can be identified up to the type of super reach. Alternatively, the notification may not be identified up to the type of super reach in which the notification in the notification area HZ is developed, and the notification may not be identified up to the type of super reach in which the notification in the speech advance is also developed.

  Next, another example will be described with reference to FIG. 272 (C1). Although the numeral “2” is displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 272 (C1), in this example, the chance button 136 is not operated. In FIG. 272 (C2), the number in the notification area HZ remains "2", and the button effect is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the button effect is started prior to the advance notice display in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 272 (C3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (C4) displays the conversation image CI2 of a whistle as a conversation announcement. In this conversational announcement, the line "The sign of the lord is ..." is displayed on the base of the third mode (blue), and it is foretold that it may be a big hit with the symbol variation display currently being performed . The conversation notice here is a weak notice because it is the background of the third mode (blue), and the type is different from the conversation notice “I saw the swordsman” shown in FIG. 272 (B5). . That is to say, the conversation notice that "the sign of the hall is ..." is not a notice that specifies the effect to be executed after this. In addition, in the notification area HZ which has been the display of the number "2", "large bed behavior" is displayed. That is, the display of the numbers is switched to the advance display. In this case as well, the background of the notification area HZ in which the "large screen behavior" is displayed changes to the seventh aspect (rainbow color), and the notification area HZ is swayed. Also, the logo feature 224F is also changed to the seventh aspect (rainbow color). This example is an example in which a plurality of notices are started by one operation of the chance button 136. Note that the timing at which the conversation announcement is started may be the same as the timing at which the "large screen behavior" (announcement display) is started to be displayed in the notification area HZ, or the conversation announcement may be earlier. The warning display of the notification area HZ may be earlier. In this example, both the conversation notice and the notice display in the notification area HZ are notices regarding the jackpot expectation, but the notice display in the notification area HZ has a higher expectation. This is apparent also from the aspect (third aspect) of the background of the speech advance notice and the aspect (seventh aspect) of the background of the notification region HZ.

  The representative example described above is an example in which the jackpot confirmation notification (effect) and the effect to be performed after the button is operated in the other button effects are started by one button operation. In other button effects, effects of weak patterns (effects using the third aspect) are performed after the button is operated. That is, in this example, the button effect of the weak pattern and the effect (for example, the big hit confirmation notification) of the strong pattern in the notification area development effect overlap. The effect of the weak pattern and the big hit confirmation notification (effect) may overlap, and the effect of the weak pattern may also cause a big hit. After that, even when weak pattern rendition occurs, it is possible to give the expectation to the big hit. An effect such as In addition, the effects of weak patterns (for example, effects using the aspects following the fourth aspect or effects using the aspects following the third aspect) are strong patterns (for example, effects using the aspects of the fifth aspect or more) The appearance frequency is relatively high or the big hit expectation is low compared to the production of.

  Next, another example will be described. Although the numeral “2” is displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 272 (D1), the chance button 136 is not operated in this example as well. In FIG. 272 (D2), the chance button 136 changes to the fifth mode and starts vibration, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the button effect is started. In the button effect here, a button image 136 a ′ larger than the button image 136 a shown in FIG. 272 (B 3) or the like is displayed. In FIG. 272 (D3), the vibrating chance button 136 is operated once, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. . In this conversational notice, the line "Hot it is hot" is displayed on the background of the fifth mode (red color), and it is a strong notice that indicated that the possibility of a big hit is high in the symbol variation display currently being performed. That is, in comparison with the conversation notice "the sign of the sign is ..." shown in FIG. 272 (C4), the conversation notice "hot here" has a high expectation of the jackpot. Further, as a result of the button effect, the logo feature 224F is also changed to the fifth mode (red color) which is the same mode as the mode of the base of the line. Further, in the notification area HZ where the number "2" has been displayed up to that point, "SP" is displayed. In this example, the conversation notice is a decisive notice (a notice advantageous to the player) than the notice display in the notification area HZ. Moreover, since the conversation announcement of the background of the fifth aspect is higher than the announcement display of the background of the first aspect in the notification area HZ, the degree of expectation is also high. Note that the advance notice display in the notification area HZ may be "Chance" or "question mark" whose expectation is lower than "SP".

  As described above, in the notice display in the notification area HZ and in the notice effect other than the notification area HZ, the same effect may be notified, or both may be notified of the jackpot expectation, or may be different from each other. is there. In addition, even in the case of giving notice of the same effect, or giving a notice regarding the big hit expectation for both, there are cases where the degree of expectation is the same between the advance notice display in the notification area HZ and the notice effect in other than the notification area HZ. It may be different. For example, the degree of expectation may be higher in the preliminary display in the notification area HZ. Or, conversely, there may be a case where the degree of expectation is higher in the notice effect other than in the notification area HZ.

  Further, in this example, the speech notice by the speech image CI2 of the whistle shown in FIG. 272 (D4) is a notice relating to the jackpot, but may be a notice relating to the jackpot and a notice of the development to the super reach. In this case, when the logo accessory 224F changes to the fifth aspect (red), the development to the super reach may be determined. However, it is different from the conversation notice "I saw the swordsman" shown in FIG. 272 (B5), and it is not a notice that specifies whether to develop into Super Reach 1 or Super Reach 2.

  In the representative example described above, the effect of the weak pattern in the notification area development effect (display of “chance”) and the effect of the strong pattern by other effects (button effect) overlap. The button vibrates in the operation reception state because the other button effects have a strong pattern effect. A button operation is performed in that state, and a certain effect (a production other than a big hit decision) in the notification area development effect is performed. Here, a super reach effect is performed. The player operates the chance button 136 while wishing the occurrence of the big hit confirmation notification, but notices that the button is vibrated by the operation and makes other button effects notice, or it is strong that the big hit is not confirmed. Since it is a pattern production, it can be enjoyed by giving expectation to the above-mentioned certain production (a production other than a big hit decision). In addition, the chance button 136 vibrates to provide a purely realistic presentation.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 272 (E1), the shake display of the combination of the decorative symbols after performing the sword strike is performed. That is, here, the combination screen of the decoration pattern of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") is shaking and displayed on the background screen of the sword strike. Note that "SP" is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 272 (E2), the wipe effect is executed, and the character of the lord who has ridden the bike is displayed on the background screen of the unpatterned same color. In this wipe effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") has disappeared. On the other hand, the notification area HZ and the fifth symbol pd5 are displayed, and the model title is also displayed at the lower right. In FIG. 272 (E2), the user wipes out, and the background is normally returned to the background. That is, when the wipe effect is over, the background is switched back to the background of the clear sky. Further, in this example, the resurrection effect is not started, and the sway display of the combination (“decor 6” − “decor 7” − “decor 6”) of the lost design symbols is redisplayed.

  Note that the wipe effect is the effect shown in FIG. 223 (A2) to FIG. (A6), the effect shown in FIG. 223 (B2), or the effect shown in FIG. 225 (B1) to FIG. It may be an effect, or an effect shown in the same figure (C1) to the same figure (C3).

  In the representative example described above, the configuration in which the sway display is performed after the switching display (wipe effect) performed after the display indicating the loss is performed in the reach effect (super reach effect) having a relatively high hit probability In the display in the wipe effect, and in the swing display, a certain notification in the notification region development effect (here, a preliminary display of “SP” in the notification region HZ) is performed. It should be noted that the above-mentioned certain notification (preliminary display of “SP” in the notification area HZ) may be performed only by the display in the wipe effect among the display in the wipe effect and the vibration display, or performed only in the vibration display. It is also good.

  Next, another example will be described using FIG. 272 (F1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 272 (F1), the sword strike (super reach 2) effect is performed, and in the figure (F2), the final judge effect is started, and the large button of the fifth mode The image 136a 'and the operation prompting display are displayed. When this final judgment effect is started, the entire notification area HZ is hidden. That is, the "SP" which has been displayed up to now has disappeared. In addition, the frame display which defines alerting | reporting area | region HZ may remain, and only advance notice display may become non-display. In FIG. 272 (F2), the chance button 136 of the fifth mode is operated once, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The combination of symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") is switched to a screen in which the display is swaying. Also in this case, the wipe effect is started as shown in FIG. 272 (F4), but the notification area HZ remains off. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 272 (F5) after wiped out, the resurrection effect is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost on the clear sky background (“decor 6” − "Decoration 7"-"Decoration 6" is redisplayed. Here, the final judge effect is just an effect, and the result of the pass / fail judgment (the result of the big hit or not) is that the main control unit 300 has already decided by the hit / off judgment (lottery) performed at the start of the change. The final judge effect is said to be a pass / fail judgment effect, or said to be a hit / off decision effect. Further, the final judgment effect (final judgment effect accompanied by operation) triggered by the operation of the chance button 136 is also referred to as a yes / no judgment button effect or a button effect at the time of acceptance decision.

  In the representative example described above, before the final judgment effect (big hit judgment effect) is started, a certain notification in the notification area development effect (here, a notice display of “SP” in the notification area HZ) is ended. The certain notification is not redisplayed in the symbol variation display currently being performed. Note that the certain notification may not be ended, but may be temporarily hidden only, and may be redisplayed later.

  Although some representative examples have been described above, all the subsequent drawings relate to the concept of the representative examples described here. In addition, parts related to the concept of the representative figure may be combined with each other in part or all. Further, the representative example described above is an example in which the part related to the explanation is picked up and shown for the sake of convenience of the explanation, and may or may not be performed simultaneously with a certain display in another example. Including.

  FIG. 273 is a view showing a plurality of examples in which the chance button 136 is operated or not while the number is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  In FIG. 273 (A1), the combination (“decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 1”) of the decorative designs of the lost is displayed on the clear sky background (normal background). In the upper right notification area HZ, the frame display for defining the notification area HZ remains, but nothing is displayed in the background of the first aspect. Of the three suspension icons h11 to h13 displayed, only the first suspension icon h11 is in the second mode, and the remaining suspension icons h12 and h13 are all default modes (first mode).

  In FIG. 273 (A2), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (A2), the display of the moving animation of the holding icon is started. That is, while the 1st hold icon h11 of the 2nd mode is moving toward the pedestal where a change icon is displayed, the hold icon which was the 2nd hold icon h12 until now is the display position of the 1st hold icon The hold icon, which has been the third hold icon h13 so far, moves toward the display position of the second hold icon. When the symbol variation display of the special drawing is started, the display of the number is started in the notification area HZ. The display of this number may be simultaneous with the start of the symbol variation display of the special drawing, or may be simultaneous with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. Strictly speaking, the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol may be slightly delayed from the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure, so if it is simultaneous with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, It may be after the start of the symbol variation display. Also, it may be after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 273 (A2), the number "5" is displayed. In FIG. 273 (A3), the movement of the hold icon is completed. Therefore, the display of the numbers in the notification area HZ is started before the completion of the movement of the hold icon. Even when the fluctuation icon h0 is reached, the second aspect remains.

  Here, the initial value of the number displayed in the notification area HZ is not limited to "5", but may be "10", "20", "1", or "1". Sometimes it is "99". Among the initial values of the numbers displayed in the notification area HZ, the highest occurrence frequency is "10". Although the initial value does not have a one-to-one relationship with the fluctuation time of the special figure, the longer the fluctuation time, the tendency tends to be a large number of initial values. For example, at a relatively long fluctuation time 1 and a relatively short fluctuation time 2, the fluctuation time of the special figure tends to be a larger number of fluctuation values at fluctuation time 2 than fluctuation time 1. In addition, when the fluctuation time is relatively long, the expectation of the big hit is configured to be high. Specifically, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a big hit, a relatively long fluctuation time is selected. Also, when the initial value is “1”, the jackpot may be determined, or the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the initial value is “5” or “10”. Also, even when the initial value is “99”, the jackpot may be determined, or the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the initial value is “5” or “10”.

  The range of numerals displayed in the notification area HZ may be 99 or less and 1 or more, or 0 may be displayed.

  Also, when the symbol variation display of the special figure of the shortest variation time (for example, 5 seconds) among the variation time of "D" shown in FIG. 271 (d) is started, the numeral "99" is in the notification area HZ Do not show. That is, in the symbol fluctuation display displayed over the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation time of "D", the display of the number in the notification area HZ is configured not to be started as the display representing "99" There is. In the symbol variation display displayed over the variation time (for example, 120 seconds) of “A” shown in FIG. 271 (d), the display of the number in the notification area HZ is started as the display showing “99”. It may be configured to be the case. Furthermore, in the symbol fluctuation display displayed over the shortest fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) among the fluctuation time of "D" shown in FIG. 271 (d), the display of the number in the notification area HZ represents "5" The display may be configured to be started. Alternatively, in the symbol variation display displayed over the shortest variation time (for example, 5 seconds) among the variation times of “D” shown in FIG. 271 (d), the display of the number in the notification area HZ is not started It may be

  In FIG. 273 (A4), the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, even if it says the 1st stop, it is shaking and displayed strictly. Here, "decoration 6" is displayed shaking. In FIG. 273 (A5), the second stop of the decorative symbol is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the "decoration 5" is displayed with shaking. In this example, the third stop of the decorative symbol is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b without the chance button 136 being operated. As a result, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 273 (A6), "decoration 6"-"decoration 8"-"decoration 5", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is displayed with shaking.

  In FIG. 273 (A7), the display (“5”) of the number in the notification area HZ disappears in the state where the sway display of the combination of the decorative symbols is performed. That is, the display of the number in the notification area HZ disappears before the finalized display of the decorative symbol. In addition, although the frame display which defines alerting | reporting area | region HZ remains here, the whole alerting | reporting area | region HZ may disappear. In addition, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 which has been displayed in the second mode has been started. In this erasing animation, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 gradually becomes thinner. Note that the timing at which the display of the number in the notification area HZ disappears may be the same as the timing at which the deletion animation of the fluctuating icon is started, or the timing at which the display of the number disappears may be earlier. Timing may be earlier. Also in FIG. 273 (A8), the deletion animation is continued, and the sway display of the combination of the decoration symbols is also continued. In FIG. 273 (A9), the deletion animation is completed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is completely disappeared. In addition, a combination of decorative symbols is displayed. The completion timing of the deletion animation and the display start timing of the confirmation display of the combination of the decorative symbols may be simultaneous, or the completion timing of the deletion animation may be earlier, or the display start timing of the confirmation display May be quick. For example, the fluctuation icon h0 may be displayed until the finalized display.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In FIG. 27B (B2) continued from FIG. 273 (A2), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 27B (B3), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “4”, and the notification area HZ shakes. It is done. In FIG. 273 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 27 (B4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “3”, and the operation of the chance button 136 continues. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 273 (B6), the display of the number is changed to the display of the "question mark". Here, the display of the notification area HZ may change from the number “3” to the display of the “question mark” or the display may change from “2” to the display of the “question mark”. In some cases, the display changes from "" to "question mark". In FIG. 273 (B7), the display of the "question mark" is displayed in the notification area HZ, and thereafter, the display contents of the notification area HZ are returned to the same state as in (A3) except for the display contents. The same as (A4) and the following figures except for the display content of the notification area HZ. That is, when returning to FIG. 273 (A3), the display of the notification area HZ is the display of the “question mark” instead of “5”, and thereafter, the same figure (A4), the same figure (A5),.・ We will continue. Also in the following description, the same applies to the case where “returns to the same state as in FIG. The example described above is the same as the case of No. 1 shown in FIG. This corresponds to the 01 pattern.

  Next, another example will be described. In the same figure (C2) continued from FIG. 273 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the same figure (C3), the number in the notification area HZ is decreased to "2" and the chance button 136 is once added. In operation (C4), the number in the notification area HZ is decreased to "1". Even in FIG. 273 (C4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 27C (C5), the notification area HZ changes from the display of the numeral "1" to the display of the "question mark". It returns to the same state as in the figure (A3) except for the display content, and thereafter becomes the same as the figure after (A4) except for the display content in the notification area HZ.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. In the figure (D2) continued from FIG. 273 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the figure (C3), the notification area HZ changes from the display of the numeral "3" to the display of the "question mark". It changes and returns to the same state as (A3) in the drawing except for the display content of the notification area HZ, and thereafter becomes the same as (A4) or later except for the display content in the notification area HZ.

  In the example described above with reference to FIG. 273, there may be a case where the display switches to the advance notice even though the chance button 136 is not operated the same number of times as the number displayed in the notification area HZ. In each of the examples, only the "question mark" with the lowest degree of expectation is displayed.

  The preview display with the lowest degree of expectation may be displayed only when the operation means is operated the same number of times as the number displayed in the notification area HZ. Alternatively, on the premise that it is displayed only when the same operation is performed, if the notice display with the lowest degree of expectation is displayed before operating the same number, conversely, the jackpot is determined as the premier treatment. It is also good. In addition, the number of times of operation in which the preliminary display with the lowest expectation degree appears may be set to be larger than the number of operations in which other preliminary displays appear. This may increase the initial value, and other notices are displayed before becoming “1”, while the notice with the lowest degree of expectation is before becoming “1”. It may not be displayed. In addition, when the initial value is the first number (for example, 2 or more ("5")), the initial value is larger than the first number (for example, 98 or less (for example, The notice display with the lowest degree of expectation may be displayed as compared with the case of “20”). Also, the notice with the lowest expectation may be replaced with the notice with the highest frequency of display. Further, the notice display with the lowest degree of expectation may be a notice display with the highest frequency of display.

  FIG. 274 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a search reach which is a normal reach is performed.

  Figures 274 (A1) to (A4) are the same as Figures 273 (A1) to (A4), and in Figure 274 (A5), the reach state is established without the chance button 136 being operated. doing. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 274 (A7), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappear, and the design is switched to the fifth symbol pd5, and the search reach effect is started . When the search reach effect is started, the background display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the background display of the search reach. In FIG. 274 (A8), a character of the lord has appeared, and it is displayed that if an enemy is found, it develops into a super reach effect. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated even during the reach, and the number “5” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 274 (A10), the enemy can not be found, and the development to the super reach effect ends in failure, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 274 (A11) is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost The "decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6" are displayed with shaking. Even when the shaking display is started, the display of the numbers in the notification area HZ does not disappear. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated until the end, and in FIG. 274 (A14), the finalized display of the combination of the lost design is performed. The display of the numbers in the notification area HZ disappears before the finalized display is performed. In addition, the display of the numbers in the notification area HZ may disappear before the start of the shake display, or may disappear simultaneously with the start of the shake display, or may disappear simultaneously with the confirmation display, and the confirmation display is It may disappear after being started.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In FIG. 274 (A3) continued from FIG. 274 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 274 (B3), the number in the notification region HZ decreases to “4” and the notification region HZ shakes and displays It is done. In FIG. 274 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 274 (B4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to "3", and the operation of the chance button 136 continues. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 274 (B6), the display of the number is changed to the display of the "question mark". Also in this case, the display of the notification area HZ may change from the number “3” to the display of the “question mark” or may change the display from “2” to the display of the “question mark”. In some cases, the display changes from "" to "question mark". Eventually, as in the example shown in FIG. 274 (A4) to FIG. (A10), the reach state is established and the search reach effect is started, but the development to the super reach effect ends in failure. During this time, in the notification area HZ, the display of the "question mark" is still displayed. In addition, the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed.

  FIG. 275 is a diagram illustrating an example continued from FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 275 (B15) continued from FIG. 274 (B14), “decoration 6” “decoration 7” “decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of lost, is displayed shaking. ing. Even if the sway display is started, the preliminary display on the notification area HZ does not disappear. Also in this example, the chance button 136 is not operated until the end, and in FIG. 275 (B18), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols is performed. The advance notice display in the notification area HZ disappears before the confirmation display is performed. In addition, the advance notice display in the notification area HZ may disappear before the start of the shake display, may disappear at the same time as the start of the shake display, or may disappear simultaneously with the confirmation display, and the confirmation display is started It may disappear after being done. The example described above is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated at an early stage after the symbol variation display of the special drawing is started, but the notice display with the lowest degree of expectation (display of the "question mark") This is an example in which only is displayed.

  Subsequently, three examples will be described. The three examples shown in FIG. This is an example corresponding to the 02 pattern.

  In the first example, the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 275 (A2) during the search reach effect continued from FIG. 274 (B12), and in the same figure (A3), the chance button 136 continues and another It is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (A4), the logo accessory 224F which has been the first aspect (default aspect) is changed to the third aspect. During the search reach production, a notification prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, which corresponds to the back button effect, but by operating the chance button 136 twice during the reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is 2 It has been promoted. Although two-level promotion refers to two-level promotion in that it corresponds to the first to third modes in the display mode of the hold icon, the display of the hold icon in a mode representing the jackpot expectation in the mode of the logo feature 224F When the thing equivalent to the 2nd aspect in an aspect is not prepared, it can be called only promotion rather than 2 steps promotion. In this example and / or other examples, it may be two-stage promotion or may be just promotion. The chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 275 (A5)), but the aspect of the logo character 224F does not change any more and remains the third aspect as shown in FIG. 275 (A6). is there. Eventually, except for the aspect of the logo character item 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 274 (B13), and thereafter, the same as in FIG. In this first example, the chance button 136 is operated even at the early stage when the symbol variation display is started, and the chance button 136 is also operated during the reach.

  Next, the second example will be described. In the second example, in FIG. 275 (C2) during the search reach effect continued from FIG. 274 (A8), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. And the notification area HZ is displayed swaying. In FIG. 275 (C3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 275 (C4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “3”. In addition, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted in two stages. Although the chance button 136 is still operated (see FIG. 275 (C5)), the aspect of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains the third aspect. On the other hand, in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 275 (C6), the display of the number is changed to the display of the "question mark". Also in this case, the display of the notification area HZ may change from the number “3” to the display of the “question mark” or may change the display from “2” to the display of the “question mark”. In some cases, the display changes from "" to "question mark". Eventually, except for the aspect of the logo character item 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 274 (B13), and thereafter, the same as in FIG. In this second example, the chance button 136 is operated after reaching the reach, that is, the chance button 136 is not operated in the early stage of reaching the reach, that is, in the early stage when the symbol variation display is started.

  Finally, the third example will be described. The third example is an example in which the reach state is developed with the chance button 136 operated three times before reaching and the display of the notification area HZ becomes "2". After reaching the reach state, the chance button 136 is operated for the first time at the timing of FIG. 275 (D2), and in FIG. (D3), the number of the notification region HZ decreases to “1” and the notification region HZ shakes. It is displayed. In FIG. 275 (D3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 275 (D4), the display of the notification area HZ is changed from the number "1" to the display of the "question mark". In addition, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted in two stages. Although the chance button 136 is still operated (see FIG. 275 (D5)), the aspect of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more and remains the third aspect as shown in FIG. 275 (D6). is there. Eventually, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 274 (B13) except for the aspect of the logo character item 224F, and thereafter, the same as FIG. 274 (B14) or later. In this third example, although the chance button 136 is operated at an early stage when the symbol variation display is started, the chance button 136 is not operated until the display of the notification area HZ is switched to the notice display, and after reaching reach, the chance button 136 Is operated again, and the display of the notification area HZ is switched to the advance display. The timing at which the display of the notification area HZ is switched to the advance notice display is the same as the timing at which the aspect of the logo combination 224F is promoted, but the timing at which the display of the notification area HZ is switched may be earlier. The timing at which the aspect changes may be earlier.

  As described above, to summarize the three examples described with reference to FIG. 275, in the first example, the start of the notification area development effect comes first, and the aspect change of the logo feature 224F comes later, and in the second example, the logo The mode change of the bonus item 224F is first, and the start of the notification area development effect is after, and in the third example, the start of the notification area development effect and the mode change of the logo feature 224F are the same timing. In the following description of effects, as in these three examples, there may be a difference in the flow of effects, but the explanation may be omitted and the description may be omitted.

  FIG. 276 is a diagram illustrating an example of development to Super Reach 1 (Achikake Reach).

  From FIG. 276 (A1) to FIG. 27 (A9), from FIG. 274 (A1) to FIG. 27 (A9) except that the number displayed in the notification area HZ is “10” instead of “5”. In the same way, the search reach effect is performed without the chance button 136 being operated. The player sees that the number displayed in the notification area HZ is "10", which means that the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case of "5", that the fluctuation time is long, or both. I will pay attention to the symbol variation display. In addition, the operation will be improved by preparing the operation of the operation means.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 276 (A10), a state in which a bad merchant who is one of the enemies of the lord is discovered is displayed, and in the subsequent figure (A11), a super reach effect is produced. The introduction effect of is started, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the effects screen, and the display of the notification area HZ disappears. The fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed. In FIG. 276 (A12), as a continuation of the introduction effect, the household object 224E which has been at the initial position up to that point rises to a position overlapping the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. In addition, the family crest 224E positioned on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L emits light in the fifth mode. Note that the logo accessory 224F that is in the initial position and has not started operation remains in the default mode (first mode). Here, the logo accessory 224F may also emit light in the fifth mode, but the logo accessory 224F does not operate and only emits light at the initial position.

  In the meantime, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed finally when the logo character 224F is operated than when the family crest 224E is operated. Do. In other words, the weak pattern is one operating character (for example, family crest 224E), while the strong pattern is a plurality of moving characters (two for Yashiro character 224Fa and general character 224F) Or, it is three crests of family crest 224E, Yashiro character 224Fa and general character 224F).

  In FIG. 276 (A13), the introductory effect ends, and the accommodative reach effect of super reach 1 is started. When the cover reach effect is started, the background display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the background display of the cover reach. Further, when the super reach effect is started, the notification area HZ is displayed again, and the numeral “10” is still displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 276 (A13). In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated even during the super reach presentation. In addition, the final judge production is not performed in the achika reach production which is the super reach 1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 276 (A17), "decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is swayed and displayed. Even when the sway display is started, the notification area HZ does not disappear and the display of the numbers is also displayed and continued. In FIG. 276 (A18), the wipe effect described using FIG. 272 (E2) is started. Even during the wipe effect, the notification area HZ does not disappear, and the display of numbers is also displayed and continued. In FIG. 276 (A19), the animation of the character of the lady riding a motorcycle is displayed, and in FIG. 276 (A20), the character is wiped out. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 276 (A20), the resurrection effect is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of lost on the normal background ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration" 6 ') is re-displayed and these combinations are swayed. Even at the wipe-out timing, the notification area HZ does not disappear, and the display of the numbers continues to be displayed, but the display of the numbers disappears during the shake display. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated until the end, and in FIG. 276 (A23), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols is performed.

  In the example described above, the notification area HZ does not disappear and the display of numerals continues to be displayed even when the sway display of the combination of the decorative symbols is started, but the display of the numbers continues as shown in FIG. 272 (E1) to FIG. Unlike the notice display described using, the display of numbers may disappear (may end).

  FIG. 277 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button 136 is operated before the reach effect is started.

  In FIG. 277 (A2) continued from FIG. 276 (A1), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2 (A3), the number of the notification region HZ decreases to “9” and the notification region HZ is displayed with shaking. It is done. Also in FIG. 276 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 276 (A4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “8”. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 276 (A6), the display of the number is changed to the display of "Chance". After that, it is the same as FIG. 276 (A3) to FIG. (A23) except that the notification area HZ is the advance notice. That is, after that, although the chance button 136 is not operated at all, it is an example in which the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is displayed although it has developed into the cover reach of the spar reach 1. In this example, as in the representative example described with reference to FIG. 272 (E1) to FIG. (E3), the advance warning display in the notification area HZ starts the shake display or the wipe effect starts. It does not hide, it disappears after the shaking display after wipe out is resumed.

  FIG. 278 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 is operated during reach effect.

  Three examples are shown in FIG. The three examples shown in FIG. This is an example corresponding to the pattern of 05.

  In the first example, the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 278 (A2) during the search reach effect continued from FIG. 277 (A12), and in the same figure (A3), the chance button 136 continues It is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (A4), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first aspect (default aspect), is changed to the third aspect. In FIG. 278 (A4), the chance button 136 is operated one more time. Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (A5), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third aspect to the fourth aspect (green color). In this example, by operating the chance button 136 three times during reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is promoted in three stages. Although the chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 278 (A6)), the aspect of the logo character 224F does not change any more and remains the fourth aspect as shown in FIG. 278 (A7). is there. After that, except for the aspect of the logo character item 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 277 (A13), and thereafter, the same as FIG. 277 (A14) or later.

  Subsequently, in the second example, the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 278 (B2) during the search reach effect continued from FIG. 276 (A8), and in FIG. 2B (B3), the number in the notification area HZ is While reducing to "9", the alerting | reporting area | region HZ is displayed shaking. Also in FIG. 278 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2B (B4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “8”. In addition, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted in two stages. Furthermore, even in FIG. 278 (B4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2B (B5), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “7”, and the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted one more stage. It is changing to the 4th mode (green). The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 278 (B7), the display of the number is changed to the display of "Chance". On the other hand, the aspect of the logo accessory 224F does not change any more, and remains the fourth aspect. After that, except for the aspect of the logo character item 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 277 (A13), and thereafter, the same as FIG. 277 (A14) or later.

  Finally, the third example will be described. The third example is an example in which the reach state is developed with the chance button 136 operated seven times before reaching and the display of the notification area HZ becomes "3". After reaching the reach state, the chance button 136 is operated for the first time at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (C2), and in FIG. 2C (C3), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “2” and the notification area HZ shakes. It is displayed. Also in FIG. 278 (C2), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2C (C4), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “1”. In addition, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted in two stages. Furthermore, in FIG. 278 (C4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2C (C5), the display of the notification area HZ changes from the number “1” to the display of “Chance”. The aspect of 224 F is also promoted one more step, and changed to the fourth aspect (green). Although the chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 278 (C6)), the aspect of the logo character 224F does not change any more and remains the fourth aspect as shown in FIG. 278 (C7). is there. In addition, the display of the notification area HZ is still the display of "Chance". After that, except for the aspect of the logo character item 224F, the state returns to the same state as FIG. 277 (A13), and thereafter, the same as FIG. 277 (A14) or later.

  As described above, when the three examples described using FIG. 278 are summarized, in the first example, the start of the notification area development effect comes first, and the aspect change of the logo feature 224F comes later, and in the second example, the logo The mode change of the bonus item 224F is first, and the start of the notification area development effect is after, and in the third example, the start of the notification area development effect and the mode change of the logo feature 224F are the same timing.

  FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button 136 is operated before the reach effect is started, and the chance button 136 is operated also during the reach effect.

  Fig. 279 (A1) to Fig. 276 (A2) are the same as Fig. 276 (A1) to Fig. 276 (A2), and in Fig. 279 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated once. In A4), the number in the notification area HZ is decreased to "9", and the notification area HZ is displayed with shaking. Also in FIG. 279 (A4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 279 (A5), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “8”. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 279 (A7), the display of the number changes to the display of “Chance”. Thereafter, the operation of the chance button 136 stops, and in FIG. 279 (A12), the search reach is started. In FIG. 279 (A14) during the search reach, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 279 (A15), the chance button 136 is continuously operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (A16), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first aspect (default aspect), is changed to the third aspect. In FIG. 279 (A16), the chance button 136 is operated one more time. Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (A17), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third aspect to the fourth aspect (green). Although the chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 279 (A18)), the aspect of the logo character 224F does not change any more and remains the fourth aspect as shown in FIG. 279 (A19). is there. In addition, the display of the notification area HZ is still the display of "Chance". That is, the aspect of the logo character 224F is the fourth aspect (green color) during the execution of the expansion / render effect to super reach shown in FIG. 279 (A19). In FIG. 279 (A20), the enemy can not be found, and the development to the super reach presentation ends in failure, and the development to the super reach presentation ends. When the development to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo feature 224F returns to the default aspect (first aspect). And "decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6" which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost are displayed shaking on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 279 (A21). The timing at which the aspect of the logo feature 224F returns to the aspect of the default may be simultaneous with the end of the development / rendering to the super reach, or may be before the end of the evolution / rendering, It may be after the end of the effect and before the start of the sway display, or may be simultaneous with the start of the sway display. In addition, it may be configured so as not to return to the generation of another effect accompanied by the light emission of another logo character item 224F. Further, although the advance notice display in the notification area HZ does not disappear even when the shake display is started, it disappears before the finalized display shown in FIG. 279 (A24) is performed (see FIG. 279 (A22)). The example described with reference to FIG. This corresponds to the example of the 04 pattern.

  FIG. 280 is a diagram illustrating an example of development to Super Reach 1 and a big hit.

  Figures 280 (A1) to (A5) are the same as Figures 279 (A1) to (A5), and in the notification area HZ shown in Figure 280 (A5), the numeral "8" is displayed. It is done. Even after this, the chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times (Fig. 280 (A6)), and in the notification area HZ shown in Fig. 280 (A7), the display of the number changes to "SP". Thereafter, the operation of the chance button 136 is stopped, and in FIG. 280 (A12), the search reach is started as in the example described with reference to FIG. In the search reach shown in FIG. 280 (A14), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 280 (A15), the chance button 136 is operated one more time continuously. Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (A16), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first aspect (default aspect), is changed to the third aspect. In FIG. 280 (A16), the chance button 136 is operated one more time. Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (A17), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third mode to the fourth mode (green). Although the chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 280 (A18)), the aspect of the logo character 224F does not change any more, and as shown in FIG. 280 (A19), development to super reach The fourth mode remains as it is during the execution of the turning effect. Moreover, the display of the notification area HZ is still the display of "SP".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 280 (A20), a state is shown in which development and staging effects to the super reach have been completed and a bad merchant who is one of the lords is discovered. When the development to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is again returned to the default aspect (first aspect). That is, even if the development and directing to the super reach are successful, the aspect of the logo feature 224F returns to the default aspect (first aspect).

  Subsequently, in FIG. 280 (A21) to FIG. (A25), similarly to FIG. 276 (A11) to FIG. There is. As described above, the final judge effect is not executed in Super Reach 1, and in FIG. 280 (A26), the background image for the accommodative reach effect is suddenly switched to the background image for the big hit final effect, and in FIG. Both the family crests 224E and the logo features 224F that were in their respective initial positions appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. That is, the family crest 224E rises to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emits light in the seventh mode. In addition, the logo character item 224F is also lowered to the front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (to the maximum operation position), and the separation operation described with reference to FIG. 270 (c) is performed. Each of the general military items 224Fb emits light in the seventh mode on both sides of the family crest 224E. In FIG. 280 (A28), each of the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F is returned to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a big hit decision animation in which the lord has caught a bad merchant. In the seventh embodiment, the light emission in the seventh mode continues for both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 281 is a diagram illustrating an example following on FIG. 280.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 281 (A29) continued from FIG. 280 (A28), “decoration 6” “decoration 6” “decoration 6” which is a combination of decorative symbols of big hit is displayed shaking ing. The preliminary display (in this case, “SP”) in the notification area HZ does not disappear even when the sway display is started, but disappears before the finalized display shown in FIG. 281 (A31) is performed (FIG. 281 (A30) reference). In addition, the timing at which the mode of the family crest 224E or the logo role 224F returns to the mode of default may be at the end of the final display, or in the seventh mode continuously to the jackpot start effect started thereafter It may emit light. Alternatively, it may return to the default mode at a certain timing during swing display (for example, the same timing as the advance display of notification area HZ disappears), or may return at the start of final display, or during final display You may return to

  The example described above is the same as the case of No. 1 shown in FIG. This corresponds to the example of the 07 pattern.

  FIG. 282 is a diagram illustrating an example of development to Super Reach 2.

  282 (A1) to (A9) are the same as FIG. 276 (A1) to (A9), and the search reach effect is performed without the chance button 136 being operated. In the notification area HZ, the numeral "10" is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 282 (A10), a state in which the swordsman who is another enemy of the lord's enemies is found is displayed, and in the same figure (A11), it is super The introduction effect of the reach effect is started, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the effect screen, and the display of the notification area HZ disappears. The fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed. In FIG. 278 (A12), as a continuation of the introductory effect, a role operation effect in a strong pattern is performed. That is, both the family crest 224E and the logo feature 224F that were in their respective initial positions appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eight generations feature 224Fa and the general features 224Fb perform the separation operation. Between them, the family crest 224E is located, and each of the three characters 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E emits light in the fifth mode.

  In FIG. 282 (A13), the introduction effect ends, and both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F return to their initial positions and become the first mode, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is Super Reach 2. Swordsman reach production has been started. When sword reach reach production is started, the background display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the background display of the sword reach. Further, when the super reach effect is started, the notification area HZ is redisplayed, and the numeral "10" is still displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 282 (A13). In FIG. 282 (A15) showing the super reach effect, the button effect is started, and the button image 136a and the like are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 282 (A16), the operation effective period is started, but in this example, the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period. However, even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the chance button 136 being operated, as shown in FIG. 282 (A17), the weak pattern cut-in image CIw whose background is the fourth mode is displayed. The cut-in image CIw is an image displayed also when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Further, in accordance with the display of the cut-in image CIw, the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F emit light in the same mode (fourth mode) as the mode of the background of the cut-in image CIw. Here, the cut-in image CIw is displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed even without the button operation, but the cut-in image CIw is displayed only when the button operation is performed. May be In addition, some cut-in effects and certain serif announcements before the start of the super reach effect are not displayed without the button operation, and some cut-in effects during the super reach effect are displayed without the button operation. You may configure it. In addition, a configuration may be provided with cut-in effects and serif announcements that have different display contents depending on whether or not there is a button operation, or may not have such a configuration.

  Here, in the normal button effect, even if the operation means such as the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period elapses, that is, when the button image 136a and the like become non-displayed, FIG. Although some effects such as the display of the cut-in image CIw as shown may be executed, a number is displayed in the notification area HZ, there is no operation of the chance button 136 (operation means), and the display of the number disappears. Also, any effect (for example, notification area development effect) is not started, and it can be said that it is one of the difference between the two.

  Eventually, the final judgment effect is started in FIG. 282 (A18), and the judgment result is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The final judgment effect here does not involve the operation of the operation means such as the button operation, but the judgment result is automatically displayed as time comes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 282 (A20), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is swayed and displayed. This is the same as 276 (A18) to (A23), and the confirmation display of the combination of the decorative symbols of lost is performed without the chance button 136 being operated.

  In the sword reach reach effect which is Super Reach 2, as shown in FIG. 282 (A15), a normal button effect always occurs once, and the final judge effect with the operation of the operation means such as button operation etc. Judge effect) may or may not occur. The jackpot expectation is higher in the case where it occurs than when the final judgment effect with the operation of the operation means does not occur. That is, in the symbol variation display currently performed, the big hit symbol aspect is likely to be finally determined and displayed. The super reach where the final judgment effect with the operation of the operation means does not occur may be Super Reach 3 in order to distinguish it from the super reach where the final judgment effect with the operation of the operation means occurs.

  Further, in this example, although the chance button 136 has not been operated even once, if the chance button 136 is operated once during the button effect shown in FIG. 282 (A16), cutting is performed according to the button operation. While the in-image CIw is displayed, the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to "9" or switched to the advance notice display. However, during the button effect, the operation of the chance button 136 may be effective only for the button effect, and the display of the notification area HZ may not be changed.

  FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example of development to Super Reach 2 after operating the chance button 136 at an early stage when the symbol variation display has been started.

  The state shown in FIG. 283 (A2) is a state continuing from FIG. 280 (A2), and from FIG. 283 (A2) to FIG. 28 (A12) is the same as FIG. 280 (A3) to FIG. 280 (A13). That is, when the chance button 136 is operated four or more times, the notification area HZ changes from the display of numerals to the display of "SP", and thereafter, the search reach effect is started. In FIG. 283 (13), the development and production of super reach continues. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated during the search reach effect.

  On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 283 (A14), it is displayed that the swordsman, which is another enemy among the enemies of the lord, has been discovered. 283 (A15) to 283 (A19) following FIG. 283 (A14) are the same as from FIG. 282 (A11) to FIG. 282 (A15), and the role of the strong pattern in the introduction effect of the super reach effect After the object operation production is performed, it develops into a super-reach 2 swordsman reach production, and at first, normal button production is started. In FIG. 283 (A20), the operation effective period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 283 (A21), the cut-in image CIw of the weak pattern is displayed according to the button operation. In addition, even if the chance button 136 is operated, there is no change in the advance notice display of the notification area HZ.

  FIG. 284 is a diagram showing an example continued from FIG. 283.

  283 (A22) onward from FIG. 283 (A21) is the same as in FIG. 282 (A18) onward, and the judgment result is started although the judgment effect is not accompanied by the operation. In the display device 208L, the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") is displayed once after being swayed and confirmed.

  The state shown in FIG. 284 (B2) is a state continuing from FIG. 283 (A16), and from FIG. 284 (B2) to FIG. (B7) is the same as FIG. 283 (A18) to FIG. 280 (A22). It is. In other words, it develops into a super-reach 2 sword-academic reach production, and first of all, a cut-in image CIw of a weak pattern is displayed, although the chance button 136 is operated once within the operation valid period with normal button effects. , Judge production without operation has been started. In the same figure (B8) continued from FIG. 284 (B7), the background image of the sword strike is switched to the background image of the big hit finalization effect, and in the figure (B9), the family crest character 224E at each initial position so far Both of the logo accessories 224F appear in front of the first decorative symbol display 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. In FIG. 284 (B10), each of the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F is returned to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a big hit finalization animation in which the swordsman falls and the lord has won. In the seventh embodiment, the light emission in the seventh mode continues for both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 284 (B11), "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit, are displayed with shaking. The preliminary display (in this case “SP”) of the notification area HZ does not disappear even when the sway display is started, but disappears before the final display is performed, and in FIG. 281 (B12), the preliminary display of the notification area HZ is In the unlit state, "decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6" which is a combination of the decoration patterns of the big hit are displayed.

  FIG. 285 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button 136 is operated during search reach effect before developing to Super Reach 2.

  Three examples are shown in this figure 285. The three examples shown in FIG. This is an example corresponding to 12 patterns.

  In the first example, “SP” is already displayed in the notification area HZ in FIG. 285 (A2) continuing from FIG. 283 (A12). In this state, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 285 (A3), the chance button 136 is continuously operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 285 (A4), the logo accessory 224F which has been the first aspect (default aspect) changes to the third aspect. In FIG. 285 (A4), the chance button 136 is operated one more time. Then, as shown in FIG. 285 (A5), the logo accessory 224F changes from the third aspect to the fourth aspect (green color). In FIG. 285 (A5), the chance button 136 is operated one more time, and as shown in FIG. 2 (A6), the logo accessory 224F changes from the fourth mode to the fifth mode (red color). Although the chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 285 (A7)), the aspect of the logo character 224F does not change any more, and as shown in FIG. 285 (A8), development to super reach The fourth mode remains as it is during the execution of the turning effect. Moreover, the display of the notification area HZ is still the display of "SP". After that, returning to the same state as in FIG. 283 (A13) except for the aspect of the logo feature 224F, when the development / render effect to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is the default aspect (the first aspect) Mode) (see FIG. 283 (A14)). The subsequent steps are the same as those shown in FIG. 283 (A15).

  Subsequently, in the second example, in FIG. 285 (B2) continued from FIG. 282 (A8), the numeral “10” is still displayed in the notification area HZ. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 285 (B3), the number in the notification area HZ is decreased to “9”, and the notification area HZ is displayed with shaking. Also in FIG. 285 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2B (B4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “8”. In addition, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted in two stages. Furthermore, even in FIG. 285 (B4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2 (B5), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “7”, and the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted one more stage. It is changing to the 4th mode (green). In FIG. 285 (B5), the chance button 136 is operated one more time, and as shown in FIG. 2 (B6), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to "6", and the logo character 224F is changed from the fourth embodiment. It has changed to the 5th aspect (red). Although the chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 285 (B7)), the aspect of the logo character 224F does not change any more. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 285 (B8), in the notification area HZ, the display of the number is changed to the display of "SP". After that, returning to the same state as in FIG. 283 (A13) except for the aspect of the logo feature 224F, when the development / render effect to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is the default aspect (the first aspect) Back to the form) (see FIG. 283 (see A14)). The subsequent steps are the same as those shown in FIG. 283 (A15).

  Finally, the third example will be described. The third example is an example in which the reach state is developed in a state where the chance button 136 is operated six times before reaching and the display of the notification area HZ becomes "4". After reaching the reach state, the chance button 136 is operated for the first time at the timing of FIG. 285 (C2), and in FIG. 2C (C3), the number of the notification region HZ decreases to “2” and the notification region HZ shakes. It is displayed. Also in FIG. 285 (C2), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2C (C4), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “2”. In addition, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted in two stages. Furthermore, even in FIG. 285 (C4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2C (C5), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “1”, and the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted by one stage. It has changed to 4 aspect (green). In FIG. 285 (C5), the chance button 136 is operated one more time, and as shown in FIG. 2C (C6), the display of the notification area HZ changes from the number “1” to the display of “SP”. The logo feature 224F is changed from the fourth aspect to the fifth aspect (red). In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed a total of ten times, and the big hit expectation is raised in the notification area HZ (“B” in FIG. 271 (b)) “SP” is displayed. On the other hand, logo character item 224F has changed to the fifth mode (red color) with very high hit probability (“A” in FIG. 271 (e)) only by pressing the back button four times during reach. . Although the chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (see FIG. 285 (C7)), the aspect of the logo character 224F does not change any more and remains the fifth aspect as shown in FIG. 285 (C8). is there. Moreover, the display of the notification area HZ is still the display of "SP". After that, returning to the same state as in FIG. 283 (A13) except for the aspect of the logo feature 224F, when the development / render effect to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is the default aspect (the first aspect) Back to the form) (see FIG. 283 (see A14)). The subsequent steps are the same as those shown in FIG. 283 (A15).

  As described above, to summarize the three examples described with reference to FIG. 285, in the first example, the start of the notification area development effect comes first, and the aspect change of the logo feature 224F comes later, and in the second example, the logo The mode change of the bonus item 224F is first, and the start of the notification area development effect is after, and in the third example, the start of the notification area development effect and the mode change of the logo feature 224F are the same timing.

  FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example in which a strong pattern cut-in image with a normal button effect is displayed, and a jackpot is performed after the final judge effect with an operation.

  The state shown in FIG. 286 (A2) is a state continuing from FIG. 283 (A16), and from FIG. 286 (A2) to FIG. 28 (A5) is the same as FIG. It is. In other words, it develops into a sword reach reach production that is Super Reach 2. First, the chance button 136 is operated once within the operation effective period with the normal button effect.

  In response to the operation of the chance button 136, in FIG. 286 (A6), a strong pattern cut-in image CIs of which the background is the sixth mode is displayed. The strong-pattern cut-in image CIs overlaps with a part of the notification area HZ where the notice display of “SP” is displayed (part including the characters “SP”), and is compared to before the overlap. It is difficult to visually recognize a part of the region HZ including the letters “SP”. Further, in accordance with the display of the cut-in image CIs, the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F emit light in the same mode (sixth mode) as the mode of the background of the cut-in image CIs. Although the cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern may be displayed after the operation effective period has elapsed even without the button operation, the cut-in image CIw of the strong pattern is displayed only when the button operation is performed. If there is no button operation, a weak pattern cut-in image CIw may be displayed.

  In FIG. 286 (A7), the strong pattern cut-in image CIs disappears, and the character “SP” displayed in the notification area HZ is easily visible. Further, both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F are returned to the default mode (first mode). Subsequently, in this example, the character "SP" disappears from the notification area HZ before the final judgment effect is started. If the character “SP” disappears from the notification area HZ at this timing, the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation is always started after this. For this reason, there is a player who notices that the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation is started after this because the character "SP" has disappeared. In FIGS. 286 (A9) to (A10), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the introduction animation of the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation is displayed, and the button image and the like are beginning to be faintly visible. In FIG. 286 (A11), the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation is started, and a large button image 136a 'and the like are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 286 (A12), the operation effective period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to the button operation, the large button image 136a 'etc disappears in FIG. 286 (A13), and it switches to the background image of the big hit finalization effect, and in FIG. 2A (A14), the family crest who has been in each initial position The object 224E and the logo character 224F both appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 286 (A15), each of the family crest 224E and the logo piece 224F is returned to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a big hit decision animation in which the swordsman has fallen and the lord has won. In the seventh embodiment, the light emission in the seventh mode continues for both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 286 (A16), “decoration 6”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit, is swayed, and FIG. So, that combination is displayed in final. The notice display (in this case, “SP”) of the notification area HZ disappears before the start of the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation, and is not displayed again and remains disappear. In addition, although mentioned later, the advance notice display of "large board behavior" does not disappear before the start of the final judge effect, continues to be displayed until the shaking display is started, and disappears after the shaking display is started. On the other hand, the notice display of the "question mark" and "Chance" disappears before the start of the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation, as with "SP". The timing at which the characters such as “SP” disappear from the notification area HZ may be simultaneous with FIG. 286 (A11) or may be immediately before.

  FIG. 287 is a diagram illustrating an example in which “border behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  Figures 287 (A1) to (A5) are the same as Figures 279 (A1) to (A5), and in the notification area HZ shown in Figure 287 (A5), the numeral "8" is displayed. ing. Even after this, the chance button 136 is continuously operated once or more (FIG. 287 (A6)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. Moreover, the background of the alerting | reporting area | region HZ on which "large board behavior" was displayed is changing to the 7th aspect (rainbow color). Furthermore, at the same time when the display of "Ball behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ, the big hit finalization notice effect is started. The big hit determination advance notice effect here is the same effect as the big hit decision advance notice effect described with reference to FIG. 272 (A3), and is an effect in which the logo combination 224F emits light in the seventh mode at the initial position. The period during which the logo bonus item 224F emits light in the seventh aspect may be a predetermined period, or a certain effect (for example, the first stop of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, etc.) is started It may be a period of In this example, the logo accessory 224F emits light to the seventh mode for a predetermined period (FIG. 287 (A7)), and then returns to the default mode (first mode). On the other hand, in the notification area HZ, the display of "Dance" is continuously displayed on the background of the seventh aspect (rainbow color). Even if the logo role item 224F has returned to the default mode, the player can confirm that the jackpot finalization state is still continued by looking at the display of the notification area HZ, and the game is at ease. It can be performed. The logo accessory 224F may also continue to emit light in the seventh embodiment.

  Figures 287 (A9) to (A12) are the same as Figures 280 (A9) to 280 (A12) except for the difference in the display mode of the notification area HZ, and are in the reach state, and the search reach is achieved. Has been started. As shown in FIG. 287 (A13), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2A (A14), the chance button 136 is operated one more time continuously. Then, as shown in FIG. 287 (A15), the logo accessory 224F, which has been the first aspect (default aspect), is changed to the third aspect. In FIG. 287 (A16), the chance button 136 is operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 287 (A17), the logo character item 224F changes from the third mode to the fourth mode (green color), and the chance button 136 is operated once as in FIG. 287 (A17). As shown, the logo accessory 224F changes from the fourth aspect to the fifth aspect (red). After this, the player thinks that the logo feature 224F has once changed to the seventh aspect (rainbow color) once and thinks that it will change here as well, as shown in FIG. 287 (A18), the chance button 136 The aspect of the logo feature 224F does not change any more, and remains in the fourth aspect during the execution of the development reach effect to the super reach, as shown in FIG. 287 (A19). On the other hand, in the notification area HZ, the display of "Dance" is continuously displayed on the background of the seventh aspect (rainbow color).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 287 (A20) displays a state in which the sword lord who is the enemy of the majesty is discovered, and from FIG. 287 (A21) to FIG. 287 (A25) It is the same as FIG. 282 (A 11) to FIG. 282 (A 15) except for the difference in the display mode of the area HZ, and after the role operation production of the strong pattern is performed in the introduction rendering of the super reach production It is developed into the reach-a-knife reach production, and at first, normal button production is started. In the notification area HZ, the display of “Diamond behavior” continues to be displayed on the background of the seventh mode (rainbow color) also from FIG. 287 (A23) to FIG. 287 (A25).

  FIG. 288 is a diagram showing an example continued from FIG. 287.

  Figures 287 (A26) to 288 (A36) are the same as Figures 286 (A11) to 286 (A16) except for the difference in display mode of the notification area HZ. That is, in the normal button effect, the chance button 136 is operated once within the operation effective period (FIG. 287 (A26)), and the cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern is displayed according to the operation (FIG. A27). The strong pattern cut-in image CIs overlaps with the display of “Large behavior” in the notification area HZ in the same manner as the “SP” display, but does not overlap with the “Large behavior” display. It is also good. For example, the cut-in image CIs may be overlapped with the display of the notification area HZ. In addition, according to the display of the cut-in image CIs, the family crest 224E and the logo feature 224F emit light in the sixth mode. Subsequently, although the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation has been started, the display of "Ball behavior" in the notification area HZ does not disappear but continues to be displayed even when the final judgment effect is started (Fig. 288 (A31) ). Therefore, it is not known that the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation is started after this, by the change of the display mode of the notification area HZ, but the player is still It can be confirmed that the jackpot confirmation advance notice state is continued, and the player can play the game at ease. Even in the final judgment effect here, the chance button 136 is operated once within the operation effective period (Fig. 288 (A32)), and in response to this button operation, the background image for the big hit finalization effect is switched (Fig. 288 (A33) , And both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F appear and emit light in the seventh mode (FIG. 288 (A34)). After that, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman falls down and a big hit confirmation animation won by the lord is displayed (Fig. 288 (A35)), and a combination of the big hit decorative symbols "decoration 6"-"decoration 6" -"Modification 6" is displayed with shaking (Fig. 288 (A36)). The display of "Dumping behavior" in the notification area HZ continues to be displayed without disappearing until this shaking display is started. Then, before the finalized display is performed, the display of "Ball behavior" disappears from the notification area HZ, and in Fig. 288 (A37), the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is finalized and displayed. On the other hand, the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode even if the confirmation display is started. The display of “Ball behavior” in the notification area HZ may be continuously displayed without being erased before the finalized display, and may be continuously displayed until the big hit start effect or after the big hit start effect.

  The example described above is the same as the case of No. 1 shown in FIG. It corresponds to the example of 14 patterns.

  FIG. 288 (B2) is a continuation from FIG. 283 (A22), and in the state where “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ, a judge effect without an operation is performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B2), the crown falls. Subsequently, in FIG. 288 (B3), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loser, is swayed, and in FIG. 288 (B4), FIG. 272 (E2) The wipe effect described using has been started. Even during the wipe effect, the display of "SP" in the notification area HZ does not disappear, and in the figure (B6), it wipes out, and a combination of a decorative pattern of lost on an ordinary background ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7" -The shaking indication of "deco 6" is re-displayed. Here, the resurrection effect is started, and an animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B7). The animation of the resurrection production has a princess appeared and overlaps the display of "SP" in the notification area HZ, and the display of "SP" is more difficult to see than before the start of the animation. The sway display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed so as to overlap with the animation of the resurrection effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B8), the animation of the resurrection effect ends, and the background image of the big hit determination effect is switched. In addition, the display of "SP" of alerting | reporting area | region HZ comes to be visible, and the display of 5th design pd5 is continued. In the following FIG. 288 (B9), both the family crest 224E and the logo piece 224F which have been at their respective initial positions appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. There is. In FIG. 288 (B10), each of the family crest 224E and the logo piece 224F is returned to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit "decoration 6"-"decoration 6" -"Decoration 6" is displayed shaking. In the seventh embodiment, the light emission in the seventh mode continues for both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F returned to the initial position. In FIG. 288 (B11), in the state in which the advance notice display in the notification area HZ disappears, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is displayed in a final manner.

  FIG. 289 is a diagram illustrating an example in which pseudo sequential effect is performed.

  FIGS. 289 (A1) to (A3) are the same as FIGS. 276 (A1) to 276 (A3), the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the chance button 136 is still operated. Not. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 289 (A4), the mini character NJ of the ninja appears on the tutorial display section TT1, and throws a shuriken toward the fluctuation icon h0 of the second mode. In FIG. 289 (A5), the shuriken hit the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is covered with the effect image EFB and disappears for a moment, but in the same figure (A7) that follows, the effect image EFB disappears and fluctuation The icon h0 is changed to the third mode. That is, in this example, the change animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is performed over FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. (A6). In FIG. 289 (A7), the mini character NJ of the ninja has disappeared, and the mini character NJ of the ninja corresponds to a change noticing character for predicting that the display mode of the variation icon changes. In addition to the change icon, the display mode of the hold icon may change, and since the change icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to as an icon related to the symbol change display, the ninja mini character NJ is an icon related to the symbol change display. It is also a character that predicts that the display mode of will change. Also, in this example, when the ninja mini character NJ appears, it is predicted that the display mode of the icon may change, but the ninja mini character NJ may disappear in a super reach effect etc. It may be a character that continues to be displayed across the symbol variation display. Furthermore, even if a ninja mini character NJ appears, it may not throw a shuriken, or it may not hit even if it throws a shuriken. In addition, this ninja mini character NJ may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M (not shown) here, and it may be the third character, like a character on a stage in an example described later. It may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N. Even while the change animation of the fluctuation icon h0 described above is being performed, the numeral “10” is continuously displayed in the notification area HZ, but the chance button 136 is not operated.

  In FIG. 289 (A8), the button effect is started, and the button image 136a and the like are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 289 (A9), although the operation effective period is started, the chance button 136 is not operated here either, and the operation effective period elapses without operation. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, when the operation effective period elapses, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the conversation announcement. In other words, a line that indicates that the impression to be performed after this is not the line specifying the effect is displayed on the base of the third mode (blue). In addition, logo character item 224F is also changed to the third mode (blue). Note that the princess's conversation image CI4 may be an image that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, and a different image (for example, an image dedicated to no operation) is not operated when the chance button 136 is not performed. May be displayed, or the conversation image may not be displayed. Further, instead of the line saying "the sign of the character is ...", "a pseudo-link? ..." may be displayed as a line specifying the effect to be executed later.

  After the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the previous notice of the conversation, disappears, and the logo feature 224F returns to the first mode, the first stop (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol is shown from FIG. A stop (temporary stop) is performed, and in FIG. 289 (A16), in the middle symbol display area 208b, a decorative symbol of "continue", which is a pseudo continuous symbol, appears. Up to this point, the chance button 136 has not been operated, and the numeral "10" is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  In FIG. 289 (A17), the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is temporarily stopped (sway display). As described above, when the pseudo linked symbol is temporarily stopped, the notification area HZ itself is not displayed, and the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, the frame display which defines alerting | reporting area | region HZ may remain, and only the display of a number may become non-display. In addition, the display of numbers in the notification area HZ or the entire notification area HZ may be hidden before the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped, or may be hidden after the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped. . When the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped, an animation of a pseudo run introduction effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as shown in FIG. 289 (A17) to the same figure (A19).

  In FIG. 289 (A20), the pseudo-series effect is started, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, when the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started, the display of the annunciation area HZ which has disappeared up to that point is resumed, and the numeral “10” is displayed again in the annunciation area HZ shown in FIG. 289 (A20) There is. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the re-variation of the decorative symbol is performed, “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-sequences is displayed. This state in the pseudo-series effect is referred to as a "pseudo-2" state, and the relationship between each state in the pseudo-series effect and the numbers (initial values) displayed in the notification area HZ is predetermined, and the "pseudo-2" The numeral “10” is associated with the numeral “10” in FIG. 289 (A20), and the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In addition, the number of "10" is set to the number (initial value) of the notification area HZ displayed according to the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure, and it is the same as the number associated with "pseudo 2" It is.

  During the re-variation of the decorative symbol, the change animation of the variation icon h0 is started again. That is, as shown in FIG. 289 (A22), the ninja mini character NJ reappears, and throws a shuriken toward the variation icon h0 of the third mode. In FIG. 289 (A23), the shuriken hit the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation icon h0 is covered with the effect image EFB and disappears for a moment, but in the same figure (A24), the effect image EFB disappears and fluctuation The icon h0 is changed to the fourth mode.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 289 (A26), the button effect is started again, but here too, the chance button 136 is not operated, and the operation effective period elapses without operation. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, when the operation effective period elapses, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the conversation announcement. Here, the word "ten" is displayed on the background of the fifth mode (red). In addition, logo character item 224F is also changed to the fifth aspect (red). It should be noted that instead of the line "Toen ...", "To third time ..." may be displayed as a line specifying the effect to be executed later.

  FIG. 290 is a diagram illustrating an example following FIG. 289.

  After the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the previous notice of the conversation, disappears, and the logo feature 224F returns to the first mode, the first stop (temporary stop) to the second stop of the decorative symbol from FIG. 290 (A30) to FIG. A stop (temporary stop) is performed, and in FIG. 290 (A34), in the middle symbol display area 208b, a decorative symbol of “continue”, which is a pseudo continuous symbol, appears. The chance button 136 has not been operated even once, and the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  In FIG. 290 (A35), the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is temporarily stopped (shake display), the notification area HZ itself is not displayed, and the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 290 (A36) to the same figure (A37), the animation of the pseudo-introduction effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 290 (A38), the pseudo connected effect is started, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 290 (A38), “× 3” representing the number of pseudo runs is displayed, and this state in the pseudo run effect is said to be the state of “pseudo 3”. The number “20” is associated with “pseudo 3”, and in FIG. 290 (A38), the number “20” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In addition, "10" and "20" may be comprised so that a value may differ by lottery instead of the intrinsic | native number in the case of pseudo | simulation sequence | arrangement production. For example, it may be configured to differ depending on the presentation content, such as “20” in “pseudo 2” in a certain variation, “5” in “pseudo 2” in a certain variation, or the like.

  During the re-variation of the decorative symbol, the change animation of the change icon h0 is also started, and in FIG. 290 (A42), the change icon h0 is changed to the fifth mode.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 290 (A44), although the button effect is started again, the chance button 136 is not operated here either, and the operation effective period elapses without operation. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, when the operation effective period elapses, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the conversation announcement. In FIG. 290 (A46), as in FIG. 289 (A28), a line of “ten-” is displayed on the base of the fifth mode (red). Also in this case, the logo feature 224F is changed to the fifth mode (red). It should be noted that instead of the line "Toen ...", "Continued ... ..." may be displayed as a line specifying the effect to be executed later, or "To reach ..." is displayed It may be done.

  After the conversation image CI4 of the princess, which is the previous notice of the conversation, disappears, and the logo feature 224F returns to the first mode, the first stop (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol is extended from FIG. A stop (temporary stop) is performed, and the reach state is established. In FIG. 290 (A51), search reach effect is started. Even when the search reach effect is started, the chance button 136 is not operated, and the numeral “20” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  FIG. 291 is a diagram illustrating an example following on FIG.

  From FIG. 290 (A52) to FIG. 291 (A57) to FIG. 291 (A72), the difference in the display mode of the notification area HZ and the operation of the chance button 136 are excluded from FIG. Same as A37). That is, in this example, the chance button 136 is never operated until the end. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 287 (A13) to the same figure (A18), the chance button operation during the search reach is not performed either, and the aspect change of the logo accessory 224F does not occur. Further, although the numeral “20” continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, as shown in FIG. 291 (A63), the number “20” disappears from the notification area HZ before the final judgment effect is started. In this example, the game has developed into a super-reach 2 swordsman reach, and the chance button operation was not performed in the normal button production during the swords reach production, but a strong pattern cut-in image as shown in FIG. 292 (A61) Although the CIs are displayed and the chance button operation is not performed even in the final judge effect involving the operation, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291 (A68) switches to the background image of the big hit determination effect and the family crest thing Both 224E and logo accessory 224F appear and emit light in the seventh embodiment (FIG. 291 (A69)). After that, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman falls down and a big hit confirmation animation won by the lord is displayed (Fig. 291 (A70)), and a combination of big hit decorative symbols "decoration 6"-"decoration 6" -After the display of shaking of "decoration 6" (Fig. 291 (A71)), the finalized display is reached (Fig. 291 (A72)).

  As described above, in the example described from FIG. 289 to FIG. 291, the pseudo-series effect up to pseudo 3 is performed during the variable display of one decorative symbol, and then the search reach of normal reach Developed and finally made a big hit. In this example, although the chance button operation was not performed as a part, there was a chance button operation after the operation valid period had elapsed even if the chance button operation was not performed in the state where the display prompting the chance button operation was made. Although the same effect display as in the case is displayed, the effect display may be displayed only when the chance button operation is performed. Moreover, when the chance button operation is not performed in the state where the display for prompting the chance button operation is made, with the display mode of the effect display displayed when the chance button operation is performed after the operation effective period has elapsed The effect display of different display modes may be displayed.

  Further, when the chance button operation is performed at the timing of FIG. 289 (A27), the number “9” may be displayed in the notification area HZ, or the display may be switched to the advance notice. Further, when the chance button operation is performed at the timing of FIG. 290 (A45), the number “19” may be displayed in the notification area HZ, or the display may be switched to the advance notice also here.

  Furthermore, in the example described from FIG. 289 to FIG. 291, the change animation of the fluctuation icon, the button effect, and the re-variation start by the pseudo continuous effect are repeated a plurality of times in this order of description. It can be said that the three effects such as the change animation of the change icon, the button effect, and the re-variation start by the pseudo continuous effect are effects related to each other. In particular, in the case where a conversation image related to the pseudo continuous effect is displayed by the button effect, the three effects are effects related to each other. However, there are also cases where the three effects are not related at all.

  FIG. 292 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button operation is performed by the button effect.

  In FIG. 292 (A2) continued from FIG. 289 (A7), the button effect is started. In FIG. 292 (A3), the operation effective period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In FIG. 292 (A4), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, conversation announcement is started. The notice of conversation here is the same as the notice of conversation shown in FIG. 289 (A10) when the chance button is not operated. Further, in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 292 (A4), the displayed number decreases from "10" to "9" and is swayed. The following FIGS. 292 (A5) to (A13) are the same as FIGS. 289 (A11) to 282 (A19) except for the difference in display mode of the notification area HZ. That is, after the chance button 136 is operated once in FIG. 292 (A3), the chance button 136 is not operated, and the numeral “9” is displayed in the notification area HZ until the pseudo run symbol is temporarily stopped. It keeps being done. When the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is temporarily stopped (sway display) in FIG. 292 (A11), the notification area HZ itself becomes non-display. Thereafter, through pseudo-introduction effect in FIG. 292 (A12) to FIG. (A13), in FIG. 292 (A14), the state is “pseudo 2”, and re-variation of the decorative symbol is started. The notification area HZ, which is not displayed during the pseudo-introduction effect, is resumed in FIG. 292 (A14). In the notification area HZ where the display has been resumed, the number “9” until just before disappearing is displayed as the number “10” associated with “pseudo 2”, and in response to the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure The notification area HZ is restored to the number when the display was started (the numeral displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 289 (A2)). The subsequent steps are the same as in FIG. 289 (A21) and the subsequent steps.

  FIG. 293 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button operation is performed before the start of the pseudo-series effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 293 (A2) is a state continuing from FIG. 276 (A2), and the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 293 (A2), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 293 (A3), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “9”, and the notification area HZ is displayed in a wavering manner. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times (FIG. 293 (A4)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A5), the display of the number is changed to the display of "continue". That is, in the notification area HZ, the display of the number "9" may change to the display of "continuation", and the display of the number "1" may change to the display of "continuation". In any case, it is predicted that it is decided that the pseudo connected effect is to be performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display by displaying the character of "continuation" in the notification area HZ. After that, though not shown, the same situation as in FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. 289 (A15) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is simulated in the middle symbol display area 208 b in FIG. Decorative symbols of "continuation", which are consecutive symbols, have appeared. While the illustration is omitted, the text "continuation" continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the character "continuance" is also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A7). In FIG. 293 (A8), the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is temporarily stopped (sway display), and the notification area HZ itself becomes non-display. After that, in FIG. 293 (A11), the pseudo-sequence effect is started (re-variation of the decoration symbol is started) in FIG. 293 (A11) to FIG. 293 (A11). It will be in the state of The notification area HZ, which is not displayed during the pseudo-introduction effect, is resumed to be displayed in FIG. 293 (A11). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the number “continuation” until immediately before disappearing is displayed as the number “10” associated with “pseudo 2”.

  In the following FIG. 293 (A12), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the same drawing (A13), the number of the notification region HZ is reduced to “9”, and the notification region HZ is swayed and displayed. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times (FIG. 293 (A14)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A15), the display of the number changes again to the display of “continue” It is foreseen that it is decided that it will be. After that, though not shown, the same situation as in FIG. 289 (A22) to FIG. 290 (A33) except for the form of the notification area HZ is simulated in FIG. 293 (A17) in the middle symbol display area 208b. Decorative symbols of "continuation", which are consecutive symbols, have appeared. While the illustration is omitted, the text "continuation" continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the character "continuance" is also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A17). In FIG. 293 (A18), the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is temporarily stopped (sway display), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. After that, in FIG. 293 (A21), the pseudo-sequence effect starts (re-variation of the decoration symbol starts) in FIG. 293 (A21) after the pseudo-introduction effect of FIG. 293 (A19) to FIG. It will be in the state of The notification area HZ, which is not displayed during the pseudo-introduction effect, is resumed in FIG. 293 (A21). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the number “continuation” until immediately before disappearing is displayed as the number “20” associated with “pseudo-3”.

  In the following FIG. 293 (A22), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the same drawing (A23), the number of the notification region HZ is decreased to “19”, and the notification region HZ is swayed and displayed. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times (FIG. 293 (A24)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 293 (A25), the display of numbers changes to the display of “SP”. It is predicted that the possibility of being hit is very high. After that, although illustration is omitted, after the letter “SP” disappears from the notification area HZ through the same situation as FIG. 290 (A40) to FIG. 291 (A63) except for the aspect of the notification area HZ, The introduction animation of the final judge effect is started in the same manner as in the case of 291 (A64), and thereafter the same as in FIG. 291 (A65) or later.

  FIG. 294 is a diagram showing an example in which another effect is performed prior to the effect notified in the notification area HZ.

  Figures 294 (A2) to (A4) are the same as Figures 293 (A2) to 293 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated three or more times, and in Figure 294 (5) the notification area The HZ display has changed from the number display to the "SP" display. The display of "SP" in the notification area HZ is displayed, and it is predicted that the possibility of super reach effect is very high. After that, though not shown, the same situation as in FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. 289 (A15) except the form of the notification area HZ is simulated in FIG. 294 (A7) in the middle symbol display area 208 b. Decorative symbols of "continuation", which are consecutive symbols, have appeared. While the illustration is omitted, the letter "SP" continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the letter "SP" is also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 294 (A7). However, in this example, the super reach effect is not started here, and in FIG. 294 (A8), the decorative symbol of “continue” is temporarily stopped (sway display), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. Thereafter, through pseudo-introduction effects in FIGS. 294 (A9) to (A10), in FIG. 294 (A11), pseudo-in-sequence effects are started, and in this case, the state is “pseudo 2”. The notification area HZ, which is not displayed during the pseudo-introduction effect, is resumed in FIG. 294 (A11). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the number “continuation” until immediately before disappearing is displayed as the number “10” associated with “pseudo 2”.

  In the following FIG. 294 (A12), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the same figure (A13), the number of the notification region HZ is reduced to “9”, and the notification region HZ is swayed and displayed. The chance button 136 continues to be operated one or more times (FIG. 294 (A14)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 294 (A15), the display of the number changes to “continuation” this time, It is foreseen that it is decided that it will be. After that, though not shown, the same situation as in FIG. 289 (A22) to FIG. 290 (A33) except the form of the notification area HZ is simulated in FIG. 294 (A17) in the middle symbol display area 208b. Decorative symbols of "continuation", which are consecutive symbols, have appeared. While the illustration is omitted, the text "continuation" continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the text "continuation" is also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 294 (A17). In FIG. 294 (A18), the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is temporarily stopped (shake display), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. Thereafter, through pseudo-introduction effect shown in FIG. 294 (A19) to FIG. (A20), pseudo-in-sequence effect is started in FIG. 294 (A21). That is, as the advance notice is given in the notification area HZ, the pseudo continuous effect is started, and in this case, the state is “pseudo 3”. The notification area HZ, which is not displayed during the pseudo-introduction effect, is resumed in FIG. 294 (A21). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the number “continuation” until immediately before disappearing is displayed as the number “20” associated with “pseudo-3”.

  In the following FIG. 294 (A22), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in the same drawing (A23), the number of the notification region HZ is decreased to “19”, and the notification region HZ is displayed with a shake. The chance button 136 continues to be operated one or more times (Fig. 294 (A24)), and in the notification area HZ shown in Fig. 294 (A25), the display of numbers changes to "SP", and super reach effect can be performed It is foretold again that sex is very high. After that, although not shown, the same situation as in FIG. 290 (A40) to FIG. 290 (A56) except for the aspect of the notification area HZ is Super Reach 2 as in FIG. 291 (A57). Swordsman reach production is started, and it becomes as notified in the notification area HZ. Although the illustration is also omitted after that, after the letter “SP” disappears from the notification area HZ through the same situation as FIG. 291 (A 58) to FIG. 291 (A 63) except for the aspect of the notification area HZ, FIG. The introduction animation of the final judge effect is started in the same manner as (A64), and thereafter the same as in FIG. 291 (A65) and later.

  In the example described using FIG. 294, as shown in FIG. 294 (A5) and the like, a notification area development effect corresponding to an effect different from the effect occurring at the latest is performed. More specifically, although informing contents (here, "continuation" display) corresponding to an effect occurring in the most recent time can be displayed, different informing contents (here, "SP" display) are displayed There is.

  Here, rather than the case where the super reach effect is started from the state of “fake 2”, the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is started when the super reach effect is started from the state of “fake 3” It is easy to make a big hit. That is, as the number of times of pseudo run increases (as re-variation is more frequently performed), the degree of expectation of the big hit becomes higher. However, the super reach effect is not necessarily performed after the pseudo-series effect is performed, and the super reach effect may not be started from the state of “pseudo 3”. For this reason, the player is relieved if the notice of the super reach effect is given first, assuming that the notice is a true notice, and after that, the number of times of the pseudo run will be the number. It can be focused. In other words, the player may feel relieved that “SP” is displayed earlier than “Continuous” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  Although not described in FIG. 272, in the notification area development effect, the display of “SP” may have a higher expectation of the big hit than “Continuation”. However, the opposite may be applied, and the display of “continuation” may have a higher expectation of the big hit than “SP”. Also, the expectation of both may be the same.

  FIG. 295 is a diagram illustrating an example in which “border behavior” is displayed in the notification region HZ when the chance button operation is performed in the re-variation in the “pseudo 3” state.

  FIG. 295 (A2) continued from FIG. 290 (A38) is a state of “pseudo 3”. In FIG. 295 (A2), the notification area HZ is displayed with the numeral “20” associated with “Pseudo 3”, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 295 (A3), the notification While the number of the area HZ is reduced to "19", the notification area HZ is displayed in a wavering manner. The chance button 136 continues to be operated one or more times (FIG. 295 (A4)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 295 (A5), the display of numbers changes to the display of “Large behavior” and the big hit is confirmed It is predicted. The background of the notification area HZ in which the "large screen behavior" is displayed changes to the seventh mode (rainbow color), and the logo feature 224F also changes to the seventh mode (rainbow color) for a predetermined period. After that, although not illustrated, the same situation as in FIG. 290 (A40) or later passes through except the aspect of the notification area HZ, but the character of "Dumping behavior" does not disappear from the notification area HZ, and "Dumping behavior" The final judgment effect is performed while the character of is being displayed, and the character of "behind behavior" continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ until the combination of the decorative symbol combination of the big hit is started to be displayed. After that, the characters "Ball behavior" disappear from the notification area HZ, and the combination of the decoration patterns of the big hit is displayed.

  In the example described above, "Dumping behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ in the "pseudo 3" state, but the "pseudo 3" state is displayed in the notification area HZ more than the "pseudo 2" state. It is easy to be displayed "large board behavior". In addition, the “general behavior” is more likely to be displayed in the notification area HZ in the “pseudo 2” state than in the state before the start of the pseudo connected effect.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. The state shown in FIG. 295 (B1) is a state before the pseudo connected effect is started, which is continued from FIG. 276 (A2), and the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 295 (B2), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 295 (B3), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “9”, and the notification area HZ is swayed. The chance button 136 is continuously operated one or more times (FIG. 295 (B4)), and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 295 (B5), the display of the number is changed to the display of “Diamond behavior”. The background of the notification area HZ in which the "large screen behavior" is displayed changes to the seventh mode (rainbow color), and the logo feature 224F also changes to the seventh mode (rainbow color) for a predetermined period. After that, though not shown, the same situation as in FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. 289 (A15) except for the mode of the notification area HZ is simulated in the middle symbol display area 208 b in FIG. 295 (B7). Decorative symbols of "continuation", which are consecutive symbols, have appeared. While the illustration is omitted, the characters of "Diamond behavior" continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the characters of "Diamond behavior" are also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 295 (B7). In FIG. 295 (B8), the decorative symbol "CONTINUED" is temporarily stopped (sway display), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. In addition, it may be made to be displayed continuously, without becoming non-displaying, only in the state where "large board behavior" is displayed. After that, through pseudo-introduction effect shown in FIG. 295 (B9) to FIG. (B10), in FIG. 295 (B11), pseudo-in-sequence effect is started (re-variation of the decorative symbol is started). It will be in the state of The notification area HZ, which is not displayed during the pseudo-introduction effect, is resumed in FIG. 295 (B11). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the characters of “Diamond behavior” are redisplayed instead of the numeral “10” associated with the “pseudo 2”. As described above, when the character of "Diamond behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ before the pseudo-series effect (before the "false 2" state), the display displayed in the notification area HZ at the time of the pseudo-series effect disclosure Is not a number previously associated with each state, but is uniformly a character of "large board behavior". In addition, even if the characters of "Dance on the large screen" are displayed again, the logo feature 224F remains in the first mode, but during the predetermined period after the characters on the "Dance on the large screen" are re-displayed, 224F may be changed to the seventh aspect. In the state where "large bed behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ, the chance button 136 is not operated (Fig. 295 (B11) to the same figure (B15)), and although not shown, the notification area HZ is not shown. Through the same situation as in FIG. 289 (A22) to FIG. 290 (A33) except for the aspect of, in FIG. 295 (B17), a decorative symbol of “continuation”, which is a pseudo run symbol, appears in the middle symbol display area 208b. ing. While the illustration is omitted, the character of "Diamond behavior" continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, and the character of "Diamond behavior" is also displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 295 (B17). In FIG. 295 (B18), the decorative symbol of "CONTINUED" is temporarily stopped (sway display), and the notification area HZ itself is not displayed. Thereafter, through pseudo-introduction effects in FIG. 295 (B19) to (B20), in FIG. 295 (B21), pseudo-in-sequence effects are started, and in this case, the state is “pseudo 3”. The notification area HZ, which is not displayed during the pseudo-introduction effect, is resumed in FIG. 295 (B21). In the notification area HZ in which the display has been resumed, the characters of “Diamond behavior” are re-displayed, not the number “20” associated with “Pseudo-3”.

  FIG. 296 is a diagram showing an example following on FIG.

  Even in this state in which "large bed behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ, the chance button 136 is not operated ((Fig. 296 (B22) to Fig. (B25)), and although not shown, The same situation as in FIG. 290 (A40) or later passes through except the mode of the area HZ, but the character of "Dumping behavior" does not disappear from the notification area HZ, and the character of "Dumping behavior" is displayed. The letters "Birch behavior" continue to be displayed in the notification area HZ until the shake display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is started, and then the characters of "Ball behavior" disappear from the notification area HZ, and the big hit The combination of the decorative symbols of is displayed.

  FIG. 297 is a diagram showing an example of the wipe effect that may be started after the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss has been swayed and displayed after the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation. In addition, although the wipe effect is described also in FIG. 288, the wipe effect in FIG. 288 is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loss through the judgment effect without the operation performed before the final judgment effect with the operation. Is an effect that starts after the display is shaken.

  In FIG. 297 (A2) continued from FIG. 286 (A12) in which the chance button operation was performed in the final judge effect accompanied by the operation, the big hit finalization effect explained using FIG. 286 (A13) is not started. The display device 208L displays a scene in which the lord is falling. The display of the notification area HZ disappears before the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation is started (Fig. 286 (A8)).

  Subsequently, in FIG. 297 (A3), “decoration 6” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loser, is swayed, suggesting a loser. In the following FIG. 297 (A4), the wipe effect described using FIG. 272 (E2) is started. In FIG. 297 (A6), wipe-out is performed, and the shaking display of the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") is redisplayed on the normal background. Subsequently, the resurrection effect is started, and an animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (A7). In the animation of the resurrection production, the princess appears and overlaps a part of the notification area HZ where nothing is displayed. The sway display of the decorative symbol disappears, and the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed so as to overlap with the animation of the resurrection effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B8), the animation of the resurrection effect ends, and the background image of the big hit determination effect is switched. In addition, although the overlap of the animation of a resurrection production is cancelled | released, in the alerting | reporting area | region HZ, nothing is displayed. In the following FIG. 297 (A8), both of the family crest 224E and the logo family-of-carriage 224F which have been in their respective initial positions appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. There is. In FIG. 297 (A10), each of the family crest 224E and the logo piece 224F is returned to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit "decoration 6"-"decoration 6" -"Decoration 6" is displayed shaking. In the seventh embodiment, the light emission in the seventh mode continues for both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F returned to the initial position. In FIG. 297 (A11), the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is displayed.

  Note that the resurrection effect may be an effect accompanied by a chance button operation. An animation of a success pattern or a failure pattern may be performed after the button operation. The success pattern in this case corresponds to FIG. 297 (A7). Further, in the case of the effect accompanied by the chance button operation, this effect is referred to as a judge effect.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In FIG. 297 (B2) continued from FIG. 288 (A32) in which the chance button operation was performed in the final judge effect accompanied by the operation in the state where the display of “Diamond behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ, in the notification area HZ. Although the display of "Ball behavior" is continuously displayed, the big hit determination effect is not started, and a scene in which the crown falls is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 297 (B3), “decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loser, is swayed, and in FIG. 297 (B4), wipe effect is started. , Wipe out in the figure (B6). Even during the wipe effect, although the display of "large panel behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (B6), a combination of the decorative symbols of lost on the normal background The shaking display of ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") is redisplayed. Also in this case, the display of "Dance on a large scale" is displayed in the notification area HZ, and then the rebirth effect is started. The display of “Diagram behavior” in the notification area HZ in FIG. 297 (B6) also corresponds to the advance notice display of the resurrection effect. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (B7), an animation of a resurrection effect is displayed. The animation of the resurrection production has a princess appeared and overlaps with the display of "Daio behavior" in the notification area HZ, and the display of "Daio behavior" is less visible than before the start of the animation. In addition, the display of the "large board behavior" may be made to be easy to be seen by overlapping the animation of the rebirth effect with the display of the "large board behavior". In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 288 (B8), the animation of the resurrection effect ends, and the background image of the big hit determination effect is switched. In addition, the display of "large board behavior" of alerting | reporting area | region HZ can be seen. In the following FIG. 297 (B8), both of the family crest 224E and the logo family-of-carriage 224F which have been at respective initial positions so far appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emit light in the seventh mode. There is. In FIG. 297 (B10), each of the family crest 224E and the logo piece 224F is returned to the initial position, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit "decoration 6"-"decoration 6" -"Decoration 6" is displayed shaking. In the seventh embodiment, the light emission in the seventh mode continues for both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F returned to the initial position. The display of "Dumping behavior" in the notification area HZ continues to be displayed without disappearing until this shaking display is started. Then, before the finalized display is performed, the display of "Ball behavior" disappears from the notification area HZ, and in Fig. 297 (B11), the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is finalized and displayed. On the other hand, the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F returned to the initial position continue to emit light in the seventh mode even if the confirmation display is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 297 (B2) to FIG. 2 (B11), “Diagram behavior” is displayed in a wipe effect or in a scene that suggests a loss after that (during a display of combination of blurs of decorative symbols). Therefore, the player should be able to enjoy playing the game with peace of mind, but even though the “Draft behavior” is displayed, a wipe effect is executed or a scene that suggests a loss after that is displayed. By doing this, the player may be somewhat tense, and the interest of the game may be improved. In particular, the player's sense of tension may increase in a scene where it is difficult to see the display of "Dance", due to the animation of the resurrection production.

  FIG. 298 is a diagram showing an example in which both notification area development rendition and normal button rendition are performed according to one chance button operation.

  In FIG. 298 (A2) continued from FIG. 276 (A8), the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 298 (A3), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “9”, and the notification area HZ is swayed. Also in FIG. 298 (A3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2 (A4), the number in the notification area HZ decreases to “8”. In addition, since the chance button 136 is operated twice during reach, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is also promoted in two stages. Furthermore, even in FIG. 298 (A4), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. It is changing to the 4th mode (green). The chance button 136 is continuously hit after this (refer to FIG. 298 (A 6)), and in FIG. It is changing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298 (A9), a state is shown in which development and staging effects to the super reach have been completed and swordsmen who are enemies of the lord have been discovered. When the development to the super reach is finished, the aspect of the logo feature 224F is returned to the default aspect (first aspect). In the notification area HZ, the number "1" is continuously displayed.

  Figures 298 (A10) to 298 (A14) are the same as Figures 282 (A11) to 282 (A15) except for the difference in display mode of the notification area HZ, and in the introductory effect of the super reach effect After the character movement production of a strong pattern is performed, it develops into a sword reach reach production which is Super Reach 2, and at first, normal button production is started. In the notification area HZ, the display of the numeral “1” continues to be displayed also from FIG. 298 (A12) to FIG. 298 (A14). In FIG. 298 (A15) in the state where the numeral “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the operation valid period in the normal button effect is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to this button operation, in FIG. 298 (A16), a strong pattern cut-in image CIw whose background is the sixth mode is displayed. The strong pattern cut-in image CIs overlaps the display portion of the notification area HZ, and the display portion of the notification area HZ is less visible than before the overlap. However, the notification area HZ is swayed and it can be seen that the display has been changed by the operation of the chance button 136. Actually, in response to the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 298 (A15), the display of the numeral “1” is changed to the display of “Chance” in the notification area HZ. Further, in accordance with the display of the strong pattern cut-in image CIs, the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F emit light in the same mode (sixth mode) as the mode of the background of the cut-in image CIw.

  After this, the strong pattern cut-in image CIs disappears, and the character "Chance" displayed in the notification area HZ becomes easily visible, but the final judgment effect is started, so the character "Chance" disappears immediately It will The subsequent steps are the same as those shown in FIG. 286 (A8).

  According to the example of FIG. 298 (A2) to FIG. 2A (A16) described above, the change of the light emission mode of the logo combination 224F according to the chance button operation in FIG. 298 (A4) to FIG. 2A (A8); Two types of effects with the operation of the chance button 136, such as the button effects in FIGS. 298 (A15) to (A16), are performed, and the effects with the operation of one of the chance buttons 136 (button effect And the notification area development effect overlap. In addition, the button operation for connecting to the notification area development effect is also used for these two types of effects accompanying the operation of the chance button 136, and the efficiency of the chance button operation is good.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. FIG. 298 (B2) is the same timing as FIG. 298 (A15). That is, it becomes the timing when the operation effective period in the normal button effect is started. In FIG. 298 (A15), the display of the notification area HZ is the numeral “1”, but in FIG. 298 (B2), the display of the notification area HZ is the numeral “2”. Also in FIG. 298 (B2), the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to the button operation, the cut-in image CIw of the strong pattern is displayed also in FIG. 298 (B3) as in FIG. 2 (A16), and both the family crest product 224E and the logo product 224F are the sixth embodiment ( It emits light in golden color). Further, the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 298 (B3) is swayed and it can be seen that the display has been changed by the operation of the chance button 136. In fact, it has been changed to the number "1". Then, in FIG. 298 (B3), the chance button 136 is operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 298 (B4), there is no change in the strong pattern cut-in image CIw whose background is the sixth mode, and the family crest 224E emitting light in the sixth mode, but only the logo feature 224F. Changes from the sixth aspect to the seventh aspect (rainbow color). The notification area HZ shown in FIG. 298 (B4) is also displayed swaying, and it can be seen that the display has been changed by the operation of the chance button 136. In fact, it has changed from "1" in the number to "Ball behavior".

  In FIG. 298 (B5), the cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern disappears, and the character of “Diamond behavior” displayed in the notification area HZ is easily visible. Also, the family crest 224E is returned to the default mode (first mode). On the other hand, the logo feature 224F emits light in the seventh mode for emitting light in the seventh mode for a predetermined time period as the notification area development effect, but when the predetermined time period is over, the default mode It returns to (1st aspect). After that, it is the same as in FIG. 288 (A29) or later, and the “border behavior” displayed in the notification area HZ continues to be displayed immediately before the finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit.

  According to the example of FIG. 298 (B2) to the same figure (B5) described above, after new effects are started (immediately after) in the other button effects, the notification area development effects are newly generated. As a result, in this example, the aspect of the logo role item 224F is changed (overwritten) in accordance with the newly generated notification area development effect. As described above, in the case where a common rendering means is used for the notification area development effect and the other effects, priority may be given to the notification area development effect or even if a later generated effect is prioritized. You may give priority to the rendition which has been generated earlier. In addition, even when different rendering means are used, when the rendering periods overlap, priority may be given to the notification area development rendering, or priority may be given to rendering that occurs later. Or, on the contrary, priority may be given to the rendition occurring earlier.

  FIG. 299 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notification area development effect and another effect overlap.

  Two examples are shown in FIG. That is, two examples, that is, an example shown in FIG. 299 (A2) to FIG. (A10) and an example shown in FIG. 2 (B2) to FIG. (B10) are shown.

  Hereinafter, matters common to the two examples will be described together. Figures 299 (A2) to (A6) and (B2) to (B6) are the same as Figures 298 (A2) to 298 (A9), and normal reach (search reach) In Figure 299 (A6), in which there are nine chance button operations, and the development and staging of the super reach is over, and the enemy player's swordsman is found, the number "1" is displayed in the notification area HZ. There is.

  In FIG. 299 (A7) and FIG. (B7), the introduction effect of the super reach effect is started, the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is switched to the effect screen, and the display of the notification area HZ disappears. Hereinafter, two examples will be described separately.

  In FIG. 299 (A7), the chance button 136 is operated once, and the background screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (A8) is still the effect screen, and the display of the notification area HZ disappears. However, the logo accessory 224F emits light in the seventh mode at the initial position. That is, the notification area development effect corresponding to the "large board behavior" displayed in the notification area HZ is started. Soon, as shown in FIG. 299 (A9), a character pattern of a strong pattern is produced as a continuation of the introduction effect. That is, both the family crest product 224E and the logo feature 224F appear in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character article 224Fb perform a separation operation, and a family crest role between them. The object 224E is located, and each of the three accessories 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E emits light in the fifth mode (red color). Logo character 224F consisting of Yashiro characters 224Fa and generals character 224Fb was used in notification area development rendition, but it is also used in character movement rendition which occurred later, so the presentation data of notification area development rendition plays a role It is overwritten by the effect data of the object operation effect, and the logo role feature 224F is changed from the seventh aspect to the fifth aspect.

  In FIG. 299 (A10), the introduction effect is finished, and both the family crest 224E and the logo character 224F return to the initial position and become the first mode, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is Super Reach 2. The sword strike reach production is started, and the notification area HZ is redisplayed. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 299 (A10), "Dumping behavior" is displayed. The subsequent steps are the same as in FIG. 287 (A23) and the subsequent steps.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 299 (B7), at this stage, the chance button 136 has not been operated, and as the continuation of the introduction effect, as shown in FIG. 299 (B8), a combination pattern operation effect of a strong pattern is performed. In the character action production of the strong pattern, each of the three characters of Yatsushiro character 224Fa, general character 224Fb, and family crest character 224E emits light in the fifth mode (red color) in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. doing. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated, but no change occurs as shown in FIG. 299 (B9). That is, each of the three above-mentioned goods continues to emit light in the fifth mode (red color) in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The introduction effect is eventually ended, and in FIG. 299 (B10), both the family crest 224E and the logo feature 224F return to the initial position and become the state of the first mode, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, Super Reach 2 A certain swordsman reach production has been started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299 (B10), the notification area HZ is re-displayed, and "border behavior" is displayed in the notification area HZ. Therefore, in FIG. 299 (B9) after the chance button operation is performed, the light emission effect of the seventh aspect by the logo combination 224F in the notification area development effect according to the chance button operation is not performed. In the example, the role operation production of the strong pattern in the introductory production is given priority. The subsequent steps are the same as in FIG. 287 (A23) and the subsequent steps.

  According to the two examples described with reference to FIG. 299, the chance button operation is accepted even in the period (the period in which the notification region HZ is not displayed). However, when other effects are started earlier, there may be a case where the notification area development effect according to the operation of the chance button is not performed (FIG. 299 (B9)). In addition, even if the notification area development effect corresponding to the chance button operation is started first, it may be replaced with another effect to be started later (FIG. 299 (A9).

  FIG. 300 is a diagram showing an example when there is a chance button operation during the wipe effect.

  As described using FIG. 291 (A63), since the display of numbers disappears from the notification area HZ before the final judgment effect is started, the wipe effect here is before the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation. It is an effect to be started after the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is swayed and displayed after the judgment effect which does not accompany the operation performed on the. In the case where the display of the numbers does not disappear from the notification area HZ before the final judgment effect is started, the example shown in FIG. 300 is applicable.

  Also, two examples are shown in FIG. That is, two examples, that is, an example shown in FIG. 300 (A2) to FIG. (A9) and an example shown in FIG. 300 (B2) to FIG. (B11) are shown.

  Hereinafter, matters common to the two examples will be described together. Fig. 300 (A2) and Fig. (B2) are continued when "1" is displayed in the notification area HZ at the stage of Fig. 282 (A18), and in the notification area HZ also in Fig. 300 (A2). “1” is displayed, and “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ also in FIG. As a result of the judgment effect without the operation being performed, the judgment result is the loss of the lord, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300 (A2) and FIG. (B2), the lord is falling. Subsequently, in FIG. 300 (A3) and FIG. (B3), "decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6" which is a combination of the decorative patterns of the loser are swayed, and FIG. 300 (A4) and In the figure (B4), the wipe effect is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 300 (A4) and FIG. 300 (B4), the chance button 136 is operated during the wipe effect. The notification area HZ is displayed also during the wipe effect. Hereinafter, two examples will be described separately.

  In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 300 (A5), in response to the operation of the chance button, the display changes from the numeral “1” to the display of the “question mark” and the notification area HZ is swayed. In FIG. 300 (A6), wipe-out is performed, and the shaking display of the combination of the decorative designs of the lost ("decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6") is redisplayed on the normal background. Even at the timing of wipe-out, the notification area HZ does not disappear, and the display of the "question mark" continues to be displayed, but the display of the "question mark" disappears while shaking is displayed (Fig. 300 (A7)) . In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated until the end, and in FIG. 300 (A9), the finalized display of the combination of the lost decorative symbols is performed. The notice display displayed in the notification area HZ at the timing of FIG. 300 (A5) may be “Chance” instead of the “question mark”.

  On the other hand, in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 300 (B5), in response to the operation of the chance button, the number “1” changes to the display of “Large behavior”, and the logo part is limited only for a predetermined period. 224F emits light in the seventh mode at the initial position. Subsequently, in this example, the resurrection effect is started, and thereafter, the same as in FIG. 297 (B7) or later. Here, the display of "Dance behavior" displayed in the notification area HZ is not a display for previewing that the resurrection effect is to be started.

  When a big hit is made in the example shown in FIG. 300 (A2) to FIG. (A9), the resurrection effect shown in FIG. (B7) is started between FIG. 300 (A6) and FIG. (A7). May be Here, the display of the "question mark" displayed in the notification area HZ and the display of the "Chance" which can be displayed instead of the "question mark" are not a display for giving notice that the resurrection effect is started.

  As described above, as in the two examples described with reference to FIG. 300, the operation of the chance button 136 is also received in the wipe effect that may be started after the combination of the lost design symbols is displayed sway, and the notification area is developed. An effect may be performed. However, in the wipe effect, the operation of the chance button 136 may not be received, or the notification area development effect may not be executed even if the operation is received.

  FIG. 301 is a diagram showing an example when the chance button 136 is pressed for a long time.

  The state shown in FIG. 301 (A2) is a state continuing from FIG. 276 (A2), and the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 301 (A2), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. The operation here is a so-called long press operation in which the chance button 136 can be kept pressed. In FIG. 301 (A3), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to "9". In FIG. 301 (A3) as well, the chance button 136 is kept pressed, and the automatic double hit function is activated. In the auto-continuous hitting function, when the chance button 136 is kept pressed for a predetermined time or more, it is a function that regards continuous hitting, and the same effect as the effect in the case of continuous hitting is executed. Also in FIG. 301 (A4), the chance button 136 is kept pressed, and the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to “8”. Even after this, the chance button 136 is kept pressed (FIG. 301 (A5)), and the number in the notification area HZ may decrease or may be switched to the advance notice display at an early stage. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 301 (A6), the display of the number is changed to the display of "continue". The player stops the long press because the notification area HZ has been switched from the display of numbers to the display of advance notice. The display of the notification area HZ does not change from "continue" even if the long press continues. In addition, it may be defined that the single long press operation functions only as a single shot operation for a predetermined number of times. For example, in the case where one long press functions as single operation for 10 times, it can always be switched to the advance notice display by one long press, but when it functions only as single operation for 5 times, the notification area Since the number of HZ decreases by one each time the chance button 136 is operated, the number of the notification area HZ is reduced by only five. Also, the numbers in the notification area HZ may be set to decrease only to a predetermined number by one long press. For example, if it is set to decrease only to "1" so that "1" is always displayed, the number in the notification area HZ will decrease to only "1" no matter how long you press.

  After FIG. 301 (A7), although not shown in the figure, the situation is the same as in FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. The decorative symbol of "continuation", which is a consecutive symbol, is temporarily stopped (sway display). While the notification area HZ continues to display the characters "continuation" while it is not shown, the notification area HZ itself is not displayed in FIG. 301 (A9). The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 289 (A18) and the subsequent steps.

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In the example described below, the operation amount meter MT11 whose meter is raised according to the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed on the lower left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. 301 (B2) is a continuation from FIG. (A6), and “Continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 301 (B3), the button continuous hit production is started, the operation amount meter MT11 of the empty condition is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the display of "it is pseudo run with meter MAX" is displayed with the button image 136a at the center of the screen. It is Here, “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and it is notified that it is determined that the pseudo-series effect is to be started, so that a double notification is made. It should be noted that in place of “Meter MAX is pseudo-series”, the start of effects (a certain effect) other than pseudo-series effects such as “meter MAX is SP” may be notified. In FIG. 301 (B4), the button image 136a additionally displays the arrow display 136b and the character display of "continuous hit" and the remaining period meter display 136c as a prompting prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136. The operation effective period is started. That is, when the button operation is performed, the first effect (here, button continuous hit effect) is started (a certain button operation acceptance state), and in this state, the operation of the chance button 136 is started. However, the chance button 136 is kept pressed, and the automatic double hit function is activated. Remaining Period While the remaining period of the meter display 136c decreases, the operation amount meter MT11 continues to rise, and in FIG. 301 (B9), the operation amount meter MT11 is full. The player keeps pressing the chance button 136 for a long time until the operation amount meter MT11 is full, and stops the long press when the operation amount meter MT11 is full. In FIG. 301 (B10), the characters “pseudo-repeat GET” are displayed. In addition, although the character of this "pseudo series GET" disappears immediately, "continuation" is continuing being displayed in alerting | reporting area | region HZ. After that, although not shown in the figure, it passes through the same situation as in FIG. 289 (A4) to FIG. 289 (A16) except for the aspect of the notification area HZ, and in FIG. 301 (B12) The decoration pattern of "" is temporarily stopped (swing display). While the notification area HZ continues to display the characters "continuation" while it is not shown, the notification area HZ itself is not displayed in FIG. 301 (B12). The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 289 (A18) and the subsequent steps.

  In the state where the effect pattern that the operation amount meter MT11 is full is selected, the number of times the chance button 136 is operated until the full state may be configured to be different depending on the selected effect pattern. . For example, it may be provided with an effect pattern that becomes full in 10 operations, or an effect pattern that becomes full in 20 operations. Moreover, you may provide the presentation pattern which will be filled up by one operation. Alternatively, it may be configured not to be provided with the effect pattern that will be full in one operation, and in this case, the operation amount is changed rather than the display of "numbers" in the notification area HZ changing to the advance notice display. If the meter MT11 is full, the chance button 136 may have to be operated more frequently.

  FIG. 302 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an effect accompanied by continuous button strikes and long press is started in a state where the number is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  The state shown in FIG. 302 (A2) is a state continuing from FIG. 276 (A2), and the numeral "10" is displayed in the notification area HZ. In the notification area HZ, “10” is displayed and started most frequently. That is, "10" is displayed in the notification area HZ and started than when "20" is displayed and displayed in the notification area HZ than when "5" is displayed and displayed in the notification area HZ. It is configured to be more frequent if it is done. In the following figure 302 (A3), button continuous hit production is started, the operation amount meter MT11 of the empty condition is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the display of “it is pseudo run with meter MAX” with the button image 136a at the center of the screen. It has been done. It should be noted that the start of effects other than the pseudo continuous effect such as “the meter MAX is SP” may be notified in place of “the meter MAX is a pseudo train”. In FIG. 301 (A4), the button image 136a additionally displays the arrow display 136b and the character display of "continuous hit" and the remaining period meter display 136c as a prompting prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136. The operation effective period is started. That is, when the button operation is performed, the first effect (also the button continuous hitting effect) is started (some button operation acceptance state), and in this state, the operation of the chance button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. However, the chance button 136 is kept pressed, and the automatic double hit function is activated. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 301 (A5), the number is reduced from "10" to "9". On the other hand, the operation amount meter MT11 is raised by one scale. In this example, the long press operation of the chance button 136 is effectively handled both in the button continuous hitting effect and in reducing the number displayed in the notification area HZ. After that, the chance button 136 continues to be pressed, and as shown in FIG. 302 (A7), the display of the notification area HZ changes from the display of numbers to the display of "continue". The manipulated variable meter MT11 shown in FIG. 302 (A7) is not full yet. Even when “5” is displayed in the notification area HZ and started, the display of the notification area HZ may easily change to a notice display or always change before the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full. . In addition, even when “20” is displayed in the notification area HZ and started, it may be easy to change the display of the notification area HZ to a notice display before the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full, or It may always change, and conversely, when “20” is displayed in the notification area HZ and the operation is started, the operation amount meter MT11 may be filled first. The character of “pseudo continuous GET” displayed when the operation amount meter MT11 is full may have a reliability of 100% (pseudo continuous determination) or may be less than 100%. When the degree of reliability of the characters of “pseudo series GET” is less than 100%, even if the operation amount meter MT11 is full first, the chance button operation is continued and “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ If you aim for things, you can get accurate information. In addition, if the chance button 136 is operated, even if either the display start of the operation amount meter MT11 first or the display start of the switching of the operation amount meter MT11 first is started, the switching from the number in the notification area HZ to the advance display The switch to the advance notice display in the notification area HZ may be determined to be performed first, or the meter fullness of the operation amount meter MT11 may be determined to be performed first.

  When “continuation” is displayed in the notification area HZ, the execution of the pseudo-series effect is decided, so the long press may be stopped, but in this example, the chance to fill up the operation amount meter MT11 The long press of the button 137 is continued. In FIG. 302 (A9), the operation amount meter MT11 becomes full after the display start of “continuation” in the notification area HZ, and in the following FIG. There is. The player stops the long press when the operation amount meter MT11 is full. In this example, when the automatic double-stroke function is activated but the automatic double-stroke function is not activated, in order to fill the operation amount meter MT11, the initial value with the highest display frequency in the notification area HZ is “ More than 10 "operations (eg, 30 times) are required.

  After that, although not shown in the figure, it passes through the same situation as in Figure 289 (A4) to Figure 289 (A16) except for the aspect of the notification area HZ, and in Figure 302 (A12) The decoration pattern of "" is temporarily stopped (swing display). While the notification area HZ continues to display the characters "continuation" while it is not shown, the notification area HZ itself is not displayed in FIG. 302 (A12). The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 289 (A18) and the subsequent steps.

  In addition, also in this example, and also in the example described using FIG. 301 (B2) to FIG. That is, one long press operation may be determined to function only as a single-shot operation for a predetermined number of times. For example, in the case where one long press functions as single operation for 10 times, it can always be switched to the advance notice display by one long press, but when it functions only as single operation for 5 times, the notification area Since the number of HZ decreases by one each time the chance button 136 is operated, the number of the notification area HZ is reduced by only five. Also, the numbers in the notification area HZ may be set to decrease only to a predetermined number by one long press. For example, if it is set to decrease only to "1" so that "1" is always displayed, the number in the notification area HZ will decrease to only "1" no matter how long you press.

  Next, examples of FIG. 302 (B2) to FIG. 302 (B12) will be described. This example is an example of a normal long press effect in which a long press of the chance button 136 is required. FIG. 302 (B2) is a continuation from FIG. (A6), and "Continuous" is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 302 (B3), the button long-press effect is started, the count display is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the display of “Aim at count 10 by long press” is displayed with the button image 136a at the center of the screen. In FIG. 302 (B5), the button image 136a additionally displays an arrow display 136b and a character display "long press" as a prompting prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 and a remaining period meter display 136c. The operation effective period is started. That is, when the button is operated, the first effect (here, long press effect) is started (some button operation acceptance state), and in this state, the long press operation of the chance button 136 is started, and the remaining period is While the remaining period of the meter display 136c decreases, the count display at the lower left of the screen continues to count up, and the long press operation is continued until the operation valid period is full. In FIG. 301 (B9), it is immediately before the remaining period meter display 136c becomes 0, and the count display is 9. Then, at the same time as the remaining period meter display 136c becomes 0, the count display becomes 10, and in FIG. 301 (B9), a character display "SP GET" notifying that super reach effect has been acquired is displayed. Also in this character display, the reliability may be 100% or less than 100%. Moreover, not only a super reach effect but a normal reach effect may be sufficient, a pseudo continuous effect etc. may be sufficient, and in short, it may be "a certain effect". Also, in the case of “simulated continuous GET”, in this example, the display is performed after the “continuation” display in the notification area HZ, but is displayed before the “continuation” display in the notification area HZ. May be

  Although the characters “SP GET” shown in FIG. 302 (B10) disappear immediately, “continuation” continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ. After that, although not shown in the figure, it passes through the same situation as in Figure 289 (A4) to Figure 289 (A16) except for the aspect of the notification area HZ, and in Figure 302 (B12) The decoration pattern of "" is temporarily stopped (swing display). While the illustration area is not shown, the text "Continuous" continues to be displayed in the notification area HZ, but the notification area HZ itself is not displayed in FIG. 302 (B12). The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 289 (A18) and the subsequent steps.

  In this example, even when the count reaches 10, the button image 136a does not disappear, and the button long press effect is continued without ending, and characters such as "SP GET" have an operation effective period elapsed It will not be displayed unless it is later. For this reason, the long-press effect is an effect that takes time before the result is obtained.

  In addition, with respect to the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, in the long press operation described here, the state where the chance button 136 is pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. The operation mode is an operation mode in which the pressing operation by the chance button 136 is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In the present embodiment, in a state where the long press auto continuous hitting function is effective, while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, a continuous hitting operation is regularly performed at constant intervals (for example, 200 ms intervals). ing. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing one press operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136, in order to appropriately perform the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, the long press auto continuous hitting function is the effect button 136. The pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation of is started. In addition, one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is an example of a first operation mode. In addition, the long press operation for a predetermined time or more by the chance button 136 is an example of a second operation mode in which the period during which the operation is continued is longer than in the first operation mode.

  Further, in the example with the operation of the chance button 136 described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the chance button 136, for example, the long press operation by the chance button 136 is By doing, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the chance button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example involving the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the effect of the chance button 136 by one-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effects of multiple operations are represented by a one-shot operation, effects by long press operation, and continuous hit operation It may consist of a combination of two or more of the effects by. Further, in the example with the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the chance button 136 is continuously pressed continuously, the pressing operation by the chance button 136 The effects accompanied by may be sequentially performed in accordance with the pseudo-continuous hitting operation. That is, in the example accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136, the result of the operation is displayed even when the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and it can be said that the result of the same operation is displayed also when the button is long pressed. Further, in the example accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, in the example with the operation of the chance button 136 described above, although the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the chance button 136, for example, the long press operation by the chance button 136 is By doing, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the chance button 136, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, in the example involving the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the effect of the chance button 136 by one-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the effects of multiple operations are represented by a one-shot operation, effects by long press operation, and continuous hit operation It may consist of a combination of two or more of the effects by. Further, in the example with the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the chance button 136 is continuously pressed continuously, the pressing operation by the chance button 136 The effects accompanied by may be sequentially performed in accordance with the pseudo-continuous hitting operation. At this time, when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the chance button 136, a pseudo pressing operation by the chance button 136 is immediately performed, and therefore, the remaining time meter can be updated to accept the operation of the chance button 136 When being displayed, the presentation may be performed with little change in the display mode of the remaining time of the remaining time meter. That is, in the example accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136, the result of the operation is displayed even when the chance button 136 is continuously hit, and it can be said that the result of the same operation is displayed also when the button is long pressed. Further, in the example accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136 described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, the relationship between the chance button 136 and the effect (button effect) relating to the chance button 136 including the embodiments described above is as follows.

  (1) When a single-shot operation is performed after a button effect (single-shot operation effect) for executing a single pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the chance button 136 is started, a effect related to the result of the operation is performed Ru.

  (2) In the case where a single-shot operation effect is performed a plurality of times in a row, when a long press operation with the chance button 136 is performed, only the effect regarding the result of the operation relating to the first button effect is performed. Alternatively, an effect relating to the result of the operation relating to all button effects is executed.

  (3) After the button effect (continuous hitting operation effect) for executing the multiple pressing operations (continuous hitting operation) by the chance button 136 is started, if the continuous hitting operation is performed, the effect on the result of the operation is executed Ru. Further, when the long press operation with the chance button 136 is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect regarding the result of the operation is executed when the long press automatic continuous hit function is effective.

  (4) If the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, for example, the effect may be advanced as it is, for example, the effect corresponding to the pressing cumulative time of the chance button 136 is performed . Further, when the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, the effect regarding the result of the operation is performed. In this case, for example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the effect may be made to advance accordingly by performing the pseudo continuous hit operation, or the operation is performed assuming that the chance button 136 has been long pressed. May be accepted.

  (5) In the state where the chance button 136 is continuously pressed (continuous pressing state), when the one-shot operation effect is started, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained. Absent.

  (6) In the continuous pressing state, if the continuous hitting operation effect is started, if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the effect on the result of the operation is executed by performing the pseudo continuous hitting operation Ru. In this case, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation is performed from the time when the continuous hitting operation effect is started. Also, in the case where the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds) after the pseudo single-shot operation is performed. May be In addition, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the chance button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

  (7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the chance button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

  (8) In the case where the one-shot operation effect is started and then the one-shot operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the effect related to the result of the operation on these one-shot operation effects is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition concerning the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition started later is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation regarding the one-shot operation rendition having a predetermined high priority is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (9) If the single-shot operation effect is started and then the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the effect on the result of the operation on the single-shot operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect are executed Be done. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition is performed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation rendition is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (10) When the one-shot operation effect is started and then the long-press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the effect on the result of the operation on the one-shot operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the long-press operation effect Is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition is performed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (11) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started and then the one-shot operation effect is started, the effect on the result of the operation on the one-shot operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect are executed Be done. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition is performed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation rendition is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (12) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started and then the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the consecutive hit operation rendition started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the consecutive hit operation rendition started later is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the consecutive hit operation rendition having a high priority predetermined is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (13) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started and then the long pressing operation effect is started, the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the long pressing operation effect Is executed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation rendition is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (14) If the long press operation effect is started and then the one-shot operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the single operation operation effect Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation rendition is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (15) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, only the rendition relating to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation rendition is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (16) If the long press operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the effect related to the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the effect on the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is executed. Alternatively, only the rendering relating to the result of the operation for the high-pressing operation rendering with high predetermined priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any of the effects is not performed.

  (17) After the long press operation effect is started, the long press operation is performed, and when the one-shot operation effect is started in that state, only the effect regarding the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect on the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is not performed. Alternatively, both the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the one-shot operation effect are performed. Moreover, after the long press operation effect is started, the continuous hit operation is performed, and when the one-shot operation effect is started in that state, for the long press operation effect, for example, according to the pressing cumulative time of the chance button 136 For example, the effect may be advanced as appropriate, and the effect regarding the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is performed.

  (18) After the long press operation effect is started, the long press operation is performed. If the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect regarding the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is not performed. Alternatively, both the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect are performed. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long pressing operation effect is started, and the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, for the long press operation effect, for example, according to the pressing cumulative time of the chance button 136 For example, the effect may be advanced accordingly, and the effect regarding the result of the operation on the continuous hitting operation effect is performed.

  (19) After the long press operation effect is started, the long press operation is performed, and when the long press operation effect is started in that state, the result regarding the operation result of the long press operation effect started earlier As far as only the effect is executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect on the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is not executed. Or it is performed also about the production about the result of the operation about which long press operation production. Moreover, after the long press operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation is performed and the long press operation effect is started in that state, for example, the chance button 136 for the long press operation effect started earlier. For example, the effect may be advanced as appropriate according to the cumulative time of pressing the key, and the effect corresponding to the cumulative time of pressing the chance button 136 may be performed also for the long press operation effect started later. There may be cases where the production proceeds as such.

  (20) After the continuous hitting operation effect is started, if the long press operation is performed and the one-shot operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hitting function becomes effective, and the operation about the continuous hit operation effect Unless the long press operation is canceled once, only the effect on the result of is not performed on the effect on the operation result of the one-shot operation effect. Alternatively, both of the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the one-shot operation effect are performed. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the continuous hitting operation effect is started, and the single-shot operation effect is started in that state, the result of the operation regarding the result of the operation of the continuous hitting operation effect and the operation of the single-shot operation effect Both of the renderings are performed.

  (21) After the continuous hitting operation effect has been started, if the long press operation is performed and the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hitting function becomes effective and the continuous hit is started earlier Only the effect on the result of the operation on the operation effect is performed, and the effect on the result on the operation on the operation effect started later is not performed unless the long press operation is canceled once. Or it is performed also about the production about the result of the operation about which continuous hitting operation production. Moreover, after the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the continuous hitting operation is performed, and when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the effect regarding the result of the operation for any of the continuous hitting operation effects is also executed.

  (22) If the long press operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hit function becomes effective, and the continuous hit operation effect is performed. As far as only the effect on the result of the operation is executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect on the result of the operation on the continuous hit operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the long press operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the continuous hitting operation is performed, and when the long pressing operation effect is started in that state, the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hitting operation effect is executed, For, for example, the effect may be advanced as it is, for example, the effect corresponding to the pressing cumulative time of the chance button 136 is executed.

  The above-described supplementing is applicable not only to the chance button 136 but also to various operation means such as the second chance button 137 and the transmitting unit 191.

  FIG. 303 is a diagram showing an example in which it is predicted that the effect using the chance button 136 is started again after it seems as if the effect using the chance button 136 is finished.

  FIG. 303 (A2) is a continuation from FIG. 283 (A12), and the search reach effect is started. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated before the search reach effect is started, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 303 (A2), the display of “SP” changed from the display of the numbers is displayed. In the same figure (A3) following FIG. 303 (A2), a notice display (operation related display) of "during preparation" is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The term "karak button" as used herein refers to the chance button 136 for advancing upward from the initial position described with reference to FIGS. 266 (c) to (d). If the super reach effect announced in the notification area HZ is started, the possibility of performing button effects such as a judge effect and a final judge effect is increased, but the “SP” displayed in the notification area HZ has a reliability of 100 %is not. In this state, if the notice display (operation related display) of "in preparation of the color clear button" is displayed, some players may feel that the possibility of starting the super reach effect has become even higher.

  After the display of the notice display of "preparation button" is started, as shown in FIG. 303 (A4), the situation where the enemy swordsman is discovered is displayed. In FIG. 303 (A5) to FIG. 303 (A14) following FIG. 303 (A4), except for the fact that the notice display of “in preparation of color clear button” is displayed, FIG. 283 (A15) to FIG. A10) The same as the above, and after the character movement production of the strong pattern is performed in the introductory production of the super reach production, it is developed into the sword reach reach production which is the super reach 2, first, the normal button production is started (FIG. 303 (A9)). Even if the normal button effect is started, the advance notice display of "in preparation of the button" does not disappear, and the player recognizes from the start time that the button effect started here is the normal button effect. In FIG. 303 (A10), the operation effective period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to this button operation, in FIG. 303 (A11), the operation is strong as in FIG. 286 (A6). The cut-in image CIs of the pattern is displayed, and the family crest 224E and the logo piece 224F emit light in the sixth mode. Although both the display of "SP" in the notification area HZ and the preliminary display of "Preparing the button in preparation" are overlapped by the cut-in image CIs of the strong pattern, as shown in FIG. 303 (A12), the cut-in image If the CIs disappear, the two overlapped will be easy to see again. Subsequently, before the final judgment effect is started, the character “SP” disappears from the notification area HZ, but the notice display “in preparation of the color clear button” is still displayed. In FIG. 303 (A14) to FIG. (A15), the introduction animation of the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. The notice display of is dimmed and gradually disappears. At the same time as the notice display of "in preparation of the button" disappears, in FIG. 303 (A16), the chance button 136 advances upward from the initial position while emitting light in the fifth mode. Further, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the advanced button image 136a ′ ′ and the like are displayed. In FIG. 303 (A17), the operation effective period is started, and the advanced chance button 136 is operated once. When the advanced chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, and thereafter, the same as in FIG. 286 (A13) and thereafter.

  In the example described above, the operation-related display, which is the advance notice of "during preparation", relates to the final judgment effect, and before the final judgment effect is started, the notification area HZ to "SP" is displayed. The characters have disappeared (Fig. 303 (A13)). In other words, before the chance button 136 starts advancing from the initial position, the letters “SP” disappear from the notification area HZ.

  FIG. 304 is a diagram illustrating an example of adjusting the light amount and the volume.

  In FIG. 304 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no suspension of the special drawing, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost ("decoration 3"-"decoration 4" "-" "Decorative 1") remains stopped. In the state where there is no suspension of the special drawing, the first decorative symbol display device 208L as shown in FIG. 304 (A2) when the suspension does not increase even if a predetermined time has passed after the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. The setting adjustment window SUW is displayed on the display screen of. In this setting adjustment window SUW, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be displayed only on the screen (symbol demo screen) with the combination of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed. The screen may be a screen that can be called up by performing a predetermined operation even during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Furthermore, when a predetermined time elapses after this symbol demo screen is displayed, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is an animation screen (animation demo in which a model title and the like are displayed from the symbol demo screen) Screen). The setting adjustment window SUW may also be displayed on this animation demo screen.

  In the setting adjustment window SUW, by operating the left and right keys of the cross key 181a shown in FIG. 257, the light amounts of the game board lamp 532 and the game stand frame 542 shown in FIG. 260 can be adjusted. It is shown. In addition, it is also shown that the volume of the speaker 120 can be adjusted by operating the up and down keys of the cross key 181a. Further, it is also shown that by operating the chance button 136, a menu screen shown in FIG. 304 (B1) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 304 (B1), on the menu screen, the cursor CS is operated with the up and down keys of the cross key 181a, and the OK button 181b is operated, whereby the selection of the item to which the cursor CS is aligned is determined. Do. In the items, in addition to volume light amount adjustment, effect customization, character selection, holding frame selection, holding display selection, background display selection and the like shown in FIG. 122 are prepared. This menu screen can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the symbol demo screen is displayed or while the animation demo screen is displayed. Also, even during the symbol variation display of the special drawing, it may be possible to call by performing a predetermined operation. Therefore, when the volume and the light amount are adjusted, it is also possible to enter from the menu screen and adjust.

  In FIG. 304 (A3), the left key of the cross key 181a is operated, and the light quantity adjustment window SUW1 is shown in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (A4). The light quantity is lowered by the operation of the left key and increased by the operation of the right key. In FIG. 304 (A5), the amount of light at four levels in FIG. 304 (A4) is reduced to three levels.

  In FIG. 304 (C1), symbol variation is being displayed, and a "question mark" is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 304 (C1), the left key of the cross key 181a is operated, but in the following FIG. 304 (C2), neither the light amount adjustment window SUW1 nor the setting adjustment window SUW is displayed, and the symbol variation display You can not adjust the amount of light during this time. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (C1), even if the left and right keys of the cross key 181a are operated, there is no reaction.

  FIG. 304 (D1) is also in symbol variation display, and the "question mark" is displayed in the notification area HZ. In FIG. 304 (D1), the upper key of the cross key 181a is operated. In the next FIG. 304 (D3), the volume adjustment meter is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. In this example, when the up key or the down key of the cross key 181a is operated once, a meter indicating the current volume is displayed. Then, the up key can be operated once to raise the volume by one step, and the down key can be operated once to decrease the volume by one step. In FIG. 304 (D3), in FIG. 304 (D2), the volume that was two levels is rising to three levels. As described above, the volume can be adjusted even during symbol variation display. It should be noted that a meter may be displayed that indicates the volume after the change that has been changed by one step only by operating the up key or the down key once.

  Although FIG. 304 (E1) is also displaying symbol variation, in FIG. 304 (E1), the numeral “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and in the following FIG. (E2), the cross key 181a Our upper key is being operated. In this example, the display of the notification area HZ can be changed even by operating any key of the cross key 181a other than the chance button 136. Here, since the upper key of the cross key 181a is operated, the volume adjustment is performed and the display of the notification area HZ is also changed from "1" to "question mark". The display of the notification area HZ may not be changed by the left and right keys of the cross key 181a.

  In FIG. 304 (F2), in the state where the numeral "1" is displayed in the notification area HZ, the operation effective period in the normal button effect is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. In response to this button operation, a weak pattern cut-in image CIw whose background is the fourth mode is displayed in FIG. 304 (F3), and each of the family crest 224E and the logo feature 224F is in the fourth mode. It emits light. Further, in response to the button operation, in the notification area HZ, the display of the numeral "1" changes to the display of "Chance", and the notification area development effect is performed. As described above, there may be a case where both the notification area development effect and the effect corresponding to the button effect are performed in response to one chance button operation.

  Even in FIG. 304 (G2), in the state where the numeral "1" is displayed in the notification area HZ during symbol variation display, the operation effective period in the normal button effect is started, and here, the cross key 181a Our left key is being operated. As described above, the light amount adjustment using the left and right keys can not be performed during the symbol variation display. Further, although the display of the notification area HZ can not be changed by operating any one of the cross keys 181a, it is effective for the button effect. Therefore, in FIG. 304 (G3), although the numeral "1" is still displayed in the notification area HZ, the cut-in image CIw of the weak pattern is displayed, and the family crest product 224E and the logo feature 224F are displayed. Each emits light in the fourth mode. When the chance button 136 is operated here, as shown in FIG. 304 (F3), the notification area development effect may be started, but if any one of the cross key 181a is operated You can enjoy only the effects of button effects. That is, when any key of the cross key 181a is operated in a state where the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a is displayed, the display of the weak cut-in CIw is started according to the operation. In the state where the display of the number in the notification area HZ is displayed, even if any key of the cross key 181a is operated, it may be performed according to the operation. In the notification area HZ, the display of the number is configured so as not to be a small number, and in the state where the display of the number in the notification area HZ is displayed, any one of the cross keys 181a Even when an operation is performed, there is no case where the display of the number in the notification area HZ is switched to any advance display in response to the operation. Note that, instead of the cross key 181a, the second chance button 137, the operation lever, or the transmitting portion 191 may be used. That is, the same operation means (cross key 181a) as the operation means used for volume adjustment or light amount adjustment may be used, but another operation means (second chance button 137, operation lever, transmission portion 191) may be used. Good.

  Even in FIG. 304 (H2), in a state where the numeral "1" is displayed in the notification area HZ during symbol variation display, the operation effective period in the normal button effect is started, and here too, the cross key 181a Our left key is being operated. In the next FIG. 304 (H3), although the effect of the button effect can be started in response to the left key operation, here, the effect which does not appear or hardly appears is executed by the chance button operation. In FIG. 304 (H3), the cut-in display CIr displayed as an iron plate is displayed, and this cut-in display CIr is a cut-in display for which the jackpot expectation is high or for which the jackpot confirmation is announced. As described above, there are cases where it is better to operate the cross key 181a than to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 305 is a diagram showing an example in which notification contents other than the notification contents shown in FIG. 271 (a) are displayed in the notification area HZ.

  In the example shown from FIG. 305 (A1) to FIG. (A9), the numeral “5” is displayed in the notification area HZ according to the start of the symbol variation display of the special drawing, and the result of repeated chance button operation ( In FIG. 305 (A3) to FIG. 305 (A5), and in FIG. 305 (A6), the display of the number is switched to the display of "up". The notification content shown in FIG. 271 (a) is the notice display in the symbol variation display of the special drawing in which the notice content is displayed, that is, the display regarding the normal notice, but the display of this “up” relates to the advance notice It is a display. Specifically, it becomes a display for informing that the display mode of the hold icon may change. In FIG. 305 (A8), the display mode of the second hold icon changes from the first mode to the fifth mode, and the display of “up” disappears from the notification area HZ. According to this example, when the display of "up" is started, there is a possibility that a big hit may occur in the stored reserve, so the launch for storing the third and the fourth reserve is stopped and the suspension icon is displayed. It has the effect of being able to watch for changes and eliminating wasted balls.

  In addition, although the display of "up" was a display which foretells that the display mode of a pending icon may change here, it is a display which announces that the display mode of a change icon may change. It may be. In this case, the display of "up" is also a display related to the normal notice. Furthermore, it may be a display for informing that the display mode of either the hold icon or the change icon may change. That is, the display of "up" may be a display for informing that the display mode of the icon related to the symbol variation display may change. Furthermore, a display different from the display of “up” may be provided, and the other display may be a display for informing that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may change.

  Next, another example will be described. Figures 305 (B1) to (B9) are the same as Figures 274 (A1) to (9), and Figures (B10) to (B12) are Figure 275 (C2). The explanation is omitted because it is the same as (C5) to (C5) in the figure, but the chance button operation is performed during the search reach, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 305 (B13) It has been switched. During the search reach, both the UI unit UI3 and the hold icon and the change icon are hidden. In FIG. 305 (B14), the enemy can not be found, the development to the super reach effect ends in failure, and the display of “up” in the notification area HZ disappears. However, the display mode of the hold icon can not be confirmed because the hold icon still disappears. Note that the hold change sound may be output to notify that the display mode of any of the hold icons that have been turned off has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 16B (B15), "decoration 6"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 6", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the loser, is displayed swaying during the search reach The UI unit UI3, the hold icon, and the change icon, which have disappeared, are displayed again. Among the hold icons redisplayed here, the second hold icon is changed to the fifth mode. FIGS. 305 (B16) to (B17) are the same as FIGS. 273 (A7) to (A8).

  In the configuration in which the hold change pre-notification notice is given at the start-up winning, the hold change sound may be output even in the display state where the hold icon is not displayed. In addition, in a configuration capable of executing prefetching notice (for example, prefetching notice for prefetching a certain suspension among suspensions existing at the start of fluctuation) at a certain timing during symbol fluctuation display of a special drawing The advance notice may not be performed in a display state in which the hold icon is not displayed.

  FIG. 306 is a diagram showing an example in which the operation period of the chance button 136 is limited even in the state where numbers are displayed in the notification area HZ. In this example, when the background of the notification area HZ is displayed in gray, the operation is not accepted even if the chance button 136 is operated (operation invalid). That is, in the example so far, in the state where a number is displayed in the notification area HZ, the chance button operation has always been accepted (operation valid). Furthermore, as described with reference to FIG. 299 (A7), the chance button operation has been accepted even if the notification area HZ in which the number is displayed is hidden. However, in this example, the chance button operation is accepted only for a certain period.

  Although the notification area HZ is displayed from FIG. 306 (A1) to FIG. 306 (A12), the chance button operation is not accepted (operation invalid), and except for this point, FIG. The description is omitted because it is the same as (A12). In this example, the chance button operation is accepted only during the introduction period of the zoom reach effect (operation effective). FIG. 306 (A13) shows the introductory portion of the covering reach which is the super reach 1. In this example, in this introductory part, a tutorial display TTX of logo feature emission is displayed. That is, in the lower left of the display screen of FIG. 306 (A13) to FIG. Conversely, in this example, the chance button operation is accepted only during the period in which the tutorial display TTX is displayed (operation valid). In FIG. 306 (A13), the chance button 136 is operated only once, and in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 306 (A14), the number which has been “10” is decreased to “9”. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated only once, and the logo character 224F does not emit light. In FIG. 306 (A16), the tutorial display TTX disappears, and the chance button operation can not be accepted (operation invalid state). The processing after FIG. 306 (A17) is the same as (A16) and after, except for the display mode of the notification area HZ. That is, in this example, although the chance button operation can not be accepted (operation invalid), the notification area HZ continues to be displayed with the gray background until the combination of the decorative symbols is displayed. In FIG. 306 (A24) in which the finalized display is performed, the numeral “9” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In this example, the number "9" may be carried over to the next symbol variation display, or the number "10" or the number "5" may be newly displayed.

  The example described above corresponds to the example of the lower concept of the representative diagram described using FIG. Therefore, it is possible to combine them as long as there is no contradiction with the examples of the other subordinate concepts in the representative diagram described using FIG.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 with the maximum number of reservations of 8 in total including the numbers of special drawings 1 and 2 in the special drawing 1 starts the number of times displayed in the notification area HZ from 0 at power on and symbol fluctuation display It is also possible to continuously display over a range, to increase the number by one when the number of reservations is stored (for example, five) and thereafter to increase by one every time the number of reservations is accumulated.

  FIG. 307 is a diagram showing another aspect of the display method of the notification area HZ.

  In this example, the notification area is at the lower left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and "in preparation" is displayed in the notification area HZ '. In FIG. 307 (a), the search reach is underway, and the development / render effect to the super reach is executed until the same view (A6). In FIG. 307 (A3), "in preparation" is displayed in the notification area HZ 'at the lower left of the screen, and is continuously displayed thereafter. In FIG. 307 (A7), a state in which the swordsman who is the enemy of the lord is discovered is displayed, and from FIG. 307 (A8) to FIG. The object operation effect is performed, and the display of the notification area HZ 'at the lower left of the screen disappears.

  In FIG. 307 (A10), the sword strike which is the super reach 2 is started, and the display of the notification area HZ 'is redisplayed at the lower left of the screen. In Ken-Age reach, button effects are started as shown in FIG. 307 (A11), and in FIG. 307 (A13), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in response to this button operation, in FIG. 307 (A14) The cut-in image CIs of the pattern is displayed, and the family crest 224E and the logo piece 224F emit light in the sixth mode. The display of the notification area HZ 'at the lower left of the screen is overlapped by the strong pattern cut-in image CIs, but as shown in FIG. 307 (A15), if the cut-in image CIs disappears, visual recognition becomes easy again. In FIG. 307 (A17) to FIG. (A18), the introduction animation of the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation is displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 307 (A18), the notification area HZ at the lower left of the screen. The display of 'becomes thin and disappears gradually. Simultaneously with the display of the notification area HZ 'disappearing, in FIG. 373 (A19), the chance button 136 emits light in the fifth mode and advances upward from the initial position. Further, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the advanced button image 136a ′ ′ and the like are displayed. In FIG. 303 (A17), the operation effective period is started, and the advanced chance button 136 is operated once. When the advanced chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, and thereafter, the same as in FIG. 286 (A13) and thereafter. That is, after this, a big hit finalization effect is executed, and this big hit finalization effect corresponds to the notification area development performance. In addition, the display of "under preparation button preparation" displayed in the notification area HZ 'at the lower left of the screen is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136, which is the button for the extraction button, is invalid. When activated, the notification area HZ 'may disappear (FIG. 307 (A18)), but the display of the numeral "1" may be displayed.

  FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an example of various cut-in notices.

  In FIG. 308 (A2), although the symbol variation display of the special view is in a non-reach state, the button effect is started, and the button image 136a and the like are displayed. Further, in the notification area HZ, the numeral "10" is displayed. In FIG. 308 (A2), the operation effective period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (A3), the number in the notification area HZ is reduced to "9", and the notification area HZ is displayed in a wavering manner. In addition, as a presentation corresponding to the button operation in the button presentation, a conversation image CI2 of a whistle as a conversation announcement is displayed. In this conversational announcement, the line "The sign of the lord is ..." is displayed on the base of the third mode (blue), and it is foretold that it may be a big hit with the symbol variation display currently being performed Is a weak notice. The conversation image CI2 is also a cut-in notice, and in this example, the cut-in notice is performed before something is displayed in the notification area development effect.

  The difference between FIG. 308 (B2) and the previous FIG. (A2) is that “SP”, which is a preliminary display, is displayed in the notification area HZ, not a numeral. That is, “SP” is displayed as the notification area development effect, and in that state, the same conversation announcement (cut-in announcement) as in FIG. 308 (B3) is performed. In this example, the “cut-in notice” is performed after “SP” is displayed in the notification area development effect.

  In FIG. 308 (C1), the symbol variation display of the special figure is being performed, and it is in the non-reach state. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308 (C1), a conversation image CI2 of a drop which is a cut-in notice is displayed. Here, the word "Chansu" is displayed on the base of the third mode (blue), and it is predicted that it may be a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display, but it is a weak notice. Note that the cut-in notice "Chansu" here is the cut-in notice in which the words "The sign of the sign of ... is" shown in FIG. 308 (A3) is displayed on the background of the same third aspect (blue). And the big hit expectation is the same level. In this conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C2), the line "I can expect" is displayed on the background of the fourth mode (green color), and the expectation of the jackpot is one step higher than the previous cut-in notice. It is rising. In this conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C3), the line "Hot me here" is displayed on the background of the fifth mode (red color), and the expectation of the jackpot has risen by one stage.

  Further, in this conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C4), the word "continue" is displayed on the background of the first mode (white color), suggesting the start of the pseudo connected effect, or the pseudo connected effect It may be for giving notice of confirmation.

  Also, in this conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C5), the line "I saw the swordsman" is displayed on the base of the first mode (white), and the start of the swordsman reach that is super reach 2 is It may be suggested, or it may be foreshadowing the finalization of the swordsman reach production.

  In the above, various conversation images CI2 (cut-in notice images) have been described using FIG. 308 (C1) to FIG. (C5), but each of the conversation images CI2 (cut-in notice images) is shown in FIG. The timing of B3), that is, may be displayed after the advance notice display is displayed in the notification area HZ (after “SP” is displayed in the notification area development effect). By doing this, the player operates the chance button 136 while the numbers are displayed in the notification area HZ (FIG. 308 (B2)), and the display of the pseudo continuous effect and the super reach effect is started. The display of the cut-in image such as "Continuous" and the cut-in image such as "I saw the swordsman" can be started before "R".

  In FIG. 308 (D2), the numeral “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 308 (D2), the operation effective period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (D3), the notification area HZ is switched to the display of “Diamond behavior”, and the logo combination 224F starts light emission in the seventh mode, and an notification area development effect is performed. The notification area development effect here is a big hit finalization effect. In addition, in response to the chance button operation, there is a cut-in notice that "the sign of the lord is ...", but it is a weak notice that the degree of expectation of the big hit is low. In this example, the big hit decision advance notice (strong notification area development effect) and the weak cut-in notice are overlapped.

  In addition, in response to the operation of the chance button, a cut-in notice of "I saw the swordsman" may be performed. The cut-in notice "I saw the swordsman" is the notice that identifies the Super Reach that will be executed after this, and also gives notice of the type (Super Reach 2). By displaying the cut-in notice "I saw the swordsman" instead of the cut-in notice that "the sign of the hall is ...", the operation promotion including the display of the number in the notification area HZ and the button image 136a When the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state in which both displays of the display of the notification image are displayed, the light emission according to the seventh aspect of the logo feature 224F, and "I saw the sword Both of the display of the cut-in notice "" will be started.

  Further, in response to the chance button operation, a cut-in advance notice of “continue” shown in FIG. 308 (C4) may be made, and “continue” may be displayed in the notification area HZ. That is, when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state in which both the display of the number in the notification area HZ and the display of the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a are displayed, the notification area is displayed. Both the indication of "continuation" in the HZ and the indication of the cut-in notice "continuation" may be started. In this example, the advance notice display in the notification area HZ and the cut-in advance notice are for giving notice of the same (the same effect). In addition, instead of the cut-in notice "continuation", the cut-in notice "SP" may be performed, or the cut-in notice "Chance" may be performed.

  In FIG. 308 (E2), the numeral “1” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the button effect is started. The button effect here is an effect of a strong pattern in which the chance button 136 is vibrating. In FIG. 308 (E2), the operation effective period is started, and the vibrating chance button 136 is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (E3), the notification area HZ is switched to the display of "Chance", and notification area development effects with a low hit probability are performed. In addition, in response to the chance button operation, there is a cut-in notice with a high expectation of the jackpot "Hot me". In this example, the weak notification area development effect and the strong cut-in notice are overlapped.

  In FIG. 308 (F2), the numeral "10" is displayed in the notification area HZ, which is a reach state. Also, button effects have been started. In FIG. 308 (F2), the operation effective period is started, and the chance button 136 is operated once. Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (F3), the notification area HZ disappears, and the decoration symbol of "continuation", which is a pseudo run symbol, is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b as an effect corresponding to the button operation in the button effect. doing.

  In FIG. 308 (G1), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the decoration symbols other than the pseudo continuous symbol are temporarily stopped. The temporarily stopped decorative design here is a design that suggests the development to super reach. As described above, in FIG. 308 (F3), there is a case where the decorative symbol other than the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In FIG. 308 (H1), the mini game (mini effect) is performed in the tutorial display section TT1. In this mini game, an indication of an effect to be executed may be given. In this example, since Tonosama's arrow hits "Continuing", the suggestion of the pseudo-series effect is made. In addition, although a mini game is demonstrated in detail after FIG. 326, the mini game demonstrated after FIG. 326 can be combined with the example shown to FIG. 270-FIG. In addition, the number of effects (for example, the pseudo continuous effect and the super reach effect) to give notice in the notification area development effect (here, 2) and the number of effects to give notice in the mini game may be the same number, The number of the effects to be announced in the area development effect may be more, or the number of the effects to be notified in the mini game may be more. Furthermore, with regard to the pseudo-series effect, it is also possible to give notice in the notification area development effect or in the mini game. Also, with regard to the super reach effect, the notice may be made in advance in the notification area development effect, or in the mini game.

  FIG. 309 is a view showing another example of various effects.

  In FIG. 309 (A1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In FIG. 309 (A1), the numeral "10" is displayed in the notification area HZ, and the chance button 136 is operated once. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the image RDY being prepared. In this example, by displaying the image under preparation RDY, a certain effect (for example, timer advance notice, mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (A2), it is shown that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is considered to be a swing fluctuation, and the middle symbol is displayed at a high speed. Further, in response to the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 309 (A1), in the notification area HZ, the number “10” is switched to the letter “SP”.

  Thereafter, FIG. 309 (A3) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the image RDY being prepared. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach.

  Also, in FIG. 309 (A3), the timer announcement effect is started. This timer advance notice effect is also an example of the advance notice display which is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. A certain advance indication said here is super reach production. In addition, it may be a pseudo series effect. In FIG. 309 (A3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00". It should be noted that the big hit symbol may eventually be displayed more clearly when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. If the game is started, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed. In this example, when the player operates the chance button 136 in FIG. 309 (A1), the notification area is displayed as shown in FIG. 3009 (A2) before the display of the timer advance notice display is started. The display of "SP" in HZ has been started.

  Note that the timer advance presentation effect may be started at the timing between FIG. 309 (A2) and FIG. 309 (A3).

  Subsequently, another example will be described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (B1), it is shown that the sword strike is started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, in FIG. 309 (B1), “broad surface behavior” is displayed in the notification area HZ.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (B1), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY was displayed. Although this mini game is an example of the notice display started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, the mini game may be started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The dynamic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and at least one of the four areas is the hit area, and the arrow hits the hit area and the reliability of the big hit High notices are to be made. Here, it is shown that the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the lord was stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (B2), the letter “iron plate” is displayed on a square background, and an iron plate image TP inclined approximately 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction is displayed. This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this presentation example, the advance notice display corresponding to the “large board behavior” in the notification area HZ is performed,
An advance notice is also displayed according to the result of the mini game. That is, it can be said that another preliminary display is performed according to the result of the preliminary display. In addition, the alerting | reporting area | region HZ in which "large board behavior" is displayed overlaps with the iron plate image TP.

  In addition, another example will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 309 (A1) to FIG. (A3), in the search reach, the mini character NJ of the ninja who appeared in the change animation of the change icon appears again. Here, the change animation of the advance notice display in the notification area HZ is executed using the ninja mini character NJ. A “question mark” is displayed in the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 309 (A1), but the mini character NJ of the ninja throws a shuriken toward the notification area HZ, and in FIG. The "question mark" display was hit, and the "question mark" display was covered with the effect image EFB and disappeared for a moment. In the same figure ((3)), the effect image EFB disappears, and the display of the notification area HZ changes to "SP".

  Furthermore, another example will be described. The example shown in FIG. 309 (C1) to the same figure (C3) is also an example in which the mini character NJ of the ninja appears in the search reach. However, in this example, the timer announcement is performed, and the change animation of the timer indication of the timer announcement is executed using the ninja mini character NJ. At the lower right of the screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309 (C1), “10:00” is displayed as a timer display. The ninja mini character NJ throws a shuriken toward its timer display, and in the figure (C2) hits the display of "10:00" and the display of "10:00" is wrapped in the effect image EFB In the same figure (C3), the effect image EFB disappears and it changes to "60:00".

  In addition, although time changed here, not the time but the aspect showing the expectation of big hit may change. For example, it may change from a green timer to a gold timer. In addition, although the change animation of the change icon, the change animation of the hold icon, the change animation of the notice display of the notification area HZ, and the change animation of the timer display of the timer notice have been described, these animations are partially common It may be For example, the introductory part may be a common animation. Furthermore, all of the change icon, the hold icon, the notice display of the notification area HZ, and the timer display of the timer notice may be changed, or only some of them may be changed. May be configured.

  In addition, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (D1), it is set to the princess zone which is one of the pre-reading mode (zone). In this princess zone, there is no restriction in displaying numbers in the notification area HZ. In the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 309 (D1), the numeral "10" is displayed, and the background is a default mode of white, which is a state where the operation of the chance button 136 can be received. On the other hand, in FIG. 309 (D2), the green zone has entered and the background of the notification area HZ is displayed in gray. In a look-ahead mode (zone), when entering the look-ahead mode (zone), the expectation for a big hit is higher than the princess zone or the normal mode, and the degree of expectation for development to super reach is high, or super reach Development is fixed. In such a pre-reading mode (zone), the button operation for changing the number in the notification area HZ is restricted, and the operation becomes invalid. In this example, the button operation is restricted in the buttocks zone, and the operation becomes invalid. The gray background of the notification area HZ indicates that the operation is not accepted (operation invalid) even if the chance button 136 is operated. In addition, the button operation to change the number in the notification area HZ is restricted and the operation becomes invalid, contrary to this example, the expectation of the jackpot is lower than that of the buttocks zone, and the development to the super reach also It may be a princess zone with a low degree of expectation or a normal mode.

  In addition, the certain effect mode may be an effect mode (for example, an effect mode selected by effect customization) selected by the player on the menu screen shown in FIG. 304 (B1) or the like, or a normal gaming state (non-deterministic state, It is an effect mode that is automatically set in the non-power support state), an effect mode that is automatically set in the positive change state, an effect mode that is automatically set in the power support state, etc. It is an effect mode related to the setting operation of the player in the gaming state (non-probable changing state, non-power support state), a effect mode related to the setting operation of the player in the positive changing state, a player in the power support state It may be an effect mode related to the setting operation of. In addition, the effect mode may be started based on the result of the effect lottery.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (E1), it is a hill zone, the button operation is restricted, and the background of the notification area HZ in which the numeral "10" is displayed is gray. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol is being reported, and it is informed that it is an additional chance. In the additional chance, the number in the notification area HZ may increase. For example, reach determination may be made if the number in the notification area HZ is the first number (for example, 30) or more, and super reach determination if the number is the second number (for example, 80) or more larger than the first number. If it is a specific number such as "77", it may be a big hit decision.

  In addition, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (F1), the button image 136a (button mark) is displayed in the notification area HZ. When the button image 136a is displayed, the chance button 136 may advance upward from the initial position at the time of the effect accompanied by the button operation.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (G1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ. In the same figure (G2) that follows, a second notification area HZ2 appears, and the numeral "30" is displayed in the second notification area HZ2. As described above, when a plurality of notification areas are displayed, the expectation of the big hit is higher. In FIG. 309 (G3), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in response to the one operation, the number in the right notification area HZ is reduced to “9” in FIG. The number in the second notification area HZ2 is reduced to “29”.

  Note that the added notification area (here, the second notification area HZ2) may be more easily changed to, for example, "SP". Alternatively, in the added notification area, the advance notice display of the same content may be displayed delayed from the notification area HZ displayed earlier, or the advance notice display of different contents may be displayed.

  In addition, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (H1), three variation icons h0 and three suspension icons h11 to h13 are displayed. The variation icon h0, the first suspension icon h11, and the second suspension icon 12 are all in the first mode, but the third suspension icon h3 is not any mode of the first to seventh modes, and a character This is an aspect of (here, the character of a leader). Although the aspect of this certain character is also one of the aspects of the pre-reading notice, it is not the aspect of the pre-reading notice of the jackpot decision. That is, the expectation of the jackpot is an expectation of higher than 0% and less than 100%. The third hold icon h3 may be, for example, the fourth mode, and the character is not limited to the character of the first character. In addition, the display of the numbers in the notification area HZ may be changed to a notice display in the currently displayed symbol variation display, or in the operation of the chance button 136 in the symbol variation display currently performed. Although the corresponding number decrease is started, the change to the advance notice may be performed during the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the third hold represented by the third hold icon h3.

  Furthermore, another example will be described. In FIG. 309 (I1), the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the numeral “10” is displayed in the notification area HZ, and three variation icons h0 and three suspension icons h11 to h13 are displayed. There is. Similar to the example shown in FIG. 309 (H1), the variation icon h0, the first suspension icon h11, and the second suspension icon 12 are all in the first mode, but the third suspension icon h3 is in the first mode to the seventh mode. It is not an aspect of any aspect, but an aspect of a certain character (here, a character of a banner length). In addition, the aspect of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 309 (I1) is an aspect in which the character of the leader is holding the “under preparation” placard. This "in preparation" represents that a certain effect is being prepared, and may be "in preparation" that the advance notice display in the notification area HZ is started, but here, the timer notice is It is "in preparation" of being started. Therefore, the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 309 (I1) also has a function indicating that preparation for timer notice is underway, and a function as a prefetch notice. In addition, the display of the third hold icon h13 may be displayed in the form of the character of the group leader holding the "in preparation" placard from the display start (at the start of the hold increase animation), or the first mode at the start of the display. -Any aspect of the seventh aspect, or the aspect of the character of the master who has no "preparing" placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1) may be used, and after that, the "preparing" placa You may make it change into the aspect of the character of the leader who held the card. Alternatively, there may be a case where it does not change to the aspect of the character of the leader who holds the "in preparation" placard.

  Compared to the example shown in FIG. 309 (H1), although an example including the image of the same character and including the image showing that the timer preview is being prepared is shown only in the same figure (I1), it is not necessary to be a character. It is only necessary that one of the images includes the same image, but an image indicating that the timer advance notice is being prepared. In addition, the mode of the variation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 may be the mode of the character with the banner-length that does not have the "in preparation" placard.

  Thereafter, the suspension is digested, and in FIG. 309 (I3), the icon which has been the third suspension icon h13 in FIG. (I1) is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0. The mode of this variation icon h0 is also the mode of the character of the Bancho character with the "in preparation" placard. Nothing is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 309 (I3).

  In FIG. 309 (I4), the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed to the mode of the character of the banner leader who does not have the "in preparation" placard. On the other hand, in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 309 (I4), the image under preparation RDY is displayed. In addition, an animation may be displayed in which the "in preparation" placard held by the character of the game leader of the fluctuation icon h0 moves to the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, even when an animation in which the “in preparation” placard moves to the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed when the icon that was the third hold icon h13 in FIG. 309 (I1) is displayed as the change icon h0. Good.

  After the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, a timer advance notice effect is started. In FIG. 309 (I5), the display of the image under preparation RDY in the tutorial display unit TT1 is ended, and the timer display is displayed in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. Here, a timer display of 10:00 representing 10 seconds is displayed, and then this 10 second countdown starts. Although the notification area HZ shown in FIG. 309 (I5) is still the display of numerals, it changes to a notice display such as "SP" or "CONTINUE" during the execution of the symbol variation display currently performed. On the other hand, in response to the timer display in the timer advance presentation effect becoming 00:00 indicating 0 seconds, there may be a case where the super reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is started. However, there may be cases where neither super reach production nor pseudo sequential production nor any production is started. Here, before the timer display reaches 0 seconds, the display of the advance notice display in the notification area HZ may be started, or at the same time as the timer display becomes 0 seconds, the display of the advance notice display in the notification area HZ is started Alternatively, the display of the advance notice in the notification area HZ may be started after the timer display reaches 0 seconds. In addition, the effect started in response to the timer display reaching 0 seconds and the effect notified in advance by the advance notice display in the notification area HZ may or may not match. For example, after “SP” is displayed in the notification area HZ, in response to the timer display becoming 0 seconds, the super reach effect may be started or the pseudo continuous effect may be started. In addition, even if the notification area HZ is the display of numbers (for example, there is no operation of the chance button and the state of "10" or the state of operation of the chance button or "3"), the timer display is 0 seconds. Depending on what has become, there may be a case in which a super reach effect or a pseudo-sequence effect is started.

  In addition, when the timer advance notice effect is started, an image (image of “in preparation”) indicating that timer advance preparation is in progress is moved from the fluctuation icon h0 to the tutorial display unit TT1 and simultaneously with movement completion or immediately after movement completion. The timer announcement effect may be configured to be started.

  In addition, a plurality of types of images may be prepared to indicate that timer announcement is being prepared, and the timer announcement mode or timer announcement time, or both the timer announcement mode and time may be different depending on the type. Also, alternatively or in addition, the timer notice mode or the timer notice time, or both the timer notice mode and time may differ depending on the type of the character image displayed with the image indicating that the timer notice is being prepared. May be configured. Further, different types of characters may be given to the type of the character and the type of the image indicating that the timer advance notice is being prepared. For example, the character type is given a role that indicates the degree of expectation of the big hit (for example, the high degree of expectation of the big hit is higher for the character of the character than the game leader) It may have a role that represents the degree of anticipation at which the preview effect is actually started. The types of images indicating that timer preview preparation is in progress include the images of the first to seventh aspects, and in the image of the first aspect, there is the lowest possibility that the timer preview effect is actually started, the seventh aspect In the image of, the timer advance notice effect may always be started.

  In addition, the image showing that timer preview is being prepared is started 100% at any timing during the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold represented by the hold icon of the form of the character of the leader in the timer notice effect. It may be an indication, or an indication that there is a possibility that a timer advance notice effect may be started. Alternatively, even if the timer advance notice effect is not started, at the minimum, since the variation icon is displayed in the form of the character of the leader, the symbol variation display currently being performed is symbol variation that can be expected to have a big hit. It is understood that it is a display.

  Also, in the above description, there may be cases where a super reach effect or a pseudo continuous effect is started in response to the timer display in the timer advance effect becoming 0 seconds, but when the timer advance effect is started, The display does not appear (the whole is non-display), or there is a display of a frame that defines the notification area HZ, but the display in the middle is non-display, and the notification is notified in response to the timer display becoming 0 seconds. The configuration may be such that the display of the display of the numbers in the area HZ is started.

The examples shown in FIG. 309 (H1) and FIG. 309 (I1) to FIG. 309 (I5) are summarized as follows. In the following, supplementary items are included.
[A production means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L etc.], and
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.];
A game console equipped with
The timer effect is displayed when a timer display [for example, the timer display of 10:00 shown in FIG. 309] is started after the timer display is a display showing a certain time (hereinafter referred to as “ Effect called [for example, a super reach effect or a pseudo-series effect] is started.
One of the plurality of types of holding icons may be a second holding icon [for example, the third holding icon in the aspect of the first character with a "in preparation" placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1). h13],
One of the plurality of types of holding icons may be a third holding icon [for example, the third holding icon h13 in the aspect of the first character with the “in preparation” placard shown in FIG. 309 (I1). ],
The second hold icon is a pre-read notice hold icon,
The third hold icon is a pre-read notice hold icon,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The second hold icon does not include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display [eg, display of a 'ready' placard '] And
The third hold icon is a hold icon including a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by "
The second hold icon may be a hold icon on which the certain character is displayed, and the third hold icon may also be a hold icon on which the certain character is displayed.

  Also, the second holding icon and the third holding icon may be displayed simultaneously or may be displayed separately.

Furthermore, the hold icon of the first mode (default mode) shown in FIGS. 272 to 309 may be replaced with the hold icon of the preview advance notice mode (eg, the second mode to the seventh mode). Also, there are cases where the fluctuating icon of the mode (for example, the second aspect to the seventh aspect) of the regular notice shown in FIGS. 272 to 309 can be replaced with the fluctuating icon of the first aspect (default aspect).
“One of the plural types of hold icons is the first hold icon [eg, a default display mode hold icon shown in FIG. 309 (I1), each hold icon h11, h12 shown in FIG. 272, etc.] And
The first hold icon is a default hold icon,
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are different hold icons,
The first hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
A game stand characterized by "
Also,
"The third hold icon indicates that at least one of the timer effects is started until a certain symbol variation display is ended [eg," in preparation "placard display Is the hold icon,
A game stand characterized by "
Also,
“The second hold icon [for example, the third hold icon h13 in the form of a character with a number-long character who does not have the“ in preparation ”placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1)] is displayed The third effect is shown in the case where the third holding icon [for example, the third holding icon h13 of the form of the character with the "in preparation" character of the character of the bancho shown in FIG. 309 (I1)] is displayed. Is easy to get started,
A game stand characterized by "
Also,
“The second hold icon [for example, the third hold icon h13 in the form of a character with a number-long character who does not have the“ in preparation ”placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1)] is displayed The timer effect is more effective in the case where the third holding icon [for example, the third holding icon h13 in the form of the character with the "length of the character with a" ready "" card shown in FIG. 309 (I1)] is displayed. Easy to run,
A game stand characterized by "
The third hold icon may be a hold icon indicating the content of the certain effect. For example, in the case of a hold icon of the character of the sword character with the "in preparation" placard, it becomes a hold icon indicating the sword reach.

  Moreover, the notification regarding the said certain presentation performed by the said timer presentation may be comprised so that execution is possible. For example, when the pseudo-series effect is performed as the certain effect, a display of “pseudo-series effect completion” may be made after the pseudo series effect is completed.

  Also, the third hold icon may be a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can indicate a time displayed when the display of the timer display is started. For example, if the hold icon is in the form of a character of a leader who has a "preparation in 10 seconds" placard, it becomes a hold icon indicating that a timer display representing 10 seconds will be displayed.

  In addition, a plurality of the timer effects (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of timer effects") may be started simultaneously during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and one of the plurality of timer effects may be One timer effect, one of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect, and the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter referred to as "first timer display") The time displayed when the display of is started and the time displayed when the display of the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter referred to as "second timer display") is started The first effect may be performed as the certain effect when the first timer display reaches the certain time, and the second timer display may occur at the certain time. If there is a second effect as the above Effect is sometimes performed, wherein the first directing second effect is different effect, amusement machine, characterized in that. It may be

  The example described above with reference to FIGS. 272 to 309 is an example of effects performed by one pachinko machine 100. Moreover, the example demonstrated using FIGS. 272-309 is an example of presentation which can be performed also with the pachinko machine 100 demonstrated before FIG. Furthermore, the example described using FIG. 272 to FIG. 309 is an example of effects that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 described using FIG. 310 and the subsequent figures, and is also performed by the pachinko machine 100 described using FIG. This is an example of possible effects. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described in this specification at least includes the rendering button (rendering operation means) such as the chance button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol The notification area HZ is displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device such as the display device 208N, and the display means such as the effect moving means or the light emitting means such as the speaker 120 or various lamps Another notification means may be included to execute notification area development effect.

  FIG. 310 is a view showing in stages an example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 310 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a fluctuation icon is provided at the center The h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all default display modes (white circular display modes). In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanatory display unit is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at appropriate timings. Be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 310 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the grandchild's character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as the tutorial display, a description on the appearing character, a description on a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, you may be comprised so that alerting | reporting of a big hit expectation degree is possible by the display mode (For example, displaying in blue character, displaying in red, etc.) of tutorial display. In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the display being described will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this presentation example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 is displayed in priority during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in a region not overlapping the display region of the decorative symbol, but may overlap the display region of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that constitutes the hold icon display area, the variation icon display area, and the tutorial display section TT1. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310A is in the default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit is disposed at the lower part of the display screen to display the stage name and reach name currently being used. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 310 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, an acceptance number display 850 indicating the number of acceptances of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 310 (a), the acceptance count display 850 of the "0 times after" character string image is displayed, and the acceptance count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, below the acceptance number display 850, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 310 (a), all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. The character of this lord is sometimes called a navigation character. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. In addition, the character of the lord may be always displayed or may not be always displayed. Also, the stage name display unit ST1 or the character may be a display included in the Ui unit UI3, or may be configured such that at least a part thereof is displayed overlapping the front side of the UI unit UI3.

  In addition, a family crest 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and may move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the household crest item 224E incorporates a light emitting means such as a full color LED inside, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, and the general character 224Fb are disposed, and move vertically in accordance with the contents of the effect. It is configured to be able to In addition, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full color LED incorporated therein, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 310 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. That is, the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (display of “under preparation”) is performed in place of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (c), it is shown that the tutorial display section TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be an in-provision image preview display to be displayed before the display of the in-preparation image RDY described later is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed also when the preliminary display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, and the big hit expectation may be configured to be different depending on the display mode of the shutter image. It may be configured such that it does not show the jackpot expectation by itself.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (d), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the in-provision image RDY in which the characters “in preparation” are displayed. In other words, the in-provision image RDY is displayed superimposed on the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (d), the background color of the image in preparation RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 310 (d) is the default display mode. . Note that the in-preparation image RDY can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the in-provision image RDY starts. After the display is started in the default display mode, the display mode may be changed to another display mode. Further, in the case of the configuration in which the above-described shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, the display mode of the image under preparation RDY may be associated with the display mode. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red in-provision image RDY may be displayed (probable). In this example of presentation, by displaying the image RDY being prepared, there is a case where a certain presentation (for example, a timer advance notice, a mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 changes from the blue display mode to the gold display mode. In this rendering example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to a gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 of this gold-colored display mode functions as a prefetch notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more clearly than in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 of this gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and not as a notice of a change of the display mode of the hold icon, but as a direct prefetch notice display. You may have to. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to become the default mode before the hold icon (the hold icon to be prefetched) whose display mode has changed is digested, or the result of success or failure of the prefetch change May be configured to be the default mode after the display indicating (for example, the display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1 with the preparing image RDY displayed, so that the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be noticed There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first pending icon h11, and the first one It is shown that the hold icon h11 of has been hit. At this time, due to the effect EF4, the entire first reserved icon h11 is covered, and it is considered to be in a more difficult visual condition than in a state where it is not covered by the effect EF4. Note that this effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 310 (g), the effect EF4 is placed next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the on-hold change animation performed before the on-hold icon changes functions as the on-hold change advance effect display. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be included in the hold change advance effect display, that is, a series of animation from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change of the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change advance presentation display. In addition, the pending change advance effect display may be performed only by displaying the ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change advance effect display. In addition, even if the hold change animation is performed, the display mode of the hold icon may not change. In addition, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be started after the effect display on the ninja character NJ4. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may not be displayed to cause the image RDY to appear. Also, the arrangement may be such that the ready image RDY appears more easily when there is a pending icon displayed in the pre-reading mode than when there is no pending icon. According to this configuration, a state in which the holding icon changes after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is expected to appear in the preparation of the image RDY, so that the ninja character NJ4 displays a different type of advance notice (hold It may function as advance notification of an icon change and an object such as an image under preparation RDY, or an object change such as an advance notice and an advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (h), a state is shown in which the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state where the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 310 (h) is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the family crest 224E may emit light in red after the first reserved icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or after the crest 224E emits light in red, the first one The hold icon h11 may start to display in the red display mode, or the family crest 224E may emit light in red at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts to display in the red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 310 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the change-on-hold animation ends, and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". Although the combination of the decoration patterns of this "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of losing, it is also a combination of chance eyes. That is, the advance notice is given by the derivation display of the combination of chances. Although the chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the read-ahead display mode, the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be In addition, when the chance eye is displayed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, stop display of the decorative symbol may be sequentially performed, or after the sequential stop display of the decorative symbol is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be deleted. In addition, sequential stop display of the decorative symbol may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown to FIG. 310 (i), you may make it erase | eliminate the fluctuation icon h0 at the timing when the symbol was decidedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 310 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11, respectively. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, it can be said that the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (k), it is shown that “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is considered to be a swing fluctuation, and the middle symbol is displayed at a high speed. The display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI unit UI3 performs the process until the super reach is started. It is designed not to be hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 310 (l) shows transition to super reach (sword reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the image RDY being prepared. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Note that the movement of the household object 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the household crest 224E is started, The movement of the household object 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this presentation example, when transitioning to a specific super reach, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden. Further, the reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, and the UI unit UI3 may be hidden when at least the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, since the peripheral frame is not displayed when the image under preparation RDY is not displayed, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden in this case. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach is different depending on whether or not the image in preparation RDY is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY during preparation is not configured to make it possible to identify an aspect of a certain advance notice or an effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 does not have to be hidden even if the game is shifted to the sword reach.

  In FIG. 310 (m), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of only the image RDY being prepared is maintained, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out with the UI unit UI3. That is, the image under preparation RDY has the same display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after the non-display. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the sword strike, or the kana reach may begin after the family crest 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest 224E. Swordsman reach may be started at the timing when it returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped to the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped to the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that notification is given that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and also that display before the start of a certain advance notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that the display of the effect EF5 has started a certain preliminary display itself. Furthermore, in this example of presentation, the image under preparation RDY can be said to end (become non-displayed) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. Although this mini game is an example of the notice display started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, the mini game may be started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made. In this example of rendering, the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the mini game is started, but the display of the image in preparation RDY is ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started. In addition, for example, the characters “iron plate” may be displayed without the mini game or the timer advance notice effect being displayed, or the result of the success or failure judgment may be displayed suddenly. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The target TGT is composed of four divided areas, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the example shown in FIG. 310 (o)) is the area of the hit. By hitting an arrow in the area of the hit, it is possible to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions. Further, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of mini games and timer announcements, a type of mini game or timer announcement may be configured to always go through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini-game or timer advance notice may be configured (configuration 2) not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (p), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice. The display indicating the result of the mini game may be configured to be displayed as a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. 310 (p). Note that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a result display portion of the mini game may be a certain effect. The display of "iron plate" in the case where a certain advance notice display is a mini game may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310 (q), the characters “iron plate” are displayed on a square background, and an iron plate image TP inclined approximately 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. . This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this presentation example, it is possible to say that the advance notice display corresponding to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, the other advance notice display corresponding to the result of the advance notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Also, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, another advance notice may be displayed in the one cushion after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 (for example, the countdown is completed). (Including the start of another notice display immediately before the

  FIG. 311 is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that is applicable to the present embodiment. Note that at least one of the plurality of other examples may be provided, and conversely, at least one example may not be provided. The same applies to the following figures.

  FIG. 311 (a1) shows an effect following FIG. 310 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, although it is illustrated as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 310, the effect may be an effect performed in another scene, or an effect performed only as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. It is also good. The same applies to the following figures. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 311 (a1) to FIG. 311 (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 310 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (a4), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is deviated from the target TGT and flew to an area different from the target TGT. That is, the situation in which the mini game as the advance notice has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (a5), the iron plate image TP is not displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the sword strike is being performed continuously. In this effect example, in the case of only the difference between the failure of the mini game and the success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the mini game is successful. In addition, instead of the mini game, a timer advance notice may be performed. For example, it may be a fake timer advance notice that nothing is displayed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0, or the timer display When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the characters "chance" are displayed small somewhere, etc.) may be performed.

  FIG. 311 (b1) is also a presentation following FIG. 310 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 311 (b1) to the same figure (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 310 (m) to the same figure (o), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b4), the arrow thrown by the mini-character MC1 of the tombstone hits the target TGT, but a state of being stuck in the non-hit area is shown. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the character of "chance" and the character of the princess are displayed on the background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this demonstration example, in the comparison of whether the mini game was a success or a great success, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally displayed finally in the case of a great success than in the case of a success. .

  FIG. 311 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 310 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 311 (c1) to FIG. 311 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 310 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (c3), there is a state where a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 311 (c3) is also an example of the advance notice that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this effect example, the mini game shown in FIG. 311 (c3) is configured to be more successful when it is started than the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) is started. The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be easier to succeed. In addition, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when the mini game shown in FIG. 311 (c3) is started than when the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, the symbol displaying the character of "iron plate" is derived, and a state in which the mini game is succeeded is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and it is shown that the notice effect of the big hit determination is performed.

  In addition, although the mini game was performed in the effect shown in FIG. 310 in comparison with the example of effects shown in FIG. 310, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 311, the timer advance notice may be performed, or vice versa . In addition, both timer announcement effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the time for counting down may be different.

  FIG. 312 is a view showing in stages the other examples of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 312 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 310 (m), the image RDY being prepared is not displayed. In FIG. 312 (a1), the fluctuation icon h0 is in the red display mode, and accordingly, the family crest 224E is also in the red light emission mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a2), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the mini game is started without passing through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the display of the image RDY is being made than when the display of the image RDY is not being made.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a3), it is shown that the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (a4), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, an example is shown where the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be performed not only during the super reach, but also may be configured to be executable during the super reach or not. In addition, after the third display ends in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain advance display (a certain effect) is performed across the first state to the second state. It is also good. In addition, a certain advance notice (a certain effect) to be performed after the third display ends in the first state may cross the next change. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain advance notice (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

  FIG. 312 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 310 (l). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 312 (b1) to FIG. 312 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 310 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b3), in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed, it is shown that the timer preview effect is started instead of the mini game. This timer advance notice effect is also an example of the advance notice display which is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 312 (b3), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00". It should be noted that the big hit symbol may eventually be displayed more clearly when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. If the game is started, the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally displayed. Note that the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is an effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after the timer becomes “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down) , And is configured to perform an iron plate image TP), but after “0:00” indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, “iron plate”) is displayed in the display area in which the timer display is performed. Such as a display that can identify a certain effect display, or a display related to a certain effect display such as a “chance”, and then in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed. You may comprise so that presentation of effects (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Also, although the timer advance notice effect in this embodiment is configured to be displayed until "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of counting down, it is displayed up to "1" indicating 1 second, or , "00: 01" may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display capable of specifying a certain effect display such as “iron plate”, or “chance”) in the display area where the timer display was performed. After performing a display related to a certain effect display), an effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of “1”, may be up to immediately before another effect display is displayed, or may be up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from when the "1" is displayed to when the display of another effect display is started is the same as the time from when the "2" is displayed to when the display of "1" is started (almost the same) It may be different (that is, displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”). When a pseudo run symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, a display representing “NEXT” or “continue” may be displayed as another effect display. Also, although the timer display (for example, "10:00") is displayed immediately after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, other displays are displayed after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished. The timer display is displayed after the display (for example, a display showing that the timer display is counting up from 0 or a display related to the timer display like “after next chance up”) is displayed. It may be configured such that no other display is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b4), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (b5), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, the timer advance notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In each of the effect examples shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIG. 312 (c1) to FIG. 312 (c3) are effects following FIG. 312 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312 (c1), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 312 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode changes in such a manner that the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes gradually shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the numbers in the timer display and the display in other display modes other than the numbers. First, only the decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds. In this case, the decrease speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. Also, two or more remaining time display meters with different remaining times may be provided, and each may be displayed with a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters with the same remaining time but different lengths. You may display it. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different advance notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Also, two or more remaining time display meters of the same length may be provided, and their reduction rates may be different.

  Further, in this presentation example, presentation may be performed in which the execution time of the timer advance presentation presentation is extended. For example, in the case of extension, the number of 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Also, the length of the meter may differ depending on the time of timer advance notice. In addition, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant, for example, may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and although the length of a certain meter may be long, for example, as a result of the decrease speed becoming faster from the middle, it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the rate of decrease of the meter does not have to be equal. For example, the decrease rate may be faster or slower in the state in which the numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 313 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the preparation-in-progress advance notice effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 313 (a1) shows that the sword strike is started. In this presentation example, unlike in FIG. 310 (m), the image RDY being prepared is not displayed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 313 (a2) to FIG. A pair of translucent button images 136 q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of a button effect or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136 q informs that the button image 136 a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started by uniting. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button preview effect. The pair of translucent button images 136 q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example of rendering, an example in which two translucent button images 136q are merged has been described, for example, a rendering in which four translucent button images 136q are merged may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are used. The button image 136a is materialized and button preview effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the image 136q is performed You may Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet. In addition, even when a deceased button image 136aL to be described later is displayed and a button preview effect is started, united animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or a translucent button image corresponding to the deceased button image 136aL Coalescing animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (a5), a state in which the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity is shown.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 313 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and a button advance notice effect is started. When the button preview effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is received, and an animation showing that the button image 136a is pressed is displayed with a character of "Press", and further, the remaining button image 136a The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation effective period. Note that the button preview effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button preview effect is started.

  FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b6) show modifications of the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (b1) to (b5). The effects shown in FIGS. 313 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 312 (b1) to (b3), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 313 (b4) shows that the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display is counted down in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect. In addition, even if the timer announcement effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the countdown of the timer display may be started according to the start of the combined animation. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to easily specify the notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed. In addition, the timer announcement effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared while the combined animation is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (b5), the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be set to "0:00" after the united animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" at the timing when the united animation is completed.

  FIG. 313 (b6) shows that the combined animation is successful, the decal button image 136aL is materialized, the button advance notice effect is started, and the operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca-button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer preview effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer preview effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, for example, an iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 313 (c1) is a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 313 (b3) to FIG. (B6). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 313 (c1) to FIG. 313 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 313 (b3) to FIG. 313 (b4), the description is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 313 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q overlaps due to the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  Then, when the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 313 (c4), a button advance notice effect by the deca-button image 136aL is started. In addition, since the rendition shown in FIG. 313 (c4) is the same as the rendition shown in FIG. 313 (b6), the detailed description will be omitted.

  Thus, the presentation example shown in FIG. 313 is also shown for the example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during execution of the super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared is ended and the timer advance notice is started while the introduced animation is displayed.

  FIG. 314 is a view sequentially showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 314 (a), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (a), one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (a). The image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is more likely to finally display the jackpot symbol than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 314 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 314 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest product 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is set to a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (b), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped to the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped to the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of the display of the image RDY being prepared is started. As described above, it can be said that this presentation example shows that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished except for super reach.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (c), a state is shown in which the timer preview effect is started in the tutorial display section TT1 (that is, the area where the image RDY is being displayed). ing. When the timer advance presentation is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 314 (c), "90:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this example of presentation, it is shown that timer advance presentation is started before developing into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time as "90:00", and it can be inferred that the symbol variation display time is long, and a sense of expectation for a big hit may be improved. As described above, in this effect example, a relatively short time such as "10:00" is displayed when the displayed time of the timer display is displayed in a long time (long time) such as "90:00". Finally, the big hit symbol is configured to be more easily displayed than when displayed in (short time). Further, in this rendering example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is easily started to be long time in the timer preview rendering. Further, in this example of presentation, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 314 (d) shows transition to super reach (swords reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered that the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to be recognized by the family crest 224E being overlapped. In addition, the family crest item 224E also overlaps with a part of the timer notice display in the countdown display of the timer display. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

  FIG. 314 (e) shows a state in which the above-mentioned combined animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer advance presentation effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that a notice advance display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Also here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button preview effect is notified by the timer and the timer advance effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314 (f), the pair of translucent button images 136q are further in proximity, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer advance display is "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. In this example of effect, the background color of the timer advance notice display is red, and the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. In addition, the reliability of the big hit may be the same in the case where the timer advance notice display is the default background color and the case where it is the red background color.

  FIG. 314 (g) shows that the combined animation is successful, the deka button image 136aL is materialized, and the button preview effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed, and the operation reception state is started. There is. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it will be for a big hit.

  FIG. 315 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 315 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 315 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (a1). The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 315 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 315 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped to the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to see than the state not overlapped to the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The dynamic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hitting area, and hitting the hitting area with an arrow hits the big hit reliability. High notices are to be made. In this presentation example, it is shown that a mini game is being played prior to transition to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a4), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that a great success has been achieved as a result of the mini game as the advance notice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a5), the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the fluctuation icon h0. It is shown that the preliminary announcement by is ranked up. In addition, the family crest 224E emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. It should be noted that after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family character 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest 224E may emit red light. After changing to the aspect or the golden light emission mode, the change icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the timing when the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode The family crest item 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the displayed display of the mini game is shifted to the state in which the shutter image can not be visually recognized. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change after the closing operation by the shutter image starts. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. Moreover, although the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game in this presentation example, the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a6), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (a7), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is in a non-display state where no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another preview display, a timer preview display, or a mini game may be started. In addition, display may be performed to gray out after the shutter image is released.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 315 (b1) to FIG. 315 (b8), an example showing a state where the mini game is started without displaying the image under preparation RDY will be described.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in red, and is displayed in advance. In addition, the hold icon h11 is a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the temple”, and the relationship between the panda character and the temple character is described. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 315 (b1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is made non-display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b3), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini game preview display to be displayed before the display of the mini game described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this effect example, the mini game is shown to be started instead of the explanation display which has been performed until now. It can also be said that a mini game is shown starting without displaying the image RDY being prepared. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 315 (b4) to FIG. 315 (b8) are performed. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 315 (b4) to the same figure (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 315 (a3) to the same figure (a7), the description will be omitted. In addition, after the mini game is over, the explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or the gray out display may be performed.

  FIG. 316 is a diagram showing the display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red, that is, the display mode of the advance notice of the fluctuation, and the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Note that the family crest 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 316 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 316 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is performing the closing operation by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that the display (display of the shutter image) before the other display (preliminary display) is performed instead of the certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1) . Note that at least a part of the character display displayed before the shutter image is displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a3), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed. This shutter image can be said to be a display before notice display displayed before a notice display to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (a4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, not the image RDY under preparation nor the mini game or the timer advance notice effect, but the notice display consisting of the letters “excessive heat” is displayed. The notice display of the "super heat" may be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. In this case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed when displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer announcement effect being performed than when displayed without the mini game or the timer announcement effect. Good. Further, the notice display of the "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect being performed. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before performing the advance display such as “superheat”.

  FIG. 316 (b1) to FIG. 316 (b8) show an example of effect showing how the advance notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT1. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 316 (b1) to FIG. 316 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 316 (a1) to FIG. 316 (a3), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b4), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, it is shown that a timer notice icon I81 for timer notice appears for notifying that timer notice effect will be performed when the shutter image is released. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance presentation effect will be performed. Note that other notice icons may appear.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out from the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b7), it is shown that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. In this example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the timer preview icon I81 is kept displayed, and it is notified that the timer preview icon I81 is stocked. Alternatively, they may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (b8), a state is shown in which the shutter image is released in the tutorial display section TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is open-displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the image RDY being prepared. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (b8), the image under preparation RDY is set as the default display mode. The preparation image RDY is displayed by the timer notice icon I81 being stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance presentation is notified by the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the display mode of the image RDY in preparation for notifying of the start of the timer preview effect and the display mode of the image in preparation for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but are different You may In addition, the mini game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  FIG. 317 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timings of a certain advance notice display, and the start and end timings of a certain effect are different states among the states into which the second state is subdivided. It may be good or in the same state.

  FIG. 317 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 310 (l). In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 311 (a1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 310 (m), description is abbreviate | omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 317 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into a super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. The combination of the decoration patterns of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "is derived and the fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that a big hit is made is made. In order to congratulate the player from becoming a big hit, the family crest 224E, the eight generations character 224Fa and the generals character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display mode in which light is emitted in multiple colors.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is considered to be more difficult to recognize than the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 317 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 317 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It is to be noted that after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a false timer advance notice effect in which the timer advance notice effect ends is started before reaching "0:00".

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a6), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is informed that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. Note that the display of the characters "Go" may be performed or may not be performed.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (a8) shows that the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 317 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and it is informed that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has been started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the big hit symbol does not have to be started, and when the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. A button image 136a of an aspect may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. In addition, even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (a9), the jackpot of the “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7” from the combination of the decorative designs of the jackpot of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 4” It is changed to the combination of the decoration design of, and it is informed that the definite variation big hit is decided. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  FIGS. 317 (b1) to (b4) show that the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance presentation is started while the animation of the duel scene in the super reach is continued.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b1) shows that animation of a duel scene continues. At this time, the timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 317 (b1), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display on the timer advance display, and thereafter, the countdown is started. In addition, the time when countdown is started may be before developing into super reach, may be after developing into super reach, or may be the timing when developed into super reach, reach It may be before the transition to the state, or may be after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b2), the button preview effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. . That is, it is shown that the final judge effect is started. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down due to the timer advance production during the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. Here, the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 is longer between the length of the operation accepting period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length at which the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is performed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317 (b4), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy character. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display still continues, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol promotion effect will be performed thereafter. In this example of effect, even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the timer display is configured not to be "0:00". This is because, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the resurrection effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Also, conversely, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be zero.

  FIG. 318 is a diagram showing in stages an example of a timer announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 318 (a) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 316 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (b), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the image RDY being prepared is shown. In this preparation example, only one type of display mode is prepared for the image under preparation RDY, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this presentation example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain advance notice and a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain advance notice and a certain effect are to be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (c), it is shown that the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. . In this rendering example, one of a plurality of background colors in the timer advance notice display is selected, and the background color indicates the reliability of the big hit. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 318 (c), the background color of the timer advance notice is blue, which is an aspect with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Before or after the timer countdown starts, the background color of the timer advance notice may change, and an effect may be performed such that the reliability is improved halfway.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (d), the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, after the timer display becomes "0:00", it may be in the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the timer display may become "0:00", or the timer display is " It may be in the reach state at the timing when it becomes 0:00 ". In this example of presentation, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a correspondence relationship with the display showing that it will be developed into the super reach, and it will always be developed into the super reach.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character display "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (e). It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Note that the tutorial display unit TT1 may be in the non-display state after the button preview effect is started, or the button preview effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is in the non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button preview effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, an effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be exhibited.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and the process shifts to super reach (sword reach) as shown in FIG. 318 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  In FIG. 318 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out with the UI unit UI3. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318 (k), it is shown that a cut-in image HCI of a princess is displayed. The princess's cut-in image HCI is suddenly displayed without passing through the button announcement effect, the timer announcement effect, or the mini game, and the reliability is low. However, the button announcement effect or the timer announcement effect or It may be displayed as a result of the mini game being played. Moreover, it may change to the cut-in image HCI of a princess, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 319 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 319 (a) to (c) are the same as those in FIGS. 318 (a) to (c), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 319 (d) shows that an animation in which a character of a lord as a navy character is throwing a bomb is being performed. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while shouting "It's still." This bomb is displayed on the first decorative symbol display from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Move across device 208L. Then, the bomb travels to the tutorial display section TT1 in which the timer display is being counted down and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display section TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (e), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the image RDY being prepared is displayed again. When this timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is "10:00", and the timing at which the button advance notice effect is started is notified, but that timer notice effect is interrupted. It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button preview effect. It should be noted that the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed when the interruption presentation of the timer advance announcement production by the navigation character is performed than when the interruption presentation of the timer announcement production by the navigation character is not performed. It should be noted that if the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, the time of the timer display is increased and the time until the countup is extended is extended. Good, and the countdown speed may be slower. Also, for example, the timer advance notice has the advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, and that is why it is possible to know the future by the end timing of the image RDY under preparation There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (f), the button preview effect is started and the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started It is shown. The tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and the process shifts to super reach (sword reach) as shown in FIG. 319 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of rendering, in case of transition to at least the sword reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Hide.

  In FIG. 319 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (k), it is shown that the image in preparation RDY is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is resumed. Specifically, the timer notice display after resumption is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Further, in FIG. 319 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). In addition, start timing of timer notice production is taken as appropriate timing, for example, before start of super reach, after start of super reach, before reach state, after reach state, after super reach start Also, the timing may be started before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance presentation effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and for example, may be started from "9:00" indicating the time of interruption.

  After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (m), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (n), the iron plate image TP as the advance notice is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the advance notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 318, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice production is not the development to the super reach, and as a result of the timer notice production being extended, the cut-in image displayed during the super reach As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this example of the effect, the countdown is “0:00” at a good place in the super reach, and an example in which a good effect is performed is shown. In addition, as the end timing (the start timing of a certain advance notice display) of the image RDY being prepared is later in a certain fluctuation, the expectation of the big hit is higher.

  FIG. 320 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 320 (a) is the same as that in FIG. 318 (a), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (b), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 has been switched to the image RDY being prepared is shown. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image under preparation RDY is displayed, and it is shown that the timer announcement effect is performed twice. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image RDY being prepared, or may be displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It may be assumed that it will be performed once, but actually it will be performed twice. Here, instead of the display of “TIMER × 2”, for example, two in-provision images RDY may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (c), the in-provision image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched from the in-provision image RDY to the timer notice display, and the timer announcement effect is started. . The background color of the timer preview is blue, which is an aspect of low reliability. Here, the default display mode of the timer advance notice may be green. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is “10:00”, and it is notified that there is a possibility that a given advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (d), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns, respectively, and the reach state is reached. In addition, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is informed that the first timer announcement effect has been digested and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by the display of the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In addition, the display of "TIMER × 2" may be displayed without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of under-provisioning displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display regarding the under-provisioning display is once hidden after the first under-provisioning display ends.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (e), instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, the character "Go" is displayed, and a certain advance notice is displayed. It is reported that it will be started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (f), the button preview effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may seem that there is no stock of the timer advance notice effect. In this production example, the start of the button preview production itself is not the preview display that is started as a result of the timer preview production being performed, but the preview displayed when the rendering button 136 is operated as a result of operating the button preview production. The display corresponds to the notice display started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button preview effect is started and the operation valid period is started. ing. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again in the tutorial display section TT1 to notify that the second timer announcement effect is started, but when the in-provision image RDY is displayed again, the first in-provision image RDY is displayed. Is displayed larger than when it is displayed. Therefore, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 or the decorative symbol may be overlapped by the image RDY during preparation. As described above, there may be an effect of causing more attention by temporarily non-displaying the image RDY during preparation and further overlapping.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (h), it is determined that the button advance effect has succeeded, and as shown in FIG. 320 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, super reach transition Display takes place and develops into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). In addition, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged preparation image RDY, and is considered to be less visible than the state where it is not overlapped by the family crest 224E. Note that the image under preparation RDY may be overlapped with the family crest 224E only when enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when not enlarged. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this rendering example, it can be said that a certain preview display performed as a result of the timer preview rendering corresponds to the development to the super reach.

  In FIG. 320 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the image under preparation RDY continues to be maintained. In addition, since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. In this way, the prepared image RDY enlarged and displayed may also be displayed during execution of the super reach. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (k), it is shown that the in-provision image RDY is switched to the timer notice display and the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is improved. Further, in FIG. 320 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "3:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display due to the timer advance presentation is being performed during the super reach (sword reach). Further, in this example of the effect, the size of the timer advance notice display is the same size as the size of the ready image RDY displayed in the enlarged view, and when the timer advance notice display is displayed in the enlarged view, the big hit The symbol is easily displayed. In addition, when the background color of the timer advance notice display is gold, the display may be always enlarged. In addition, even if the background color of the timer advance notice display is a color other than gold, the display may be enlarged. Further, in this rendering example, the background color of the second timer preview rendering is higher in reliability than the first timer preview rendering, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the time displayed on the timer may be longer in the second timer announcement effect than in the first timer announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (m), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit is decided. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by being notified in advance that the timer advance effect is performed twice.

  As described above, in this example of the effect, when the number of clothes under preparation RDY is displayed, when one under preparation picture RDY is digested, all the preparation under image RDY is displayed on the same symbol variation display. It has been shown to be digested.

  FIG. 321 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 321 (a1)-the same figure (a 2) is the same as that of FIG. 317 (a1)-the same figure (a 2), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a3), it is shown that the long press effect by the long press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, an area in which a character of Tonosama is drawn is arranged at the upper side, an area in which a character of swordsman is drawn is arranged at the lower side. The size of both areas is displayed so as to relatively fluctuate. The image RDY is being displayed even when the long-press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is not started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a4), it is shown that reception of the long press operation by the long press effect is started. That is, it is shown that the effective period of operation of the effect button 136 has been started. In this long press effect, although the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. In addition, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer advance notice display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 321 (a4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "5:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. It is done. That is, in this example of presentation, the operation valid period and the time of the countdown of the timer display coincide with each other. Note that they do not have to match completely. Note that the timer advance notice may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the play button 136 may be started after the timer advance effect is started, The timer announcement effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 321 (a5) shows that the player performs a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a5), the timer display in the timer advance display is "4:00".

  FIG. 321 (a6) shows that the player continues to perform the long press operation of the effect button 136. At this time, in the long-press effect display, the area in which the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and the area in which the character of the sword superior placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Is shown to be dominant. It is suggested that this is likely to be an advantageous result. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a6), the timer display in the timer advance display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a7), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is finished, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed in the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Moreover, in the long-press effect display, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn further expands, and the area where the character of the sword master placed below is drawn smaller accordingly. It is shown that your character is by far the dominant. Note that the long press effect may be ended after the “Go” character is displayed, or the “Go” character may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, “Go The long press effect may be ended at the timing when the character of “is displayed. Also, the operation effective period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, or the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, “Go The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character of “is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a8), the characters "one blow" are displayed, and the deca-button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button preview effect is started. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance presentation effect can be said to be an example of button operation presentation performed subsequently to the long press presentation. In other words, it can be said that an example in which a plurality of (types) button effects are continuously performed is shown. Here, the operation effective period to be set may be set again after the operation effective period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously to the operation effective period in the long press effect May be

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a10), the main character of the main character wins over the swordsman of the enemy character. -A combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived to start swing fluctuation. At this time, the family crest item 224E, the eight generation character item 224Fa and the general character item 224Fb emit light in the light emission mode of the rainbow so as to congratulate being a big hit.

  Thus, in this example of rendering, the preparation display ends with the long press part and the countdown of the timer display is started, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or at the end of the long press part “0:00” is given, and an example is shown in which the button effect to be performed in the next part is good.

  In FIG. 321 (b1) to FIG. (B5), it is shown that a long press effect is performed in the sword strike, but a timer advance effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that a long press operation is being performed. In this example of presentation, timer advance presentation is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 321 (b2), the long-press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long-press, a character of a maroon placed above is drawn The area is reduced, and the area where the sword character placed below is drawn is enlarged, and it is shown that the Tonosama character is inferior (the character of the enemy character is dominated by the sword sword). . It is suggested that this is unlikely to be an advantageous result.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b3), the character of “one blow” is displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. It is shown that the operation has been started and the operation effective period has been set again. As described above, when the timer announcement effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca-button image 136aL is difficult to be displayed, and the button image 136a of the default display mode is easily displayed. When the long-press effect is performed and the timer advance effect is not performed, the deca-button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (b5), the main character of the main character loses the swordsman of the enemy character. The combination of the decorative patterns of the lost 5-decoration "4" is derived to start the fluctuation. In addition, it may be a flow which may be a case where it does not go through a mini game or a timer advance notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 322 is a diagram showing by way of example an example of button continuous hitting effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 322 (a), "Panda is a master of Tonosama" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (a), the button continuous hitting effect is started, and the explanation of "Please turn the meter to MAX in time by the button continuous hitting" is performed. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged vertically is displayed on the left side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (a), it is before the start of reception of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation effective period, and the effect button lamp 138 also lights in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of "prepare" displayed above the button image 136a corresponds to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button continuous hit effects). It should be noted that, when the button continuous hit effect is started, the decorative symbol which has been variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 322 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 322 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (b), it is shown that the reception of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has been started. Specifically, the character "ready" displayed above the button image 136a switches to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation valid period is started. And the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button continuous hit effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed to decrease in accordance with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (c), "5" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the end of the operation effective period is 5 seconds. Since a certain advance notice effect may be performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it is possible to say that the effect of the countdown display by the countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

  FIG. 322 (d) shows that the player has started the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (d), "4" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it is four seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 322 (e), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, one memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is red in accordance with the number of times of the continuous hitting operation. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (e), "3" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that it will be three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 322 (f), the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136 and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (f), “1” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 322 (g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes “0”, and the operation valid period is over, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is finished. The memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red in three modes, that is, it indicates that the button continuous hit effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, it may be switched from red to white at the end of the operation effective period, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  When the button continuous hit production fails, "Sorry ..." is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322 (h), and it is notified that the button continuous hit production has failed. In addition, in this demonstration example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown indication effect other than the timer advance notice, a certain advance notice display may not include this countdown indication display.

  FIG. 323 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 323 (a), a UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, a variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center In the left side of the fluctuation icon h0, a reserved icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 323 (a), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 323 (a). The function of the first preparing image RDY is similar to that of the preparing image RDY described above. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 323 (a) is in the default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this rendering example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and a plurality of preparing images are simultaneously displayed. For the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2, corresponding effects (timer announcement effect, mini game, etc.) are performed. Note that these in-provision images (the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2) all function as pre-reading notices. In addition, the background color of all the images in preparation is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be simultaneously started to be displayed, or one may be started to be displayed after the other is started to be displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 323 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 323 (b) shows that the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 323 (a) is ended and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It is placed on the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon is displayed and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon that was at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal Do. In addition, the fluctuation display of the decoration design is started. It should be noted that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (c), the first preparing image RDY1 being displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "5:00", and it is informed that there is a possibility that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this rendering example, when one of the plurality of in-provision images is activated (digested) to start rendering, all the other in-provision images are also digested. In addition, although the image in preparation is completely digested in one symbol fluctuation display, the advance notice icon may be carried over and displayed until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display.

  FIG. 323 (d) shows that the timer display in the timer advance notice corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 323 (e), the word "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer advance notice corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 was displayed, and the timer advance effect related to this timer notice is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding advance notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (f), the character "Go" is erased along with the display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward and moves to the position of the tutorial display section TT1. An image movement animation is being performed during preparation. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 which may be displayed when the display mode of the holding icon shown in FIG. 310 (f) is changed. It may be a character. In this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may be started after the leading start previewing effect is started, or the leading start previewing effect may be started after the image moving animation in preparation is started, The in-provision image moving animation may start at the timing when the preceding start preview effect starts. Also, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 323 (f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2 but may overlap the second preparing image RDY2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a thuriken toward the fluctuating icon h0 and shows that the fluctuating icon h0 was hit. It is done. At this time, the whole of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the visual recognition state is set as compared with the state where the fluctuation icon h0 is not covered by the effect EF4.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (h), as a result of the on-hold change animation being performed, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change advance notice is started.

  In FIG. 323 (i), after “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is in the reach state, transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. The acceptance count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of transition to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps a part of the second ready image RDY2. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. Further, in this example of presentation, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In FIG. 323 (j), it is shown that the sword strike has been started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is maintained. Also, the family crest 224E is moved downward and is returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (k), it is shown that the second under-provisioning image RDY2 is switched to the timer advance notice display and the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice is displayed as a gold background color, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has been improved. Also, in FIG. 323 (k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and it is informed that a given advance notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is resumed. It is done. It should be noted that the timer advance notice display is a default display mode at the start of display and may be promoted display such as changing to a golden background color after start of display (for example, after the countdown is started). It is also good.

  Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (l), it is shown that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (m), instead of the timer display, the character "Go" is displayed and a certain advance notice display is started It is informing.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is informed that the big hit has been decided. That is, it can be said that the timer preview effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the preview display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain preview display. In this example of presentation, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 324 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects according to the explanation display applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 324 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 310 (a), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (a2), the instruction display in the tutorial display section TT1 shows that “Panda is the master of the lord” is changed to “the lord is the Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when switching the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1, the above-described opening and closing display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed. In this effect example, it is shown that, in the symbol variation display of one, when switching the explanation display, the switching display between the explanation display is performed without performing the open / close display by the shutter image.

  FIGS. 324 (b1) to (b3) show how opening and closing display is performed by the shutter image when the explanation display is switched. In addition, since the rendition shown to FIG. 324 (b1)-the same figure (b 2) is the same as the rendition shown to FIG. 310 (a)-the same figure (b), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "donately is Yatsushiro general" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preliminary display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. By performing such an effect, it was expected that the advance notice display would be started, but by making the player disappointing that the advance notice display was not started and the explanation display was carried out, the shutter image was opened and closed. There are times when it can be made to have expectations.

  FIG. 325 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIGS. 325 (a1) to (a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 310 (e). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 325 (a1) to the same figure (a2) are the same as the example of the effects shown in FIG. 310 (f) to the same figure (g), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 325 (a3), it is shown that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged from the default display mode although the effect EF4 is erased. . As described above, even when the on-hold change animation described above with reference to FIG. 310 is performed, a failure effect may be performed in which the display mode does not change. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may differ depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

  Although the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI unit UI3 in the above-mentioned change-on-hold animation, for example, as shown in FIG. 325 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI unit UI3 to display the UI. It may be made not to overlap the part UI3. In this case, in the on-hold change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI unit UI3.

  FIG. 326 is a view gradually showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 326 (a1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 326 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 326 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 326 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a2), it is shown that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the roulette board RR formed in a circular shape is divided into three equal parts. An area of a rose is arranged above the three sections, an area of a princess is arranged at the lower left, and an area of a small princess is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each of the areas in red, and a notice display corresponding to the area which is finally lit in red is prepared. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display in which the in-provision display and the like end may be the same or different. In addition, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol fluctuation display in which the symbol display is performed may be the same as the symbol fluctuation display in which the UW display etc. is finished. It may be. According to the combination described above, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a3), it is shown that all areas are lit in red as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect. That is, it has been notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the advance notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character are respectively prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a4), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the display of the image in preparation is accompanied, the character is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Little Princess moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner portion of the third preparation image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a6), it is shown that an animation in which the character CHM of Little princess is throwing an object toward the variation icon h0 is being performed. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is the notice display due to the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a8), display in a mode in which the eyelid character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. When the mini game is started, the laterally extending cylindrical drum DRM starts to rotate about the lateral direction as an axis of rotation. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the character of “superheat” is derived, suggesting that the possibility of becoming a big hit is high There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is performed by deriving the character of "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not the effect of changing the display mode of something, but the effect of giving a big hit advance notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a11), display in a mode in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is started. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to be overlapped on the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a12), it is shown that the timer preview effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown is started. As a result of counting down, when "0:00" is reached, a certain advance notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 326 (a12), "30:00" is displayed as the timer display, and thereafter, the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a13), it is shown that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed as a result of the countdown. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 and notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the display of “Go” described above and shown in FIG. 323 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (a14), super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into super reach (sword reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the character HME of the princess corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Also, although not shown, the family crest 224E is raised and rotated to overlap the front side of the lower central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moreover, in this example of presentation, the background color of the super reach transition display is set to gold, and it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is high. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. In addition, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of super reach, for example, iron plate image TP is displayed A mini game to be played or timer announcement effect may be performed.

  FIG. 326 (b1) shows that in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 326 (a2), only the region of the eyebrow of the three regions is lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the wolf character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character, only the notice display corresponding to the whale character is prepared. It has been informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 326 (b2), the third in-provision image RDY3 is displayed in such a manner that the dark blue character GII is adjacent. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only the mini game by the drum DRM is played.

  FIG. 327 is a view illustrating in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 327 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 326 (a3), but “× 2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a2), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the first preparing image RDY1 in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed on the upper left of the display screen The third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the black character GII is adjacent, and two tiny princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. In the case where a plurality of effects are prepared by the insult character GII and the princess character HME, for example, two same characters can be displayed on one in-progress image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, one first in-provision image RDY1 is displayed, and two princess characters HME can be displayed. Conversely, a single character may display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a3), the character CHM1 of the little princess of one of the two little princess characters moves upward and moves to the lower left corner of the third preparation image RDY3. An overlap is shown. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display among the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a4), it is shown that an animation in which the character CHM1 of Princess Little is thrown toward the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display by the change of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Little Princess is started.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in an easily visible state. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is started.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a6), the character CHM2 of the other Little Princess of the two Little Princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3 It is shown that parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a7), it is shown that an animation is being performed in which the character CHM2 of Princess Little is throwing an object toward the fluctuation icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the change icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the change icon h0 is made difficult to visually recognize. That is, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi is notified that the preliminary display by the fluctuation icon is ranked up.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased, and the fluctuation icon h0 is in a state in which it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red advance notice to the display mode of the gold advance notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIGS. 327 (b1) to (b4) show another example of effect following FIG. 327 (a3). The effect shown in FIG. 327 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 327 (a4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of the princess reaches the change icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is turned dark. Is performed, and the portion where the effect EF 7 is displayed glows white, and a display in which light is extended in the horizontal direction from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily made non-displayed due to the darkening of the display screen. You may In addition, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only a part of images in preparation is temporarily hidden. You may Thus, the state in which the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. Then, in this presentation example, the first state in which the hold icon is displayed with the UI unit UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is not displayed with the UI unit UI3 is the first state. The state may be changed to the fourth state, and the first state may be changed to the second state, or the first state may be changed to the second state. The first state may be changed to the fourth state, and then the second state may be set.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF 7 was displayed is enlarged and displayed.

  After that, when the dark display is finished, as shown in FIG. 327 (b4), the fluctuation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 327 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 327 (a5), the description is omitted.

  FIG. 327 (c1) to FIG. 327 (c3) show another example of effect following FIG. 326 (a6). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 327 (c1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 326 (a7), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (c2), the display in a mode in which the indigo character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparation image RDY3 is displayed, “Go” is displayed. The characters are displayed to notify that the mini game is to be started. Note that the display of “Go” may be started after the キ ャ ラ ク タ character GII starts to vibrate, or the G character GII may start to vibrate after the display of “Go” is started, The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the scarlet character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is informed that the advance notice display corresponding to the decoy character GII is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 327 (c3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-provision image RDY3 disposed adjacent to the beard character GII is displayed. It is done. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to approximately the center of the display screen, and the effect by the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this example of effect, it is shown that the area in which the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area in which the image under preparation is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after the "Go" display is made may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without the "Go" display. . In addition, the case where the mini game is enlarged may be more likely to be a big hit if the mini game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image under preparation to the start of the mini game, timer advance notice effect, etc. may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain advance display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the places where the first display and the second display are performed are different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand There is a case to play the effect.

  FIG. 328 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the effect display on the left side is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the effect display on the right side is performed may be different display devices. In that case, a third display (some notice display) may be made on the display device 2 in some cases.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 328A, one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so that one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 328 (a). In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 328 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two on the left and right, and the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, the display of “Chibi princess is participating in SP reach participation in annihilation” is performed, and the Chibi princess has a mission of having Chibi princess to annihilate a large number of minions performed, and the right notice In the display area CUR, a display of "To win the victory in SP reach participation" is performed, and drinking comparison is performed between the coffin and the coffin, and the comparision of drinking is performed with a mission that the cowards win the drinking comparison. In this production example, the construction is such that transition to super reach is achieved when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Princess Musou rendering and the mission in the drinking and the rendering is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. It is done. It should be noted that after the Chibi princess musou rendition is started, the drinking and comparing performance may be started, or after the drinking comparison rendition is started, the Chibi princess and musk reversion may be started, and both of the renditions are started at the same time It may be done. Further, in this example of production, if at least one of the mission in the Chibi-Himeka Musou effect and the mission in the performance compared to the drink is achieved, it may be made a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 while both the Chibi princess inscious and the drink comparison and repercussion effects are being executed. There is. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (d), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the character of “chance” is displayed in the left notice display area CUL in which Chibi Princess Musou rendition is performed is displayed Thus, it is reported that the mission in the little princess princess musou rendition corresponding to the area where the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed is facilitated to be achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area where the image RDY being displayed is displayed does not match the area where the advance display is performed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable and improve interest. . The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right notice display area CUR in which the effects are compared compared to drinking, or the chance is raised in both the left notice display area CUL and the right notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed. The tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed because the mini game has ended.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (f), it is shown that a child is completely eliminated and a mission is achieved in the little princess princess musou rendition displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (g), the letter “Annihilation” is displayed along with the indication of Princess Chibi up in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the Chibi Princess incomparable effect is achieved Is reported. In the right advance notice display area CUR, effects are continued compared to drinking.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (h), it is shown that the master has won the eyebrows and the mission has been achieved in the compared with the drink displayed in the right advance notice display area CUR.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (i), the character of "winning" is displayed together with the display of the up in the window in the right notice display area CUR, and it is informed that the mission in the drinking comparison effect is achieved. It is done.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (j), it is shown that the sword reach is started. When transitioning to the sword reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this example, since the mission in the drink comparison production is achieved, the swordsman reach is started, and since the mission in the Chibi princess musou rendition is achieved, the Chibi princess has appeared as a friend of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the comparition to drink is achieved and the mission in Chibi princess musou rendition fails, it will shift to swordsman reach, but the chibi princess will not appear, the mission in chibi princess musou rendition will be achieved and the comparition will be compared If you fail in the mission in, transition to Super reach for Chibi princess. That is, in this rendition, the contents of rendition to be developed thereafter differ depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 328 (k), the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the character of “chance” and the character of the princess are displayed is displayed on the background of horizontal stripes. As a result, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is improved, but it is not the high reliability, not the notice display started from the mini game started from the image RDY under preparation or the timer notice effect. ing.

  FIG. 329 shows, in a step-by-step manner, another example of the effects shown in FIG. The effects shown in FIGS. 329 (a) to 329 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 328 (a) to 313 (b), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (c), a state is shown in which both of the Chibi princess incomparable effect and the drink compared with the effect are performed. In this presentation example, the display of the image RDY being prepared continues, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this example of presentation, it is shown that the advance notice display corresponding to the image in preparation RDY is not started before the transition to the super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 329 (c) to FIG. 3 (e). In FIG. 329 (e), the chance up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 329 (f) to FIG. 3 (j) are performed. It is to be noted that the effects shown in FIG. 329 (f) to FIG. 3 (j) are that the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 for the effects shown in FIG. 328 (f) to FIG. The description is omitted because it is the same except for it.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (k), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared ends, and the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared It is notified that it is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the image under preparation RDY is displayed. When the mini game is started, you see the mini character MC1 and the target TGT. The strategic TGT is composed of four divided areas, and the upper one of the four areas is the hit area, and an arrow hitting the hit area gives a chance to announce a chance up It is supposed to be The number of hit regions is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit regions, or all regions may be hit regions, or all regions may be non-hit regions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (m), it is shown that the arrow thrown by the mini character MC1 of the domino is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini game as the advance notice has succeeded.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 329 (n), an iron plate image TP is displayed. This iron plate image TP is a notice display to notify that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high advance notice.

  FIG. 330 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 330 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 326 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (a2), “reach when caught” is displayed, and it is shown that a chasing effect is started, which has a mission of getting Echigoya captured by the lady. There is. When chase effect is started, sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 330 (a1) (main display) Is displayed. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (a3), a state is shown in which the lord has reduced the distance to Echigoya. On the other hand, in the subwindow WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (a4), it is shown that the lord has caught Echigoya and the mission has been achieved. Thereby, it is notified that it will be reach. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that preparation for the reach occurrence is in progress. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that the reach as the advance notice is generated by stocking the advance notice corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (a5), the chase effect is finished, and the main display displayed in the subwindow WP3 is again displayed on the entire display screen, and then the "decoration 4" is reached The situation is shown. In this presentation example, it is shown that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase presentation. When the main display is displayed on the full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or switched. Further, when the main display is full screen display, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  FIGS. 330 (b1) to 330 (b2) show another example of effect related to the display of the sub-window during execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 330 (a1) to 330 (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 330 (b1). In the upper left portion of the display screen, a third preparing image RDY3 is displayed. In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 330 (b1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits light in red in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (b2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 330 (b1) (main display) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chase effect) is performed. Although the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions not overlapping in this example, the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the subwindow WP3. It may be made to overlap.

  FIGS. 330 (c1) to (c2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 330 (b1) to (b2). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 330 (c1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 330 (b1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (c2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 330 (c1) (main display) Is displayed. In this example, the third preparing image RDY3 of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the sub window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub window WP3, and the first in-provision image RDY1 displayed in the position displayed so far is erased.

  FIG. 330 (d1) to FIG. 330 (d2) show the display mode of the image in preparation when the background display is displayed inclined. In addition, since the example of an effect shown to FIG. 330 (d1) is the same as the example of an effect shown to FIG. 328 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 330 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3⁄4 and shake vision effect is performed in which the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display.

  FIG. 331 is a view showing in stages an example of step-up notice effects applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 331 (a1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 326 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a3), a state where a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take strikes in the bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a4), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a5), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a6), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  FIGS. 331 (b1) to (b8) illustrate another example of effect of the step-up notice. In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 331 (b1) to FIG. 331 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 331 (a1) to (a2), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB is lifted from below the first step-up display unit SUA to lift the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is displayed in the same way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second step of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. , A mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this presentation example, the mission is more likely to be successful if the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than on the mini game played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case where the mini game is successful in the second step up display unit SUB than when the mini game is successful in the first step up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b4), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, in the mini game display area, a message of "CUP IN" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is performed. That is, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b5), a state is shown in which the character of the lord put on and the golf ball moves toward the cup.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . It should be noted that the image under preparation RDY has a red background color and is notified that the jackpot reliability is high.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 331 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, although the bowling chance game and the golf game have been described as being successful, for example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins did not fall down is displayed to notify of a mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a message indicating that the player did not cup in may be displayed to notify of a mission failure. Also, in this example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but another character may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appeared It may indicate that the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case.

  FIG. 332 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. In addition, since the effect shown to FIG. 332 (a1) is the same as the effect shown to FIG. 331 (a1), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from the lower side of the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted and displayed is shown. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this presentation example, it is shown that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, something in the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. The explanation display may be deleted after the display of the first step-up display unit SUA starts, or the display of the first step-up display unit SUA may be started after the explanation display is deleted. The explanation display may be erased at the timing when the one-step up display unit SUA starts display. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 332 (a3) to FIG. 332 (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIG. 332 (a3) to FIG. 332 (a5) are the effects shown in FIG. 331 (a3) to FIG. 33 (a5) and the instruction display is not performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The same is true except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed, so the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (a6), the situation where the mission is achieved is continuously shown.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the change icon h0 remain non-display.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (a8), it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is redisplayed in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice and is redisplayed. Alternatively, the in-preparation image RDY may be displayed before the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes and is redisplayed, and a mini game, timer advance notice effect, or the like may be made.

  FIGS. 332 (b1) to (b3) show other display modes of the step-up notice effect. Although the effect shown in FIG. 332 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 332 (a1), it differs in that four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 332 (b2), the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted from below the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted and displayed is shown. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the fluctuation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed despite the movement of the hold icon h11 to the upper side of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, it overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. Is shown. That is, it can be said that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain display (pending icon h11) is not moved is shown even if the UI unit UI3 is moved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L of FIG. 332 (b3), it is shown that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 333 is a view showing in a step-by-step manner another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 333 (a) is not displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 333 (a) is a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (a), a state of transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 333 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 333 (b) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (c), it is shown that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 333 (d) to (f), the UI unit UI3 performs a frame out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is not framed out with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 333 (f).

  In FIG. 333 (g), it is shown that the sword strike has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (i) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (j), a state is shown in which a character like a tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (k), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 333 (l), the in-preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer preview effect is started Be done. Note that the in-provision image RDY has a green background color and is a default display mode. Further, FIG. 333 (l) shows that the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and is framed out. At this time, the image under preparation RDY is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 333 (m), at least one of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed until the frame out is completed. It is considered that the department is difficult to see.

  FIG. 334 is a view showing the steps of another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 334 (a1), one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, so one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of default. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and a first preparation-in-provision image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 334 (a1). In the first preparation image RDY1, the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 334 (a1) is set as a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a1), a state of transition to super reach (sword reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect indication to transition to the super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest 224E is elevated and rotated, and the central lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L Overlap on the front side of the Therefore, it is considered to be difficult to view the change icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) being overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest 224E also overlaps with part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is reported that the family crest 224E moves up and rotates to shift to the super reach. In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 334 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 334 (a2) shows that the family crest 224E has returned to its initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a3), it is shown that an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI unit FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 334 (a4) to (a6), the UI unit UI3 performs a frame out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first preparation image RDY1 are not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 334 (a6), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed with the display position lowered. As for the first preparing image RDY 1, the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  FIG. 334 (a7) shows that the sword strike has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a8), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is uplifted and displayed so as to lift the fluctuation icon h0. That is, in this presentation example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the change icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the change icon h0 is moved. Can. Further, the first preparation image RDY1 is displayed overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparation image RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be moved up, and the first preparation image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a9) shows that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, a message of "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first preparing image RDY 1 and is considered to be more difficult to view than in the non-overlapped state. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a10), it is shown that the character of the tombstone throws a bowling ball and travels toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a11), it is shown that the bowling ball collides with the pins, all ten pins fall and strike, and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started Is notified. That is, when a new in-progress image is displayed when a certain number of in-provision images are displayed in a certain area, the new in-progress image is displayed in another area. Can. The third in-provision image RDY3 has a green background color, which is a default display mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 334 (a12) to FIG. (A13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame.

  Fig. 334 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. FIG. 334 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 334 (a3). Moreover, since the effects shown in FIG. 330 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 334 (a4), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 334 (b2), it is shown that the sword strike is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this presentation example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the fluctuation icon h0 is placed is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered. That is, it is shown that even when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 335 is a view showing in stages an example of the pseudo-simulation effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 335 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the in-provision image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 335 (a1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 335 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, “decoration 6” in the left symbol and “decoration 7” in the right symbol. It is shown that the display is stopped. In addition, the middle symbol is in the display of variation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a3), the variation speed of the middle symbol is low, and it is shown that the pseudo-connected symbol composed of the pattern of Tonosama scrolls in from above the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a4), a state is shown in which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a5), a pseudo run symbol stop animation for producing whether or not to start a pseudo run is started. When the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variation icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI unit FO animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is started, or the pseudo run symbol The UI unit FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this example of rendering, the UI unit UI3 is shown as non-displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo rendering rendition or when pseudo rendering is established. When the pseudo run symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo run symbol expands in the lateral direction as shown in FIG. 335 (a5) to FIG. (A7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a6), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (a7), the pseudo run symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo run pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of the dummy run pattern is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. In addition, the pseudo run pattern is overlapped also with stage name indicator ST1 which is indicated in 2nd decoration symbol display device 208M, acceptance frequency indication 850 and stock button picture 852, furthermore, 3rd decoration symbol display device It is also overlapped with the character of the lady displayed on 208N and the second number of reservations display. Also, at this time, the family crest 224E starts to rise, and overlaps a part of the pseudo-series symbols.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (a8), the family crest 224E rotates, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Don", and it is informed that the pseudo-link will be performed.

  FIG. 335 (a9) shows that the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends and the pseudo run symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and that the UI unit UI3 performs frame-in by frame in animation (UI unit FI animation). It is done. Note that the UI unit FI animation may be started after the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the UI unit FI animation may be started before the pseudo run symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo run symbol stop The UI unit FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. In addition, as for the decorative design, it is temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation with the combination of the decorative design of “decoration 6-pseudo consecutive design-decoration 7”, after that, fluctuation indication of the decoration design of the second time by the pseudo ream is started Ru.

  FIGS. 335 (b 1) to (b 3) show an example of display before and after the stage change effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. In addition, since the effect shown in FIG. 335 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 335 (a1), the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 335 (b2), the stage effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N perform dark display respectively, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. It is shown that the approximate center glows and the light rays extend from there in the left and right direction. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this rendering example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. Further, in this example of rendering, it is also shown that the image RDY being prepared is not displayed at the time of dark display by the stage rendering. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may be ended, and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIG. 335 (b3) shows that the stage change effect has ended. In this effect example, after the completion of the stephen effect, the same display as that before the start of the stephen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it is a false stephen effect that neither mode transition nor stage change is performed.

  FIG. 336 is a diagram showing by way of example an example of button preview effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (a), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 336 (a), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, although the fluctuation icon h0 is a display mode of red and is a display mode of the notice of the fluctuation notice, the hold icon h11 is a display mode of a default. In addition, a tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 336 (a) is not displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 336 (a) is in a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (a), it is shown that the sword strike is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen of. Thereby, it may be able to easily recognize that it is a reach state in "decoration 4". In this rendering example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during execution of a sword strike.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the sword reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (b), the united animation is started, and a pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, Are moving. Note that while the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 has not been received yet.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of the translucent button images 136q is close and the merging is completed is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q approaches, at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q is overlapped by the effect EF6, and this is more than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136 q is difficult to view. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, FIG. 336 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. Note that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is framed out, or the effect is performed at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 336 (d), the combined animation is successful, the deca-button image 136aL is materialized and the button advance notice is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed and the operation acceptance state is It is shown that it was started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed at least during a period in which a button advance notice effect by the button image 136a (decay button image 136aL) is being performed.

  FIG. 337 is a diagram showing in stages an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 337 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 337 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 337 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and a panda character The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (a1), the first special view display device 212 displays stop with the lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L causes the loss of “deterior 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. The stop display is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols. Also, the special figure 1 fourth pattern 284a1 is also lit in the display mode of losing. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 335 (a1) is in the advance notice display mode displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 328 (a), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 337 (a2), the situation during stop display of the symbol is continuously shown. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 337 (a3) displays the UI wipe display portion WP4 covering the entire UI portion UI3. The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle is framed in from the left side of the UI wipe display WP4 and as shown in FIG. 337 (a3) to FIG. . That is, in this effect example, in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the advance notice display mode to the default display mode, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed, and effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. There are cases where it is possible to naturally change the display mode in the UI unit UI3. Note that, for example, when returning to the original display due to a super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered by the wipe display unit, and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 337 (a6), it is shown that the effect by the character of the lady in the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is finished, and the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is erased. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that has been h0 and the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, a display of "Tomonashi is a general Yatsushiro" is performed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In the example of the effect, the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may not be performed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the display of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is performed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the displaying of the preparing image RDY is performed. The game may be ended and a mini game or timer announcement effect may be started.

  FIG. 337 (b1) to FIG. (B4) show an example of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 337 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 337 (b1), since one variation display of the special view 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in gold and is the display mode of the fluctuation advance notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. The family crest 224E also emits light in gold in accordance with the display color of the fluctuation icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is disposed on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 337 (b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 337 (b1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 337 (b1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies. And a general military item 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 337 (b2) to (b4), in the tutorial display section TT1, a character of the swordsman scrolls in from below and moves the line of sight continuously from the top of the head to the foot It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled by. Also, as shown in FIG. 337 (b4), after the foot of the sword character is displayed, the sword character is scrolled in such a manner that the line of sight moves continuously from the foot to the top of the head. That is, the continuous scroll display between the top and the foot of the sword character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, an example of displaying the entire character by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling on the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

  In this effect example, for example, in a state in which the explanation display is not resumed or in a state in which only the hold icon is hidden (a state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display is performed using a certain portion of the UI unit UI3. It can be said that an example to do is shown.

  FIG. 338 is a diagram showing in stages the other example of the effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 338 can be applied can be divided into, for example, the first special figure starting port and the second special figure starting port per one starting port, and the symbol in the normal gaming state There is a so-called MAX8 machine (sometimes referred to as an eight-in-one machine) that can hold eight variable displays. Here, the MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 338 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is disposed in the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center It is displayed in an aspect, and on the left side of the variation icon h0, a reserve icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement and four pedestals are formed in a staggered arrangement so that eight reserve icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 338 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2 are held, so seven holding icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the holding icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 338 (a1), “Panda is a master of the temple” is displayed, and the explanation display line is displayed. It is In addition, in this example of an effect, a decoration symbol moves above the 2nd decoration symbol display 208M, and is displayed by reduction. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 338 (a1) is a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 338 (a1), "jotown" is displayed, and it is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, an acceptance number display 850 and a stock button image 852 are also displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (a1), four special figures 1 are reserved and it is reported that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  Further, a family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an eight generation character 224Fa which is one of the effect movable bodies and a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In FIG. 338 (a2), it is shown that the game ball has won a prize in the second special view starting opening and the number of reservations of special views 1 and 2 has reached eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to 7th hold icon h7 and the fluctuation icon h0 which are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyelid that imitates the face of the eyelid. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "pong" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 and the effect example in which the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are simultaneously changed are shown when the hold is full. In this presentation example, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon in which the display mode of the eyebrows is displayed may be notified.

  FIG. 338 (b1) shows that a sword strike is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 338 (b1), the second holding number display is displayed, and according to the second holding number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 338 (b1) Four are reserved, and it is notified that three special figures 2 are reserved.

  In FIG. 338 (b2), it is shown that the game ball has won in the second special view starting opening and the number of reservations of special views 1 and 2 has reached eight in total. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special views 1 are suspended and four special views 2 are suspended, and the speaker 120 Then, a voice "pong" is output to notify that the hold is full.

  FIG. 338 (b3) shows that the game is lost in the super reach, and the presentation of the sword strike is finished and the display of the castle town stage is returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. In addition, since the display is full during execution of the sword strike, the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. In this rendering example, when the display is full while the UI unit UI3 is hidden due to the super reach, when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed. It is shown about the example of presentation which changes a display mode.

  FIGS. 338 (c1) to (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIGS. 338 (b1) to (b3). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 338 (c1) to the same figure (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 338 (b1) to the same figure (b2), the description will be omitted.

  FIG. 338 (c3) shows a state in which the super reach has become a loss, and the production of the sword reach has ended and the display of the castle town stage has returned. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the reach by the sword is finished and the stage is returned to the castle town stage, a combination of the decorative symbols of the "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shaken. Display of temporary stop by change is performed. Also, in this example of rendering, the game was full during execution of the Swordsman reach effect, but the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 and the suspension icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full suspension is achieved. The letter "MAX" indicating that the change is made is displayed at the top of the variation icon h0. Thereafter, the symbol is fixedly displayed in a state where the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 does not change.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 338 (c 4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the display mode of the eyebrows. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move onto the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 338 (c4), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and an explanatory display is performed.

  FIG. 339 is a view showing in stages the other example of the effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 339 (a1) to (a3) and 339 (b1) to (b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a reserved icon display area, a tutorial display area TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is displayed integrally with the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, also in this demonstration example, when it becomes super reach, the UI unit is configured to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, display is performed without frame out. You may leave it alone. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Further, in this presentation example, the image in preparation can be displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 339 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 339 (a1), a reserved icon display area is formed at the center. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and variation icons are displayed in a mode of being placed on a frame configured by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 339 (a1), since two variable displays of the special view 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variation icon h0 and the two suspension icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is disposed on the left side of the hold icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 339 (a1), "Preliminary icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Jojo town stage" is displayed, It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Toku 1 and Toku 2 is also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224F and a general role item 224Fb is arranged.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 339 (a2) shows a state where the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is switched to the first preparation image RDY1. The first preparation image RDY1 has a green background color and is a default display mode.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 339 (a3) shows that the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth preparation image RDY4. The fourth preparation image RDY 4 has a green background color and is a default display mode. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the image under preparation is displayed in each of the plurality of explanatory display parts.

  FIGS. 339 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams showing another example of effect following FIG. 339 (a1). Since the effect shown in FIG. 339 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 339 (a2), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 339 (b2), while continuing to display the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed on the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2. It is shown that the display is at a position shifted upward more than that. That is, it is shown that the image in preparation overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode in the tutorial display unit TT4.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 339 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT3 as a third tutorial display unit (explanation display unit) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the eyelid character GY1. ing. The whistle character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or speech effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like are performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 339 (c1), in response to the speech display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech display of “here” is made on the balloon part TT3, and the conversation announcement continues. Here, the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative pattern, but the brow character GY1 and the blowout portion TT3 may overlap with the first decorative pattern. In addition, the brow character GY1 and the blowout part TT3 may be arranged at a position not overlapping the first decorative pattern. Also, the spider character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the spider character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The brow character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of the princess of the little princess and the character GY1 of the beard may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 becomes non-display may be the timing after the crow character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the crow character GY1 is displayed It is also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased may be the same timing as the timing at which the decoy character GY1 is displayed. Also, in this case, it may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or may be configured to be different depending on the case. Also, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (c2), it is shown that the family crest 224E ascends from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, after moving, the family crest 224E completely covers the holding display frame FL1 and moves a part of the first holding icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one part of the balloon part TT2. It covers each part.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, extended animation (extended animation) of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, and the reserved display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and a family crest item 224E. It is shown that it has appeared above than. That is, it can be said that a portion where the pending display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest 224E appears. Further, although the suspension display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps with the blowout part TT2 and overlaps with the blowout part TT2, it does not overlap with the blowout part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this example of presentation, there may be cases where the speech display preview (the blowout part TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the holding display frame FL1 is expanded. Thus, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expansion display mode. In this example of presentation, although the figure of reservation display frame FL1 before expansion and reservation display frame FL1 after expansion is expressed, that by which expansion display frame FL1 expands in a step-by-step manner is included in extended animation.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 339 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the character NJ1 of the ninja appears in the upper part of the holding display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where the part c is not overlapped with the family crest 224E.

  FIG. 339 (c5) shows that the family crest 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the part of the ninja character NJ1 which is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and is easy to view. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, FIG. 339 (c6) shows that the family crest 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1, and the display of the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display area TT1 explodes is performed. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to have an expectation that the tutorial display section TT1 performs preliminary display and the reliability to the big hit may become high.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 339 (c7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and it is informed that the corresponding mini game or timer announcement effect is started . The image under preparation RDY has a green background color and is considered to be the default display mode. In this effect, in place of the image RDY being prepared, the timer advance notice may be displayed and the timer advance notice may be started, the mini game may be started, or the advance notice may be displayed. .

  FIG. 340 is a diagram showing an example of the extension effect of the hold display frame in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 340 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this effect example, a reserved icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, which respectively constitute a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a1), four pending icons are accommodated in each frame in the pending icon display area, and the second one of the first pending icon h11 to the fourth pending icon h14 is displayed. The hold icon h12 is a display mode (for example, a display mode lit in blue) of the prefetch notice, and the other hold icons are set as the default display mode. Further, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and during the symbol variation display, the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area. Here, the area where the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is disposed on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT7 displays the image RDY being prepared. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper part of the display screen. In this example of presentation, none of the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second holding number display of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also considered to be the background display of Ken-Age reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general officer item 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is done. At the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a1), the family crest 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 340 (a2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. The enlargement display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually enlarged. At the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a2), the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is stored, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. That is, in this presentation example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded mode. Further, in the example of the effect, the tutorial display unit TT7 is out of the display screen due to the enlarged display of the holding display frame, but the image under preparation RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display unit TT7 is separated and displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen. At this time, the image under preparation RDY may overlap a part of the holding display frame and the holding icon. In the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 340 (a3), the emission color of the household object 224E emitting blue changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is predicted to change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 340 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the second hold icon h12 displayed in an enlarged manner is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation to the jackpot for the symbol variation display required for the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 340 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding icon display area is reduced and the display mode is returned to the default. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed, for example, by an animation display which is gradually reduced. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this manner, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this presentation example, the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears due to the reduced display of the reserved icon display area is displayed in such a manner that the image RDY being prepared is accommodated.

  FIGS. 340 (b1) to (b2) show another form of the effect example shown in FIGS. 340 (a1) to (a5). In addition, since the effects shown in FIG. 340 (b1) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 340 (a1), the description will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 340 (b2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 340 (a2) is shown. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 340 (b2), the subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. Display (main display) is displayed. Although the UI unit UI2 is not displayed in the display in the sub-window WP3, it may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. As described above, in this rendering example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain rendering is performed.

  Subsequently, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 341 to 343. Here, FIG. 341 is a view showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 342 is a view showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 343 is a view showing a display example of the ball removal error display. FIG. In addition, although the display position of the warning display of the ball extraction error (hereinafter referred to as “ball extraction error display”) is taken as a fixed place, it can be appropriately set which position is used as the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including variations of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. The ball removal error display is to be erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated to cancel the bottom plate full tank condition and the ball removal error is removed. Further, in the example of effect shown below, although the display example of the ball removal error display is shown, it is also applicable to, for example, a door opening error or the like that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, when the ball removal error display is performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 341 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 310 (c) to (d) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (a1), a state is shown in which an extraction error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the tutorial display section TT1 which has been closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, the message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to urge the player to produce the game balls stored in the lower tray and cancel the lower tray full-tank state.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (a2), a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 in which the shutter image is released and the image RDY is displayed. It is shown that it is displayed. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to withdraw the ball when the display of the image under preparation RDY is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image under preparation RDY.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 341 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, display examples of warning displays when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 312 (c1) to (c2). It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (b1), a state is shown in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball pullout error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter The MT4 is in an easy-to-see state. As a result, it may be possible to notice the remaining time display meter MT4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 341 (c1) to FIG. 34 (c2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 313 (b4) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (c1), the ball pullout error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the sword sword of the enemy role, but overlaps with the translucent button image 136q related to the united animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, it is also possible for the ball removal error display ERR1 to overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the merging animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341 (c2), when the translucent button image 139q approaches, a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the united animation by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is finished by simultaneously viewing the removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 341 (d1) to FIG. 341 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 320 (f) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 341 (d2), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display section TT1 and it is informed that the second timer preview effect is started, but the in-provision image RDY is redisplayed. Sometimes, the first preparing image RDY is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped by a part of the ball extraction error display ERR1 which has not been overlapped in the tutorial display part TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the magnified image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball removal display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY in preparation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to open the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball extraction error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 341 (e1) to (e2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 321 (a5) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (e1), a part of the unballoon error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the sword character is drawn, but the character of the maroon is drawn Areas do not overlap.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 341 (e2), as a result of the player performing a long press operation of the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is expanded, and when A part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped with the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman character of the enemy role by looking at the display without the ball. In addition, it may be possible to notice an error indication ERR1 of the open ball error by looking at the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman of the enemy character. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. At the same time, give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the character between the character of the lord and the character of the sword sword of the enemy is finished by simultaneously viewing the merits of the error ERR1 of the ball and the character of the sword sword of the character of the enemy. There are times when you can.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 341 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 323 (e) to (f) It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (f1), a state is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the second ready image RDY2. On the other hand, it does not overlap with the display area where the character "Go" is displayed (the display area where the first preparing image RDY was displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 341 (f2), the character “Go” is erased together with the display area, and the second ready image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display TT1 An image movement animation is being performed during preparation to move up. In addition, the notice effect (precedence start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 is started, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 is shown. It is done. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. In addition, it is not necessary for the ball extraction error display ERR1 to overlap the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second ready image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it is possible to give an opportunity to pull out the ball when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is finished by simultaneously looking at the ball removing error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. There is a case.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 342 (a1) to FIG. 342 (a2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 326 (a3) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (a1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (a2), the first under preparation image RDY1 is added to the upper right portion of the image RDY1 under preparation in the tutorial display section TT1 and displayed. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the black character GII, and the tiny baby character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the unballooning error display ERR1 is overlapped for a part of the plurality of images in preparation. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of in-provision images (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by viewing a plurality of images being prepared. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image under preparation is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images being prepared.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 342 (b1) to FIG. 342 (b2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 326 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (b1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so as to be adjacent to the indigo character GII. That is, while the whale character GII appears at a position corresponding to the whale character GII, the image under preparation that appears along with the whale character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the whale character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 342 (a2), since the image under preparation (Chibi Princess character CHM) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, the error display ERR1 for the ball extraction is any display It is not overlapped even against.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 342 (c1) to FIG. 342 (c2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 328 (b) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 328 (b), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed substantially at the center of the left advance notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 328 (e), the mini game is executed based on the image RDY in preparation displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left advance notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the chance up cut-in image WCI. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to drop the ball when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 342 (d1) to FIG. 342 (d2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 330 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (d1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 330 (b1), it is shown that the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (d2), the chase effect described above is started. When chase effect is started, sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and display related to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 342 (d2) (main display) Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two ready images RDY1 and RDY3 in the sub window WP3, only the first ready image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed in the sub window WP3 and the third ready image RDY3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 342 (e1) to FIG. 342 (e2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 330 (d1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (e1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 330 (d1), it is shown that the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3⁄4, and the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. It is shown that it is being done. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is not inclined along with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not change the display position even when the shake vision effect is performed, and does not tilt, and the display state is maintained. At this time, when the background image is inclined, the margin is black. Then, when a part of the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps with the margin, for example, when the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin and a part is It may be difficult to view.

  Examples of effects shown in FIG. 342 (f1) to FIG. (F2) show, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 331 (a1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (f1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 331 (a1), it is shown that the ball out error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. . At this time, the ball out error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 342 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted from the lower side of the UI unit UI3, and a state in which the UI unit UI3 is lifted up is shown. It is done. At this time, the at-a-glance error display ERR1 at least partially overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the UI unit UI3 rising. That is, as the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball out error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice occurrence of effects in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by seeing that the UI unit UI3 lifts. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect in the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 343 (a1) to FIG. 34 (a2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball extraction error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 333 (d) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 333 (d), a state in which a part of the ball out error display ERR1 is overlapped on the upper part of the tutorial display unit TT1 is It is shown. That is, in this example of rendering, it is shown that the unballooning error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3 before the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this presentation example, it is shown that the overlap state of the unballoon error display ERR1 with the UI unit UI3 is canceled while the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward by the UI unit FO animation.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 343 (b1) to FIG. 34 (b2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 337 (a3) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 337 (a3), a state in which a part of the unballoon error display ERR1 overlaps the UI wipe display WP4 is It is shown. At this time, the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI wipe display unit WP4 does not overlap with the character of the lady.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lady on the bike has moved to the right end portion of the UI wipe display portion WP4. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character on the motorcycle with the UI wipe display WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the effect display in the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 is finished by simultaneously viewing the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI wipe display unit WP3.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 343 (c1) to FIG. 34 (c2) shows, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball pulling error occurs in the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (b1) to FIG. It is done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part is over the decorative symbol. It is shown how to wrap. In addition, it does not overlap to other displays.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 343 (c2), a state in which the holding icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. At this time, the holding icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared together with the holding icon enlarged and displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 343 (c2), the subwindow WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. Display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the subwindow WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged display icon display area. At this time, a part of the extraction error display ERR1 overlaps the subwindow WP3 and another part overlaps the reserved icon display area. The pop-up error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, it may be possible to notice a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged and displayed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to enjoy the effect display being performed there by removing the ball quickly to erase the ball removal error display ERR1. Also, at the same time as watching the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the ball withdrawal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area, give a trigger to open the ball when the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area is finished. There are times when you can.

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 343 (d1) to FIG. 34 (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 343 (d1), the display of “Please remove the ball” is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 343 (d2) has the same mode as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 343 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be considered to be difficult to view.

  343 (d3) is an error display ERR1 of the ball dropping error, which is another display mode of the error message ERR1 of the ball dropping shown in FIG. 343 (d2), and the white background display "Please remove the ball" is displayed. It is considered as the aspect represented by.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described, but the decorative symbol display device It goes without saying that the invention is applicable even to a pachinko machine 100 provided with only one. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  As mentioned above, although the example applied to the pachinko machine (ball-ball game machine) was explained in detail in the explanation using Drawing 257-Drawing 34, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, medal The present invention is also applicable to a game machine (slot machine) using a game ball (pachinko ball). That is, although the pachinko machine 100 described so far is pachinko (one kind + one kind), other pachinko (eg one kind, two kinds, three kinds, one kind + two kinds etc.) may be used, a slot etc ( Parrots and balls can be used. More specifically, while inserting a medal (gaming medium) and operating the start lever to rotate the reel, internally determining the combination by internal lottery, and operating the stop button to stop the reel If a combination of symbols determined in advance is displayed on the symbol display window according to the internal determination, the combination is established, and if the combination with the payout of medals is established, the prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. The present invention may be a coin-operated game machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a benefit. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are sealed as a sealed ball, the sealed ball is fired to a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the sealed ball is won in a predetermined entry area. , And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area, and the enclosed ball game console may be used cyclically.

  As described above, the present invention is applicable to various types of game consoles, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 344 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 344, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  FIG. 345 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 345) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown in FIG. 345) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being played. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three sheets are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is performed to perform a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of roles has been won or not. It is determined whether to make the player relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. The operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Furthermore, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. At the upper part of the front door 1002, a rendering device 1080 is disposed. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 disposed on the back side of the door member 1063 (shown in FIG. When the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is the front of the slot machine 1000 It has a structure that appears on the It should be noted that even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, consisting of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen can be viewed by the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., as the operation means, the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means or the third operation means And effect buttons 1091 (an example of the second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 345, a display panel 1070 displaying a title or the like of a device can be protruded toward the front side. In addition, a light emitting diode (LED) is incorporated in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 345 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operating means (button) like the transmitting portion 191, and an example of the operating means (for example, It corresponds to one example of the operation means, and also corresponds to one example of the movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091 and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
[First operation means [eg, chance button 136, second chance button 137, transmitting portion 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, etc.],
Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two, fourth display means 208M ′, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is one of the effects of the advance effect (hereinafter referred to as "first effect") [for example, the big hit finalized effect effect],
The first display may be displayed in a certain display area [for example, the notification area HZ, the notification area HZ '] of the display areas in the display means, and
The second display may be displayed in the certain display area, and
The first display is a display representing a number [eg, 99-1 or 99-0, etc.],
When an operation [for example, one-shot single-shot operation, long press operation, etc.] of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display is performed according to the operation. There are cases where there are cases where the number represented is a small number [for example, the number of “1” or “2 or more” decreases according to one operation ”],
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second display in response to the operation. [E.g., in the figures α272 (A3), α272 (B2), α277 (A6), α280 (A7), α287 (A7), α298 (A5), etc.],
Even if the first operation means is operated in the state where the second display is displayed, the display mode of the second display is configured not to change according to the operation [eg Figure α 278 (A3) to Figure (A6), etc.],
In the second display, a plurality of types of display modes [for example, no display, "question mark", "Chance", "continue", "SP", "large behavior", "up", the background color is the first mode ~ 7th mode or gray etc.] is prepared.
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be executed according to the operation [for example, [for example, , A changing effect to the seventh aspect of the logo combination 224F shown in FIG. Effects that change the mode, effects that effect moving means (for example, family crests 224E, etc.) other than the logo character 224F operate, effects that the big hit confirmation warning sound is output from the speaker 120, LED of various lamps Effects to be changed, etc.],
The second display of the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as the “first notice display”) [eg, the “large screen behavior” of the seventh mode] may be displayed in the certain display area Is configured to
The first notice display is a display related to the first effect [eg, a display displayed simultaneously with the start of the first effect, or immediately before the start or immediately after the start].
In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the big hit symbol form is finally determined and displayed [for example, the big hit expectation degree of the "large board behavior" shown in Figure α 271 (b) is “S” or an example shown in FIGS. Α 272 (A3) to (A5) or α 287 to α 288],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to this game stand, for example, when the button is operated in a state where the number display is made in the certain display area, a big hit finalization effect may be started.

  The first preliminary announcement may be displayed outside the certain display area. For example, a notification area HZ 'shown in FIG. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed out of the certain display area, or may be displayed at the center of the screen, or may be displayed on a different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, It may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.).

Also,
"The first operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is one of the notice effects (hereinafter referred to as the “first effect”), and the big hit final notice effect (the seventh embodiment of the logo feature 224) )
The first display may be displayed in a display area of the display areas of the display means.
The second display may be displayed in the certain display area, and
The first display is a display representing a number,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the number represented by the first display may be small according to the operation. Yes,
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second display in response to the operation. Yes,
The display mode of the second display is configured not to change according to the operation even if the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the second display is displayed.
The second display is a display provided with a plurality of display modes,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be executed in response to the operation,
The second display of the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area.
In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in a final display,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, in the "symbol variation display in which the first effect has been performed, the jackpot symbol aspect is finally displayed in a final display," means that the "first notice display is displayed. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol form is finally configured to be displayed in a definite manner.

  Further, even if the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed, the first effect is not performed in response to the operation. May be Alternatively, even if the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed, the first effect may not be executed according to the operation. That is, it may be configured to be never executed.

  In addition, "the display mode of the second display is not changed according to the operation," means "the second display is switched to another display according to the operation, or the The second display may be configured not to be hidden or not in response to the operation.

  Here, the first display may be always displayed in the certain display area, or when the first display is displayed, the first display may be limited to the certain display area. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the certain display area, or when the second display is displayed, the second display may be displayed only in the certain display area.

  The first display may be a display representing a number including 0, or may be a display representing a number excluding 0. For example, the number may be represented by a number, the number may be represented by the number of displayed figures or icons, the number may be represented by a color or a pattern, or the number may be represented by a meter or a gauge.

  The first operation means may be a button type, a lever type, a rotating type, or a rolling type. And may be of the push-in type. The operation of the first operation means may be a single-shot operation, or may be an operation of performing a single-shot operation a plurality of times, or a continuous operation (for example, a continuous hit operation, a long press operation, a predetermined It may be continuous operation for more than time.

  In the case where the number represented by the first display is a small number, the number corresponding to the number “1” decreases, or the number corresponding to the number “2” or more (for example, “5” or “10 "" May be reduced. In addition, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the number represented by the first display is necessarily reduced according to the operation. However, the number may not be small.

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display is always switched to the second display in response to the operation. Although it is good, it may not be switched.

  The plurality of types of display modes in the second display are concepts including display contents. Therefore, “the second display is a display in which a plurality of types of display contents are prepared, and the second display of the first display contents is the first notice display, and the second display of the ○ display contents The second display may be the notice display of the circle O. ”Further, this display mode also includes an aspect in which nothing is displayed. Furthermore, this display mode is not limited to the display mode by characters, and may be a display mode by icons or figures, or may be a display mode by colors or patterns.

  The second display may be a notice display regarding a big hit, and more specifically, may be a display of a pre-reading notice, or may be a big hit by a symbol variation display being performed when displayed. It may be a display of a normal notice that gives notice of the situation. Further, the second display may be a notice display regarding a certain effect. That is, it may be a display for informing that a certain effect may be performed.

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be necessarily executed according to the operation. It may not be executed.

  The first advance notice may be displayed on the certain display area without fail or may not be displayed.

  The display related to the first effect is a display indicating the first effect, the display reminding the first effect, or the first effect It may be a display that suggests In addition, even if there is no relation by such display itself, the case where there is a relation at display start timing is included. For example, the first preliminary display may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the first effect, or may be displayed immediately before or immediately after the start of the first effect. Moreover, the case where there is relevance in the display mode is also included. For example, the first preliminary announcement may be displayed in the same manner as the aspect (for example, the seventh aspect) of the first effect. In addition, the first notice display may be a notice display having the lowest appearance frequency among the plurality of display modes, or a notice display having the highest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot. It is also good. Alternatively, the first preview display may be a preview display for previewing a jackpot decision.

  In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the big hit symbol form is finally definitely displayed. However, for example, it may be lost with the probability of 1/65536.

  Further, when the operation of the first operation means is not performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the number represented by the first display may not be a small number. The first display may be configured not to be switched to the second display when the first operation means is not operated while the first display is displayed. . The display mode of the second display may be configured not to change when the first operation means is not operated in the state where the second display is displayed. The first effect may be configured not to be executed unless the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the number represented by the first display is a small number, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the first display is displayed. When the first display is switched to the second display, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the first display is displayed. When the first effect is executed, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the first display is displayed.

Also,
“A third display may be displayed in a display area [for example, a central area of the display screen] other than the certain display area of the display areas in the display means, and
The third display is a display prompting the operation of the first operation means [for example, a combination of button images 136a, 136a ′, 136a ′ ′, arrow display 136b, remaining period meter display 136c, or any one Or two displays],
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may be started in response to the operation.
The fourth display is one of the preliminary display [for example, strong cut-in CIs, weak cut-in CIw, a cut-in display CIr indicated as an iron plate, an indication "Have ..." 爺 s conversation image CI2, "α で す ぞ ぞ 熱 い「 期待 期待 期待 期待 期待 期待 熱 い 示 す 示 す 示 す 示 す ち ゃ ん ち ゃ ん ち ゃ ん ち ゃ んIt is a conversation image CI 4 of the princess of “Takes ...”, a conversation image CI 4 of the princess “Toen” shown in FIG.
The fourth display is a display that is not a big hit finalization display [for example, a display displayed in a display area different from the certain display area (an area including a central portion in the vertical direction of the display screen)]
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, execution of the first effect and the first effect are performed according to the operation. It is configured that both of the display of the fourth display may be started [eg, figure α 272 (C4), figure α 308 (D3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  As this game stand, for example, there is a game stand in which both a big hit finalization effect and a weak effect in other button effects are started by one button operation.

  Here, the another display area may or may not partially overlap with the certain display area. Further, the other display area may be the entire area of the display area of the display means, or may be a partial area. Furthermore, the other display area may be an area larger than the certain display area, may be a narrow area, or may be an area of the same size. Also, the certain display area may be a part of the other display area, and conversely, the another display area may be a part of the certain display area. Moreover, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may not be started depending on the operation, but it is always started. It may be configured as follows.

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may not be started according to the operation, but it is always started It may be configured. Further, the fourth display may be displayed even when the operation of the first operation means is not performed in a state where the third display is displayed, and the display is always displayed. May be Or, conversely, the fourth display may be displayed only when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed. , May be displayed.

  The fourth display may be a notice display regarding a big hit, and more specifically, may be a display of a pre-reading notice, or may be a big hit by a symbol variation display being performed when displayed. It may be a display of a normal notice that gives notice of the situation. Further, the fourth display may be a notice display regarding a certain effect. That is, it may be a display for informing that a certain effect may be performed. Further, the fourth display may be a response display to the operation of the first operation means, or the response display may be included. Further, the fourth display may be a preliminary notice or a preliminary notice with a high degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit as compared to the second display.

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, execution of the first effect and the first effect are performed according to the operation. Both of the display of the fourth display may not be started, or may be configured to be always started. Further, the start timing of the execution of the first effect and the start timing of the fourth display may be the same, or the start timing of the execution of the first effect may be earlier. The start timing of the fourth display may be earlier. That is, it is sufficient if there is a period in which both the execution of the first effect and the display of the fourth display are performed.

  The display of the fourth display may not be started if the operation of the first operation means is not performed in the state where the third display is displayed. If the operation of the first operation means is not performed in the state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the execution of the first effect and the fourth display It may be configured not to start both of the displays.

  Furthermore, when the display of the fourth display is started, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the third display is displayed. When both the execution of the first effect and the display of the fourth display are started, the first display is performed in a state in which both the display of the first display and the display of the third display are displayed. The operation of the operation means is always performed.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of effects is one other effect (hereinafter referred to as“ second effect ”) different from the first effect of the advance effects (for example, a pseudo-series effect, Super reach production etc.],
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fifth display may be started in response to the operation.
The fifth display is a display of a conversation image CI 2 of “I saw the swordsman” shown in, for example, FIG. Α 308 (C5) etc., other than the fourth display, one of the notice displays , A display of the “continuation” conversation image CI 2 shown in FIG. Α 308 (C 4), a pseudo continuous symbol of continuation shown in FIG. Α 308 (F 3), etc.]
The fifth display is a display of a notice about execution of the second effect [for example, a display displayed in a display area different from the certain display area (an area including a central portion in the vertical direction of the display screen)] ,
The second display of the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area.
The second notice display is a notice of a notice related to the execution of the second effect other than the fifth display [for example, a display of “continuation”, a display of “SP”],
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second notice display.
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. It is configured to be able to start the display of the display,
The second advance notice before the display of the fifth display is started by the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed. The display of the display is configured to be able to be started [for example, a combination of the diagram α 272 (B2), the diagram α 308 (B3) and the diagram (C4) or the diagram (C5)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, for example, although the occurrence of a certain effect is foreshadowed by another button effect, it is possible to first know that the certain effect is generated by a certain display other than the big hit finalization display. .

  For example, the fifth display may be a display displayed in a fifth display area, and the fourth display may be a display displayed in a fourth display area. The fifth display area and the fourth display area may be the same display area or different display areas. Further, the fifth display area and the fourth display area are display areas different from the certain display area. Furthermore, the fifth display area, the fourth display area, and the other display area are display areas different from each other. The “different display areas” referred to here may or may not partially overlap. In addition, one display area (the display area of the fifth display area, the fourth display area, the certain display area, or the other display area (hereinafter the same)) is the other Display area (the fifth display area, the fourth display area, the certain display area, or any one of the other display areas (hereinafter the same)). It may be a partial area. Furthermore, one display area may be a wider area, a narrower area, or the same size area as the other display area. In addition, with respect to one display area, the other display area is a display area in different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.) It may be

  Further, by the player performing the operation of the first operation means in a state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. The display of the display may be configured to start.

  In addition, by the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed, the second advance notice before the display of the fifth display is started. The display of the display may be configured to start.

  Here, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fifth display may not be started in response to the operation. It may be configured to be always started. In addition, the fifth display may be displayed even when the operation of the first operation means is not performed in a state where the third display is displayed, and the display may be always displayed. May be Or, conversely, the fifth display may be displayed only when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed. , May be displayed.

  In the fifth display, what kind of effect the second effect is (for example, pseudo-real effect or super reach effect), or the type of the second effect (super reach 1) It may be a notice display displayed in a manner that can identify “one” or “Super reach 2”. In addition, the fifth display may be a preliminary notice display having a higher degree of reliability than the second display, and may be a preliminary notice display having a lower degree of reliability. Furthermore, the fifth display may be a high preliminary display or a low preliminary display with higher reliability than the fourth display.

  In addition, the second preliminary announcement may be displayed outside the certain display area. For example, the second advance notice may be displayed protruding from the certain display area, or may be displayed at the center of the screen, or may be displayed on a different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, It may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.).

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may not be switched to the second notice display, and it is always switched. It may be configured as follows.

  By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. The display of the display may not be started, or may be configured to be always started.

  The second advance notice before the display of the fifth display is started by the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed. The display of the display may not be started, or may be configured to be always started.

  Further, the display of the fifth display may not be started in response to the operation if the operation of the first operation means is not performed in the state where the third display is displayed. . Even if the first display is not switched to the second notice display if the first operation means is not operated while the first display is displayed, Good. If the player does not operate the first operation means in a state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. The display of the display may be configured not to start. If the player does not operate the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the display of the fifth display is started. The display of the display may be configured not to start.

  Furthermore, when the display of the fifth display is started, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the third display is displayed. When the first display is switched to the second preliminary display, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the first display is displayed. In the case where the display of the second notice display is started before the execution of the second effect is started, the first display is displayed by the player in the first display. The operation of the operation means is always performed. In the case where the display of the second notice display is started before the display of the fifth display is started, the first display is displayed by the player in the state where the first display is displayed. The operation of the operation means is always performed.

Also,
[One of the effects of the plurality of types is one other effect (hereinafter referred to as the “third effect”) different from the second effect [for example, the pseudo continuous effect] of the advance effects. [Eg, super reach production],
The second display of the third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third advance notice display") [for example, "SP"] may be displayed in the certain display area. ,
The third preliminary display is a preliminary display on the execution of the third effect,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the third preliminary display.
By the operation of the first operation means being performed by the player, the display of the third advance notice can be started before the execution of the third effect is started,
In a certain state before the execution of the second effect is started when the third effect is performed after the second effect [for example, the state of the diagram α 294 (A5)], the second The display of the third advance notice may be started instead of the advance notice display [e.g., FIG. Α294 (A5),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, for example, a certain display other than a certain display corresponding to the next generation effect is performed.

  Here, the third advance notice may be displayed outside the certain display area. For example, the third advance notice may be displayed protruding from the certain display area, or may be displayed at the center of the screen, or may be displayed on a different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, It may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.).

  The third preliminary announcement may be a preliminary announcement with a higher degree of reliability than the second preliminary announcement. Furthermore, the third preliminary indication may be a preliminary indication that has a lower reliability than the first preliminary indication, or may be a preliminary indication that has the same reliability as the first preliminary indication.

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first display may not be switched to the third notice display, and it is always switched. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the first preliminary display, in some cases, the second While the display may be switched to the preliminary display, the display may be switched to the third preliminary display.

  By performing the operation of the first operation means by the player, the display of the third advance notice may be started before the execution of the third effect is started.

  In a certain state before the execution of the second effect is started in the case where the third effect is performed after the second effect, not the second advance notice but the third advance notice The display may not be started, or may be configured to be always started.

  The certain state may be a state after the start of the symbol variation display in which the execution of the second effect is started. Further, the certain state may be a state before the first stop in the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, or may be a state in which the first stop is performed, or the first stop is the first stop. It may be in a state before the second stop is performed, or may be in a state in which the second stop is performed, or in a state before the second stop is performed and the third stop is performed. May be

  In addition, when the first operation means is not operated in the state where the first display is displayed, the first display is configured not to be switched to the third notice display. May be When the player does not operate the first operation means, the display of the third advance notice is not started before the execution of the third effect is started. It is also good.

  Furthermore, when the first display is switched to the third preliminary display, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the first display is displayed. When the display of the third advance notice display is started before the execution of the third effect is started, the player always operates the first operation means.

Also,
In a state in which both the display of the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] and the display of the third display [for example, the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] are displayed When the operation of the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] is performed, the execution of the first effect [for example, the light emission of the seventh aspect by the logo character 224F] and the fifth according to the operation Of the display of “for example, the display of the conversation image CI2 of“ I saw the swordsman ”” may be started [for example, the sign of “Toen of figure α 308 (D3) Example where the cut-in notice "I saw the swordsman" is displayed in place of the cut-in notice "..."
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state in which both the first display and the third display are displayed, the operation of the first effect is performed according to the operation. Both the execution and the display of the fifth display may not be started, and may be configured to be always started. In addition, both may not be started if the operation of the first operation means is not performed.

  Further, if the first operation means is not operated while both the first display and the third display are displayed, the first effect is displayed according to the operation. It may be configured such that both the execution and the display of the fifth display are not started.

  Furthermore, when both of the execution of the first effect and the display of the fifth display are started, the display of the both of the first display and the third display is displayed. The first operation means is always operated.

Also,
In a state in which both the display of the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] and the display of the third display [for example, the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] are displayed When the first operation means [e.g., the chance button 136] is operated, the display of the second advance notice display [e.g., the "continuation" display in the notification area HZ or "SP" according to the operation] Both the display of the fifth display and the display of the fifth display [for example, the display of the conversation image CI2 of "continuation" shown in FIG. Α 308 (C4), or the display of the conversation image CI2 of "I saw swordsman"" It is configured that it may be started [for example, instead of the cut-in notice of "the sign of ... of a person in figure α 308 (D3), the cut-in notice of" continue "may be displayed. Examples in the broadcast area HZ "continue" is displayed or FIG α272, (B5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, the second notice display is displayed according to the operation. And the display of the fifth display may not both be started, and may be configured to be always started. In addition, both may not be started if the operation of the first operation means is not performed.

  In addition, when the operation of the first operation means is not performed in a state in which both the first display and the third display are displayed, the second advance notice is displayed according to the operation. And the display of the fifth display may not be started.

  Furthermore, when both the display of the second advance notice display and the display of the fifth display are started, in the state in which both the display of the first display and the display of the third display are displayed. The operation of the first operation means is always performed.

Also,
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136], before the execution of the second effect [for example, the pseudo-sequence effect] is started, It is configured to be able to start the display of the four displays [for example, the conversation image CI2 of "the sign of the message is ..." [for example, figure α289 (A10)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, there is a case where the display of the fourth display is not started before the execution of the second effect is started by the player performing the operation of the first operation means. It may also be configured to always start. Even when the player does not operate the first operation means, the display of the fourth display can be started or always started before the execution of the second effect is started. May be configured to Alternatively, the display of the fourth display can be started before the execution of the second effect is started only when the player operates the first operation means, or It may be configured to be always started.

  In addition, when the player does not operate the first operation means, the display of the fourth display is not started before the execution of the second effect is started. May be

  Furthermore, in the case where the display of the fourth display is started before the execution of the second effect is started, the player always operates the first operation means .

Also,
[A certain period in the fluctuation display of a certain decorative symbol [eg, a part of period before the start of the last re-fluctuation (the maximum number of re-fluctuations) in simulated rendition] (including figure α293 (A5) before the imitation The number of types of display modes of the second display which may be displayed in a period or a period including the diagram α 298 (15) in which the “pseudo-2” state is changing again] The display may be displayed in another period after the certain period in the variation display of the decorative symbol [eg, a partial period after the start of the final re-variation (the maximum number of re-variations) in the pseudo-series effect] The number of types of display modes in the second display is configured to be different [for example, “continuation” is displayed in the table shown in FIG. Α 271 (c), in FIG. Α 293 (A 5), and in FIG. In the same figure (A25), "continuation" is not displayed. Configuration P "is displayed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, there are many kinds of display modes of the second display that may be displayed immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, but it becomes smaller at the later stage, or conversely, the decorative symbol Immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the second display, there are few kinds of display modes of the second display that may be displayed, but the number of display modes of the second display increases later.

  Here, for a certain period of time in the variable display of the certain decorative symbol, rather than the number of types of display modes of the second display that may be displayed in a certain period of time in the variable display of the certain decorative symbol. The number of types of display modes of the second display that may be displayed in another later period may be configured to be smaller. That is, as the symbol variation display (variation display of the decoration symbol) of one time progresses, in other words, as the effect progresses, the display mode of the second display to be displayed is narrowed. It may be For example, before the start of the super reach effect, the display of "SP" may be newly displayed by switching from the display of numbers to the notification area HZ, but after the start of the super reach effect, "in the notification area HZ Even if the display of "SP" continues to be displayed, there is no case where the display of "SP" is newly displayed by switching from the display of numbers, and the notification content displayed ("SP") The number of display modes is decreasing.

  Alternatively, before the start of the normal reach effect, the display of the numbers is switched to the notification area HZ so that the display of "SP" is not displayed, and after the start of the normal reach effect, the display of the numbers is switched to the notification area HZ. If the display of "SP" may be newly displayed, the number of displayed notification contents (display modes) is increased by the amount of display of "SP". Moreover, before the start of the pseudo-series effect, the display of the "pseudo 3" is switched from the display of the numbers in the notification area HZ so that the display of the "pseudo 3" is not displayed. If the display of “pseudo 3” is newly displayed in the area HZ by switching from the display of numbers, the number of notification contents (display modes) displayed corresponding to the number of displays of “pseudo 3” Is increasing.

Also,
"The other period is a period after the start of execution of a certain effect [for example, a pseudo-sequence effect (the second effect)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the certain effect may be the second effect or the third effect.

Also,
The display of the third display may not be started before the display of the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] is started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display of the third display may be started after the display of the first display is started.

Also,
[The second operation means [for example, the cross key 181a, the OK button 181b, etc.]
When the operation of the second operation unit is performed in a state where the third display [for example, the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] is displayed, the fourth display is performed according to the operation. It is configured that the display of [for example, weak cut-in CIw] may be started [for example, FIG. Α304 (G3)],
Even when the second operation means is operated in a state where the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] is displayed, the number represented by the first display in accordance with the operation Is configured so as not to be a small number [eg, figure α 304 (G3)],
Even when the operation of the second operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, there is no case where the first display is switched to the first preliminary display in response to the operation. Are configured [eg, figure α 304 (G3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, even if the second operation means is operated in the state where the button effect is being executed, the cut-in notice appears in response to the operation, but the display of the notification area HZ Never change.

  Here, when the operation of the second operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may not be started in response to the operation. It may be configured to be always started. Further, even when the operation of the second operation means is not performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display can be started or can be always started. It may be Alternatively, the display of the fourth display can be started or can be always started only when the operation of the second operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed. It may be done.

  Moreover, even if the operation of the second operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, there is no case where the first display is switched to the second preliminary display in response to the operation. The first display may not be switched to the third preview display in response to the operation.

  The display of the fourth display may not be started if the operation of the second operation means is not performed in the state where the third display is displayed. If the operation of the second operation means is not performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the number represented by the first display may not be a small number. In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be configured not to be switched to the first notice display if the operation of the second operation means is not performed.

  Furthermore, when the display of the fourth display is started, the operation of the second operation means is always performed in the state where the third display is displayed.

Also,
“The first display can be displayed until the display of the swing of the decorative symbol performed immediately before the finalized display of the decorative symbol [eg, figure α 288 (A36), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display may not be displayed until the sway display of the decorative symbol performed immediately before the finalized display of the decorative symbol, or may be displayed without fail.

Also,
"Successful judgment effect to perform notification indicating the judgment result according to the operation of the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] [for example, the final judgment effect accompanied by the operation (Fig. Until immediately before (A68)) is configured to be executable,
The certain success or failure judgment effect is an effect to be performed before the swing display,
When the certain success or failure judgment effect is performed, the display of the first display is configured to end at least after the start of execution of the certain success or failure judgment effect [for example, Fig. Α291 (A63) ],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the first display may end prior to the acceptance judgment effect.

  In addition, in the composition in which the judgment judgment effect may be performed multiple times in the change display of one decorative symbol, the judgment judgment effect of the first one may correspond to a certain judgment judgment work referred to here, Later success or failure judgment effects may correspond to certain success or failure judgment effects. In addition, a certain right or wrong judgment effect referred to here may be, for example, from FIG. Α291 (A66) to immediately before FIG. (A68), or from FIG. Α291 (A66) to FIG. It may be from the diagram α291 (A64) to immediately before the diagram (A68) or from the diagram α291 (A64) to the diagram (A70). Furthermore, the judgment of success or failure may include wipe effect and revival effect. For example, it may be from the point α288 (A31) to the point (A32) to the point (B2) to the point immediately before the point (B8).

  Here, even if the operation of the first operation means is not performed, a notification representing the result of the judgment on the acceptance or rejection may be performed, or conversely, the operation of the first operation means is performed. In any case, the notification indicating the result of the judgment may be performed or may be configured.

  When the certain success or failure judgment effect is performed, the display of the first display is ended after the start of the execution of the introductory effect [for example, diagrams α 291 (A64) to (A65)] of the certain success or failure judgment effect It may be configured to In addition, when the certain pass / fail judgment effect is performed, the display of the first display may be ended before the certain pass / fail judgment effect is started.

Also,
“The second display of the fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth notice display ”) [eg,“ question mark ”,“ Chance ”,“ SP ”, etc.] is displayed in the certain display area Are configured to be
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] is switched to the fourth advance notice display The case is configured to be
It is configured to be able to execute the first reach production [for example, the super reach 1 which is Super Reach 1].
It is configured to be able to execute the second reach production [for example, the sword reach that is Super Reach 2],
The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect has been performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be finally determined display than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed. [Eg, a table shown in FIG. Α 271 (d)],
A notification that suggests a loss in the second reach effect [for example, an animation of FIG. After the shake display of (B3), α300 (A3) or α300 (B3) is made, the wipe effect display is displayed [eg, α283 (A24) to (A26) (A26) Figure α297 (B4) to Figure (B5), Figure α300 (A3) to Figure (A5), Figure α300 (B3) to Figure (B5)],
In the state where the wipe effect display is displayed, the fourth preliminary display is configured to be displayable [for example, FIG. 283 (A26), FIG. 297 (B5), FIG. B5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the fourth display can be displayed even during the lost wipe.

  In addition, the notification which suggests the said loss may be a shake display (a shake display of the combination of the loss of a decoration symbol) of a loss design aspect. In this case, the wipe effect display is an effect display that is started after the shake display of the lost symbol mode is started.

  Further, the notification that suggests the loss may be an animation display (Fig. Α 283 (A23), Fig. Α 300 (A2)) in which the main character loses. In this case, the wipe effect display may be any display that is displayed after the animation display is displayed, and may be an effect display that is started after the start of the swing display of the lost symbol pattern, The effect display may be started simultaneously with the start of the swing display of the lost symbol mode, or may be the effect display that is started before the start of the swing display of the lost symbol mode.

  Also, the fourth notice display may be a notice display different from any of the first notice display, the second notice display, and the third notice display (for example, "Chance" or "question mark"). Alternatively, the notice may be the same notice as any of the notices of the first notice, the second notice, and the third notice.

  Here, the fourth advance notice may not be displayed in the certain display area, or may be displayed without fail.

  When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first display may not be switched to the fourth notice display, and it is always switched. It may be configured as follows.

  After notification indicating a loss in the second reach effect is made, the wipe effect display may be displayed in some cases, or the wipe effect display may not be displayed in some cases, or The wipe effect display may be configured to be displayed.

  In the state where the wipe effect display is displayed, the fourth preview display may not be displayed, or may be displayed without fail.

  In addition, when the first operation means is not operated in the state where the first display is displayed, the first display is configured not to be switched to the fourth notice display. May be It may be configured such that the wipe effect display is not displayed if the notification indicating the loss is not performed in the second reach effect.

  Furthermore, when the first display is switched to the fourth preliminary display, the operation of the first operation means is always performed in the state where the first display is displayed. When the wipe effect display is displayed, the second reach effect may be configured such that a notification indicating a loss is always performed.

Also,
“After the wipe effect display is displayed, the resurrection big hit effect display can be displayed [eg, figure α 297 (B7), figure α 300 (B7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, before the said wipe production | presentation display is displayed, you may be comprised so that a revival big hit production | presentation display may not be displayed.

Also,
"The fourth preview display is not a display for previewing that the resurrection jackpot effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[Timer notice display can be displayed,
After the timer advance notice is displayed for a certain time [for example, "0:00"], a certain advance notice [for example, super reach effect] is displayed.
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means, before the display of the timer advance notice display is started, the display of the second display [e.g. Is configured to be able to start display [eg, figure α 309 (A2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Note that the display of the timer notice may be started immediately after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. In this case, even if the player operates the chance button 136 quickly, it is before the start of the timer notice. In some cases, the display of the second display can not be started.

  The given advance notice may be any effect other than the first effect, and may be, for example, the third effect. Or it may be the second effect.

  Here, after the timer advance notice is displayed to indicate a certain time, a given advance notice may not be displayed, or may be displayed without fail.

  Even if the player operates the first operation means, the display of the second display may not be started before the display of the timer advance notice display is started. If the operation of the first operation means is performed, the display of the second display may always be started before the display of the timer advance notice display is started.

  In addition, before the timer advance notice display indicates a given time, a given advance notice may not be displayed. The display of the second display may not be started prior to the start of the display of the timer advance notice display if the player does not operate the first operation means. .

  Furthermore, when a certain advance notice display is displayed, the timer advance notice display may be configured to be after the display indicating a certain time.

Also,
“Display showing that the timer advance notice display is waiting to start display (hereinafter referred to as“ standby display ”) [for example,“ ready ”shown in FIG. Α 309 (A2)] can be displayed. ,
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means, the display of the second display is started during the display of the standby display and before the display of the timer advance display is started. Are configured [eg, figure α 309 (A2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the standby display may not be displayed, or may be displayed without fail.

  Further, even if the player operates the first operation means, the second display is displayed while the standby display is being displayed and before the timer advance display is started. May not be started, and if the first operation means is operated, the standby display is being displayed and before the timer advance display is started, The display of the second display may be configured to be always started.

  In addition, when the player does not operate the first operation means, the display of the second display is being performed during the display of the standby display and before the display of the timer advance display is started. May not be started.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of hold icons [eg, hold icons shown in FIGS. Α272 to α309, etc.]
The hold icon of one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, the third example of the aspect of the first character with a "in preparation" placard shown in FIG. Hold icon h13],
One hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, the third hold of the aspect of the character with the "in preparation" placard shown in FIG. Icon h13],
The second hold icon is a pre-read notice hold icon,
The third hold icon is a read-ahead notice hold icon different from the second hold icon,
The second holding icon is a holding icon that includes an image [eg, an image of a character with a slot-length character],
The third hold icon is a hold icon including the certain image,
The second hold icon indicates that the timer advance notice display [eg, "10:00" shown in FIG. Α 309 (I5)] may be started [eg, "in preparation" It is a hold icon that does not include the display of placards,
The third hold icon is a hold icon including a display indicating that the display of the timer notice may be started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  It should be noted that one of the plurality of types of holding icons is the first holding icon [for example, the holding icon of the default display mode shown in FIG. Α 309 (I1), each holding icon h 11, h 12 etc. shown in FIG. And the first hold icon is a default hold icon, and the first hold icon and the second hold icon are other hold icons, and the first hold icon and the first hold icon are different from each other. The third hold icon may be another hold icon. That is, in the first hold icon, the hold icon of the form of the character of the Bancho character that does not have the "in preparation" placard, and the hold of the form of the character of the Bancho character that has the "in preparation" placard The default hold icon other than the icon corresponds. Further, the second reserve icon corresponds to a reserve icon of a form of a character with a leader who does not have a "in preparation" placard, which is an aspect of pre-reading advance notice. The third hold icon corresponds to a hold icon of the form of the character of the bancho character holding the "in preparation" placard, which is an aspect of the pre-reading advance notice. That is, the third hold icon also has a function as a prefetch notice, and also has a function such as a mini item indicating that a timer notice is to be performed.

  Here, the first holding icon, the second holding icon, and the third holding icon may be displayed separately or simultaneously.

Also,
"The above-mentioned" display representing the number "is" display of the number regarding the number of remaining operations "
After the display of the first display is started, after the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display, the first display to the second display And may be switched [for example, FIG. Α 272 (A1) to FIG. (A3)],
After the display of the first display is started, the second display can be started from the first display before the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display. It is configured such that the display may be switched [eg, figure α 272 (B1) to figure (B2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  After the display of the first display is started, after the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display, the display of the first display to another display is performed. It is configured to be switched, and after the display of the first display is started, before the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display. The first display may be switched to another display.

  In the case of switching from the first display to the second display, after the display of the first display is started, the first operation means of the same number of times as the number represented by the first display is The operation may be configured to be performed. When switching from the first display to the second display, after the display of the first display is started, the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display. It is always done.

Also,
“The display of the first display is configured to be started while the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is started,
The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a first number [e.g., 10 or 5 etc.],
The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a second number [for example, 99],
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
The symbol variation display when the first display is started as the display representing the second number than the symbol fluctuation display when the first display is started as the display representing the first number In the end, the big hit symbol aspect is configured to be displayed more easily.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a third number [for example, 1],
The third number is a smaller number than the first number,
The symbol variation display when the first display is started as the display representing the third number rather than the symbol fluctuation display when the first display is started as the display representing the first number In the end, the big hit symbol aspect is configured to be displayed more easily.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first number is a number of 2 or more,
After the display of the first display representing the first number starts, after the long press operation of the first operation means is performed once, the second display from the first display [for example, , And may be switched to “display of continuation” [for example, FIG. Α 301 (A6)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, after the display of the said 1st display showing the said 1st number is started, after long press operation of the said 1st operation means is performed once, it switches from the said 1st display to another display It may be configured to be the case.

  Here, after the display of the first display representing the first number is started, and after the long press operation of the first operation means is performed once, the second display is performed from the first display. The display may not be switched, and may be configured to be switched.

  In addition, after the display of the first display representing the first number starts, if the long press operation of the first operation means is not performed once, the second display from the first display is performed. It may be configured not to switch to

  In the case of switching from the first display to the second display, after the display of the first display representing the first number is started, the long press operation of the first operation means is always performed. It may be configured to be performed once.

Also,
[The pattern variation display is configured to be displayed over one variation time selected from among a plurality of variation times,
One of the plurality of types of fluctuation time is a first fluctuation time [eg, the shortest fluctuation time (eg, 5 seconds) of the fluctuation time of “D” shown in FIG. Α 271 (d)]. Yes,
One of the plurality of types of fluctuation time is a second fluctuation time [for example, the fluctuation time of “A” (for example, 120 seconds) shown in FIG. Α 271 (d)],
The second fluctuation time is a fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time,
In the symbol fluctuation display displayed over the first fluctuation time, the display of the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] is started as a display showing the second number [for example, 99] Are configured not to
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first variation time may be the shortest variation time among the plurality of types of variation times.

  Further, in the symbol variation display displayed over the second variation time, the first display may be configured to be started as a display representing the second number. In this case, the second variation time may be the longest variation time among the plurality of types of variation times. Furthermore, in the symbol fluctuation display displayed over the first fluctuation time, the display may be started as a display representing the first number [for example, 5] in the symbol fluctuation display. May be Alternatively, in the symbol variation display displayed over the first variation time, the display of the first display may not be started.

Also,
“The first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] started as the display for the first number [for example, 10] is configured so as to most easily start the display,
When a sixth display [eg, “simulated series GET” shown in FIG. Α 302 (A10)] is displayed when the first operation means is operated a certain number of times in a certain button continuous hit effect Is configured to be
The sixth display and the second display [for example, “display of“ continuation ”in the notification area HZ”] are the same [for example, pseudo consecutive effect] advance notice display for the same notice target,
The first number is a smaller number than the number of times [eg, 30 times],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  In addition, when operation of said 1st operation means is performed a certain number of times in a button continuous hit production, it is comprised so that the result according to this operation may be alert | reported, The number of the said certain number of times The first number may be smaller than the first number.

  Here, the sixth display and the second display may be a notice display relating to a big hit in the same symbol variation display [for example, "Chance" or "border behavior"], or a notice display relating to the same effect For example, "SP" may be used.

  In addition, the sixth display may be configured not to be displayed when the first operation means is not operated a certain number of times in a button continuous hit effect.

  In addition, when the sixth display is displayed, the operation of the first operation means is always performed a certain number of times in a button continuous stroke effect.

Also,
"With luminous means,
Third operation means,
Equipped with
The light amount adjustment display may be displayed on the display means.
The light amount adjustment display is a display indicating that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means is possible,
When the third operation means is operated in a state where the light amount adjustment display is displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means may be performed according to the operation.
Even when the third operation means is operated in a state where the light amount adjustment display is not displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means is not performed according to the operation.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display of the fifth display or the like may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means. The third operating means may be operating means different from the second operating means, or may be the same operating means as the second operating means.

  Here, when the operation of the third operation means is performed in a state where the light amount adjustment display is displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means may not be performed according to the operation. , May be configured to be performed.

  Further, even if the third operation means is operated in a state where the light amount adjustment display is not displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means is absolutely not performed according to the operation. May be

  In the case where the operation of the third operation means is not performed in a state where the light amount adjustment display is displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emission means may not be performed. .

  Furthermore, when the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means is performed according to the operation of the third operation means, the light amount adjustment display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
"Speaker,
Equipped with a third operating means,
The volume adjustment display may be displayed on the display means,
The volume adjustment display is a display indicating that volume adjustment of the speaker is possible,
When the operation of the third operation means is performed in the state where the volume adjustment display is displayed, the volume adjustment of the speaker may be performed in accordance with the operation.
Even if the operation of the third operation means is performed in a state where the volume adjustment display is not displayed, the volume adjustment of the speaker may be performed according to the operation.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The display of the fifth display or the like may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means. The third operating means may be operating means different from the second operating means, or may be the same operating means as the second operating means.

  Here, when the operation of the third operation means is performed in the state where the volume adjustment prompting display is displayed, there may be a case where the volume adjustment of the speaker may not be performed according to the operation. It may be configured to be always performed.

  Moreover, even if the operation of the third operation means is performed in a state where the volume adjustment prompting display is not displayed, there may be a case where the volume adjustment of the speaker is not performed according to the operation. It may be configured to be always performed.

  In the case where the operation of the third operation means is not performed in the state where the volume adjustment display is displayed, there may be no case where the volume adjustment of the speaker is performed. When the operation of the third operation means is not performed in a state where the volume adjustment display is not displayed, there may be no case where the volume adjustment of the speaker is performed.

  Furthermore, when the volume adjustment of the speaker is performed according to the operation of the third operation means, the volume adjustment display may be displayed. When the volume adjustment of the speaker is performed according to the operation of the third operation means, the volume adjustment display may not be displayed.

Also,
“When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a certain state among the states where the first display is displayed, the first effect is performed according to the operation. ing,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  That is, when the operation of the first operation means is performed in a certain state among the states in which the first display is displayed, the first effect is always executed according to the operation. It may be configured.

  In addition, the first effect may be configured not to be executed unless the first operation means is operated in a certain state in which the first display is displayed. .

  Furthermore, when the first effect is performed in response to the operation of the first operation means, the first operation means is displayed in a certain state among the states in which the first display is displayed. The operation is always performed.

Also,
The first display is configured to be able to be displayed in a certain effect mode [for example, the pre-reading mode of the princess zone shown in FIG. Α 309 (D1)]
The second display can be displayed in the certain effect mode,
The first effect is configured to be executable in the certain effect mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the second display can be displayed only in the specific state, and the first effect can be performed.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned certain effect mode is an effect mode selected by the player on the menu screen or the like, or is not related to the setting operation of the player set in the normal gaming state (non-probability change state, non-power support state) It is a production mode, is a production mode not related to the setting operation of the player set in the probability change state, or a production mode not set related to the setting operation of the player set in the power support state, etc. It is an effect mode related to the setting operation of the player in the gaming state (non-probable changing state, non-power support state), a effect mode related to the setting operation of the player in the positive changing state, a player in the power support state It may be an effect mode related to the setting operation of. In addition, the effect mode may be started based on the lottery result.

Also,
“The“ display related to the first effect described above ”means“ the first effect according to the operation of the first operation means [eg, the chance button 136] When the execution of [] is started, the display is started in the certain display area [for example, the notification area HZ].
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first effect is an effect by the sound output of the effect sound output means [for example, the speaker 120],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first effect may be an effect by the sound output of the sound output means.

Also,
"The first effect is an effect by light emission of effect light emitting means [for example, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The first effect may be an effect by light emission of the light emitting means.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],
Whether the big hit symbol form is finally displayed or the lost symbol form is finally displayed is the big hit judgment performed at the start of the symbol variation display [eg, the special symbol shown in FIG. Α 262 (b) Related lottery process] is configured to be determined by
The result of the big hit determination does not change depending on whether or not the first effect [for example, the big hit confirmed advance effect] is performed,
The big hit judgment is obtained when the game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game board [for example, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232] [for example, in the diagram α 262 (b) It is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using the random number [for example, the big hit determination random number value, the special figure determination random number value] acquired in the winning determination process (step S209) shown.
The probability (hereinafter referred to as the "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is predetermined [for example, it is determined in the table for adjudication determination],
The big hit probability does not change depending on whether or not the first effect [for example, a big hit confirmed advance effect] is performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display of one of the plurality of types of display may be a first display [for example, a change effect display (display change of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 310 (f) to FIG. Advance effect display etc.]
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [for example, a red display mode holding icon shown in FIG. 310 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 310 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display showing that the display start of a certain advance display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG. 310 (p), etc.] is waiting for,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [eg, as shown in FIG. 310 (f) to FIG. (H), the ninja character NJ 4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc., after the hold change prior presentation display due to
In the first state, the third display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d), under preparation in a state where the UI unit UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed] Display of image RDY is started, etc.],
In the second state, the display may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d) to FIG. (N), the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end. The image under preparation RDY whose display is started when the unit UI3 is displayed is such that display is ended when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state [eg, FIG. 310 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image in preparation RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 being in a non-display state, etc.]
After the certain advance notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q), etc.] may be started [eg, for example, FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, an iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice about the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q) is a notice display notifying that a big hit is confirmed, etc.]
It may become the second state after the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (l) to FIG. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in the sword reach].
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [eg, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (a)],”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
While the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is in the non-display state, the hold is not displayed. Icon is not displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Also, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display [e.g. As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the ready image RDY shown in FIG. 310 (d) And the display position of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 310 (m), etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, the display mode of gold shown in FIG. 310 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol is easy to be determined and displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the display mode of the holding icon is likely to change. , Big hit symbol is easy to be decidedly displayed etc. in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of pre-reading, etc.,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [for example, the display mode of gold shown in FIG. 310 (e), etc.],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is easily started [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the red display mode hold icon is easily displayed. etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

Also, at least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [eg, as shown in FIG. Overlapping etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may also overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured to Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

Also, “the first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap. For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap, or even if the displays other than the first display and the sixth display are not configured to overlap. Good. Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 310 (m) to FIG. (Q) etc.] can be executed,
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started, and for example, the super reach shown in FIG. 310 (m) to FIG. (Q) And so on), etc.],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being performed [for example, a state in which super reach (sword reach) shown in FIG. 310 (m) to FIG. ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG.
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the fifth display [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q), etc.]
The certain advance notice display is a notice for giving notice that the certain effect is to be started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG. Notices the display of the steel plate image TP by sticking to the area around the target TGT, etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain advance display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, a certain advance notice may give notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give notice of something other than the fact that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain advance notice may always give notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give notice of a certain effect being started.

  In addition, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display, and a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice display. Also, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain advance notice, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain advance notice.

  Further, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or displays other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the start of the symbol change display which is started next [for example, FIG. 310 ( i) As shown in (j) of the figure, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display is erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [eg, FIG. 310 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display in a certain symbol variation display may be The started first display may be erased other than before the start of the symbol variation display to be started next. In addition, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or the display may be started in a certain symbol fluctuation display. The first displayed display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [eg, as shown in FIG. 316 (a4), the character of “superheat” in the tutorial display unit TT1 Notice display consisting of may be displayed etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 and the like] is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the seventh display [for example, the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display in which display is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (b1) to FIG. (B6), the deca-button image 136aL is prepared The display is started after the display of the image RDY is started, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6), an iron plate Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 313 (b1) to FIG. (B6), the image RDY being prepared Is displayed before the display of the decal button image 136aL starts, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display [for example, a combined animation shown in FIG. 313 (b4) to FIG. (B5), etc.],
The eighth display is a display for giving notice that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (b4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 320 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (a), two images RDY1 and RDY2 may be displayed during preparation, etc.,
The display mode of the other changes after the display of one of the two third displays is completed [for example, as shown in FIG. 320 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged. etc],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 320 (g), the in-provision image RDY enlarged and displayed overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

Also, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [eg, in FIG. 320 (b) to FIG. (K) As shown, the two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

Also, “one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as the tenth display [for example,“ Panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 310 (a) Description display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), the instruction display is on the tutorial display unit TT1. Etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d), the image under preparation RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Also, the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In the above description,
It is a game console provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a character relating to the first display [the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (display of the hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. Character of ninja shown in), etc.],
One of the displays of the plurality of types is a second display [the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice, for example, the hold icon of the red display mode shown in FIG. 310 (h), etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [in preparation display, for example, an preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 310 (d)],
The first display is a display of a character associated with the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon of the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display may be a notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG. (P) or FIG. 312 (b3) to FIG. (B4) It is a display showing that it is waiting for the display start of the timer announcement effect etc. shown in
It is configured that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started, and then the hold icon is displayed after the hold change advance effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in the display mode of the advance notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (f) to (h), the first hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 is changing from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
In the first state, the third display may be started, and the display of the in-provision display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in, when the UI unit UI3 displaying the suspension icons h11 and h12 is displayed, the display of the image RDY being prepared is started, etc.],
The third display whose display has been started in the first state is configured such that the display may end in the second state, and the display is started when the hold icon is displayed. In the preparation display, the display ends when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d) to (n), the display is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The display of the image under preparation RDY is terminated when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain advance notice may be started in the second state. After the display of the preparation display ends in the display state, the mini game or timer advance notice is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (n) to the drawing (o), the display of the preparation image RDY is After the end, the display of the mini game is started with the UI unit UI3 hidden, or as shown in FIG. 312 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared After the display is completed, the timer announcement effect is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the certain advance notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q), the button advance notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (c 4), etc.] Is configured so that the notice is started when the display result of the mini game is a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, for example, in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG. (Q) As shown, when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIG. 313 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice is completed. Button preview effect is started by Deca button 136aL, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding a symbol change display being executed,
It is configured to be in the second state after the first state, and may shift to a state in which the hold icon can not be displayed from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in (l) to (m), when transitioning to swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is made non-display, and transition from the state where the hold icon can be displayed to the non-display state Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [e.g., the state in which the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc., before the transition to the sword reach ”,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [eg, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is made non-displayed in the sword reach, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  In the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to realize a game stand characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance before the advance notice, is the advance notice other than the hold icon, and concentrate on the change. May be entertaining.

  In addition, according to this game stand, it is possible for the beginners to enjoy the notice or the pre-reading notice by the indication during preparation, and it is possible to enjoy it, and the indication during preparation is for the experienced person to a certain extent. In some cases, it may be easy to understand and make it possible to clarify expectations.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be made depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be a display of a character associated with only the second display, or may be a display of a character associated with a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is necessarily associated with the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

  In addition, only the third display may be started in the first state, and displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  In addition, the third display may be started only in the first state, and the third display may be started in states other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display in which the display is started in the first state However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display in which the display is started in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display in which the display is started in the first state may be the second The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be performed. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of displays other than a certain advance notice may be started in the second state. Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state In the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may not be started after the end of.

  In addition, the display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, or the third state in the second state may be started. The display of a certain advance notice may be started in the second state other than after the end of the display of.

  Moreover, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain advance notice may be started only in the second state, or in the second state, the third display may be started. After completion of the display of the display of, the display of a certain advance notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Moreover, after a certain advance notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain advance notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started There may be cases. Also, a certain effect may always be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain advance notice display is displayed.

  Also, a certain effect may be started only after a certain advance notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started except after a certain advance notice display is displayed. It may be.

  Also, a certain effect may be a notice about only the symbol change display being executed, or a notice regarding a display other than the symbol change display being performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to a symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to a symbol change display that is being executed.

  In addition, the second state may occur only after the first state, or the second state may occur after the states other than the first state. In addition, after the first state, the second state may always be obtained, or after the first state, the second state may not be obtained.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed or one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not necessarily displayed or one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navi-character) constantly displayed. .

  In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the default display mode of the hold icon to the pre-read notice display mode of the hold icon.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, may be a display of a character, may be a display of a notice item, or may be a countdown of a timer display in a timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

  In addition, a certain advance notice may be a display during execution of the countdown of the timer indication in the timer advance notice, may be a mini game, or may be a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the first state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

In addition, the third display whose display is started in the first state may end the display in the third state.
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

Also, the third display whose display has been started in the first state may end display in the fourth state,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Also, it is configured that a certain effect may be started after the certain advance notice is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
It may be

  In addition, a certain preliminary announcement display may not be a true preliminary announcement display, but may be a false preliminary announcement display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Also, when a certain advance notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  In addition, the character is not limited to a person, but may be a display of a mini item system such as a notice item.

  Also, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", "the second display after the display of the first display is started. The display to start the display of may be made ". Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. In addition, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Moreover, "it is comprised so that it may become the said 2nd state after the said 1st state" may be "the said 2nd state following the said 1st state." It may be configured as ".

  In addition, after the first state, there may be a transition to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through the other state (for example, the 3rd state or the 3rd state) after the 1st state, it may shift to the 2nd state. In addition, in a state where one symbol variation display is made, there may be a case where the first state shifts to the second state.

  Alternatively, a certain effect may fade in while a certain advance notice fades out.

Further, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a reserved icon display area, for example, a UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
In the state where the sixth display is displayed, the hold icon is configured to be displayable, and the hold icon may be displayed in a state where an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed when the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. 310 (m As shown in), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold icon may be made noticeable.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or a display of an image displayed on the back of the display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be display of an image that is not displayed on the back of at least the hold icon.

  Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable when the sixth display is displayed, and a display other than the hold icon may be displayable when the sixth display is displayed. It may be Also, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be

  In addition, only the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured so as not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. May be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that is not overlapped with the decorative symbol in change.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the display of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the display of the third display, a display of a part different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative symbol May be

  The sixth display may also include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

  Also, the sixth display may include the display of the base of the variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and the hold icon is displayed. In the above state, a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is overlapped with the display in preparation and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (d), the image in preparation RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. It is displayed overlapping on the display unit TT1, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the display under preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed The display position of the display under preparation in the position and the non-display state of the hold icon is the same, for example, the display position of the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 310 (d) and the image in preparation shown in FIG. The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the third display is displayed around the hold icon which is often seen normally, and it is strongly emphasized that the third display is not the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, in some cases, it may be possible to prevent missed notice by making it notice that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped only with the third display, or in the first state, It may be configured that at least a part of the six displays may be overlapped and displayed on displays other than the third display. In addition, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display without fail. In the first state, the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that at least a portion of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

  In addition, in the first state, only at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, or in the first state, the sixth state may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display of may be displayed so as to be overlapped and displayed on the third display.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, eg, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 310 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The display of the second display is configured to be easier to be started [The display of the hold icon is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice. If the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the preview preview, the hold icon of the display mode of the preview preview is more likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. When displayed in the golden display mode, the red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the indication of the indication may be easily started, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect In the case of changing to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Also, the second display is more likely to be changed when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The indication of the indication may always start, or the sixth indication may change from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of a change, the display of the second display may not start.

  Also, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second The display of the second display may be easily started even when the mode is changed.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured such that the display of the second display is more likely to start, "in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when no change occurs. "" May be.

Also, “the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the first embodiment [default display mode, eg, default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 310 (a), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of embodiments is the second embodiment [display mode of advance notice or advance notice, for example, a display mode of gold shown in FIG. 310 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect The symbol variation display is configured so that the big hit symbol is easily displayed in a fixed display [The hold icon display is displayed than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the advance notice. If the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the advance notice, the jackpot is likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 310 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode , The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, so that the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the pre-reading There, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be Further, the sixth display may be necessarily displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

  In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be easily determined in the display, or the sixth indication may be from the first aspect to the second rather than when the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to an aspect, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, the symbol variation display is better when the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol may be definitely displayed on the screen, or the sixth display may show the first to second aspects rather than the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Also, only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display may be the first aspect. Also in the case of changing to the second aspect from the second aspect, the big hit symbol may be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display.

  “When the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Is configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display, “in a certain state, the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth display does not change. "" May be.

Also, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display. [At least a part of the image including the reserved icon display area is For example, as shown in FIG. 310 (f), a part of the UI unit UI3 is over the ninja character NJ4 as shown in FIG. 310 (f). Being wrapped etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and it may be possible to make the game easy to understand.

  Here, the display may be configured such that at least a portion of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping only the first display, or the display of at least a portion of the sixth display is It may be configured such that displays other than the first display may be displayed overlapping. In addition, the display may be configured such that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display It may be configured such that it may be overlapped and not displayed on one display.

  In addition, only at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or the display other than at least a part of the display of the sixth display The display may also be configured to be displayed overlapping with the first display.

  In addition, the display of a part of the sixth display may be configured to be displayed overlapping the first display, or all the displays of the sixth display may be displayed on the first display. It may be configured to be displayed overlapping.

  Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may overlap with displays other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Also, at least a portion of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a portion of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Also, only a portion of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or all of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. The image including the pending icon display area is displayed in a state in which both the image relating to the image including the pending icon display area and the character relating to the change effect display (the pending change advance presentation display) of the pending icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the character NJ4 of the ninja, as shown in FIG. 325 (b1). Not etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, if focusing on the sixth display, the third display may seem like the display relating to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with any display other than the first display. May be configured. In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. When both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  Also, even if only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, In the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be done. Also, even if only the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state other than the state in which both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It may be configured.

  Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . Also, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to always overlap, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap each other. .

In addition, “a certain reach effect [specific super reach effect, for example, super reach (swords reach) shown in FIG. 310 (m) to FIG. (Q), etc.] can be executed.
The first state is one of the states before execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before a specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. 310 (m) to the same It is a state etc. before the super reach shown in Figure (q) is started.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, a super reach (word Reach is being executed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice whether or not it is in a certain reach state.

  Here, only certain reach effects may be configured to be executable, and reach effects other than certain reach effects may also be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or it may be configured such that a certain reach effect may not be performed.

  Also, the first state may be one of the states before execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before execution of reach effects other than a certain reach effect is started It may be one of the states of In addition, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in the state.

  The second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being performed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being performed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always performed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not performed.

  The first state may be a reach state before developing into an SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state in which the SP reach is in progress in the certain change.

  Also, the first state is a state before developing into an SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and is a certain state before reaching a reaching state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state of reach execution.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a timer advance notice display [for example, a display of a timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 313 (b3) to FIG.
A game stand that features. "
I also explained about

  The timer advance notice may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of types of timer advance notices, it may be a certain kind of timer advance notice.

In addition, “the certain advance notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 310 (o) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Also, when there are multiple types of mini games, it may be a type of mini game.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, a display of a button advance effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6), etc.],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be In addition, the fourth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 310 (q), etc.]”
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only the fifth display may be displayed as an effect, or an indication other than the fifth display may be displayed as an effect. May be Further, the fifth display may be necessarily displayed as a certain effect, or may be configured so that the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, the jackpot symbol may be more easily determined when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, or when the fifth display is displayed. If the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed.

  Also, in the case where the fifth display appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display aspect and a certain advance display aspect is displayed only in a certain aspect There may be.

In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol change display may be continuously displayed even after the symbol change display to be started next is started. [The display under preparation whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (i) to FIG. (J) In preparation, the image RDY is being displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, the third display can give expectation over a plurality of changes, and the goal can be easily understood, so the period for giving an expectation may be clear.

  Here, the third display in which the display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, or The third display whose display has been started in the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display to be started next is started. In addition, the third display whose display has been started in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or in a certain symbol variation display The third display whose display has been started may not be displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has been started in the fluctuation display is erased before the next symbol fluctuation display is started, for example, FIG. As shown in (h) through (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the first display whose display has been started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be configured to be erased only before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started, It may be configured that the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol fluctuation display may be erased other than before the symbol fluctuation display to be started next is started. In addition, the first display whose display is started in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started, or a certain symbol variation The first display whose display is started in the display may be configured so that it may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  Note that a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. In addition, a certain advance notice and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state).

In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be performed [the notice is performed in the area where the preparation display is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 316 (a4), there may be a case where a notice display consisting of the letters “excessive heat” may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY in preparation is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, effects other than the certain effect are also performed. May be Also, in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may be performed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, a certain effect may not be performed.

  In addition, a certain effect may be performed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is performed also in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. May be

In addition, "the operation means which can be operated by the player [a button or a lever, for example, effect button 136 etc.]" is provided,
One of the displays of the plurality of types is the seventh display [display of an image of a button or a lever, for example, a deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the user to operate the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts to be displayed after the third display is started, and the display of images of buttons and levers is started to be displayed after the display in progress is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 313 (b1) to (b6), the Deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the display of the image RDY being prepared, etc.],
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started, and when the button (or the lever is operated during the display of the image of the button or the lever, the notice is given) The iron plate image TP is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated during display of the deca-button image 136aL shown in FIG. 313 (b6), for example, to be started],
The third display is a display which is ended before the display of the seventh display is started. [In preparation display is ended before the display of the button or the lever is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 313 (b1) to (b6), the image under preparation RDY is such that the display is terminated before the display of the Deca button image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the operation means may be operable by only the player, or may be operable by persons other than the player. In addition, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. The seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Also, the seventh display may start being displayed only after the third display is started, or may be started other than after the third display is started. It may be. In addition, the seventh display may always start after the third display starts, or may not start after the third display starts. It is also good.

  Moreover, a certain effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect is not started when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, or a certain effect may be obtained when the operation means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display. It may be started. In addition, when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, or when the operation means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed, the certain effect May be started.

  In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may end other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts There may be

  The seventh display may be a big button image among the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the deca-button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when the deca-button image is displayed.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the button image of the normal color is displayed and when the button image of the special color is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more easily determined when the button image of the special color is displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and in the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the big hit symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is an eighth display [for example, a combined animation shown in FIG. 313 (b4) to FIG. (B5), etc.],
The eighth display is a display for giving notice that the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (b4) to FIG. Of the start of, that is, the display of the Deca button image 136aL etc.],
The third display is a display whose display is ended while the eighth display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eighth display may give notice that only the display of the seventh display is started, or may give notice of other than the display of the seventh display. It may be In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, and may not give notice of the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be.

  The third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of displays other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 320 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
Two of the above-mentioned third displays may be displayed. [The two in-provision displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 323 (a), two in-provision images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. May be done etc],
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes [the display of the display in progress of one of the two displays in progress The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 320 (g), the image RDY being prepared is displayed enlarged, etc.],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [In preparation display in which the display mode has changed overlap with the change icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 320 (g), The displayed preparation image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two of the third displays may be displayed, or three or more of the third displays may be displayed, and only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, only one display mode of the two third displays may change after the display of one of the two third displays ends, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays ends. Display modes other than the display mode may be changed. Also, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the two third displays has ended, or the other of the two third displays may be changed The display mode of may not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may be changed only after the display of one of the two third displays is ended, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is ended. The other display mode may change.

  Also, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or even if the third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, or the third display in which the display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. .

  Further, only the third display in which the display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and displays other than the third display in which the display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is finished in one symbol variation display [two in preparation displays are displayed. In this case, all are digested in the same symbol variation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 320 (b) to FIG. (K), two ready images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display Etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or two third displays are displayed. The display of displays other than all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display. Moreover, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may always be ended in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may not end in one of the symbol variation displays.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, The display of all the third displays may be ended also in the symbol fluctuation display other than the one symbol fluctuation display. Moreover, only when two third displays are displayed, display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display.

Also, “one of the plural types of displays is the tenth display [explanatory display, for example,“ the panda is the master of the hall ”displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. It is the displayed explanation etc.],
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in a first display area of the display means when displayed, and [an explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, , As shown in FIG. 310 (a), the instruction display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [In preparation display is displayed in a specific display area where an explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 310 (d As shown in), the in-provisioning image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc. where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or when the display is displayed, the first display area of the display means It may be displayed other than. Moreover, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be

  The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in display areas other than the first display area. It is also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “display indicating that the display start of a certain advance notice display is waiting” means “character display in preparation [for example,“ in preparation ”in preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 310 (d). Display of letters etc.]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is the eleventh display [a ball drop display, for example, a ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 341 (a1), etc.]”,
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball extraction error display ERR1, the character display of "Please pull the ball" is prompted to open the ball, etc.,
In a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display At least a part of the in-provision display is overlapped with the in-progress display in a state where both the in-provision display and the out-of-ball display are displayed, as shown in FIG. 341 (a2) In preparation, the image RDY is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to eject the game ball, or a display prompting other than the game ball to be ejected. Further, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts ejection of the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the ejection of the game ball.

  Further, the eleventh display may be a display prompting to discharge only the game balls, or a display prompting to discharge other than the game balls.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display without fail May be displayed, and in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, displays other than at least a part of the third display are overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. And in a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display of a part of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. May be

In addition, in a state in which both the certain advance notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain advance notice display is overlapped and displayed on the eleventh display. When at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice is overlapped with the ball withdrawal display in a state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball withdrawal display are displayed, for example, As shown in 341 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped only with the eleventh display. The display may be configured, and in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display overlaps the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh by all means. Or at least a part of the notice may be displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh in a state where both the notice and the eleventh display are displayed. It may be configured to be the case.

  In addition, in a state in which both of the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state other than the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  Further, in a state in which both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. It is preferable that all the display of the notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with the display of the eleventh when both the notice display and the eleventh display are displayed. May be

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a pachinko machine [ball-and-ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

[The above-mentioned gaming machine is a slot machine [rolling-type game machine],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Although the hold icon may be used as a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is held, this can be realized according to this game console.

  Also, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely exemplify the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done.

  Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the example of presentation, the various examples, the variations, and the supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements of the embodiment or the example of the presentation may be different. The present invention may be applied to various examples and their variations and / or additions.

100 Pachinko Machine 136 Chance Button 137 Second Chance Button 181 Operation Key Unit 191 Transparent Part 208 Decorative Symbol Display Device 208 L First Decorative Symbol Display Device 208 M Second Decorative Symbol Display Device 208 N Third Decorative Symbol Display Device 224 E Family Crest 224 F Logo Character 224Fa Yashiro character 224Fb General character IL Light guide plate 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit 600 Payout control unit 1000 Slot machine HZ notification area 136a Button image 136b Arrow display 136c remaining period meter display

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
The first operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
Multiple types of effects can be performed ,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is one of the effects of the advance effect (hereinafter referred to as "first effect"),
The first display may be displayed in a certain display area of the display areas in the display means ,
A second display may be displayed in the certain display area ,
The first display is a display representing a number,
The second display is not a display representing a number,
When the operation of the first operation means in a state in which the first display is displayed is performed, it may be several small number representing the display of the first according to the operation,
When the first display is switched to the second display in the display area according to the operation when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed There is also
Even when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the second display is displayed, the display mode of the second display does not change according to the operation.
The second display is a display provided with a plurality of display modes,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be executed according to the operation ,
In some cases, the second display of the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area ,
The first preliminary display is a display associated with the first effect,
In fluctuations display the first effect is performed, finally the jackpot symbol aspect is confirmed displayed,
The first display is a display that is not a display that is started as a reach effect,
It is possible to display a variable display (hereinafter referred to as “first variable display”) in which a certain reach effect is executed,
It is possible to display a fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “the second fluctuation display”) in which the reach effect is not performed,
In the first variation display, the display of the first display can be started before the execution of the certain reach effect is started,
By performing the operation of the first operation means before the execution of the certain reach effect is started, the first display is performed before the execution of the certain reach effect is started. May be switched to start the display of the second display,
By performing the operation of the first operation means while the certain reach effect is being performed, the first display is switched to perform the second display while the certain reach effect is being performed. The display of may be started,
In the second variation display, the display of the first display can be started,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the second variation display is displayed, the first display may be switched and the display of the second display may be started.
It is characterized by

In FIG. 277 (A2) continued from FIG. 276 (A1), the chance button 136 is operated once, and in FIG. 2 (A3), the number of the notification region HZ decreases to “9” and the notification region HZ is displayed with shaking. It is done. This figure 27 7 (A3) even chance button 136 is operated once, in the figure (A4), a number of the notification area HZ reduced to "8". Chance button 136 is operated subsequently at least once, in the notification area HZ shown in Fig. 27 7 (A6), changes from displaying the number of the display of "Chance". After that, it is the same as FIG. 276 (A3) to FIG. (A23) except that the notification area HZ is the advance notice. That is, after that, although the chance button 136 is not operated at all, it is an example in which the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost is displayed although it has developed into the cover reach of the spar reach 1. In this example, as in the representative example described with reference to FIG. 272 (E1) to FIG. (E3), the advance warning display in the notification area HZ starts the shake display or the wipe effect starts. It does not hide, it disappears after the shaking display after wipe out is resumed.

In the above description,
[First operation means [eg, chance button 136, second chance button 137, transmitting portion 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, etc.],
Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two, fourth display means 208M ′, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
A game console equipped with
Multiple types of effects can be performed ,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is one of the effects of the advance effect (hereinafter referred to as "first effect") [for example, the big hit finalized effect effect],
In some cases, the first display may be displayed in a display area [for example, the notification area HZ, the notification area HZ '] of the display areas in the display means ,
A second display may be displayed in the certain display area ,
The first display is a display representing a number [eg, 99-1 or 99-0, etc.],
The second display is not a display representing a number,
When an operation [for example, one-shot single-shot operation, long press operation, etc.] of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display is performed according to the operation. There are cases where the number represented is a small number [for example, the number of “1” or “2 or more” decreases according to one operation] ,
When the first display is switched to the second display in the display area according to the operation when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed There is also [e.g., FIG. 2 72 (A3), FIG. 2 72 (B2), FIG. 2 77 (A6), FIG. 2 80 (A7), FIG. 2 87 (A7) Figure 2 98 (A5), etc.],
Even when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the second display is displayed, the display mode of the second display does not change according to the operation [for example, FIG. A3) to the same figure (A6) etc.] ,
In the second display, a plurality of types of display modes [for example, no display, "question mark", "Chance", "continue", "SP", "large behavior", "up", the background color is the first mode ~ 7th mode or gray etc.] is prepared.
Wherein when the in a state where the first display is the display operation of the first operating means is performed, there is a case where the manipulation said first effect depending on the runs [e.g., FIG. 2 72 (A3 ) Changing effects to the seventh aspect of logo characters 224F shown in etc., effects that logo characters 224F move, effects movable means other than logo characters 224F (for example, household crests 224E, etc.) change the aspect Effects, effects such as effect moving means (for example, family crest objects 224E, etc.) other than logo features 224F, effects such as a big hit confirmation notice sound is output from the speaker 120, effects such as LED of various lamps change the aspect, etc. ,
The second display of the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first preview display”) [for example, “large screen behavior” of the seventh mode] may be displayed in the certain display area ,
The first notice display is a display related to the first effect [eg, a display displayed simultaneously with the start of the first effect, or immediately before the start or immediately after the start].
In fluctuations display the first effect is performed, finally the jackpot symbol aspects are confirmed display [for example, jackpot expectations of "binge" shown in FIG. 2 71 (b) is met, "S" or, example shown in FIG. 2 72 (A3) ~ FIG (A5) and 2 87 to Figure 2 88, etc.],
The first display is a display that is not a display that is started as a reach effect,
It is possible to display a variable display (hereinafter referred to as “first variable display”) in which a certain reach effect is executed,
It is possible to display a fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “the second fluctuation display”) in which the reach effect is not performed,
In the first variation display, the display of the first display can be started before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [eg, FIG. 273 (A2), FIG. 276 (A2), Fig. 277 (A2), etc.],
The operation of the first operation means is performed before the execution of the certain reach effect [for example, the effect of the search reach] is started, rather than the execution of the certain reach effect is started There is a case [for example, in the case of FIG. 277 (A6)] before the display of the second display [for example, “Chance”] is started after the first display is switched.
By performing the operation of the first operation means while the certain reach effect is being performed, the first display is switched to perform the second display while the certain reach effect is being performed. There is a case [for example, in the case of FIG. 278 (B7)] when the display of [for example, "Chance"] is started,
In the second variation display, the display of the first display can be started [eg, in the case of FIG. 273 (A2)],
By performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the second variable display is displayed, the first display is switched and the display of the second display [for example, "question mark"] Is started [eg, in the case of FIG. 273 (B6)],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

The first preliminary announcement may be displayed outside the certain display area. For example, a notification area HZ 'shown in FIG . In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed out of the certain display area, or may be displayed at the center of the screen, or may be displayed on a different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, It may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.).
Also,
"The certain display area is an area where the first display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also,
[When the first effect is executed in a state where the first preliminary announcement is displayed [for example, FIG. 287 (A7) to FIG. 288 (A36)] [for example, FIG. 287 (A7) to FIG. In the case of figure (A8)]
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also,
"The second display displayed in the certain display area is a display which is not displayed except switching from the first display.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
May the other display area and the certain display area of the display area [e.g., the central region of the display screen] on, the third display is displayed in the "the display means,
The third display is a display prompting the operation of the first operation means [for example, a combination of button images 136a, 136a ′, 136a ′ ′, arrow display 136b, remaining period meter display 136c, or any one Or two displays],
When the operation of the first operation means in a state in which the third display is displayed is performed, you may want to see the fourth display according to the operation is started,
The fourth display is one of the preliminary display [for example, a strong cut-in CIs, a weak cut-in CIw, a cut-in display CIr displayed as an iron plate, a display shown in FIG. 308 (C5), etc. As shown in Figure 2 89, "Hotness is here" shown in Figure 3 08 (C5), "I can expect", "I can be expected", Figure 2 89 . It is a conversation image CI4 of the princess of “the sign of the palace is ...”, a conversation image CI4 of the princess of the “Toen” shown in FIG.
The fourth display is a display that is not a big hit finalization display [for example, a display displayed in a display area different from the certain display area (an area including a central portion in the vertical direction of the display screen)]
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, execution of the first effect and the first effect are performed according to the operation. there Ru If both the display of the fourth display is started [e.g., FIG. 2 72 (C4), FIG. 3 08 (D3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“A variable display (hereinafter referred to as“ the third variable display ”) in which the fifth display may be displayed can be displayed,
In the third variation display, the display of the second display can be started,
One of the plurality of types of effects is one other effect (hereinafter referred to as “second effect”) different from the first effect of the advance effects (for example, pseudo-sequence effect, super Reach production etc.],
In the third variable display, the second effect is executable,
When the operation of the first operation means in a state in which the third display is displayed is performed, there is a case where display of the fifth display according to the operation is started,
The fifth display is a display of one of the notice displays other than the fourth display [for example, the conversation image CI2 of “I saw the swordsman” shown in FIG. 308 (C5) etc. display, a 3 08 displays a conversation image CI2 the "continue" shown in shown in (C4), 3 08 pseudo continuous pattern such as continuous as shown in (F3)],
The fifth display is a display of a notice about execution of the second effect [for example, a display displayed in a display area different from the certain display area (an area including a central portion in the vertical direction of the display screen)] ,
Wherein the second display of a certain display area on the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second warning display".) May appear,
The second notice display is a notice of a notice related to the execution of the second effect other than the fifth display [for example, a display of “continuation”, a display of “SP”],
When the operation of the first operation means in a state in which the first display is displayed is performed, there is a case where the display of the first switches to the second predictive display,
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the third change display is displayed, the second operation is performed before the second effect is started. The display of the advance notice may start .
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the third change display is displayed, the second display is started before the display of the fifth display is started. in some cases the display of warning display is started [e.g., FIG. 2 72 (B2), a combination of FIG 08 and (B3) and FIG (C4) and FIG (C5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[One of the effects of the plurality of types is one other effect (hereinafter referred to as the “third effect”) different from the second effect [for example, the pseudo continuous effect] of the advance effects. [Eg, super reach production],
It is possible to display a variable display (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth variable display") in which the third effect may be executed,
In the fourth variation display, the display of the second display can be started,
Wherein the second display of a certain display area on the third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third predictive display".) [E.g., "SP"] may appear,
The third preliminary display is a preliminary display on the execution of the third effect,
When the operation of the first operation means in a state in which the first display is displayed is performed, there is a case where the display of the first switches to the third predictive display,
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the fourth variation display is displayed , the third operation is performed before the execution of the third effect is started. It is possible to start the display of the notice display,
In a state [for example, the state of FIG. 294 (A5)] before the execution of the second effect is started when the third effect is performed after the second effect, the second In some cases, the display of the third advance notice may be started instead of the advance notice display of, for example, FIG. 294 (A5),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
In a state in which both the display of the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] and the display of the third display [for example, the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] are displayed When the operation of the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] is performed, the execution of the first effect [for example, the light emission of the seventh aspect by the logo character 224F] and the fifth according to the operation of display [for example, the display of the conversation image CI2 of "gonna I saw a great swordsman"] there Ru If both display of starts [for example, the sign of "palace of Figure 3 08 (D3) ··· Example where the cut-in notice "I saw the swordsman" is displayed instead of the cut-in notice ","
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
In a state in which both the display of the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] and the display of the third display [for example, the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] are displayed When the first operation means [e.g., the chance button 136] is operated, the display of the second advance notice display [e.g., the "continuation" display in the notification area HZ or "SP" according to the operation] And the display of the fifth display [for example, the display of the "Continuous" conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C4), or the display of the "I saw the swordsman" display of the conversation image CI2 there Ru if but initiated [e.g., in conjunction with the notification area HZ instead cut-notice of "sign of Tono is ..." in FIG. 3 08 (D3) cut-notice that the "continue" is displayed "Continue Example There appears or FIG 2 72, (B5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“ It is possible to display a variable display (hereinafter referred to as“ the fifth variable display ”) in which the second effect may be executed,
In the fifth variation display, the display of the fourth display can be started,
In the state where the fifth variation display is displayed, the player performs an operation of the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] to perform an operation of the second effect [for example, a pseudo-series effect]. before execution begins, the fourth display [for example, a conversation image CI2 the "sign of Tono is ..."] can begin to view the example, FIG. 2 89 (A10)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[A part of the period before the start of the final re-variation (the maximum number of re-fluctuations) in the fluctuation display of a certain decorative symbol [for example, in the pseudo-series production ( Fig. 293 (A5) before the pseudo-series production start And the number of types of display modes of the second display which may be displayed in a period including the period (including FIG. 298 (15) in which the “pseudo-2” state is changing). It may be displayed in another period after the certain period in the fluctuation display of a certain decorative symbol [for example, a partial period after the start of the final re-variation (the maximum number of re-variations) in the pseudo-sequence effect] the number type of said second display display form that Do different [for example, but in tables and figures 2 93 shown in FIG. 2 71 (c) (A5) and FIG (A15) "continue" is displayed In the figure (A25), "Continuous" is not displayed and "SP" is displayed. Formed],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first display [for example, the number displayed in the notification area HZ] When the display of the third display before the display of the starts is started is not Na,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[The second operation means [for example, the cross key 181a, the OK button 181b, etc.]
When the operation of the second operation means is performed in a state in which the third display [for example, the display of the operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a] is displayed, the fourth display is performed according to the operation. [for example, a weak cut-CIW] may display starts [e.g., Fig. 3 04 (G3)],
Even when the second operation means is operated in a state where the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] is displayed, the number represented by the first display in accordance with the operation Can not be a small number [eg, FIG. 304 (G3)],
Wherein even if the operation of the second operating means performed in a state where the first display is displayed, if such have the display of the first switches to the first predictive display according to the operation [ For example, FIG. 304 (G3)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"Display of the first to swing the display of decorative designs to be performed immediately before the confirmation display of decorative designs can be displayed [e.g., FIG. 2 88 (A36) and the like],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"Successful judgment effect to perform notification indicating the judgment result according to the operation of the first operation means [for example, the chance button 136] [for example, the final judgment effect with the operation ( Fig. 291 (A66) to the same immediately before the FIG (A68))] is capable of executing,
The certain success or failure judgment effect is an effect to be performed before the swing display,
The certain spruce when judge effect takes place, since the start of at least the certain propriety execution judge effect is you exit the display of the first display [for example, FIG. 2 91 (A63)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

In addition, in the composition in which the judgment judgment effect may be performed multiple times in the change display of one decorative symbol, the judgment judgment effect of the first one may correspond to a certain judgment judgment work referred to here, Later success or failure judgment effects may correspond to certain success or failure judgment effects. Also, some spruce judge effect referred herein may be, for example, be up to the immediately preceding figure (A68) from FIG. 2 91 (A66), in the FIG. 2 91 (A66) to FIG. (A70) It may be from FIG. 291 (A64) to immediately before the same figure (A68), or may be from FIG. 291 (A64) to the same figure (A70). Furthermore, the judgment of success or failure may include wipe effect and revival effect. For example, it may be from the position of FIG. 288 (A31) → the same (A32) → the same (B2) → the immediately before (B8).

When the certain success or failure judgment effect is performed, the display of the first display is performed after the start of the execution of the introductory effect [for example, FIG. 291 (A64) to (A65)] of the certain success or failure judgment effect . It may be configured to exit. In addition, when the certain pass / fail judgment effect is performed, the display of the first display may be ended before the certain pass / fail judgment effect is started.

Also,
“The second display of the fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth notice display ”) [eg,“ question mark ”,“ Chance ”,“ SP ”, etc.] is displayed in the certain display area there is a case to be,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] is switched to the fourth advance notice display There is a case,
First reach demonstration [e.g., chasing reach a super reach 1] is capable of executing,
Second reach demonstration [e.g., swordsman reach a super reach 2] is capable of executing,
It said first of said second reach effect than reach demonstration is conducted the symbol variable display is better that are made symbol variable display, finally rather big hit symbol aspects friendliness is established view [e.g., 2 71 Table shown in (d)],
The second notification suggesting loss in reach demonstration [e.g., 2 83 (A23) and 2 97 (B2) and 3 00 (A2) and 3 00 Animation (B2) or 2 83, ( After the A24), FIG. 297 (B3), FIG. 300 (A3), and FIG. 300 (B3) are displayed, the wipe effect display is displayed [ eg, FIG. Fig. (A26), Fig. 297 (B4) to Fig . 3 (B5), Fig. 3 00 (A3) to Fig . 3 (A5), Fig. 3 00 (B3) to Fig. 3 (B5),
In a state in which the wipe effect display is being displayed, the Ru fourth predictive display can be displayed der of the example, FIG. 2 83 (A26), FIG. 2 97 (B5), 3 00 (A5), 3 00 (B5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Further, the notification indicating the loss may be animation display ( FIG. 283 (A23), FIG. 300 (A2)) in which the main character loses. In this case, the wipe effect display may be any display that is displayed after the animation display is displayed, and may be an effect display that is started after the start of the swing display of the lost symbol pattern, The effect display may be started simultaneously with the start of the swing display of the lost symbol mode, or may be the effect display that is started before the start of the swing display of the lost symbol mode.

Also,
After "the wipe effect display is displayed, can display a revival big hit effect display [for example, FIG. 2 97 (B7), FIG. 3 00 (B7)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"It is capable of displaying a timer advance notice display,
After the timer advance notice is displayed for a certain time [for example, "0:00"], a certain advance notice [for example, super reach effect] is displayed ,
It is possible to display a variable display (hereinafter referred to as the “sixth variable display”) in which the timer advance display may be displayed,
In the sixth variation display, the display of the second display can be started,
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the sixth variation display is displayed , the second display is performed before the display of the timer advance notice display is started. displaying the example, the display of "SP" in the notification area HZ] can begin the example, FIG. 3 09 (A2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
Indication indicating that it is waiting for the start of displaying "the timer predictive display (hereinafter, referred to as" standby display ".) [E.g., shown in FIG. 3 09 (A2)" in preparation "] are capable of displaying,
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the sixth variation display is displayed , the display of the timer display is started while the display of the standby display is started. Before that, it is possible to start displaying the second display [eg, FIG. 3 09 (A2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“ It is possible to display multiple types of hold icons [eg, hold icons shown in FIG. 2 72 to FIG.
One hold icon of the plural types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, the first of the modes of the character of the bancho character that does not have the "in preparation" placard shown in FIG. 309 (H1). 3 Hold icon h13],
The hold icon of one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, the third example of the mode of the character of the bancho character holding the "in preparation" placard shown in FIG. 3 09 (I1) Hold icon h13],
The second hold icon is a pre-read notice hold icon,
The third hold icon is a read-ahead notice hold icon different from the second hold icon,
The second holding icon is a holding icon that includes an image [eg, an image of a character with a slot-length character],
The third hold icon is a hold icon including the certain image,
The second hold icon is a display that suggests that the display of the timer preview [for example, "10:00" shown in FIG. 3 09 (I5)] may be started [for example, "in preparation" Hold icon that does not include placard display
The third hold icon is a hold icon including a display indicating that the display of the timer notice may be started.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Note that one of the plurality of types of holding icons is the first holding icon [for example, the holding icon of the default display mode shown in FIG. 3 09 (I1), each holding icon h 11 shown in FIG. h12 etc.], the first holding icon is a default holding icon, and the first holding icon and the second holding icon are other holding icons, and the first holding icon and The third hold icon may be another hold icon. That is, in the first hold icon, the hold icon of the form of the character of the Bancho character that does not have the "in preparation" placard, and the hold of the form of the character of the Bancho character that has the "in preparation" placard The default hold icon other than the icon corresponds. Further, the second reserve icon corresponds to a reserve icon of a form of a character with a leader who does not have a "in preparation" placard, which is an aspect of pre-reading advance notice. The third hold icon corresponds to a hold icon of the form of the character of the bancho character holding the "in preparation" placard, which is an aspect of the pre-reading advance notice. That is, the third hold icon also has a function as a prefetch notice, and also has a function such as a mini item indicating that a timer notice is to be performed.

Also,
"The above-mentioned" display representing the number "is" display of the number regarding the number of remaining operations "
After the display of the first display is started, after the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display, the first display to the second display There is a possibility of switching [for example, FIG. 272 (A1) to FIG. (A3)],
After the display of the first display is started, the second display can be started from the first display before the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display. there Ru when switching to the display [for example, FIG. 2 72 (B1) ~ FIG (B2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"Display of the first display is started while displaying the variation display of the decorative pattern ,
The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a first number [e.g., 10 or 5 etc.],
The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a second number [for example, 99],
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
The symbol variation display when the first display is started as the display representing the second number than the symbol fluctuation display when the first display is started as the display representing the first number it is, finally jackpot symbols aspect is confirmed displayed Ya hungry,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a third number [for example, 1],
The third number is a smaller number than the first number,
The symbol variation display when the first display is started as the display representing the third number rather than the symbol fluctuation display when the first display is started as the display representing the first number it is, finally jackpot symbols aspect is confirmed displayed Ya hungry,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first number is a number of 2 or more,
After the display of the first display representing the first number starts, after the long press operation of the first operation means is performed once, the second display from the first display [for example, when switched to the display of "continue"] there Ru [for example, Fig. 3 01 (A6)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The symbol variation display is displayed for one variation time selected from among the plurality of variation times ,
One of the plurality of types of fluctuation time is the first fluctuation time [eg, the shortest fluctuation time (eg, 5 seconds) of the fluctuation time of “D” shown in FIG. 27 (d)]. And
One of the plurality of types of fluctuation time is a second fluctuation time [for example, the fluctuation time of “A” (for example, 120 seconds) shown in FIG. 271 (d)],
The second fluctuation time is a fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time,
In the symbol fluctuation display displayed over the first fluctuation time, the display of the first display [for example, the display of the number in the notification area HZ] is started as a display showing the second number [for example, 99] If there is not the name that,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The first number [e.g., 10] wherein is initiated as a display representing a first display [for example, display the number of the notification area HZ] it is, rather most display is started friendliness,
A sixth display [e.g., "simulated series GET" shown in FIG. 3 (A10)] is displayed when the first operation means is operated a certain number of times in a certain button continuous hit effect . There is a case,
The sixth display and the second display [for example, “display of“ continuation ”in the notification area HZ”] are the same [for example, pseudo consecutive effect] advance notice display for the same notice target,
The first number is a smaller number than the number of times [eg, 30 times],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[ Light emitting means [for example, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542] ,
Third operation means [for example, the left and right keys of the cross key 181a]
Equipped with
The light amount adjustment display [eg, setting adjustment window SUW shown in FIG. 304 (A2) or the like] may be displayed on the display means,
The light amount adjustment display is a display indicating that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means is possible,
When the third operation means is operated in the state where the light amount adjustment display is displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means may be performed according to the operation [for example, FIG. 304 (A5) ] ,
Be performed operations of the third operating means in a state in which display the light amount adjustment is not displayed, the manipulation light amount adjustment is performed such have of the light emitting unit according to the example, FIG. 304 (C2) ] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"Speaker [e.g.
A third operation means [for example, the up and down keys of the cross key 181a]
There may be a case where a display for volume adjustment [for example, a setting adjustment window SUW shown in FIG. 304 (A2) or the like] is displayed on the display means,
The volume adjustment display is a display indicating that volume adjustment of the speaker is possible,
When the operation of the third operating means in a state in which display the volume control is displayed is performed, there is a case where volume control of the speaker in response to the operation is performed,
Be performed operations of the third operating means in a state in which display the volume control is not displayed, there Ru if volume control of the speaker is performed according to the operation [e.g., FIG. 304 (D3 )] ,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
When the operation of the first operating means in a certain state of the "state where the first display is displayed is performed, the first effect is Ru executed in response to the operation,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"An effect mode [e.g., look-ahead mode of Princess zones shown in FIG. 3 09 (D1)] is the first display can be displayed in,
Wherein a said second display in certain effect mode can be displayed,
The first effect is feasible in the certain effect mode,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“The above-mentioned first display is performed in a state where the certain reach effect is being performed by performing the operation of the first operation means while the certain reach effect is being performed. May be switched to start the display of the second display, “the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the certain reach effect is being performed, When the first display is switched and the display of the first preliminary announcement [for example, "large panel behavior" of the seventh aspect] is started in a state where a certain reach effect is being performed [for example, FIG. 298 (B2) to (B5), FIG. 299 (B2) to (B10)], and
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also,
"When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the" second variation display is displayed as described above, the first display is switched and the display of the second display is started. "May be performed" means that the first display is switched by performing the operation of the first operation means in a state in which the second variable display is displayed. In the case where the display of the advance notice display [for example, the “large panel behavior” of the seventh aspect] is started [for example, there are FIG. 272 (A1) to FIG. (A3)] ”.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],
Whether the big hit symbol form is finally displayed or the lost symbol form is finally displayed is the big hit judgment performed at the start of the symbol variation display [eg, the special feature shown in FIG. is determined by the FIG related lottery process,
The result of the big hit determination does not change depending on whether or not the first effect [for example, the big hit confirmed advance effect] is performed,
The big hit judgment is obtained when the game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game board [for example, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232] [for example, FIG. 2 62 (b) It is judged according to the result of the big hit lottery using the random number [for example, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for special figure determination] obtained in the prize determination process (step S209) shown in FIG .
The probability (hereinafter referred to as the "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is predetermined [for example, it is determined in the table for adjudication determination],
The big hit probability does not change depending on whether or not the first effect [for example, a big hit confirmed advance effect] is performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

The game console of the present invention which solves the above object is
And the operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
Multiple types of effects can be performed,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a big hit finalized effect ,
The said big hit finalization production is one production of the notice production,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number display representing a number in a display area of a part of the display area (hereinafter referred to as "a display area"),
The said number display is a display which is not the display by which a display is started as reach production,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the number indication is displayed, the number indication changes according to the operation of the operation means, or the number indication is switched to The notice display may be displayed in the display area.
The notice display is a display provided with a plurality of display modes,
One of the display modes of the plurality of types of display modes is a jackpot confirmation display mode representing a jackpot confirmation,
Even when the operation means is operated in the state where the preliminary announcement display is displayed, the display mode of the preliminary announcement display does not change according to the manipulation.
The big hit finalization effect is an effect different from the effect performed by the display means,
The big hit finalization effect may be executed while the advance notice of the big hit final display mode is displayed,
The display means can display a variation display of a decorative symbol,
In the variation display of the decorative symbol that loses without reach effect being performed, there are cases where the number display switches to the advance notice display according to the operation of the operation means, but the case changes to the advance display of the big hit confirmation display mode Not,
In the variation display of the decorative symbol which is a big hit when the reach production is performed, the number display is determined as the big hit according to the operation of the operation means even before or after the reach production is started. It may be switched to the notice display of the display mode,
It is characterized by

In the above description,
And "Working means [for example, a chance button 136, the second chance button 137, the transmission portion 191, the cross key 181a, OK button 181b, etc.],
Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two, fourth display means 208M ′, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
A game console equipped with
Multiple types of effects can be performed,
One of the effects of the plurality of types is a big hit finalized effect ,
The big hit finalization effect is one of the effects of the advance notice effect [for example, a changing effect to the seventh aspect of the logo character 224F, an effect that the logo character 224F moves, an effect movable means other than the logo character 224F ( For example, an effect such as a family crest product 224E) changing an aspect, an effect such as effect movable means (for example, a family crest object 224E, etc.) other than the logo object 224F operates, an effect such as a big hit decision warning sound output from the speaker 120 , The LED of the various lamps is one of the big hit finalization staging effect out of the effects such as changing the aspect],
The display means displays a number representing a number [eg, 99 in a notification area HZ, a notification area HZ ′], for example, a display area of a part of the display area (hereinafter referred to as “a display area”) ~ Or 99-0 etc.] can be displayed,
The said number display is a display which is not the display by which a display is started as reach production,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the number display is displayed, the number of the number display becomes a small number according to the operation of the operation means [eg according to one operation , When the number of “1” or “2 or more” decreases] and the number display changes, and a notice is displayed on the certain display area [eg, “question mark”, “Chance”, “continuation”, “SP” , “Large panel behavior”, “up”] are displayed [eg, FIG. 272 (A3), FIG. 272 (B2), FIG. 273 (B6), FIG. 277 (A6), FIG. 280 (A7), FIG. (A7), Figure 293 (A5), Figure 305 (A6), etc.],
The notice display is a display provided with a plurality of display modes,
The display mode of one of the plurality of types of display modes is a big hit finalized display mode [for example, the first hit of the big hit expectation of "big behavior" shown in FIG. 271 (b) represents "S"]. It is "large panel behavior" of seven modes],
Even when the operation means is operated in the state where the advance notice display is displayed, the display mode of the advance notice display does not change according to the operation [eg, FIG. 278 (A3) to FIG. 2 (A5) etc],
The big hit finalization effect is an effect different from the effect performed by the display means,
When the big hit determination effect is being executed in the state where the advance notice display of the big hit determination display mode is displayed [for example, the state shown in FIG. 287 (A7) to FIG. 288 (A36)] [for example, FIG. In the case of (A8)],
The display means can display a variation display of a decorative symbol,
In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol which loses without reach effect being performed, the number display switches to the notice display according to the operation of the operation means [for example, in the case of FIG. 273 (B6)] There is no case where it is switched to the advance notice display of the big hit finalized display mode [For example, No. 01],
In the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol which is a big hit when the reach effect is performed, even before the reach effect is started [for example, FIG. 287 (A7)] even after the start [for example, FIG. 299], The number display may be switched to the notice display of the big hit finalized display mode in accordance with the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by "
For it was also described.
Also,
The warning display displayed on "the certain display area, except displayed switched from the number of display is a display that does not appear,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also,
"The number display is a display of the number of remaining operations,
After the display of the number display starts, after the operation of the operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the number display, the number display may be switched to the advance display [for example, FIG. ) ~ Figure (A3)],
After the display of the number display is started, the number display may be switched to the advance display before the operation of the operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the number display [e.g. (B1) to the same figure (B2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also,
"The big hit finalization effect is an effect by the sound output of the effect sound output means [for example, the speaker 120],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also,
"The big hit finalization effect is the effect by the light emission of effect light emitting means [for example, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],
Whether the big hit symbol form is finally displayed or the lost symbol form is finally displayed is the big hit judgment performed at the start of the symbol variation display [eg, the special figure shown in FIG. 262 (b) Related lottery process],
The result of the big hit judgment does not change depending on whether or not the big hit finalization effect is performed,
The big hit judgment is obtained when the game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game board [for example, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232] [for example, FIG. 262 (b) It is determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using the random number [for example, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for special figure determination] obtained in the winning determination process (step S209) shown.
The probability (hereinafter referred to as the "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is predetermined [for example, it is determined in the table for adjudication determination],
The big hit probability does not change depending on whether or not the big hit finalization effect is performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about
In the above description,
[First operation means [eg, chance button 136, second chance button 137, transmitting portion 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, etc.],
Display means [for example, all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L to N Or two, fourth display means 208M ′, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
A game console equipped with
Multiple types of effects can be performed,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is one of the effects of the advance effect (hereinafter referred to as "first effect") [for example, the big hit finalized effect effect],
In some cases, the first display may be displayed in a display area [for example, the notification area HZ, the notification area HZ '] of the display areas in the display means,
A second display may be displayed in the certain display area,
The first display is a display representing a number [eg, 99-1 or 99-0, etc.],
When an operation [for example, one-shot single-shot operation, long press operation, etc.] of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display is performed according to the operation. There are cases where the number represented is a small number [for example, the number of “1” or “2 or more” decreases according to one operation],
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second display according to the operation [e.g. 272 (A3), FIG. 272 (B2), FIG. 277 (A6), FIG. 280 (A7), FIG. 287 (A7), FIG. 298 (A5), etc.],
Even when the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the second display is displayed, the display mode of the second display does not change according to the operation [for example, FIG. ) To the same figure (A6 etc.),
In the second display, a plurality of types of display modes [for example, no display, "question mark", "Chance", "continue", "SP", "large behavior", "up", the background color is the first mode ~ 7th mode or gray etc.] is prepared.
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be performed according to the operation [for example, FIG. 272 (A3) A changing effect to the seventh aspect of the logo character 224F shown in etc., an effect that the logo character 224F moves, an effect in which an effect movable means other than the logo character 224F (for example, a family crest character 224E, etc.) changes the aspect , Effects that effect movable means (for example, family crest objects 224E, etc.) other than logo character item 224F operates, effects that the big hit confirmation warning sound is output from the speaker 120, effects that the LED of various lamps changes aspect, etc.
The second display of the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first preview display”) [for example, “large screen behavior” of the seventh mode] may be displayed in the certain display area,
The first notice display is a display related to the first effect [eg, a display displayed simultaneously with the start of the first effect, or immediately before the start or immediately after the start].
In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed finalized [For example, the big hit expectation degree of "large board behavior" shown in FIG. 271 (b) is "S" Examples shown in FIG. 272 (A3) to FIG. (A5) and FIGS. 287 to 288],
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

The first preliminary announcement may be displayed outside the certain display area. For example, the notification area HZ 'shown in FIG. In addition, the first advance notice may be displayed out of the certain display area, or may be displayed at the center of the screen, or may be displayed on a different display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, It may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I, etc.) .

Also,
"One effect of the previous SL plurality of types of effect are another of the effect and the first effect of the announcement attraction (hereinafter, referred to as" second effect of ".) [E.g., pseudo continuous effect , Super reach production etc.] ,
When the first operation means is operated in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fifth display may be started according to the operation.
The fifth display is a display of one of the notice displays other than the fourth display [for example, the display of the conversation image CI2 of “I saw the swordsman” shown in FIG. 308 (C5) etc. , The display of the "continuation" conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 308 (C4), the pseudo consecutive symbols of continuation shown in FIG. 308 (F3), etc.]
The fifth display is a display of a notice about execution of the second effect [for example, a display displayed in a display area different from the certain display area (an area including a central portion in the vertical direction of the display screen)] ,
The second display of the second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area.
The second notice display is a notice of a notice related to the execution of the second effect other than the fifth display [for example, a display of “continuation”, a display of “SP”],
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second notice display.
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. The display of the display may start.
The second advance notice before the display of the fifth display is started by the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed. The display of the display may be started [for example, a combination of FIG. 272 (B2), FIG. 308 (B3) and the same diagram (C4) or the same diagram (C5)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
[One of the effects of the plurality of types is one other effect (hereinafter referred to as the “third effect”) different from the second effect [for example, the pseudo continuous effect] of the advance effects. [Eg, super reach production] ,
The second display in the third display mode before Kiaruru display area (hereinafter, referred to as "third predictive display".) [E.g., "SP"] may appear,
The third preliminary display is a preliminary display on the execution of the third effect,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the third advance display,
By operation of the first operating means is effected by Yu technique's, prior to execution of the third effect is started, you can begin the display of the third predictive display,
In a state [for example, the state of FIG. 294 (A5)] before the execution of the second effect is started when the third effect is performed after the second effect, the second In some cases, the display of the third preliminary announcement, not the preliminary announcement, may be started [eg, FIG. 294 (A5),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"Yu TECHNICAL said first operating means [e.g., Chance button 136] by persons that operation is performed, the second effect of the example, the pseudo-communication director] before the execution of the start, the It is possible to start the display of the fourth display [for example, the conversation image CI2 of "the sign of the message is ..."] [for example, FIG. 289 (A10),
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The timer notice can be displayed,
After the timer advance notice is displayed for a certain time [for example, "0:00"], a certain advance notice [for example, super reach effect] is displayed ,
By operation of the first operating means by Yu technique's are performed, prior to display of the timer notice display is started, the second display view of the example, "SP" in the notification area HZ Can be started [eg, FIG. 309 (A2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
“Display showing that the timer advance notice display is waiting to start display (hereinafter referred to as“ standby display ”) [for example,“ ready ”shown in FIG. 309 (A2)] can be displayed,
By operation of the first operating means by Yu technique's is performed before the than the display of the timer predictive display a displayed waiting display is started, the display of the second display Can be started [eg, FIG. 309 (A2)],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100],
Whether the big hit symbol form is finally displayed or the lost symbol form is finally displayed is the big hit judgment performed at the start of the symbol variation display [eg, the special figure shown in FIG. 262 (b) Related lottery process],
The result of the big hit determination does not change depending on whether or not the first effect [for example, the big hit confirmed advance effect] is performed,
The big hit judgment is obtained when the game ball enters the starting opening provided in the game board [for example, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232] [for example, FIG. 262 (b) It is determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using the random number [for example, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for special figure determination] obtained in the winning determination process (step S209) shown.
The probability (hereinafter referred to as the "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is predetermined [for example, it is determined in the table for adjudication determination],
The big hit probability does not change depending on whether or not the first effect [for example, a big hit confirmed advance effect] is performed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Claims (33)

The first operation means,
Display means,
A game console equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is one of the effects of the advance effect (hereinafter referred to as "first effect"),
The first display may be displayed in a display area of the display areas of the display means.
The second display may be displayed in the certain display area, and
The first display is a display representing a number,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the number represented by the first display may be small according to the operation. Yes,
When the first operation means is operated in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second display in response to the operation. Yes,
The display mode of the second display is configured not to change according to the operation even if the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the second display is displayed.
The second display is a display provided with a plurality of display modes,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the first effect may be executed in response to the operation,
The second display of the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area.
The first preliminary display is a display associated with the first effect,
In the symbol variation display in which the first effect is performed, the big hit symbol form is finally displayed in a final display,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
A third display may be displayed in a display area different from the certain display area of the display areas in the display means.
The third display is a display prompting the user to operate the first operation means,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may be started in response to the operation.
The fourth display is one of the notice displays,
The fourth display is a display that is not a big hit finalization display,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, execution of the first effect and the first effect are performed according to the operation. Configured so that both of the display of the fourth display may be started,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types is one other effect (hereinafter referred to as "second effect") different from the first effect of the advance effects,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fifth display may be started in response to the operation.
The fifth display is one of preview displays other than the fourth display,
The fifth display is a display of a notice regarding execution of the second effect,
The second display of the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice display”) may be displayed in the certain display area.
The second notice display is a notice of a notice related to the execution of the second effect, which is different from the fifth display,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the second notice display.
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed, the second notice is made before the execution of the second effect is started. It is configured to be able to start the display of the display,
The second advance notice before the display of the fifth display is started by the player performing the operation of the first operation means in the state where the first display is displayed. It is configured to be able to start the display of the display,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types is one other effect (hereinafter referred to as the “third effect”) different from the second effect of the preliminary effects.
The second display of the third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third advance notice display") may be displayed in the certain display area.
The third preliminary display is a preliminary display on the execution of the third effect,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the third preliminary display.
By the operation of the first operation means being performed by the player, the display of the third advance notice can be started before the execution of the third effect is started,
In a certain state before the execution of the second effect is started in the case where the third effect is performed after the second effect, not the second advance notice but the third advance notice The display may start,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 3 or 4,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where both the first display and the third display are displayed, execution of the first effect and the first effect are performed according to the operation. Configured so that both of the display of the fifth display may be started,
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 3 to 5,
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state in which both the first display and the third display are displayed, the second advance display is displayed according to the operation. It is configured that both of the display of the fifth display may be started,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 3 to 6,
By the operation of the first operation means being performed by the player, display of the fourth display can be started before execution of the second effect is started.
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 7, wherein
The number of kinds of display modes of the second display that may be displayed in a certain period in the variation display of a certain decorative symbol, and the other after the certain period in the variation display of the certain decorative symbol The number of types of display modes of the second display that may be displayed in a period is configured to be different
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein
The other period is a period after execution of a certain effect is started,
A game stand characterized by A game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 9, wherein:
The display of the third display may not be started before the display of the first display is started,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 10, wherein
Equipped with a second operating means,
When the operation of the second operation means is performed in the state where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display may be started in response to the operation. ,
Even if the operation of the second operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, the number represented by the first display may not be a small number according to the operation. Has been
Even when the operation of the second operation means is performed in the state where the first display is displayed, there is no case where the first display is switched to the first preliminary display in response to the operation. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The first display is configured to be able to be displayed up to the shaking display of the decorative symbol performed immediately before the finalizing display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 12, and
In accordance with the operation of the first operation means, it is configured to be able to execute a certain pass / fail judgment effect giving a notification indicating a pass / fail judgment result,
The certain success or failure judgment effect is an effect to be performed before the swing display,
The display of the first display is configured to end when at least the start of the execution of the certain judgment result if the certain judgment result is performed.
A game stand characterized by 14. A game stand according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The second display of the fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth advance notice display") may be displayed in the certain display area.
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the first display may be switched to the fourth notice display.
It is configured to be able to execute the first reach production,
It is configured to be able to execute the second reach production,
The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect has been performed is configured so that the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be finally determined display than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect is performed. ,
After notification indicating a loss is made in the second reach effect, the wipe effect display is configured to be displayed,
While the wipe effect display is displayed, the fourth notice display is configured to be displayable.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand of Claim 14, Comprising:
After the wipe effect display is displayed, it is configured to be able to display a revival jackpot effect display,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 15, wherein
The fourth preview display is not a display for previewing that the resurrection jackpot effect display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by 17. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
It is configured to be able to display the timer notice display.
After the timer advance notice is displayed to indicate a certain time, a certain advance notice is displayed.
By operating the first operation means by the player, display of the second display can be started before display of the timer advance display is started.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 17, wherein
It is configured to be able to display a display (hereinafter referred to as "standby display") indicating that the display of the timer advance notice display is waiting to start.
By the player performing the operation of the first operation means, the display of the second display is started during the display of the standby display and before the display of the timer advance display is started. Configured to be possible,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to claim 17 or 18,
It is configured to be able to display multiple types of pending icons.
The hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The second hold icon is a pre-read notice hold icon,
The third hold icon is a read-ahead notice hold icon different from the second hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon including an image,
The third hold icon is a hold icon including the certain image,
The second hold icon is a hold icon that does not include an indication that the display of the timer notice may be started.
The third hold icon is a hold icon including a display indicating that the display of the timer notice may be started.
A game stand characterized by 20. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The “display representing the number” according to claim 1 is “the display of the number regarding the number of remaining operations”,
After the display of the first display is started, after the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display, the first display to the second display Are configured to be able to
After the display of the first display is started, the second display can be started from the first display before the operation of the first operation means is performed the same number of times as the number represented by the first display. Configured to be able to switch to the display,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to claim 20, wherein
The display of the first display is configured to be started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a first number,
The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a second number,
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
The symbol variation display when the first display is started as the display representing the second number than the symbol fluctuation display when the first display is started as the display representing the first number In the end, the big hit symbol aspect is configured to be displayed more easily.
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 21, and
The first display is a display that may be started as a display representing a third number,
The third number is a smaller number than the first number,
The symbol variation display when the first display is started as the display representing the third number rather than the symbol fluctuation display when the first display is started as the display representing the first number In the end, the big hit symbol aspect is configured to be displayed more easily.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to claim 21 or 22,
The first number is a number of 2 or more,
After the display of the first display representing the first number starts, after the long press operation of the first operation means is performed once, the display is switched from the first display to the second display If configured to be,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 21 to 23, wherein
The pattern variation display is configured to be displayed over one variation time selected from among a plurality of variation times,
One of the plurality of types of fluctuation time is a first fluctuation time,
One of the plurality of types of fluctuation time is a second fluctuation time,
The second fluctuation time is a fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time,
In the symbol fluctuation display displayed over the first fluctuation time, the first display is configured not to be started as a display representing the second number,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 21 to 24, wherein
The first display started as the display representing the first number is configured to be most easily started.
A sixth display may be displayed when the first operation means is operated a certain number of times in a button continuous hit effect,
The sixth indication and the second indication are the same notice display as the notice object.
The first number is a smaller number than the predetermined number of times,
A game stand characterized by 26. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
Light emitting means,
Third operation means,
Equipped with
The light amount adjustment display may be displayed on the display means.
The light amount adjustment display is a display indicating that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means is possible,
When the third operation means is operated in a state where the light amount adjustment display is displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means may be performed according to the operation.
Even when the third operation means is operated in a state where the light amount adjustment display is not displayed, the light amount adjustment of the light emitting means is not performed according to the operation.
A game stand characterized by 26. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
A speaker,
Equipped with a third operating means,
The volume adjustment display may be displayed on the display means,
The volume adjustment display is a display indicating that volume adjustment of the speaker is possible,
When the operation of the third operation means is performed in the state where the volume adjustment display is displayed, the volume adjustment of the speaker may be performed in accordance with the operation.
Even if the operation of the third operation means is performed in a state where the volume adjustment display is not displayed, the volume adjustment of the speaker may be performed according to the operation.
A game stand characterized by 28. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
When the operation of the first operation means is performed in a certain state among the states in which the first display is displayed, the first effect is executed according to the operation. Yes,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The first display can be displayed in a certain rendering mode,
The second display can be displayed in the certain effect mode,
The first effect is configured to be executable in the certain effect mode,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The “display related to the first effect” according to claim 1 means “when the execution of the first effect is started according to the operation of the first operation means, the certain display area The display is started when
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The first effect is an effect by the sound output of the effect sound output means,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The first effect is an effect by the light emission of the effect light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by 34. A game console according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
Whether the jackpot symbol aspect is finally displayed or the lost symbol aspect is finally displayed is determined by the jackpot determination performed at the start of the symbol variation display,
The result of the big hit judgment does not change depending on whether or not the first effect is performed,
The big hit determination is configured to be determined according to the result of the big hit lottery using a random number acquired when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board,
The probability (hereinafter referred to as "big hit probability") determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is predetermined.
The big hit probability does not change depending on whether or not the first effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by